■M 


'ii'''-^"^mi'i>\\miii^'\\tiii\'^i\ 


IP 
ffill!li(iEiI!!!i!!f!liri!iltin 


n-nfi! 


JiiiiiUiiiiliiiiiilij 


1  [Jtl"; 

M 

■9 
Hi  I 

fi 

1' 

m 


LIBRARY 

OF  THE 

University  of  California. 


Class       ^,,r^y 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2008  witii  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/andreasfatesofapOOcynericli 


THE  ALBION  SERIES 

OF 

(Slngfo^^axon  anb  (\)Xii>b(t  ^n^fis^  (po^^^^ 

J.  W.  BRIGHT  AND  G.  L.  KITTREDGE 
GENERAL  EDITORS 


Ube  Hlbion  Series. 

This  series  will  comprise  the  most 
important  Anglo-Saxon  and  Middle 
English  poems  in  editions  designed  to 
meet  the  wants  of  both  the  scholar 
and  the  student.  Each  volume  will 
ordinarily  contain  a  single  poem, 
critically  edited,  and  provided  with 
an  introduction,  notes,  and  a  full 
glossary. 


ANDREAS 


AND 


THE    FATES    OF   THE   APOSTLES 


TWO  ANGLO-SAXON  NARRATIVE   POEMS 


Edited 
With  Introduction,  Notes,  and  Glossary 


GEORGE    PHILIP    KRAPP 

Lecturer  in  English  in  Columbia  University 


,-.r    T-Hf  \. 


GINN   &   COMPANY 

boston  .  NEW   YORK  •  CHICAGO  •  LONDON 
1906 


■^rn! 


fJERAL 


Copyright,  1905,  by 
GEORGE    PHILIP    KRAPP 


ALL   RIGHTS   RESERVED 
66.1 


GINN    >■<;    COMl'ANY  •   I'RO- 
PKIETOKS  •  BOSTON  ■  U.S.A. 


TO 

JAMES    WILSON    BRIGHT 

SCHOLAR    AND    GUIDE    OF    SCHOLARS 

THIS    VOLUME 

IS 

GRATEFULLY    DEDICATED 


154942 


PREFACE 

Although  editions  of  the  text  of  Andreas  have  been  made  from  time 
to  time,  no  comprehensive  treatment  of  the  poem  on  its  various  sides 
of  interest  has  appeared  since  Grimm  pubhshed  his  Amireas  unci  Eletie 
in  1840.  In  the  meantime  our  knowledge  of  the  language  and  the  litera- 
ture of  the  Anglo-Saxon  period  has  not  remained  stationary,  and  a  new 
endeavor  to  present  the  poem  in  its  proper  linguistic  and  historical  set- 
ting needs  no  apology.  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  is  here  edited  for  the 
first  time  in  its  entirety  and  with  explanatory  comment. 

The  text  of  both  jjoems  is  based  upon  Wiilker's  Codex  Vcrcellensis, 
a  photographic  reproduction  of  the  poetical  parts  of  the  Vercelli  Book, 
This  volume  is  referred  to  in  the  textual  notes  as  MS.  Where  the  read- 
ings of  the  reproduction  are  uncertain,  which  happens  but  rarely,  recourse 
has  been  had  to  the  Bibliothek  and  to  Napier's  collation  of  the  text  of 
the  Bibliothek  with  the  manuscript.  Readings  derived  from  either  of 
the  two  latter  sources  are  always  specifically  indicated.  In  the  Text  all 
departures  from  the  manuscript  readings  which  originate  with  the  pres- 
ent editor  are  printed  in  italics ;  readings  suggested  by  earlier  editors 
or  commentators  which  are  incorporated  into  the  text  are  printed  in 
Roman  type.  Additions  of  a  complete  word  or  of  several  words  are 
enclosed  within  square  brackets. 

With  the  exception  of  a  few  of  the  commoner  forms  of  the  pronoun, 
the  article,  and  the  conjunctions,  the  Glossary  is  intended  to  be  a  com- 
plete verbal  and  grammatical  index  to  both  poems.  No  space  has  been 
given,  in  the  Introduction,  to  a  formal  discussion  of  grammar  or  metre. 
What  little  of  special  importance  there  was  to  say  about  these  subjects 
has  been  said  in  the  Notes. 

The  editor  regrets  that  the  results  of  his  chapter  on  authorship,  in 
the  Introduction,  could  not  be  more  conclusive  than  they  are.  In  the 
end,  however,  the  chief  gain  in  such  discussions  consists  in  determining 
the  differences  and  similarities  of  various  works,  not  in  tagging  each 
with  an  author's  name.  The  present  discussion  will  have  attained  its 
end  if  it  carry  back  the  question  of  the  authorship  of  Andreas  to  a 


vi  PREFACE 

sounder  if  less  dogmatic  position  than  that  to  which  much  recent  the- 
orizing has  been  hurrying  it.  To  some  it  would  seem  a  simple  solution 
of  the  matter  to  combine  Andreas  and  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  into 
a  single  poem,  and  to  assign  this  poem  to  Cynewulf ;  but  reasons  why 
this  disposition  of  the  two  poems  cannot  be  permitted  will  be  found 
fully  discussed  in  the  Introduction.  The  importance,  however,  of  The 
Fates  of  the  Apostles  in  the  discussion  of  the  authorship  of  Andreas,  as 
well  as  the  general  similarity  of  the  poems  in  subject  matter,  rendered 
it  advisable  that  they  should  be  treated  together. 

To  the  various  friends  who  by  counsel  and  encouragement  have 
assisted  the  editor  in  the  preparation  of  this  volume  grateful  acknowl- 
edgments are  made,  especially  to  Professor  Hart  for  surrendering  the 
Andreas  into  less  skilful  and  experienced  hands  than  his  own  after  he 
had  made  considerable  collections  towards  an  edition  of  the  poem ;  to 
Dr.  Alma  Blount  for  the  use  of  her  thorough  and  scholarly  study  of  the 
language  and  vocabulary  of  Andreas ;  and  to  Professor  Fred.  Tupper,  Jr., 
for  his  comments  on  some  troublesome  passages  of  the  text.  Above 
all,  however,  the  editor  is  indebted  to  Professors  Bright  and  Kittredge, 
the  general  editors  of  the  series.  Whenever  it  was  possible  to  do  so, 
specific  acknowledgment  has  been  made  of  this  indebtedness,  but  in 
most  instances  the  editor  has  been  compelled  to  profit  by  their  gener- 
osity in  silence. 

r*  p  T<r 

Columbia  University  ^'  ^'  '^' 

October,  1905 


CONTENTS 

INTRODUCTION:  page 

I.  The  Manuscript  axd  Editions    ......      ix 

II.  Source  of  Andreas xxi 

III.  Source  of  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles      .        .         .  xxix 

IV.  Authorship  of  Andreas  and  The  Fates  of  the 

Apostles     .........         xxxiii 

V.  Poetic  Elaboration  in  Andreas li 

VI.  The  Legend  of  St.  Andrew lix 

Bibliography         ..........     Ixxiii 

Table  of  Abbreviations Ixxix 

TEXT  : 

I.  Andreas     ..........  i 

II.  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles 69 

NOTES: 

I.  Notes  on  Andreas    ........         75 

II.  Notes  ox  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles        .         .         .         .160 

GLOSSARY 173 


INTRODUCTION 


THE    MANUSCRIPT    AND    EDITIONS 

The  poems  Andreas  and  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  are  both  contained 
in  the  Vcrcelli  Book  or  Codex  Vercellensis.  This  famous  volume  is 
preserved  in  the  cathedral  library  at  Vercelli,  in  northern  Italy,  where 
it  has  probably  rested  for  some  six  or  seven  centuries.  Various  attempts 
have  been  made  to  explain  the  appearance  of  this  book,  made  up  entirely 
of  Anglo-Saxon  texts,  in  so  unexpected  a  place ;  and,  as  the  most  plau- 
sible of  the  theories  brought  forward  derives  much  of  its  probability  from 
the  presence  in  the  volume  of  a  poem  on  St.  Andrew,  the  discussion 
has  here  a  special  interest  and  importance. 

The  opinion  of  the  Italian  scholar  Gazzera,^  that  the  manuscript  was 
brought  to  Vercelli  by  John  Scotus  Erigena,  is  untenable,  since  John 
Scotus  died  about  the  year  875,  and  the  handwriting  of  the  manuscript 
is  indisputably  above  a  centur)^  later.  Equally  unfounded  is  Earle's  the- 
ory -  that  the  manuscript  was  taken  to  Vercelli  by  Cyneweard,  bishop  of 
Wells.  Cyneweard  is  mentioned  in  the  Chronicle  under  the  years  964 
and  975.  The  entry  for  the  latter  year  states  that  he  "left  Britain" 
{of  Brytene  geiuaf).  Although  this  phrase  differs  slightly  from  the  com- 
mon euphemistic  form  of  expression  for  recording  a  death,  it  seems 
probable  that  this  is  its  meaning,  since  no  further  mention  of  Cyne- 
weard is  made  in  the  Chronicle?  Even  though  the  phrase  be  taken 
literally,  however,  it  offers  no  foundation  for  Earle's  hypothesis  that 
Cyneweard  was  the  son  of  the  poet  Cynewulf,  that  he  was  himself  a 
poet  and  the  author  of  the  poetical  account  of  the  battle  of  Bnmanburh 
given  in  the  Chronicle  under  the  year  937,  and  that  in  the  year  975  he 

1  Anglia  V,  452.  2  fwo  of  the  Saxon  Chronicles,  p.  xxii. 

3  Cf.  Chronicle  (Parker  MS.)  790,  794,  870  (cf.  MS.  D),  and  961,  and  Earle  and 
Plummer,  Tiuo  Saxon  Chronicles  II,  163.  Cf.  also  Klaeber.  MLX.  XX,  32,  who 
calls  attention  to  the  amplifying  phrase  }>iirh  gecyndne  crccft. 


X  INTRODUCTION 

left  England,  carrying  with  him  a  volume  of  his  father's  poetry  which 
he  left  behind  him  in  his  journeyings  at  Vercelli. 

Much  more  plausible  is  Wiilker's  theory,^  based  upon  an  oral  tradition 
with  which  he  became  acquainted  at  the  time  of  his  visits  to  Vercelli 
(in  1881  and  1885),  to  the  effect  that  there  formerly  existed  at  Vercelli 
a  hospital  for  Anglo-Saxon  pilgrims  on  their  way  to  Rome.^  At  this 
hospital,  Wiilker  thinks,  a  library  of  religious  works  may  gradually  have 
collected,  and  among  them  may  have  been  the  volume  which  we  know 
as  the  Vercelli  Book.  Many  Anglo-Saxons  undoubtedly  passed  through 
Vercelli  on  their  way  to  Rome.  There  is  no  reason  to  believe,  however, 
that  they  established  a  hbrary  at  Vercelh,  and  this  explanation  of  the 
origin  of  the  Vercelli  Book  is  too  uncircumstantial  to  merit  more  than 
a  passing  notice. 

The  most  convincing  theory  of  the  histoiy  of  the  manuscript  was  first 
set  forth  in  an  unsigned  contribution  to  the  Quarterly  Review  iox  1845.^ 
The  principal  purpose  of  this  article  is  the  criticism  of  an  essay  by 
H.  G.  Knight,  The  Ecclesiastical  Architecture  of  Italy.  In  his  discussion 
of  the  churches  of  Italy,  Knight  had  called  attention  to  the  markedly 
English  characteristics  of  the  church  of  St.  Andrew  at  Vercelli.*  It  is 
in  the  endeavor  to  explain  the  presence  of  this  English  church  in  Italy 
that  the  reviewer  brings  forward  his  theory  to  account  for  the  presence 
of  the  Anglo-Saxon  manuscript  at  Vercelli.    His  words  are  as  follows  :  — 

If  the  traveller  inquires  who  was  the  founder  of  this  magnificent  structure 
[the  church  of  Sant'  Andrea  at  Vercelli],  he  will  hear  a  name  which  often 
occurs  in  the  pages  of  Matthew  Paris.  It  is  that  of  the  Legate,  Cardinal 
Wala,  or  Guala,  who  appears  as  an  influential  statesman  in  English  affairs 
during  the  eventful  period  of  the  last  years  of  John  and  the  accession  of 
Henry  III,  when  it  seemed  as  if  the  crown  of  England  might  be  transferred 
to  a  foreign  dynasty. 

Guala  Bicchiere,  born  of  a  distinguished  family,  was  raised  to  the  purple 
by  Innocent  III,  and  despatched  by  him  as  legate  to  France  in  1208.    In 

1  First  enounced  in  Anglia  V,  454,  note;  stated  again  in  Griaidr/ss,  p.  237,  in 
Cod.  Ver.,  p.  vi,  and  Anglia  XII,  629. 

2  This  tradition  probably  rests  on  the  fact  that  a  part  of  Guala's  foundation 
at  Vercelli  was  a  hospital  richly  endowed  with  money  obtained  from  Henry  III 
of  England.  This  hospital,  founded  in  1224,  is  still  in  existence.  See  Gesell 
Fels,  Ober-Iialietfi,  p.  702.  8  LXXV,  398-399. 

*  See  Freeman,  Historical  and  Arch  itecUiral  Sketches,  chiefly  Italian, ■^Y'-  -95-304i 
for  an  interesting  account  of  this  church. 


THE   MANUSCRIPT  AND   EDITIONS  xi 

121  5  the  cardinal  was  again  sent  to  France,  when  Innocent  used  his  influ- 
ence to  dissuade  Philip  the  Fair  from  attempting  the  concjuest  of  England. 
For  this  purpose  Guala  crossed  over  with  Louis,  the  better  to  oppose  him. 
In  England  Guala  strenuously  supported  John  with  all  his  influence,  cursing 
the  French  prince  and  Stephen  Langton  with  bell,  book,  and  candle. 

On  the  death  of  King  John,  Guala  took  an  active  part  in  the  great  council 
of  Gloucester,  and  mainly  assisted  in  establishing  the  claims  of  Henry  III. 
The  gratitude  of  the  new  monarch  bestowed  upon  Guala  much  preferment,  >( 

and  amongst  other  benefices,  the  priory  of  67.  Andrew  at  Chester.  The  ^  a^t^t^ 
object  of  his  mission  being  successfully  accomplished  by  the  cessation  of 
hostilities,  Guala  returned  to  his  native  city,  where  founding  a  Collegiate 
Church,  he  dedicated  the  new  structure  to  St.  Andrew,  doubtless  with  refer- 
ence to  his  English  benefice.  Guala  employed  as  his  architect  a  French 
ecclesiastic  Thomas,  who  afterwards  became  the  first  abbot  of  the  convent ;  ^ 
but  the  style  is  so  truly  English  that  it  is  impossible  to  doubt  that  the  work- 
ing drawings  were  brought  from  England.  Upon  this  point  the  fonn  of  the 
choir  is  conclusive. 

Guala,  mixed  as  he  must  have  been  with  various  classes  of  society  in 
England,  had  evidently  acquired  strong  English  feelings.  He  makes  many 
bequests  in  his  will  in  sterlings,  of  which  he  possessed  so  good  store.  Relics 
of  English  saints  were  bestowed  by  him  upon  his  foundation ;  and  a  most 
curious  and  important  collection  of  Anglo-Saxon  poetrj',  now  in  the  Cathedral 
library  in  Vercelli  —  and  of  which  the  chief  piece,  the  metrical  legend  of  St. 
Andrew,  is  about  to  be  published  by  Mr.  Kemble  —  results  without  doubt 
from  the  collection  which  Guala  had  formed. 


1  Fergusson,  History  of  ArcliitecUire  II,  199,  says  that  the  architect  of  the 
church  was  an  EngUshman,  named  Brig%vithe,  but  I  know  no  other  authority  for 
this  statement.  According  to  Street,  BricI;  and  Marble  in  the  Alidd/e  A}^es,  London, 
1874,  pp.  333-334,  in  the  gable  of  the  church  "is  the  Coronation  of  the  Blessed 
Virgin,  below  a  figure  kneeling  before  her,  and  said  to  represent  the  architect  of 
the  church,  who  died  in  1246,  being  Abbat  as  well  as  architect."  That  the  first 
abbot  of  the  church  was  a  Frenchman,  named  Thomas,  we  learn  from  Tiraboschi, 
Storia  della  Lett.  Ital.  IV,  464.  An  interesting  letter  is  preser\'ed  (Brewer,  Monit- 
vienta  Franciscana  I,  206)  from  Adam  Marsh  (d.  circa  1257)  to  his  friend  Thomas, 
abbot  of  St.  Andrews  at  Vercelli,  in  which  the  great  Oxford  scholar  urges  upon 
the  abbot  the  evils  of  non-residence.  Thomas  appears  to  have  held  a  benefice  in 
England,  though  no  mention  is  made  of  any  specific  place.  In  Frova's  life  of 
Guala  (p.  175),  also,  we  learn  that  it  was  to  Thomas  as  abbot  that  the  possessions 
of  the  church  of  St.  Andrew  at  Vercelli  were  consigned  at  the  death  of  Guala. 
A  late  and  unfounded  tradition  is  recorded  in  Michaud,  Biographie  Universelle, 
in  the  account  of  the  life  of  Guala.  to  the  effect  that  the  church  of  St.  Andrew  at 
Vercelli  was  built  after  the  plans  of  an  English  church  at  Winchester. 


xii  INTRODUCTION 

This  account  of  Guala  as  given  by  the  reviewer  was  corrected  in 
one  particular  by  Pauli/  who  pointed  out  that  the  benefice  bestowed 
upon  Guala  was  not  the  church  of  St.  Andrew  at  Chester,  but  that  of  St. 
Andrew  at  Chesterton  in  Cambridgeshire.  The  evidence  for  this  is  con- 
tained in  a  document,^  dated  January  22  in  the  2 2d  year  of  Henry  III 
(a.d.  1238),  which  confirms  a  grant  made  during  the  king's  minority 
"de  ecclesia  de  Cestreton,  in  diocesi  Elyensi  "  to  God  and  the  church 
of  Blessed  Andrew  of  Vercelli  at  the  instance  of  Cardinal  Guala,  then 
papal  legate  in  England.^ 

Some  further  circumstantial  evidence  in  support  of  the  theory  of  the 
reviewer  may  be  derived  from  several  of  the  statements  in  Frova's  life 
of  Guala.*    We  learn  from  this  source  that  Guala  was  a  scholar,  a  lover 

'^History  of  England,  Hamburg,  1853,  p.  512;  also  Gott.  gel.  Anzeigen,  1866, 
p.  1412.    See  Cook,  MLN.  IV,  212. 

2  Printed  in  the  Official  Correspoiidence  of  T/iotnas  Bekynton,  ed.  Williams,  Rolls 
Series,  London,  1872,  II,  344. 

3  The  document  is  preserved  in  Bekynton  in  a  copy  dated  October  20,  1420.  The 
advowson  of  the  church  aftei-wards  lapsed  to  Henry  VI  through  the  adhesion  of 
the  abbot  and  chapter  of  St.  Andrews  Vercellensis  to  the  antipope,  FeUx  V.  In 
1440  (see  Bekynton,  I,  Ixxix-lxxxi ;  II,  346  ff.)  it  was  assigned  to  King's  Hall, 
Cambridge,  and  afterwards  it  fell  to  Trinity  College,  Cambridge  (1546),  which 
college  succeeded  to  all  the  property  of  King's  Hall  (Bekynton,  I,  Ixxx).  The 
church  remains  at  present  in  the  possession  of  Trinity  College ;  its  annual  income 
in  the  first  half  of  the  fifteenth  century  was  variously  estimated  as  eighty  marks 
and  as  forty  pounds ;  it  now  amounts  to  between  six  hundred  and  seven  hundred 
pounds  sterling  (Bekynton,  I,  Ixxxi).  Britton  and  Brayley,  The  Bemdies  of  Eng- 
land W,  113,  mention  Chesterton  as  a  large  village  one  mile  north  of  Cambridge. 
The  church  is  described  as  "  ancient  and  spacious."  St.  Andrew  appears  to  have 
been  held  in  special  respect  in  Cambridgeshire.  Of  the  twenty-five  churches 
within  five  miles  of  Cambridge,  eight  are  consecrated  in  his  name,  Barnwell, 
Cherry  Hinton,  Chesterton,  Grantchester,  Histon,  Impington,  Oakington,  and 
Stapleford.  See  C/iiirc/ies  of  Cambridgeshire  and  the  Isle  of  Ely,  Cambridge 
Camden  Society,   1845,  P-  68. 

*  Gualae  Bicherii,  Presbyteri  Cardinalis  S.  Martini  in  motitibiis,  vita  et  gesta 
colleda  a  Philadelfo  Libico  [pseud,  of  Giuseppe  Frova],  Mediolani,  1767.  This 
volume  has  not  been  accessible  to  me.  It  was  used,  however,  by  the  author  of 
the  brief  biography  in  Michaud,  Biographie  Universelle,  and  by  Tiraboschi,  Storia 
delta  Lett.  Ital.  IV,  i,  iv,  in  the  preparation  of  his  longer  account  of  Guala.  Pro- 
fessor Cook,  in  "  Cardinal  Guala  and  the  Vercelli  Book,"  Uni7>ersity  of  California 
Library  Bulletin,  No.  10,  has  given  a  very  complete  summary  of  those  facts  in  the 
life  of  Guala  which  may  have  bearing  on  the  history  of  the  Vercelli  Book.  But 
Professor  Cook  knew  Frova's  life  of  Guala  only  through  the  medium  of  Tira- 
boschi.   I  am  indebted  to  Mr.  J.  A.   Herbert,  of  the  British  Museum,  for  kindly 


THE    MANUSCRIPT  AND   EDITIONS  xiii 

and  collector  of  books.  That  some  of  his  books  were  of  English  origin 
is  evident  from  the  fact  that  at  least  two  of  them  were  written  in  an 
English  character.^  One  is  described  -  as  follows  :  "  item  bibliotheca  de 
littera  Anglicana  qua  D.  Cardinalis  utebatur  in  capella."  *  The  second 
book  is  described  *  as  "Omeliarium  de  Capella  D.  Cardinalis  de  bona 
littera  Anglicana."  It  is  interesting  to  observe  that  these  two  manu- 
scripts in  English  script  are  distinguished  from  the  rest  as  being  more 
especially  the  personal  property  of  Cardinal  Guala.  At  his  death  in 
1227,  Guala  bequeathed  his  rich  collection  of  books  to  the  church 
which  he  had  founded  at  Vercelli.'' 

One  naturally  asks,  however,  what  use  Cardinal  Guala  could  have  for 
a  manuscript  written  in  a  language  which  was  hardly  intelligible  even 
to  an  Englishman  of  the  thirteenth  century.  To  this  Professor  Cook 
replies^  that  "Guala,  like  other  strong  natures  of  whom  we  are  told, 
may  have  been  somewhat  superstitious,  and  have  believed  that  his  life 
was  somehow  under  the  influence  of  St.  Andrew.  Not  only  did  he  leave 
England  on  or  about  St.  Andrew's  Day  [Matth.  Paris,  Chron.  Maj.  iii, 
42],  Pandulf  arriving  on  the  Monday  following,  but  King  John,  while 
under  Guala's  protection  as  legate,  won  a  victory  over  his  rebellious 
barons  at  Rochester  on  the  vigil  of  St.  Andrew,  perhaps  assisted  by  the 
saint  himself,  the  patron  of  that  city,  according  to  Higden  [Po/ych. 
7:  50)."    Some  such  superstitious  reverence  would  serve  to  account  for 

providing  me  with  transcripts  of  those  passages  of  Frova's  life,  particularly  of  the 
list  of  books  which  Guala  bequeathed  to  his  church  at  Vercelli,  which  are  impor- 
tant for  the  present  discussion. 

^  Only  one  is  mentioned  by  Tiraboschi,  IV,  124-125. 

-  Frova's  life,  p.  175. 

3  The  word  bibliotheca  is  used  here,  as  frequently  in  mediaeval  Latin  (see  Ducange, 
S.V.),  with  the  meaning  Bible.  That  the  phrase  de  littera  Anglicana  means  "in 
English  characters,"  i.e.  characters  such  as  the  English  scribes  used,  not  "  in  the 
English  language,"  is  evident  from  other  occurrences  of  the  phrase  in  Frova's 
list,  e.g.  de  littera  Parisiensi,  de  littera  Boloiiiensi,  de  littera  antiqiia,  etc.  For  other 
examples,  see  Ducange  s.v.  litem. 

■*  Frova's  life,  p.  175. 

^  A  list  of  the  books  which  he  gave  to  St.  Andrews  is  printed  in  Frova's  life, 
pp.  175-178,  from  an  inventory  made  at  the  time  of  Guala's  death.  The  books 
are  chiefly  copies  of  various  parts  of  the  Bible,  of  the  writings  of  Augustine, 
Gregory,  and  other  fathers,  decrees  of  various  councils  of  the  church,  and  similar 
works.  On  p.  176,  however,  a  work  of  Bede's  is  listed:  "  Item  Jeronimus  contra 
Jovinianum  et  Beda  super  actus  Apostolorum  in  uno  volumine." 

«  1.  c,  pp.  7-8. 


xiv  INTRODUCTION 

Guala  s  possession  and  preservation  of  an  Anglo-Saxon  volume  contain- 
ing a  poem  on  St.  Andrew.^ 

This  evidence,  circumstantial  and  indirect  as  it  is,  does  not  of  course 
show  conclusively  that  the  Vercelli  Book  was  brought  to  Italy  by 
Cardinal  Guala.  It  has,  however,  removed  a  great  deal  of  the  feeling 
of  strangeness  and  unexpectedness  at  the  presence  of  an  Anglo-Saxon 
manuscript  in  this  remote  Italian  library.  There  can,  indeed,  be  little 
doubt  that,  either  directly  or  indirectly  through  his  foundations  at  that 
place,  Cardinal  Guala  is  responsible  for  the  long  journey  of  the  manu- 
script from  its  home  in  England  to  its  present  resting-place  at  Vercelli. 

'  Like  the  Exeter  Book  the  Vercelli  Book  is  a  miscellany.  It  differs, 
however,  from  the  Exeter  Book,  which  contains  only  poetry,  in  that  it 
is  made  up  of  works  in  both  prose  and  verse.    The  handwriting  of  the 

manuscript  is  that  of  the  beginning  of  the  eleventh  century.^  Accord- 
ing to  Wulker  ^  at  least  two  and  possibly  three  different  hands  are  to  be 
distinguished  in  the  writing  of  the  manuscript.  Napier,*  however,  sees 
only  one  handwriting  in  the  volume.  So  far  as  one  can  judge  from  the 
photographic  reproduction  of  the  poetical  parts  of  the  manuscript,  the 
differences  in  handwriting  are  very  slight  and  such  as  might  occur  in 
the  writing  of  any  scribe  as  his  materials  —  parchment,  ink,  and  pen  — 
changed  from  time  to  time.  Furthermore,  in  its  mechanical  details  the 
book  is  made  on  a  single  plan,  the  same  system  of  punctuation  and 
sectional  division  being  maintained  throughout.  There  are  indications, 
also,  it  is  interesting  to  note,  that  the  form  in  which  the  manuscript  has 
come  down  to  us  is  that  in  which  it  left  the  hands  of  its  first  compiler.^ 

1  There  are  indications  that  sympathetic  relations  existed  between  Vercelli  and 
England  in  connection  with  a  monastery  school  which  grew  up  at  St.  Andrews. 
Englishmen  are  mentioned  as  being  present  at  this  school  in  122S  (Tiraboschi, 
IV,  82-83).  According  to  a  credible  tradition  Adam  Marsh  himself  was  at  one 
time  a  student  in  this  school  (Tiraboschi,  IV,  464). 

2  Wulker,  Cod.  Ver.,  p.  viii ;  see  also  Wiilker,  Grundriss,  pp.  237-243,  and 
Anglia,  V,  451-465  ;  Korting,  Grufidriss  z.  Gescli.  d.  eng.  Lit.,  p.  20.  Grimm,  p.  xlv, 
dates  the  writing  of  the  manuscript  a  century  too  early. 

3  Cod.  Ver.,  p.  vii ;    Grundriss,  p.  239. 
*  Hmipfs  Zs.  XXXIII,  67. 

^  These  indications  are  the  following :  Each  signature  of  the  volume  is  num- 
bered by  the  scribe,  in  figures  at  the  beginning  of  the  signature  and  in  letters  of 
the  alphabet  at  the  end.  In  the  case  of  several  signatures  where  the  numbering 
is  omitted,  the  numbering  of  the  following  signatures  indicates  that  they  were 
counted  in.    On  the  first  folio,  which  has  been  so  much  worn  and  injured  that 


THE    MANUSCRIPT   AND    EDITIONS  xv 

The  volume  contains  altogether  135  folios.  From  its  appearance  one 
might  infer  that  occasional  folios  had  been  cut  out ;  but,  as  Napier  has 
remarked,  the  presence  of  a  narrow  strip  of  parchment  between  two 
folios  is  not  always  proof  of  the  excision  of  a  folio.^    The  writing  is 

very  little  of  it  is  now  decipherable,  no  number  can  be  distinguished ;  but  at  the 
foot  of  fol.  9"^  is  written  the  letter  A,  an  indication  that  the  first  signature  of  the 
manuscript,  as  we  have  it,  was  the  first  signature  of  the  volume  as  it  was  planned. 
According  to  Wiilker  {Anglia  V,  454)  only  a  few  letters  are  legible  on  the  first 
folio ;  on  fol.  2=^,  however,  the  writing  is  quite  plain,  beginning  in  the  middle  of  a 
sentence  and  the  middle  of  a  word.  The  first  number,  a  prose  sermon,  extends  to 
the  bottom  of  fol.  9'^;  as  this  is  somewhat  longer  than  most  of  the  prose  works 
of  the  manuscript,  and  as  the  usual  number  of  folios  in  a  signature  is  eight  or 
nine,  we  may  suppose  that  the  first  folio  of  the  volume  as  it  now  stands  was  iis 
original  opening  folio.  At  the  top,  fol.  lo^"  is  numbered  two;  fol.  18'',  bottom, 
is  marked  B.  The  third  signature,  C,  comprises  fol.  19-^-24'';  the  fourth,  D,  fol. 
25-^-32'';  the  fifth,  E,  fol.  33^-40'';  the  sixth,  F,  fol.  ^i^-^y^\  the  seventh,  G,  fol. 
48-^-55'';  all  these  signatures  are  numbered  on  the  first  folio  and  lettered  on  the 
last.  The  eighth  signature,  which  is  neither  numbered  nor  lettered,  comprises  fol. 
56^-63^  The  ninth  signature  is  numbered  on  fol.  64^  and  lettered  I  on  fol.  yi^; 
the  tenth,  K,  comprises  fol.  ■j2^--j()^\  The  eleventh  signature  is  numbered  on  fol. 
8o"\  but  it  is  not  lettered  at  the  end.  The  twelfth  signature  is  numbered  on  fol. 
86="  and  lettered  M  on  fol.  91^.  The  thirteenth  signature,  N,  comprises  fol.  92*- 
98'';  the  fourteenth,  O,  fol.  99^-104'';  the  fifteenth,  P,  fol.  105^-1  ii^  The  six- 
teenth signature,  neither  numbered  nor  lettered,  comprises  fol.  112^-118'',  as  is 
proved  by  the  numbering  of  the  seventeenth  signature  on  fol.  119^  The  seven- 
teenth signature,  which  is  not  lettered  at  the  close,  comprises  only  two  folios,  fol. 
ii9='-i2o'';  this  short  signature  of  only  tw^o  leaves  was  made  because  the  scribe 
needed  only  two  leaves  to  finish  a  homily  which  closed  one  of  the  prose  sections 
of  the  volume.  On  fol.  121%  which  is  numbered  eighteen,  begins  the  poem  Elene  ; 
this  signature  is  lettered  S  on  fol.  128'',  showing  that  two  letters  designating  sig- 
natures sixteen  and  seventeen  must  be  counted  in  in  the  reckoning.  Signature 
nineteen,  numbered  on  fol.  129=',  extends,  according  to  \Viilker  {GruiiJriss,  p.  238), 
only  to  fol.  130'',  without  lettering;  signature  twenty,  according  to  Wiilker,  con- 
sists of  fol.  I3I*-I34^  with  neither  numbering  nor  lettering;  fol.  135,  with  which 
the  manuscript  ends,  Wiilker  thinks  is  tacked  on  to  the  end  of  the  last  signature. 
But  Napier  {Haicpfs  Zs.  XXXIII,  67)  has  pointed  out  that  Wiilker  is  in  error  in 
his  account  of  the  manuscript  from  fol.  129^  to  the  end.  The  nineteenth  signature, 
according  to  Napier,  comprises  fol.  129^-135'^;  fol.  135  is  not  tacked  on  to  the  end 
of  the  signature  but  is  the  corresponding  half  of  fol.  130.  It  is  probable  that  one 
folio,  the  corresponding  half  of  fol.  129,  has  been  lost  from  this  signature.  This 
lost  folio  would  make  the  nineteenth  a  signature  of  eight  folios,  which  is  the 
normal  number  in  the  manuscript. 

^  The  scribe  may  have  used  sheets  of  parchment  not  large  enough  to  double 
so  as  to  form  two  folios,  and  in  order  to  get  a  purchase  for  sewing  this  single-sheet 


XVI  INTRODUCTION 

plain  and  legible.  In  several  places,  however,  notably  on  fol.  36^  37'', 
38%  38^  39%  42^  and  54%  it  has  suffered  injury,  apparently  from  the 
application  of  some  acid.  The  only  passage  which  is  thereby  rendered 
completely  illegible  is  that  on  fol.  54^.  Since  the  handwriting  of  the 
manuscript  is  always  very  clear  and  distinct,  there  is  no  apparent  reason 
why  these  occasional  passages  should  have  been  treated  with  acids. 

The  prose  pieces  occupy  92  folios,  the  sections  in  verse  43  folios,  of 
the  volume.  The  following  is  a  complete  list  of  the  contents  of  the 
manuscript :  ^ 

(1)  Prose  sermon  on  the  Passion,  the  Entombment,  and  the  Descent  into 

Hell,  fol.  1^-9*. 

(2)  Sermon  on  the  Last  Judgment,  fol.  9^-12*. 

(3)  Sermon  on  the  Christian  virtues,  fol.  i2>^-i6*. 

(4)  Sermon  on  the  Last  Judgment,  including  a  dialogue  between  the  soul 

and  the  body,  fol.  i6t'-24b. 

(5)  Sermon  on  the  birth  of  Christ,  fol.  25'»-29^. 

(6)  Andreas,  fol.  29''-52^. 

(7)  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles,  fol.  5  2^-5  3b. 

(8)  Runic  passage,  containing  the  name  Cynwulf,  fol.  54^2 

(9)  Prose  sermon  on  the  miracles  preceding  Christ's  birth  and  the  Flight 

into  Eg}'pt,  fol.  54''-56\ 

(to)  Sen-non  against  extravagance  and  gluttony,  fol.  56^-59*. 

(11)  Sermon  on  the  Last  Judgment  and  the  punishments  of  Hell,  fol.  59^-6 1». 

(12)  Sermon  on  the  suddenness  of  death,  fol.  61^-65=^. 

(13)  Sermon  on  the  transitoriness  of  the  world  and  its  joys,  fol.  65^-71^. 

(14)  Three  sermons  for  the  i\\x&Q  ga7igdagas,  or  Rogation  Days,  fol.  ']\'^-']6^. 

(15)  Sermon  entitled  Larspel  to  swylcere  tide  siva  Jitan  wile,  fol.  76^-80^. 

(16)  Sermon  on  the  Judgment  Day,  fol.  8oi'-85t'. 

folio  in,  he  may  have  bent  over  the  inner  edge  of  the  folio,  which  would  then 
show  up  between  two  folios  as  a  narrow  strip.  This  Napier  takes  to  be  the  case 
after  fol.  29,  35,  38,  50,  and  53;  on  the  other  hand,  after  fol.  42  and  103  Napier 
thinks  a  folio  has  been  cut  out  of  the  volume.  Morley,  English  Writers  II,  195, 
amusingly  blunders  into  ascribing  the  composition  of  the  Vercelli  Book  to  Euse- 
bius,  and  says  that  leaves  were  torn  out  of  it,  "  often  from  among  the  poetry,  as 
precious  gifts  for  favored  persons."  But  Blume,  Iter  Italicum  I,  99-100,  from 
whom  Morley  evidently  derived  his  information,  makes  this  statement  not  with 
reference  to  our  codex,  but  with  reference  to  a  famous  manuscript  of  the  Gospels 
preserved  at  Vercelli.  Robinson,  Introduction  to  our  Early  English  Literature, 
pp.  211-212,  repeats  Morley's  mistake. 

1  As  given  by  Wiilker,  Anglia  V,  451-465,  and  Grundriss,  pp.  485-492. 

2  Unnoticed  by  Wiilker,  first  pointed  out  by  Napier,  Haupfs  Zs.  XXXIII,  70. 


THE    MANUSCRIPT  AND    EDITIONS  xvii 

(17)  Sermon  on  the  Epiphany,  fol.  Ss'^-go''. 

(18)  Sermon  on  the  Purification,  fol.  go''-94''. 

(19)  Sermon  on  St.  Martin,  fol.  94''-ioi\ 

(20)  Poetical  dialogue  between  the  .soul  and  the  body,  fol.  ioi''-io3'\ 

(21)  Fragment  of  a  sermon  in  verse  on  Psalm  XXVIII,  fol.  104"- 104''. 

(22)  Vision  of  the  Cross,  fol.  io4''-io6». 

(23)  Prose  homily,  fol.  106^'- 109''.^ 

(24)  Sermon  on  the  deadly  sins,  fol.  109''-!  12^*. 

(25)  Prose  homily,  fol.  Ii2»-ii6''.^ 

(26)  Sermon  on  the  Christian  virtues,  fol.  II6*'-I20^ 

(27)  Eiene,  fol.  I2i='-i33''. 

(28)  Prose  life  of  St.  Guthlac,  fol.  133''-! 35''. 

The  existence  of  the  Vercelli  Book  was  first  pointed  out  by  Dr. 
Friedrich  Blume,  a  German  law-professor  and  bibliographer.  In  1822 
and  1823  Dr,  Blume  made  a  tour  of  investigation  through  the  chief 
Italian  libraries,  the  first  purpose  of  which  was  the  acquisition  of 
material  for  the  study  of  the  sources  of  Roman  law.  In  the  course  of 
his  investigations,  however,  he  was  drawn  into  a  consideration  of  manu- 
scripts of  literary  as  well  as  those  of  legal  interest.  It  "was  during  his 
examination  of  the  manuscripts  of  the  cathedral  library  at  Vercelli,  from 
October  27  to  November  19,  1822,  that  he  discovered  the  Codex  Ver- 
cellensis.  On  his  return  to  Germany  he  published  an  account  of  his 
researches  in  Italy,  in  a  work  in  four  volumes  entitled  Iter  Italicuiti? 

The  account  of  our  codex  given  in  the  first  volume  is  very  brief; 
it  is  evident  that  Dr.  Blume  was  not  aware  of  the  importance  of  the 
manuscript  he  had  discovered.^  The  discovery  appears  to  have  aroused 
little  interest.  Aside  from  several  brief  notices  of  the  existence  of  the 
volume,''  practically  no  attention  was  paid  to  it  until  a  dozen  years  after 

1  No  title  or  description  of  the  content  of  numbers  23  and  25  is  given  by 
Wiilker. 

2  Vol.  I,  Berlin  and  Stettin,  1824;  Vol.  II,  Halle,  1827;  Vol.  Ill,  Halle,  1830; 
Vol.  IV,  Halle,  1836. 

3  He  gives  the  library  number  of  the  volume  as  Cod.  CXVII,  and  says  merely 
that  it  contains  "  Legenden  oder  Homilien  in  angelsaxischer  Sprache.  Dies  ist 
um  so  merkwiirdiger,  da  keine  Kapitular-bibliothek  in  Italien  andere  als  lateinische 
oder  italienische  Handschriften  enthalt;  selbst  griechische  finden  sich  nur  in 
Verona  und  vielleicht  in  Ravenna." 

*  By  Pertz,  who  follows  Blume,  in  Archiv  fiir  dltere  dcutsche  Geschichte  V, 
535  ff.,  Hannover,  1S24;  by  Blume  again,  in  Rlieinisches  Museum  fiir  Jurispru- 
detiz,  Jahrg.  1S32,  Gottingen,   1S33,  IV,  p.  234  ff.,  and  in  Bibliotheca  Librorum 


xviii  INTRODUCTION 

its  discovery.  In  the  fourth  volume  of  his  Iter  Italiciim,  p.  133,  Dr. 
Blume  returns  to  the  subject :  "  Das  angelsaxische  Homilarium  ist  vor 
kurzem  auf  Veranstaltung  englischer  Geschichtsforscher,  von  (dem  nun 
schon  verstorbenen)  Dr.  Maier  volstandig  abgeschrieben  worden ;  es 
haben  sich  vvichtige  angelsaxische  Lieder  darin  gefunden  (Jac.  Grimm)." 
From  this  passage  it  will  be  seen  that,  contrary  to  the  generally  accepted 
opinion/  the  first  transcript  of  the  Vercelli  Book  was  not  made  by  its 
discoverer,  who  indeed  seems  to  have  been  ill  prepared  for  such  a  task, 
but  by  one  who  has  received  slight  credit  for  a  very  meritorious  piece 
of  work. 

It  was  this  copy  of  the  manuscript  by  Dr.  Maier  that  furnished  the 
basis  for  the  first  printed  edition  of  the  text  of  any  part  of  the  manu- 
script. This  edition,  usually  referred  to  as  Appendix  B,  was  published 
under  the  direction  of  the  Record  Commission  of  Great  Britain,  in  the 
year  1836,  as  an  appendix  {Appendix  B)  to  a  Report  hy  Charles  Purton 
Cooper,  secretary  of  the  Record  Commission,  on  the  Foedera  of  Rymer. 
The  edition,  which  contains  only  a  bare  text  of  the  poetical  parts  of 
the  manuscript,  with  neither  introduction,  translation,  glossary,  notes 
(except  a  few  textual  emendations),  nor  account  of  the  attendant  cir- 
cumstances of  its  publication,  was  printed,  according  to  Kemble  (p.  v), 
under  the  direction  of  Thorpe.^  The  Report,  of  which  the  Appendices 
were  to  form  a  part,  was  never  made,  and  on  the  expiration  of  the 
Record  Commission  in  1837  the  Appendices  were  placed  in  store,  where 
they  remained  until  the  year  1869.  In  that  year  the  Master  of  the  Rolls 
directed  the  Appe^idices,  although  imperfect,  to  be  distributed  in  such 
a  manner  as  might  render  them  most  useful  for  literary  and  historical 
purposes.^ 

A  few  copies  of  Appendix  B  appear  to  have  got  abroad,  however,  at 
the  time  of  its  first  publication  in  1836.    Grimm,  who  apparently  had 

Manuscriptoriun  lialica,  Gottingen,  1834,  p.  6 ;  at  the  latter  place  Blume  gives  a 
transcription  of  a  few  lines  from  the  opening  of  the  homily  on  the  purification  of 
the  Virgin  (fol.  90^),  from  which  one  may  judge  that  his  comprehension  of  Anglo- 
Saxon  must  have  been  very  scanty.  For  this  passage,  and  the  above  references,  see 
Wiilker,  Gritndriss,  p.  240. 

1  Wiilker,  Grilndriss,  p.  420 ;  Kemble,  p.  v ;  for  fuller  references  see  my  note, 
MLN.  XVII,  1 71-172. 

2  Three  plates  are  given  reproducing  fol.  75'',  fol.  43''  (11.  1025-1060),  and  the 
large  capital  on  fol.  49^  (1.  1478). 

^  See  the  note  prefixed  to  the  volume  by  the  Master  of  the  Rolls. 


THE    MANUSCRIPT  AND    EDITIONS  xix 

seen  Dr.  Maier's  manuscript  copy  of  the  text,  was  greatly  disappointed 
at  the  inaccessibiUty  of  this  first  printed  edition.  It  was  not  until  1839 
that,  through  the  kindness  of  Lappenberg,  the  historian,  he  had  at  his 
disposal  a  copy  of  the  Appendix.  In  1840  appeared  his  edition  of 
Andreas  and  Elene,  which  he  characterizes  as,  after  Beowulf,  "  the 
oldest  and  most  instructive  examples  of  Anglo-Saxon  poetry."  ^  Grimm's 
edition  may  fairly  be  called  the  first  edition  of  any  portion  of  the 
manuscript.  His  texts  are  preceded  by  an  introduction  in  which 
there  is  a  discussion  of  the  sources,  the  date,  and  the  authorship  of 
the  two  poems  printed,  and  he  gives  numerous  elaborate  and  scholarly 
notes. 

Grimm's  edition  was  followed  by  Kemble's,  Part  I,  containing  ^wrt'^rrt^, 
appearing  in  1843,  and  Part  II,  containing  Elcne  and  the  minor  poems, 
including  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles,  appearing  in  1 846."'^  In  1858  appeared 
the  second  volume  of  Grein's  Bibliothek,  which  contains  The  Fates  of 
the  Apostles  and  Andreas.  In  the  preparation  of  his  edition  Grein  made 
use  of  Thorpe  (quoting  his  text  as  manuscript),  Grimm,  and  Kemble  ; 
neither  the  original  manuscript  nor  the  transcript  by  Dr.  Maier  was 
consulted  by  him.  First-hand  reference  to  the  manuscript  was  appar- 
ently not  made  again  for  many  years,  and  then  only  to  Elene?  But  in 
1 88 1,  and  again  in  1884,  Professor  Wiilker  visited  Vercelli  and  made  a 
new  and  careful  study  of  the  manuscript.  The  results  of  his  observa- 
tions appeared,  first,  in  a  description  of  the  prose  pieces  of  the  manu- 
script,* and,  second,  in  an  entirely  new  text  of  the  poetical  portions 
of  the  volume.^    In  the  meantime,  however,  Baskervill's  separate  edition 

1  P.  iv. 

2  A  brief  introduction  precedes  the  text,  but  nothing  is  added  to  Grimm's  dis- 
cussion of  the  poems.  Kemble's  text  is  also  derived  entirely  from  Grimm,  without 
reference  even  to  the  text  of  Appendix  B,  though  in  the  Preface,  p.  vii,  he  speaks 
of  making  use  of  the  labors  of  his  "  two  learned  friends  and  predecessors."  This  is 
proved  by  such  readings  as  1.  67,  where  Th.  reads  as  the  MS.  dwde,  Gm.  without 
remark  and  K.  dtrda;  1.  261,  Th.  as  MS.  se  &e  Mrs,  Gm.  without  remark  and  K. 
se  />irs;  1.  337,  Th.  as  MS.  &tirfan,  Gm.  dur/oii,  the  MS.  reading  in  the  note  given 
as  ditrfan ;  K.  without  remark  dnrfon.  K's  departures  from  Gm.  are  all  either 
individual  emendations  or  corrections  of  obvious  misprints,  e.g.,  1.  112,  Gm.  alysed, 
K.  alyse&\  1.  219,  Th.  and  Gm.  uiyrde&,  K.  7i'yr&e&. 

3  Cynewulf^ s  Eletie,  herausgegeben  von  Julius  Zupitza,  Berlin,  1877  (fourth 
edition,  1899). 

*  Anglia  V,  451  ff. 

5  Grein- Wiilker,  Bibl.  d.  angels.  Poesie  III,  i  ff.,  1888. 


XX  INTRODUCTION 

of  Andreas  had  appeared  in  1885.^  In  1889  Napier^  printed  a  colla- 
tion of  the  poetical  parts  of  the  manuscript,  pointing  out  at  the  same 
time  the  important  passage  on  fol.  54''  containing  the  name  Cynwulf, 
which  had  theretofore  remained  unnoticed.  Finally,  in  1894,  Wiilker^ 
made  the  original  of  the  poetical  parts  of  the  manuscript  accessible  to  all 
by  means  of  an  excellent  photographic  reproduction  of  those  sections.* 
Besides  the  complete  editions  of  the  poem,  extracts  from  Andreas  have 
also  appeared  in  various  reading-books.^ 

The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  was  first  printed  in  Appendix  B.^  It  was 
omitted  by  Grimm  in  his  edition  of  Andreas  and  Eletie,  but  was  included 
by  Kemble  in  his  edition  of  the  poetry  of  the  Vercelli  Book?  The  text 
appears  again  in  Grein's  edition,^  and  in  Wiilker's  revision  of  Grein.® 
The  passage  on  fol.  54''  {Ap.  96-122)  appears  in  none  of  these  editions.^" 

1  Baskervill  announced  his  text,  on  the  title-page,  as  based  on  the  manuscript. 
But  in  his  introduction,  pp.  v-vi,  we  are  told  that  the  new  manuscript  readings 
are  "  a  collation  of  the  manuscript  with  the  printed  text,"  made  by  Wiilker,  appar- 
ently iti  1 88 1,  on  the  basis  of  Grein's  text.  Besides  these  collations,  which  were 
entrusted  to  the  editor  for  use  in  the  preparation  of  his  edition,  Baskervill  used 
Grimm,  Kemble,  and  Grein,  but  not  Thorpe. 

2  Haupfs  Zs.  XXXIII,  66-73.  ^  Cod.  Ver.,  Leipzig,  1894. 

*  Although  the  poetical  parts  of  the  Vercelli  Book  have  all  been  printed  a 
number  of  times,  the  prose  pieces,  which  constitute  much  the  larger  half  of  the 
volume,  still  await  the  hand  of  the  editor.  An  edition  of  these  homilies  by  Pro- 
fessor Napier  is  among  the  announcements  of  the  Early  English  Text  Society. 

s  Ettmiiller,  Engla  and  Seaxna  Scopas,  pp.  148-156,  gives  a  passage  correspond- 
ing to  Grimm,  11.  1068-1606.  Theodor  Miiller's  Lesebuch,  a  work  which  was  never 
published  and  which  has  been  accessible  to  me  only  in  the  readings  from  it  recorded 
by  Wiilker,  contains  an  extract  from  Andreas  on  pp.  159-167.  Ebeling,  Attgel- 
sdchsisches  Lesehuch,  pp.  124-126,  gives  an  extract  corresponding  to  Grimm,  11. 
1 156-1258.  Ebeling's  text  is  an  exact  copy  of  Grimm's,  the  misprint  (1.  1174) 
ist  for  is  being  repeated  without  remark ;  his  notes  also  are  merely  abbreviated 
extracts  from  Grimm.  Cook's  extracts  in  A  First  Book  in  Old  English,  pp.  211- 
231,  correspond  to  Wiilker,  11.  235-536;  11.  818-825;  and  11.  831-874*. 

6  It  follows  Andreas  immediately,  but  has  this  separate  heading:  The  Fates  of 
the  Twelve  Apostles,  A  Fragment,  e  cod.  vercell. 

'  Kemble  uses  the  same  title  as  Appendix  B.  He  separates  the  poem  from 
Andreas,  placing  it  among  a  group  of  the  minor  poems  of  the  Vercelli  Book. 

^  With  the  title  Fata  Apostolorum.    It  immediately  precedes  Andreas. 

^  With  the  title  Die  Schicksale  der  Apostel.  It  is  placed  immediately  liiter  Andreas. 

^'^  It  is  given  by  Wiilker,  however,  Bild.  II,  566,  in  his  Nachtrage.  It  was  first 
printed  by  Napier,  Haupfs  Zs.  XXXIII,  70  ff.  A  literal  transcript  of  the  passage 
is  given  by  Wiilker,  Cod.  Ver.,  p.  viii. 


SOURCE    OF   ANDREAS  Xxi 

II 

SOURCE    OF    ANDREAS 

1  It  has  long  been  recognized  that  the  ultimate  source  of  Andreas  is 
the  Greek  Ilpalets  'AvSpeou  Kai  MarOeia  eh  rrjv  ttoXlv  twi/  av9pwTro(f)a-yo)v.^ 
None  of  the  extant  manuscripts  of  the  Ilpd^'ets,  however,  can  stand  as 
the  immediate  source  of  the  poem.^  It  is  necessary  to  assume,  there- 
fore, an  intermediate  version  or  versions,  differing  from  all  the  (jreek 
manuscripts.  That  this  hypothetical  intermediate  form  of  the  legend 
was  a  Latin  translation  of  the  Ilpd^u<;  —  a  theory  inherently  probable  in 
itself  —  is  capable  of  almost  certain  proof,  although  no  complete  Latin 
translation  has  been  discovered.^ 

The  chief  argument  for  the  former  existence  of  a  complete  Latin 
translation  of  the  Ilpd^eis  is  the  fact  that  we  have  preserved  to  us 
fragments  of  a  Latin  translation.  The  first  of  these  fragments  is  a 
passage  of  three  or  four  lines  inserted  in  the  body  of  the  text  of  one 
of  the  manuscripts  of  an  Anglo-Saxon  prose  version  of  the  legend  of 
St.  Andrew.*  This  passage,  with  the  corresponding  passage  from  the 
Ilpd^cis,  is  as  follows  : 

1  First  edited  by  Thilo,  Acia  SS.  Apostolorttm  Andreae  et  Maithiac,  Halle,  1S46; 
again  by  Tischendorf,  Acta  Aposioloritm  Apocrypha,  Leipzig,  1S51,  pp.  132-166; 
and  again  by  Bonnet,- ^c^a  Apostolorii?n  Apocrypha  post  Const.  Tischendorf  ed. 
Lipsius  et  Bonnet,  Vol.  I,  Part  2,  ed.  Max.  Bonnet,  pp.  65-116,  Leipzig,  1S98. 
Tischendorf's  text  has  been  translated  into  English  by  Alex.  Walker,  Atite-Xicene 
Christian  Library,  ed.  Roberts  and  Donaldson,  Vol.  XVI,  pp.  348-36S. 

2  As  shown  by  Lipsius,  I,  547  ;  Bourauel,  pp.  107-117. 

^  That  the  poem  was  derived  from  a  Latin  source  is  the  opinion  of  Lipsius, 
I,  547;  of  Ebert,  AUgejneine  Geschichte  III,  63;  of  Glode,  Anglia  IX,  274;  of 
Zupitza,  Hanpfs  Zs.  XXX,  175  ff. ;  and  of  many  others.  Ten  Brink,  Hist,  of  Eng. 
Lit.,  p.  58,  thinks  the  source  of  the  poem  was  a  Greek  text  of  the  Ilpdfeis,  which, 
he  says,  must  have  been  inaccessible  to  Cynewulf,  the  author  of  the  poem,  save 
through  the  help  of  learned  monks.  Bourauel,  pp.  1 16-1 17,  thinks  it  possible  that 
the  poet  may  have  used  both  Greek  and  Latin  versions  of  the  Ilpcileis. 

*  Preserved  in  two  MSS.,  MS.  19S  Corp.  Christ.  Col.,  Camb.,  and  the  MS.  of 
the  Blickling  Homilies,  preserved  at  Blickling  Hall  in  Norfolk.  The  legend  was 
first  edited  by  Goodwin,  The  Anglo-Saxon  Legends  of  St.  Andrew  and  St.  Veronica, 
Cambridge,  1851  ;  it  was  again  edited  by  Morris,  E.  E.  T.  S.  IV,  229-249.  A  third 
edition,  based  upon  new  readings  of  the  MSS.,  appeared  in  Bright's  Anglo-Saxon 
Reader,  New  York,  1894  (3d  ed.),  pp.  11 3-1 28.  According  to  A.  K.  Hardy,  Die 
Sprache  der  Blickling  Homilun,  p.  125,  the  collection  to  which  the  prose  legend 
belongs  was  of  northern  origin. 


xxii  INTRODUCTION 

Blickling  Homilies,    ed.    Morris,  ITpa^ets,  p.  69,  11.  14-17. 

p.  231.  Avacrras  8e  'AvS/aeas  rcu  tt^wi  ctto- 

Tunc    sanctus    Andreas    surgens  pvoero   eirl   t^v    6dXa(Tcrav   afia  tois 

mane  abiit  ad  mare  cum  discipuHs  ixaO-qToX':  avrov,  kol  KareXdwv  im  t6v 

suis  et  uidit  nauiculam  in  litore  et  atyiaAov  eiSev  TrXoidpiov  fxiKpov  kol  ctti 

intra  naue  sedentes  tres  uiros.^  to  TvXoidpiov  rpu'i   dvSpa<;   KaOe^op-i- 

vovs- 

The  corresponding  passage  in  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose  reads  as  follows  : 

Se  haliga  Andreas  \>a.  aras  on  mergen,  and  he  eode  to  \jxre  s^  mid  his 
discipulum,  and  he  geseah  scip  on  )>am  waro'Se  and  Ky  weras  on  J>am 
sittende.^ 

The  equivalent  passage  in  Andreas  is  11.  235-247, 

These  passages,  it  will  be  observed,  repeat  each  other  almost  word 
for  word.  The  only  variation  of  importance  is  that  navicidam,  which 
translates  the  Greek  -nXoidpiov  p.LKp6v,  appears  in  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose 
simply  as  sap,  in  Andreas,  however,  as  wldfcedme  scip,  1.  240.  But 
that  navicuiam  was  the  word  which  lay  before  the  homilist  we  may 
be  sure  from  his  phrase  medmiclum  scipe  (p.  116,  1.  5),  in  the  passage 
which  immediately  follows  the  lines  quoted.  The  phrase  of  Andreas  is 
to  be  regarded  as  nothing  more  than  a  poetic  heightening  of  the  lan- 
guage of  its  source.  Aside,  therefore,  from  the  inference  that  the  homi- 
list is  here  quoting  from  his  original,  nothing  can  be  determined  from 
the  comparison  of  these  short  passages. 

The  second  Latin  fragment  is  larger  and  more  important.  It  was 
discovered  by  Bonnet  at  Rome  in  a  palimpsest  of  the  eleventh  century,^ 
the  original  writing  of  which  had  not  been  entirely  destroyed.  The 
whole  of  it  is  printed  by  Bonnet  in  his  edition  of  the  Ilpa^ets,*  and  as 
the  passage  is  little  short  of  decisive  of  the  question  of  the  Latin 
source  of  Andreas  and  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose,  it  is  given  here,  in  a 

1  Goodwin,  p.  vii,  note,  thinks  that  this  passage  of  Latin  crept  into  the  Anglo- 
Saxon  text  through  inadvertence;  Zupitza,  Haupfs  Zs.  XXX,  181,  and  Forster, 
Ueber  die  Quellen  vott  Aelfrics  Horn.  Cath.,  p.  46,  look  upon  this,  as  on  all  similar 
passages,  as  an  intentional  learned  insertion  made  by  the  translator  from  the  lan- 
guage of  the  original  which  he  was  translating.  Zupitza's  explanation  is  the  more 
probable  one. 

2  Bright,  Reader,  p.  116,  11.  1-3. 

8  Cod.  Vallicell,  plut.  I,  tom.  Ill,  fol.  44^4*'- 

*  II,  I,  pp.  85-88.  A  part  of  the  passage  was  printed  by  Forster,  Herrig's  Archiv 
XCI,  202,  for  the  purpose  of  comparison  with  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose. 


SOURCE    OF    ANDREAS 


XXlll 


literal  transcript,  with  the  corresponding  section  of  the  npo^ets  beside  it.^ 
The  equivalent  passage  in  Andreas  is  11.  843-954. 


Cod.  Vallicell.  (Hpc^as,  p.  85, 
1.  14). 

doniae  .... 

doniae.  et  respexit  ad  discipulos 
et  uidit  eos  dormientem.  et  exci- 
tans  eos  dixit  eis :  Surgite  filii 
5  mei  et  uidete  et  cognoscite  miseri- 
cordiam  dei  que  facta  est  nobis 
et  scitote  quia  dominus  lesus 
Christus  nobiscum  erat  in  nauem 
et  non  cognouimus  eum  .... 

10   ...  .  .... 

....  nobis 

quas  homo  ad  tentandum  nos. 
nam  domine  lesu  Christe  intellegi 
tua  loquella  ....  ....  ide- 

15  (p.  86,  I.  i3)oque  non  te  minime 
recognoui.  Et  dixerunt  discipuli 
eius  ad  ipsum :  Domine  pater 
Andreas,  ne  speres  quia  nos  alii 
intellegimus  quicumque  loqueua- 

20  ris  in  mari.  translati  enim  sumus 
in  sommo  gramori,  et  ascenderunt 
aquilae  et  rapuerunt  animas  nos- 
tras et  du.xerunt  nos  in  paradysum 
quod    est   in    caelis,    et    uidimus 

25  mirabilia  magna,  et  uidimus 
dominum  nostrum  lesum  Chris- 
tum sedentem  in  throno  gloriae 
s.ae  et  omnes  angeli  circumstan- 
tem  .... 


3° 


.  et  uidemus 


Ilpa^eis  (Cap.  17,  p.  85,  1.  i). 
Kttt   6ta(Ta.ixtvo<i  etSev  t^v  ttvXtjv 

TVyS   TToAtW?     lK€LVr]<i  '       Kttt    TTCpi/^Ac- 

i/'a/u.evos  cTSev  tov?  fjui6r)Ta<;  uvtov 
KuOevoovras  ctti  ttjv  y^v,  Koi  Stv- 
5  TTVLcrev  avTOv<;  Xiywv  •  ' AvdaTrjTe 
TEKVLa  fiov,  Koi  yvMCTtcrde.  rrjv  fxtyd- 
Xr]v  oiKovo^ixiv  Tr]v  ycvofxivqv  rjiMv, 
Koi  fxaBtTf.  0T6  6  KvpLO<;  ^v  fi(.d' 
riixwv  iv  Tw  TrXoio)  /cat  ovk  tyvutfif-V 

10  avTov  •  fj.efefxopffxiicre.v  yap  euvTov 
(Dcnrep  Trpoiptvi  iv  tw  ttKolw  Kai 
eruTretvojcrev  cavrdv,  Kai  i<f)a.vr]  rj/xlv 
ws  dv9p(D7ro<;,  iKTrupd^oiv  tJ/z-Ss.  koi 
6    'Avopcas     iv    eavTw     yevayaevos 

15  eiTTfv  'EviyviDv  aov  Kvpu  rrjv 
KoXrjv  XaAiav,  dAA  ovk  i(f>avep(Dad<; 
fioi  £ttDTov,  Koi  8ta  TovTO  OVK  iyvu)- 
pLad  ere.  kol  dTroKpidevTc;  oi  pxidr)- 
Tat  avTOV  (.iTTOv  Trpos  avTov  "    IlaTfp 

20  'AvSpia,  fxr]  vofXL(rrf<;  on  eyvo/x€v  iv 
Tco  o"€  AaAetv  iv  tco  TrAotw  fxeT 
avTov  •      clXKva6r]fJi€V     inro     vttvov 

(3apv-(p.  86)TdTOV,   KOL  KaTTJXOov  €K 

Twv  ovpav^v  der 01  kul  rjpav  ras 
25  {j/v)^d<;  riiJLWV  Kai  djryjyayov  iv  Tto 
TrapaSeicro)  tu>  iv  tw  ovpavw,  xat 
flBofxcv  fxeydXa  davfid(na.  idtacrd- 
fiiOa  yap  tov  Kvptov  r]p.u)v  '\-q(TOVv 
KaBet,6jX€vov  ivrl  Opovov  B6tr]<;,  kol 
30  Trdvres  01  dyyeAot  ki'kAov  ires  avTov. 
iOeaadfieOa  Kai  'AfSpadp.  Kai  laaoK 
Koi  'IaKa)/3  Kai  Trdvras  Tovs  dyiovs, 


I  and  2.  Evidently  there  stood  here  some  fortn  of  the  name  Mermedonia.  — 
3.  dormientem  :  cf.  1.  28,  circumstantem  ;  1.  34,  dicentes.  —  12.  qMZS  for  quasi.  — 
19.  quaecumque  ? — 21.  sommo  gramori  y^r  somno  grauiori.  descenderunt  ?  — 
28.  Read  suae. 

1  The  readings  of  the  various  MSS.  of  the  Ilpciletj  are  not  given,  as  they  differ 
but  slightly  from  the  te.xt  printed. 


XXIV 


INTRODUCTION 


post  uos  .... 

unumquemque  .... 

et  audiuimus  dominum  lesum  di- 
35   centes  ad  angelos :  Audide  apos- 

tolos  meos  in  omnibus  que  p 

a  uobis.     Haec  sunt  que  (p.  87, 

1.  14)  uidimus  pater  Andreas,    et 

cum  nos  resuscitasti,  tunc  reddite 
40  sunt  animae  nostrae  in  corpore 
■    nostro. 


(Cap.  18).  Et  cum  haec  audis- 
set  sanctus  Andreandreas,  letus 
factus  est,  qui  digni  fuerant  dis- 

45  cipuli  eius  haec  mirabilia  uidere. 
Tunc  respiciens  sanctus  Andreas 
in  caelum  et  dixit :  Domine  mens 
lesu  Christe,  ego  enim  scio  quia 
non  est  longe  a  seruis  tuis.    unde 

50  obsecro  te  indulgeas  michi  in  unc 
locum.  Haec  dicentem  sanctum 
Andream  uenit  ad  eum  dominus 
lesus  Christus  in  effigia  pulcer- 
rimi   pueri  et  dixit  ei :  Gaudeas 

55  cum  tuis  discipulis.  Et  cum  ui- 
(p.  88,  1.  ii)disset  sanctum  An- 
dream, procidens  in  terra  adora- 
uit  eum  dicens :  Indulge  michi 
domine     lesu    Christe     quia    ut 

60  hominem  te  extimaui  in  mari  et 
ita  tibi  locutus  sum.  quid  enim 
pec.aui  domine  ut  non  te  michi 
manifestasti  in  mare  ?  Et  domi- 
nus lesus  ait  illi  :   Andreas,  nichil 


Kal  AavlB  aSwv  wBrjv  iv  Trj  Kiddpa 

avTov.     Koi    idcaaafxtBa    iKti  u/xas 

35    Tous  SaiScKa  aTroardAous  TrapeaTrj- 

/cdras    cvwTriov    tov    KvpLOV     rjfxwv 

'Irj(TOV    X.pL(TTOV,     Koi    f^UideV    VfJiWV 

dyycXoDS  SwScKa  kukAovvtos  v/xas, 
Koi  cKaoTOs  ayyeAos  oinadcv  eKo.- 
40  (TTOV  ifxojv  i(TTr)Kw<;,  Koi  rjcrav  ofxoioi 
v/xiov  Trj  tSca.  kol  rfKOvcra/xev  tov 
KvpLov  Ac'yovTos  Tois   dyycAots  ort 

AkOU£T€       TWV       OLTTOCrToXwV       KaTO. 

irdvTa  ocra  av  epcorwcriv  (p.  87) 
45  vfj.a<i.  TavTa  eicrtv  a  ctSa/xcv  iraTep 
'AvSpea  €cos  ov  Stwvtcras  ■;7/i.as  • 
Koi  ^veyKav  tols  ipv)(a^  ly/xwv  iv  T(2 
(Tdi/JMLTl  rjfiwv. 

(Cap.  1 8).  Tore  'AvS/aeas  olkov- 
50  (Tas  e^dpr]  ;(apav  fxtyaXi/jv  on  Karrj- 
$Lit)9r](rav  ot  jMidrjTaL  avTOv  ra 
OavfxdcrwL  ravra  Oedaaaaai.  /cat 
dvafi\iipa<i  'AvBpea<;  eh  tov  ovpavbv 
etTrev  ■  E/x<^av?^^t  ju.01  Kvpie  'Irjaov 
55  X.pLaT€'  eyo)  yap  yivoiCTKOi  on  ovk 
el  fJuoLKpav  d-rro  Toiv  o^wv  SovAwv. 
avyvijiprjcrov  jjlol  Kvpie  o  l-froLTqcra  • 
(!><;   yap   dvOpoiTrov  ae   Tedeapai   ev 

to!  TrAotO)  KOL   WS  dvdpWTTW  aOL  i>fJLL- 

60  AT^aa.  vvv  ovv  Kvpie  (f>av£p(i)0'ov 
p.01  (TeavTov  iv  to)  totto)  tovt<:^. 
Ta?ra  Sc  etTrdvros  tov  ^AvSpeov 
irapeylveTO  6  'Ir](Tov<;  Trpos  auTov, 
yevo/tevos     o/aoios      fiCKpta      Tratoio) 

65  (Lpaiordrw  eveioe'i.  koI  diroKpideL^ 
6  'Irjaov'i  eiirev  •  Xatpe  'AvSpea 
■fjfxeTepe.  'O  8e  'AvSpeas  Oeaadp.evo'i 
avTov  TrecTuiv  ctti  ttJv  yrjv  vpoaeKv- 
vrjarev   av-(p.  88)tov    Ae'ytov  •     2vy- 

70  )^wprj(T6v  fxoL  Kvpie  'Irjaov  Xpto-re* 
ws  yap   dvdpioTTov  ere   eioov   iv  Trj 


36.  petent  ?  —  43.  Tv'^air/ Andreas.  —  44.  J^ead  quiz.  —  47.   Omitet?  —  49.  A'w;/ 
es. —  56.  j^^aaf  sanctus  Andreas.  —  62.  AVa^/ peccaui. 


SOURCE   OF   ANDREAS 


65  michi  peccasti,  set  ideo  hoc  tibi 
fecit  quia  dissisti :  Non  possum 
proticere  in  triduo  in  anc  ciuitatc. 
Propterea  hoc  tibi  hostendi  qui 
potens    sum    et    omnia    possum 

70  facere  et  unicuique  aperire  sicut 
michi  placet,  et  nunc  surge,  in- 
gredere  in  ciuitatem  ad  Matheum 
fratrem  tuum  et  erue  eum  de  car- 
cere  et  omnes  qui  cum  eo  sunt 

75  peregrini.  ecce  enim  dico  tibi 
quia  multa  tormenta  tibi  habent 
inferre   isti   nequissimi  ut  carnes 


daXdxTcrrf  koll  w?  dvupwirw  wfxiXrjcrd 
aOL.  Tt  ovv  i(TTiv  o  Ti  rjfxdpTrjKa 
Kvpii  fjiov  'Irjaov,  ort  ovk  i<pavip(i>- 

75  (TCI?  /xot  aeiLVTOv  iv  ttj  daXdarrq  ; 
Kat  dTroKpiO(.l<;  6  'lr](rov<;  uvtv  tw 
AvSpiiy  Ou^  rfp.apTt<;,  aXXa  ravTa 
<joi  iTTOLrjcra  on  eiTras  •  Ov  Bvvrjcro- 
/xat   Tropi.v0yjvaL  eis   T-ijv  iroXiv  tUv 

80  dvdpo)Tro(fidy<ji)v  iv  Tpicnv  rjp.epuL'i. 
Kol  vTriBeu^d  (tol  otl  irdvTa  Ofvards 
clfjiL  Kul  CKarrTw  (fxiVT/vai  Kudu)<; 
(ioyXofxat.     vvv  ovv  dvddTa,  tiatXdi. 


TTpo<i   Mar^etav   £ts   T'qv  ttoXlv   kul 

tuas  in  plateas  ciuitatis  et  uicos       85   e^'ayaye    arrov    c/c    t^s    4>vXaKyj<; 

expurgant.   ita  sanguis  tuis  fluent  Kat  Travras  tovs  /act    avrov  6vTa<; 

80  in  terra  sicut  aqua,  ita  ut  ^eVovs-   iSovyap  {i7ro-(p.  8g)BeiKvvp.L 

aoL  'AvSpea  Trpo  Tov  elcreXOeiv  ae 
iv  Trj  TToAei  avTwv '  ivoeLiovrat  crot 
90  ^/^pets  TToAXas  kol  oetvas  koI  irrd- 
$ovaLV  crot  ^aadvois  Kat  crKOpirL- 
aovaiv  (TOV  ras  crdpKWi  iv  rats  TrAa- 
TCtat?  Kat  pvyaats  T»/s  TToAews  avToiv, 
Kat  TO  alp.d  aov  ptvau  im  riqv  yr\v 
95  wo-TTCp  vZuip  ■  d  p.r]  fjiovov  tov  ddvu- 
Tov  ov  BvvavTai  (tol  irapaa^yclv 

66.  Read  iGC\.  —  68.  Read  q\x\3i.  —  70.  apparere  ?  —  77.  at.'  —  79.  >?^a^/ expar- 
gunt  (i.e.  exsparguntyi^r  exspergent)  ?     Read  tuus  fluet. 

For  the  sake  of  convenience  in  comparison,  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose 
may  also  be  cited  here  : 

pa  se  mergen  geworden  wass,  \>z.  se  haliga  Andreas  licgende  waes 
beforan  Mamiadonia  ceastre,  and  his  discipul5s  I'cer  slSpende  wjeron 
mid  him ;  and  he  hie  avveahte,  and  cwaeS,  '  ArisaS  ge,  mine  beam,  and 
ongita-5  Codes  mildheortnesse  sio  is  nu  mid  us  geworden.  We  witon 
5  tet  iare  Drihten  mid  us  \va?s  on  ^am  scipe,  and  we  hine  ne  ongeaton ; 
he  hine  geeaSmedde  swa  steorreka,  and  he  hine  aeteowde  swa  man  us 
to  costienne.'  Se  halga  Andreas  ha  locode  t5  heofonum,  and  he  cwae'S, 
'MIn  Drihten  Hzelend  Crist,  ic  wat  I'a^t  bu  ne  eart  feor  fram  Hnum 
beowum,  and  ic  he  beheold  on  bam  scype,  and  ic  waes  to  )>e  sprecende 
10  swa  to  men.  Nu  bonne,  Drihten,  ic  be  bidde  ba^t  bii  me  be  onywe  on 
Hsse  stowe.'     pa  bis  gecweden  waes,  ba  Drihten  him  ^etywde  his  onsyne 


xxvi  INTRODUCTION 

on  (p.  119)  faegeres  cildes  hlwe,  and  him  to  cwae^,  'Andreas,  gefeoh 
mid  Hnum  discipulum.'  Se  halga  Andreas  \>a.  hine  gebaed  and  cwae'S, 
'  Forgif  me,  min  Drihten,  >aet  ic  to  \>e  sprecende  waes  swa  to  men ;  and 

15  wen  is  Yset  ic  gefirnode,  for  l^on  i>e  ic  I'e  ne  ongeat.'  Drihten  him  J>a  to 
cwae^,  '  Andreas,  nsnig  wuht  ]pu  gefirnodest,  ac  for  J^on  ic  swa  dyde,  for 
t>on  )>u  swa  cwSde  tet  i>u  hit  ne  meahtes  on  Srim  dagum  t-ider  geferan ; 
for  ton  ic  >e  swa  steowde,  for  J^on  ic  eom  mihtig  mid  worde  swa  eall  to 
donne,  and  anra  gehwilcum  t5  aeteowenne  swa  hwaet  swa  me  Ilea's.     Nu 

20  jjonne  arls,  and  ga  on  ^a  ceastre  to  Matheum  Knum  brewer,  and  laet  ^onne 
hine  of  J'Eere  ceastre,  and  ealle  ha  J>e  mid  him  syndon.  Eno  ic  \>e  gecyhe, 
Andreas,  for  hon  i>e  manega  tintrega  hie  I'e  on  bringa'S,  and  Hnne  llcha- 
man  geond  Hsse  ceastre  lonan  hie  tostenca)'  swa  baet  Hn  blod  flowS  ofer 
eorSan  swa  swa  Wceter.    To  deahe  hie  \>e  willalj  gelSdan,  ac  hi  ne  magon.^ 

An  examination  of  these  four  passages  shows,  first  of  all,  that  the 
Latin  is  almost  word  for  word  a  translation  of  the  Greek.  The  inference 
is  therefore  unavoidable  that  we  have  here  a  fragment  of  a  version 
which,  in  its  complete  form,  must  have  been  a  close  and  entire  transla- 
tion of  the  Ilpd$€t<;.  There  are,  however,  some  instructive  differences 
between  the  Latin  and  the  Greek.  In  the  first  place,  some  form  of  the 
name  Mermedonia  stood  at  least  twice  in  the  Latin  translation,  though 
it  appears  neither  in  the  corresponding  passage  of  the  Greek  nor  else- 
where in  that  version.  The  name  of  Andrew's  companion  in  the  Latin 
is  Matthew  (cf.  1.  72),  not  Matthias.^ 

The  phrase  iirl  Tr]v  yrjv,  1.  4,  is  omitted  in  the  Latin.  In  1.  66  the 
words  'Av8/3£a  rjixerepe  are  wanting  in  the  Latin  ;  in  their  stead,  however, 
the  Latin  has,  1.  55,  c'^/m  tiiis  discipulis,  which  is  found  in  none  of  the 
Greek  MSS.  In  1.  73  the  Latin  fragment  zA.di%  fratrem  tui/m,  in  1.  77 
isti  nequissimi,  neither  phrase  being  found  in  any  of  the  Greek  MSS. 

Comparing  the  Latin  now  with  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose,  it  will  be 
observed  that  the  Anglo-Saxon  has  omitted  a  connected  passage  of  the 
Latin,  11.  16-45,  ^^  which  the  vision  of  the  disciples  of  Andrew  is  related. 
This,  however,  as  further  comparison  of  the  prose  with  the  Greek  ver- 
sion and  Andreas  shows,  is  quite  in  keeping  with  the  usual  method  of 
the  Anglo-Saxon  prose  in  omitting  the  episodes  of  the  action.  In  matters 
of  detail  it  will  be  noted  that  Marmadonia  is  mentioned  twice  (the  first 

1  Bright,  Reader,  p.  118,  1.  14  —  p.  119,  1.  17. 

2  Of  the  nine  MSS.  of  the  n/odlets,  six  read  regularly  Matthias,  two  regularly 
Matthew,  and  one  varies  between  the  two  forms  of  the  name.  Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  xxi 
and  p.  65,  and  Lipsius,  II,  part  2,  p.  136. 


SOURCE   OF   ANDREAS  xxvii 

time  on  p.  ii8,  1.  lo,  just  preceding  the  opening  lines  of  the  passage 
quoted  ;  the  second  time,  in  the  passage  quoted,  1.  2)  as  it  is  in  the 

\Latin  fragment,  and,  significantly,  in  the  same  context  as  the  Latin. 
The  name  of  the  apostle  is  of  course  Matthew  in  the  Anglo-Saxon 
version.  The  phrase  iirl  rrjv  yrjv  is  omitted  in  the  Anglo-Saxon  as  it  is 
in  the  Latin.  Again,  in  1.  66,  'AvSpea  rifxerepe  has  no  equivalent  in  the 
Latin  or  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose.  In  1.  13  the  prose  adds  with  the' 
Latin  the  phrase  mid h'lnum  discipuluin,  which  is  wanting  in  the  Greek. 
In  1.  20  of  the  prose,  kiniim  breder  corresponds  to  the  Latin,  1.  73, 
fratretn  tiiuin.  Though  the  passages  available  for  comparison  are  very 
brief,  yet  the  evidence  shows  beyond  a  doubt  that  the  Anglo-Saxon 
prose  and  the  Latin  are  to  be  held  together  apart  from  the  Greek ;  and 
we  may  reasonably  suppose  that  if  the  whole  of  the  Latin  text  had  been 
preserved,  it  would  consistently  account  for  the  variations  of  the  Anglo- 
Saxon  prose  from  the  Ilpal^ets. 

[  As  is  to  be  expected  from  the  free  nature  of  verse,  the  agreements 
between  the  Latin  fragment  and  Andreas  are  less  striking  than  those 
between  the  Latin  and  the  prose.  The  most  important  parallels 
between  the  Latin  and  the  prose,  however,  are  also  found  in  the  verse. 
Thus,  1.  844,  Marmadonia  is  mentioned  in  the  same  context  as  in  the 
Latin  and  the  prose ;  it  is,  however,  mentioned  only  once  instead  of 
twice  as  in  the  other  two  versions.  The  name  of  the  apostle  is  again, 
throughout,  Matthew.  In  1.  914,  mid  has  toingedryht  coTxt%\)OX\6.?,  to  the 
Latin  1.  55,  and  Anglo-Saxon  prose  1.  13.  In  1.  940,  j>^r  h'm  bro6or  is 
corresponds  to  Latin  1.  73,  Anglo-Saxon  prose  1.  20.^  That  the  Anglo- 
Saxon  prose  could  not  have  been  the  source  of  the  poem  is  evident 

1  On  the  other  hand,  Andreas  differs  from  the  prose  and  the  Latin  in  the  fol- 
lowing details  :  in  1.  927  the  name  Achaia  occurs,  not  found  in  the  Greek  version 
at  all,  or  the  Latin  fragment  so  far  as  it  has  been  preserved,  or  in  the  correspond- 
ing passage  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose.  It  is  not  necessary  to  suppose,  however, 
that  the  name  must  have  stood  in  the  source  of  the  poem  at  this  place  ;  we  may 
allow  the  poet  sufificient  intelligence  to  have  remembered  it  from  its  earlier  occur- 
rence in  1.  169,  in  which  context  it  also  appears  in  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose.  In 
1.  847,  Geseh  he  J>3  on  greote  is  a  fairly  close  equivalent  of  iirl  ttjv  yrjv,  1.  4  of  the 
Greek,  a  phrase  omitted  in  the  Latin  and  the  prose.  Certain  phrases  contained  in 
the  Latin  and  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose  are  omitted  in  Atidreas :  e.g.  the  phrase  ad 
tetttandiim  710s,  1.  12  =  Greek  1.  13  =  Anglo-Saxon  prose  II.  6-7  ;  >ion  cogn<n'imits 
eiim,  1.  9  =  Greek  11.  9-10  =  Anglo-Saxon  prose  1.  5 ;  the  sentence  Doiniiie  .  .  . 
mart,  11.  17-20  =  Greek  11.  19-22,  a  part  of  the  connected  passage  omitted  by 
the  prose,  is  wanting  in  Andreas,  although  the  rest  of  the  passage  is  found  there. 


xxviii  INTRODUCTION 

from  the  fact  that  there  are  numerous  episodes  of  Andreas  which  are 
found  in  the  Il/aa^ets  but  are  omitted  in  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose.  It 
is  probable  that  the  original  of  Andreas  presented  readings  differing 
somewhat  from  those  of  the  original  of  the  prose  version  of  the  legend. 
The  prose  version  is  important,  however,  as  presenting,  in  approxi- 
mately complete  form,  those  readings  which  hold  Andreas  and  the 
prose  together  with  the  hypothetical  Latin  version,  otherwise  only  frag- 
mentarily  preserved.  For  further  detailed  comparison  of  Andreas  and 
the  Hpa^ets,  see  Bourauel,  pp.  74-85. 

This  argument  for  a  Latin  original  of  Andreas  may  be  strengthened 
by  evidence  of  a  somewhat  less  direct  character.  To  the  group  consist- 
ing of  Andreas,  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose,  and  the  Latin  fragments  repre- 
senting a  lost  Latin  original,  designated  by  Zupitza  ^  the  Western  group,, 
as  distinguished  from  the  Greek  or  Eastern  group,  belong  also  two  later 
redactions  of  the  legend.  The  first  of  these,  contained  in  the  pseudo- 
Abdias,'^  is  very  much  compressed,  the  greater  part  of  the  story  of  the 
anthropophagi  being  omitted.  Its  affinity  to  the  other  versions  of 
the  Western  group,  however,  is  attested  by  the  fact  that  Achaia  is 
mentioned  as  Andrew's  province,  and  Myrmidon  {Alyrmidoni  urln, 
Myrniidonem  civitatem,  apiid  Myrmidonem)  is  the  city  in  which 
Matthew  was  i^ade  prisoner.  The  name  of  the  apostle  is  always 
Matthew,  and  the  phrase  tiiutn  fratrem,  1.  73  of  the  Latin  fragment, 
fbund  also  in  the  two  Anglo-Saxon  versions  but  wanting  in  the  Greek, 
occurs  likewise  in  the  Abdias  :  ut  in  Myrmidonem  civitatem  matiiraret 
et fratrem  Mathaeum  de  sqiialore  carceris  erueret  monuit? 

The  second  of  the  later  adaptations  belonging  to  the  Western  group 
is  a  complete  but  very  free  Latin  manuscript  version  of  the  Greek, 
which  represents  a  different  form  of  the  legend  from  the  Latin  fragments 
printed  above.*  This  complete  Latin  version  is  so  free  that  according 
to  Forster  it  cannot  be  the  source  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose  form  of 
the  legend  ;  and,  according  to  Bonnet,  for  the  same  reason  it  affords 
Httle  help  in  the  construction  of  the  Greek  text.  It  agrees,  however, 
with  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose  (and  consequently  with  the  other  members 

1  Haupfs  Zs.  XXX,  175-185. 

2  Fabricius,  Lib.  Ill,  pp.  457-460.  ^  Fabricius,  III,  458. 

*  Cod.  Vaticanus  lat.  1274,  fol.  ii9'^-i6o^.  See  Forster,  Herriifs  Archiv  XCI, 
202  ff.,  and  Bonnet,  II,  i,  p.  xxi.  It  has  not  been  printed,  but  the  contents  are 
briefly  described  by  Forster. 


SOURCE  OF  THE   FATES   OF  THE  APOSTLES        xxix 

of  the  Western  group)  in  giving  the  name  of  the  apostle  as  Matthew, 
the  country  in  which  Andrew  was  teaching  as  Achaia,  and  the  name  of 
the  city  of  the  anthropophagi  as  Mirmidonia  {proinncta  or  urbs).  A 
fuller  report  of  the  contents  of  this  version  would  probably  show  further 
agreement  with  the  other  representatives  of  the  Western  group. 

Thus  there  exist  these  various  forms  of  the  legend,  held  together  by 
features,  common  to  all,  which  are  not  found  in  any  of  the  numerous 
manuscripts  of  the  Greek  version  of  the  legend.  As  these  versions  all 
originated  in  Western  Europe,  it  is  an  extremely  probable  inference 
that  there  once  existed  a  complete  Latin  translation  of  the  Greek  from 
which  the  versions  of  the  Western  group  were  derived.^ 


Ill 
SOURCE    OF    THE    FATES    OF    THE    APOSTLES 

No  immediate  source  for  77^1?  Fates  of  the  Apostles  has  been  dis- 
covered. In  the  short  personal  introduction  with  which  the  poem 
opens  the  author  speaks  of  gathering  his  materials  from  afar,^  and  in 
the  progress  of  the  narrative  he  refers  several  times  to  sources.^  These 
allusions  we  may  look  upon  as  hardly  more  than  conventional  poetic 
formute.  For  an  examination  of  the  type  of  narrative  to  which  this 
short  poem  belongs,  and  a  comparison  of  it  with  some  of  the  represen- 
tative examples  of  the  type,  lead  to  the  inference  that  the  author  has 
exaggerated  his  difficulty  in  arriving  at  the  information  contained  in 
his  poem.  Probably  but  a  single  version  of  what  was  in  his  day  a  well- 
known  form  of  composition  lay  before  him  as  he  wrote. 

1  On  the  other  hand,  the  Hst  of  the  Greek  or  Eastern  group  is  increased  by 
a  Syriac  version  (Wright,  Apocryphal  Acts  of  the  Apostles,  London,  1871,  Vol.  \, 
the  Syriac  text,  Vol.  II,  pp.  93-115,  an  English  translation),  an  Ethiopic  ver- 
sion (Malan,  Certamen  Apostolorutn,  London,  1871,  pp.  147-163;  cf.  Lipsius,  I, 
546  f.),  and  a  Coptic  version  (von  Lemm,  Koptische  apokryphe  Aposlelacteti,  I, 
pp.  148-166,  in  Melanges  Asiatiqiies,  Tom.  X,  Liv.  i,  St.  Petersburg,  1S90),  all  of 
which  are  fairly  close  adaptations  of  the  Ilpd^ets.  To  these  should  probably  be 
added  an  Old-Slavonic  version  cited  by  Harnack,  I,  905,  from  Novakovic  in 
Starine  VIII,  55-69;  this  version  has  not  been  accessible  to  me,  and  the  descrip- 
tion of  it  by  Harnack  is  too  brief  to  enable  one  to  determine  its  relation  to  the 
other  versions.  ^  LI.  1-2. 

3  LI.  23,  63,  70. 


XXX  INTRODUCTION 

As  early  as  the  fifth  century  complete  Hsts  of  the  Twelve  Apostles 
were  current,  held  together  by  brief  accounts  of  their  missions,  their 
sufferings,  and  the  places  of  their  death.  It  was  evidently  some  such 
list  as  this  that  the  poet  of  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  followed  in  the 
composition  of  his  poem.^  That  it  was  a  list  written  in  Latin  is  evident^ 
from  the  case  forms  of  the  proper  names  in  the  poem,  e.g.  Gearopolim, 
Albano,  Nero?ies.  But  it  has  also  been  shown  ^  that  none  of  the  extant 
versions  of  the  Latin  lists  is  the  single  source  of  the  poem.  All  the 
details  of  it,  however,  as  may  be  seen  from  the  following  extracts,  may 
be  derived,  with  but  one  exception,  from  the  martyrology  of  Bede  *  and 
from  the  Breviariinn  Apostolorum.^  Both  Bede  and  the  B>-eviariitin 
give  numerous  details  (omitted  in  the  analysis)  which  are  not  found  in 
The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  ;  but  the  poem,  with  the  one  exception  to  be 
noticed  later  and  a  few  passages  of  a  personal  character,  contains  nothing 
that  is  not  also  in  these  two  Latin  lists.  In  the  martyrology  of  Bede 
the  order  of  the  names  is  chronological,  the  notices  of  the  various 
apostles  being  thus  distributed  over  the  whole  calendar;  the  order  in 
the  Brevianiim,  as  compared  with  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles,  is  indi- 
cated by  the  numbers  prefixed  to  the  names. 

Bede's  Marty rologiiun.  Bremariia/!. 

Ill  Kalend.  Jul.   Romae  natale  .  .  .  1-2.  Simon   Petrus  .   .  .   Romam 

Petri  et  Pauli  .  .  .  sub  Nerone.  pervenit .  .  .  sub  Nerone  Caesare  .  .  . 

cruce   suspensus   est  .  .  .  Paulus  .  .  . 
sub  Nerone  eodem  die  quo  et  Petrus 
capita  truncatus. 
Prid.   Kalend.   Decemb.     In   civi-  3.  Andreas   .   .   .  praedicavit  per 

tate     Patras     provinciae     Achaiae,       Scythiam  et  Achaiam,  ibique  in  civi- 
natale  .  .  .  Andreae  .  .  .  Egea  pro-      tate  Patras  cruce  suspensus  occubuit 
consule    emittens    spiritum    perrexit      pridie  Kal.  Decembris. 
ad  Dominum. 

VI  Kalend.  Jan.    Natale  .  .  .  Joan-  5.  Joannes  .  .  .  dilectus   Domini, 

nis  .  .  .  quern  Dominus  Jesus  amavit      praedicator  Asiae  et  in  Epheso. 

^  For  a  discussion  of  the  origin  and  history  of  this  form  of  apocryphal  litera- 
ture, see  Lipsius,  I,  192  ff.  2  Sarrazin,  Anglia  XII,  381. 
^  Sarrazin,  Anglia  XII,  379-382  ;  Bourauel,  pp.  101-107. 

4  Migne,  Patrolog.  Lat.  XCIV,  col.  797  ff. 

5  Described  by  Lipsius  from  numerous  MSS.,  I,  211-212.  A  complete  text 
may  be  found  in  Gerbert,  Alomimetita  veteris  Lituigiae  Allevtaiiicac,  \']11.  It  is 
also  quoted  in  detail  by  Bourauel,  p.  loi  ff.,  from  whom  my  citations  are  made. 


SOURCE   OF  THE   FATES  OF  THE  APOSTLES        xxxi 


plurimum  .  .  .  rediit  Ephesum  .  .  . 
totas  Asiae  fundavit  rexitque  Eccle- 
sias  .  .  .  aetatis  autem  suae  nona- 
gesimo  nono  mortuus,  juxta  eandem 
urbem  est  sepultus. 

VIII  Kalend.  Aug.  Natale  .  .  . 
Jacobi  .  .  .  filii  Zebedaei.  In  Cilicia 
.  .  .  sub  Dagno  rege  .  .  .  martyrium 
capitis  obtruncatione  complevit. 

Kalend.  Maii.  Natale  .  .  .  Philippi 
at  Jacobi  .  .  .  Philippus  .  .  .  reversus 
est  ad  Asiam,  et  apud  Hierapolim 
dormivit  in  pace.  (For  James  see 
below.) 

IX  Kalend.  Septem.  Natale  .  .  . 
Bartholomaei  .  .  .  apud  Indiam  .  .  . 
praedicans,  vivus  a  barbaris  decoria- 
tus  est,  atque  jussu  regis  Astragis 
decollatus  .  .  . 

XII  Kalend.  Jan.  Natale  .  .  . 
Thomae  .  .  .  qui  Parthis  et  Medis 
.  .  .  praedicans,  passus  est  in  India. 


XI  Kalend.  Oct.  Natale  .  .  . 
Matthaei  .  .  .  qui  primus  in  Judaea 
Evangelium  .  .  .  Hebraeo  sennone 
conscripsit  .  .  .  apud  Aethiopiam 
praedicavit  .  .  .  missus  est  spicula- 
tor  ab  Hirtaco  rege,  qui  eum  gladio 
feriebat  efficiens  martyrem  Christi. 

Kalend.  Maii.  Jacobus  ...  qui  et 
frater  domini  legitur  .  .  .  ab  apostolis 
HierosoljTTiorum  episcopus  ordinatus 
est.  .  .  .  Hunc  scribae  et  pharisaei 
praecipitaverunt  de  pinna  templi, 
fullonis  in  cerebro  percussus  fuste 
occubuit. 

V  Kalend.  Novemb.  Natale  .  .  . 
Simonis  Chananaei,  qui  et  Zelotes 
scribitur,  et  Thadaei,  qui  etiam  Judas 


4.  Jacobus  .  .  .  filius  Zebedaei, 
frater  Joannis.  Hie  .  .  .  sub  Herode 
gladio  caesus  occubuit. 

7.  Philippus  .  .  .  Gallis  praedicavit 
Christum  :  deinde  in  Hierapoli  Phry- 
giae  provinciae  crucifixus  et  lapida- 
tus  obiit  .  .  . 

9.  Bartholomaeus  apostolus  .  .  . 
ad  ultimum  in  Albano  maioris  Ar- 
meniae  urbe  .  .  .  per  iussum  regis 
Astryagis  decoUatur,  sicque  terra 
conditur  IX  Kal.  Sept. 

6.  Thomas  .  .  .  Parthis  et  Medis 
praedicator  ...  ad  orientalem  pla- 
gam.  Lancea  .  .  .  ibi  transfixus  oc- 
cubuit in  Calaminice,  Indiae  civitate, 
ibi  sepultus  est  in  honore  XII  Kal. 
Jan. 

10.  Matthaeus  apost.  et  evang.  .  . . 
primum  quidem  in  Judaea  evangeli- 
zavit,  postmodum  in  Macedonia ;  et 
passus  in  Persida  requiescit  in  mon- 
tibus  Portorum,  XI  Kal.  Oct. 


8.  Jacobus,  frater  Domini  Hiero- 
soljTTiorum  primus  Episcopus,  .  .  . 
de  templo  a  Judaeis  praecipitatur, 
ibique  .  .  .  humatur. 


■  11-12.  Simon  Zelotes  .  .  .  accepit 
Aeg}'pti  principatum  .  .  .  cathedram 
dicitur  tenuisse  HierosoljTnorum  .  .  . 


xxxii  INTRODUCTION 

Jacobi   legitur,    et    alibi    appellatur  meruit  sub  Adriano  per  crucem  sus- 

Lebbaeus  .  .  .  Thadaeus  apud  Meso-  tinere  martyrii  passionem.     Jacet  in 

potamiam,  Simon  vero  apud  Aegyp-  Portoforo.     Judas  ...  in  Mesopota- 

tum  traditur  praedicasse  :  inde  simul  mia  atque  in  interioribus  Ponti  prae- 

Persidam  ingressi  .  .  .  martyrium  ibi  dicavit :   sepultus  est  in  Merito  Ar- 

. . .  beato  certamine  consummaverunt.  meniae  urbe. 

A  comparison  of  these  passages  from  Bede's  Alartyrologium  and  the 
Breviarium  with  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  will  show  that  all  the  inci- 
dents of  the  poem  which  relate  to  the  various  apostles  might  have  been 
derived  from  Bede,  except  the  account  of  the  death  of  the  fifth  apostle, 
James,  the  brother  of  John,  which  agrees  with  the  account  of  the  Bre- 
viarium} and  the  allusion  to  the  awakening  of  Gad,  in  the  notice  of  the 
eighth  apostle,  Thomas,  an  incident  mentioned  neither  in  Bede  nor  the 
Breviarium.  It  will  be  observed,  also,  that  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles 
agrees  frequently  with  Bede  when  Bede  differs  from  the  Breviarium. 
It  seems  extremely  probable,  therefore,  that  the  author  of  The  Fates 
of  the  Apostles  had  before  him  not,  presumably,  Bede's  Martyrologium, 
but  the  list  or  lists  which  Bede  used  in  the  preparation  of  his  Martyro- 
logium.  The  items  of  these  lists  were  probably  arranged  not  as  they  are 
in  Bede,  according  to  the  calendar,  but  somewhat  as  they  are  presented 
in  the  poem  and  the  Breviarium. 

The  one  important  addition  of  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles,  the  allusion 
to  the  awakening  of  Gad,  may  have  been  in  the  common  sources  of 
Bede  and  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles,  or,  more  likely,  it  may  have  been 
added  from  the  author's  own  stock  of  information.  Its  ultimate  origin 
is  the  longer  apocryphal  narrative  of  the  Acts  of  Thomas,  the  npo^ets 
®(i)fia.,^  one  of  the  group  of  apocryphal  narratives  from  which  the  lists 
of  the  apostles  were  originally  made. 

The  poem  cannot  have  had  any  of  the  practical  purpose  of  the  Martyro- 
logium  or  Breviarium,  or  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  Menologium^  since  it  gives 
none  of  the  dates  of  the  feasts  of  the  various  apostles.  The  motive  which 
inspired  its  composition  was,  therefore,  purely  literary  and  devotional. 

^  See  11.  33''-37^,  note,  for  the  source  of  the  account  of  the  death  of  this  James. 

2  Tischendorf,  Ada  Apost.  Apoc,  p.  190  ff. ;  Bonnet,  Part  2,  Vol.  II.,  pp.  99-287. 
The  story  of  Gad  is  mentioned  in  the  account  of  Thomas  given  in  the  Old  English 
Martyrology,  ed.  Herzfeld,  E.  E.  T.  S.,  CXVI,  220;  but  the  name  Gad  does  not 
occur,  nor  is  the  phrasing  of  the  narrative  at  all  similar  to  that  of  The  Fates  of  the 
Apostles.    Cf.  also  Lipsius,  I,  253. 

3  See  Imelmann,  Das  alteitglische  Menologiiivi,  pp.  38-40. 


AUTHORSHIP   OF  THE   POEMS  xxxiii 

IV 

AUTHORSHIP    OF    ANDREAS   AND    THE    FATES    OF    THE 

APOSTLES 

No  Anglo-Saxon  poem  has  been  the  subject  of  more  widely  divergent 
discussion  with  respect  to  authorship  than  Andreas.  The  earlier  critics 
generally  assigned  the  poem,  without  much  hesitation  but  on  very 
insufficient  grounds,  to  Cynewulf.  Thus  Grimm  ^  (1840)  thought  first 
that  Andreas  and  Elene  were  by  the  same  author,  since  they  are  pre- 
served in  the  same  manuscript,  are  similar  in  spirit  and  contents,  and 
have  similar  characteristics  of  language.  He  adds  later,  however,  that 
it  is  at  most  only  possible,  not  highly  probable,  that  the  j^oems  are  from 
the  same  hand.  If  Andreas  is  not  to  be  assigned  to  the  author  of  Elene, 
he  inclines  toward  the  alternative  opinion  that  it  was  composed  by  Aid- 
helm.  Kemble  ^  (1843)  speaks  more  dogmatically  than  Grimm  :  "There 
cannot  be  a  doubt  that  this  Cynewulf  [who  signs  his  name  to  EIene'\ 
was  the  author  of  the  poem  Elene,  probably  of  all  the  rest  [of  the 
poems  in  the  Vercelli  book]  and  those  likewise  which  occur  in  the 
other  collection  [the  Exeter  book],  and  it  becomes  a  matter  of  much 
interest  to  decide  who  he  was."  He  fixes  upon  Cynewulf,  abbot  of 
Peterborough  (d.  1014),  as  most  probably  the  author.^ 

1  P.  1  ff.  2  p.  viii. 

3  Thorpe  (1844),  Ho7nilies  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  Church,  The  First  Part,  contain- 
ing the  Serviones  Catholici  or  Homilies  of  /Elfric  I,  622,  repeats  Kemble's  opinion. 
Ettmiiller  (1847,  1850),  Handhtich  I,  132  ff.,  Engla  and  Seaxna  Scopas,  p.  xi,  assigns 
Andreas  with  probability  to  the  same  author  as  Elene,  basing  his  opinion  on  the 
similarity  of  language  between  the  two  poems.  Dietrich  (1853),  Haitpfs  Zs.  XI, 
210,  assigns  Andreas  tentatively  to  Cynewulf.  In  a  second  study,  Kynewulfi 
Poetae  Aetas,  Marburg,  i860,  p.  5,  after  commenting  on  Grimm's  list  of  parallels  and 
differences  between  Andreas  and  Elene,  he  endeavors  to  show  that  by  bringing  into 
the  discussion  other  poems  of  Cynewulf's,  as  Juliana  and  Christ,  the  differences 
are  explained  and  Cynewulf's  authorship  of  Afidreas  is  confirmed.  Rieger  (1869), 
Zacher^s  Zs.  I,  319,  follows  Dietrich  in  assigning  the  longer  poems  of  the  Exeter 
and  Vercelli  manuscripts  to  Cynewulf.  Sweet  (1871),  in  Warton,  Hist,  of  Eng. 
Poet>-y  II,  16,  assigns  A>idrcas,  together  with  numerous  other  pieces,  to  Cynewulf. 
He  thinks  it  most  probable  that  the  conclusion  of  Andreas  is  wanting  and  that, 
in  its  complete  state,  it  contained  an  epilogue  similar  to  that  in  Elene.  The  two 
poems  are  by  the  same  author,  he  concludes,  "from  their  marked  resemblance 
of  language  and  style."  Grein  (1874),  Ktirzgefasste  angels.  Grant.,  Kassel,  1880 
(published  from   lectures   delivered   in    1874),   p.    12,   assigns  .Andreas,  Juliana, 


xxxiv  INTRODUCTION 

The  first  detailed  attempt  to  establish  the  authorship  of  Andreas 
was  Fritzsche's  ^  (1879).  Fritzsche  studied  the  poem  from  various 
points  of  view:  (i)  its  relation  to  its  source;  (2)  the  nature  of  the 
subject  matter,  which  he  takes  to  be  more  legendary  and  marvelous 
than  one  would  expect  in  Cynewulf;  (3)  the  metre;  (4)  style  and 
language  ;  (5)  vocabulary;  (6)  parallelisms  between  Andreas  and  other 
Anglo-Saxon  poems.  His  conclusions  are  (p.  57)  that  the  author  of 
Andreas  modeled  his  poem  chiefly  after  Beowulf  and  the  poems 
of  Cynewulf ;  that  the  poet  was  an  imitator  or  pupil  of  Cynewulf ; 
and  that,  while  the  works  of  Cynewulf  belong  to  the  flowering  period 
of  Anglo-Saxon  poetry,  Andreas  belongs  to  a  later  time  when  poetry 
was  passing  into  a  period  of  decay.  Fritzsche's  discussion  has  consider- 
able power  of  conviction,  and  its  influence  is  strongly  felt  in  succeeding 
expressions  of  opinion.^  On  the  other  hand,  Ramhorst^  (1885),  taking 
up  Fritzsche's  argument  point  by  point,  endeavors  (in  most  instances 
unsuccessfully)  to  disprove  it,  and  arrives  at  the  opposite  conclusion, 
that  Andreas  was  composed  by  Cynewulf.  The  argument  shifts  to  the 
other  side  again  with  Sievers*  (1885),  who  points  out  that  the  dative 
feeder,    required    by  the  metre   in   1.   14 10,    cannot  be  paralleled  in 

Gi(&lac,  and  Ele7ie  to  Cynewulf,  but  gives  no  reasons  for  his  decision.  Ham- 
merich  (1874),  Aelteste  christliche  Epik,  tr.  Michelsen,  p.  97,  sees  no  decisive 
reason  for  giving  either  Andreas  or  Gii&lac  to  Cynewulf.  Ten  Brink  (1877), 
Hist,  of  Eftg.  Lit.,  tr.  Kennedy,  p.  58,  gives  Andreas  to  Cynewulf.  But  Wiilker 
(1S7S),  Anglia  I,  506,  and  Charitius  (1879),  Atiglia  II,  265,  do  not  include  the 
poem  in  their  list  of  Cynewulf's  works. 

1  Das  angels.  Gedicht  Andreas  tind  Cynewulf,  Halle,  1879  !  ^Iso  Anglia  II, 
441-496. 

2  Thus  in  the  appendix  to  Ten  Brink,  p.  389,  written  after  the  appearance  of 
Fritzsche's  essay,  the  argument  is  said  to  be  "  calculated  to  raise  serious  doubts 
concerning  CynewuK's  authorship."  And  Miiller  (1883),  Angels.  Gram.,  p.  26, 
Lefevre  (1883),  Anglia  VI,  184,  and  Ebert  (1887),  Allgemeine  Geschichte  d.Lit.  d. 
Mittelalters,  p.  69,  accept  Fritzsche's  conclusions  more  or  less  unreservedly. 
Holtbuer,  Der  syntaktische  Gebrauck  des  Genetivs  in  Andreas,  Gu&lac,  etc.,  Halle, 
1884,  also  in  Anglia  VIII,  1-40,  as  the  result  of  his  own  investigations,  denies 
Andreas  to  Cynewulf.  Earle  (1884),  Anglo-Saxon  Literature,  p.  226,  returns  to 
the  old  view  that  all  the  poems  of  the  Vercelli  book  are  by  Cynewulf ;  the  fact, 
he  says,  that  Ele7ie  is  the  last  poem  of  the  volume,  and  is  signed,  "naturally 
suggests  the  inference,  which  indeed  is  generally  accepted,  that  all  the  poems 
in  the  Vercelli  book  are  by  Cynewulf." 

3  Das  altenglische  Gedicht  vom  heiligen  Andreas,  Berlin,  1885. 

4  PBB.  X,  483. 


AUTHORSHIP  OF  THE   POEMS  xxxv 

Cynewulf's  works.  Cremer '  (1888)  and  Mather^  (1892)  find  also  that 
the  metre  and  language  incline  slightly  towards  the  theory  of  non- 
Cynewulfian  authorship  of  Andreas. 

A  new  and  important  element  was  added  to  the  discussion  in  1888 
by  Napier's  discovery  of  the  runic  passage  on  fol.  54''  of  the  manu- 
script.* Napier  sees  in  this  passage  a  conclusion  to  The  Fates  of  the 
Apostles,  and  assigns  that  poem  without  question  to  Cynewulf.  He 
draws  no  inferences,  however,  as  to  the  authorship  of  Andreas.  Sarra- 
zin''  (1889),  who  on  the  basis  of  comparisons  of  phraseology  had 
assigned  Andreas  to  Cynewulf  before  the  discovery  of  the  runic  frag- 
ment,^ was  the  first  to  regard  "  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  as  the  con- 
clusion of  Andreas,  and,  in  consequence,  the  whole  as  the  work  of 
Cynewulf.  This  opinion,  in  slightly  varying  forms,  has  been  enounced 
by  numerous  others."  But  it  has  by  no  means  passed  without  ques- 
tion. Wiilker  ^  (1888,  1896)  regards  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  as 
a  separate  and  distinct  poem  from  Andreas ;  the  latter  poem  he 
ascribes,  as  Fritzsche  had  done,  not  to  Cynewulf,  but  to  an  imitator. 
Sievers®  (1891),  returning  to  the  subject,  denies  Andreas  to  Cynewulf, 
and  in  this  negation  sees  one  of  the  few  undoubted  results  of  investi- 
gations concerning  questions  of  authorship  in  Anglo-Saxon  literature. 
Brooke^"  (1892)  is  inclined,  for  stylistic  reasons,  to  follow  Fritzsche's 
opinion;  in  the  note  to  his  text,  however,  he  shifts  ground  to  the 
position  that  though  it  is  "  extremely  likely  that  the  Andreas  is  by 
Cynewulf,  we  have  as  yet  no  evidence  for  that  opinion."    In  a  later 

^  Metrische  utid  sprachliche  Untersuchungen  der  altetig.  Ged.  Andreas,  Gu&lac, 
Phcenix,  Bonn,  1888.  2  MLN.  VII,  106. 

8  First  announced  in  the  Academy,  September  8,  1888.  The  passage  is  printed 
and  discussed  by  Napier  in  Haiipfs  Zs.  XXXIII,  66-73. 

*  Anglia  XII,  375-387.  *  Beo~wjtlf-Studien,  Berlin,  1888,  p.  114. 

^  Cf.  Aftgl.  Beihl.  VII,  372,  Wer  hat  die  '■  Sckicksale  der  Apostef  ztierst  fiir 
den  schliiss  des  Andreas  erkldrt? 

'  By  Gollancz  (1892),  Cynewitlfs  Christ,  p.  173;  by  Trautmann  (1895,  1898), 
in  Angl.  BeibLW,  17  ff.,  Bonn.  Beitr.  I,  9;  by  Kolbing  (1899),  Eng.  Stud. 
XXVI,  99-101;  by  Simons  (1899),  "Cynewulf's  Wortschatz,"  in  Bonn.  Beitr. 
Ill,  i;  by  Bourauel  (1900),  p.  132;  and  by  Skeat  (1901),  English  JSIiscellatiy, 
pp.  408-420. 

8  Berichte  d.  Kdnigl.  Sachs.  Gesellschaft  der  IVissenschaften,  Phil.  Hist.  Clas^e, 
1888,  p.  212;    Geschichte  d.  eng.  Lit.,  pp.  39,  45. 

9  Anglia  XIII,  25. 

10  Hist,  of  Eng.  Lit.,  p.  413,  p.  489. 


XXXvi  INTRODUCTION 

utterance  ^  he  is  inclined  to  give  credence  to  the  views  of  Sarrazin. 
BrandP  (1898)  refuses  to  connect  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  with 
Andreas,  but  regards  the  former  as  a  separate  poem,  the  subject  of 
which  is  a  traveler's  charm. ^  Professor  Cook,  who  first  declared  that 
"  there  can  hardly  be  much  doubt  that  the  Andreas  is  to  be  given  to 
Cynewulf,"  *  later  modified  his  opinions,  saying,  "  I  am  strongly  inclined 
to  assign  the  Andreas  to  Cynewulf,  though  I  hesitate  to  express  a  posi- 
tive opinion,  in  the  present  state  of  our  knowledge,  especially  against 
Fritzsche's  hypothesis  of  a  close  imitation."  ^ 

Manifestly  the  first  thing  to  be  done  in  order  to  clear  the  ground  for 
a  just  estimate  of  the  mass  of  argumentation  represented  by  the  above- 
mentioned  discussions  is  to  determine  the  relation  of  the  runic  signa- 
ture to  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  and  the  relation  of  The  Fates  of  the 
Apostles  to  Andreas.  For  if  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles,  with  the  runic 
signature,  is  merely  an  epilogue  or  concluding  section  of  Andreas, 
we  have  indication  of  the  first  importance  as  to  the  authorship  of  the 
poem.  The  evidence  which  musfr  be  weighed  here  is  of  two  sorts  : 
first,  the  mere  mechanical  arrangement  of  the  poems  in  the  manuscript ; 
and  second,  the  evidence  of  the  internal  relation  of  subject  matter  in 
the  two  poems. 

According  to  Skeat,®  "  if  we  go  by  the  testimony  of  the  MS.  itself,  we 
must  allow  that  the  first  poem  in  the  MS.  occupies  the  back  of  fol.  29, 
fol.  30-53,  and  fol.  54,  recto,  where  it  ends  with  the  word  Finit,  below 
which  is  a  blank  space  sufficient  to  contain  six  more  lines.  And  fur- 
ther that  this  poem  consists  of  1840  lines,  disposed  in  16  Fits,  of  about 
115  lines  apiece,  on  an  average."  The  record  of  the  manuscript  is 
briefly  as  follows  :  the  Andreas,  which,  as  Skeat  says,  begins  the  first 
section  of  poetry  in  the  manuscript,  extends  from  the  first  line  of 
fol.  29''  to  the  middle  of  fol.  52*".  It  is  divided  into  fifteen  sections 
of  approximately  equal  length.'^    The  sections  are  separated  from  each 

^  Eng.  Lit.  fro7n  the  Beginning,  p.  187.  2  fferrig''s  Archiv  C,  330-334. 

3  Arnold  (1898),  N^otes  on  Beowulf,  pp.  121-126,  Buttenwieser  (1899),  Studien, 
p.  86,  and  Binz,  Eng.  Stiid.  XXVI,  389,  are  all  convinced  that  Andreas  is  not  by 
Cynewulf.  *  MLN.  IV,  7  (January,  1889). 

^  The  Christ  of  Cyne-wulf,  1900,  p.  Ixii.  ^  I.e.,  p.  412. 

''  These  sections  are  as  follows:  (i)  fol.  29^  top-fol.  30''  bot. ;  (2)  fol.  30'' 
bot.-fol.  32''»  top ;  (3)  fol.  32^  top-fol.  2)'$'  mid. ;  (4)  fol.  33*^  mid.-fol.  35'^  bot. ; 
(5)  fol.  35'^  bot.-fol.  37^  mid. ;  (6)  fol.  37'>  mid.-fol.  38''  top  ;  (7)  fol.  38''  top-fol. 
40^  mid.;   (8)  fol.  40*  mid.-fol.  41''  bot.;   (9)  fol.  42'  top-fol.  43'^  bot.;   (10)  fol. 


AUTHORSIIU'   OF   THE   POEMS  xxxvii 

Other  by  a  blank  space  sufficient  to  contain  one  line.  Each  section 
begins  with  a  large  capital  letter,  the  remaining  letters  of  the  first  word 
being  written  in  smaller  capitals ;  these  large  capitals  are  all  written 
out  in  the  manuscript,  except  the  opening  letter  of  the  twelfth  section, 
fol.  46%  where  the  letter  A  stands  alone,  S,  miswritten  for  D,  having 
been  erased,  though  the  right  letter  was  not  afterwards  inserted.  Each 
section  also  ends  with  a  distinctive  mark  of  punctuation,  usually  a 
colon  with  a  hook-shaped  dash  following  it. 

T/ie  Fates  of  the  Apostles  follows  immediately  after  the  conclusion 
of  Andreas,  the  usual  blank  space  being  left  between  Andreas  and  the 
opening  of  The  Fates  of  the  Aposth's.  The  first  letter  of  the  first  word 
{HwcBt)  is  wanting,  though  space  is  left,  extending  down  through  five 
lines,  for  its  insertion ;  the  remaining  letters  of  the  word  are  given  in 
smaller  capitals.  The  narrative  begins  at  the  middle  of  fol.  52''  and 
extends  without  interruption  in  the  manuscript  to  about  three  fourths 
of  the  way  down  fol.  54'^,  where  it  ends  with  Finit  and  a  period.  The 
remainder  of  the  page,  sufficient  to  contain  six  lines,  is  left  blank. 
The  runic  passage  stands  on  this  last  folio  (fol.  54'^)  by  itself,  begin- 
ning with  the  words,  Her  nuvg  findan,  etc.  It  begins  on  the  first  line 
of  the  folio,  without  a  capital  or  any  other  indication  of  a  new  begin- 
ning, nor  is  there  any  punctuation  after  the  last  word  of  fol.  53^ 

From  this  examination  it  will  be  seen  that  there  is  no  indication  in 
the  manuscript  that  the  runic  passage  is  anything  other  than  a  direct 
and  uninterrupted  continuation  of  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles,  or  that 
The  Fates  of  the  Apostles,  together  with  this  passage,  stands  in  any 
other  relation  to  Andreas  than  do  the  sections  of  Andreas  to  each 
other.  A  further  examination,  however,  of  the  scribe's  method  of  order- 
ing other  groups  of  poems  in  the  manuscript,  will  show  that  there  is  no 
indication  that  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  must  be  taken  as  a  part  of  a 
larger  whole.  On  fol.  loi'-fol.  106^  there  is  a  group  of  three  poems 
that  no  one  has  ever  thought  of  uniting.  The  first  {Dialogue  betzoeen 
the  Soul  and  the  Body)  begins  with  a  large  capital  on  the  first  line  of 
fol.  loi'';  on  fol.  103%  near  the  bottom  of  the  page,  there  is  a  sec- 
tional division,  the  last  word  of  the  section  ending  with  the  same 
mark  of  punctuation  as  that  used  in  the  first  poem  or  poems  of  the 

43^  bot.-fol.  44''  mid.;  (ii)  fol.  44''  mid.-fol.  46^  mid.;  (12)  fol.  46-^  mid.-fol.  47'' 
top;  (13)  fol.  47^  top-fol.  49'»  hot.;  (14)  fol.  49^  bot.-fol.  51*  top;  (15)  fol.  51^ 
top-fol.  52''  mid. 


xxxviii  INTRODUCTION 

manuscript,  and  followed  by  the  usual  blank  space.  The  second  sec- 
tion begins  with  a  capital  D,  The  conclusion  of  this  second  section, 
and  of  the  poem,  is  wanting  in  the  manuscript,  as  the  poem  breaks  off 
abruptly  at  the  end  of  fol.  103''.  The  same  missing'folio  must  have 
contained  the  opening  of  the  second  poem  of  the  group  {Se^-mon  in 
verse  on  Ps.  XXVIII),  for  fol.  104''  opens  abruptly  with  no  indication 
that  a  new  subject  has  been  introduced.  This  fragmentary  poem  con- 
cludes on  fol.  104'',  near  the  top,  with  the  usual  mark  of  punctuation 
and  the  usual  blank  space.  The  third  poem  of  the  group  (  Vision  of  the 
Cross)  begins  with  a  large  capital  near  the  top  of  fol.  104^  and  con- 
tinues without  break  to  the  foot  of  fol.  106",  where  it  ends  with  the 
usual  mark  of  punctuation ;  the  poem  fills  up  the  whole  page,  only  a 
part  of  the  last  line  being  left  blank.  On  fol.  106^'  then  begins  a  group 
of  prose  selections.  It  will  be  seen,  therefore,  that  if  we  observe  merely 
the  mechanical  ordering  of  the  poems  in  the  manuscript,  there  is  quite 
as  much  justification  for  declaring  the  three  poems  of  the  second  group 
a  siitgle  poem  as  for  declaring  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  a  necessary 
part  of  Andreas  ;  for  the  scribe  uses  exactly  the  same  method  in  mark- 
ing off  sections  of  a  poem  that  he  uses  in  separating  entirely  different 
poems.  The  fact  that  a  space  of  six  lines  is  left  vacant  on  fol.  54''  is  no 
indication  that  the  scribe  wishes  to  mark  the  end  of  a  poem ;  for  the 
second  group  of  poems  in  the  manuscript  shows  that  it  is  not  his  usual 
method  thus  to  mark  the  end  of  a  poem.  The  space  is  left  blank,  we 
may  suppose,  first  of  all  because  it  is  a  short  space,  and  second  because 
the  next  section  of  the  manuscript  was  to  be  devoted  to  prose  and  not 
to  verse  selections.  At  the  conclusion  of  Elene,  fol.  iss^  which  is 
followed  immediately  by  the  prose  life  of  St.  Guthlac,  the  scribe  did  not 
leave  the  rest  of  the  page  blank  as  he  had  done  at  the  end  of  The 
Fates  of  the  Apostles,  fol.  54'',  but  the  reason  is  plain.  On  fol.  54"^  it 
required  nineteen  lines  of  his  page  in  order  to  finish  the  poem  in  hand, 
leaving  space  for  only  six  lines  ;  on  fol.  133''  only  six  lines  of  the  page 
were  needed  in  order  to  finish  the  poem,  leaving  space  for  twenty-five 
lines  (the  writing  here  being  much  finer  than  in  the  earlier  part  of  the 
manuscript).  The  wasting  of  twenty-five  lines  must  have  seemed  a  need- 
less extravagance  to  the  scribe. 

The  third  and  last  section  of  poetry  in  the  manuscript,  extending 
from  the  first  line  of  fol.  121''  down  through  the  sixth  line  of  fol.  133'', 
contains  the  single  poem  Elene.    The  poem  is  divided  into  sections 


AUTHORSHIP  OF  THE  POEMS  xxxix 

just  as  Andreas  is  divided,  each  section  beginning  with  capitals,  ending 
with  the  usual  mark  of  punctuation,  and  separated  from  the  preced- 
ing and  following  sections  by  the  usual  blank  space.  The  sections 
here,  however,  are  numbered  with  roman  numerals  from  one  to  fif- 
teen inclusive,^  apparently  by  the  original  scribe  of  the  manuscript. 
Section  fourteen,  which  concludes  the  actual  narrative  of  the  poem, 
ends  with  Fixit  and  the  usual  mark  of  punctuation.  Section  fifteen  is 
a  sort  of  personal  epilogue  in  which  occurs  the  passage  containing  the 
runes  that  form  the  name  Cynewulf.  This  section  concludes  with  a 
second  ending.  Amen,  followed  by  the  usual  punctuation.  Immediately 
following  the  conclusion  of  the  section,  but  separated  from  it  by  the 
usual  blank  space,  comes  the  opening  of  the  prose  life  of  St.  Guthlac, 
which  is  without  number.  Sarrazin  "  is  therefore  not  exact  when  he 
says  that  the  epilogue  of  Ekne  stands  "  iiusserlich  und  innerlich  "  in 
the  same  relation  to  the  body  of  the  poem  as  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles 
to  Aintreas.  In  the  manuscript  record  of  Elene  there  is  distinct  evi- 
dence, in  the  consecutive  numbering  of  the  sections,  that  they  are  to 
be  taken  as  parts  of  a  single  poem.  The  double  colophon  is  also  peculiar 
to  Elene.  The  ending  of  section  fourteen  with  Fixit  may  be  a  mere 
reflection  of  the  source  of  the  poem,  for  indeed  the  actual  narrative 
does  end  with  that  section.  After  the  epilogue  was  added,  the  poet, 
not  wishing  to  repeat  his  former  ending,  finishes  with  Amex.  Fortu- 
nately, in  the  case  of  Elene  the  testimony  of  the  subject  matter  leaves 
no  doubt  that  the  fifteenth  section  is  an  integral  part  of  the  poem  ;  in  this 
respect  also  Sarrazin  makes  too  much  of  the  parallel  between  Andreas 
and  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  on  the  one  hand  and  Elene  and  its 
concluding  section  on  the  other. 

We  cannot  agree,  therefore,  with  Professor  Skeat  and  others,  that  the 
manuscript  speaks  decisively  in  favor  of  accepting  The  Fates  of  the 
Apostles  as  an  integral  part  of  Andreas.  At  the  most  the  manuscript 
merely  permits  the  theory  but  speaks  decisively  neither  one  way  nor  the 
other.  All  that  it  allows  us  to  say  is  that  from  fol.  29''  to  fol.  54-^  we 
have  a  poem  or  a  group  of  poems,  written  out  in  orderly  fashion  and 
ending  with  a  Fixit  and  a  blank  space  on  the  last  page. 

An  examination  of  the  subject  matter  of  the  two  poems  in  their  rela- 
tion to  each  other  results  in  a  somewhat  more  positive  conclusion.    In 

1  The  numbers  are  omitted  in  sections  eleven  and  twelve. 

2  Angl.  Beibl.  VI,  205. 


xl  INTRODUCTION 

general  two  main  theories  have  been  proposed  by  which  The  Fates  of 
the  Apostles  is  to  be  united  to  Andreas.  According  to  the  first  (sup- 
ported chiefly  by  Sarrazin,  Trautmann,  and  Gollancz)  The  Fates  of  the 
Apostles  is  not  an  integral  part  of  the  narrative  of  Andreas,  but  an 
addition  or  epilogue,  standing  in  the  same  relation  to  Andreas  as  the 
epilogue  of  Elene  to  that  poem.  According  to  the  second  theory,  sup- 
ported chiefly  by  Skeat,^  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  is  a  necessary  part 
of  the  plot  and  action  of  Andreas. 

The  title  of  this  longer  poem  (to  take  up  the  second  theory  first),  con- 
sisting of  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  and  Andi-eas  united,  should  be.  Pro- 
fessor Skeat  contends,  not  Andreas,  but  The  Twelve  Apostles.  The  writer 
of  the  poem  announces  his  subject  in  the  opening  lines  :  tioelfe  tender 
tiinglum.  Of  these  twelve  he  takes  up  St.  Matthew  first,  St.  Andrew 
being  mentioned  for  the  first  time  in  1.  169.  "When  St.  Matthew  is  thus 
happily  disposed  of  [but  St.  Matthew  is  not  disposed  of  until  11.  1050  ff.], 
the  story  of  St.  Andrew,  henceforth  considered  as  the  principal  hero, 
really  begins"  (p.  414).  When  he  has  finished  the  special  story  of 
St.  Andrew,  continues  Skeat,  the  poet  reverts  to  his  original  theme. 
"  But  finding  by  this  time  that  the  apostles  cannot  all  be  discoursed  of 
at  the  same  length  as  St.  Matthew  and  St.  Andrew,  he  cuts  the  story 
short  by  the  ingenious  device  of  giving,  not  their  whole  legends,  but 
merely  a  brief  account  of  how  each  one  came  to  his  end.  As  neither 
St.  Matthew  nor  St.  Andrew  were  killed  off  in  Fits  1-15,  it  became 
necessary  to  give  each  of  these  a  few  lines  more.  We  thus  learn  that 
St.  Matthew  was  executed  (put  to  sleep  by  weapons)  and  that  St.  Andrew 
was  crucified  (was  extended  on  the  gallows)." 

One  hesitates  to  take  all  this  seriously.  For,  accepting  this  theory, 
we  have  a  poem  on  a  great  topic  so  loosely  put  together  that  it  can 
hardly  be  said  to  have  any  coherence  or  unity  at  all ;  and  such  inarticu- 
late work  Professor  Skeat  would  have  us  ascribe  to  Cynewulf.  Further- 
more, a  glance  at  the  sources  of  the  two  poems  shows  that  the  theory 
supposes  a  degree  of  unification  and  adaptation  of  these  sources  either 
beyond  the  powers  or  the  purpose  of  the  author  or  authors  who  com- 
posed the  poems.  In  neither  poem  is  there  any  indication  that  the 
poet  thought  he  was  composing  a  great  epic  on  the  Twelve  Apostles ; 
he  was  simply  retelling  a  story  as  he  had  found  it.  The  poet  of  Andreas 
mentioned  the  twelve  in  opening  his  poem  because  his  source  mentioned 

^  English  MiscelhDiy,  pp.  40S-420.  * 


AUTHORSHIP   OF  THE   TOEMS  xli 

them  ;  but  even  if  this  were  not  true,  we  need  no  more  suppose  that  he 
intended  writing  in  detail  on  each  of  the  twelve,  than  that  the  poet  of 
Beowulf  intended  giving  us  the  life-histories  of  those  heroes  —  I/coroi^iir 
and  Hrodgiir  a)id  Halga  til — and  the  others  who  are  mentioned  before 
the  real  action  of  the  poem  begins.  The  author  of  Andreas  treated  of 
Matthew  first  because  his  source  did  so ;  he  gave  most  of  his  attention 
to  Andrew  because  he  followed  his  source,  and  when  he  had  finished 
the  story  of  St.  Andrew  he  stopped  because  his  source  stopped.  And 
indeed  it  was  an  appropriate  ending.  The  narrative  had  brought  Andrew 
out  of  the  land  of  Achaia,  had  related  his  adventures  in  the  city  of  the 
anthropophagi,  and  had  closed  with  the  return  of  the  saint  to  the  place 
from  which  he  had  set  out.  One  feels  that  the  story  is  closed,  it  has  iis 
peroration  and  nothing  more  is  needed  or  expected.  The  poet  of  The 
Fates  of  the  Apostles,  whether  the  same  person  as  the  poet  of  Andreas 
or  not,  we  may  be  sure  followed  his  source  quite  as  closely.^ 

The  fact  that  the  opening  passages  of  the  two  poems  are  very  much 
alike,  and  are  evidently  fashioned  either  on  the  same  model  or  one  on  the 
other,  is  rather  an  indication  that  the  passages  introduce  two  separate 
poems  than  two  sections  of  the  same  poem ;  the  allusion  to  the  twelve 
at  the  opening  of  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  cannot  be  taken,  as  Pro- 
fessor Skeat  would  take  it,  as  a  resumption  and  repetition  of  the  sub- 
ject as  announced  in  the  opening  lines  of  Andreas,  for  the  introduction 
to  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  actually  gives  the  subject  of  the  narrative 
that  follows,  whereas  the  introduction  to  Andreas  is  purely  preliminary 
and  outside  the  real  narrative  of  the  poem.  There  is,  in  short,  not  the 
slightest  indication  in  either  poem  of  an  endeavor  to  fuse  the  old 
material  into  a  single  tale  of  the  fates  of  all  Twelve  Apostles.  If  the 
scribe  of  the  Vercelli  Book  had  happened  to  place  The  Fates  of  the 
Apostles  in  the  second  or  third  section  of  poetry  in  the  manuscript, 
instead  of  in  the  first  and  immediately  following  Andreas,  I  doubt  if 
it  would  ever  have  occurred  to  the  ingenuity  of  any  one  to  look  upon 
it  as  a  part  of  the  story  of  Andreas. 

The  contents  oi  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  in  relation  to  the  narrative 
of  Andreas  must  now  be  examined  ;  for  if  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles 
and  Andreas  are  not  to  be  taken  as  one  long  poem  on  the  Twelve 
Apostles,  it  is  still  possible,  as  Gollancz  suggests,  that  The  Fates  of  the 
Apostles  is  an  appendix  or  epilogue  to  Andreas.    As  opposed  to  such 

1  Cf.  above,  pp.  xxix  ff. 


xlii  INTRODUCTION 

a  theory  it  is  to  be  noted,  first,  that  Andreas  ends  with  a  definite  and 
appropriate  conclusion,  with  no  indication  of  anything  to  follow ;  and, 
second,  that  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  opens  with  an  entirely  new 
beginning,  followed  by  a  regularly  developed  narrative  and  conclusion 
which  is  dependent  in  no  respect  on  any  preceding  narrative.  The 
opening  of  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  is  not  merely  the  exclamation 
hwcet,  followed  by  an  immediate  resumption  of  the  narrative,  as  in 
Andreas,  1,  1478,  but  an  elaborate  formal  beginning  parallel  to  the 
opening  of  Atidreas  itself.  Sievers  ^  first  pointed  out  the  likeness  between 
these  two  openings,  showing  that  both  are  imitations  of  the  opening 
lines  of  Beowulf  Such  similarity  is,  of  course,  no  indication  that  the 
two  passages  belong  to  the  same  poem ;  for,  granted  that  they  are  by 
the  same  author,  it  is  less  likely  that  an  author  would  repeat  himself 
so  plainly  within  the  bounds  of  a  single  poem  than  in  two  separate 
poems. 

In  these  opening  lines  of  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles,  11.  1-11%  the 
poet  announces  his  subject.  In  the  first  line  of  this  passage,  J>ysne 
sang  is  logically  inseparable  from  what  follows  —  hTi  ha  cEdelingas,  1,  3, 
and  its  elaboration.  It  cannot  be  translated  '  the  above  or  preceding 
song,'  ^  because  the  phrases  with  which  it  is  coordinate  in  11.  3  ff.  do 
not  describe  the  action  of  Andreas,  though  they  do  describe  very  closely 
the  action  of  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles.  The  poem  begins,  therefore, 
without  any  allusion  to  preceding  action,  either  to  the  Andreas  or  to  any 
other  subject.  Again,  in  the  narrative  which  follows  immediately  after 
this  introductory  passage,  Andrew  comes  third  in  the  list,  as  is  usual  in 
such  compositions,  whereas  Matthew,  entirely  disconnected  from  him, 
comes  ninth.  Nowhere  is  there  any  allusion  to  the  narrative  of  Andreas, 
or  any  indication  that  the  author  knew  the  story  of  Andreas  or  that  he 
had  treated  of  these  two  apostles  elsewhere.  In  the  account  of  Andrew 
stress  is  laid  upon  his  death  at  the  hands  of  Egeas,  a  name  and  incident 
unknown  to  Andreas ;  in  the  account  of  Matthew  we  are  told  of  his 
death  at  the  hands  of  Irtacus,  also  unknown  to  Andreas.  Matthew  is 
said  to  have  preached  mid  Sigelwarmn,  1.  64,  i.e.  in  Ethiopia  (cf.  note 
to  Ap.  64)  ;  in  Andreas,  Andrew  announces  the  end  of  their  journey  to  his 
followers  as  on  ^Flmyrcna  edelrice,  1.  432.  The  allusion  in  The  Fates 
of  the  Apostles  is  evidently  derived  from  its  source  (cf.  p.  xxxi)  ;  no  equiv- 
alent is  found  in  the  Ilpa^ets  for  the  statement  of  1.  432  of  Andreas. 

^  PBB.  IX,  135.  2  Bourauel,  p.  132,  'das  obige  Gedicht.' 


AUTHORSHIP   OF  THE   POEMS  xliii 

It  might  easily  be  derived,  however,  from  common  stock  of  tradition, 
and  at  the  most  indicates,  not  that  the  author  of  The  Fates  of  the 
Apostles  wrote  also  Andreas,  but  that  the  author  of  Andreas  may  pos- 
sibly have  known  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles.  The  name  Mermedonia 
is  not  mentioned  in  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles.  Finally,  after  the  list  of 
the  Twelve  Apostles  is  completed.  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  ends  with 
an  appropriate  conclusion,  which,  freely  translated,  runs  as  follows  : 
'  Thus  these  noble  ones,  the  great-minded  twelve,  perished  ;  fame  un- 
ending these  thanes  of  glory  won  in  the  spirit.  Now  then  I  pray  that 
he  who  loves  the  study  of  this  song  petition  that  holy  throng  [i.e.  the 
twelve]  for  help  for  me,  sad  of  heart,  for  protection  and  for  aid.  Alas  ! 
I  shall  have  need  of  friends,  of  kindly  disposed  ones,  on  my  journey, 
when,  alone,  I  seek  my  long  home,  that  strange  habitation,  leave  behind 
me  my  body,  this  portion  of  earth,  this  corpse  as  a  feast  for  worms.' 
After  this  passage,  11.  85-95,  follows  a  second  conclusion  in  which  the 
poet  gives  the  runes  which  form  his  name.  Here,  he  says,  the  skilled 
in  perception  may  find,  he  who  takes  pleasure  in  songs,  who  made  this 
poem  (has  fttte,  1.  98).  The  runes  then  follow,  in  a  passage  the  thought 
of  which  is  the  transitoriness  of  earthly  possessions.  In  a  few  conclud- 
ing lines  (11.  107  ff.)  the  poet  returns  to  the  request  of  the  preceding 
passage,  11.  88  ff. :  '  Be  mindful  of  this,  he  who  loves  the  study  of  this 
poem,  that  he  beseech  for  me  comfort  and  aid.  Far  hence  must  I,  all 
alone,  seek  a  new  habitation,  undertake  a  journey,  I  know  not  myself 
whither,  out  of  this  world.  Those  dwellings  are  unknown  to  me,  that 
land  and  that  home.  It  is  so  with  every  man  unless  he  be  partaker  of 
the  holy  spirit.  But  let  us  the  more  zealously  cry  unto  God,  let  us  send 
our  prayers  into  the  bright  heaven  {geseeaft,  1.  116),  that  we  may  enjoy 
that  habitation,  that  home  on  high,  where  are  the  greatest  of  joys,  where 
the  King  of  angels  yields  to  the  poor  unending  reward.  Now  his  praise 
remain  forever  great  and  glorious,  together  with  his  power  eternal  and 
ever  renewed,  throughout  all  creation  ! '  It  will  be  noted  that  in  the 
passage  which  might  be  called  the  first  conclusion  (i.e.  11.  88-95)  there 
is  specific  reference  to  the  subject  matter  of  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles, 
but  no  reference  is  made  to  the  action  of  Andreas.  In  the  second 
ending,  however,  there  is  direct  allusion  neither  to  The  Fates  of  the 
Apostles  nor  to  Andreas.  The  passage  is  entirely  disconnected  from 
any  preceding  narrative,  and  might  easily  belong  to  The  Fates  of  the 
Apostles,  or  to  Andreas,  or  to  neither.    In  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles, 


xliv  INTRODUCTION 

therefore,  as  in  Andreas,  a  single  narrative  is  appropriately  introduced, 
is  consistently  developed,  and  (except  for  the  double  ending,  which  will 
be  discussed  later)  is  brought  to  a  satisfactory  conclusion ;  nothing  in 
the  one  is  needed  to  explain  the  details  of  the  action  of  the  other. 

Certain  expressions  of  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  have  been  supposed 
to  refer  back  \.o  Andreas.  Thus,  (i)  according  to  Trautmann,'  the  phrases 
hysses  giddes  begang,  Ap.  1.  8g,  and  hisses  galdres  begang,  Ap.  1.  io8, 
cannot  refer  to  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles,  because  the  word  begang  con- 
notes the  meaning  '  long,  extended,'  the  whole  phrase  meaning  '  this 
long  poem,'  a  description  which  cannot  apply  to  the  130  lines  of  The 
Fates  of  the  Apostles,  but  which  applies  very  aptly  to  The  Fates  of  the 
Apostles  as  a  part  of  Andreas.  The  meaning  '  long '  or  '  extended  ' 
which  Trautmann  finds  in  the  word  begang  he  derives  from  its  use  in 
such  combinations  as  swegles  begang,  garsecges  b.,  floda  b.,  geofones  b., 
holma  b.,  wyrda  b.,  and  others.  But  the  idea  of  wide  extent  in  these 
phrases  comes  not  from  the  meaning  of  the  word  begang,  but  from  the 
word  with  which  it  is  united  ;  by  itself  begang  means  only  '  extent, 
space,  circuit,'  as  the  dictionaries  define  it.  When  combined  with  the 
name  of  an  object  of  small  extent  it  means  no  more  than  when  com- 
bined with  the  name  of  an  object  of  great  extent.^  (2)  Bourauel  ^  sees 
a  verbal  allusion  to  Andreas  in  the  words  has  fitte,  1.  98,  which  he  takes 
to  be  accusative  plural  — '  these  sections.'  The  sections,  according  to 
Bourauel,  are  three,  A71.  1-1477,  An.  1478-1722,  and  Ap.  i  ff.,  each 
section  being  indicated  by  the  exclamation  hivcet  at  the  beginning.  It 
is  true  that  mere  grammar  permits  has  fitte  to  be  taken  as  accusative 
plural,  but  it  is  equally  true  that  the  words  may  be  taken  as  accusative 
singular.  If  the  poet  had  been  speaking  to  us  of  "  sections,"  or  even 
of  a  long  poem  on  St.  Andrew,  there  might  be  some  reason  for  taking 
has  fitte  as  accusative  plural ;  but  he  has  been  speaking  to  us  only  of 
his  little  poem  on  the  Twelve  Apostles,  he  knows  nothing  about  Andreas 
or  at  least  says  nothing  about  it.  Surely  then  the  natural  and  uncon- 
strained rendering  of  has  fitte  is  as  accusative  singular,  '  this  poem,' 

^  Angl.  Beibl.  VI,  21. 

2  Barnouw,  Herrig's  Archiv  CVIII,  371-375,  after  showing  that  gong  and  begong 
are  used  interchangeably  (cf.  El.  648,  1123,  1255;  Chr.  1035,  235)  cites  Gu.  1134: 
tvorda  gongum,  describing  a  speech  of  Guthlac's  of  30  lines  ;  the  phrase  on  gecitd- 
rutn,  1.  1 180,  is  used  in  allusion  to  the  same  speech.  But  it  may  be  seriously 
questioned  whether  '  extent,  space,  circuit '  is  the  right  definition  of  the  word  as 
it  occurs  in  the  two  passages  in  Ap.    See  B-T.,  s.  v.  begang,  II.  ^  Pp.  129-130. 


AUTHORSHIP  OF  THE   POEMS  xlv 

an  equivalent  expression  to  M'sses  giddcs  or  i^aldirs  i>pf;a?ig.    (3)  Again 
Trautmann  ^  insists  that  the  double  ending  of  The  Fates  0/  the  Apostles 
already  mentioned,  though  out  of  keeping  in  such  a  short  poem  as  The 
Fates  of  the  Apostles,  becomes  quite  appropriate  when  we  look  upon 
this  ending  as  the  conclusion  of  the  long  story  of  St.  Andrew.    But,  after 
all,  the  important  point  with  regard  to  the  double  ending  is  not  its 
length,  but  the  fact  that  it  is  a  double  ending,  the  one  part  repeating,  at 
times  verbally,  the  other.    It  is  difficult  to  see  how  such  an  irregularity 
is  explained  away  by  uniting  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles  to  Andreas.    As 
to  the  right  explanation  of  this  double  ending  there  may  reasonably  be 
a  difference  of  opinion.    Sievers  -  hesitates  to  ascribe  such  inartistic 
work  to  Cynewulf,  and  proposes  the  theory  that  all  the  passage  con- 
tained on  fol.  54%  that  is  11.  96-122,  does  not  belong  to  The  Fates  of 
the  Apostles,  but  to  some  other  poem,  and  that  it  has  been  accidentally 
separated  from  its  right  connection  and  placed  here  at  the  end  of  a 
poem  already  provided  with  a  complete  ending.    This  theory,  Sievers 
thinks,  may  explain  the  blot  upon  this  folio  as  the  mark  of  the  scribe 
conscious  of  his  error  in  placing  the  passage  at  this  place.    Where  the 
passage  actually  belongs  Sievers  does  not  attempt  to  determine,  though 
he  denies  emphatically  that  it  has  been  separated  from  Andreas  by  the 
insertion  of  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles.    Skeat^  proposes  a  somewhat 
different  explanation.    The  double  ending,  he  says,  consists  of  the  two 
passages  11.  88-106  and  11.  107  to  the  end.    The  first  passage,  which 
contains  the  runes,  he  calls  epilogue  B,  and  the  second  passage  epi- 
logue A.    "The  author's  first  intention  was  to  end  with  epilogue  A. 
But  he  afterwards  determined  to  compose  an  epilogue  containing  runes, 
so  as  to  give  a  clue  to  his  name.    Consequently  he  composed  epilogue 
B  in  its  stead  and  placed  it  in  its  right  position  at  the  end  of  the 
poem.    But  by  some  chance  the  scribe  had  access  to  a  copy  of  the 
original  epilogue  A  ;  and,  thinking  it  too  good  to  be  lost  —  for  which 
he  is  not  to  be  blamed  —  he  inartistically  tacked  it  on  to  the  end  of 
the  poem."    Neither  Skeat's  nor  Sievers'  hypothesis  seems  very  con- 
vincing.   Perhaps  the  simplest  explanation  is  here  the  best.    Though  the 
double  ending  appears  to  be  unnecessary  and  inartistic  to  our  modern 
sense,  it  may  not  have  seemed  so  much  so  to  the  author  of  the  poem ; 

"^  Angl.  Beibl.  VI,  21. 
^Anglia  XIII,  21-25. 
^English  Miscellany,  pp.  419-420. 


xlvi  INTRODUCTION 

he  may  thus  have  added  the  second  ending  as  an  afterthought  without 
considering  it  necessary  to  remove  or  change  the  other.^ 

To  sum  up,  then,  we  are  forced  to  the  conclusion  that  neither  in 
the  manuscript  transmission  nor  in  their  contents  is  there  any  sufficient 
indication  that  Andreas  and  71ie  Fates  of  the  Apostles  are  to  be  taken 
as  a  single  poem.  The  evidence  of  the  manuscript  permits  such  a 
supposition,  but  it  affords  no  positive  evidence  in  support  of  it ;  the 
evidence  of  subject  matter  is  distinctly  opposed  to  the  theory,  for  each 
poem  has  its  individual  source  and  its  own  internal  development.  As 
to  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles,  the  evidence  of  the  manuscript  points 
conclusively  to  Cynewulf  as  its  author.  Doubts  are  raised,  however,  by 
a  consideration  of  the  subject  matter  —  especially  the  irregular  double 
conclusion.  But  until  some  explanation  of  this  peculiarity  has  been 
offered  that  carries  more  conviction  than  those  so  far  brought  forward, 
we  may  accept  the  testimony  of  the  manuscript,  and  assign  the  j3oem 
to  Cynewulf. 

It  remains  to  examine  the  evidence  of  metre,  language,  and  style  in 
Andreas  as  compared  with  the  poems  of  undoubted  Cynewulfian  origin,^ 
This  has  been  carefully  done  for  the  metre  by  Cremer  ^  and  Mather.* 
Cremer  concludes,  as  a  result  of  his  investigations,  that  though  there 
are  numerous  differences  between  Andreas  and  the  accepted  poems  of 
Cynewulf,  these  differences  are  too  slight  to  justify  a  positive  denial  of 
the  poem  to  him.  Mather,  working  independently  of  Cremer  but  along 
similar  lines,  arrives  at  the  same  conclusion.  He  finds,  for  example, 
that  double  alliteration  in  the  first  half-hne  is  one  fourth  more  fre- 
quent in  Andreas  than  in  Cynewulf  {i.e.  Jn/iana,  Elene,  and  Christ!, 
II,  III).  The  D  and  E  types  of  the  second  half-line,  the  distinctively 
epic  verse-form,  which  Mather  considers  as  most  important  in  his  com- 
parative tests,  are  one  fifth  more  frequent  in  Andreas  than  in  the  poem 
of  Cynewulf  containing  the  largest  number  {Christ  III),  and  one  third 
more  frequent  than  in  the  poem  containing  the  smallest  number 
{Juliana).    In  this  respect  Andreas  stands  nearer  to  the  Beo-iuulf,  as 

1  A  similar  double  ending  occurs  in  ]Vidsi&,  11.  131-134  and  11.  135-143-  Miillen- 
hoff,  Haupfs  Zs.  XI,  293,  regards  the  first  of  these  two  passages  as  an  interpolation. 

2  In  the  present  discussion  the  following  poems  are  accepted  as  undoubtedly 
Cynewulf  s  :  Elene,  Juliana,  Christ  I,  II,  III,  The  Fates  of  the  Apostles.  By  com- 
bining the  glossary  to  Christ  I  and  III,  in  Professor  Cook's  edition,  with  Simons, 
Cynezoulfs  IVortschatz,  a  complete  verbal  index  to  these  poems  is  obtained. 

3  Pp.  4-41.  4  MLN.  VII,  97-107. 


AUTHORSHIP   OF  THE   POEMS  xlvii 

Mather  points  out,  than  to  the  poems  of  the  Cynewulf  group.  The 
number  of  hypermetric  lines  in  Andreas  (given  by  Mather  as  ten)  is 
much  less  than  in  Cynewulf  (in  the  Elene  alone  there  are  seventy-one)  ; 
in  this  respect  also  Andreas  stands  nearer  to  the  Beowulf  (which  con- 
tains twelve  hypermetric  lines)  than  to  the  Cynewulfian  poems.  The 
evidence  of  the  metre  on  the  wliole,  Mather  concludes,  is  not  decisive. 
There  is  insufificient  ground  either  for  positively  ascribing  or  denying 
Andreas  to  Cynewulf.  The  chief  result  of  the  metncal  comparisons 
is  that  which  establishes  a  special  relationship  between  Andreas  and 
Beozuulf. 

The  evidence  of  language  and  vocabulary  is  more  positive  than  that 
of  metre.  It  should  be  remembered,  however,  that  striking  differences 
in  language  are  not  to  be  expected  between  two  poems,  though  by  dif- 
ferent authors,  of  approximately  the  same  time  and  place  of  origin  ;  such 
differences  as  do  appear  are  consequently  of  the  more  significance.'  A 
few  of  the  more  noteworthy  differences  in  language  between  Andreas 
and  the  accepted  works  of  Cynewulf  may  be  mentioned  :  ^ 

(i)  Certain  forms  in  An.,  Fritzsche  thinks  (pp.  42-43)  still  preserve  traces 
of  the  original  writer's  individual  usage  :  thus  the  forms  inec  and  hec  do  not 
appear  at  all  in  An.,  though  they  appear  interchangeably  with  nte  and  he 
in  the  poems  of  Cynewulf.  That  the  usage  in  A71.  is  not  due  entirely  to  the 
scribe  of  the  MS.  is  indicated  by  the  appearance  of  mec  and /,ec  in  other 
parts  of  the  Vercelli  Book,  as,  for  example,  in  El.  The  forms  coin,  comon 
occur  eighteen  times  in  An. ;  the  forms  cwom,  cwoinon  occur  twice  (11.  738, 
1278).  The  reverse  is  true  of  Cynewulf;  the  forms  com,  coinon  occur  in 
El.  150  and  Riddles  LXXXVIII,  12  (if  we  regard  the  Riddles  as  non- 
Cynewulfian,  only  once  in  Cynewulf),  beside  numerous  occurrences  of 
cwdvi,  cwotnon.  Fritzsche  points  out  that  as  the  poems  of  Cynewulf  are  pre- 
served partly  in  the  Vercelli  and  partly  in  the  Exeter  Codex  this  uniformity 
is  the  more  striking.  Such  forms  as  agef,  Ati.  189,  285,  572,  etc.,  geseh,  An. 
847,  992,  1004,  beside  the  regular  dgeaf,  geseah,  though  not  entirely  unknown 

1  Thus  Wack,  "  Artikel  und  demonstrativpronomen  in  Andreas  und  Elene," 
Anglia  XV,  209-219,  finds  no  appreciable  difference  between  Andreas  and  Elftte 
in  the  use  of  the  forms  studied.  Holtbuer,  Der  synitakiische  Gebrauch  des  Gene- 
lives  in  Andreas,  Gu&lac,  PJidnix,  detn  Heiligen  Kreiiz  und  der  I/ollen/a/tri,  Halle, 
18S4,  denies  Andreas  to  Cynewulf,  though  his  data  do  not  justify  so  positive  a 
conclusion.  Barnouw,  Der  bestivnnte  Artilcel  im  Altenglisclien,  p.  i  50,  thinks  that 
the  use  of  the  definite  article  in  Andreas  points  to  a  pie-Cynewulfian  period;  he 
would  place  Andreas  between  Gen.  A  and  Daniel;  but  again  the  argument  is  weak. 

-  Unless  othenvise  indicated  the  observations  are  my  own. 


xlviii  •  INTRODUCTION 

in  Cynewulf  (cf.  El.  587,  dgefon;    EL  S^i,  geseh)  are   there   exceptional, 
whereas  in  An.  they  are  the  more  frequent  forms. 

(2)  The  dative  oi  feeder  in  Cynewulf  \?,fadere  (cf.  Sievers,  PBB.  X,  1483) ; 
Aft.  1346,  1410,  prove  the  form  feeder  for  that  poem. 

(3)  The  use  of  the  periphrastic  preterit,  fonned  by  the  preterit  of  ongin- 
nan,  ciivian.,  gewitan,  +  an  infinitive,  Fritzsche  points  out  (pp.  38-39)  is 
more  frequent  in  An.  than  in  Cynewulf.  Thus  the  form  cdm{on)  +  infinitive 
occurs  only  five  times  in  Cynewulf,  twice,  ////.  563,  Chr.  549,  being  with 
verbs  of  motion  ;  in  An.  alone  the  construction  occurs  eight  times  with  the 
infinitive  of  verbs  of  motion,  once  with  another  verb.  The  preterit  of 
gewitan  +  infinitive  of  a  verb  of  motion  occurs  only  once  in  Cynewulf,  Clir. 
533;  the  construction  is  common  (see  Glossary)  in  An..,  occurring  thirteen 
times. 

(4)  Though  in  general  differences  of  vocabulary  are  best  explained  as 
arising  from  differences  in  subject  matter,  yet  the  following  variations  in  the 
use  of  words  and  particles  of  common  occurrence  seem  to  have  some 
significance : 

{a)  butan,  conj.  and  prep.,  occurs  only  three  times  in  An..,  but  twenty 
times  in  Chr..,  ten  times  in  EI..,  and  six  times  \nfnl. 

(b)  aeniiiga,  adv.,  found  four  times  in  An.,  does  not  occur  in  Cynewulf. 

{c)  (Ja  gen,  '  then,  again,'  is  found  twice  in  An.,  11.  601,  727.  In  Cyne- 
wulf <^l?/^  and  &a  gen  occur  frequently  (six  times  in  Chr.  I-III,  seven  times 
in  EL,  nine  times  in  fu/.),  not  only  in  the  sense  'then,  again,'  but  also  with 
the  meaning  'yet,  furthermore.'  On  the  other  hand  &d git,  git  (once  nu gyt), 
occurs  nine  times  in  An. ;  it  occurs  in  Cynewulf  only  in  Chr.  I,  11.  318,  351. 
£)d  git,  git,  in  A)i.  fills  largely  the  place  which  &d  gen,  gen,  occupies  in 
Cynewulf. 

{d)  lyt  occurs  five  times  in  An.,  in  Cynewulf  only  in  EL,  1.  63  (cf.  EL 
142  lythwon).  Lytel,  the  regular  form  in  Cynewulf,  occurring  eight  times 
{Chr.  1400,  MS.  lyt,  must  read  lytel,  as  is  proved  by  the  metre),  occurs  only 
once  in  An.,  1.  1488. 

(e)  sum  is  found  in  An.  always  with  a  gen.  plural,  never  absolutely  as  in 
Cynewulf  (£"/.  131  ff.,  548;  Chr.  664  ff.,  etc.).  Note  also  the  absolute  use 
in  Ap.  1 1 } 

if)  s^  =  '  afterwards.'  In  Cynewulf  the  form  .r/"<^  varies  with  si&&an, 
the  shorter  form  appearing  twelve  times.  In  An.  the  shorter  form  does  not 
appear  {sy&  of  the  MS.,  An.  1704,  is  manifesdy  to  be  read  sy&&an),  though 
si&&an  is  found  twenty-two  times.  The  phrase  si&  ond  cer,  si&  o&&e  a-?; 
etc.,  occurs  ten  times  in  Cynewulf  (£"/.  four  times,  ////.  three  times,  and 
Chr.  three  times) ;  but  it  does  not  occur  once  in  An.    On  the  other  hand, 

1  Noted  also  by  Fritzsche,  p.  53. 


AUTHORSHIP  OF  THE   POEMS  xlix 

the  phrase  eft  swa  ar  is  found  three  times  in  .///.,  Ijut  not  at  all  in  Cynewulf. 

l^g)  acweaiaii  is  found  eight  times  in  Cynewulf,  —  four  times  \njul.,  three 
in  C/ir.,  once  in  El. ;  it  does  not  occur  in  ^ln.  Becwe&an  occurs  four  times 
in  An.^  but  does  not  appear  in  Cynewulf. 

(Ji)  feor,  adj.,  occurs  five  times  in  Aii.^  but  as  adjective  the  word  is  not 
found  in  Cynewulf. 

(/)  geare,  adv.,  with  the  verbs  cttnnan  and  lui/an,  does  not  occur  in  the 
positive  in  An.,  and  only  once  in  the  comparative,  1.  932.  In  Cynewulf  in 
such  phrases  the  positive  occurs  nine  times,  the  comparative  twice,  and  the 
superlative  once.  The  verbs  ciinnaii  and  ivitan  are,  however,  of  frequent 
occurrence  in  An. 

{J)  The  phrase  cefter  ham  (hyssum')  ivordiwi,  An.  88,  761,  1026,  12 19  (cf. 
after  wordcwiduni,  1447),  at  the  end  of  a  passage  of  direct  discourse,  is  not 
found  in  Cynewulf.^  The  poet  of  An.  also  had'  the  habit  of  introducing 
speeches  with  the  phrase  ivordiuii  cwe&an,  62,  173,  354,  539,  or  ivorde 
CTue&an,  716,  727,  743,  850,  913,  1206,  1280,  1450.  This  phrase  is  found 
only  once  in  Cynewulf,  ful.  92  :  worde  c'wcr&j  as  introductory  to  a  passage 
of  direct  discourse.  Other  phrases,  e.g.  worduin  nicelan,  gesecgan,fn'gnan, 
are  occasionally  but  infrequently  used  by  both  Cynewulf  and  the  poet  of  An. 
The  frequent  use  of  luordum,  ivorde  cwe&an  must  be  counted  a  mannerism 
of  An. 

(5)  Fritzsche,  p.  50,  points  out  that  neither  the  word  for  Bible  nor  that  for 
book  occurs  in  An. ;  and  that  the  poet  nowhere  alludes  to  any  written  sources. 
In  this  respect  he  is  strikingly  different  from  Cynewulf,  who  very  frequently 
refers  to  sources;  cf.  El.  204,  290,  826,  1255;  Chr.  453,  701,  785,  793.  It 
is  noteworthy  that  the  poet  of  Ap.  refers  to  his  sources  in  the  manner  of 
Cynewulf:  cf.  Ap.  1-2,  23,  63,  70. 

The  similarity  in  style  between  Andreas  and  the  Cynewulfian  poems, 
particularly  Elenc,  which  to  the  early  commentators  seemed  a  strong 
argument  for  assigning  Andreas  to  Cynewulf,  cannot  be  allowed  much 
weight  in  determining  the  question  of  authorship.  That  Andreas 
belongs  to  the  general  school  of  Cynewulfian  poetry  is  evident.  But 
when  one  recalls  the  very  homogeneous  character  of  the  poetry  of 
this  school,  —  as  homogeneous  in  its  way  as  the  poetry  of  the  English 
Augustan  period,  —  it  will  be  seen  that  the  same,  verse-form,  similar 
subject  matter,  and  similar  general  tone,  might  all  be  the  common 
characteristics  of  a  number  of  different  poets. 

A  discriminating  observation  will,  however,  bring  to  light  some 
important  differences  between  Andreas  and  the  other  poems  of  the 

1  Cf.  Barnouw,  p.  136. 


1  INTRODUCTION 

Cynewulf  group.  Sarrazin,^  bringing  together  all  the  parallelisms  in 
expression  which  he  could  find  between  Beowulf  and  the  Cynewulfian 
poems  (including  Andreas,  Gt/diac,  Phoenix,  and  Riddles),  attempts  to 
establish  a  special  connection  between  Beounilf  and  Cynewulf,  —  to 
prove,  in  short,  that  Beowulf,  in  its  present  form,  was  composed  by 
Cynewulf.  With  this  main  purpose  of  Sarrazin  we  are  at  present  not 
concerned.^  It  should  be  observed,  however,  how  easily  Sarrazin's 
argument  for  the  Cynewulfian  authorship  of  Andreas  may  be  turned 
against  him.  In  Elene  Sarrazin  finds  37  parallels  to  Beowulf,  in 
Christ  14,  in  fuliana  9,  in  Gudlac  (both  parts)  14,  in  Phoenix  7,  in 
Riddles  1 4 ;  but  in  Andreas  alone  he  finds  68  parallels,  and  this 
number  in  his  second  study  he  increases  to  180.  The  chief  result, 
therefore,  of  Sarrazin's  investigations,  so  far  as  Andreas  is  concerned,  is 
to  show  that  that  poem  occupies  a  peculiar  position  in  the  group  of 
Cynewulfian  poems,  by  reason  of  the  fact  that  it  has  carried  the  system- 
atic borrowing  from  Beowulf  to  a  much  greater  extent  than  any  other 
Cynewulfian  poem.  The  argument  which  establishes  this  special  rela- 
tion between  Andreas  and  Beowulf  Ao&s  so  at  the  cost  of  separating 
Andreas  from  the  other  poems  of  the  Cynewulf  group  —  a  conclusion 
which  confirms  Mather's  observations  on  the  metre  of  Andreas. 

But  the  borrowings  and  adaptations  of  Andreas  from  the  heroic  verse 
are  not  only  more  numerous  than  in  the  poems  of  Cynewulf,  they  are 
also  different  in  tone  and  feeling.  The  contrast  between  the  language 
and  phraseology  of  the  heroic  verse  and  the  thought  of  the  Christian 
legend  is  more  violent  in  Ajidreas  than  in  the  poems  of  Cynewulf,  — 
than  it  is  even  in  Elene,  the  poem  which,  in  this  respect,  stands  near- 
est to  A?idreas.  There  is  in  general  a  lack  of  restraint,  a  conscious 
and  often  labored  use  of  the  devices  of  Anglo-Saxon  poetic  style  in 
Andreas,  which  set  that  poem  sharply  off  from  the  poems  of  Cynewulf.^ 

"^  Beowulf-Studien,  Berlin,  1888,  pp.  Ii4ff. ;  "  Neue  Beowulf-Studien,"  Eng. 
Stud.  XXIII,  221-267. 

2  For  some  discussion  of  Sarrazin's  argument  from  parallels,  see  Kolbing, 
Eng.  Stud.  XIII,  472-480;  Kail,  Anglia  XII,  21-40. 

3  cf  Brooke,  History  of  Early  English  Literature,  p.  424 :  "  The  constant 
use  of  phrases  borrowed  from  Beowulf,  from  Cynewulf  himself,  the  effort  to  be 
specially  heroic  in  description,  to  import  more  of  the  heathen  elements  of  Saga 
into  a  Christian  song  than  even  the  Elene  dared  to  do  —  the  use  of  strange 
words,  even  the  elaborate  invention  of  words  —  point  to  a  poet  who  was  depart- 
ing from  a  temperate  style,  and  suggest,  if  they  do  not  prove,  that  he  [the  author 
of  Andreas']  wrote  at  a  time  when  Cynewulf  was  growing  old." 


POETIC   ELABORATION    IN   ANDREAS  li 

It  seems  impossible,  in  the  light  of  these  considerations,  to  assign 
Andreas  to  Cynewulf.  In  its  external  history  there  is  nothing  to  justify 
such  a  disposition  of  the  poem,  and  in  metre,  language,  and  style  it 
reveals  characteristics  that  hold  it  distinctly  apart  from  the  assuredly 
genuine  poems  of  Cynewulf.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  perhaps  going 
too  far  absolutely  to  deny  the  poem  to  him ;  the  evidence  at  present 
available  does  not  justify  so  dogmatic  an  assertion.  Without  entering 
the  field  of  merely  possible  hypothesis,  we  shall  perhaps  be  going  as 
far  as  our  warrant  permits  if  we  say  that  the  poem,  although  it  follows 
the  general  traditions  of  Cynewulfian  poetry,  is  too  unlike  Christ, 
Juliana,  and  Elene  to  be  held  in  the  same  group  with  them. 


V 

POETIC  ELABORATION  IN  ANDREAS 

Andreas,  "the  Christian  Bcmtiiilf^  as  it  has  been  called,^  is  repre- 
sentative of  that  group  of  Anglo-Saxon  poems  in  which  Christian  themes 
are  treated  in  the  spirit  of  the  secular,  heroic  poetry.  Its  great  com- 
panion-piece in  this  group  is  Elerie.  The  subject  matter  in  both  poems 
is  late  Christian  legend,  —  in  the  one  the  adventures  of  Andrew  and 
Matthew  in  the  strange  land  of  Mermedonia;  in  the  other  the  story 
of  St.  Helena  and  her  discovery  of  the  Cross  in  distant  Palestine.  In 
spite  of  their  subject,  however,  both  are  in  spirit  romantic  stories  of 
incident  and  adventure.^ 

The  framework  of  the  story  of  both  poems  was  given  in  their  sources, 
and,  so  far  as  the  action  is  concerned,  the  authors  show  little  or  no 
power  of  invention.  There  is  not  a  single  incident  in  the  action  of 
Andreas  which  was  not  suggested  by  its  source.^  In  his  adaptation 
and  elaboration  of  themes  and  allusions  in  his  source,  however,  the 
author  of  Andreas  was  original.  Such  elaboration  occurs  chiefly  in 
descriptions  of  nature,  of  towns  and  buildings,  of  spiritual  struggles 

^  Garnett,  English  Literature  I,  27. 

2  Cf.  Ker,  Epic  and  Romance,  p.  376;  The  Dark  Ages,  pp.  263-264. 

^  See  above,  pp.  xxi  ff . ;  and  for  Elene,  see  Glode,  Anglia  IX,  271-318;  Holt- 
hausen,  Zft.  f.  dentsche  Phil.  XXXVII,  1-19.  Brooke,  p.  424.  remarks  that  "the 
writer  of  the  Andreas  has  one  power  Cynewulf  had  not,  iftventiveness  in  incident "  ; 
and  see  further  his  remarks  on  p.  414  and  p.  420. 


lii  ^  INTRODUCTION 

conceived  as  actual  battles,  of  the  relations  existing  between  lord  and 
retainer ;  and  it  is  by  the  effective  use  of  details  of  this  character  that 
he  has  succeeded  in  transmuting  the  fantastic,  Oriental  situations  of 
his  original  into  a  narrative  of  true  English  action  and  feehng. 

The  poem  opens  with  the  conventional  formula  of  the  epic,  citing 
tradition  as  the  source  of  the  story,  although  it  is  all  plainly  of  literary 
origin.^  The  heroic  note  is  struck  in  the  very  opening  lines,  in  the 
words  with  which  the  characters  of  the  poem  are  designated.  The 
apostles  are  the  hegnas,  they  constitute  the  cotnitatus,  of  the  Lord, 
who  is  their  prince  and  king.^  This  conception  of  a  sort  of  theocratic 
kingdom  parallel  to  human  political  institutions  is  consistently  main- 
tained in  the  various  names  which  are  applied  to  the  Lord.^  Christ, 
when  distinguished  from  the  Father,  is  the  yEdelwg,  the  son  of  the 
reigning  Prince,*  accused  by  Satan  of  being  a  usurper.^  As  their  king 
the  Lord  commands  the  apostles  to  go  wherever  it  is  his  will  that  they 
should  go ;  and  so  it  happens  that  Matthew  suffers  the  hardest  fate 
a  retainer  can  suffer  —  he  is  sent  into  a  strange  land,  away  from  the 
comfort  and  support  of  his  lord.® 

This  relation  of  the  Lord  as  commander,  over-lord,  and  his  followers 
as  retainers,  becomes  structurally  important  in  the  body  of  the  poem. 
On  the  one  side  are  Andrew  and  his  companions,  who,  with  Matthew, 
are  the  Christian  warriors,  thanes,  foldogan^  under  the  leadership  of 
the  Lord ;  on  the  other  side  are  the  warrior  Mermedonians  under  the 
leadership  of  Satan.*  By  this  device  of  dividing  all  the  actors  in  the 
story  into  these  two  opposing  camps  the  action  of  the  whole  poem  is 
closely  knit  and  unified.  The  story  becomes  thus  one  of  the  struggle 
between  two  organized  forces,  a  story  literally  of  the  Christian  warfare. 
When  the  heathen  Mermedonians  ride  forth  to  the  attack,  they  come 
with  all  the  tumult  and  apparatus  of  battle,  even  though  their  foe  is 
but  a  solitary  person.^  In  other  ways,  also,  this  heroic  conception  of 
the  action  of  the  poem  is  kept  in  mind.    When  Andrew  is  in  Satan's 

1  See  1.  I,  note.  2  l  3,  note;  cf.  also  323-325;  726,  note. 

^  See  Kent,  Teittonic  Antiquities  in  the  Atidreas  ami  Elene,  pp.  13,  21,  for  a 
list  of  them.  *  568,  649,  91 1.  ^  680,  note. 

8  LI.  5,  6 ;  II  ff.;  note  the  stress  placed  on  the  fact  that  it  was  a  strange  land 
to  which  Matthew  was  sent,  11.  16,  24,  26,  63,  etc.,  and  in  189  ff.  the  extremely 
personal  tone  of  Andrew's  remonstrance  when  a  similar  journey  is  proposed 
to  him.  ^  L.  8.  sgeg^^h.   j^j  .   1 170^  (cf.  822'^) ;   1 296-1299;   1328  ff. 

"See45ff.;    125  ff.;   138;  652  ff. ;   1067  ff. ;    1094  ff.;   1201  ff.;   1269  ff. 


POETIC    ELABORATION    IN   ANDREAS 


liii 


power,  the  latter  exults  over  him  much  as  a  warrior  might  exult  over 
his  defeated  foe ;  ^  when  the  heathen  are  in  distress  they  call  a  council, 
a  witefiagemot,  to  discuss  affairs,  just  as  a  vSaxon  army  might  do  under 
similar  circumstances; '  when  Andrew's  companions  are  given  the  priv- 
ilege of  turning  back  from  the  journey  they  have  undertaken,  in  the 
true  spirit  of  the  comitatus  they  prefer  the  risk  of  death  to  the  disgrace 
of  deserting  their  leader ;  ^  and  in  bargaining  with  the  disguised  sailors 
Andrew  speaks  of  paying  them  with  gifts  of  rings,*  and  even  of  land,^ 
as  a  Saxon  prince  might  speak  of  rewarding  his  retainers. 

Andreas  also  follows  the  traditions  of  native  heroic  verse  in  its  dig- 
nified treatment  and  elaboration  of  allusions  to  cities  and  buildings." 
With  epic  impartiality  commendatory  epithets  are  used  even  of  the 
heathen  city  of  the  Mermedonians ;  it  is  the  winburg^  the  goldbicrg^ 
the  wederbiirg^  the  fniiran  byrig^'^  the  beorhtan  byrig,^^  the  breogostol 
breme}"^  Bare  allusions  are  also  amplified  into  full  descriptions.  The 
brief  statement  of  the  prose  version,  which  is  here  a  literal  translation 
of  the  Ilpafets,  J>a  se  mergen  geworden  was,  ha  se  haliga  Andreas  licgende 
wees  beforan  Marmadonia  ceastre,^^  becomes  in  Andreas  the  detailed 
description  of  11.  831-846.  In  11.  1 155— 11 60  a  description  of  grief  and 
sorrow  is  emphasized  by  a  picture  of  the  city  deserted  and  desolate ;  a 
contrasting  description  of  joy  is  given  in  11.  1655-1657  and  1672-1673, 
with  their  picture  of  the  gold-adorned  hall  of  feasting.  The  passage 
11.  1 229-1 236,  with  its  description  of  the  streets  of  the  city,  is  elabo- 
rated from  a  bare  allusion,  in  the  prose  merely ///r//  hisse  eeastre  lanati}^ 
Likewise  11.  IIZ-ll'^  (part  of  a  connected  passage  omitted  by  the  prose 
version,  but  see  the  Greek  version,  Bonnet,  p.  82,  1.  7)  are,  so  far  as 
the  details  are  concerned,  a  poetic  amplification  of  a  colorless  state- 
ment of  the  original.  So  also  allusions  to  buildings  in  the  city  are 
elaborated.  The  prison  in  which  Matthew  is  held,  mentioned  merely 
as  carcerji  in  the  prose  version, ^^  is  described  in  the  corresponding 
passage  of  the  poem  '^^  by  the  aid  of  various  epithets.    In  this  prison, 


ii3i5ff. 

2  157  ;    1093  ff. ;    1 161  ff. 

3  LI.  396-414;  see  1.  3,  note. 
*  L.  271;  302-303;  476. 

5  L.  303. 

^  Cf.  1.  1236,  note. 
■^  LI.  1637,  1672. 
8  L.  1655. 


9  L.  1697. 
10  LI.  40,  287,  973. 
"  L.  1649. 
12  L.  209. 


12  L.  209. 

13  Bright,  Reader,  p.  118,  11.  14-15. 
"  Bright,  Reader,  p.  123,  1.  i. 

15  Reader,  p.  120,  1.  12. 

16  LI.  1 004- 1 008. 


liv  INTRODUCTION 

according  to  the  prose  version,^  there  stood  a  column,  and  upon  the 
column  a  stone  image.  In  the  poem  this  single  column  is  multipHed 
and  magnified.^  A  similar  heightening  of  an  allusion  of  the  original 
occurs  in  the  mention  of  the  ship  in  which  Andrew  sailed  to  Mermedonia.^ 
The  description  of  the  temple  in  the  poem  *  is  part  of  a  passage  which 
is  omitted  by  the  prose  version.  The  Greek  version,  however,  in  the 
corresponding  passage  says  merely  that  the  Lord  entered  a  temple  of 
the  Gentiles,  ei's  Upov  twv  iOvwv  (Bonnet,  p.  78,  1.  10).  Apparently  the 
Anglo-Saxon  poet  has  in  mind  the  Jewish  temple  at  Jerusalem,^  which 
he  describes  in  the  same  terms  that  the  author  of  the  Beowulf  uses  in 
describing  the  great  hall  Heorot.® 

Among  the  passages  of  the  poem  descriptive  of  natural  phenomena, 
the  epic  elaborations  of  allusions  to  dawn  "^  and  to  sunset  and  night  ^ 
are  noteworthy.  Particularly  interesting  is  the  symbolic  description  in 
11.  1253  ff.,  where  the  allusion  to  the  night  passes  over  into  a  descrip- 
tion of  the  winter,  the  primitive  mythic  matter  of  night  and  winter 
being  thus  fused  into  one  theme. 

The  most  vivid  and  real  descriptions  of  the  poem  are  those  of  the 
sea,  especially  of  the  disturbed  sea.^  The  eagerness  with  which  the  poet 
seizes  the  opportunity  of  introducing  the  description  in  11.  369  ff.  is 
noteworthy.  The  corresponding  passage  of  the  prose  version  says 
merely  :  Ic geseo  hcet  has  brodor  syiit  geswencede  of  hisse  sTewe  hreohnesse 
{Reader,  p.  117,  11.  4-5)  ;  and  ill  the  Greek  version  ^°  it  is  made  quite 
plain  that  the  boat  has  not  yet  been  cast  off  from  land.  In  the  Greek 
version  and  the  prose  the  frightened  disciples  are  offered  the  chance 
of  leaving  the  ship  before  the  voyage  begins,  whereas  in  Andreas  the 
question  of  leaving  the  ship  is  not  raised  until  the  ship  is  on  the  open 
sea.^^  Somewhat  similar  and  equally  vigorous  descriptions  are  the 
accounts  of  the  water-flood  on  land  ^'"  and  of  the  circle  of  fire  with 
which  Andrew  surrounds  the  city  of  the  Mermedonians.^^  Several  of 
the  personifications  in  these  sections  of  the  poem  are  strikingly  imagi- 
native and  vivid.    Cold   and   frost  are  represented  as  hoary  warriors 

1  Reader,  p.  125,  1.  15. 

2  LI.  1492-1495;  the  allusion  to  the  image  is  omitted  in  the  poem,  perhaps 
because  the  columns  were  thought  of  as  holding  up  the  roof  of  the  prison. 

3  Cf.  1.  240,  note.  ^  LI.  666-669.  ^  Cf.  to  ham  cynesiole,  1.  666. 
6  See  1.  668,  note.             ^  LI.  123  ff.;  241  ff. ;  835  ff. ;  1268-1269;   13S8. 

8  LI.  1253  ff.;   1304  ff.;   1456.  9  LI.  369  ff.;  435  ff. ;  489  ff. ;  511  ff. 

10  See  1.  427,  note.         "  Cf.  11.  397-398.         ^2  ^i.  1^22  ff.      i^  li.  i  540  ff. 


POETIC   ELABORATION    IN   ANDREAS  Iv 

stalking  abroad  at  night.^  The  terror  of  the  sea  is  imaginatively  con- 
ceived as  a  power  rising  up  from  the  sea  in  order  to  attack  the  occu- 
pants of  the  boat.^  Hunger  is  figured,  almost  in  the  spirit  of  allegory, 
as  a  '  pale  table-companion,'  ^  and  again  as  a  grim  scather  of  men ;  * 
and  evil  and  hatred  are  personified  as  a  fiery,  consuming  dragon.^ 

The  passages  of  description  and  dialogue  in  the  poem  are  sometimes 
given  a  strikingly  realistic,  even  extravagantly  realistic  coloring.  The 
descriptions  of  battles  between  Andrew  and  the  Mermedonians  have 
been  already  mentioned ;  an  even  more  grotesque  example  is  the  de- 
scription of  the  flood  as  a  beer-feaSt.^  The  fire  described  in  11.  1540  ff., 
which  in  the  Greek  version  is  the  conventional  fiery  cloud  from  heaven, 
becomes  in  the  poem  a  conflagration  such  as  must  have  been  familiar 
to  the  inhabitants  of  the  inflammable  early  Teutonic  villages."  Some 
of  the  passages  of  dialogue,  however,  are  charmingly  naive  and  fresh, 
as,  for  example,  when  Andrew  attempts  to  evade  the  command  which 
the  Lord  has  laid  upon  him,®  or  bargains  with  the  sailors  concerning 
his  passage-money,®  or  asks  for  lessons  in  sailing.^" 

In  determining  the  extent  to  which  Andreas  was  indebted  to  specific 
Anglo-Saxon  poems,  the  first  place  must  be  given  to  Beowulf.  Not  only 
are  phrases  and  words  borrowed  liberally,  but  general  situations  are 
made  to  recall  those  of  the  earlier  poem.  The  whole  narrative  frame- 
work of  Andreas  plainly  suggests  the  first  part  of  Beowulf.  Andrew's 
mission  to  the  Mermedonians  is  parallel  to  that  of  Beowulf  to  the 
Danes ;  the  elaboration  of  the  sea  voyage  in  Andreas  is  evidently  due 
to  recollections  of  Beowulf's  journey;  Andrew  performs  his  task  of 
cleansing  the  heathen  land  of  the  Mermedonians  from  the  sin  of  canni- 
balism, and  Beowulf  cleanses  the  great  hall  Heorot  of  the  man-eating 
monster  Grendel ;  both  heroes,  their  work  being  finished,  return  to  the 
land  from  which  they  set  out. 

These  general  similarities  in  situation  are  made  more  striking  by 
frequent  parallelism  of  phrasing  between  the  two  poems,  as  though 

1  L.  1258.  2  Li.  442-445,  and  cf.  note  to  11.  444-445.  ^  L.  1088. 

*  L.  1 1 15.  It  is  particularly  interesting  to  compare  these  personifications  of 
famine  with  EL  691,  where  night,  hunger,  and  a  prison-house,  three  themes  that 
always  stirred  the  imagination  of  the  poet  of  Andreas,  are  mentioned  in  a  perfectly 
colorless  way  characteristic  of  the  difference  between  the  two  poems. 

8  L.  769,  and  note.  ^  LI.  1 532  ff. 

■^  See  Gummere,  Germanic  Origins,  p.  96.  *  LI.  190-201. 

9  LI.  47  Iff.  10  L.  4S5. 


X 


Ivi  INTRODUCTION 

the  author,  regarding  his  hero  as  another  Beowulf,  strove  as  much  as 
possible  to  tell  his  story  in  the  same  language  as  the  story  of  Beowulf.^ 
After  Beowulf^  the  poems  which  show  the  closest  affinity  to  Andreas 
are  the  Cynewulfian  poems,  particularly  EleJie^^  Christ,^  Guthlac,^  and 
/ulicifia.^     Of  these  four  poems  Elene  offers   the   largest  number  of 

1  Parallels  between  Andreas  and  Becnutilf  3.xe  pointed  out  in  the  notes  to  the 
following  lines:  i,  3,  8,  24,  2^,  43,  45,  51,  64,  72,  106,  116,  123,  127,  128,  150,  151, 
152,  154,  180-181,  20S,  223,  230,  235,  240,  242,  259,  265,  267,  273,  301,  3_o2,  310, 
316,  320-323,  324,  ^,  348,  358,  360,  366,  370,  371,  377-380.  393.  414,  421,  425- 
426,  429,  439,  454,  458-460,  464-  474-476,  493-495.  497,  5".  541.  553-554,  558, 
591,  600,  620,  622,  668,  698,  706-707,  732,  769,  784,  803,  818,  824,  834,  S37,  840, 
841,  843,  845,  850,  914,  932,  940,  963,  982,  985,  988,  994,  1002,  1012,  1013,  1037, 
1046,  1074,  1085,  1097,  1115-1116,  1132,  1137-1138,  1140,  1155,  1188,  1191,  1198, 
1208,  1227,  1234,  1235,  1236,  1240,  1241,  1245,  1254,  1269-1270,  1275,  1305,  1312, 
1324,  1351,  1359,  1393,  1447,  1469,  1481-1482,  1490-1495,  1526,  1531,  1538,  1542, 
1547,  1548,  1555-1556,  1557,  1563,  1565,  1574,  1589,  1599,  1612,  1616,  1619,  1626, 
1627,  1667,  1694-1695,  1722.  See  Arnold,  Notes  on  Beowulf,  pp.  1 21-126,  for  a 
discussion  showing  that  the  borrowing  was  by  Andreas  from  Beowulf,  not,  as 
Sarrazin  would  have  it,  by  Beowulf  irovn.  Andreas. 

2  Parallels  between  Andreas  and  Elene  are  pointed  out  in  the  notes  to  the 
following  lines:  10,  31,  39,  40-41,  62,  65-66,  70-71,  95,  106,  123,  133,  140,  204, 
223,  235,  237,  265,  302,  360,  395,  41C,  416,  458,  470,  485,  523,  544,  557,  564,  568, 
5^9.  573.  583,  585,  588,  595-596,  602,  605,  606,  631,  645,  646,  672,  684,  688,  693, 
718-724,  728,  736,  742,  750,  752,  770,  784,  788,  805,  832,  834,  852,  876,  892,  915, 
932,  963,  967,  988,  1002,  1008,  1015,  1035,  1046,  1056,  1059,  1087,  1144,  1156,  1157- 
1158,  1165,  1 166,  1202,  1204,  1242,  1243,  1251,  1271,  1278,  1312,  1313,  1326-1327, 
1351.  1355.  1379.  1481-1482,  1491.  1511.  1520,  1535.  1538,  1542,  1618,  1627,  1636, 
1637,  1640,  1643,  1649,  1684,  1685,  1688,  1698,  1699,  1709. 

3  Parallels  are  pointed  out  in  the  notes  to  the  following  lines :  33-34,  36,  50, 
54.  59.  99.  104.  105,  III,  130,  139,  190,  198,  201,  206,  227,  228-229,  242,  253,  313, 
323,  j2>^z^2,9^-^^T'  394,  408-409,  425-426,  501-502,  523,  525,  541,  564,  567,  576, 
580,  585,  599,  606,  630,  640,  661,  671,  717,  721,  746,  747,  759,  776,  7S9,  795,  798, 
800,  810,  814,  830,  832,  845,  868,  874,  938,  939,  967,  968-969,  975,  97S,  979,  988, 
1005,  loio,  1013,  1037,  1059,  1069,  1085,  1087,  1144,  1166,  1169,  1204,  1207,  1278, 
1291,  1340,  1436,  i486,  1511,  1548,  1549,  1555,  1557,  1563,  1603,  1610,  1619,  1633, 
1637,  1645,  1649,  1685,  1686,  1709. 

*  Parallels  are  pointed  out  in  the  notes  to  the  following  Hnes :  8,  25,  31,  88,  89, 
105,  113,  n6,  140,  164,  167,  190,  228-229,  233,  294-295,  300,  335',  387,  395,  463, 
544,  558,  568,  569,  594,  602,  626,  642,  654,  721,  776,  781,  808,  810,  818,  824,  836, 
837,  887,  910,  938,  970,  991,  looi,  loio,  1072-1074,  1107,  1112,  1144,  1210,  1227, 
1239.  1243,  1254,  1266,  1278,  1284-1286,  1294,  1296,  1334-1335.  1361,  1476,  1481- 
1482,  1549,  1579,  1581,  1618,  1637,  1645,  1685,  1696,  1699,  1709. 

^  Parallels  are  pointed  out  in  the  notes  to  the  following  lines :  52,  53,  57-58, 
82,  92-93,  140,  179,  184,  195,  217,  237,  327,  470,  493-495.  524.  528,  556,  605,  611, 


POETIC    ELABORATION    IN   ANDREAS  Ivii 

parallels  to  Andreas,  but  the  parallels  to  the  other  poems  prove  that 
they  must  all  have  been  very  familiar  to  the  author  of  Andreas.  The 
parallels  between  A?idrcas  and  Juliana,  though  fewer  in  number  than 
the  parallels  between  Andreas  and  any  of  the  other  three  poems,  are 
particularly  interesting,  since  the  evidences  of  borrowing  on  the  part  of 
Andreas  are  clearer  there  than  in  the  case  of  any  other  poem  except 
Beowulf.  Besides  the  Cynewulfian  j)oems  and  Beowulf,  almost  every 
other  Anglo-Saxon  poem  of  any  length  contains  a  number  of  phrases 
which  are  also  found  in  Andreas ;  but  these  parallels  are  sporadic,  and, 
though  they  indicate  the  wide  acquaintanceship  of  the  author  of  Andreas 
with  the  traditions  of  Anglo-Saxon  poetry,  they  do  not  prove  any  spe- 
cial dependence  of  Andreas  upon  other  poems,  nor  any  closer  relation- 
ship than  is  perhaps  usual  and  normal. 

Besides  these  amplifying  passages  and  reminiscences  taken  from  the 
literary  traditions  of  Anglo-Saxon  poetry,  there  are  also  in  Andreas 
numerous  additions  of  passages  of  religious  color,  chiefly  recollections 
from  the  Bible  or  homiletic  literature.  References  to  the  Deity  are 
amplified  by  allusions  to  his  attributes  and  powers  and  to  the  creation  ;  ^ 
and  the  mention  of  heaven  naturally  suggests  the  description  of  the 
joys  of  heaven,-  or  of  hell,  the  tortures  of  hell.^  Occasional  passages 
of  hymnic  character  are  also  developed.'*  Most  frequently,  however,  the 
additions  consist  of  illustrative  quotations  from  the  Bible,  the  explana- 
tion of  a  proper  name,^  the  amplification  of  an  allusion  already  con- 
tained in  the  original,®  as,  for  example,  an  allusion  to  the  resurrection," 
to  the  temple,^  or  to  the  crucifixion.^  The  allusion  to  idols  and  the 
heathen  temple  in  11.  1 687-1694  is  all  the  addition  of  the  poet.  The 
story  of  the  fall  of  Satan  and  his  imprisonment  in  hell  was  familiar  to 
the  poet.^°    Other  references  derived  from  ecclesiastical  tradition  are 

695,  734,  746,  755.  792,  805,  806,  807,  845,  861,  873,  8S7,  932,  978,  979,  994,  1071, 
1075-1077,  1086,  1127,  1144,  1166,  1180,  1197,  1223,  1238,  1242,  1288,  1310,  1313, 
1315,  1319,  1326-1327,  1328-1329,  1342,  1355,  1415,  1436,  1461,  1462-1463,  1469- 
1477,  1470,  i486,  1548,  1558-1559,  1579,  1618,  1619,  1629,  1684,  1690. 

1  Cf.  11.  161-162,  324-329,  518-525,  535-536,  541-548.  747-75O'  996-999.  1680  ff.; 
and  see  Fritzsche,  p.  24;  Ramhorst,  pp.  12-13. 

2  LI.  102-106,  225-229,  597-600,  807-810,  869-874,  977-980,  1 1 52-1 1 56. 

3  LI.  1190-1194,  1377-1385.  ''  LI.  640-643. 
*  LI.  540-548,  1 284-1 295.                                8  LI.  666  ff. 

5  LI.  12-13,  757'  note;  879,  note.  ^  LI.  960  ff. 

^  Cf.  332-339,  note;   1418-1424,  note.         ^'^  Cf.  11.  iigoff.,  1377  ff.,  1701  ff. 


Iviii  INTRODUCTION 

those  to  the  Cherubim  and  Seraphim,^  and  to  Ethiopia  as  the  seat  of 
Matthew's  labors.^ 

Some  of  the  passages  of  this  nature  are  remarkable  for  an  apparent 
ignorance  or  misunderstanding  of  Biblical  allusions.  Thus  in  11.  165- 
166,  an  addition  of  the  poem,  the  three  synonymous  words  Ebreum, 
Israhelum,  and  ludea  are  apparently  understood  by  the  poet  as  mean- 
ing three  different  peoples.  The  statement  of  11.  582-584  is  not 
literally  in  accord  with  the.  New  Testament  narrative,  as  Christ  raised 
only  Lazarus,  the  son  of  the  widow  of  Nain,  and  Jairus'  daughter  from 
the  dead ;  perhaps  the  poet  may  have  had  the  Evangelium  Nicodemi 
in  mind.  The  statement  of  1.  1324,  that  Christ  was  put  to  death  by 
Herod,  shows  an  astonishing  ignorance  of  the  story  of  the  crucifixion. 
Herod  is  not  mentioned  in  the  corresponding  passage  of  the  prose  ;^ 
but  in  the  Greek  version  ^  the  manuscripts  vary,  some  reading  as 
A?idreas,  others  adding  the  name  of  John  as  the  one  put  to  death  by 
Herod ;  and  still  others  read  Pilate  for  Herod.  But  for  the  introduc- 
tion of  the  names  Joshua  and  Tobias,^  in  connection  with  the  story  of 
the  Commandments,  there  is  no  authority  either  in  the  Anglo-Saxon 
prose  version  or  in  any  of  the  manuscripts  of  the  Greek  version  of  the 
legend.  The  names  appear  to  be  inserted  arbitrarily  from  the  chance 
recollection  of  the  poet.  On  the  other  hand,  in  1.  778  ff.  the  poem 
appears  to  correct  its  source.  In  the  Greek  version*'  the  twelve 
patriarchs  are  said  to  be  buried  in  Machpelah,  although  the  Old  Testa- 
ment does  not  state  that  any  of  them  was  buried  there,  and  one, 
Joseph,'^  was  certainly  buried  elsewhere.  The  poet  speaks  only  of 
Abraham,   Isaac,  and  Jacob,  all  of  whom  were  buried  in  Machpelah. 

With  the  exception  of  one  brief,  colorless  passage,^  the  poet  nowhere 
in  the  poem  alludes  to  himself  or  to  his  own  experiences. 

1  LI.  717-726,  and  notes.  ^  l   1516. 

2  L.  432,  note.  6  Bonnet,  p.  83,  1.  3. 

3  Bright,  Reader,  p.  123.  '^ Josh.  XXIV,  32. 
*  Bonnet,  p.  105,  1.  3.  8  1478-1479. 


THE   LEGEND   OF   ST.  ANDREW  Hx 

VI 

THE   LEGEND   OP'  ST.  ANDREW 

The  story  of  the  Twelve  Apostles,  as  it  is  presented  in  the  New 
Testament,  offered  a  peculiarly  inviting  field  to  the  imagination  of  the 
apocryphal  elaborator.  The  Apostles,  who  during  the  lifetime  of  their 
Lord  were  his  immediate  personal  followers,  were  commissioned  after 
his  death  to  go  as  witnesses  "  unto  the  uttermost  parts  of  the  earth."  ^ 
Of  these  various  missions,  however,  little  further  is  said.  Some  of  the 
acts  of  Peter,  Paul,  John,  and  James  son  of  Zebedee,  are  briefly  narrated  ; 
but  concerning  Andrew,  Philip,  Thomas,  Simon  Zelotes,  Judas  brother 
of  James,  Matthew,  Bartholomew,  James  son  of  Alpheus,  and  Matthias, 
aside  from  a  few  general  allusions  to  the  Apostles  as  a  whole,  the  New 
Testament  records  are  almost  completely  silent.'^ 

But  since  the  command  had  been  given  to  the  Apostles  to  go  and 
teach  all  nations,'  what  more  natural  than  the  attempt  to  discover  the 
country  to  which  each  apostle  was  sent?  Thus  as  early  as  the  second 
century  *  arose  the  legend  of  the  Zots  of  the  Apostles,  the  Sortes  Apos- 
tolorian.  According  to  this  legend  the  Apostles  cast  lots  among  them- 
selves that  each  might  know  the  country  into  which  he  was  to  go  and 
teach,  and  in  accordance  with  these  lots  they  set  out  on  their  various 
ways.  This  legend  is  frequently  found  as  the  opening  passage  of  the 
apocryphal  acts  of  the  Apostles.^  In  course  of  time  it  became  an 
unquestioned  part  of  church  tradition,  acquiring,  like  the  Apostles' 
Creed,  almost  the  same  teverence  as  that  accorded  to  the  true  canon.® 
To  this  account  of  the  dispersion  of  the  Apostles  to  all  lands  brief 
notices  were  later  added  concerning  their  activity  and  death  in  their 
respective  countries,  and  thus  arose  the  type  of  narrative  represented 
by  the' Anglo-Saxon  Fates  of  the  Apostles. 

This  legend  of  the  dispersion  of  the  Apostles  was  only  the  beginning 
of  a  great  cycle  of  romantic,  apocryphal  tradition,  which,  taking  up  the 

1  Acts  I,  8. 

2  See  Newman,  Parochial  Sermons  I,  209-215  (New  York,  1843),  for  a  con- 
nected survey  of  all  the  allusions  to  Andrew  in  the  New  Testament. 

3  Matt.  XXVIII,  19.  4  Lipsius,  I,  11. 

6  Cf.  the  opening  Vm&soi  Andreas;  and  see  Lipsius,  I,  1 1-13,  for  other  examples. 
6  Eusebius,  Hist.  Eccles.  Ill,  i,  cites  the  legend  as  authority  for  the  various 
lands  in  which  the  Apostles  labored. 


Ix  INTRODUCTION 

life  of  each  Apostle  in  turn,  made  it  the  center  of  a  comprehensive 
history,  much  as  in  later  times  certain  of  Charlemagne's  doze  per 
became  heroes  of  special  separate  narratives.  The  materials  for  these 
apocryphal  lives,  which  passed  under  the  name  of  the  acts  (Ilpafeis), 
or  the  journeys  (Ile/otoSot),  or  the  miracles  (©au/Aara),  or  the  martyr- 
dom (Maprvptov,  TeAeicoo-ts),  of  the  respective  Apostles,  were  sometimes 
derived  from  local  tradition  —  usually  the  attempt  to  trace  back  some 
foundation  to  apostolic  times,  as  e.g.  the  foundation  of  the  church  at 
Constantinople,  ascribed  to  St.  Andrew,  or  of  the  church  at  Rome, 
ascribed  to  St.  Peter.  Often  old  tales  were  used  to  carry  certain  doc- 
trinal and  partisan  views ;  and  doubtless  often  the  stories  were  merely 
the  expression  of  the  romantic  imagination  of  the  faithful.  In  general 
the  tone  of  all  these  compositions  is  extremely  popular.^ 

Most  of  these  lives  were  not  originally  intended,  however,  to  be 
merely  entertaining.  More  or  less  heretical  in  their  origins,  they  were 
devised  to  spread  heretical  (chiefly  Gnostic)  beliefs  and  customs  within 
the  boundaries  of  the  church.  Their  composition  came  gradually  to 
be  ascribed  to  one  Leucius  Charinus,  discipulus  diaboli  as  he  is  called 
in  the  Decretal  of  Gelasius,^  a  name  which  is  frequently  met  with  in 
the  writings  of  the  fathers  from  the  fifth  century  on,  always  accom- 
panied by  the  accusation  of  heretical  teaching.®  But  the  composition 
of  the  lives  themselves  must  have  been  a  slow  and  cumulative  process, 
and  the  name  Leucius  Charinus  was  merely  the  peg  on  which-  a  num- 
ber of  unattached  histories  were  hung.  The  book  of  which  Leucius 
Charinus  thus  became  the  traditional  author  appears  to  have  grown  until 
it  finally  included  the  acts  of  all  Twelve  Apostles.  Photius  (patriarch 
of  Constantinople,  ca.  981)  criticises  in  detail  a  collection  containing 
acts  of  Peter,  John,  Andrew,  Thomas,  and  Paul,  and  mentions  as  cur- 
rent among  heretics  a  collection  of  the  acts  of  all  Twelve  Apostles.'* 
Acts  of  all  the  five  Apostles  mentioned  by  Photius  have  been  preserved 
to  the  present  day,  and  fragments  of  acts  of  Philip  and  of  Matthew 
have  been  found  ;  but  of  the  acts  of  the  remaining  Apostles  nothing 
can  be  determined  with  certainty. 

1  See  Lipsius,  I,  7-8 ;  von  Dobschiitz,  "  Der  Roman  in  der  altchristlichen 
Literatur,"  in  Deutsche  Ruiidscliau  CXI,  87-106  (April,  1902),  for  a  general 
summary  of  the  characteristics  of  these  legends. 

2  Migne,  Patrolog.  Lat.  LIX,  162. 

^  Cf.  Lipsius,  I,  44  ff.,  for  a  detailed,  and  Harnack,  p.  ii6ff.,  for  a  briefer, 
discussion  of  this  character.  *  Cf.  Lipsius,  I,  73. 


THE    LE(;END   of    ST.  ANDREW  Ixi 

The  earliest  trace  of  special  acts  of  Andrew  is  contained  in  a  passage 
of  Eusebius  (ca.  265-340)/  who  characterizes  them,  among  various 
other  apocryphal  writings,  as  the  fictions  (avaTrXdafxara)  of  heretics. 
From  this  time  on  there  are  frequent  allusions  to  acts  of  Andrew,  prov- 
ing beyond  question  that  well-known  acts  of  Andrew^  which  bore  origi- 
nally a  strong  heretical  coloring,  must  have  been  in  existence  as  early 
as  the  beginning  of  the  fourth  century.  Of  these  acts,  however,  only 
the  later  Catholic  revisions  have  been  preserved,  as  is  the  case  with 
all  the  other  apocryphal  acts  of  the  Apostles  that  have  come  down  to 
us.  These  later  redactions  fall  into  two  distinct  groups,  one  relating 
the  acts  of  Andrew  in  the  lands  about  the  Black  Sea,  the  other  his  acts 
in  Greece.  Without  attempting  to  reconstruct  the  earlier  comprehen- 
sive narrative  of  the  acts  of  Andrew  of  which  these  later  versions  are 
probably  the  fragmentary  survivals,^  or  to  recount  the  numerous  docu- 
ments in  the  various  languages  in  which  these  survivals  have  been 
preserved,  we  shall  endeavor  to  show  the  connection  between  the  two 
groups  of  acts,  and,  at  the  same  time,  to  point  out  the  probable  ulti- 
mate origin  of  the  legend  of  Andrew  in  the  story  of  his  activity  in  the 
regions  about  the  Black  Sea. 

The  first  group  of  acts,  those  which  relate  Andrew's  adventures  in 
the  lands  about  the  Black  Sea,  consists  of  two  parts.  The  first  part,  the 
Ac/s  of  Andrew  afid  Matthew  in  the  city  of  the  Anthropophagi,^  tells 
the  story  of  the  imprisonment  of  Matthew  by  the  anthropophagi,  the 
freeing  of  Matthew  by  Andrew,  and  the  conversion  of  the  anthropophagi 
by  Andrew.  The  second  part,  the  Acts  of  Peter  and  A?idrew,^  is  a  con- 
tinuation of  the  Acts  of  Andreiv  and  Matthew.  In  the  Acts  of  Andreio 
and  Matthew  (Ilpaleis,  chap.  21),  after  Matthew  has  been  released 
from  prison  he  and  his  two  disciples  are  taken  up  in  a  cloud  and  are 
conveyed  to  the  mountain  where  Peter  is  then  teaching,  where  they 
remain.  When  the  time  comes  for  him  to  leave  the  city  of  the  anthro- 
pophagi, Andrew  declares  his  intention  of  going  to  his  disciples 
(chap.  32),  and  the  Lord,  in  rebuking  Andrew  (chap.  2,2))^  tells  him 

1  Ilisi.  Eccles.,  ed.  Dindorf,  III,  25;  Fabricius,  II,  747  ff-.  quotes  in  full  all 
the  early  allusions  to  acts  of  Andrew. 

2  See  Lipsius,  I,  545  ff.,  for  such  an  attempt. 

3  For  bibliographical  references,  see  above,  p.  xxi,  note  i. 

^  Printed  fragmentarily  by  Tischendorf,  Apocalypses  Apocrypfiae,  p.  161  ff.,  more 
fully  by  Bonnet,  Part  2,  Vol.  I,  pp.  1 1 7-1 27.  Cf.  Lipsius,  I,  553  ff .,  for  an  abstract 
of  the  contents  of  the  Acts  of  Peter  and  Andre%sj. 


Ixii  INTRODUCTION 

that  after  seven  days  Andrew  shall  seek  his  disciples  and  go  away  with 
them  to  the  city  of  the  barbarians  (eh  rrjv  iroXiv  twv  /SapjSdpwv,  Bonnet, 
p.  II 6,  1.  i).  At  the  opening  of  the  Acfs  of  Peter  and  Andrew,  we  are 
told  that  after  Andrew  left  the  city  of  the  anthropophagi  he  was  taken 
up  in  a  cloud  and  carried  to  the  mountain  where  were  Peter,  Matthew, 
and  Matthew's  two  disciples,  here  named  Alexander  and  Rufus.  The 
land  in  which  this  meeting  takes  place  is  no  longer  the  land  of  the 
anthropophagi,  but  the  land  of  the  barbarians,  to  the  inhabitants  of 
which  Andrew  is  commissioned  to  preach,  x^fter  Andrew  has  related 
his  experiences  in  the  city  of  the  anthropophagi  Christ  appears  to  the 
Apostles  in  the  form  of  a  boy  and  commands  them  to  go  to  the  city  of 
the  barbarians.  They  set  out  and  on  their  way  meet  with  a  man  plow- 
ing beside  the  road.  They  ask  him  for  bread,  with  the  intention  of 
reading  in  his  willingness  or  unwillingness  to  comply  with  their  request 
an  omen,  good  or  evil,  of  their  activity  in  the  city  of  the  barbarians. 
The  man  declares  himself  willing  to  give  them  bread ;  but,  as  he  has 
none  at  hand,  he  entrusts  his  field  and  oxen  to  their  care  while  he  goes 
to  the  city  to  procure  it.  During  his  absence  the  apostles  plow  and 
sow  the  field  with  seed,  which  immediately  springs  up  and  ripens  into 
an  abundant  harvest.  When  the  plowman  returns  and  sees  what  has 
been  done  in  his  absence  he  falls  at  the  feet  of  the  Apostles  and  is 
converted.  He  carries  the  wonderful  news  to  the  city,  bearing  a  sheaf 
of  the  miraculous  grain  with  him,  and  prepares  his  house  for  the  recep- 
tion of  the  Apostles.  But  Satan  enters  the  hearts  of  the  elders  of  the 
city  and  they  determine  to  forbid  entrance  to  the  Apostles.  Having 
heard  of  the  Apostles'  abhorrence  of  immodesty,  they  disrobe  a  harlot 
and  place  her  before  the  gates  of  the  city.  When  the  Apostles  reach 
the  city,  at  the  prayer  of  Andrew  the  harlot  is  carried  up  into  the  air 
by  the  Archangel  Michael,  where  she  remains  hovering  above  the  heads 
of  the  people.  As  a  result  of  this  miracle  many  are  converted  ;  the  Apos- 
tles enter  the  city,  preach,  work  miracles,  and  establish  churches.  The 
concluding  episode  of  the  Acts  tells  how  Onesiphoros,  a  rich  citizen  of  the 
city  of  the  barbarians,  is  converted  through  receiving  the  power  of  making 
a  camel  pass  through  the  eye  of  a  needle.  The  Apostles  then  continue 
their  travels,  bearing  with  them  the  blessings  of  the  newly  converted. 

There  can  be  no  doubt  that  in  these  Acts  of  Peter  and  Andrew  we 
have  a  fragment  of  the  older  ^(.piohoi  'Av8p€ov  connecting  immediately 
with"  the  Acts  of  Andreiv  and  Matthew  in  the  city  of  the  Anthropophagi. 


THE    LEGEND   OF   ST.   ANDREW  Ixiii 

The  two  combined,  however,  must  have  constituted  only  part  of  a 
larger  life  of  x'\ndrew,  since  the  narrative  is  manifestly  unfinished  at  the 
conclusion  of  the  Acfs  of  Peter  and  Andrew.  For  a  complete  synthetic 
survey  of  the  life  and  acts  of  Andrew,  we  must  turn  to  the  narrative 
of  the  acts  of  Andrew  in  Greece. 

For  this  second  group  of  the  acts  of  Andrew  we  are  dependent  upon 
more  thoroughgoing  Catholic  revisions  of  material  taken  from  the  older 
IleptoSot.  The  narrative  is  preserved  in  various  versions  in  Greek, ^  and 
in  a  Latin  version,^  entitled  De  gestis  beati  Andreae  Aposioli,  which 
forms  part  of  the  so-called  Abdias  collection.^  The  narrative  in  these 
versions  gives  a  connected  survey  of  the  whole  life  of  St.  Andrew. 
After  a  brief  summary  of  the  passages  in  which  Andrew  is  mentioned  in 
the  New  Testament,  the  Abdias  text  begins  with  an  account  of  the 
acts  of  Andrew  in  the  country  of  the  antliropophagi.  Having  received 
Achaia  as  his  province,  Andrew  sets  sail  from  his  country,  Achaia,  fof 
the  city  of  the  anthropophagi,  here  named  Mermedonia,  in  order  to 
free  his  brother  Matthew  from  prison.  The  journey  to  Mermedonia  and 
Andrew's  acts  among  the  anthropophagi  are  narrated  very  briefly,  and 
nothing  whatever  is  said  about  the  continuation  of  the  Acts  of  Andretv 
and  Matthew  in  the  Acts  of  Peter  and  Andrew.  Andrew's  return 
journey  to  Achaia,  however,  is  given  in  great  detail.  The  places 
through  which  he  passes  are  Amaseia,  Sinope,  Nicaea,  Nicomedia  ;  then, 
crossing  the  Hellespont,  he  reaches  Byzantium,  passes  through  Thrace 
and  the  city  Perinthus,  through  Macedonia  and  the  cities  Philippi  and 
Thessalonica,  at  all  of  which  places  he  performs  numerous  miracles. 

1  Edited  by  Tischendorf,  Acta  Apcstolortmi  Apocrypha,  p.  105  ff.,  and  by  Bonnet, 
Part  2,  Vol.  I,  p.  I  ff.  For  a  description  of  these  versions,  see  Lipsius,  I,  140, 
545-6,  and  Bonnet,  Praefatio,  xi  ff. 

2  Fabricius,  II,  456-515.  A  somewhat  compressed  version  of  the  narrative  as 
it  is  given  in  Fabricius  is  found  in  the  work  of  Gregory  of  Tours  entitled  De 
tniractilis  beati  Andreae  (Migne,  Patrolog.  Lat.  LXXI,  Col.  1099).  Gregory 
announces  in  a  prologue  to  his  narrative  that  he  has  revised  an  earUer  work  on 
St.  Andrew  because  of  its  verbosity;  Lipsius,  I,  138,  thinks  it  probable  that  the 
Fabricius  text  was  the  one  which  Gregory  revised. 

3  This  work,  which  purports  to  have  been  written  first  in  Hebrew  by  Abdias, 
first  bishop  of  Babylon,  to  have  been  then  translated  into  Greek  by  Abdias'  dis- 
ciple Eutropius,  and  then  into  Latin  by  one  Africanus,  was  most  certainly  (accord- 
ing to  Lipsius,  in  Smith  and  Wace,  Dictionary  of  Cliristiati  Biography,  s.v. 
Abdias)  written  in  Latin  and  originally  in  Western  Europe.  Sometime  after 
524  A.D.  is  assigned  as  the  date  of  its  composition. 


Ixiv  INTRODUCTION 

He  finally  reaches  Patras  in  Achaia,  the  scene  of  his  last  labors. 
Maximilla,  the  wife  of  the  proconsul  Aegeates,  lies  sick  of  a  fever,  and 
her  servant  Ephidama,  one  of  the  faithful,  calls  upon  the  Apostle  for 
help.  Andrew  restores  Maximilla  to  health  but  refuses  Aegeates'  offer 
of  money  in  payment  of  his  services.  Soon  after  this  the  brother  of  the 
proconsul,  Stratocles,  arrives  from  Italy,  and  Andrew  relieves  his  favorite 
attendant,  a  boy  named  Alcman,  from  the  torments  of  demons  that 
afflict  him.  As  a  result  of  these  miracles  Maximilla  is  converted  and, 
during  the  absence  of  Aegeates,  grants  the  Apostle  permission  to  preach 
in  the  praetorium.  Aegeates,  unexpectedly  returning,  is  prevented 
through  the  prayer  of  Andrew  from  appearing  in  the  praetorium  until 
after  Andrew  has  blessed  and  dismissed  his  audience.  Maximilla  more 
and  more  frequently  comes  to  the  Apostle  in  order  to  hear  his  words 
of  instruction,  and  in  the  end  takes  upon  herself  the  vow  of  chastity. 
'Angered  at  this,  Aegeates  seizes  Andrew  and  casts  him  into  prison.  On 
the  following  day  he  ascends  the  judgment-seat  and,  having  sum- 
moned Andrew  before  him,  commands  him  to  cease  from  his  foolish 
and  superstitious  ^  teachings.  Upon  Andrew's  refusal  Aegeates  sentences 
him  to  three  times  seven  strokes,  and  delivers  him  over  to  be  bound, 
but  not  nailed,^  hand  and  foot  to  the  cross.  The  people,  enraged  at  the 
action  of  Aegeates,  are  restrained  by  Andrew  from  injuring  the  proconsul. 
Andrew,  after  addressing  the  cross  as  the  goal  of  his  expectations,  is 
bound  upon  it  by  the  servants  of  Aegeates.  For  a  day  and  a  night  he 
preached  uninterruptedly  from  the  cross.  On  the  following  day  Aegeates 
yields  to  the  request  of  the  people  and  prepares  to  release  his  victim. 
Aegeates  himself  comes  to  the  cross,  but  Andrew  is  willing  to  die,  and, 
after  prayer,  rejoicing  and  glorifying  the  Lord,  he  gives  up  the  spirit. 

The  body  of  the  saint,  which  remained  uncorrupted,  is  buried  by 
Maximilla.  Aegeates,  seized  by  a  demon,  precipitates  himself  from  a 
high  place  and  is  killed.  Stratocles,  his  brother,  who  had  embraced 
the  true  faith,  refuses  the  succession  to  his  brother's  riches,  declaring 
that  all  things  that  were  his  should  perish  with  him.  The  30th  of 
November  is  given  as  the  day  on  which  Andrew  died. 

The  redaction  of  Gregory  of  Tours  ^  adds,  at  the  conclusion  of  the 
narrative,  an  account  of  the  miracle  which  occurs  at  the  grave  of  the 

^  Vana  et  superstiiiosa,  Fabricius,  II,  510. 

2  Ligatis  manibtis  et  pedibus  et  /ton  clavis  affix  lis  ^  Fabricius,  II,  511. 

^  Cf.  above,  p.  Ixiii,  note  2. 


THE  LEGEND  OF  ST.  ANDREW  Ixv 

Apostle  :  manna  and  fragrant  oil  flow  from  the  grave,  and  the  greater 
or  less  abundance  of  the  manna  and  the  oil  foretell  the  prosperity  of 
the  year  to  come.  In  some  years  there  is  such  an  abundance  of  oil 
that  it  flows  to  the  middle  of  the  church,  which  is  dedicated  to  the 
Apostle.^ 

The  question  of  the  relation  of  these  two  groups  of  acts  to  each 
other  must  next  engage  our  attention.  The  narrative  preserved  in  the 
pseudo-Abdias  reveals  a  larger  general  plan  and  a  completer  unification 
of  material  than  the  two  sections  of  the  acts  of  Andrew  constituting 
the  first  group.  Are  the  two  fragmentary  narratives  therefore  to  be 
regarded  as  dissociated  parts  of  a  more  completely  unified  and  larger 
whole,  represented  by  the  version  of  the  pseudo-Abdias?  Or  is  the 
Abdias  version,  made  up  chiefly  of  the  story  of  Andrew's  activity  in 
Greece,  which  is  relatively  of  late  date  and  is  decidedly  more  con- 
ventional and  literary  in  tone  than  the  story  of  Andrew  among  the 
anthropophagi  and  the  barbarians,  a  development  of  an  earlier  form 
represented  in  part  by  the  two  fragments?  The  question  is  of  interest, 
because,  in  answering  it,  it  will  be  necessary  to  go  back  to  the  first 
elements  of  the  legend  of  Andrew  and  to  determine  from  what  germ 
the  whole  great  series  of  his  acts  sprang. 

The  earliest  traditions  agree  in  assigning  Scythia  (instead  of  Achaia) 
to  Andrew  as  his  special  province.  Thus  Eusebius  ^  mentions  only 
Scythia  ('AvSpeas  Se  r^v  '^kvBio.v)  as  the  scene  of  Andrew's  labors.  It 
is  only  in  the  later  accounts  (as  the  relatively  late  Abdias)  that  Achaia 
is  meptioned  as  Andrew's  province,  sometimes  alone,  sometimes  in 
connection  with  Scythia.  Now  Scythia  was  in  ancient  times  a  term 
of  very  wide  application ;  it  meant  no  single  group  of  people  usually, 
but  was  the  general  name  for  the  country  of  the  numerous  tribes  that 
occupied  the  lands  about  the  Black  Sea.  To  the  Greek  the  word  was 
a  synonym  for  all  that  was  wild  and  barbarous.    Certain  Scythian  tribes 

1  Two  other  synthetic  hves  of  Andrew,  although  in  the  progress  of  the  events 
narrated  they  resemble  the  Abdias  text,  in  detail  are  frequently  fuller  and  occa- 
sionally appear  to  preserve  more  original  passages  than  the  Abdias.  These  lives 
are  (i)  the  work  of  Epiphanius,  the  monk,  Ilepi  rov  ^iov  Kal  tCjv  Trpd^ecjv  kuI  rfKovs 
'Avdp^ov,  most  accessible  in  Migne,  Patrolog.  Graeca  CXX,  216  ff. ;  Migne  adds 
a  Latin  translation  of  the  Greek ;  (2)  a  work  by  an  unknown  author,  Il/sa^ets  Kal 
TreploSoi  Tov  ' Av8phv  iyKwp.i(j}  avtiTrerrXeyixivai,  edited  by  Bonnet,  Acta  Andreae  cum 
laudatione  coiitexfu,  pp.  3-44. 

2  Hist.  Eccles.,  ed.  Dindorf,  IIL  i. 


Ixvi  INTRODUCTION 

were  known  as  cannibals,  Aristotle  ^  mentioning  in  particular  the  Achaei 
and  the  Heniochi.  Strabo,^  though  he  does  not  speak  of  them  as  can- 
nibals, describes  these  tribes  as  pirates  and  robbers.  The  three  tribes, 
the  Achaei,  Zygi,  and  Heniochi,  he  says,  subsist  by  piracy.  Their 
boats  are  slender,  narrow,  light,  and  capable  of  holding  about  twenty- 
five  men,  rarely  thirty.  He  mentions  the  tradition  that  at  the  time  of 
the  expedition  of  Jason,  the  Achaei  Phthiotae  founded  the  Achaia  in 
Scythia,  and  the  Lacedaemonians  Heniochia.  Their  leaders  are  said 
to  have  been  Rhecas  and  Amphistratus,  the  charioteers  (rjvioxoi)  of  the 
Dioscuri ;  and  the  Heniochi  are  supposed  to  have  derived  their  name 
from  these  persons.  Strabo  also  describes  the  manner  of  warfare  of 
these  tribes  :  they  were  accustomed  to  make  swift  descents  in  their 
light  boats  upon  the  neighboring  countries  for  the  purpose  of  capturing 
the  inhabitants  and  reducing  them  to  slavery.^ 

It  is  in  some  such  country  as  this  described  by  Aristotle  and  Strabo 
that  we  must  suppose  the  action  of  at  least  the  Ads  of  Afidrew  and 
Matthew  and  the  Acts  of  Peter  and  Andrew  to  have  taken  place.  The 
assigning  of  these  acts  to  Scythia  is  strikingly  confirmed  by  the  identi- 
fication of  the  city  of  the  anthropophagi.  This  city,  which  is  not  spe- 
cifically named  in  the  Acts  of  Andrew  and  Matthew  or  the  Acts  of 
Peter  and  Andrew,  appeafs  in  the  Anglo-Saxon  versions  as  Merme- 
donia  (Marmadonia),  in  the  Abdias  text  as  Myrmidon  or  Myrmidona, 
in  the  Martyrium  Matthaei*  as  Mvp-qv  rr/v  ttoXlv  twv  dvOpwirocfxiywv,  in 
the  Martyrium  Andreae  ^  as  t^v  Mvp/x-qvcSa  ttoXlv,  and  in  the  Legenda 
Aiirea  ^  in  the  corrupt  form  Margundia.  This  city  has  been  plausibly 
identified  by  Gutschmid  "^  with  the  city  of  the  Tauric  Chersonese  ^ 
mentioned  in  Strabo^  as  izoki^iov  lAvpp.y]Kiov,  "a  small  city,  20  stadia 

1  Politica  VIII,  iv.  2  q^  frap/iica,  ed.  Meineke,  II,  696. 

3  Gutschmid,  p.  3S2,  calls  attention  to  the  similarity  between  this  account  of 
the  custom  of  these  tribes  and  the  resolution  of  the  anthropophas;i,  Il/jd^eis, 
chap.  22  (Bonnet,  pp.  94-97),  to  send  out  their  young  men  in  boats  in  order  to 
secure  victims  to  replace  those  that  had  been  taken  from  them  by  Andrew. 

*  Bonnet,  part  2,  I,  220.  5  Bonnet,  part  2,  I,  47. 

^  Ed.  Graesse,  p.  13. 

'  P-  383- 

8  More  exactly,  the  Trachean  Chersonese.  Cf.  Kiepert,  N'ener  Atlas  von 
Hellas  7ind  den  hellenischen  Colofiien,  plate  X.  The  city  is  indicated  here  on  the 
special  map  of  the  Kimmerian  Bosporus. 

^  Ed.  Meineke,  II,  426,  1.  18.  P'or  other  forms  of  the  name,  see  Gutschmid, 
P-  383- 


THE    LEGEND   OF   ST.   ANDREW  Ixvii 

from  Panticapaeum  and  40  stadia  from  Parthenium."  From  a  form  of 
this  name  Mu/j|u,ryKiov  or  MvpfxrjKuLv,  through  a  probable  Myrmiciona, 
was  undoubtedly  derived  the  later  form  Myrmidona,  which  appears  in 
the  Anglo-Saxon  version  as  Mermedonia.^ 

If,  then,  the  Ac^s  of  Andrew  mid  Matthew  and  the  Acts  of  Peter 
atid  Andrew  are  to  be  placed  in  Scythia,  Andrew's  province,  and  if 
these  acts  are  to  be  regarded  as  parts  of  the  older  comprehensive  life 
of  the  Apostle,  it  becomes  necessary  to  explain  the  connection  between 
these  acts  and  the  acts  and  martyrdom  of  Andrew  in  Greece.  Accord- 
ing to  the  plausible  theory  of  Lipsius  -  the  whole  series  of  the  acts  of 
Andrew  in  Greece  is  due  to  a  traditional  confusion  of  the  Achaians 
of  the  east  coast  of  the  Black  Sea  with  the  Achaians  of  the  northern 
part  of  the  Peloponnesus  in  Greece.  That  the  confusion  was  a  natural 
and  probable  one  is  evident  from  Strabo's  attempt  to  account  for  the 
presence  of  a  tribe  bearing  the  name  of  Achaians  in  Scythia  on  the 
assumption  of  a  colony  from  the  well-known  Achaia  of  his  own  country. 
The  less-known  country  being  thus  replaced  by  the  better-known,  the 
martyrdom  of  Andrew  was  readily  placed  at  Patras,  the  chief  seaport 
of  the  Greek  Achaia.^  This  confusion  probably  took  place  in  popular 
tradition  before  the  writer  of  the  synthetic  hfe  of  Andrew  (of  which 
the  pseudo-Abdias  is  one  representative)  gathered  together  the  mate- 
rials for  his  work.  In  order  to  connect  the  two  widely  separated  scenes 
of  action,  Myrmecium  in  the  Tauric  Chersonese  and  Patras  in  Achaia, 
it  became  necessary  to  develop  the  journey  of  i\ndrew  from  the  one 
place  to  the  other.  It  is  noteworthy  that  the  episodes  of  the  acts  of 
Andrew  in  Greece  and  the  story  of  his  martyrdom  at  Patras  betray  a 
much  more  conventional  and  Hterary  tone  than  the  episodes  of  the 
two  earlier  narratives.  The  former  ixe  such  as  might  be  drawn  from 
the  inexhaustible  supply  of  ecclesiastical  legends  and  fitted  to  any  char- 
acter. On  the  other  hand,  the  story  of  Andrew  among  the  anthropo- 
phagi, and  that  of  Andrew  and  Peter  among  the  barbarians,  are  distinctly 

1  It  is  probable  that  the  analogy  of  Greek  ^\vpii.Mvi<i  aided  in  the  change  from 
MupMTJK'ov  to  Myrmidona.  ^  Vol.  I,  p.  609. 

3  Across  the  straits  of  the  Bosporus  and  not  far  from  Myrmecium,  according 
to  Strabo,  II,  694,  1.  8,  was  the  town  Patraios  (modem  Ada) ;  cf.  Kiepert,  Ncuer 
Atlas,  plate  X.  Perhaps  the  similarity  of  this  name  to  the  name  of  the  city  in 
the  Greek  Achaia  may  have  aided  in  the  confusion  of  the  two  countries;  the 
martyrdom  of  Andrew  in  the  older  narratives  may  even  have  been  placed  at  the 
Scythian  Patraios. 


Ixviii  INTRODUCTION 

in  the  tone  of  the  popular  legend,  and  it  is  probably  to  these  tradi- 
tional acts  of  Andrew  in  the  cannibal  city  that  we  must  look  to  find 
the  origin  and  the  center  of  the  whole  great  cycle  of  his  acts.  The  ulti- 
mate source  from  which  the  story  of  Andrew  among  the  anthropophagi 
sprang  Gutschmid  ^  regards  as  twofold:  (i)  traditions  derived  from 
the  first  Greek  colonists  of  the  lands  about  the  Black  Sea,  which  told 
of  their  struggles  with  the  barbarous  natives ;  (2)  sailor  stories,  as  e.g. 
reminiscences  of  the  Odyssey  and  the  fourth  journey  of  Sindbad  the 
Sailor,  in  the  Arabian  Nights,  where  also  the  anth?-opophagi  place 
strange  herbs  before  their  prisoners  in  order  to  take  away  their  reason, 
and  pasture  them  like  animals  until  they  are  fat  enough  to  be  eaten.^ 
The  later  development  in  western  Europe  of  the  Oriental  story  of 
Andrew  among  the  anthropophagi  and  among  the  barbarians  was,  in 
general,  in  the  direction  of  repression  in  order  to  bring  it  more  into 
harmony  with  western  taste.  The  story  was  thus  gradually  revised  and 
pruned  until  practically  the  whole  of  the  adventure  in  the  land  of  the 
anthropophagi  was  ehminated.  This  tendency  is  already  plainly  visible 
in  the  pseudo-Abdias  and  in  Gregory  of  Tours,  where  the  more  conven- 
tional miracles  of  Andrew  in  Greece  are  elaborated  at  the  expense  of 
the  original,  more  fantastic  elements  of  the  story.  This  process  of  con- 
ventionalization was  continued  until  in  the  Legejida  Aurea  of  Jacobus 
a  Voragine,  the  work  which  above  all  others  served  as  a  source  to  the 
later  mediaeval  writers  of  legendaries,  the  acts  of  Andrew  among  the. 
anthropophagi  are  passed  over  with  a  few  bare,  general  allusions.  So 
successful  were  the  fathers  in  their  endeavors  to  destroy  or  to  conven- 
tionalize their  inheritance  of  extravagant  apocryphal  literature  that 
neither  in  Latin,  the  common  language  of  western  Europe,  nor  in  any 
of  the  vernacular  dialects  except  English,  has  a  single  copy  of  the 
early  form  of  the  legend  of  Andrew,  his  acts  among  the  anthropophagi, 
escaped  their  vigilance.  And  in  England  also,  when  in  the  Middle 
English  period  the  legend  of  St.  Andrew  again  supplies  the  poet  with 
matter  for  the  exercise  of  his  art,^  the  old  romantic  version  is  forgotten, 

1  P.  385.  Reinach,  Cultes,  Mythes  et  Religions  I,  409,  thinks  the  story  may 
have  taken  form  at  Alexandria. 

2  Payne,  The  Book  of  the  Thousand  AUi^hts  and  One  Alight  V,  180-192. 
London,  1884. 

3  For  example,  Horstmann,  Altenj^lische  Legendeu,  Neue  Folge,  pp.  3-10  ;  Met- 
calfe, Legends  of  the  Saints  in  the  Scottish  Dialect  I,  63-96;  Cursor  Mundi  III, 
1 200-1 20 1 .  See  also  Forster,  Uber  die  Quellen  von  Ailfrics  I/omiliae  Catkolicae,  p.  2 1 . 


THE    LEGEND   OF   ST.  ANDREW  Ixix 

and  in  its  place  appears  the  simplified  and  conventionalized  Latin  ver- 
sion in  the  form  in  which  it  is  fixed  in  the  Legenda  Aurea  and  common 
to  the  whole  of  western  Europe.^ 

A  few  words  may  be  added  concerning  the  cult  of  St.  Andrew  in 
Great  Britain.  As  the  favorite  saint  of  Gregory,  St.  Andrew  must  have 
made  a  particular  appeal  to  the  veneration  of  the  English.  Gregory, 
it  will  be  remembered,  when  he  withdrew  from  the  world,  gave  all  his 
wealth  for  the  purpose  of  endowing  six  new  monasteries  in  Sicily,  and 
in  his  own  palace  on  the  Coelian  hill  in  Rome,  he  established  a  seventh, 
dedicated  to  St.  Andrew,  in  which  he  himself  became  a  monk.^  This 
monastery  he  is  said  to  have  enriched  with  certain  relics  of  St.  Andrew, 
presented  to  him  by  the  Emperor  Tiberius  at  the  close  of  his  term 
of  office  as  apocrisiaritis,  or  papal  nuncio,  at  the  Byzantine  court.' 
When,  after  his  elevation  to  the  papacy,  he  seriously  undertook  the 
task  of  converting  the  English,  it  was  from  this  monastery  that  he  chose 
Augustine  and  his  followers  as  directors  of  the  mission.*  Augustine's 
first  church  was  appropriately  dedicated  to  Christ,  the  Savior,^  but  one 
of  the  earliest  churches  founded  as  a  result  of  Augustine's  teaching  was 
the  church  at  Rochester,  of  which  Justus  became  first  bishop  in  604. 
This  church  was  built  by  King  ^thelbert,  and  was  dedicated,  most 
likely  in  honor  of  the  Roman  missionaries,  to  St.  Andrew.®  Together 
with  St.  Peter  and  St.  Paul,  St.  Andrew  was  also  chosen  as  patron  saint 
of  the  church  at  Medeshamsted,  the  later  Peterborough,  founded  in  656.'' 

More  important,  however,  is  the  position  accorded  to  St.  Andrew  in 
the  Northern  church.    At  Hexham,  Wilfrid,  the  famous  bishop  of  York, 

1  For  a  discussion  of  the  conser\-atism  of  the  Celtic  and  Anglo-Saxon  church 
in  preserving  apocrj'phal  literature  after  it  had  been  generally  given  up  by  the 
western  church,  see  Forster,  Herrig's  Archiv  CVIII,  27-28. 

-  Montalembert,  The  Monks  of  the  West  II,  14;  according  to  Montalembert 
this  monastery  now  bears  the  name  of  St.  Gregory;  Bright,  Chapters  of  Early 
English  Church  History  (3d  ed.),  pp.  44-45. 

3  Cf.  Alban  Butler,  Lives  of  the  Saints,  March  12;  and  John,  Third  Marquess  of 
Bute,  Essays  on  Foreign  Subjects,  "  The  Last  Resting  Place  of  St.  Andrew,"  p.  3. 

*  Cf.  Hunt,  The  English  Church  from  its  Foundation  to  the  A'orman  Conquest, 
pp.  20-2 1 .  *  Cf .  Hunt,  ibid.,  p.  24. 

6  Cf.  Bede,  Vol.  I,  p.  85,  ed.  Plummer,  II,  3.  Bede  also  tells  us  that  in  the 
sacristy  of  this  church  Paulinus  was  buried  (III,  14,  Plummer,  L  154).  It  is  uncer- 
tain whether  Rochester  or  London  may  claim  the  distinction  of  being  the  second 
oldest  of  English  bishoprics  ;  cf.  Palmer,  The  Cathedral  Church  of  Rochester,  p.  3. 

"^  Cf.  Chronicle,  Laud  MS.,  for  656. 


Ixx  INTRODUCTION 

built  a  church  which  was  one  of  the  marvels  of  his  time ;  none  like  it, 
men  said,  was  to  be  seen  on  this  side  of  the  Alps.^  This  church  was 
dedicated  to  St.  Andrew,  and,  as  we  learn  from  the  following  account 
of  its  foundation  in  Prior  Richard'' s  History  of  the  Church  at  Hexham, 
cap.  3,^  the  dedication  was  in  recognition  of  help  received  by  Wilfrid 
from  the  saint : 

Sanctus  igitur  Wilfridus,  circa  Dominicae  Incarnationis  annum  dclxxiiii™, 
et  aetatis  suae  quasi  quadragesimum,  et  episcopatus  sui  quasi  decimum,  et 
regni  Ecfridi  quasi  quartum,  in  praedicta  villa  ecclesiam  in  honorem  Dei 
et  Sancti  Andreae  Apostoli,  ad  rependendum  beneficium  quod  ejus  interces- 
sione  consecutus  est,  artificiosissima  structura  construxit.  Nam  cum  prime 
Romam  venisset,  ejus  ecclesiam  frequentans,  de  remissione  peccatorum 
suorum,  pro  qua  instantius  orabat,  per  hoc  certificari  postulabat,  si  de 
ingenii  sui  tarditate,  et  linguae  suae  rusticitate,  ipsius  inten'entu,  absolvi 
mereretur.  Nee  mora :  precibus  dilecti  Apostoli  sui,  tantam  gratiam  fideli 
suo  contulit  propitia  Dei  bonitas,  ut  ad  quaelibet  discenda  promtissimam 
ingenii  vivacitatem,  et  ad  quaelibet  intellecta  explicanda  congruam  sermonis 
faecunditatem  se  habere  sentiret,  ut  postea  per  innumerabilium  animarum 
salutem,  quas  Deo  lucratus  est,  efficacissime  in  sancta  ecclesia  claruit. 

This  church,  built  between  the  years  672  and  678,^  was  under  the 
control  of  Wilfrid  until  his  death  in  709,  with  occasional  interruptions, 
however,  incident  to  the  storminess  of  his  career.  At  his  death  Wilfrid 
was  succeeded  by  Acca,  his  friend  and  the  companion  of  his  many 
wanderings.  Acca  continued  Wilfrid's  efforts  towards  beautifying  and 
enriching  the  church  of  St.  Andrew  at  Hexham.  Living  at  Hexham 
he  was  of  course  a  near  neighbor  of  Bede's,  and  the  close  friendship 
existing  between  the  two  is  attested  by  frequent  allusions  to  Acca  in 
Bede's  writings.*  In  his  Ecclesiastical  History  Bede  gives  the  following 
interesting  account  of  the  nature  of  Acca's  labors  at  Hexham  : 

Suscepit  vero  pro  Wilfrido  episcopatum  Hagustaldensis  ecclesiae  Acca 
presbyter  eius,  vir  et  ipse  strenuissimus,  et  coram  Deo  et  hominibus  magni- 
ficus ;  qui  et  ipsius  ecclesiae  suae,  quae  in  beati  Andreae  apostoli  honorem 
consecrata  est,  aedificium  multifario  decore  ac  mirificis  ampliavit  operibus. 
Dedit  namque  operam,  quod  et  hodie  facit,'''  ut  adquisitis  undecumque  reli- 
quiis  beatorum  apostolorum  et  martyrum  Christi,  in  venerationem  illorum 

1  Cf.  Hunt,  ibid.,  p.  144.  ^  Plummet's  Bede  II,  xxv. 

"^  In  Raine,  The  Priory  of  f/ex/iatn  I,  10.  *  Cf.  Plummer's  Bede  II,  329. 

5  Acca  was  bishop  of  Hexham  in  731,  the  year  Bede  finished  his  history. 


THE    LEGEND   OF   ST.  ANDREW  Ixxi 

poneret  altaria,  distinctis  porticibus  in  hoc  ipsuni  intra  miiros  eiusdem  eccle- 
siae,  sed  et  historias  passionis  eorum,  una  cum  ceteris  ecclesiasticis  volu- 
minibus,  summa  industria  congregans,  amplissimam  ibi  ac  nobilissimam 
bibliothecam  fecit,  nee  non  et  vasa  sancta,  et  luminaria,  aliaque  huiusmodi, 
quae  ad  ornatum  domus  Dei  pertinent,  studiosissime  paravit.^ 

Wilfrid  and  Acca  in  their  wide  journeyings  must  have  had  frequent 
opportunity  for  collecting  relics,  manuscripts,  and  vestments,  treasures 
which  the  early  church  set  great  store  by.  Among  these  relics  were 
sure  to  be  relics  of  St.  Andrew;  and  among  the  "  historias  "  mentioned 
by  Bede  the  legend  of  St.  Andrew  would  surely  occupy  an  important 
place.  May  it  not  have  been  some  monk  of  Hexham  who  was  inspired 
by  his  reading  of  the  story  of  St.  Andrew  in  one  of  the  manuscripts  of 
the  episcopal  library  to  the  composition  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  poem  in 
honor  of  the  patron  saint  of  his  church  ?  There  was  ample  time  for 
this  to  have  happened,  and  for  the  completed  poem  to  be  copied  and 
to  be  transmitted  to  some  safe  retreat  in  southern  England,  before  the 
coming  of  the  Danes.  When  the  Danes  did  come  to  Hexham  in  the 
year  875  ^  the  devastation  which  they  wrought  was  complete.  Ailred  of 
Rivaulx  gives  the  following  account  of  the  destruction  of  Hexham  : 

Quidquid  de  lignis  fuerat,  ignis  absumpsit.  Bibliotheca  ilia  nobilissima, 
quam  praesul  sanctus  condiderat,  tota  deperiit.  In  qua  denique  devastatione 
monimenta,  quae  de  vita  et  miraculis  Sanctorum  sancti  patres  ad  posterita- 
tis  notitiam  stilo  transmiserant,  constat  esse  consumta.^ 

Whatever  manuscript  life  or  lives  of  St.  Andrew  were  stored  in  Acca's 
library  probably  perished  in  this  conflagration. 

According  to  the  very  plausible  theory  of  Skene,  the  historian  of 
Celtic  Scotland,  the  position  of  St.  Andrew  as  the  patron  saint  of  Scot- 
land is  an  immediate  outgrowth  of  the  cultivation  of  that  saint  at  Hex- 
ham. It  is  known  that  Acca  was  expelled  from  his  bishopric  in  the 
year  731,*  but  nothing  is  known  of  his  later  years.  The  foundation  of 
St.  Andrews,  or  Kilrimont,  in  Scotland,  which  was  the  beginning  of  the 

^  V,  20,  Plummer's  ed.  I,  331.  Prior  Nic/iard's  History,  in  Raine,  T/ie  Priory 
of  Hexham  I,  31,  gives  an  account  of  Acca's  gifts  to  the  church  of  St.  Andrew 
at  Hexham  which  almost  verbally  repeats  Rede  and  adds  nothing  to  his  state- 
ments. Raine,  I,  10,  says  that  five  Northumbrian  parish  churches  are  dedicated 
to  St.  Andrew :  Corbridge  and  Bywell,  near  He.xham,  Bolan,  Shotley,  and  one  at 
Newcastle.  3  Raine,  I,  190. 

2  Raine,  The  Priory  of  Hexham  I,  xliii.  •*  Plummer's  Bede  II,  330. 


Ixxii  INTRODUCTION 

special  respect  shown  to  that  saint  in  Scotland,  dates  from  the  reign  of 
Angus,  son  of  Fergus,  who  died  in  761,  after  a  reign  of  thirty  years. ^ 
According  to  the  legends  which  center  about  the  foundation  of  St. 
Andrews,  the  church  was  founded  in  reverence  of  reUcs  of  St.  Andrew 
which  were  brought  from  Constantinople  by  a  pilgrim  monk,  named 
Regulus.  But  Skene  has  shown  -  that  this  name  is  merely  borrowed 
from  an  early  Celtic  saint  of  the  church  of  Columba,  and  that  in 
many  respects  the  story  of  the  foundation  of  St.  Andrews  in  Scotland 
resembles  that  of  the  foundation  of  the  church  of  St.  Andrew  at  Hex- 
ham. It  is,  therefore,  a  reasonable  inference  that  the  relics  of  St. 
Andrew,  in  honor  of  which  St.  Andrews  was  founded,  were  brought 
from  Hexham,  perhaps  by  Acca  and  his  followers,  and  that  the  rever- 
ence accorded  them  was  but  part  of  a  general  movement  to  replace, 
the  Columban  monks  and  their  custom  of  dedicating  churches  to  their 
local  founders''  by  the  authority  and  usage  of  the  Roman  church  of 
Northumbria.  St.  Andrew  thus  became  the  patron  saint  of  St.  Andrews, 
and  finally,  as  this  church  grew  in  popularity,  the  patron  saint  of  the 
Pictish  nation.* 

1  Skene,  Celtic  Scotland  I,  296. 

.2  II,  268. 

3  Cf.  Skene,  I,  299. 

*  Skene's  account  is  accepted  by  Lang,  A  History  of  Scotland  I,  44. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


I.    THE   MANUSCRIPT 

1.  Cook,  A.  S.     Cardinal   Guala  and   the  Vercelli   Book.     University  of  Cali- 

fornia Library  Bulletin,  No.  lo.     Sacramento,  i8S8. 

2.  Supplementary  Note  to  "  Cardinal  Guala  and  the  Vercelli  Book."   Modem 

Language  Notes,  IV,  212-213. 

3.  Krapp,  G.  p.     The  first  transcript  of  the  Vercelli  Book.     Modem  Language 

Notes,  XVII,  171-172. 

4.  Quarterly  Review.     Vol.  LXXV,  pp.  398-399  (1845);  see  Introd.,  p.  x. 

5.  WtJLKER,  R.  P.     Ueber  das  Vercellibuch.     Anglia,  V,  451-465  (1882). 

6.  Grundriss  zur  Geschichte  der  angelsachsischen  Litteratur :   Das  Vercelli- 
buch, pp.  237-243,  485-4S6.     Leipzig,  1885. 

7.  Codex  Vercellensis,  Die  angelsaechsische    Handschrift    zu  Vercelli  in 

getreuer  Nachbildung.     Leipzig,  1894. 

II.    EDITIONS   AND  EXTRACTS  1 

1.  [Thorpe,  Benj.]     Appendix  B  to  a  Report  on  Rymer's  Foedera  :  The  Legend 

of  St.  Andrew,  pp.  47-89 ;  The  Fates  of  the  Twelve  Apostles,  pp.  90-92. 
[Printed,  London,  1836;  published,  London,  1S69.] 

2.  Grimm,  Jacob.     Andreas  und  Elene.     Cassel,  1840. 

3.  Kemble,  J.  M.     The    Poetry   of  the    Codex    Vercellensis,    Printed   for  the 

j^Lfric  Society:  The  Legend  of  St.  Andrew,  Part  I,  pp.  i-ioo,  London, 
1843  ;  The  Fates  of  the  Twelve  Apostles,  Part  II,  pp.  94-99,  London,  1846. 

4.  Ebeling,  F.  W.     Angelsaechsisches     Lesebuch,     pp.    124-126     (=  Grimm, 

11.  1156-1258).     Leipzig,  1847. 

5.  Ettmullerus,  Ludovicus.     EnglaandSeaxna  ScopasandBoceras,  pp.  148- 

156  (=  Grimm,  11.  1068-1608).     Quedlinburgii  et  Lipsiae,  1850. 

6.  MtJLLER,  Theodor.     Angelsachsisches    Lesebuch:     Andreas,    pp.    159-167. 

Not  published;  written  ca.  i8!;5.  The  citations  from  this  book  are  those 
of  Wiilker,  Bibl.  I.     See  Grundriss,  p.  102. 

7.  Grein,  C.  W.  M.     Bibliothek  der  angelsachsischen    Poesie  :    Fata  Aposto- 

lorum,  II,  7-9;  Andreas,  II,  9-52.     Goettingen,  1858. 

8.  Baskervill,  W.  M.      Andreas,    A  Legend   of  St.  Andrew.     Boston,   1891. 

Reviewed  by  Zupitza,  Deutsche  Litteraturzeitung,  1885  (November  7), 
col.  1588-1589;  by  Kluge,  Englische  Studien,  X,  117-118;  by  Bright, 
Modern  Language  Notes,  I,  11 -12. 

*  The  order  of  the  titles  is  clironological. 
Ixxiii 


Ixxiv  BIBLIOGRAPHY 

9.  WuLKER,  R.  P.     Bibliothek  der  angelsachsischen  Poesie  :  Andreas,  II,  1-86; 

Die  schicksale  der  apostel,  II,  87-91.  Leipzig,  1S94.  Reviewed  by  Bas- 
kervill,  American  Journal  of  Philology,  VIII,  95-97. 

10.  Cook,  A.  S.     A  First  Book  in  Old  English,  pp.  211-231.  Boston,  1894. 

III.     TRANSLATIONS 

1.  Kemble,  J.  M.     In  his  edition  of  the  text,  as  above. 

2.  Grein,  C.  W.  M.     Dichtungen    der  .Angelsachsen  stabreimend  iibersetzt: 

Andreas,  II,  1-46.     Cassel  und  Gottingen,  1863. 

3.  Brooke,  S.  A.     The  History  of  Early  English  Literature.     New  York,  1892. 

Extracts  from  Andreas  are  translated  on  pp.  170-174,  413-425. 

4.  Root,  R.  K.  ^  Andreas,  The  Legend  of  St.  Andrew.     Yale  Studies  in  Eng- 

lish, VII.  New  York,  1899.  In  English  blank  verse.  Reviewed  by 
Gamett,  Journal  of  American  Philology,  XX,  443 ;  by  Klaeber,  Anglia 
Beiblatt,  XI,  69-74  (1900).  Extracts  from  Root's  translation  are  given 
in  Cook  and  Tinker,  Selected  Translations  from  Old  English  Poetry, 
pp.  134-138.     Boston,  1902.  , 

5.  Hall,  J.  L.     Judith,  Phoenix    and    other  Anglo-Saxon    Poems :     Andreas, 

pp.  60-119.     New  York,  [1902].      In  metre  imitative  of  the  Anglo-Saxon. 

IV.    LANGUAGE  AND  METRE 

1.  Barnouw,  a.  J.     Textkritische    Untersuchungen   nach  dem  Gebrauch  des 

bestimmten  Artikels  und  des  schwachen  Adjectivs  in  der  altenglischen 
Poesie.     Leiden,  1902. 

2.  Baskervill,    W.   M.     Other  Notes    on    the  Andreas.     Modern    Language 

Notes,  II,  151-152. 

3.  Bauer,  H.     Ueber  die  Sprache  und  Mundart  der  altenglischen  Dichtungen 

Andreas,  GuSlac,  Phonix,  hi.  Kreuz  und  Hollenfahrt  Christi.  Marburg, 
1890. 

4.  Blount,  Alma.     The  Phonetic  and  Grammatical   Peculiarities   of  the  Old 

English  Poem  Andreas.  Presented  to  the  Faculty  of  the  Cornell  University 
for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy.     June,  1896.     In  manuscript. 

5.  Bright,  J.  W.      Notes    on    the    Andreas.      Modern    Language    Notes,  II, 

80-81. 

6.  Professor  Baskervill's  Notes.     Modern  Language  Notes,  II,  152-153. 

7.  CosijN,  P.  J.    Angfosaxonica.     Paul  and  Braune's  Beitrage,  XXI,  8-21,  252. 

8.  Verslagen  en   Mededeelingen   der  Koninklijke    Akademie  van  Weten- 

schappen,  Afdeeling  Letterkunde,  Derde  Reeks,  Zevende  Deel :  Cyne- 
wulf's  Runenverzen,  pp.  54-64.     Amsterdam,  1S90. 

9.  Cremer,  ]\L      Metrische    und    sprachliche   Untersuchung    der    altenglischen 

Gedichte  Andreas,  Gu'Slac  und  Phoenix.     Bonn,  18S8. 

10.  Gollancz,  Israel.     Cynewulf's  Christ,  pp.  173-184.     London,  1892. 

11.  Grein,  C.  W.  M.     Zur  Textkritik  der  angelsachsischen  Dichter.     Germania, 

X,  423. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  Ixxv 

12.  III^'ZE,    WiLHELM.     Zum    altenglischen    Gedicht    Andreas.      Erster    Theil. 

Berlin,  1890. 

13.  HoLTBUKR,  Fritz.     Der  syntaktische  Clebrauch  des  flenetives  in  Andreas, 

GuiSlac,  Phonix,  dem  Heiligen  Kreuz  und  der  Hollenfahrt.     Ilalle,  1884. 
Also  Anglia,  VIII,  1-40  (1885). 

14.  HoLTHAUSEN,  F.      Zur    Textkritik    Altenglischer    Dichtungen.      Paul    and 

Braune's  Beitriige,  XVI,  550. 
13.  Zu  alt-  und  mittelenglischen  Dichtungen.     Anglia,  XIII,  357. 

16.  Kluge,  Friedrich.     Zur   Geschichte    des    Reimes    im    Altgermanischen. 

Paul  and  Braune's  Beitrage,  IX,  422-450. 

17.  Krapp,  G.  p.     Notes  on  the  Andreas.     Modem  Philology,  II,  403-410. 

18.  LiCHTENFELD,  A.     Das  schwache  Adjectiy  im  Angelsiichsischen.     Haupt's 

Zeitschrift,  XVI,  325-393. 

19.  Napier,  A.     Collation  der  altenglischen  Gedichte  im  Vercellibuch.     Haupt's 

Zeitschrift,  XXXIII,  66-73. 

20.  Zu  Andreas  1182  [1181].     AngHa,  IV,  411. 

21.  PoGATSCHER,   ALOIS.     Unausgedriicktes  subjekt  im  altenglischen.     AngHa, 

XXIII,  261-301. 

22.  Reussner,  II.  A.     Untersuchungen  liber  die  Syntax  in  dem  angelsachsischen 

Gedichte  vom  heiligen  Andreas.     Halle,  1889. 

23.  Shipley,  George.     The  Genitive  Case  in  Anglo-Saxon  Poetry.     Baltimore, 

1903. 

24.  Simons,  Richard.    Cynewulfs  Wortschatz.     Bonner  Beitrage  zur  Anglistik, 

III.     Bonn,   1899.     Reviewed  by  Cook,  Journal  of  Germanic  Philology, 
III,  375-376;  by  Kruisinga,  Anglia  Beiblatt,  XVI,  146-147. 

25.  T.\UBERT,  E.  M.      Der   syntaktische    Gebrauch    der    Priipositionen    in    dem 

angelsachsischen  Gedichte  vom  heiligen  Andreas.      Leipzig,  1894. 

26.  Wack,  G.     Artikel    und    demonstrativpronomen    in    Andreas    und    Elene. 

Anglia,  XV,  209-219. 

27.  ZupiTZA,  J.     Zu  Andreas  145,  483.     Anglia,  III,  369-370. 

V.    AUTHORSHIP,  SOURCE,  AND   LITERARY  CRITICISM 

1.  Arnold,  Thomas.     Notes  on  Beowulf,  pp.  121-126.     London,  1898. 

2.  AzARiAS,  Brother.    The  Development  of  Old  English  Thought,  pp.  136-140. 

3d  ed.     New  York,  1890. 

3.  Barnouw,  a.  J.     Die  Schicksale  der  Apostel  doch  ein  unabhiingiges  Gedicht. 

Archiv,  CVIII,  371. 

4.  Bourauel,  Johannes.     Zur  Quellen  und  Verfasserfrage  von  Andreas,  Crist 

und  Fata.     Bonner  Beitrage  zur  Anglistik,  XI,  65-132. 

5.  Brandl,  a.     Zu  Cynewulfs  Fata  Apostolorum.      Archiv,  C,  330-334- 

6.  Brooke,  S.  A.     The  History  of  Early  English  Literature.     New  York,  1892. 

7.  English  Literature  from  the  Beginning  to  the  Norman  Conquest.     New 

t>y'        York,  189S. 

.••^8".  Buttenwieser,    E.    C.       Studien    iiber   die    Verfasserschaft    des    Andreas. 
Heidelberg,  1899.     Reviewed  by  Binz,  Englische  Studien,  XXIX,  108-114. 


Lxxvi  BIBLIOGRAPHY 

g.  Cook,  A.  S.     The  Affinities  of  the  Fata  Apostolorum.      Modern  Language 
Notes,  IV,  4-8. 

10.  The  Christ  of  Cynewulf,  pp.  Ix-lxii.     Boston,  1900. 

1 1.  FoRSTER,  Max.     Uber  die  Quellen  von  yElfrics  Homiliae  Catholicae,  p.  21  ff. 

Berlin,  1892. 

12.  Zu  den  BUckUng  Homihes.     Archiv,  XCI,  202-206. 

13.  Fritzsche,  Arthur.     Das  angelsachsische  Gedicht  Andreas  und  Cynewulf. 

Halle,  1879.     Also  in  Anglia,  II,  441-496. 

14.  Hammerich.     Aelteste  christliche  Epik  der  Angelsachsen,  Deutschen  und 

Nordlander,    von    Frederik    Hammerich,    aus    dem    Danischen    von    Al. 
Michelsen,  pp.  97-101.     Giitersloh,  1874. 

15.  Heinzel,  Richard.     Uber  den  Stil  der  altgermanischen  Poesie.     Quellen 

und  Forschungen,  X,  1-54  ;  see  also  Anzeiger  fiir  deut.  Alterthum,  X,  220  ff ., 
XV,  157  ff. 

16.  Hunt,  T.  W.     Ethical  Teachings  in  Old  English  Literature,  p.  loi  ff.    New 

York,  1892. 

17.  Kail,  J.     Uber  die  Parallelstellen  in  der  angelsachsischen  Poesie.     Anglia, 

XII,  21-40. 

18.  Kent,  C.  W.     Teutonic  Antiquities  in  Andreas  and  Elene.     Halle-on-Saale, 

1887. 

19.  Mather,  F.  J.     The   Cynewulf    Question  from  a   Metrical   Point  of  View. 

Modern  Language  Notes,  VIII,  97-107. 

20.  Mead,  W.  E.      Color  in  Old  English  Poetry.     Publications  of  the  Modern 

Language  Association,  XIV,  169-206. 

21.  Merbach,  H.     Das  Meer  in  der  Dichtung  der  Angelsachsen.    Breslau,  [1884]. 

22.  MoRLEY,  Henry.     English  Writers,  II,  194-198.     London,  18SS. 

23.  Price,  M.  B.     Teutonic   Antiquities  in  the  Generally  Acknowledged   Cyne- 

wulfian  Poetry.     Leipzig,  1896. 

24.  Ramhorst,  Friedrich.     Das  altenglische  Gedicht  vom  heiligen   Andreas 

und  der  Dichter  CynewuK.     Berlin,  1885.     Reviewed  by  Schroer,  Englische 
Studien,  X,  118-122. 

25.  Sarrazin,  Gregor.     Beowulf  und  Kynewulf.     Anglia,  IX,  515-550  (18S6). 

26.  Beowulf-Studien.  Berlin,  1S88.    Reviewed  by  Kolbing,  Englische  Studien, 

XIII,  472-480;  by  Heinzel,  Anzeiger  to  Haupt's  Zeitschrift,  XV,  182-189. 

27.  Die    Fata    Apostolorum    und    der    Dichter    Kynewulf.      Anglia,    XII, 

375-387  (1889). 

28.  Noch  einmal  Cynewulfs  Andreas.     Anglia  Beiblatt,  VI,  205  ff.  (1895). 

29.  Neue  Beowulf-Studien.     Englische  Studien,  XXIII,  221-267  (1896). 

30.  Sievers,  E.     Zu  Cynewulf.     Anglia,  XIII,  1-25. 

31.  Skeat,  W.  W.  Andreas  and  Fata  Apostolorum.  An  Old  English  Miscellany, 

pp^  408-420.     Oxford,  1901. 

32.  Ten   Brink,    Bernhard.      History    of    English    Literature    to    Wiclif,    tr. 

Kennedy,  pp.  58,  389.     New  York,  1889. 

33.  Trautmann,  M.     Kynewulf  der  Bischof  und  Dichter.  Bonn,  1898.  Reviewed 

by    Cook,    Journal    of    Germanic     Philology,     III,    374-375;    by   Binz, 
Englische  Studien,   XXVI,  388-393. 


bii;lio(;rai'HY  Ixwii 

34. Zu  Cynewulfs  Runenstellen.     Bonner  Ueitriige  zurAnglistik,  II,  ii,S-i20. 

35.  Der  Andreas  doch  von  Cynewulf.     Anglia  lieiblatt,  VI,  17-23. 

36.  Wer  hat  die  Schicksale  der  Apostel  zuerst  flir  den  Schluss  des  Andreas 

erklart  ?     Anglia  Beiblatt,  VII,  372. 

37.  WiiLKER,  R.     Ueber  den  Dichter  Cynewulf.     Anglia,  I,  483-507  (1878). 

38. Die  Bedeutung  einer  neuen  Entdeckung  fiir  die  angelsachsische  Literatur- 

geschichte.  Berichte  iiber  die  Verhandlungen  der  konigliche-sachsischen 
Gesellschaft  der  Wissenschaften,  Philolog.-Hist.  Classe,  pp.  209-218. 
Leipzig,  1 888. 

39.  Geschichte  der  englischen  Litteratur,  p.  46.     Leipzig  und  Wien,  1896. 

40.  Zu  Anglia,  XII,  375  ff.     Anglia,  XII,  464. 

41. Cynewulfs  Ileimat.     Anglia,  XVII,  106-109  (1S95). 

42.  ZuPiTZA,  J.     Zur  Frage  nach  der  Quelle  von  Cynewulfs  Andreas.     Haupt's 

Zeitschrift,  XXX,  175-185. 


VI.    THE  HISTORY  OF   THE    LEGEND  OF    ST.  ANDREW  AND  OF 
THE  FATES  OF  THE  APOSTLES 

1.  Bede.     Martyrologium.      Migne,     Patrologiae     cursus     completus     Patrum 

Latinorum,  XCIV,  col.  797  ff. 

2.  Bonnet,  Maximilianus.     Acta  Andreae  cum  laudatione  contexta  et  Mar- 

tyrium  Andreae  Graece,  Passio  Andreae  Latine.  Parisiis,  1895.  Supple- 
mentum  Codicis  Apocryphi,  II. 

3.  Passio  Andreae  ex  actis  Andreae,  Martyria  Andreae,  Acta  Andreae  et 

Matthiae,  Acta  Petri  et  Andreae,  Passio  Bartholomaei,  Acta  loannis, 
Martyrium  Matthaei.  Lipsiae,  1898.  Part  2,  Vol.  I,  of  Acta  Apostolorum 
Apocrypha,  ed.  Lipsius  et  Bonnet. 

4.  Acta  Philippi  et  Acta  Thomae,  accedunt  Acta  Barnabae.     Lipsiae,  1903. 

Part  2,  Vol.  II,  of  Acta  Apostolorum  Apocrypha,  ed.  Lipsius  et  Bonnet. 

5.  Bright,   J.  W.     The    Legend   of    St.  Andrew.      An   Anglo-Sa.xon    Reader, 

pp.  113-128.     3d  ed.     New  York,  1S94. 

6.  Bute,  John,  Third  Marquess  of.    The  Last  Resting  Place  of  St.  Andrew. 

Essays  on  Foreign  Subjects,  pp.  1-50.     Paisley  and  London,  1901. 

7.  Epiphanius  Monachus.     Vita  S.  Andreae,  ex  editione  Graeca  A.  Dresselii, 

addita  interpretatione  nostra.     Migne,  Patrolog.  Graec,  CXX,  col.  2 1 5-260. 

8.  Fabricius,  J.  A.     Code.x  Apocryphus  Novi  Testamenti,  pp.  457-460.     Ham- 

burgi,  1 7 19. 

9.  GuTSCHMiD,  Alfred  von.     Die  Konigsnamen  in  den  apokryphen  Apostel- 

geschichten.    Kleine  Schriften,  ed.  Franz  Riihl,  II,  332-394.    Leipzig,  1890. 
ID.   Harnack,  Adolf.     Die  Uberlieferung  und  der  Bestand  der  altchristlichen 
Litteratur  bis  Eusebius,  bearbeitet  unter  Mitwirkung  von  Erwin  Preuschen. 
Leipzig,  1893. 

11.  Horstmann,  K.     Altenglische  Legenden,  Neue  Folge,  pp.  3-10.     Ileilbronn, 

1881. 

12.  Imelmann,  Rudolf.     Das  altenglische  Menologium.     Berlin  diss.,  1902. 


Ixxviii  BIBLIOGRAPHY 

13.  Jacobus   a    Voragine.      Legenda    Aurea,    rec.    Th.    Graesse,    pp.    12-22. 

Lipsiae,  1850. 

14.  Kruger,  Gustav.     History  of  Early  Christian  Literature,  tr.  Gillett.     New 

York,  1897. 

15.  LiPSius,  R.  A.,  and  Bonnet,  M.     Acta  Apostolorum  Apocrypha  post  Con- 

stantinum  Tischendorf,  see  separately  under  Lipsius  and  Bonnet. 

16.  Die    apokryphen    Apostelgeschichten    und  Apostellegenden.      Vol.    I, 

Braunschweig,  1883;  Vol.  IL  part  i,  1887  ;  Vol.  II,  part  2,  1884.    Erganz- 
ungsheft,  Braunschweig,  1890. 

17.  Acta  Petri,  Acta  Pauli,  Acta  Petri  et  Pauli,  Acta  Pauli  et  Theclae,  Acta 

Thaddaei.     Lipsiae,  1891.     Part  i,  Vol.  I,  of  Acta  Apostolorum  Apocrypha, 
ed.  Lipsius  et  Bonnet. 

18.  M.,  L.     The  Acts  of  Andrew  and  Matthias  in  the  City  of  the   Man-eaters. 

Kitto's  Journal  of  Sacred  Literature,  III,  167-176.     London,  1853. 

19.  Metcalfe,  W.  M.     Legends  of  the  Saints  in  the  Scottish  Dialect  of  the  14th 

Century:  De  Sancto  Andrea,  I,  63-96,  III,  50-71.     Scottish  Text  Society, 
Edinburgh  and  London,  1896. 

20.  Morris,  Richard.     The  Blickling  Homilies  of   the    Xth  Century.     Early 

English  Text  Society,  IV,  229-249.     London,  1880. 

21.  Cursor  Mundi,  III,   1200-1201,   15S7  ff.     Early  English  Text  Society, 

Vols.  LXVI,  LXVIII,  XCIX.     London,  1877,  1878,  1892. 

22.  Newman,  John  Henry.     Parochial  Sermons,  I,  209-215.     New  York,  1843. 

23.  Reinach,   Salomon.      Les    Apotres    chez    les    Anthropophages.      Cultes, 

Mythes  et  Religions,  I,  395-409.     Paris,  1905. 

24.  Tischendorf,  Constantinus.     Apocalypses   Apocryphae  Mosis,  Esdrae, 

Pauli,  lohannis,  item  Mariae   Dormitio,  additis  evangeliorum  et  actuum 
apocryphorum  supplementis.     Lipsiae,  1866. 

25.  Von  DoBSCHiJTZ,  E.     Der  Roman  in  der  altchristlichen  Literatur.    Deutsche 

Rundschau,  April,  1902,  CXI,  87-106. 

26.  Walker,  Alexander.     Acts  of  Andrew  and  Matthias  in  the  City  of  the 

Man-eaters.     Apocryphal  Gospels,    Acts    and    Revelations,    Ante-Nicene 
Christian  Library,  ed.  Roberts  and  Donaldson,  XVI,  348-368.     Edinburgh, 
■      1873- 


TABLE    OF   ABBREVIATIONS' 


An.     Andreas. 
Angl.     Anglia. 

Ap.     The  Fates  of  the  Apostles. 
Archiv.     Archiv  fiir  das  Studium  der 
neueren  Sprachen  und  Litteraturen. 
AS.     Anglo-Saxon. 
Az.     Azarias,  Bibl.  II,  491-520. 

B.,  Baskeivill.  Baskervill,  Andreas, 
A  Legend  of  St.  Andrew  {II,  8). 

B^.  Baskervill,  Amer.  Journal  of  Phil., 
VIII,  95-97  (II,  9). 

Barnouw.  Textkritische  Untersuch- 
ungen  (IV,  i). 

Beibl.     Beiblatt. 

Beow.     Beowulf,  Bibl.  I,  149-277. 

Bibl.  Grein-Wiilker,  Bibliothek  der 
angelsachsischen  Poesie. 

Blount.  The  Phonetic  and  Grammat- 
ical Peculiarities  of  the  Andreas 
(IV,  4)- 

Bonn.  Beit.  Bonner  Beitrage  zur  An- 
glistik. 

Bonnet.  Acta  Andreae  et  Matthiae, 
in  Acta  Apostolorum  Apocrypha,  II, 
I,  65-116  {VI,  3). 

Bourauel.  Zur  Quellen-  und  Verfasser- 
frage  von  Andreas,  etc.  (V,  4). 

Brooke.  The  History  of  Early  Eng- 
lish Literature  (V,  6). 

Brun.     Battle  of  Brunanburh,   Bibl.  I, 

374-379- 
B.-T.     Bosworth-Toller,     Anglo-Saxon 

Dictionary. 
Buttenwieser.     Studien   iiber  die   Ver- 

fasserschaft  des  Andreas  (V,  8). 


C,  Cook.  Cook,  A  First  Book  in  Old 
English  (II,  10). 

Chr.     Christ,  Bibl.  Ill,  1-54. 

Cleas.-Vig.  Cleasby-Vigfusson,  Ice- 
landic-English Dictionary. 

Cod.  Ver.  Wiilker,  Codex  Vercellen- 
sis  (I,  7). 

Cos.     Cosijn. 

Crceft.  Bi  Monna  Croeftum,  Bibl.  Ill, 
140-143. 

Cremer.  Metrische  und  sprachliche 
Untersuchung  (IV,  9). 

Cross.  Vision  of  the  Cross,  Bibl.  II, 
1 16-125. 

Dan.     Daniel,  Bibl.  II,  476-515. 
Deor.    Deor's  Lament,  Bibl.  I,  278-280. 
Dicht.     Grein,  Dichtungen  der  Angel- 

sachsen  (III,  2). 
Diet.     Sweet,  Student's  Dictionary  of 

Anglo-Saxon. 

Edd.     Editors. 

Edg.     Edgar,  Bibl.  I,  381-384. 

E.E.T.S.     Early  English  Text  Society. 

El.     Elene,  Bibl.  II,  126-201. 

Eng.  Stud.     Englische  Studien. 

Ettm.     Ettmiiller,    Engla  and  Seaxna 

Scopas  (II,  5). 
Ex.     Exodus,  Bibl.  II,  445-475. 
Ex.    Gn.      Exeter    Gnomes,    Bibl.    I, 

341-352- 

Fabricius.     Codex  Apocr)-phus  (VI,  8). 
Fasd.     Faider  larcwidas,   Bibl.  I,  353- 

357- 


1  The  numerals  in  parentheses  following  certain  incomplete  titles  refer  to  the  full  titles  given  in 
the  classified  Bibliography. 

I.wix 


Ixxx 


TABLE    OF    ABBREVIATIONS 


Finnesb.      The    Fight  at   Fmnesburh, 

Bibl.  I,  14-17- 
Fritzsche.       Das    angelsachsische    Ge- 

dicht  Andreas  (V,  13). 

Gen.     Genesis,  Bibl.  II,  318-444. 
Gm.,    Grinam.       Andreas    und     Elena 

(II,  2). 
Gn.     Grein,  Bibliothek  (II,  7). 
Gn.2     Grein,  Germania,  X  (IV,  11). 
Gn.  C.     Cotton  Gnomes,  Bibl.  I,  338- 

341- 
GoL,     Gollancz.       Cynewulf's     Christ 

(IV,  10). 
Gram.         Sievers,        Angelsachsische 

Grammatik. 
Grundriss.       Wiilker,     Grundriss     zur 

Geschichte     der      angelsachsischen 

Litteratur  (I,  6). 
Gu.     Guthlac,  Bibl.  Ill,  54-94- 
Gutschmid.      Die    Konigsnamen,    etc. 

(VI,  9)- 

Hall.  Judith,  Phoenix  and  other  Anglo- 
Saxon  Poems  (III,  5). 

Harnack.  Die  Uberlieferung  und  der 
Bestand,  etc.  (VI,  10). 

Haupt's  Zs.  Zeitschrift  fiir  deutsches 
Alterthum. 

Hoi.  Hollenfahrt  Christi,  Bibl.  Ill, 
175-180. 

Hy.     Hymns,  Bibl.  II,  211-281. 

Icel.     Icelandic. 

Imelmann.      Das    altenglische    Meno- 

logium  (VI,  12). 
Indo-Ger.     Indo-Germanic. 

Jud.     Judith,  Bibl.  II,  294-314. 
Jul.     Juliana,  Bibl.  Ill,  1 17-139. 

K.,  Kemble.  The  Poetry  of  the  Codex 
Vercellensis  (II,  3;   III,  i). 

Kluge.  Zur  Geschichte  des  Reimes 
(IV,  16). 


Legend.     The  Legend  of  St.  Andrew. 
In     Bright's     Anglo-Saxon     Reader 

(VI,  5)- 
Lipsius.     Die   apokryphen  Apostelge- 
schichten,  etc.  (VI,  16). 

M.      Mliller,    Angelsachsisches     Lese- 

buch  (II,  6). 
Maid.     The  Battle  of  Maldon,  Bibl.  I, 

358-373- 
ME.     Middle  English. 
Men.     Menologium,  Bibl.  II,  282-293. 
Metr.     Metrical  passages  of  Boethius, 

Bibl.  Ill,  1-57. 
MLA.    Modem  Language  Association. 
MLN.     Modem  Language  Notes. 
MnE.     Modern  English. 
Mod.      Bi    Manna     Mode,    Bibl.    Ill, 

144-147. 

Nachtr.     Nachtrage. 

Nap.     Napier.    Collation  der  altengli- 

schen  Gedichte  im  Vercellibuch  (IV, 

19). 
NED.     New  English  Dictionary. 
NHG.     New  High  German. 

OHG.     Old  High  German. 
OS.     Old  Saxon. 

Pan.     Panther,  Bibl.  Ill,  164-166. 

PBB.  Paul  and  Braune's  Beitrage  zur 
Geschichte  der  deutschen  Sprache 
und  Literatur. 

Ph.     Phoenix,  Bibl.  Ill,  95-116. 

Ilpd^eis.  npd^eis  ' Avdpiov  Kal  Mardela, 
in  Bonnet,  Acta  Apostolorum  Apocry- 
pha (VI,  3). 

Ps.     Psalms,  Bibl.  Ill,  83-236. 

Ramhorst.  Das  altenglische  Gedicht 
vom  heiligen  Andreas  (V,  24). 

Rid.     Riddles,  Bibl.  Ill,  183-238. 

Rim.  Poem.  Riming  Poem,  Bibl.  Ill, 
160-163. 

Root.      The     Legend   of  St.    Andrew 

(III,  4)- 


TABLE   OF  ABBREVIATIONS 


Ixxxi 


Sal.  and  Sat.  Salomon  and  Saturn, 
Bibl.   Ill,  5S-82. 

Sat.  Christ  and  Satan,  Bibl.  II,  521- 
562. 

Sc.     Scotch. 

Seaf.     Seafarer,  Bibl.  I,  290-295. 

Shipley.  The  Genitive  Case  in  Anglo- 
Saxon  Poetry  (IV,  23). 

Siev.,  Sievers.  Zu  Cynewulf,  Anglia 
XIII,  1-25  (V,  30) ;  so  unless  other 
specific  reference  is  given. 

Simons.  Cynewulfs  Wortschatz  (IV, 
24). 

Soul.     Soul  and  Body,  Bibl.  II,  92-107. 

Spr.     Grein,  Sprachschatz. 


W.,    Wiilker.      Bibliothek    der  angel- 

sjichsischen  Poesie,  II,  1-91,  563-568 

(11,  9)- 
Wald.     Waldere,  Bibl.  I,  11-13. 
Walker.     Acts  of  Andrew  and  Matthias 

(VI,  26). 
Wand.     Wanderer,  Bibl.  I,  284-289. 
Wid.     WidsiiN,  Bibl.  I,  1-6. 
Wiilfing.     Die  Syntax  in  den  Werken 

Alfreds  des  Grossen. 
Wulfstan.      Wulfstan,  Sammlung  der 

ihm  zugeschriebenen   Homilien,   ed. 

Napier.     Berlin,  1883. 
W.W.      Wright-Wiilker,  Anglo-Saxon 

and  Old  English  Vocabularies. 


Th.,  Thorpe.     Appendix  B  (II,  i). 
Tr.,  Trautmann.    Zu  Cynewulfs  Runen- 

stellen    (V,    34)  ;    so     unless     other 

specific  reference  is  given. 


ZfdPhil.         Zeitschrift 
Philologie. 


fiir     deutsche 


ANDREAS 


[I] 

Hwaet !  we  gefrunan       on  fyrndagum 

twelfe  under  tunglum       tireadige  haeleS, 

])eodnes  }'egnas.       No  hira  prym  alseg 

campraedenne       j'onne  cumbol  hneotan, 

sy58an  hTe  gedjeldon,       swa  him  Dryhten  syK,  5 

heofona  heahcyning,       hlyt  getiehte. 

JJaet  wieron  meere       men  ofer  eorSan, 

frome  folctogan       ond  fyrdhwate, 

I  Gm.,  K.  gefrunon.  Gni.  regularly  changes  -an  preterits  to  -on,  usually,  but 
not  always,  citing  the  MS.  reading;  A",  Ettm .  folloio  Cm.  without  remark.  K.  at 
no  time  gives  variant  readings,  either  from  the  MS.  or  the  Edd.  Except  in  cases  of 
doubtful  interpretation,  variatits  of  Edd.  in  the  preterit  endings  will  not  be  recorded 
hereafter.  —  4  MS.  camrasdenne.  Gm.  hneotan,  not  changed  to  hneoton  because  taken 
as  infnitive ;  but  Gm.  note  'hneotan  =  hneoton  =  hniton,  pret.  pi.  of  hnltan  ? ' 
Ji.  hneoton;  Gn.  hneotan,  repeating  Gm.^s  note ;  so  also  Bright  {MLjV.  ii,  80). 
Gn.^  and  Spr.  ii,  go  hneotan, y>-c7;«  inf.  hnatan,  B.  hneotan  ;  W.  in  his  text  never, 
in  his  notes  rarely,  indicates  the  quantities  of  vowels.  —  5  Gm.  si^an,  a7id  so  regu- 
larly. Gm.  generally  allows  y  to  stand  only  as  representative  of  an  original  u,  i  as 
representative  of  an  original \\  K.  and  Etttn.  follow  Gm.  Gn.  neither  emends  nor 
follotos  the  MS.  readings  consistently.  Thus  he  changes  cining  regularly  to  cyning 
(//.  iji,  416,  880,  etc.)  but  folloius  the  MS.  in  the  spellings  drihten  and  dryhten ; 
he  retains  sy'5'San  at  times  (//•  J",  JJ,  706,  ii()3i  £tc.)  but  also  frec/uently  changes  to 
siS^an  (//.  4j,  180,  1106,  etc.).  Hereafter  variants  of  i  and  y  will  not  be  recorded 
except  from  the  texts  of  those  Edd.  zuho  endeavor  to  folloiu  the  usage  of  the  MS.  — 
6  A/S.,  Th.  lyt.  —  8  In  the  MS.  ond  as  conj.  and  in  composition  is  usually  repre- 
sented by  the  abbreviation  ■).  It  is  written  out  as  ond,  co7ij.,  iti  II.  9^3",  lOOi,  12OJ, 
1307,  i^g^,  1400,  17 ig.  In  composition  ond-  is  zuritten  out  in  II.  202,  28J,  2go,  343, 
401, 308, 310,  8/8,  837,  g23,  1 148,  1224,  1234,  I 321.  As  conj.  and  does  not  occur 
t?t  the  MS. ;  fV.'s  MS.  reading  2iX^A.for  I.  734  is  wrong,  as  the  MS.  has  here,  plainly, 
the  usual  abbreviation.  In  composition  and-  is  written  out  in  II.  i8g,3og,372,  783,  g23. 
Gm.,  Gn.,  K.,  though  they  usually  preserve  the  MS.  reading  where  the  word  is  written 
out,  regularly  expand  the  abbreviation  into  and.  B  prints  usually  ond,  sometimes  and  ; 
thus  I.  8  and,  /.  g  ond.     W.  does  not  expand  the  abbreviations.    Inasmuch  as  ond  is 

I 


2  ANDREAS 

rofe  rincas,       )^onne  rond  ond  hand 

on  herefelda       helm  ealgodon,  lo 

on  meotudwange.       Waes  hira  Matheus  sum, 

se  mid  ludeum  ongan       godspell  aerest 

wordum  writan       wundorcrsefte ; 

pam  halig  God       hlyt  geteode 

ut  on  ]7get  igland,       peer  Eenig  ]>a.  git  15 

ellj'eodigra       eSles  ne  mihte 

blffides  briican ;       oft  him  bonena  hand 

on  herefelda       hearde  gesceode. 

Eal  wass  ]>set  mearcland       mort5re  bewunden, 

feondes  facne,       folcstede  gumena,  20 

hgeleSa  eSel.       Nses  J'^r  hlafes  wist 

werum  on  ])am  wonge,       ne  waeteres  drync 

to  bruconne,       ah  hie  blod  ond  fel, 

flra  flffischoman,       feorrancumenra, 

'Segon  geond  fa  ))eode.       Swelc  waes  peaw  hira,  2  5 

]>ddt  hie  Sghwylcne       ellSeodigra 

dydan  him  to  mose       metefearfendum, 

fara  fe  J^aet  ealand       iitan  sohte. 

Swylc  waes  ])3es  folces       freoSoleas  tacen, 

unljedra  eafo8,       pget  hie  eagena  gesihS,  30 

hettend  heorogrimme,       heafodgimmas, 

agetton  gealgmode       gara  ordum. 

SySSan  him  geblendan       bitere  tosomne, 

the  only  form  of  the  word  written  out  as  conj.,  and  ond-  the  more  usual  forvi  in 
co77iposition,  the  abbreviation  is  regularly  expatided,  in  the  present  text,  into  ond. 
Variants  of  Edd.  in  the  reading  (i/"ond  and  and  tvill  not  be  recorded  hereafter. 

18  Gm.,  K.  gesceod.  —  23  7%.,  Gm.,  A'.,  Gn.  brucanne.  —  24  MS.,  Edd.  feorran 
cumenra.  —  25  MS.,  W.  ISegon  :  W.  alone  endeavors  to  follow  the  usage  of  the  MS. 
in  printing  ^  and  }> ;  the  other  Edd.  print,  without  remark,  J>  in  initial  and  'S  /;/ 
medial  and  final  position.  — ip  Th.  earfo'cS. —  31  MS.,  Th.  hetted.  MS.,  Edd. 
heafodgimme;  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  8)  heafodgimmas.  —  32  MS.,  Edd.  ageton,  except 
G»?.,  A',  aguton.  —  33  il/i".,  Th.  geblendan,  Gm.  geblendon,  A",  geblendon,  Gn. 
gebleondan, 


ANDREAS  3 

dryas  Jmrh  dwolcraaft,       drync  unheorne, 

se  onvvende  gewit,       wera  ingej'anc,  35 

heortan  [o/i]  hreSre  ;       hyge  waes  oncyrred, 

faet  hie  ne  muradan       aefter  mandreame, 

haelej)  heorogrSdige,       ac  hie  hig  ond  gsers 

for  meteleaste       meSe  gedrehte. 

J^a  waes  Matheus       to  pare  mseran  byrig  40 

cumen  in  ]>a.  ceastre.       J>Sr  waes  cirm  micel 
geond  Mermedonia,       manfulra  hlo6, 
fordenera  gedraeg,       sy]'))an  deofles  ])egnas 
Igeascodon     asSelinges  sIS.  [f,  30*] 

Eodon  him  ))a  togenes,       garum  gehyrsted,  45 

lungre  under  hnde  ;       nalas  late  waron, 
eorre  sescberend,       to  fam  orlege. 
Hie  J'am  halgan  ]'Sr       handa  gebundon 
ond  faestnodon       feondes  craefte, 

haelet?  hellfuse,       ond  his  heafdes  segl  .-.  50 

abreoton  mid  billes  ecge.       HwaeSre  he  in  breostum  fa  git 
herede  in  heortan       heofonrlces  weard, 
Jieah  'Se  he  atres  drync       atulne  onfenge  ; 
eadig  ond  onmod       he  mid  elne  fort5 
wyrSode  wordum       wuldres  aldor,  55 

heofonrlces  weard,  halgan  stefne, 
of  carcerne  ;  him  wses  Cristes  lof 
on  fyrhSlocan       fasste  bewunden. 

36  MS.,  EdJ.  heortan  hreSre.  —  -i;]  B.  mumdon,  B.-  mumdan.  —  38  Siev.  {PBB. 
X,  460)  -grasdge.  —  39  Gin.,  A'.,  Gii.  gedrehte,  Gtir  gedrehte.  —  43  MS.,  Th.,  Gtn., 
A'.,  Gil.  {note,  '  uiifledierter  pliiraT),  B.  ^egn  ;  Trautinann  {Kynewulf,  p.8'1)  >ewu  ; 
W.  )>egnas.  /;/  the  MS.,  \>egn,  followed  by  a  period,  stands  the  last  word  on  /.  sg*'- 
Between  f.  sg  and  f.  jo  there  is  a  narrow  strip  of  parchment.  Th.  says,  '  a  leaf  of 
the  MS.  has  been  cut  out  here,''  and  indicates  an  omission  in  his  te.xt ;  Gm.,  K.  as 
Th.  Gn.,  B.,  IV.  state  that  a  leaf  of  the  MS.  has  been  cut  out  but  see  no  interrup- 
tion in  the  narrative  and  print  the  text  without  break.  Xap.  thinks  the  MS.  is 
here  intact.  —  46  Th.,  Gm.,  A'.,  Gn.  nalaes.  —  51  Gm.,  A',  abruton.  —  54  Gm., 
A',  anmod. 


4  ANDREAS 

He  ]>a.  wepende       weregum  tearum 

his  sigedryhten        sargan  reorde  60 

grette,  gumena  brego,       geomran  stefne, 

weoruda  wilgeofan,       ond  ))us  wordum  cwseS  : 

"  Hu  me  elj'eodige       inwitwrasne, 

searonet,  seowaS  !      A  ic  syniles  wses 

on  wega  gehwam       willan  pines  65 

georn  on  mode ;       nii  'Surh  geohcSa  sceal 

daede  fremman       swa  pa  dumban  neat ! 

pu  ana  canst       ealra  gehygdo, 

Meotud  mancynnes,       mod  in  hreSre. 

Gif  Jnn  willa  sie,       wuldres  aldor,  70 

J»3et  me  wierlogan       wEepna  ecgum, 

sweordum,  aswebban,       ic  beo  sona  gearu 

to  adreoganne       pset  'Su,  Drihten  min, 

engla  eadgifa,       eSelleasum, 

dugeSa  dgedfruma,      'deman  wille.  75 

Forgif  me  to  are,        selmihtig  God, 

leoht  on  pissum  life,       ))y  Ises  ic  lungre  scyle, 

ablended  in  burgum,       aefter  billhete 

])urh  hearmcwide       heorugrSdigra, 

laSra  leodsceaSena,       leng  prowian  80 

edwitsprffice.       Ic  to  anum  pe, 

middangeardes  weard,       mod  staj'olige, 

fseste  fyrhSlufan,       ond  pe,  fseder  engla, 

beorht  bladgifa,       biddan.  wille, 

■gaet  hu  me  ne  gescyrige       mid  scyldhetum,  85 

werigum  wrohtsmiSum,       on  ]'one  wyrrestan, 

dugofia  demend,       deaS  ofer  |eor(5an."  [f.  30''] 

63  Siev.  {FBB.  x,  460)  -j'eodge.  —  64  MS.,  T/i.,  Gn.-,  Spr.  ii,  4^y  {but  seowa'S, 
seowia^  ?  as  second  reading),  B.,  W.  seo'5a^^;  Gdi.,  A'.,  Git.,  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  8) 
seowa'S.  —  66  Cos.  (PBB.  xxi,  8)  geoh'Sa  =  geahiNa.  — 67  Gni.,  A',  daeda.  —  71  T/i., 
Gm.  waefna.  —  So  T/t.,  Gn.,  and  Spr.  ii,  601  )>reowian.  —  85  Gm.  note,  Gn.  note 
scyldhatum  ? ;  />.  scild-,  B?'  scyld-. 


r^ 


:M'> 


ANDREAS 


^fter  ]'yssum  wordum       com  wuldres  tacen 

halig  of  heofenum,       swylce  hadre  segl, 

to  ]'am  carcerne  ;       ]  ar  gecySed  vvearS,  90 

faet  halig  God       helpe  gefremede. 

Da  wear6  gehyred       heofoncyninges  stefn 

vvTEetHc  under  wolcnum,       wordhleo5res  sweg 

mseres  )'eodnes  ;       he  his  maguj'egne 

under  hearmlocan       halo  ond  frofre  95 

beadurofum  ahead       beorhtan  stefne  : 

"  Ic  ]'e,  Matheus,       mine  sylle 

sybbe  under  swegle.       Ne  beo  t5ii  on  sefan  to  forhl;, 

ne  on  mode  ne  murn ;       ic  \q  mid  wunige 

ond  ]'e  alyse  •      of  )>yssum  leoSubendum  100 

ond  ealle  )'a  menigo       )'e  ]'e  mid  wuniaS 

on  nearonedum.       pe  is  neorxnawang, 

blgeda  beorhtost,       boldwela  ftegrost, 

hama  hyhtlicost,       halegum  mihtum 

torht  ontyned ;       )£er  t)u  tyres  m5st  105 

_     _  _  _  ^ 

to  widan  feore       willan  brucan. 

Ge))ola  ]>eoda  J)rea ;       nis  seo  prah  micel, 

]'aet  ]>e  wierlogan       witebendum, 

syfi?iige  6urh  searocrseft,       swencan  mStan. 

Ic  ]'e  Andreas       aedre  onsende  no 

t5  hleo  ond  to  hr5(Sre       in  ]>as  hseSenan  burg ; 

he  (5e  alyseS       of  pyssum  leodhete. 

Is  to  )^£ere  tide       taelmet  hwile 

emne  mid  so6e       seofon  ond  twentig 

nihtgerimes,       j'^et  811  of  nede  m5st,  115 

sorgum  geswenced,       sigore  gewyr^od, 

89  iMS.  s^gl ;  T/i.,  Gm.,  A'.,  Gii.,  IV.  SDCgl.  —  93  77/.,  Gin.  word  hleoSres;  Cm. 
places  sweg/w  /.  g4'' ■  —  99  MS.  ne  ne  mum. —  loi  MS.  the  second  J>e  'writteti  in 
aboz'e  the  line,  ^loz  MS.,  Edd.  neorxna  wang.  —  105  B.  tires,  B?  tyres. —  109 
yJ/^".,  Edd.  synne.  —  112  Gv;.  alysed. 


6  ANDREAS 

hweorfan  of  henSum        in  gehyld  Godes." 

Gewat  him  ]>a.  se  halga       helm  aelwihta, 

engla  scyppend,       to  ]'ara  uplican 

eSelrice.       He  is  on  riht  cyning,  120 

staSolfaest  styrend,       in  stowa  gehwam. 

[11] 

Da  w£es  Matheus       miclum  onbryrded 
niwan  stefne,       Nihthelm  tSglad, 
lungre  leorde  ;       leoht  eefter  c5m, 

dsegredwoma.       Dugu8  samnade,-  125 

h^eSne  hildfrecan,       heapum  ))rungon     - 
(gilSsearo  gidlon,        garas  hrysedon), 
bolgenmode,       under  bordhreocSan. 
Woldon  cunnian,       hwaeSer  cwice  lifdon 
fa  )'e  on  carcerne       clommum  faeste  130 

hleqleasan  wic       hwile  ]  wunedon,  [f.  31^] 

hwylcne  hie  to  sete       ^rest  mihton 
sefter  fyrstmearce       feores  bereedan. 
Hsefdon  hie  on  rune       ond  on  rimcrsefte 
avvriten,  waelgraedige,       wera  endestaef,  135 

hwsenne  hie  to  mdse       metepearfendum 

117  AfS.,  ^(/a'hweorfest ;  Cos.  (FBB.  xxi,  8)  hweorfan.  —  1 18  AfS.  ge  him,  7C'M 
no  indication  of  omission  ;  all  Edd.  gewat.  —  120  MS.  rices,  the  lower  part  of  the  s 
erased ;  so  N'ap. ;  W.  after  e  of  rice,  a  heavy  period  followed  by  a  semicolon.  But  the 
MS.  has  plainly  s,  the  comma  beneath  the  partly  erased  letter  indicatitig  that  it  is  to 
be  removed.   All  Edd.  e'Selrice  ;  Gn.  note,  '  MS.  e^el  rices,  e'Sel  unflectierter  dativ  ? ' 

—  120  Gn.  oniiht. —  121  The  first  section  of  the  narrative  in  the  MS.  ends  with 
gehwam.  Space  for  one  line  is  left  vacant  and  the  second  section  be^ns  with  a  large 
capital  Y>,  followed  by  a  smaller  capital  A.  Hereafter,  since  the  method  of  dividing 
the  narrative  into  sections  varies  o'nly  in  insignificant  details,  these  divisions  will  not 
be  described,  bnt  will  be  indicated  by  spacing  and  member ing  in  the  text.  —  125  Th. 
dagred  woma.  — 134  Gn.  hi.  —  134  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  8)  omits  on  before  rimcrsefte. 

—  135  Siev.  {PBB.  X,  460)  -graedge. —  136  MS.,  Th.  hwaene ;  B.  hwaenne  as  MS. 
reading,  B.'^  hwaene.     Th.,  Gm.  mete  j'eaifendum. 


ANDREAS  7 

on  pjere  werpeode       weor^an  sceoldon. 

Cirmdon  caldheorte,       corSor  ofirum  getang ; 

reSe  rsesboran       rihtes  ne  gimdon, 

Meotudes  mildse ;       oft  hira  mod  onvvod  140 

under  dimscuan       deofles  larum, 

fonne  hie  unlsedra       eauefium  gelyfdon. 

Hie  6a  gemetton       modes  glawne, 

haligne  hsele,       imder  heolstorlocan 

bidan  beadurofne       ]>ces  him  beorht  cyning,  145 

engla  ordfruma,       unnan  wolde. 

Da  waes  first  agan       frumr^denne 

l^inggemearces       butan  ])rlm  nihtum, 

swa  hit  waelwulfas       awriten  haefdon, 

faet  hie  banhringas       abrecan  fohton,  150 

lungre  tolysan       Uc  ond  sawle, 

ond  fonne  todSlan       dugufie  ond  geogo'Se, 

werum  to  wiste       ond  to  wiljiege, 

fffiges  flgeschoman.       Feorh  ne  bemurndan, 

grsedige  guSrincas,       hu  )'aes  gastes  sr5  '  155 

aefter  swyltcwale       geseted  wurde  ! 

Swa  hie  symble  ymb  prltig       j'ing  gehedon 

nihtgerlmes ;       waes  him  neod  micel, 

faet  hie  tobrugdon       blodigum  ceaflum 

fira  flffischoman       him  to  foddorfege.  160 

J>a  waes  gemyndig,       se  'Se  middangeard 
gestaSelode       strangum  mihtum, 
hii  he  in  ellpeodigum       yrmi^um  wunode, 
belocen  leofiubendum,       ])e  oft  his  lufan  .adreg   • 
for  Ebreum       ond  Israhelum ;  165 

138  Th.,  Gtn.,  K.,  Git.  corSer.  —  142  K.,  Gu.,  B.  eafe'Sum. —  143  77/.,  Gm.,  A'., 
Gil.,  B.  gleawne ;  B?  glawne.—  145  MS.  waes,  Edd.  hwa£s ;  Bright  {MLN.  it,  80) 
\>xs.  —  157  A',  gehegdon. —  158  A'ap.  after  nihtgerimes  an  erasure  of  one  or  two 
letters  in  the  MS.  —  163  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  460)  -^eodgum.  Th.,  Gin.,  A'.,  Gn.  wunade. 
— 164  MS.,  Edd.  of;   Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  g)  oft.    Gi/i.,  A',  adreag. 


8  ANDREAS 

swylce  he  Judea       galdorcraeftum 

wiSstod  stranglTce.       J>a  sio  stefn  gewearS 

gehered  of  heofenum,       f£er  se  halga  wer 

in  Achaia,       Andreas,  wses ; 

leode  laerde       on  lifes  wag.  170 

J>a  him  cirebaldum       cininga  wuldor, 

Meotud  mancynnes,       modhord  onleac, 

weorada  Drihten,     -  ond  pus  vvordum  cwseS  : 

"Ipu  scealt  feran       ond  ferS  leedan, 

slSe  gesecan,       6Sr  sylfStan  175 

card  weardigacS,       eSel  healda]> 

morSorcraeftum.       Swa  is  j'sere  menigo  ]'eaw, 

Ipaet  hie  uncuSra       gengum  ne  willaS  [f.  31^] 

on  pam  folcstede       feores  geimnan, 

sy85an  manfulle       on  Mermedonia  180 

onfindaS  feasceaftne  ;       ]'£er  sceall  feorhgedal, 

earmlic  ylda  cweahn,       sefter  wyrpan. 

Dger  ic  seomian  wat       ]nnne  sigebroSor 

mid  pam  burgwarum       bendum  faestne. 

Nil  bi6  fore  preo  niht,       paet  he  on  j'^re  ]>eode  sceal     185 

fore  haeSenra       handgewinne 

Jjurh  gares  gripe       gast  onsendan, 

ellorfiisne,       biitan  in  ser  cyme." 

^dre  him  Andreas       agef  andsware  : 
"  Hii  m?eg  ic,  Dryhten  mln,  .     ofer  deop  gelad  190 

fore  gefremman       on  feorne  weg 
swa  hraedlice,       heofona  scyppend, 
wuldres  waldend,       swa  hn  worde  becvvist? 
Daet  maeg  engel  ]nn       ea?i  geferan. 
Of  heofenum  con       him  holma  begang,        ■  195 

171  Gn.  cirebealdum  {noi  as  W.  states  cire  bealdum) ;  M.  note  cynebaldum  ?  — 
174  MS.,  Edd.  friS;  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  g),  SJ»io?!s  {p.  jg)  ferS.— 181  77/.,  Gm.,  A'., 
Gil.  sceal.  —  185    Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  9),  Si/nous  (/>.  loy)  oi&x  for  fore. 


ANDREAS  9 

sealte  ssestreamas       ond  swanrade, 

waroSfaru'Sa  gewinn       ond  w?eterbrogan, 

wegas  ofer  widland.       Ne  synt  mc  winas  cu8e, 

eorlas  el})eodige,      ne  j'ser  eeniges  wat 

haelefia  gehygdo,       ne  me  herestrata  200 

ofer  cald  waeter       cuSe  sindon." 

Him  t5a  ondswarude       ece  Dryhten  : 
"  Eala,  Andreas  !       )>ast  '80  a  woldest 
))3es  sISfastes       ssene  weorJ)an  ! 

Nis  J'aet  uneaSe       eallwealdan  Gode  205 

to  gefremmanne       on  foldvvege, 
•^aet  sio  ceaster  hider       on  ])as  cneorisse 
under  swegles  gang       aseted  wyr^e, 
breogostol  breme,       mid  ))am  burgvvarum, 
gif  hit  worde  becwi8       wuldres  agend.  210 

,    Ne  meaht  Su  faes  siSfetes       ssene  weorc^an, 
ne  on  gewitte  to  wac,       gif  'SQ  wel  fencest 
wis  )>inne  waldend       wsere  gehealdan, 
treowe  tacen.       Beo  Su  on  tid  gearu  ; 
ne  maeg  ]>xs  Srendes       ylding  wyrSan.  215 

Du  scealt  ]>3l  fore  geferan       ond  J'in  feorh  beran 
in  gramra  gripe,       tiger  ]>e  guSgewinn 
]mrh  hseSenra       hildewoman, 
beorna  beaducraeft,       geboden  wyrSeS. 
Scealtii  seninga       mid  Srdaege,  220 

emne  to  morgene,       aet  meres  ende 

ceol  ge|stTgan       ond  on  cald  waeter  [f.  32^] 

brecan  ofer  baeSweg.       Hafa  bletsunge 
ofer  middangeard       mine,  ))^r  6ii  fere." 

196  After  the  s  <y  sealte,  a  biattk  space  in  the  MS.  caused  by  the  erasure  0/  one 
letter.  MS.  stearmas. — 198  MS.,  Edd.  wegas  and  wid  land,  Gn."^  widland.  Cos. 
{PBB.  xxi,  g)  weras  yi';-  winas.  —  199  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  460)  -^eodge.  —  203  Gti. 
Ea  la.  —  205  A',  ealwealdan.  —  213  Cm.,  A'.,  Af.  wealdend.  —  219  MS.,  Th.,  Cm. 
wyrdeS.  —  221  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  4jg)  morgne. 


10  ANDREAS 

Gewat  him  ]>a.  se  halga       healdend  ond  wealdend,         225 
upengla  fruma,       eSel  secan,  ' 

middangeardes  weard,       fone  maeran  ham, 
Jjjer  soSfsestra       sawla  moton 
aefter  lices  hryre       hfes  brucan. 

[Ill] 

JJa  wses  aerende       seSelum  cempan  230 

aboden  in  burgum ;       ne  waes  him  bleaS  hyge, 
ah  he  waes  anr^ed,       ellenweorces, 
heard  ond  higerof,       nalas  hildlata, 
gearo,  gQ6e  fram,       to  Godes  campe. 
Gewat  him  pa  on  uhtan       mid  serdaege  235 

ofer  sandhleoSu        to  sags  7oar7/cfe, 
]>riste  on  ge]'ance,       ond  his  j'egnas  mid, 
gangan  on  greote  ;       garsecg  hlynede, 
beoton  brimstreamas.       Se  beom  waes  on  hyhte, 
sy8]>an  he  on  waruSe       widfaeSme  scip  240 

m5dig  gemette.       )?a  com  morgentorht 
beacna  beorhtost       ofer  breomo  sneowan, 
hahg  of  heolstre  ;       heofoncandel  blac 
ofer  lagoflodas.       He  tiaer  Udweardas, 
frymlice  )'ry,       pegnas  [gemette,]  245 

modiglice  menn,       on  merebate 
sittan  siSfrome,       swylce  hie  ofer  sa  comon. 
J>aet  waes  Drihten  sylf,       dugeSa  wealdend, 
ece  aelmihtig,       mid  his  engkim  twam. 

227  A/S.viehd;  B.  note,- incorrectly  as  MS.,  weard.  —  230  G^«.  cempum,  Gn.^ 
cempan.  —  zt,^  A^.,  C«.  nalaes.  —  234  A',  compe. —  2t,6  AIS.,Edd.iaiTa^e.  —  240  Gm. 
misprint  -fasdme.  —  241  MS.,  Edd.  morgen  torht ;  Spr.  it,  264,  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  9) 
morgentorht.  —  242  A',  bearhtost.  —  245  T/iongh  there  is  no  indication  of  an  omis- 
sion in  the  MS.,  a  word  has  evidently  dropped  out  after  I'egnas.  Th.  notes  the 
omission  but  supplies  no  word  to  fill  it.  K.  gesceawode,  Gm.,  Gn.,  W.,  B.  geseah  ; 
Siev.  [PBB.  X,  5/7)  rejects  both  readings  for  metrical  reasons  and  proposes  gemette. 


ANDREAS  II 

WSron  hie  on  gescirplan       scipferendum,  250 

eorlas  onlice       ealiftendum, 

I'onne  hie  on  flodes  fa;Sm       ofer  feorne  weg 

on  cald  waster       ceolum  lacaS. 

Hie  (5a  gegrette,       se  tie  on  greote  st5d, 

fus  on  farot5e,       fegn  reordade  :  255 

"  Hwanon  comon  ge       ceolum  lifian, 

macraeftige  menn,       on  mere)>issan, 

ane  gegflotan?       hwanon  eagorstream 

ofer  ySa  gewealc       eowic  brohte  ?  " 

Him  Sa  ondswarode       selmihti  God,  260 

swa  )>aet  ne  wiste,       se  tie  j'ses  wordes  bad, 
hwaet  se  manna  waes       mecSelhegendra, 
]>e  he  ]'£er  on  waro(Se       |  wi'Sjjingode  :  [f.  32"^] 

"  We  of  Marmedonia       mgegSe  syndon 
feorran  geferede ;       us  mid  flode  bser  265 

on  hranrade       heahstefn  naca, 
snelHc  sgemearh,       sniide  bewunden, 
oSpaet  we  jnssa  leoda       land  gesohton, 
wgere  bewrecene,       swa  us  wind  fordraf." 

Him  pa  Andreas       eaSmod  oncwaeS  :  270 

"  Wolde  ic  ])e  biddan,       ]ieh  ic  ))e  beaga  lyt, 

sincweortiunga,       syllan  meahte, 

)?aet  "6ii  us  gebrohte       brante  ceole, 

hea  hornscipe,       ofer  hwseles  ecSel 

on  paere  maegSe  ;       bi8  (Se  meorJS  wi'8  God,  275 

])ffit  ])u  us  on  lade         liSe  weorSe." 

251  T/i.  eorlum.  Gn.  anlice.  —  255  AfS.,  Edd.  frasgn  ;  Gn.  note  '  f raegn  =  interro- 
gationevi  ?  '  Spr.  /,  jjy  '  frcegn  =  Frage?  oder  ist  bier  fraegn  Parenthese  (so  erftilir 
kh)  ? '  Cos.  [PBB.  xxi,  g)  faegn.  —  257  Th.  ma  craeftige,  note  mere-craeftige  ? 
S%veet  (Did.  p.  in)  maegen- ?  —  260  MS.  aslmihti,  standing  at  e)id  of  a  line  ;  Th., 
Gm.,  K.,  Gn.  aelmihtig.  —  261  Gin.,  A'.,  AL  se  J'ass.  —  262  M.  me'Sel  hegendra. — 
263  K.  J^a  {trans., '  -ivhoin  he  there,''  etc.).  Gn.  wi'S  hirigode.  —  267  Cos.  {PBB.  .vxi, 
g),  Simons  p.  rjo  sunde.  —  268  MS.  Jnss  ;  Gn.,  incorrectly  as  MS.,  \>is.  —  271  MS. 
hidddXi  inserted  aboz'e  the  line.     6'w., -A'.  J'cah. 


12  ANDREAS 

Eft  him  ondswarode       seSelinga  helm 
of  ySlide,       engla  scippend  : 
"  Ne  magon  ]'^r  gewunian       widferende, 
ne  ];£er  elj'eodige       eardes  brucaS,  280 

ah  in  Jigre  ceastre  cwealm  ]»rovviaS, 
]?a  Se  feorran  ]'yder  feorh  gel^daj) ; 
ond  ]m  wilnast  nil  ofer  widne  mere, 
J)get  6ii  on  ])a  fSgSe       fine  feore  spilde?  " 

Him  ]>3L  Andreas       agef  ondsware  :  285 

"  Usic  lust  hweteS       on  ])a  leodmearce, 
mycel  modes  hiht,       to  ])£ere  maeran  byrig, 
J'Eoden  leofesta,       gif  Sii  iis  ]nne  wilt 
on  merefaroSe       miltse  gecySan." 

Him  ondswarode       engla  J^eoden,  290 

neregend  fira,       of  nacan  stefne  : 
"  We  6e  estlice       mid  ijs  willaS 
ferigan  freolice       ofer  fisces  baeS 
efne  to  pam  lande       |  cer  pe  lust  myne^ 
to  gesecanne,       sySSan  ge  eowre  295 

gafulrffidenne       agifen  habbaS, 
sceattas  gescrifene,       swa  eow  scipweardas, 
aras  ofer  ySbord,       unnan  willa'S." 

Him  ])a  ofstlice       Andreas  wiS, 
winepearfende,       wordum  niEelde :  300 

"  Naebbe  ic  fgeted  gold       ne  feohgestreon, 
welan  ne  wiste       ne  wira  gespann, 

landes  ne  locenra  beaga,       pset  ic  pe  m?ege  lust  ahwettan, 
willan  in  worulde,        swa  611  worde  becwist." 

280  S/e?'.  i^PBB.  X,  466)  -J'eodge.  —  282  K.  H'Ser.  —  285    Th.  misprint  ages. — 
286  A'.  hwaste«.  —  287  A'   h^rre.  —  288  MS.  «us,  Edd.  «u  us.  —  293  M.  baS. 

—  298  MS.,  Edd.  aras,  except  Cw.^,  C.  ara.  — 300  MS.,  Th.,  Gm.,  A'.,  B.,  W.  wine 
hearfende.  —  301  W.  as  MS.  faeced,  but  AW/ttr.  ixied;  A^ip.  plain Iv  ixted.  Th., 
B.  fasced ;  Gnu,  K.,  M.  fcetedgold ;  Gn.,  IV.,  C,  Bright  {MLN.  ii.  So)  faeted  gold. 

—  303  Schroer  {Eng.  Stud,  x,  i3i)  and  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  j/4)  ^coit/d  o/nit  landes  ne. 


ANDREAS 


13 


Him  ]'a  beorna  breogo,        ]xr  he  on  bolcan  saet,        305 
ofer  waroiSa  geweorp       wiSpingode  : 

I"  Hu  geweartJ  pe  Jjaes,       wine  leofesta,  [f.  ^t,^^ 

•83et  ■Su  saebeorgas       secan  woldes, 
merestreama  gemet,       maSmum  bedseled, 
ofer  cald  cleofu       ceoles  neosan?  310 

Nafast  }'e  to  frofre       on  farocSstrgete 
hlafes  wiste       ne  hlutterne 
drync  to  dugoSe?       Is  se  drohta'8  Strang 
•  pam  ]>e  lagolade       lange  cunna))." 

Da  him  Andreas       ]mrh  ondsware,  315 

WIS  on  gevvitte,       wordhord  onleac  : 
"  Ne  gedafenati  j'e,       nu  \>e  Dryhten  geaf 
welan  ond  wiste       ond  woruldspede, 
Saet  ^u  ondsware       mid  oferhygdum, 
sece  sarcwide ;       selre  bi'S  ieghwam,  320 

J'aet  he  eaSmedum       ellorfiisne 
oncnawe  ciiSlIce,       swa  |)aet  CrTst  bebead, 
J)eoden  jjrymfaest.       We  his  J^egnas  synd 
gecoren  to  cempum.       He  is  cyning  on  riht, 
wealdend  ond  wyrhta       wuldorprymmes,  325 

an  ece  God       eallra  gesceafta, 
swa  he  ealle  befehS       anes  craefte, 
hefon  ond  eor8an,       halgum  mihtum, 
sigora  selost.       He  'Sset  sylfa  cwseS, 

faeder  folca  gehwaes,       ond  us  feran  het  330 

geond  ginne  grund       gasta  streonan  : 
'  FaraS  nu  geond  ealle       eorSan  sceatas 
emne  swa  wide       swa  WcCter  bebugecS, 

306  Gn.  wi^  Hngode.  —  309  3/S.  bedaelelS.  —  310  Jl/.  calde.  —  312  MS.  the  first 
t  ^hlutterne  written  in  above  the  line.  —  319  Gm.,  M.  oferhygtkim.  —  323  MS.. 
Gm.  We  is.  —  328  Gm.,  A'.,  Gn.  heofon.  —  329  C.  ndte  suggests  sellend  yi>r  selost. 
—  332  MS.  plainly  sceatas,  the  c  corrected  from  a  t;  so  also  A'ap. :  B.,  IK  as  MS. 
and  in  text  sceattas,  W.  A'achtr.  sceatas  ;   Gm.,  A'.,  Gn.,  C.  sceatas. 


14  ANDREAS 

o^5e  stedewangas       strsete  gelicga)? ;  -^  .  ■  ' 

bodiaS  sefter  burgum       beorhtne  geleafan  335 

ofer  foldan  fseSm  ;       ic  eow  freoSo  healde. 
,  Ne  'Surfan  ge  on  fa  fore      fraetvve  Isedan, 

gold  ne  seolfor ;  ic  eow  goda  gehwses 
on  eowerne  agenne  dom  est  ahwette.' 
Nu  Su  seolfa  miht       si6  userne  340 

gehyran  hygej'ancol ;      "ic  sceal  hraSe  cunnan, 
hwcet  |8u  us  to  duguSum       gedon  wille."  [f.  33^] 

Him  ]'a  ondswarode       ece  Dryhten  : 
"  Gif  ge  syndon  fegnas       j^absjie  ])rym  ahof 
ofer  middangeard,       swa  ge  me  secga]>,  345 

ond  ge  geheoldon  fset  eow       se  halga  bead, 
fonne  ic  eow  mid  gefean       ferian  wille 
ofer  brimstreamas,       swa  ge  benan  sint."  request- 

J>a  in  ceol  stigon       collenfyrhSe, 

ellenrofe ;       seghwylcum  wearS  350 

on  merefaroSe       mod  geblissod. 


[IV] 


-^v.,-'^'  Da  ofer  ySa  geswing       Andreas  ongann 

mereliSendum       miltsa  biddan 
wuldres  aldor,       ond  ]ms  wordum  cwsetS : 
"  Forgife  pe  Dryhten       domweortiunga,       '''  355 

w.,'.U  willan  in  worulde       ond  in  wuldre  bleed,  1 

Meotud  manncynnes,       swa  t5u  me  hafast 
on  ])yssum  siSfaete "      sybbe  gecySed  !  " 

334  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  g)  stedewanga.  —  337  Gtn.,  A'.,  M.  durfon,  Gtn.  as  MS. 
durfan;  M.  note  )>urfon.  —  340  Gn.  meaht.  —  342  JAS".  dugudum.  —  343  MS.  ^ce  ; 
W.  aece.  —  346  A',  places  the  hemistich  aftet-  geheoldon.  —  354  77i.  cwaed.  —  356 
Th.,  Gm.,  A'.,  Gn.  on  worulde.  —  358  B.  sibbe,  B.'^  sybbe. 


ANDREAS  15 

Gesaet  him  ))a  se  halga       helmwearde  neah, 
aeSele  be  ceSelum.       /Efre  ic  ne  hyrde  360 

J)on  cymlTcor       ceol  gehladenne 
heahgestreonum.       HaeleS  in  sieton, 
peodnas  frymfuUe,       pegnas  wlitige. 
Da  reordode       rice  )'eoden, 

ece  selmihtig,       heht  his  engel  gan,  365 

mSrne  magu)'egn,       ond  mete  syllan, 
frefran  feasceafte       ofer  flodes  wylm, 
))cet  hie  ])e  ea8  mihton       ofer  ySa  gejring 
co\aJ;T,i,-^         drohta])  adreogan.        ]?a  gedrefed  wearS,  ''    .  n]^.^        j 

TT'.Vrcr'        onhrered  hwaelmere ;        hornfisc  plegode,  370  1' 

glad  geond  garsecg,       ond  se  grsega  mievv 
^J,  .  waelgifre  wand ;       wedercandel  swearc, 

windas  weoxon,       waegas  grundon, 

|streamas  styredon,        strengas  gurron,  [f.  34^] 

^  wsedo  gewaette.       Waeteregsa  stod  375 

j'reata  jjrySum  ;       )'egnas  wurdon 
tii<t■c^^ri      acolmode  ;       aenig  ne  wende, 
fset  he  lifgende       land  begete, 
fara  ]>e  mid  Andreas       on  eagorstream 
ceol  gesohte.       Naes  him  cilS  pa  gyt,  380 

hwa  Jjam  ssflotan       sund  wisode. 

Him  ))a  se  halga       on  holmwege 
ofer  argeblond       Andreas  ]m  git, 
j'egn  peodenhold,       j'anc  gesregde, 
looJcv^      ricum  raesboran,        )'a  he  gereordod  waes :  385  rdftsVi 


1 


359  A/S.,  Edd.  holm- ;  Cos.  {FBB.  xxi,  9)  holm  —  helm,  as  in  jgd".  '  IVol  zu 
d/tdern.'  —  360  W.  after  hyrde  a  letter,  probably  g,  has  been  erased  in  the  MS.  — 
362  Th.,  Gm.,  K.,  B.  insaeton.  —  367  MS.,  Th.,  Gm.,  K.,  IV.,  B.  feasceaftne; 
Gn.,  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  9)  feasceafte.  —  368  Gti.  hi.  Gm.  misprint  ead.  —  375  Cos. 
(PBB.  xxi,  9)  wada  gewealce  ?  .Simons  {p.  148)  waedo  =  wSda.  —  382  T/u  wa  for 
)>a.  —  384  MS.,  Th.,  Gn.  J)eoden  hold ;  Gm.,  A'.,  M.  J>eodne  hold  ;  Gn.'^,  Spr.  ii,  jSd, 
W.,  B.,  C.  J^eodenhold. 


l6  ANDREAS 

■fxi-'i  "  De  I'issa  swiesenda       soSfest  Meotud, 

lifes  leohtfruma,       lean  forgilde, 

weoruda  waldend,       ond  })e  wist  gife, 

heofonlicne  hlaf,        swa  SG  hyldo  wiS  me 

ofer  firigendstream       freode  gecySdest !  390 

Nu  synt  gepreade       j'egnas  mine, 

geonge  guSrincas  ;       garsecg  hlymmeS, 

pcuv-vii  scc^        geofon  geotende  ;       grund  is  onhrered, 

deope  gedrefed  ;       dugu6  is  geswenced, 

modigra  magen       myclum  gebysgod."  t>f^  •       395 

-^'^    Him  of  helman  oncvvseS       haeleSa  Scyppend  : 

"  Lset  nu  geferian       flotan  iiserne, 

lid  to  lande       ofer  lagiifaesten, 

end  ]>onne  gebldan       beornas  June, 

ffllcndovA         aras  on  earde,       hweenne  Su  eft  cyme."  400 

^A^K>v>A.y  Edre  him  j^a  eorlas       agefan  ondsware, 

•t        r ■ 
'    "  J'egnas  jTohthearde ;       pafigan  ne  woldon,  f^^i  r^c 

Sset  hie  forleton       set  lides  stefnan 

leofne  lareow       ond  him  land  curon  :  'yce  [  l 

"  Hwider  hweorfa^  we       hlafordlease,  405 

geomorm5d€,       gode  orfeorme,  dq..^^ 

synnum  wunde,       gif  we  swica6  ]>e?  J^&v-t" 

We  blofS  la6e       on  landa  gehwam, 

'KiJiluJ  folcum  fracoSe,       ]'onne  fira  jbearn,  [f.  34I5] 

I      ^  ellenrofe,       jeht  besitta)),  410 

hwylc  hira  selost       symle  gel^este  ^tujLfxjji 

hlaforde  ^et  hilde,       ponne  hand  ond  rond 

389  T/i.  as  MS.  -lice,  text  -licne  ;  so  Gm.,  K.,  Gn.  —  390  Gm.,  A'.,  M.  firigen- 
stream.  —  393  3IS.,  T/i.,  Gm.,  W.  heofon ;  A'.,  Gn.,  B.,  C,  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  9) 
geofon;  cf.  1^08",  138^''.  —  394  W.  as  MS.  dugud.  —  395  B.  miclum.  —  396  MS., 
Edd.  holme ;  Gtt.  note  of  helme  ;  Spr.  ii,  g4  holm,  '  der  Helm  des  Schiffcs,  am 
Steuerriider  ? '  C.  note  '  Perhaps  mistaken  for  helman,  the  helm  of  the  ship '  ;  Simons 
p.  76  holm  =  helm,  ^  steiiemtder'' ;  cf.  j^g''.  —  401  B.  agefon,  B."^  agefan.  —  405 
Gm.  hlaforlease.  —  406  Gm.,  A'.,  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  9)  gode ;  Gn.,  B.  gode,  C.  Gode. 
—  411  A',  selast. 


ANDREAS  17 

on  beaduwange       billum  forgrunden 
set  niSplegan       nearu  ))ro\vedon." 

f>a  reordade       rice  Jieoden,  415 

Kt^'t^-Ou-v    wierfsest  cining,        word  stunde  ahof  : 
"  Gif  ■Su  ]'egn  sie       )>rymsittendes, 
wuldorcyninges,       svva  ^u  worde  becwist, 
■Jrf  ^    '^'^'^'  rece  pa  gerynu,        hu  he  reordberend 

^  iSrde  under  lyfte.       Lang  is  pes  siSfaet  420 

ofer  fealuwne  flod  ;       frefra  fine 
msecgas  on  m5de.       Mycel  is  rm  gena    •         ,\-^^V^ 
Way         lad  ofer  lagustream,       land  swi'Se  feorr 


M 


to  gesecanne  ;       sund  is  geblonden,      j  ^    ^    o    \^ 


grund  wis  greote.       God  eaSe  m^g 
fo  i^ilafs  heaSoliSendum       helpe  gefremman." 

u/is^lv        Ongan  pa  gleawllce       gingran  sine,  '^'ioipltj 

<:3rlc<;<^>^         wuldorspedige  weras,       wordum  trymman  :  .    .jt. 

*'  Ge  }'8et  gehogodon,       ]»a  ge  on  holm  stigon, 
pset  ge  on  fara  folc       feorh  gelaeddon,  ,  430 

ond  for  Dryhtnes  lufan       deaS  prowodon, 
(\  vV>^'  ^"  ^Imyrcna       eSelrice 

sawle  gesealdon.       Ic  pset  sylfa  wat, 
]>get  us  gescyldeS       scyppend  engla, 

weomda  Dryhten,       W?eteregesa  sceal,  435 

^^  /juJU-Vxi^      getSyd  ond  getSreatod       jmrh  pryt5cining, 

to5S'  lagu  lacende,       llSra  wyr^an.  ot-ow  ^^n  cJU^ 

Letcr  Swagesselde  iu,       J'aet  we  on  sSbate 

ofer  warutigewinn       wseda  cunnedan, 

Sur^cvJ  faro(5ridende.       Frecne  )>uhton  440<'»^^cv^>uf  j. 

0 

413^/6".  fore  grunden;  77/.,  JV.  foregrunden. — 420  Gw.,  A'.,  M.  heos.  —  423 
Th.,  Gm.,  M.  la'5.  K.  feor.  — 424  MS.,  Th.,  Gm.,  A'.,  J/.,  />'.,  IV.,  C.  sand;  Gti., 
Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  10)  sund.  —  425  Gfi.  note  grand?  for  grund.  —  426  Gm.  misprint, 
M.  heado-;  C.  hea'So-,  ' perhaps  for  heah'So-.'  —  433  W.  after  sylfa  a  letter  erased 
ill  the  MS.  —  438  K.  \>zX.  —  439  A',  Git.  wada.  W.  as  MS.  cunedan,  A'achtr. 
gunnedan. — 440  Gm.,  M.  -ri'Sende. 


i 


~'f 


1 8  I       ANDREAS 

egle  ealada;       eagorstreamas 
(V<Vt' *t         beoton  bordstae^u  ;       brim  oft  oncwge'S, 
y6  oSerre.       Hwllum  upp  astod 

of  brimes  bosme       |on  bates  faeSm  [f.  35^] 

s    .         egesa  ofer  y81id.        ^Imihtig  ]iaer,  445 

Meotud  mancynnes,       on  mere)>yssan 

(xh-^i^       beorht  basnode.       Beornas  wurdon 

forhte  on  mode ;       frizes  wilnedon,  -safcf^ 

L-,.  miltsa  to  mierum.       J>a  seo  menigo  ongan 

clypiah  on  ceole ;       cyning  sona  aras,  450 

engla  eadgifa,       ySum  stilde, 
wseteres  Wcelmum,       windas  preade  ; 
s£e  sessade,       smylte  wurdon  <xev''+lc 

merestreama  gemeotu.       Da  ure  mod  ahloh 
sytiSan  we  gesegon       under  swegles  gang  455 

windas  ond  wasgas       ond  waeterbrogan 
forhte  gewordne       for  Frean  egesan. 
For]'an  ic  eow  to  so6e       secgan  wille, 
pset  nffifre  forlsete^       lifgende  God 

eorl  on  eorSan,       gif  his  ellen  deah."  460 

5tel:<i.  Swa  hleoSrode       halig  cempa, 

"^■Jc  Seawum  gepancul ;       pegnas  lierde 

cUwAut,       eadig  oreta,       eorlas  trymede, 
si^iSi.-^\^  o^Sset  hie  seraninga       slSp  ofereode, 

UAflA/-wv*-i^  meSe  be  maeste.       Mere  sweoSerade,  465 

u«' '  y8a  ongin       eft  oncyrde, 

hreoh  holmj'racu.       f>a  jiam  halgan  wearS 
refter  gryrehwile       gast  gebhssod. 


442  Gn.^,  Spr.  j,  i4j,  Simons  {/.  18)  hrun  for  brim.  A',  eft.  —  445  77/.,  G»i.,  J/. 
y6"li5. — 452  77/.,  Gm.  windes,  Gm.  note  windes  )jreate,  or  {note  to  I.  4-;j)  windas 
)>reade.  —  453  A/S.,  T/i.,  Gtn.  saes  e.ssade;  Gm.noie  {\)s?£s  essadon,  (2)  ste  es.sade 
{3)  sae  sessade.  —  458  Gm.,  A".,  Gn.  omit  to.  —  459  Gm.  misprint  forlaited. 


ANDREAS  19 


[V]  i 


u^  Ongan  tSa  reordigan       rjedum  snottor, 

wis  on  gevvitte,       wordlocan  onspeonn  :  470 

"  Ngefre  ic  salidan       selran  mette, 

macraeftigran,       ])aes  ^e  me  pynceS, 

rowend  rofran,       raedsnotterran, 

wordes  wisran.       Ic  wille  j^e, 
'^'"Jisiiav         eorl  iinforcuS,       anre  nii  gena  475 

bene  biddan,       ]'eah  ic  ]'e  beaga  lyt, 

sincweorSunga,        syllan  mihte, 

faetedsinces  :       wolde  ic  freondscipe, 

feoden  jjrymjfnest,       ]nnne,  gif  ic  mehte,  [f.  35*^] 

begitan  godne.       )'aes  611  gife  hleotest,     ju  e_e-'  480 

iv  haligne  hyht       on  heofonprymme,  ''- 

^  gif  ^Q  lidvverigum       larna  })Inra 

este  wyrSest.       Wolde  ic  anes  to  t5e, 

cynerof  hgelefi,       crreftes  neosan  : 

Saet  till  me  getsehte,       nii  ]5e  tir  cyning  485 

end  miht  forgef,     .  manna  scyppend, 
.  hii  6u  wEegflotan       waere  bestemdon, 

.^  ssehengeste,       sund  wisige. 

Ic  waes  on  gife8e       iu  ond  nu  [|)a] 

syxtyne  sT^um       on  saebate,  490 

/i4.iv«-A<       '  mere  hrerendum       mundum  freorig, 

473  77/.,  Gm.,  A'.,  Git.  rorend  (A'  trans.  '  7-inuer '),  Gn.  Spr.  ii,  JS4  rorend  a 
scribal  error  for  rowend?  —  478  W.  between  freond  and  scipe,  a  letter  erased  in 
the  MS.  —  479  MS.  Hne ;  77/.  as  MS.  hine,  i.e.  Hnne.  Th.,  Gm.,  K.,  Gn.  mihte. 
—  482  Siev.  {PBB.  X,  460)  -wergum.  — 483  MS.,  T/i.,  Gm.,  K.,  Gn.,  B.  est;  C;/."-, 
Zupitza  {Angl.  Hi,  j6g),  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  3-77),  Brig/it  {MLJV.  ii,  80),  IV.,  C.  este. — 
485'*-486''  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  10)  nu  \>e  tircyning  ||  I'a  miht  forgef. — 487  Gm.,  A'. 
bestemdan.  —  489"^  Gn.  note  gife 5  =  geofon  ?  Spr.  i,  jo6  on  gifefie,  tingefdhr?  — 
489*  Siev.  {PBB.  X,  J/y)  notes  that  the  half-line  is  too  short ;  Holthatisen  {Angl. 
xiii,  3£-f)  reads  iu  ond  nuha;  Bright  {MLJV.  ii,  86)  )ja  iu  ond  nu.  —  491  IV.  an  r 
erased  between  mere  and  hrerendum  ;  A',  merehrerendum. 


J 


20  ANDREAS 

eagorstreamas       (is  Sys  ane  ma), 
]  swa  ic  ^fre  ne  geseah       Snigne  mann, 

frySbearn  haeleSa,       ]'e  gelicne,  j 

p'  steoran  ofer  staefnan.       Streamwelm  hwileS,  495 

beate))  brimstse'So ;       is  ]'es  bat  ful  scrid, 
fsereS  famigheals,       fugole  gelicost 
glide's  on  geofone.       Ic  georne  wat, 
))3et  ic  ffifre  ne  geseah       ofer  ySlade 

on  sffileodan       syllicran  craeft.  500 

Is  }'on  geliccost       swa  he  on  landsceare 
stille  stande,       ]'£er  hine  storm  ne  maeg, 
^'_  wind  awecgan,       ne  wseterflodas 

brecan  brondstsefne  ;       hwaeSere  on  brim  snoweS        sp^cd  ^ 
snel  under  segle.       Du  eart  seolfa  geong,  505 

wigendra  hleo,       nalas  wintrum  frod, 
hafast /^/i  on  fyrhSe,       faroSlacende,     C  ,  ' 
eorles  ondsware  ;       geghwylces  canst 
worda  for  worulde       wislic  andgit." 

Him  ondswarode       ece  Dryhten :  510 

"  Oft  ]>aet  gesSleS,       j^set  we  on  sEelade, 
scipum  under  scealcum,       |  ponne  sceor  cymeS,        [f.  36^] 

494  AfS.,  Edd.  haele'S;  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  10)  haeleiSa.  —  495  Gtti.,  A'.,  Gn.  hwile'5; 
On?,  Spr.  a,  117,  B.,  C.  hwile'tS.  —  496  MS.,  Edd.  beataj? ;  Spr.  t,  106,  Holtlnmsen 
(PBB.  xvi,  Jjo)  beatejj.  A'.,  B.  brim  stas'So  ( JV.  incorrectly  ascribes  also  brimstae'6'0 
to  B.).  Gm.,  K.  J>eos.  MS.,  Th.,  W.,  C.  ful  scrid;  Gin.,  K.  fulscryd;  Gm.  note, 
Gn.,  B.  fulscrid.  —  497  Cw.  ferelS;  K.  fare^.  —  498  Gin.,  K.  geofene.  —  499  MS., 
Th.,  Gm.,  K.,  Gti.,  B.,  JV.  y«lafe  ;  Gn.  Nachtr.  and  Gn."^,  Cos.  [PBB.  xxi,  11), 
C.  ySlade.  —  500  MS.,  Th.  sae  leodan  ;  Gm.,  A',  sie  laedan.  —  501  Th.,  Gm.,  K.,  Gn., 
B.  gelicost.  MS.  plainly  lansceare ;  Th.,  W.  as  MS.  lansceape  (Imt  TV.  A^achtr. 
lansceare);  Th.  text,  as  MS.;  Gin.  (-seeape,  misprinf),  A'.,  Gn.,  IV.,  B.,  C.  land- 
sceape  ;  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  11)  landsceare.  The  syllable  Ian-  stands  at  end  of  a  lint 
ill  the  MS.  Cf.  684",  i22g^.  —  504  Gn.  brontstaefne,  Gn?;  Spr.  i,  ij6  brondstaefne  ; 
Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  //)  brontsta£fn[n]e.  B.  as  MS.  sneowe^,  B."  snowetS;  Gm.,  A'., 
Gn.,  B.,  C.  sneowe'5.  —  507  A/S.,  Edd.  he.  Gm.,  A',  -lacendes.  A^ap.,  on  the  left 
margin  of  the  page  in  the  MS.,  the  word  leof.  —  512  Folio  jj*  ends  tvith  scealcum. 
Tk.  thinks  a  leaf  has  been  cut  out;  but  the  other  AZdd.  print  withojit  interruption  ; 
cf  43'- 


ANDREAS  21 

brecaS  ofer  b?e(Sweg       brimhengestum. 

HwUum  us  on  ybum       earfotillce  '-^^-le^jyA^ 

gesaeleS  on  s»we,       ]>Eh  we  si6  nesan,  515    .  ^    '  • 

1^^  — 0-  frecne  geferan.       Flodwylm  ne  m?eg 

tnanna  aenigne       ofer  Meotudes  est 
A-  lungre  gelettan ;       ah  him  Ilfes  geweald, 

se  (Se  brimu  bindeS,       briine  ySa  y 

u^a^^^^ji^fu^^-^    SyS^nd  freataS.       He  ))eodum  sceal  520 


\v^ 


T' 


racian  mid  rihte,       se  (Se  rodor  ahof 

ond  gefaestnode       folmum  sinum, 
iwvktii      worhte  ond  wreSede,       wuldras  fylde 
\\JtJotlr~^    beorhtne  boldwelan  ;       swa  gebledsod  wearS 

engla  e6el       ]mrh  his  anes  miht.  525 

For})an  is  gesyne,       s55  orgete, 

cu6  oncnavven,       past  SQ  cyninges  eart 

))egen  ge|mngen,       l)rymsittendes,  ^  -t^.^^' 

for))an  })e  sona       saeholm  oncneow, 

garsecges  begang,       j'ast  SO  gife  hcefdes  530 

hahges  gastes.       Haern  eft  onwand, 
-rf  wo.^'i^       arySa  geblond  ;       egesa  gestilde, 

widfaeSme  w£eg  ;       waedu  swaet5orodon  i^i.  ;.,L  \ 

seoSpan  hie  ongeton       }>aet  tie  God  haefde 

wEere  bewunden,       se  Se  wuldres  bleed  535 

gestaSolade       strangiim  mihtum." 
i  (>«ic«.  V^  hleoSrade       halgan  stefne 

cempa  coUenferhS,       cyning  wyrtiude,  f"^-e^ 

wuldres  waldend,       ond  jais  wordum  cwaeS  : 

"  Wes  Su  gebledsod,       brego  mancynnes,  540 

Dryhten  Hffilend  !       A  )nn  dom  lyfaS  ! 

515  £iM.  siSnesan,  except  K.  siS  nesen,  mtd B.  siS  nesan  (TF.  incorrectfy  ascribes 
siSnesan /(?  i9.).  —  521  Gtn.,  A'.  rxAa.nfo?- X3^c\z,n. —  523  77/.,  Gni.,  A'.,  Gn.  wuldres. 
—  526  Th.  ongeten.  —  531  T/i.  haemeft. —  532  MS.,  T/i.,  Gni.,  A',  ar  y'5a.  —  535 
MS.  bewunde.  —  538  Th.  wyrSude, '  apparently  mi  error  for  wer-tSeode.'  —  539  Gm., 
A',  wealdend. 


22 


ANDREAS 


0^^r^\^-<k. 


frv^XgJiSL\ 


tty!^ 


<^ 


jkbu^  liWi),.Kt 


1 


J 


(' 


Ge  neh  ge  feor       is  ]nn  nama  halig, 

wuldre  gewlitegad       ofer  werpeoda, 

miltsum  gemsersod.       Neenig  manna  is 

under  heofonhwealfe,       hseleSa  cynnes,  545 

■Ssette  areccan  mgeg       o'8'8e  rim  wite 

hii  Srymlice,       J)eoda  jbaldor,  (- ■        [i.  1,6^^         * 

gasta  geocend,       ]'ine  gife  dselest. 

Hiaru  is  gesyne,       sawla  nergend, 

J)8et  ■8u  pissum  hysse       hold  gewurde  550 

ond  hine  geongne       geofum  wyrSodest, 

wis  on  gewitte       ond  wordcwidum. 

Ic  eet  efenealdum       gefre  ne  mette 

on  modsefan       maran  snyttro." 

Him  Sa  of  ceole  oncwaeS       cyninga  wuldor,  555 

fraegn  fromlice       fruma  ond  ende  : 
"  Saga,  fances  gleaw       )'egn,  gif  Su  cunne, 
hii  'Sset  gewurde       be  werum  tweonum, 
faet  Sa  arleasan       inwidjmncum, 

ludea  cynn       wiS  Godes  bearne  560 

_  _  *      .  _  . 

ahof  hearmcwide.       HaeleS  imsaelige  CwlajJI^. 

no  Saer  gelyfdon       in  hira  liffruman,  <:^.u^^ 

grome  gealgmode,       j'set  he  God  weere, 

])eah  Se  he  wundra  feala       weorodum  gecySde, 

sweotulra  ond  gesynra;       synnige  ne  mihton  565 

oncnawan  ]'?et  cynebearn,  /    se  fie  acenned  wearJS 

to  hleo  ond  to  hr5'5re       hceleSa  cynne, 


546  Gn.  7iote  maege?— 547  G7n.  niisprint  x\w.  —  550  W.  e  (yhysse  written  npoii 
an  erasure.  —  552  MS.  wis  ongewitte.  77/.,  Gm.,  A'.,  Gn?',  B.,  Bright  (^MLN.  ii, 
81)  wis  on  gewitte;  Gn.  wisan  gewitte;  W.  wison  gewitte. —  553  Th.  aefen-. — 
556  A'.,  B.  fruman  ;  B!^  fruma.  —  557  IV.  a  discoloration  in  the  MS.  partially 
covers  seven  lines,  especially  the  words  gif  (557),  tweonu  (558),  ar  (559),  wi'5,  bearne 
(560).  These  words  are  only  faintly  legible  in  the  reproduction.  —  559  Cos.  {PBB. 
xxi,  12)  reads  ^aet  arlease. —  561  Siev.  (PBB.  x,  460)  unsa^lge.  —  562  W.  MS. 
doubtfully  no  or  ne ;  JVap.  plainly  no ;  the  reproduction  is  not  clearly  legible  ;  all 
J'.dd.  no,  except  B.  ne.  —  564  Cw.,  K.  fela.    K.  gecy^Se. 


r 


ANDREAS 


23 


eallum  eor?>\varum.       ^j^elinge  weox 
word  ond  wisdGm,       ah  he  j'ara  wundra  a, 
f.vixa^.^    domagende,       ds^l //Ten/gne  570 

pvou^       frsetre  peode       beforan  cy^de." 

Him  Sa  Andreas       agef  andsware  : 
'-e^-^'t.pu,       "  Hu  mihte  J'?et  gewyrtian       in  werpeode, 
]>xt  ftu  ne  gehyrde       Haelendes  miht, 
gumena  leofost,       hQ  he  his  gif  cy8de  575 

geond  woruld  wide,       wealdendes  beam? 
Sealde  he  dumbum  gesprec,       deafe  gehyrdon, 
^- !  healtum  ond  hreofum       hyge  blissode, 

Sa  ]>e  limseoce       lange  \v£eron, 
i'^/        werige,  wanhale,       witum  gebundene,  580 

Kfter  burhstedum       blinde  gesegon  ; 
t<iA-Ui         swa  I  he  on  grundwsege       gumena  cynnes  [f-37^] 

manige  missenllce       men  of  deaSe 
worde  awehte.       Swylce  he  eac  wundra  feala 
cynerof  cySde       )mrh  his  craeftes  miht.  585 

He  gehalgode       for  heremggene 

win  of  waetere       ond  wendan  het,  ctuu-.w 

beornum  to  blisse,       on  pa  beteran  gecynd. 
Swylce  he  afedde       of  fixum  twam 

ond  "of  fif  hlafum       fira  cynnes  590 

fif  Susendo ;       feSan  ssEton,  c*>v.,;«.><.u:'i 

^1^        reonigmode,       reste  gefegon,  ■*-^'^i«vk:4 

ti^u^a^^         vverige  aefter  waSe,       wiste  )?egon,  fu.tA^  tuTtU- 

cyv»-v^,-^J       menn  on  moldan,       swa  him  gemedost  wses.  (i-^ri:^.,^ 

Nil  Su  miht  gehyran,       hyse  leofesta,  ,-.-a     595 

hn  lis  wuldres  weard       wordum  ond  dEedum 

569  Gti.  and /or  ah.  —  570  3/S.,  Edil.  dom  agende.  I^IS.,  Edd.  aenigne.  —  573 
Th.  as  MS.  get>yr(San.  —  575  Gn.  gife  ;  Gn?-,  Spr.  i,  joj,  gif.  —  580  S/ez:  {PBB.  .v, 
459)  gebundne.  —  582  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi.,  12)  -wege.  —  592  MS.,  Th.,  Gm.  {^alternative 
reonig-),  A'.,  W.,  B.  reomigmod ;  G71.  note,  Siev.  {^PBB.  x,  jo6)  reonigmod. — 
593  T/i.,  A'.  was'Se ;   G//i.,  Git.  vaeSe, 


24 


ANDREAS 


lufode  in  life,        ond  )mrh  lare  speon  %l 

to  ]>am  faegeran  gefean,       j'aer  freo  moton,  'W-fM 

eadige  mid  englum,       card  weardigan,         ^  \>j^Ac.  VJ^^It, 


pa  6e  sefter  deaSe       Dryhten  secaS." 


600 


r'T 


[VI] 

Da  gen  weges  weard       wordhord  onleac, 
beorn  ofer  bolcan,       beald  reordade  : 
"  Miht  Su  me  gesecgan,     ,  ))set  ic  sof5  wite, 
hwaeSer  wealdend  ]'In       wundor  on  eorSan, 
])a  he  gefremede       nalas  feam  siSum,  605 

•^folcum  to  frofre       beforan  cyMe, 
J'ffir  bisceopas       ond  boceras         ^'■^ "  -^ts 

ond  ealdormenn       seht  besSton,    i''-^'^  c« ,.J 

mseSelhgegende?       Me  )'set  })ince?;, 

Sset  hie  for  sefstum       inwit  syredon  cko-C^fi-^  610 

))urh  deopne  gedwolan  ;       deofies  larum 

haeleS  hynfuse       hyrdon  tdgeorne, 

wraSum  waerlogan.       Hie  seo  wyrd  beswac, 

forleolc  ond  forl^rde.       Nu  hie  lungre  sceolon, 

werige  mid  werigum,       wrsece  j>rowian,  615 

biterne  bryne       on  |banan  fseSme."  [f.  37*^] 

Him  Sa  Andreas       agef  ondsware  : 
"  Secge  ic  Se  to  s.o6e,       ^aet  he  swiSe  oft 
beforan  fremede       folces  rSswum  /ut^' 

wundor  aefter  wundre       on  wera  gesieh^e  ;  620 


599  IV.  a  discoloration  m  the  MS.,  covering  -se  leof-  (595),  -fode  in  life  -\  hurh 
(597),  J>3er  (598).  Plainly  legible  in  the  reproduction.  —  601  Edd.  weges  (A'.  /;■. 
'  ruler  of  the  wave ');  cf.  6j2".  —  607  Gm.,  A',  biscopas.  —  608  G»i.,  A',  -men.  Gm. 
Sht.  —  609  Gm.,  A'.,  Cw.  -hegende ;  Gn."^  -hegende.  —  614  A'.,  B.  incorrectly  as 
A/S.  ferleolc ;  B."^  forleolc.  —  615  Gm.  wrSce ;  A',  wrace.  —  616  Sie7'.  {PBB.  x,  4gb) 
bitteme.  W.  on  f.  j7*  are  niimerons  blots,  probably  caused  by  acids,  but  the  text  is 
nowhere  illegible. — 618  Gm.,  A'.  Sage/i^r  Secge. 


0«Wf\<^ 


ANDREAS  25 

swylce  deogollice        Dryhten  gumena 
\^vvi  ;w\  folcrSd  fremede,        swa  he  to  fri<Se  hogode."  i^A  . 

Him  ondswarode       aeSelinga  helm  : 
"  Miht  8u,  wis  hseleS,       wordum  gesecgan, 
maga  mode  rof,       m?egen  pa  he  cySde,  625 

bfaj^iM-u    '  deormod  on  digle,       fta  mid  Dryhten  oft, 

rodera  radend,       rune  beszeton?"  ,-^.^  >«jl-.  <...  i 

Him  ]>2L  Andreas       ondsware  agef  : 
"  Hwset  frinest  ?)u  me,       frea  leofesta, 

wordum  wrgEtUcum,       ond  peh  wyrda  gehwEere  630 

)mrh  snyttra  croeft       s5(5  oncnawest?  " 

Da  git  him  wages  weard       wi6]nngode  :  ^jl^u.  .Jiii 

'  "  Ne  frine  ic  6e  for  tSle       ne  Surh  teoncwide  <Ji-^i--\^^ 

on  hranrade,       ac  min  hige  blissat^, 
^Ufi'sks     wynnum  wridatS,       )mrh  pine  wordlaeSe,  <^f^^^  635 

»w<P'.'.'f>^      aeSelum  ecne.       Ne  eom  ic  ana  6get, 

ac  manna  gehwam       mod  bi8  on  hyhte, 

s-Ac:^u      fyrhS  afrefred,       pam  pe  feor  otiSe  neah 

c»'  >     on  mode  geman,       hii  se  maga  fremede, 

godbearn  on  grundum.       Gastas  hweorfon,  640 

sohton  siSfrome       swegles  dreamas, 
engla  etiel       ))urh  pa  setJelan  miht." 
fujJUr  Edre  him  Andreas       agef  ondsware : 

"  Nil  ic  on  pe  sylfum       soS  oncnawe  ^-c/,^*^  ->^  ^..^xK. 

wisdomes  gewit,       wundorcrsefte  645   . 

"        V  sigesped  geseald        (snyttrum  bloweS  »%  w-i^acv>-1 

beorhtre  blisse       breost  innanweard), 
nQ  ic  pe  sylfum       secgan  wille 

622  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  12)  suggests  to  frio^e  hogde.  —  630  MS.,  Edd.  J>e  {at  end  of 
a  line  in  the  MS.) ;  Bright  {MLN.  ii,  82)  J'ch  =  J^eah.  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  485)  gehwaem, 
Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  12)  gehwaes, /t^r  gehwrere.  —  631  Cm.,  K.  snyttru.  —  632  Gn. 
wis  Hngode.  —  633  Th.  as  MS.  frime,  text  f rine.  —  633*  MS.,  On.,  B.  nu  for  ne.  — 
634  B.  hyge.  — 635  Cw.,  K.  wordlncde.  —  637  MS.  gehwam;  Edd.  gehwam, 
except  B.  gehwcem.  —  640  Gm.,  K.  hwurfon. — 645  K.  -crafte. 


^  ^26  ANDREAS 


^1 

J 


\ 


^  oor  ond  ende,       swa  ic  ])aes  aeSelinges 

^  word  ond  wisdom       on  wera  gemote  650 

Jmrh  his  sylfes  muS       symle  gehyrde. 

Oft  ge|samnodon       side  herigeas,  [f.  38^] 

folc  unmlete,       to^lFrean  d5me, 

]'£er  hie  hyrcnodon       hahges  lare. 

Donne  eft  gewat 

beorht  bleedgifa, 

■gaer  him  togenes, 

to  Sam  metielstede 

snottre  selersedend 

beornas  bliSheorte, 

Swa  gesselde  lu, 

ferde,  Frea  mihtig ; 

on  siSfate,       sinra 

nemne  ellefne       ( 
<5A»-'>^W  sl^i^.j(^teled  tireadige ; 

J>a  we  becomon 
A  J'ser  getimbred  wses       tempel  Dryhtnes, 

fJ^        -^        heah  ond  horngeap,       haeleSum  gefrege, 

wuldre  gewlitegod.       Huscworde  ongan       st/r-wv^i 

furh  inwittSanc       ealdorsacerd  670 

herme  hyspan,       hordlocan  onspeon, 
'fi).,-r  ,i,wroht  webbade  ;       he  on  gewitte  oncneow, 

649  G7ti.,  Gn.,  K.,  B.  or.  —  657  Gm.  to  genes.  —  658  K.  misprint  eomon.  —  659 
Th.,  Gm.,  Gn.,  K.  snottere.  Tli.,  Gm.  sele  raedend.  Edd.  symble  (adv.),  except  Gu.- 
symble  (inst.) :  '  im  Glossar  ist  die  Stelle  Jtnter  symbel  {^festivitas,  etc.)  nachzutrageii 
nnd  iinter  symble,  adv.,  zu  streichen.^  —  660  IV.  the  two  letters  after  bl-  illegible  ; 
Nap.  reads  -ilS.  In  the  reproduction  a  rectangular  blot  extends  dotun  the  right  side 
of  f.  J 8"  from  the  fourth  to  the  tenth  line  and  across  the  nitith  and  tenth  lines  to  the 
middle  of  the  page,  all  of  %vhich  space  is  illegible.  —  663  A'.,  B.  -faete  ;  B?'  -fate. — 
664  K.,  B.  elleffne;  B?-  ellefne.  — 665  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  460)  -eadge.  — 667  W.  and 
Nachtr.  the  first  e  of  getimbred  illegible  in  the  MS. ;  Nap.  legibly  but  not  clearly, 
atrimbred  (tnisprint  for  atimbred  ?).  —  669  Gtt.  us  worde,  Spr.  i,  112  huscworde  ; 
Simons  {/.  82,  citingTrantmajui)  usic  worde.  —  672  ATS.  gewit*e. 


aeSelinga  helm, 

655 

in  bold  oSer, 

f.-," 

God  herigende, 

manige  comon, 

;        symble  gefegon, 

burhweardes  cyme. 

660 

])get  se  sigedema 

^■ 

;       nses  par  folces  ma 

leoda, 
rettmgecgas, 

^ 

/,f  ' 

he  wges  twelfta  sylf^^ 
to  ])am  cynestole,         / 

665 

OfJia 

f 


ANDREAS 


27 


Jjset  we  soMaestes       s\va8e  folgodon, 

Iseston  larcwide  ;       he  lungre  ahof 

woSe  wiiSerhydig       wean  onblonden  :  *  675 

'  Hwaet !  ge  syndon  earme       ofer  ealle  menn  ; 

wada6  widlastas,       weorn  geferaS 

earfot5sr5a,       ellpeodiges  nu 

biitan  leodrihte       latum  hyrat5, 

eadiges  orhlytte       seSeling  cy6ai5,  680 

secgaS  soSlice,       )>aet  mid  suna  meotudes 

drohtigen  dceghwEemllce.       f>3et  is  duguSum  ciI6, 

hwanon  ]'am  ordfruman       seSelu  onwocon  ; 

he  waes  afeded       on  ))ysse  folcsceare, 

cildgeong  acenned       mid  his  cneomagum ;  685 

]'us  syndon  haten       hamsittende, 

f?eder  ond  modur,       paes  we  gefrsegen  habbaS 

iJmrh  m5dgemynd,       Maria  ond  Joseph.  [f.  38''] 

Syndon  him  on  seSelum       oSere  twegen 

beornas  geborene,       bro'Sorsybbum,  690 

suna  losephes,       Simon  ond  Jacob.' 

Swa  hleo?irodon       haeleSa  raeswan, 

dugoS  domgeorne,       dyrnan  ])ohton 

Meotudes  mihte.       Man  eft  gehwearf, 

yfel  endeleas,       J)aer  hit  £er  aras.  695 


[VII] 


"  ]>a.  se  ])eoden  gewat       j^egna  heape 

fram  ))am  meSelstede       mihtum  geswiSed,  -i'^;    ^"-^^ 

dugetSa  Dryhten,       secan  digol  land. 

676  B.  sindon.  — 682  A/S.  droht'gen.  A',  -hwamlice.  —  689  B.  sindon.  A",  omits 
on. —  690  W.the  fi7ial  e  (y  geborene  indistinct  in  the  MS.  —  693  W.^s  statement, 
Gm.  dugoSdomgeorne  (also  I.  878),  applies  only  to  Gm.\  note,  not  to  his  text. — 
695  W.  a  letter  erased  in  the  MS.  betiveen  yfel  and  ende-.  —  696  Th.  heare  for 
heape  ;    Cm.,  A',  hearra  ;    Gn.  as  emendation  heape. 


28  ANDREAS 

He  I'urh  wundra  feala       on  ]»am  westenne 

craefta  gecySde,        ]>?et  he  wses  cyning  on  riht  700 

ofer  middangeard,       msegene  geswiSed, 

waldend  ond  wyrhta       wuldorprymmes, 

an  ece  God       eallra  gesceafta. 

Swylce  he  oSerra       unrim  cySde 

wundorworca       on  wera  gesyhSe.  705 

"  Sy)5]>an  eft  gewat       o6re  sISe 
getrume  mycle,       j'aet  he  in  temple  gestod, 
wuldres  aldor.       WordhleoSor  astag  cj^c^c' 

geond  heahrfficed  ;       haliges  lare 

synnige  ne  swulgon,       ]?eah  he  so6ra  swa  feala  710 

tacna  gecySde,       j^aer  hie  t5  segon. 
Swylce  he  wraetllce       wundor  agraefene, 
anllcnesse       engla  sinra 
geseh,  sigora  Frea,       on  seles  wage, 

on  twa  healfe       torhte  gefraetwed,  715 

wlitige  geworhte.       He  worde  cwse^  : 
'  Dis  is  anlicnes       engelcynna 
•-d.ij.vt  'fiv-.i         ]5ass  bremestan       [))e]  mid  pam  burgwarum 

in  J'sere  ceastre  is ;       Cheruphim  et  Seraphim 

]'a  on  swegeldreamum       syndon  nemned ;  720 

fore  onsyne       ecan  Dryhtnes 

standat5  [stiSfert^e,       stefnum  herigatS,  [f.  39*] 

halgum  hleocSrum,       heofoncyninges  J'rym, 

Meotudes  mundbyrd.       Her  amearcod  is  -K^fcei,, - 

haligra  hlw,       purh  handmaegen  725 

709  Cm.,  A',  -reced. — 710  A''ap.  Jl/S.  hie  not  he  ;  so  plainly  in  the  reproduction  ; 
all  Edd.  he  without  remark.  —  711  Edd.  tosegon,  except  Gm.,  Gn.  to  segon.  —  712 
MS.  wundor  agraefene ;  Edd.  wundoragraefene ;  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  12)  vvundrum 
agrasfene ;    G71.  N^achtr.  wundor   agraefene  ?   btit  Spr.  ii,   yj2,  wundoragraefene. 

—  718*   Holthausen  {PBB.  xi'i,  jjo)  supplies  )>e. —  719"   Root  (p.  57)   omits  is. 

—  719  Gn.,  A'.,  B.  ond;  B.  incorrectly  as  MS.  i ;  B.^  et.  —  722  77/.,  Gtn„  A'.,  Gn. 
-ferhSe. 


ANDREAS  29 

awriten  on  wealle       wuldres  l^egnas.' 
]?a  gen  worde  cwsecS       weoruda  Dryhten, 
heofonhalig  gast,       fore  l»am  herem?egene  : 
'  Nu  ic  bebeode       beacen  ?etywan, 
<jrr'"-\t^  wundor  geweor^an       on  wera  gemange,  730 

Sset  ]»eos  onlicnes       eorSan  sece,  y\^  .  , ,: 

wlitig  of  wage,       ond  word  sprece, 
secge  so8cwidum        (|)y  sceolon  gelyfan 
f^,.L         eorlas  on  cySt5e)       hwaet  min  aet5elo  sien.' 
inj^  "  Ne  dorste  Jia  forhylman       Halendes  bebod  735 

^,^,.i~  wundor  fore  weorodum,       ac  of  wealle  ahleop, 

frod  fymgeweorc,       ))set  he  on  foldan  stod, 
Stan  fram  stane  ;       stefn  sefter  cwom, 
(     c  t  ^\JL  ^  hlud  ])urh  heardne,       hleotJor  dynede, 

,j[  Lv-ft-  t-tW^     wordum  wemde       (wrgetlic  fuhte  740 

stiShycgendum       stanes  ongin),  j^o^  , 

•^(vv-'(,tv      septe  sacerdas       sweotolum  tacnum, 
wJtMJzui.      witig  werede       ond  worde  cwaeS  : 

'  Ge  synd  unlgede,       earmra  gepohta 
searowum  beswicene,       o66e  sel  nyton,  ,  745 

' ,  mode  gemyrde ;       ge  mon  cigaS 

Godes  ece  beam,       ))one  j^e  grund  ond  sund, 

heofon  ond  eorSan       ond  hreo  waegas, 

sake  SEestreamas       ond  swegl  uppe 

amearcode       mundum  sTnum.  750 

J>is  is  se  ilea       ealwalda  God, 

726  Holthaiisen  {PBB.  xvi,  jjo)  J'egna.  —  733  After  so'Scwidum  G/i.  supposes 
an  omission  in  the  narrative,  and  supplies  as  folloivs :  secge  so"Scwidum,  [J>ast  ic 
eom  sunu  godes]  ;  Jjy  sceolon  gelyfan  [leoda  raeswan]  etc.  There  is  no  indication 
of  a  break  in  the  MS.  —  736  Th.,  G?n.  ahleow ;  Gin.  note  ahleop.  —  740  77/.  as  MS. 
Kaetlic,  text  wraetlic.  —  741  Gn.  onginn.  —  742  AfS.  plainly  septe  ;  Th.  text  septe, 
note  *  A/S.  septe  or  sewte,  uncertain' ;  Gm.  text  septe,  but  note  sewte  or  sewde ; 
Gn.  sewde;  K.  sewte  saverdas  (tr.  '■It  taught  the  priests').  —  743  Cos.  {PBB. 
xxi,  12)  wenede.  —  744  K.  earma ;  B.  incorrectly  earma  as  MS.  —  746  MS.,  Edd.  ge 
monetiga'5;   Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  12)  ge  mon  ciga'^.' — 747  MS.,  Edd.  ond  before  J>one. 


\>fS 


30  ANDREAS 

^one  on  fyrndagum       faederas  ciiSon  ; 
he  Abrahame       ond  Isace 

ond  locobe       gife  bryttode,  <]^-^(~^ 

welum  weorSode,       wordum  saegde  755 

ffirest  Habrahame        cC'Seles  gepingu,  ^ 

))aet  of  his  cynne       cenned  sceolde 
weorSan  wuldres  God.       Is  seo  vvyrd  mid  eow 
-■-^  "f      open,  orgete;       magan  eagum  nu 

geseon  sigores  God,       swegles  agend.'  760 

"yEfter  ])yssum  [wordum       weorud  hlosnode       [f.  39^] 
geond  ])3et  side  sel,       swigodon  ealle. 
Da  6a  yldestan       eft  ongunnon 
secgan  synfulle       (soS  ne  oncneowan), 
])3et  hit  drycraeftum       gedon  w^re,  "^--^65 

scingelacum,       paet  se  scyna  stan 

maelde  for  mannum.       Man  wridode  <^^ou,J^^' 

geond  beorna  breost,       brandhata  nlS 
weoll  on  gewitte,       weorm  blsedum  fag,  k?;'  ■ 

attor  jelfjele.       J-'ar  orcnawe  [\vear6  ]  •.-v^'^j*''*^        y^Q 

bi3j,(,:'.M^       j)urh  tjEoncwide       tweogende  mod,  ""u^Yim. 

maecga  misgehygd       morSre  bewunden. 

"  Da  se  ])eoden  bebead       )?ry6weorc  faran, 
Stan  [on]  strSte       of  stedewange,  o],, 

ond  forS  gan       foldweg  tredan,  775 


754  AfS.  iocobe  ;  T//.  iacobe  ;  Gm.,  A'.,  Gn.  Jacobe  ;  B.  lacobe  ;  IV.  locobe.  Th., 
Gn.  gyfe.  —  756  C;/.  Abrahame.  —  758  Xap.  as  MS.  ys  ;  but  the  reproduction  reads 
plainly  is.  —  759  Gm.  note  ongete.  —  761  K.  ^fer. —  769  K.  ixg.  —  770  MS. 
aelfffile,  B.  incorrectly  as  MS.  alfaele ;  Th.,  Gm.,  Gn.  slfjele ;  K.,  B.  alfjele ;  B?' 
aelfsele  ;  Gm.  note  aelfaele  ?  aelfealo  .-' ;  Cos.  (PBB.  xxi,  ij)  citing  Kern  {Taalk.  bijdr. 
i,  206),  ealfe[a]lo.  Th.,  Gm.  note  oncnawe.  Gm.,  A".,  B.  supply  wearS  after,  Gn., 
W.  before,  orcnawe ;  Th.  makes  no  addition  to  the  text.  In  the  MS.  orcnawe  stands 
at  the  end  of  a  line.  —  772  Th.,  Gin.,  A'.,  Gn.  misgehyd. —  774  K.,  Siev.  (PBB.  x, 
J/y),  Cos.  (FBB.  xxi,  ij)  Stan  [on]  strjete.  In  the  MS.  stan  stands  at  the  end  of 
a  line.  —  T]^  MS.,  Gn.,  W.  for'S  gan;  Th.,  Gm.,  A'.,  B.  for«gan ;  Siev.  {PBB.  x, 
477)  would  resolve  the  contraction. 


/>, 


ANDREAS 


31 


780 


\Lk,^^i^Jt-\ 


785 


grene  grundas,       Oodes  arendu  (^  , . 

'^^^'"^'^^     larum  l^dan        on  l>a  leodmearce 
'  to  Channaneum,       cyninges  worde 

beodan  Habrahame       mid  his  eaforum  tvvEem 

of  eorSscraife       jerest  fremman, 

iStan  landreste,       leo8o  gadrigean, 

gaste  onfon       ond  geogoShade, 
^vu-i.'-        ednlwinga       andweard  cuman, 
^'^. -c'     f rode  fyrnweo tan,       folce  gecySan, 

hwylcne  hie  God  mihtum       ongiten  haefdon.         -0  '' 
►>,  Gewat  he  J)a  feran,        swa  him  Frea  mihtig, 

scyppend  wera,       gescrifen  hsefde, 

ofer  mearcpaSu,    fset  he  on  Mambre  becom 
?'r  beorhte  blican,       swa  him  bebead  Meotud, 

J:£er  ))a  Hchoman       lange  J'rage, 
d^u^-.-   heahfsedera  hra,       beheled  wseron. 

Het  ]'a  ofstlice       up  astandan 

Habraham  ond  Isaac,       seSeling  priddan 

lacob  of  greote       to  Godes  gejnnge, 

sneome  of  slsepe  ]>3Bm.  faestan ;       het  hie  to  J)am  sifie  gyrwan, 

faran  to  Frean  dome ;       sceoldon  hie  pam  folce  gecyt^an, 

hwa  set  frumsceafte       furSum  teode 

eort5an  eallgrene       ond  Opheofon, 
;rt. .  hwaer  I  se  wealdend  waere,       ]ie  paet  weorc  statSolade.  [f.  40='] 

Ne  dorston  pa  gelettan       leng  owihte  800 

wuldorcyninges  word  ;       geweotan  Sa  cSa  wTtigan  j^ry 


790 


795 


-U 


776  T/i.  incorrectly  as  MS.  a;ren5u. —  779  Gii.  Abiahame. —  780  A'.,  Gu.  aerist. 
—  782  Traittmanii  {Kynewulf,  p.  2g)  would  supply  ond  before  gaste.  MS.,  Eild. 
onfon;  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  4j6)  -would gire  the  uiicontracted forni.  K.  geogoShades; 
On.  geogu'Shade.  —  783  K.  edniwinge.  —  785  Gn.  note  god-mihtum  ?  also  Spr.  a, 
802  without  question.  —  788  Gin.  >wte,  K.  mearcwaSu  ;  Gn.  incorrectly  ascribes  -wadu 
to  Gin.,  A'.  Th.,  Gin.,  A'.,  Gn.  Membre.  —  790  IV.  after  t>aer  «  second  )?c&x  erased  in 
the  MS.  —  792  A',  ofslice.  Th.,  A'.,  B.  upastandan.  —  796  Gm.  sceolden. —  798  A'. 
ealgrene.  —  801   A',  -ceyninges.     B.  geweoton,  y^'.^  geweotan. 


32  ANDREAS 

modlge  mearcland  tredan;       forlzetan  moldern  wunigean 

open  eor^scraefu ;       woldon  hie  ^dre  gecySan 

frumweorca  faeder.       J>a  ]>set  folc  geweart5 
j_[  .  egegan  geaclod,       pSr  ]'a  se'Selingas  805 

wordum  weorSodon       wuldres  aldor. 

Hie  6a  ricene  het       rices  hyrde 
lui-j  '  '    to  eadwelan       o))re  slSe 

secan  mid  sybbe       swegles  dreamas, 

ond  ])ses  to  widan  feore       willum  neotan.  810 

"Nil  6ii  miht  gehyran,       hyse  leofesta, 

hG  he  wundra  worn       wordum  cySde, 
,  ^-  swa  })eah  ne  gelyfdon       larum  sinum 

modblinde  menn.       Ic  wat  manig  nu  gyt 
,  ^^..V^^         mycel  mSre  spell,       tSe  se  maga  fremede,  815 

rodera  rsedend,       Sa  ^u  arsefnan  ne  miht,  -;!u  c. 

hreSre  behabban,       hyge|)ances  gleaw." 

J>us  Andreas       ondlangne  daeg 

herede  hleoSorcwidum       haliges  lare, 

oSSaet  hine  semninga       sleep  ofereode  820 

on  hronrade       heofoncyninge  neh. 

[VIII] 

Da  gelffidan  het       lifes  brytta 
ofer  ySa  gepraec       englas  sine, 
faeSmum  ferigean       on  faeder  w^re 

leofne  mid  lissum       ofer  lagufsesten,  825 

o'S'Saet  seewerige      sleep  ofereode. 
]?urh  lyftgelac       on  land  becwom 

802  J<r.  forljeton,  Gn.  note  forleton.  Th.,  Gm.,  A'.,  B.  place  wunigean  in  Soj'^ ; 
Gn.,  W.  in  Bos'".  —  810  MS.  plainly  (so  also  Nap.)  )jaes  ;  Eild.  \>dtv.  —  814  A',  men.  — 
819  J/^".  berede;  so  Th.,  IV.;  Nap.  as  MS.  herede;  77/.,  B.,  W.  berede  :  Gm.,  Gn., 
€.,  Bright  {MLN  ii,  82),  Cos.  {PBB.  .xxi,  13)  herede.  —  826  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  460) 
-werge.  —  827  Gn.  lyft  gelac,  G/t.-  lyftgelac. 


ANDREAS  33 

to  j'jere  ceastre,       )>e  him  cining  engla 

6a  )'a  aras  sISigean, 
ia-*^c  -'     eadige  on  lipweg,       eftles  neosan.  830 

Leton  )'one  halgan       be  herestraete 
swefan  on  sybbe       under  swegles  hleo, 
bliSne  bidan       burhwealle  neh, 
tu^t-,,  c-^    ,  ,    j^jg  nIfShetum,       nihtlangne  fyrst, 

0(S))aet  Dryhten  jforlet       daegcandelle  [f.  40^^]       835 

scire  scinan.       Sceadu  swe^erodon, 
vvonn  under  wolcnum.       J>a  com  wederes  blaest, 
hador  heofonleoma,       ofer  hofu  blican. 
Onvvoc  )'a  wiges  heard,       wang  sceawode  ; 
fore  burggeatum       beorgas  steape,  840 

cijTTj  To      hleo^iu  hHfodon  ;       ymbe  harne  stan         0/^j^ 
\jj^  ,  Vw^        tigelfagan  trafu,       torras  stodon, 

windige  weallas.       pa.  se  wisa  oncneow, 

))aet  he  Marmedonia       mgegSe  haefde 

si6e  gesohte,       swa  him  sylf  bebead,  845 

828  T/i.,  after  engla,  '  Some  lities  are  ivattting  here,  though  there  is  no  hiatus 
ill  the  MS.'  Gin.,  K.  leave  space  for  one  and  a  half  lines  after  engla.  Gn.  fills  in 
as  follows  : 

\>e  him  cyning  engla 
[in  Achaia       asr  getacnode]. 
[Gewiton]  J>a  \>a.  aras       [eft]  si^igean,  etc. 

W.  admits  the  break  in  the  narrative  but  does  not  supply  the  omission.  C.  omits 
II.  826-831,  saying  they  "■  are  probably  corrupt  and  are  therefore  omitted.'  B.  alone 
sees  no  interruption  of  the  narrative  here  ;  he  arranges  as  folloius : 

)>&  him  cining  engla  ha  \>2i 
aras  si^igean  eadige  on  upweg,  eSles  neosan. 

B?'  emends  the  second  fja,  /.  S3g^ ,  to  I'aer,  and  reads : 

\'e  him  cining 
engla  ^a  \>xt-      aras  siSigean,  etc. 

The  hypothetical  line  following  I.  828  is  not  counted  in  the  line-numbering.  — 
838^1/^.  le°ma.  —  841  MS.  hleotSu,  but  Th.  hleoSii ;  Gm.,  A'.,  Gn.,  consequently, 
hleofium.  —  843  MS.,  Edd.  wis  ;  Gm.  note  'se  \\s  fiir  se  visa.'" 


34  ANDREAS 

]>a.  he  him  fore  gescraf,       fseder  mancynnes. 

f  _    _  _  .  Ji     ■  ' 

;       <■      Geseh  he  pa  on  greote       gingran  sine,  o^cLf. 

beornas  beadurofe,       biryhte  him 

swefan  on  slzepe.       He  sona  ongann 

wigend  weccean,       end  worde  cwaeS  :  850 

"  Ic  eow  secgan  mgeg       so8  orgete, 

paet  lis  gystrandaege       on  geofones  stream 


5«-^         ofer  arvvelan       ae6eling  ferede.  r\  j^      ttA    ^ 

In  pam  ceole  wses       cyninga  wuldor,  ^  ■  ^  vV 

waldend  werSeode  ;       ic  his  word  oncneow,  85  5 

ce^-J.Tvii^.^^-^^       peh  he  his  mffigwhte       bemiSen  haefde."  . 

;:j Him  ]>a.  aet5elingas       ondsweorodon, 

(if  ^-".         geonge  gencwidum,       gastgerynum :  ^^^x^.,x^ 

"We  ?5e,  Andreas,       eaSe  gecySatS         ! /^owh^  ' 
sit5  userne,       paet  fiu  sylfa  miht  860 

u.'>i4^       ongitan  gleawhce       gastgehygdum. 
Us  saiwerige       sleep  ofereode  ; 
|)a  comon  earnas       ofer  y8a  wylni 
[faran]  on  fiyhte,       fe'Serum  hremige,  frcvj 

us  ofsleependum       sawle  abrugdon,  ca^f;ri        ^65 

mid  gefean  feredon       flyhte  on  lyfte, 
to-cJamcu,     brehtmum  bliSe,       beorhte  ond  h8e  ; 

lissum  lufodon       ond  in  lofe  wunedon, 
^^'^ioy'm     peer  wses  singal  sang       ond  swegles  gong, 

846  AIS.,  Nap.  pa  he  him ;  Th.  pa  him ;  Gm.,  A'.,  B.,  W.  pam  him ;  Gn.  replaces 
pa  by  and;  C.  changes  l?a  (i.e.  J^am)  to  \>3i  =  7uhen.  Th.  fore-gescraf ;  Gm.,  Git., 
C.  foregescraf ;  Gn.'^  (fore  =  zuvor),  B.,  IV.  fore  gescraf.  Cos.  {FBB.  xxi,  ij)  sup- 
plies pa  before  fore.  —  852  MS.,  Th.,  B.  gyrstran ;  Edd.  gystran  daege,  except  C. 
gystrandaege.  —  855  MS.,  Gin.,  A'.,  B.  weorSode  ;  Th.  suggests  wer-'Seode  (c/.jjS^), 
Gti.  wer)>eoda,  IV.,  C.  wer^eode ;  Bright  {MLN.  ii,  82)  weoroda.  —  859  Gni.,  A'., 
B.  cade;  B.^  ea«e  —862  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  460)  saewerge.  —  864  MS.,  Th.,  Gm.,B., 
IV.  wylm  on  flyhte,  ivithoiit  break ;  Gn.,  C.  supply  faran  before  on  flyhte.  Sie%>. 
{PBB.  X,  45g)  hremge.  —  865  Edd.  of  slaependum.  —  867  K.  brehtum.  —  868  Th., 
Gm.,  K.,  Gn.  hi  for  in.  —  869  C.  ond  miswritten  for  geond?;  bid  the  MS.  uses  the 
customary  abbreviation.    Simons  {p.  i^i)  suggests  sweges/c^r  swegles. 


ANDREAS  35 

wlitig  weoroda  heap       ond  wuldres  J'reat.  870 

Utan  ymbe    ceSelne       englas  stodon, 
)>egnas  ymb  j'eoden,       jHisendmalum  ; 
heredon  on  hehSo       halgan  stefne 
dryhtna  Dryhten  ;       dream  wees  on  hyhte. 
We  Sar  I heahfsederas       halige  oncneowon     [f.  41''*]      875 
ond  martyra       msegen  unlytel; 
sungon  sigedryhtne       soSfaestlic  lof, 
dugoS  dSmgeorne.       J?Sr  vvass  Dauid  mid, 
eadig  oretta,       Essages  sunu,  » 

for  Crist  cunien,       cining  Israhela;  880 

swylce  we  gesegon       for  suna  Meotudes, 
seSelum  ecne,       eowic  standan, 
twelfe  getealde,       tireadige  haeleS ; 
eow  pegnodon       |)rymsittende, 

halige  heahenglas ;       6am  biS  h^eleSa  well,  885 

]>e  I'ara  blissa       brucan  moton. 
p3er  waes  wuldres  wynn,       wigendra  frym, 
se^elic  onginn  ;       nses  ))£er  aenigum  gewinn. 
f>am  bis  wraecsiS  witod,       wite  geopenad, 
fe  })ara  [gefeana]  sceal       fremde  weorSan,  890 

Cy^  y^.tAu        hean  hwearfian,       ponne  heonon  ganga)?." 
)?a  wffis  modsefa       myclum  geblissod 
haliges  on  hreSre,       sySpan  hleoSorcwide 
gingran  gehyrdon,       j'set  hie  God  wolde 
onmunan  swa  mycles       ofer  menn  ealle,  895 

ond  ))9et  word  gecwaeS       wigendra  hleo  : 
"  Nil  ic,  God  Dryhten,       ongiten  hgebbe, 
]>8et  60  on  faroSstrsete       feor  ne  ware, 
cyninga  wuldur,       fa  ic  on  ceol  gestah, 

871  T//.  utan-ymbe.  —  874  Shnons  {/.  5j)  reads  hyh'Se  ?  —  889  MS.  he  erased  after 
geopenad.  —  890"  Gm.,  A'.,Gu.,  IV.  insert  gefeana  after  fjara,  Bright  (ML A',  ii,  S2) 
frean.    A',  seal.  —  891  Gii.  gangeS.  —  894  A',  gehyrde.  —  899  Gin.,  A',  wuldor. 


7 


[o^- 


^6  '  ANDREAS 

•Seh  ic  on  ySfare,       engla  j^eoden,  900 

i-«wJf~!li^         gasta  geocend,       ongitan  ne  cu6e. 

WeorS  me  nu  milde,        Meotud  ^elmihtig, 
bliSe,  beorht  cyning  !       Ic  on  brimstreame 
spraec  worda  worn,       wat  sefter  nu, 
^'  'i'  >■'  hwa  me  wyrSmyndum       on  wudubate  905 

ferede  ofer  flodas ;       p^t  is  frofre  gast  \,^^ 

hseleSa  cynne.       ]?£er  is  help  gearu, 
milts  set  nigrum,       manna  gehwylcum, 
sigorsped  geseald,       ]mm  ])e  seccS  to  him." 

Da  him  fore  eagum       onsyne  wear  5  "^  910 

seSeling  6t5ywed       in  pa  ilcan  tid, 
cining  cwicera  gehwses,       Jmrh  cnihtes  had  ; 
]>a.  he  worde  cwseS,       wuldres  aldor  : 

"Wes  ^u,  [Andreas,  hal,       mid  fas  willgedryht,        [f.  41*^] 
'ifi-'^      ferSgefeonde  !       Ic  )>e  friJSe  healde,  915 

})aet  ]'e  ne  moton       mangeniSlan,  .c^-a 

"C'lj        grame  grynsmiSas,       gaste  gesceSSan." 

FeoU  ]'a  to  foldan,       frioSo  wilnode 
wordum  wis  hseleS,       winedryhten  frtegn  : 
"  Hii  geworhte  ic  ])8et,       waldend  fira,  920 

synnig  wiS  seolfne,       sawla  nergend,  :- 

A 

I'cCt  ic  ])e  swa  godne       ongitan  ne  meahte 

on  wEegfsere,       ])£er  ic  worda  gespr?ec, 

minra  for  Meotude,       ma  jionne  ic  sceolde?  " 

Him  andswarode       ealwalda  God :  925 

"  No  Sii  swa  swi'cSe       synne  gefremedest, 
swa  Su  in  Achaia       ondssec  dydest,  "^y  . 

8?et  (Sii  on  feorwegas       feran  ne  cufie 


905  Gfi.  weor'Smyndum.  —  907  A/S.  )>ner'^  help. — -910  T/i.  on  syne.  A/S.,  Tit. 
werS.  —  915  Tk.,  Gm.,  Git.,  IF.  ferS  gefeonde  ;  h^i  W.  1. 1J84"  reads  ferhXgefeonde. 
Gn.  for«?  for  ferS.  — 918  K.  freo'So.— 925  B.  ond-,  ^.2  as  A/S.  — 927  A/S. 
achaia.  —  928  A',  feor  wegas. 


ANDREAS 


37 


7 


ne  in  pa  ceastre       becuman  mehte, 

)»ing  gehegan       preora  nihta  '  930 

fyrstgemearces,       swa  ic  ))e  feran  het 

ofer  vvega  gewinn.       Wast  nu  )»e  gearwor, 

faet  ic  eatJe  maeg       anra  gehwylcne 

fremman  ond  fyrfran       freonda  minra 

on  landa  gehwylc,       par  me  leofost  bi3.  935 

Aris  nu  hraedlTce,       rsed  gedre  ongit,  '-^x-v- 

beorn  gebledsod,       swa  ]>t  beorht  faeder  W 

geweortSaS  wuldorgifum       to  widan  aldre, 

cr^efte  ond  mihte.       Du  in  pa  ceastre  gong 

under  burglocan,       p£er  pin  broSor  is.  940 

Wat  ic  Matheus       purh  mgenra  hand  e 

hrinen  heorudolgum,       heafodmagan         fj^-.^ '-■^"'^^ 

searonettum  beseted  ;        pii  hine  secan  scealt, 

leofne  alysan       of  lat5ra  hete 

ond  eal  p£et  mancynn,       pe  him  mid  wunige,  945 

elpeodigra       inwitwrasnum, 

bealuwe  gebundene.       Him  sceal  bot  hraSe 

weorpan  in  worulde       ond  in  wuldre  lean, 

swa  ic  him  sylfum  ger       secgende  wses. 


[IX] 

"  I Nij  tSii,  Andreas,  scealt       edre  geneSan     [f.  42*]  950    <Ji><«.fclv 
in  gramra  gripe ;       is  pe  giaS  weotod, 
heardum  heoruswengum       seel  pin  hra  dseled 


929  Gm.,  K.,  Gn.,  B.  meahte ;  B?  mehte.  —  932  Gm.^  Gn.^  wega. — 942  MS., 
>Edd.  hrinan.  MS.,  Tit.,  Gm.  -magu,  i.e.  -magum;  B.,  W.  -magu ;  Gm'.  note,  K., 
Gn.  -magan.  —  943  MS.,  Th.,  Gm.  -mettum,  Gm.  note,  Edd.  -nettum.  —  945  K. 
manegu/(>r  mancynn.  —  946  K.  aslbeodigra.  —  947  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  4jg)  gebundne; 
Holtliausen  {FEB.  xvi,  jjo)  gebunden.  ^949  A'ap.  at  lower  edge  of  f.  41^  the 
word  ^2,Ag\\>,  afterwards  erased.  —  952  Gm.,  K.,  Gn.,  B.  sceal.  MS.,  Edd .^■x^z.^\\ 
Gn?-,  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  ij)  dseled. 


38  ANDREAS 

wundum  weorSan,       wasttre  geliccost 
faran  flode  blod.       Hie  )nn  feorh  ne  magon 
deaSe  ged^lan,       peh  tSu  drype  Solie,  955 

s!i.  synnigra  siege.       Du  fset  sar  aber; 

ne  laet  J>e  ahweorfan       h^Senra  )?rym, 
grim  gargewinn,       ])aet  Su  Gode  swice,  '  > 

Dryhtne  Jnnum.       Wes  a  domes  georn  ; 
laet  (5e  on  gemyndum,       hu-])aet  manegum  wearS  960 

fira  gefrege       geond  feala  landa, 
fset  me  bysmredon       bennum  fsestne 
tt^-UxL:  ■        weras  wansselige  ;  wordum  tyrgdon,  -Vtr«  -/^-^^^ 

slogon  ond  swungon ;       synnige  ne  mihton 
purh  sarcwide       so6  gecySan.  965 

J?a  ic  mid  ludeum       gealgan  j^ehte        X-'^^--  < 
(rod  waes  arsered),       J^ser  rinca  sum 
of  minre  sidan       swat  ut  forlet, 
dreor  to  foldan.       Ic  adreah  feala 

yrmpa  ofer  eor6an  ;       wolde  ic  eow  on  Son  970 

]7urh  bli(5ne  hige       bysne  onstellan, 
swa  on  elll'eode       ywed  \vyr6eS.  S^ls-rw^ 

Manige  syndon       in  pysse  raSran  byrig, 
fara  pe  6u  gehweorfest       to  heofonleohte 
purh  minne  naman,       j^eah  hie  morSres  feala  975 

in  fyrndagum       gefremed  habban." 
Gewat  him  pa.  se  halga       heofonas  secan, 
eallra  cyninga  cining,        J^one  claenan  ham, 
eaSmedum  upp ;       fser  is  ar  gelang 
fira  gehwylcum,       J^am  ]>e  hie  findan  cann.  980 

Da  waes  gemyndig       rhodge])yldig,  - 
beorn  beaduwe  heard  ;       eode  in  burh  hra'Se 

953  7%.,  Gm.,  K.,  Gn.,  B.  gellcost.  ^-  956  Gm.,  K.,  GnP;  Spr.  ii,  ^j-j  slage.  — 
962  Gn.  hu  me  ;  Gn^  )?3et  me.  Gn.,  IV.  bendum.  —  963  S/'e?'.  {PBB.  x,  460)  -saslge. 
—  970  Gm.  omits  ic. — 971  Gn.  bysen.  —  972  Gm.  ywe^.  —  976  A',  habben. 


.//:/ 


\A     U        ANDREAS  39 

anraed  oretta,       elne  gefyrcSred,       ^>oc^fr^r-: 

maga  mode  rof,       Meotude  getreowe,  ^y£/~ 


stop  on  straite       (stig  wisode),  o^y       V^ 

swa  him  nsenig  gumena       ongitan  ne  mihte,       t  ^d 


jsynfulra  geseon.       Haefde  sigora  weard         ^        [f.  42"^] 

on  ]'am  wangstede       wsere  betolden 

leofne  leodfruman       mid  lofe  sinum. 

Hsefde  )'a  se  asSeling       in  ge))rungen,  990 

Cristas  cempa,       carcerne  neh. 

Geseh  he  haeJSenra       hl68  fetgsedere,  * 

|Mvi^--<L^rui.      fore  hUndura       hyrdas  standan, 

seofone  getsomne.        Ealle  swylt  fornam, 
•  :JA^..J.:      druron  domlease ;       deaSrses  forfeng  995 

hselet?  heorodrl'orig^e.     (Da  se  halga  geb^ed 
f  ■■-<-'  bihvytne  fgeder,       breostgehygdum 

herede  on  hehSo       heofoncyninges  [prym], 
iv.<MiZiWj  Godes  dryhtendom.       Duru  sona  onarn      -rv^^  --' 

y,-.^tA'«^  fu^^h  handhrine       haliges  gastes,  .       '      1000 

ond  fser  in  code,       elnes  gemyndig, 

hfele  hildedeor  ;       h^Sene  swiefon, 

dreore  druncne,       deaSwang  rudon. 

Geseh  he  Matheus       in  ])am  morSorcofan, 

haeleS  higerofne       under  heolstorlocan,  1005 ' 

secgan  Dryhtne  lof,       domweorSinga 

986  Gn.  note  \nx\e  for  him.  —  987  B.  ond  synfulra;  B.^  omits  ond.  —  990  EM. 
ingehrungen.  —  996  MS.,  B.  -deorig ;  Edd.  -dreorig.  —  998  MS.  heofoncyninges  god 
dryhten  dom  with  no  indication  of  an  omission.  Tli.,  Gtn.,  A'.,  Gti.  god  dryhten 
dom ;  B.,  IV.  dryhtendom  ;  Gn.  A'ac/itr.,  Gn!^  godes  dryhtendom  ?  so  also  Spr.  i, 
20S,  adding  '  icol  kaiivi  god-dryhten-dom.'  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  /j)  heofoncyninges 
hrym,  dryhtendom  godes  ;  or  heofonrices  god,  dryhtnes  ecne  dom  .'  Simons  (/.  28) 
for  dryhtendom  reads  in  dryhtnes  domas  (god  eridently  intended  to  follxnu  heofon- 
cyninges /;/  991?*).  Biittenivieser  {p.  46)  heofoncyninges  J'rym,  dryhthc  dom  godes. 
—  999  A',  dura.  —  1000  MS.,  T/i.  hanhrine.  —  looi  Edd.,  except  A'.,  ineode. — 
1003  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  7j)  heore  for  dreore.  MS.,  Th.,  Gtn.  dea'S  wangrudon ;  A'. 
deaSwang  ridon. 


40 


ANDREAS 


3^ 


t; 


engla  Seodne.       He  idBr  ana  sset 
geoht5um  geomor       in  )'am  gnornhofe  ; 
geseh  ]>a.  under  swegle       swgesne  geferan, 
halig  haligne ;       hyht  w?es  genlwad.  '  ',ju^ 

Aras  pa  togenes,       Gode  fancade, 
fses  'Se  hie  onsunde       sBire  moston 
geseon  under  sunnan.       Syb  waes  gemSne 
bam  ]>am  gebroSrum,       blis  edniwe  ; 
ffighwaeSer  56erne       earme  be]>ehte,       IJA-r\ 

^    cyston  hie  ond  clypton.       Criste  weeron  begen 
leofe  on  mode  ;    I  hie  leoht  ymbscan 
haUg  ond  heofontorht ;       hreSor  innan  wges 
wynnum  awelled.       J>a  worde  ongan 
ffirest  Andreas       seSelne  geferan 
on  clustorcleofan       mid  cwide  sinum 

r.     gretan  godf yrhtne  ;       sSde  him  giitiget5ingu, 
feohtan  fara  monna  :        "  Nil  is  ]'in  folc  on  luste, 
h3elet5  hyder  on         .         .         . 


IOI5 


*  * 

I  gewyrht 
^fter  pyssum  wordum 


eardes  neosan."  [f.  43^] 
wuldres  J^egnas, 


1025 


begen  ]>a.  gebrotior,       to  gebede  hyldon,       ,-t^vi-ai 

sendon  hira  bene       fore  beam  Godes. 

Swylce  se  halga       in  pam  hearmlocan 

his  God  grette       ond  him  geoce  bsed,  V  l'<     1030 

Heelend  helpe,       sBr  j^an  hra  crunge 

fore  hseSenra       hilde]'rymme,  vr. !   1, 

ond  \>a  gelsedde       of  leoSobendum 

1008  77/.,  Cm.,  A'.,  Gu.  geoSum  ;   G//.  note,  Siev.  {PBB.x,  ^oo)  geohSum.    K.  im. 

—  1009  Gm.,  K.  ^^x  for  J>a. —  1012  K.  ]?xt/or  J^aes. —  1018  A'.  hre-Ser. —  1019  B., 
IV.  winnum. —  1022  Gm.  -gedingu,  corrected  07t  p.  182. —  1023  Edd.,  A^ap.  a  folio 
excised  after  f  42.    K.  indicates  a  break  in  the  sense  both  before  and  after  gewyrht. 

—  1030  MS.  grete.  —  1031  Th.,  Gm.,  K.,  Gn.  aer}>on.  MS.  crung  ;  W.  as  MS.  crung, 
corrected  Nachtr.  p.  ^64.  —  1032  Gm.  hilde  >rymme. 


ANDREAS  41 

fram  )'ain  faestenne       on  fri(S  Dryhtnes 

tu  ond  hundteontig       geteled  rime,  1035 

swylce  feowertig, 
^.v  c  generede  fram  nifie       (j'sEr  he  nsenigne  fprlet 

under 'burglocan       bennum  faestne), 

ond  paer  wifa  fa  gyt,       weorodes  to  eacan, 

anes  wana  ]>e  fiftig  1040 

forhte  gefreoSode.       Faegen  waeron  si6es, 
\^.jj(^,.Jr         lungre  leordan,       nalas  leng  bidon 

in  .]>am  gnornhofe       gu^gejnngo.  ^  /•''^ 

Gevvat  fa  Matheus       menigo  laedan 

on  gehyld  Godes,       swa  him  se  halga  bebead  ;  1045 

weorod  on  wilsi8       wolcnum  bej>ehte, 

1036  A/S.  swylce  feowertig  generede  eic.  with  no  indication  of  omission.  Th.  after 
feowertig  '  a  line  [i.e.  a  half  line,  for  which  he  leaves  space']  is  wanting' ;  Gtn.,  A',  as 
Th.  ;  Gn.  inserts  eac  feorcundra  to  complete  the  line.    B.  arranges : 

swylce  feowertig       genorede  fram  ni'Se. 
paer  he  naenige  forlet       under  burglocan 
bennum  faestne  on,       ^aer  wifa  l^a  gyt 
weorodes  to-eacan,       anes  wana  fiftig 
forhte  gefreobode. 
W.  reads: 

swylce  seofontig 

generede  fram  ni'Se  :       t>aer  he  naenigne  forlet 

under  burglocan       bendum  faestne, 

ond  hasr  wifa  J^a  gyt       weorodes  to  eacan 

anes  wana  ...       J^e  fiftig 

forhte  gefreo'Sode. 

Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  if)  swylce  feowertig  [eac  feorrancumene].  See  N'otes. — 1037 
MS.,  Th.,  Cm.,  K.,  B.  naenige. —  1038  Th.,  K.,  On.,  W.  bendum. —  1039  MS., 
Th.,Gm.,B.OTiforowd;  Grn.  note  ond.;  A',  ne.  A'.,  j9.  to-eacan. —  10^0  MS.,  with 
no  ittdication  of  omission,  anes  wana  J>e  fiftig;  anes  ends  a  line,  wana  begins  follor.v- 
ing  line ;  W.  incorrectly,  '  wana  he  fiftig  mitten  in  der  Zeile?  Tk.,  after  wana, 
'  the  want  of  connection  in  the  sense  and  of  alliteration  shows  that  this  part  of  the 
MS.  is  very  defective '  ;  6"///.  and  K.  suppose  that  more  than  one  line  is  wanting. 
Gn.  omits  \>&  and  supplies  ealra,  reading  dints,  wana  ealra  fiftig,  etc.  For  B.  and  \V. 
cf.  above,  I.  lojbff.  ;  B.'^,  changing  \>xt  to  haem,  /ojg"',  reads  anes  wana  orwyrhe 
fiftig  etc.  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  14)  anes  wana  efne  fiftig,  but  considers  the  first  half- 
line  still  defective. 


42  ANDREAS 

■i^cjJ-  ]>e  Ises  him  scyldhatan       scy6San  c5mon 

mid  earhfare,        ealdgeniSlan.  a.- Jr^-.^Av^t.-. 

J?aer  pa  modigan  mid  him       mseSel  gehedan,  '^ "  f- ■  i 

treowgepoftan,        sr  hie  on  til  hweorfan ;  1050 

seg'Ser  para  eorla       oSrum  trymede 
heofonrices  hyht,       helle  witu 
wordum  werede.       Swa  '8a  wigend  mid  him, 
heeled  higerofe,       halgum  stefnum 
"    cempan  coste       cyning  weorSadon,  1055 

wyrda  vvaldend,       pses  wuldres  ne  biS  -i 

Sfre  mid  eldum       ende  befangen.  '>tV 

[X] 

Gewat-  him  pa  Andreas       inn  on  ceastre 
glsedmod  gangan,       to  paes  6e  he  gramra  gemot, 
«['•  fara  folcjmsegen,       gefrsegen  hjefde,  [f.  43'']   1060 

o88get  he  gemette       be  mearcpaSe 
standan  straete  neah       stapul  Srenne. 
Gesaet  him  pa  be  healfe,       haefde  hluttre  kifan, 
ece  upgemynd       engla  bhsse  ; 

panon  basnode       under  burhlocan,  1065 

.  hwaet  him  guSweorca       gife^e  wurde, 
J>a  gesamnedon       side  herigeas,  os^*  f*" 

folces  frumgaras  ;       t5  pam  faestenne 
wEerleasra  werod       waepnum  comon, 

hzeSne  hildfrecan,       to  p?es  pa  hceftas  £er  1070 

under  hlinscuwan       hearm  provvedon. 
Wendan  ond  woldon,       wiSerhycgende, 
pset  hie  on  elpeodigum       sBt  geworhton, 

1047  Gn.  )>y. —  1050  Gn.  hi. —  1055  A'.  weor'Sodon. — 1058  T/i.  inn-on. —  1059 
77/.,  Gm.,  A'.,  Gn.  as  MS.  gangen,  /^.r/ gangan.  —  1064  MS.  ecce  ;  cf.  djy"  ;  Edd.  ece. 
—  1070  A'.  \>&/or  ))a. —  1072  77i.  -hycende. —  1073  ■^''^''-  {PBB.  .v,  460)  -heodgum. 


ANDREAS  43 

^/Lpw  fe<P  J!ca^4    weotude  wiste ;       him  seo  wen  gelah, 

fic-p  sySt5an  mid  corSre       carceraes  duyu  1075 

a^wu,       eorre  sescberend       opene  fundon, 

'*'**^'-^     onhliden  hamera  geweorc,       hyrdas  deade. 

^''"  Hie  pa  unhySige       eft  gecyrdon, 

-  luste  belorene,       laSspell  beran  ; 

saegdon  j'am  folce,       pset  tSger  feorrcundra,  1080 

ellreordigra,       senigne  to  lafe 

in.carcerne       cwicne  ne  gemetton, 

ah  JiEer  heorodreorige       hyrdas  lagan, 

^^^      gEBsne  on  greote,       gaste  berofene, 

faegra  flseschaman.       ]>a.  wearS  forht  manig  1085 

'<^'  for  ])am  faerspelle       folces  rsswa, 

hean,  hygegeomor,       hungres  on  wenum, 

V^'  blates  beodgastes.       Nyston  beteran  rsed, 

'^^  ])onne  hie  pa  belidenan       him  to  lifnere, 

^  [deade]  gefeormedon ;       durupegnum  wearS  1090 

in  ana  tid       eallum  setsomne 

purh  heard  gelac       hildbedd  styred. 

Da  ic  lungre  gefrsegn       leode  tosomne 

burgwaru  bannan  ;       beornas  comon, 

wiggendra  preat,       wicgum  gengan,  1095 

1074  G»i.,  Ettm.,  A'.,  Gu.,  B.,  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  14)  geleah ;  BP-  gelah.—  1075  A', 
dura.  —  1078  77/.,  Cm.,  Ettm.,  A'.,  On.  unhydige  ;  6^w.2.hy«ige  ;  Siev.  {PBB.  x,46o) 
-hySge.  — 1079  Th.,  Cm.,  Gn.,  W.  la'5  spell;  Gu?'  la'Sspell. —  1080  Holthausen 
{PBB.  XVI,  jjo)  supplies  hie  =  eos  be/ore 'Sstr. —  108 1  Ettm.  elreordigra.  JV.  asnig 
ne  to  lafe  ;  Siev.  {PBB.  .rtv,  jjo)  aen(i)ge  to  lafe,  in  carceme,  cwic  ne  gemetton.  — 
1082  MS.  cwicne  gemette,  7tot  as  IV.  states  cwic  ne  gemette  ;  T/i.  as  MS.;  Th.  note, 
K.  cwicne  ne  metton  ;  Gm.,  Ettm.,  B.  cwicne  ne  gemetton  ;  Gn.  cwic  ne  gemetton  ; 
Pogatscher  {Anglia  xxiii,  2g8)  cwicne  ne  gemette;  W.  cwic  ne  gemette. —  1083 
JC.  ac.  Gn.  tmits  J)aer ;  Gn?'  restores  the  word.  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  460)  -dreorge. 
Gm.,  K.,  Ettm.  lasgon.  —  1087  Th.,  Gm.  hyge  geomor. —  1088  K.  beodgaestes. — 
1089  '"^^S.,  Th.,  Gm.,  A'.,  B.  behlidenan ;  Gm.  note,  Ettm.,  Gn.,  IV.,  Bright 
{A/LA'',  a,  82)  belidenan. —  1090  Ettm.,  Gn.,W.  supply  de3.de  before  gefeormedon; 
Siev.  {PBB.  X,  5/7)  characterizes  the  line  thus  emended  as  metrically  imperfect; 
Holthausen  {Anglia  xiii,  j^-f)  deade  drjht  gefeormedon.  See  A'otes. —  1093  G^w. 
to  somne. — ^1095  -^  •  '^^"'gg^"^-  Ettm.  gangan. 


44  ANDREAS 

on  mearum  modige,       mseSelhegende, 

sescum  dealle^,     J>a  waes  call  geador 

to  pam  ])ingstede       J'eod  gesamnod  ; 

leton  him  ]>a  betweonum       |taan  wisian,    '  v^  [f.  44^] 

hwylcne  hira  aerest       oSrum  sceolde  iioo 

to  foddurpege       feores  ongyldan  ; 

hluton  hellcrasftum,       haSengildum 

teledon  betwinum.       Da  se  tan  gehwearf 

efne  ofer  ^nne       ealdgesiSa, 
Ui''-^-      se  waes  uSweota       eorla  dugoSe,  1105 

^^  ■         heriges  on  ore.       HraSe  siS6an  wearS 
fCi^xs      fetorwrasnum  faest,       feores  orwena. 

Cleopode  ]'a  collenferhS       cearegan  reorde, 

cwaet5  he  his  sylfes  sunu       syllan  wolde 

on  ffihtgeweald,       eaforan  geongne,  mo 

ro  .n.t      lifes  to  lisse ;       hie  (5a  lac  hraSe  /A 

fegon  to  j'ance.       f>eod  wses  oflysted,  ,      . 

metes  modgeomre,       nges  him  to  maSme  wynn, 
Chyht  to  hordgestreonum^       hungre  w^ron 

]'earle  gejireatod,       svva  se  SeodsceaSa  1 1 1 5 

reow  ricsode.       pa  waes  rinc  manig, 

guSfrec  guma,       ymb  ])aes  geongan  feorh 
f/^Tc  .     breostum  onbryrded.       To  f am  beadulace 

wses  ]'aet  weatacen       wide  gefrege, 

geond  f a  burh  bodad       beorne  manegum,  1120 

]>set  hie  fses  cnihtes  cwealm.      corSre  gesohton, 

duguSe  ond  eogotSe,  /    dSl  onfengon 

hfes  to  leofne.       Hie  lungre  to  paes, 

hSSene  herigweardas,       here  samnodan 


1096  T/i.,  Cm.,  Ettm.  maeiSel  hegende.  — 1099  Gii.  omits  J>a.  MS.  ta  an,  the 
first  word  on  f.  44";  Edd.  tan,  except  IV.  taan. —  11 09  A',  suna. —  mo  A/S. 
geone.  — 11 16  MS.,  Edd.  hreow,  except  Gn.,  Siev.  {PBB.  ix,  s^f)  reow.  Gm. 
ring.  —  1 1 19  Ettm.  gefraege. —  11 23  Gn.  hi.  — 11 24  K.  heargAveardas. 


ANDREAS 


45 


ceastrewarena ;        cyrm  iipp  astah.  1125 

Da  se  geonga  oiigann       geomran  stefne, 
gehrefted  for  herige,        hearmleo?)  galan, 
freonda  feasceaft,       frizes  vvilnian ; 
,.     ,  ne  mihte  earmsceapen        are  findan, 

/I  freo6e  aet  ]>am  folce,       J)e  him  feores  wolde,  1130 

ealdres  geunnan ;       hrefdon  gegleecan 

ssecce  gesohte ;       sceolde  sweordes  |ecg,  [f.  44^^] 

scerp  ond  scurheard,       of  sceatSan  folme, 
/Ja  fyrmSlum  fag,       feorh  acsigan. 

Da  ])3et  Andrea       earmlic  jiiihte,  1135 

;.  V  .  J'  (      feodbealo  jiearlic       to  ge8olianne, 

])aet  he  swa  unscyldig       ealdre  sceolde 
O.LO'-u-'  lungre  Ihman.       Waes  se  leodhete 

'i*F«^«t-oc<!.      [prist  ond]  prohtheard  ;        J'rymman  sceocan, 

modige  magupegnas,       morSres  on  luste ;  1140 

woldon  aeninga,       ellenr5fe, 
on  ])am  hysebeorSre       heafolan  gescenan, 
garum  agetan,       Hine  God  forstod,  L'  • . 

hahg  of  hehtio,       h£e6enum  folce  ; 

het  vv^pen  wera       wexe  gellcost  1145 

■      -       on  ])am  orlege       eall  formeltan ; 

]>y  laes  scyldhatan       scefiSan  mihton, 
egle  ondsacan,       ecga  J'rySum. 
Swa  wearS  alysed       of  leodhete, 
f^f'  geong  of  gyrne.       Gode  ealles  pane,  1150 

1 1 25  3fS.,  T/i.,  Git.,  B.  ceastre  warena;  K.  ceastervvarena. —  11 27  K.  gehafted. 
—  1 129  Th.  miht.  —  1 130  Gn.  note  freode  ?  Ettin.  note  nolde  ? —  1 133  Gii.  scearp. 
Gn.  Nachtr.  iss'^me /or  folme? — 1134  G/i.  fah. —  1139  ^/S.  J>rohtheard  hrym- 
man  wttA  no  indication  of  omission  ;  B.,  W.  as  MS. ;  Th.,  Gni.,  A',  indicate  the 
omission  of  one  or  more  words  after  Jrohtheard ;  Etttn.,  Gn.  and  jrealic  after 
trohtheard ;  Gn.-,  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  /j)  t)earl  and  before  Jrohtheard.  W.  calls  atten- 
tion to  1264".  Ettm.  I'lymmum. —  1142  Gti.  note  hyse  corSre  ? — 1143  Gm.,  A', 
Ettm.  ageotan.  —  1147  Cos.  (PBB.  xxi,'i^)  stif plies  him  before  scyldhatan.  MS. 
Edd.  sceaSan ;  Siev.  (PBB.  x,  j/7),  Cos.  (PBB.  xxi,  ij)  sce'SJSan. 


'1 


46  ANDREAS 

dryhtna  Dryhtne,        ]>?es  tSe  he  dom  gifetS 
gumena  gehwylcum,        ]'ara  ]'e  geoce  to  him 
secet5  mid  snytrum ;        ]'aer  biS  symle  gearu 
freod  unhwilen,       pam  ]>e  hie  findan  cann. 


[XI] 

J>a  wffis  wop  hgefen       in  wera  burgum,  ii55 

hliid  heriges  cyrm  ;        hreopon  friccan, 

mgendon  meteleaste,       meSe  stodon,  '^<x^.^ 

cJtd'        hungre  geh?efte.       Hornsalu  wunedon, 

weste  winrseced,       welan  ne  benohton 

beornas  to  briicanne       on  ]>a  bitran  tid;  1160  ^. 

wo-e-(yviCft^        gesaeton  searupancle       sundor  to  riine  ajja^-f        ^ 

'4'st/'c.ss/o<,y,el«,        erm'Su  eahtigan ;       nses  him  to  e?ile  wynn. 

j^""  Fregn  \m  gelome       freca  oSerne  : 

'*  Ne  hele  se  Se  hgebbe       holde  lare, 

on  sefan  snyttro  !       NO  is  seel  cumen,  Jmt    11 65 

l^rea  ormaete  ;       is  nu  pearf  mycel, 

fset  we  wisfaestra       wordum  hyran." 

I  J>a  for  )5£ere  dugoSe       deoful  setywde,  [f.  45^] 

wann  ond  wliteleas,       hsefde  weriges  hiw.  Couvti.a  ..c 

Ongan  ]>a  meldigan        morpres  brytta,  1170 

hellehinca,       )'one  halgan  wer 

wiSerhycgende,       ond  fset  word  gecwseS  : 

"  Her  is  gefered       ofer  feorne  weg 

seSelinga  sum       innan  ceastre, 

elll'eodigra,       j'one  ic  Andreas  ii75 

1 1 51  Cm.  gifed.—  11 54  A/S.,  T/i.,  Cm.,  A'.,  Ettm.,  Gn.,  ^.  freond  ;  Gii.  Nachtr., 
On?;  ^f^.  freod.  BP-\\\w^for  hie.  K.  eann. —  11 56  Cw.,  Ettm.  hreopun.  ^  1 15Q 
Gm.  {cf.  also  Jtis  Introd.  p.  xxxvii),  Etttn.,  Gn.  winraeced ;  Gn?;  K.,  B.  winraeced. 
—  1 160  Siev.  {PEE.  X,  482)  brucan. —  1163  Ettm.  fraegn.  —  1165  Th.  synttro. — 
1 169  Ettm.  witeleas.  Edd.  weriges;  Gn.  A'ac/itr.,  C^.''^  weriges  ? — 1171  T/i.,  Gm., 
A'.,  Gn.,  B.  helle  hinca ;  6';«.  note,  Etttn.,  Gn."^,  IV.  hellehinca. —  1173  Gm.  ist. 
Gill.,  Gii.~  gefered.  —  1 175  Ettm.  eU>eodigra. 


ANDREAS  47 

nemnan  herde  ;        he  eow  neon  gesceod, 
c~      Sa  he  aferede       of  ffestenne 

manncynnes  ma       ])onne  gemet  wgEre. 
Nu  ge  magon  eaSe       oncyfidEeda 
y^  4'oc<-5  wrecan  on  gewyrhtum  ;       Istafi  [wgepnes]  spor,  1 1 80 

Iren  ecgheard,       ealdorgeard  sceoran, 
fffiges  feorhhord  ;       gsuS  fromlice, 
])?et  ge  wi'Serfeohtend       wiges  gehngegan."  .    c^ 

Him  ])a  Andreas       agef  ondsware  : 
fa  4;         "  HwKt !  6u  jTistllce       ))eode  iSrest,  11 85 

bseldest  to  beadowe.     Wsest  ))e  bSles  cwealm,         rJ\)o*'*^«vit 
hatne  in  helle,       ond  ]m  here  fysest,  i^^trtg. 

feSan  to  gefeohte  ;       eart  Su  fag  \vi'8  God, 
dugoSa  demend.       Hwget !   8ii  deofles  strggl,  ^c«t+" 

incftoja.        icest  June  yrmSo ;        'Se  se  selmihtiga  11 90 

heanne  gehnSgde,       ond  [on]  heolstor  besceaf,  i/.iust" 

|5£er  ))e  cyninga  cining       clamme  belegde,  .   .t     ^ 

ond  )'e  sySSan  a       Satan  nemdon, 
Sa  Se  Dryhtnes  a       deman  ciiSon." 

Da  gyt  se  wiSermeda       wordum  Iserde  1195 

folc  to  gefeohte,       feondes  crsefte  : 
"  Nil  ge  gehyraS       haeleSa  gewinnan, 
se  Syssum  herige  meest       hearma  gefremede. 
Daet  is  Andreas,       se  me  on  flIteS 
wordum  wrEetllcum       for  wera  menigo."  1200 

1 177  Cm.,  A',  aferede.  —  1 178  C«.  mancynnes.— 1 180  A/S.  gwyrhtum  ;  £1/1/. 
gewyrhtum ;  Holtliaiisen  {^PBB.  xvi,  Jjf),  Simons,  s.  v.  gewyrhtan.  AIS.  laeta'S 
spor;  Th.,  Gm.,  K.  indicate  an  omission  before  spor  bnt  do  not  attempt  to  supply 
it;  Ettm.  wigspere  yi^r  spor;  Gn.  wsepna  spor;  B.  nu  spor;  W.  waepnes  spor. 
—  1 181  MS.,  Th.,  Gin.,  Gn.,  B.,  W.  eadorgeard ;  Ettm.  eodorgeard;  K.,  N^ap. 
{Anglia  iv,  411)  itidependently  ealdorgeard. —  1182  Gm.  feohhord. —  11 84  Ettm. 
ageaf.  —  11 86  Gm.,  K.,  Ettm.  bealdest.  K.  wast.  —  11 90  Siev.  {PBB.  .x,  460) 
aslmihtga. —  1191  Gn.'^,  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  16)  supply  on  be/ore  heolstor;  Gn.  Spr.  i, 
9j  as  MS.  —  1 192  Gm.,  K.,  B.  sefor  ]>e  ;  Ettm.  J^aer  he  se  ;  B.-  as  MS.  —  1 193  MS., 
Gm.,  K.,  B.  Sata.  Gm.,  Ettm.,  K.,  B.  nemndon;  B"  nemdon. —  1194  A',  a:. — 
1 1 98  Ettm.  Hsum.  —  1 199  Edd.  onfliteJS,  except  Gn.,  IV.  on  flitcS. 


48  ANDREAS 

Da  waes  beacen  boden       burhsittendum  ; 
ahleopon  hildfrome       heriges  brehtme  c'c.cv 

ond  to  weallgeatum       wigend  prungon, 
o.i.,.i.'.;         cene  under  cumblum,       |cor6re  mycle  [f.  45^^] 

to  Sam  orlege,       ordum  ond  bordum.  1205 

])a.  worde  cwaeS       weoroda  Dryhten, 
Meotud  mihtum  swl6       saegde  his  magofegne  : 
"  Scealt  'Su,  Andreas,       ellen  fremman  ; 
^'''         ne  mi6  Su  for  menigo,       ah  ]nnne  modsefan 

\>sta6ola  wis  strangum.       Nis  seo  stund  latu,  12 10 

fast  ])e  waelreowe       \vitum  belecga]?,  pjui  ^^„ ^ 

cealdan  clommum.     "  Cy6  ])e  sylfne, 
herd  hige  J'inne,       heortan  staSola, 
])3et  hie  mln  on  Se       maegen  oncnawan. 
Ne  magon  hie  ond  ne  moton       ofer  mine  est  12 15 

finne  lichoman,       lehtrum  scyldige,  5'-"^  +'  ^a'  4 

deaSe  gedalan,       Seah  Su  drype  J'olige, 
-<_.>l        mirce  manslaga.       Ic  ]'e  mid  wunige." 

^fter  ]'am  wordum  com       werod  unmSte, 
lyswe  larsmeoSas,       mid  lindgecrode,  -i'v...    1220 

bolgenmode  ;       baron  iit  hraeSe 
ond  ]5am  halgan  paer       handa  gebundon, 
si])]>an  geypped  waes       aeSelinga  wynn 
ond  hie  andweardne       eagum  meahton 
gesion  sigerofne.       JJar  w^es  sec  manig  1225 

on  ])am  wehvange       wiges  oflysted  laiKy 

leoda  dugu'Se ;       lyt  sorgodon,  ^,  ,•  ■ 

hwylc  him  ]'aet  edlean       refter  wurde. 

1206  77/.  cwasd. —  1212  Ettm.  cealdum. —  1216  Ettm.  lichaman.  Gm.  note,  citing 
i2gj'\  leahtrum.  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  4^g)  scyldge.  —  12 18  B.  myrce.  MS.  manslaga; 
Gm.,  Ettm.,  A',  manslaga;  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  /6)  manslaegas. —  1219  Ettm.  After. — 
1221  Ettm.  hraSe  ;  so  also  12^2",  iS77^-  —  1223  A'.  Si'S'Son.  Ettm.  geyppeS.  —  1 224 
Gn.,  Spr.  i,  6  hi  hine  andweardne. —  1225  Gn.,  Ettm.  secg.  —  1226  Gm.,  Gn.,  A'., 
Ettm.,  B.,  IV.  \va;lwange. 


ANDREAS  49 

Heton  ])a  Ijedan       ofer  landsceare, 
UftUAi-tr.iLw.'titi;  L     gragmeelum  tcon,       torngeniSlan,  a^  1230 

swa  hie  hit  frecnost       findan  meahton. 
Drpgon  deormodne       a^fter  dunscraefum, 
ymb  stanhleoSo  .    stEercedferhJ'iie, 
efne  swa  wide  swa       wegas  to  lagon, 

enta  Srgeweorc,       innan  burgum,  1235 

stfSte  stanfage.       Storm  upp  aras 
^ ;  aefter  ceasterhofum,       cirm  unlytel 

hffitines  heriges.       Wges  Jiaes  halgan  lie 
sarbennum  soden,       swate  bestemed,  (^(-|- 

banhiis  abrocen  :       blod  yfium  weoll,  1240 

hatan  ]heolfre.       Hsefde  him  on  innan  [f.  46*] 

u.jXiauLvvv.A     ellen  untweonde  ;       wass  pxt  9st5ele  mod 

asundrad  fram  synnum,       peah  he  sares  swa  feala 

deopum  ^olgslegum       dreogan  sceolde. 

Swa  w£es  ealne  d?eg,       oficSaet  sBien  com,  1245 

sigetprht  swungen  ;       sar  eft  gewod  ^v^'tytj 

ymb  ]'ses  beornes  breost,       oSjiaet  beorht  gewat 

sunne  swegeltorht       to  sete  glidan. 

Lseddan  ]>a  leode       laSne  gewinnan 

to  carcerne;       he  wses  Criste  swa  |)eah  1250 

leof  on  mode  ;       him  wges  leoht  sefa 

halig  heortan  neh,       hige  untyddre.  o-       .  ,,0,,. 

1229  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  16)  supplies  hine  before  t^a. —  1230  Gn!^,  Spr.  ii,  jjo 
tragmselum;  A'.  t>raegmaelum.  — 1232  MS.,  Edd.  deormode ;  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  16) 
deormodne. —  1232  Etti?i.  dunscrafum. —  1233  MS.  stasrcedferhJ)e  ;  Th.,  Gti., 
B.,  IV.  staercedferhlie ;  Gm.,  Eitm.  stearcedferhSe ;  K.  stearcedferSe ;  Cos.  {PBB. 
xxi,  16)  stsrcedferhtme.— 1234  T/i.,  B.  tolagon ;  A'.  tola;gon.  — 1236  Etttn.  up. 

—  1 241  MS.,  Edd.  hat  of  heolfre,  except  Gn.  hatan  heolfre  ;  Gn.^  as  MS.;  Cos. 
{PBB.  xxi,  16)  hat  of  hrel're.  T/i.  on-innan. — 1242  MS.,  Edd.  untweodne, 
except   Gil.,   Cos.   {PBB.  xxi,  /6)   untweonde;    Gi/.-  ,is  .lAT.  —  1243   Ettf/i.  feola. 

—  1246  MS.,  Edd.  sigeltorht,  except  Etim.,  Gn..  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  16)  sigetorht. 
Gn.  oft. —  1252  Bright  {MLA'.  ii,  82)  zvoitld  omit  neh.  Gii.  untydre ;  Cm.  note 
untedre. 


50  ANDREAS 

[XII] 

J>a  se  halga  waes       under  heolstorscuwan, 

eorl  ellenheard,       ondlange  niht 

searoJ>ancum  beseted.       Snaw  eor'San  band  1255 

wintergeworpum  ;       weder  c5ledon 

heardum  haegelscurum  ;        swylce  hrim  ond  forst, 
uiayr\crs     hare  hildstapan,       haeleSa  e(5el 

lucon,  leoda  gesetu.       Land  wEeron  freorig 

cealdum  cylegicelum,       clang  waeteres  prym  1260       . 

ofer  eastreamas,       is  brycgade  \.^j     /, 

blgece  brimrade.     .  Bli8heort  wunode 

eorl  unforcuS,       elnes  gemyndig, 
r-'s/l'e  ))rlst  ond  I'rohtheard,       in  preanedum,  ^t-|f-aa^ 

wintercealdan  niht;       no  on  gevvitte  blon,  1265 

fc/fii.H      acol  for  ]:»y  egesan,        paes  ]'e  he  Sr  ongann, 

'])?et  he  a  domllcost       Dryhten  herede, 

weorSade  wordum,       oSSset  wuldres  gim 
f  heofontorht  onhlad.       Da  com  haele^a  preat 

to  ^Eere  dimman  ding,       duguS  unlytel,  1270 

wadan  wselgifre       weorodes  brehtme.  c|o,-^ov- 

Heton  ut  hrjeSe       eeSeling  Isedan 

in  wra'Sra  geweald,       w^rf^stne  haeleti. 

Da  W3es  eft  |swa  aer      ondlangne  dseg  [f.  46"^] 

swungen  sarslegum ;       swat  y?ium  weoll  1275 

]mrh  bancofan,       blodlifrum  swealg,  ct>>^ 

hatan  heolfre  ;        hra  weorces  ne  sann,  Koajjl  A-tWr  f ^^vx, 

wundum  werig.        pa.  cwoni  wopes  hring  -Souv^i 

1253  Jl/S.  A;  i/w  scribe  wrote  originally  SA,  then  erased  the  S,  but  did  not 
fill  in  X>.  — 1257  Gji.  swylc;  Gw.^  swylce.  —  1258  Gm.  (/.  xxxv)  hlidstapan, 
viatores  tegminibns  involuti,  or  hze'Sstapan  ?  Gn.  note  hliS-,  hae'S-  ?  —  1 262  K. 
blace.  —  1266  MS.,  Th.  acol ;  Cw.,  A',  acol,  but  Gm.  as  verb.,  A",  as  adj.;  Ettm.,  Gn. 
acol;  B.  acol. —  1269  Ettnt.  heofon  torht,  heofon  accns. —  1270  Ettm.  note  dynige 
for  ding  ? 


ANDREAS 


51 


1285       f' 


))urh  )ires  beornes  brcost,       blat  ut  faran, 

weoU  waSuman  stream,       ond  he  worde  c\v3e8  :  1280 

"  Geseoh  nu,  Dryhten  God,       drohtafi  minne, 

weoruda  willgeofa  !       J>u  wast  ond  const 

anra  gehwylces       earfeSsiSas. 

Ic  gelyfe  to  Se,       mln  liffruma, 

I'ffit  Su  mildheort  me       for  ))inum  msegenspedum, 

nerigend  fira,       nsefre  wille, 

^ce  jelmihtig,       anforlStan  ; 

swa  ic  jiset  gefremme,       jienden  feorh  leofaS, 

min  on  moldan,       paet  ic,  meotud,  pinum 

larum  leofwendum       lyt  geswice.  ,  1290 

pu  eart  gescyldend       wiS  sceaSan  wsepnum, 

ece  eadfruma,       eallum  ]nnum  ;  ^ 

ne  leet  nii  bysmrian       banan  manncynnes, 

facnes  frumbearn,       ]mrh  feondes  craeft 

leahtrum  belecgan       ])a  ]>Tn  lof  beraS."  _  1295 

Da  tiger  setywde       se  atola  gast, 
wrat5  waerloga  ;       wigend  laerde 
for  ]'am  heremaegene       helle  dioful 
c^.   -       awerged  in  witum,       ond  ]'aet  word  gecwseS  : 

"  SleaS  synnigne       ofer  seolfes  mu?,  13°° 

folces  gewinnan,       nu  to  feala  reorda)'."  s(ta.\i'. 

J>a  wses  orlege       eft  onhrered, 
nlwan  stefne,       nl6  upp  aras, 

o)'6jet  sunne  gewat       to  seta  glidan  ^ 

'' '^■-       under  niflan  naes ;       niht  helmade,  1305 

brunwann  oferbrSd       beorgas  steape, 

1279  77/.,  B.  utfaran.—  1282  A'.,  £f/f//.  wast.—  12S6  J/S.  welle ;  A'a/>.  w  cor- 
rected  from  n.— 1291  MS.,  B.  gescylded. —  1293  6'w..  A'.,  Efim.  man-. —  129S 
Ettm.  deoful. —  1299  Ettm.  on  for  in.  —  1300  Eftm.  silfes. —  1301  EUin.  feola, 
Gn.  reorSaS;  G//.2  reorda cN.  — 1302  JAS".  ).a;  W.  Da.  —  1303  A7/w.  up.— 1306  77/., 
Cw.,  A',  brun  wann.    Ettm.  oferbraegd. 


52  ANDREAS 

ond  se  halga  wses       to  hofe  laeded, 
deor  ond  ddmgeorn,       in  j'set  dimme  raeced  ; 
sceal  ponne  in  neadcofan       nihtlangne  fyrst 
wgerfaest  wunian       wic  unsyffe.  13 lo 

J>a  cem  seofona  sum       to  sele  geongan, 
atol  EeglSca       |yfela  gemyndig,  [f.  47^] 

morSres  manfrea       myrce  gescyrded,  ^  ,.  ^^.o'    ■Ui^r^ 

deoful  deaSreow       dugu'Sum  bereafod  oTo'^rn 

Ongan  )'a  ))am  halgan       hospword  sprecan  :      U'^'i^'i^i^s: 

ThmKiJT  u  Hwjet  hogodest  6u,  Andreas,       hidercyme  |)inne 

on  wraSra  geweald?       Hwjer  is  wuldor  }nn, 
'„j,v-.         ]'e  Sii  oferhigdum       upp  areerdest, 

])a  Su  goda  iissa       gild  gehnaegdest?  o'^'s       ',-.... .:-\^ 

Hafast  nu  f e  anum       call  getihhad  -  1320 

land  ond  leode,       swa  dyde  lareow  ]nn 

(cyne)>rym  ahof),       ]?am  wses  Crist  nama 

ofer  middangeard,       [>ynden  hit  meahte  swa ; 

pone  Her5des       ealdre  besnyJSede,  h^-^-v^i 

/,wi.aiu_aW        forcom  set  campe       cyning  I  Odea,  1325 

rices  ber^dde,       ond  hine  rode  befealg, 
pset  he  on  gealgan       his  gast  onsende. 
Swa  ic  nil  bebeode       bearnum  niinum, 
pegnum  prySfullum,       t^set  hie  "8e  hnsegen,  auwifr 

gingran  set  giiSe.       LsetaS  gares  ord,  1330 


1308  MS.  plainly  deor;  so  Tk.,  Nap.,  and  Edd.  except  IV.,  B.,  as  MS.  and  in 
text,  deop. —  1309  Gn.  sceolde.— 1311  Ettm.  gangan. — 1313  G^l■^  Spr.  i,  44g 
gescryded,  vestitns  ?  or  gescyrted  ?  Trantniann  {in  Simons  s.  v.)  gescyrded  = 
gescynded  =  gescended  co7i/icsiis?  —  i-;^\^  Gin.,  K.  ongan  to  J'am,  Ettm.  ongann 
to  }>am. —  13 16  Siev.  {^PBB.  xii,  478)  oinits  Andreas. —  131 7  AIS.,  Edd.  hwjet,  Gti. 
note  hwaer  ?  W.  incorrectly  refers  Gn.^s  note  to  hwast,  ijid-". —  13 18  Ettm.  up. — 
1 31 9  MS.,  Edd.  gilp;  Gn.  note  gild?  Bugge  {PBB.  xii,  95),  Blount  gild. ^ — 1320 
G71.  Nacktr.  Hafast  \>\x,  not  repeated  in  Gn.^. — 1323  Ettm.,  Gn.,  IV.  J>enden. 
—  1324  Gn.  Erodes. —  1329  T/i.,  Gm.,  A',  hnaegon  ;  Ettm.,  Gn.  hna;gan. 


ANDREAS 


53 


fc/r'fit4 


arfcw  earh  attre  gemal,       in  gednfan 

in  fgeges  ferS  ;       gafi  fromllce, 
]^'  Saet  ge  gucSfrecan       gylp  forbegan." 

t  Ti?<-t.c  Hie  wffiron  reowe,       rasdon  on  sona 

a°^«;.'      gifrum  grapum ;        hine  God  forstod,  i335 

qtt  .-Lc    sta^ulfsest  steorend,       )nirh  his  strangan  miht. 
Sy8(5an  hie  oncneowon       Cristes  rode 
on  his  maegwlite,       msere  tacen, 
wurdon  hie  6a  acle       on  j^am  onfenge, 
forhte,  afgerde,       ond  on  fleam  numen.  1340 

Ongan  eft  swa  £er       ealdgeniSla, 
helle  haeftling,       hearmleoS  galan  : 
(!_evwe  \:m<-'  "  Hwaet  wearS  eow  swa  rofum,       rincas  mine, 

lindgesteallan,       )'?et  eow  swa  lyt  gespeow?  " 
[Him  ]'a]  earmsceapen       agef  ondsware,  i345 

fah  fyrnscea))a,       ond  his  feeder  oncwaecS : 
"  Ne  [magan  we  him  lungre       laS  aetfestan,  [f,  47^] 

J^.  swilt  ]mrh  searwe  ;       ga  ])e  sylfa  to  ! 

f"'"'   '"'      J>£er  )>ii  gegninga       gii8e  findest, 

frecne  feohtan,       gif  ^u  furSur  dearst  1350 

to  ]'am  anhagan       aldre  geneSan.  v' 


1331  A',  aettre.  £ifd.,  except  G>i.,  IV.  ingedufan.  —  1333  77/.,  Cw.,  A'.,  Ettin.,  Gii. 
guJifrean  ;  Gii.  note  gu^frecan  ?  —  1337  ^'/-S".  rade ;  EJd.  rode.  —  1337  ff-  Cm.  luith- 
out  remark.,  K.,  Ettni. : 

Cristes  rode 
msere  tacen,       wurdon  hie  J^a  acle 
on  Jjam  onfenge,       forhte,  and  on  fleam  numen. 

Gil.  maere  tacen.  on  his  maegwlite,  etc. ;  B.  as  Gm.,  except  that  he  supplies  afasrde 
after  forhte;  B?'  as  MS.  —  1341  Ettm.  ongann.  Gn.  supplies  ))a  after  ongan. 
Th.,  Gm.,  Gn.,  B.  eald  geniSla;  Gn?  ealdgenitila. —  1345  MS.,  B.  hearmsceapen ; 
Edd.  earmsceapen  ;  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  J17),  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  ij)  him  ha  earmsceapen. 
Ettm.  him  ageaf. 


54  ANDREAS 

.  [XIII] 

"  We  Se  magon  ea^e,       eorla  leofost, 
aet  )'5m  secgplegan       selre  gelSran, 
sBt  Su  gegninga       guSe  fremme, 

wiges  woman,       weald  hu  6e  sale  i355 

set  ])am  gegnslege.       Utan  gangan  eft, 
fget  we  bysmrigen       bendum  faestne, 
^.^ock  oSwitan  him  his  wrsecsi6 ;        habbaS  word  gearu 

wis  ]jam  aglaecan       eall  getrahtod !  " 
^  f>a  hleoSrade       hludan  stefne,  1360 

witum  bew^led,       ond  ]'aet  word  gecwaet5 : 
"  pn  ]>e,  Andreas,    •    acl^ccraeftum 
lange  feredes.       Hwset !   iu  leoda  feala 
forleolce  ond  forlgerdest.       Nii  leng  ne  miht 
gewealdan  ))y  weorce  ;       ]'e  synd  witu  J'ses  grim  1365 

weotud  be  gewyrhtum.       J>u  scealt  w?rigmod, 
hean,  hroSra  leas,       hearm  ])rowigan, 
sare  swyltcwale.       Secgas  mine 
to  pam  gu'8plegan       gearwe  sindon, 

])a  ]'e  seninga       ellenweorcum  1370 

unfyrn  faca       feorh  3et])ringan.  "^^"^  "'1 

Hwylc  is  ])aes  niihtig       ofer  middangeard, 
faet  he  ])e  alyse       of  leofiubendum, 
manna  cynnes,       ofer  mine  est?  "  jj 

1352  Ettm.  we  )'e  ne  ? —  1353  Ettm.  secplegan.  —  1354  K.  geninga.  —  1355  Cw., 
K.,  Ettm.  \>wfor  hu. —  1356  MS..,  W.  Vtan ;  77;.,  Giti.,  Etttit.  uton ;  A'.  Uton  ;  Gn., 
B.  Utan. —  1 361  Ettm.  'bewealod,  bewealwod  ?  ant  bewaeled  {Cm.  bewSled).'  — 
1362  MS;  T/i.  aclaec  craeftum ;  Edd.  aclasccraeftum,  except  On.,  W.  aglasccraeftum. 
—  1363  Ettm.  feola. —  1364  IV.  '■after  leng,  which  ends  a  line  in  the  MS.,  a  line 
is  left  vacant,  for  710  apparent  reason.''  It  should  be  noted,  horoei'er,  that  on  other 
folios,  e.g.f  46",  f  46^,  f  41",  the  same  peculiarity  occurs,  always  between  the  tenth 
and  eleventh  lines  of  the  pa^^e,  counting  frofn  the  bottom.  This  7i'ide  spacing  is  evi- 
dently  due  to  some  irregularity  in  the  measure  by  which  the  scribe  ruled  off  his  pages, 
and  no  omission  in  the  text  is  to  be  supposed. 


ANDREAS  55 

Him  ])a  Andreas       agef  ondsware  :  1375 

"  Hwset !  me  eatie       ?elmihtig  ( Icnl, 
,^_     ni(Sa  neregend,        se  (Se  in  nieduni  lu 
gefsestnode       fyrnum  clommum, 

j-ffir  (Su  sytSfian  a,       susle  |  gebunden,  [f.  48'''] 

\^\tc.'^'i       in  \vr?ec  wunne,       wuldres  blunne,  1380 

sySSan  Sii  forhogedes       heofoncyninges  word. 
.3Co  peer  wses  yfles  or,       ende  nSfre 

jnnes  wrjeces  weor'SeS.       Du  scealt  widan  feorh 
(o.'rt.-,  ecan  I'ine  yrmtiu ;        ))e  bits  a  symble 

of  daege  on  dseg       drohtaj)  strengra."  1385 

Da  wearS  on  fleame,       se  fie  fia  fgehfio  iu 
wi'6  God  geara      grimme  gefremede. 

Com  ))a  on  uhtan       mid  ierdaege 
hffiSenra  hloS       haliges  neosan 

leoda  weorude ;       heton  Isedan  ut  1390 

|)rohtheardne  pegn       priddan  sit5e  ; 
vvoldon  aninga       ellenrofes 
mod  gemyltan  ;       hit  ne  mihte  swa.  ^ 
Da  wses  niowinga       nifi  onhrered, 

heard  ond  hetegrim.       W?es  se  halga  wer  1395 

sare  geswungen,       searwum  gebunden, 
dolgbennum  ]?urhdri{en,       Sendon  dseg  lihte. 
Ongan  ]'a  geomormod       to  Gode  cleopian, 
heard  of  htefte,       halgan  stefne 

1375  £«w.  ageaf. —  1376  A//er  ea'Se  C;/.  supplies  gescilde^  (iiot  gescylde-S  as 
IF.  states)  ;  Ettm.  note  Hwaet  me  ea'Se]  scil.  maeg  alysan ;  Root  (p.  jS)  maeg  after 
ea'Se,  and  generian /t^r  neregend  1377".  —  1377  MS.,  B,  in  medum  ;  Edd.,  e.xccpt 
B.,  in  niedum;  Bright  {ML'A^.  ii,82)  nedum. —  1380  Ettm.  wraece  ?  Gn.  wriece  ? 
—  13S1  Gm.,  A'.,  Ettm.,  B.  forhogodes ;  B?  as  MS.  Th.,  Gm.,  Ettm.  heofen-. — 
1383  K.  wi'San.  —  1386  K.  fae&'o  ;  Ettm.  faihSe.  —  13S7  Gn.  wid.  —  1394  Th.,  Gm., 
A'.,  Ettm.,  Gn.  neowinga. —  1395  T/i.,  Gm.,  A'.,  Ettm.,  Gn.  hete  grim,  7oit/i  the 
hemistich  after  hete ;  K.  on  for  ond ;  Gn.  A'achtr.,  Gn."^,  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  j/7) 
hetegrim,  in  the  first  half-line.  —  1396  Simons  (/.  120)  snearum  ? —  1397  A'.,  Ettm. 
Jjenden.  —  1398  Ettm.  ongann. 


56 


ANDREAS 


fib  J  iJteit, 


*  iXaaK»-~\ 


weop  werigfer6,       ond  J^aet  word  gecwae'S  :  1400 

"  Nffifre  ic  geferde       mid  Frean  willan  \>^ 

under  heofonhwealfe       heardran  drohtnoS, 

]'£er  ic  Dryhtnes  3B       deman  sceolde.  c-^  ■•^^• 

Sint  me  leoSu  tSlocen,       lie  sare  gebrocen, 

banhiis  blodfag,       benne  weallaS,  1405 

seonodolg   swatige.       Hwset !  'Sii  sigora  weard, 

Dryhten  Hselend,       on  daeges  tide 

mid  liideum       geomor  wurde, 

•Sa  '8ii  of  gealgan,       God  lifigende, 

fyrnweorca  Frea,       to  f seder  cleopodest,  14 10 

cininga  wuldor,     ond  cwSde  6115  : 

'  Ic  'Se,  faeder  engla,       frignan  wille, 

lifes  leohtfruma,       hwset  forleetest  'Su  me  ?  ' 

Ond  ic  nil  ]'ry  dagas       polian  sceolde 

wselgrim  witu.       Bidde  ic,  weoroda  God, 

Jiset  ic  |gast  minne        agifan  mote, 

sawla  symbelgifa,       on  ]'Ines  sylfes  hand. 

Dii  '6set  gehete       ]mrh  Jnn  halig  word, 

]>a.  ^u  us  twelfe        trymman  ongunne, 

))3et  ils  heterofra       hild  Jie  gesceode, 

ne  lices  dsBl       lungre  oS^eoded, 

ne  synu  ne  ban       on  swaSe  lagon,  , 

ne  loc  of  heafde       to  forlore  wurde, 

gif  we  ))ine  lare       liestan  woldon. 

Nil  sint  sionwe  toslopen,        is  min  swat  adropen,  1425 


1415 

[f.  481^] 


1420 


r 


T400  MS.  -fer^  inserted aboz'e  the  line.  —  1404  MS.,  Edd.  leo'5,  Holthausen  {PBB. 
xz'i,  jj/)  leo'Su.  —  1405  A'.,  B.  benna. —  1406  77/.,  Gfn.,  A'.,  Etttn.  seono  dolg- 
swatige.  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  4jg)  swatge.  —  1414  Ett/n  \>r\-  —  1420  77/.  gescaende  after 
heterofra  ?  77/.  gesceolde.  —  1421  Cm.  note  o'beode  =  evaderet,  periret ;  Ett/n.  text 
ob'beodde.  —  1425  MS.  toslopen  and  adropen  ;  Auip  adropen,  the  d  altered  from  fi ; 
hut  the  crossing  is  plainly  visible  in  the  reprodnction  ;  IV.  Nachtr.  {p.  j6j)  as  MS.  ; 
Edd.  toslowen  a/td  a'Srowen  ;  Gm.  note  suggests  toslopen  ««</ adropen,  and  Nachtr. 
(p.  ijz)  adropen  for  adropen ;  Etttn.  adds  '■fortasse  legenduin  est  toslawen, 
a'Srawen ' ;  Siev.  [PBB.  x,  J/7),   Cos.   i^PBB.  xxi,  18)  toslopen,  adropen. 


r'^.if 


SVu^^A 


ANDREAS  57 

licgatJ  sefter  lande       loccas  todrifene, 

fex  on  foldan.       Is  me  feorhgedal 

leofre  mycle       I'onne  pcos  lifcearo." 

Him  ]'a  stefn  oncwaeS,       sti8hycgendum, 

wuldorcyninges       word  hloSrode  :  1430 

"  Ne  wep  })one  wroecsiS,       wine  leofesta ; 

nis  \>e  to  frecne.       Ic  ]>t  friSe  healde, 

minre  mundbyrde       maegene  besette. 

Me  is  miht  ofer  eall,        [geond  middangeard  ] 

sigorsped  geseald.       S06  ]>xt  gecy6e6  (fc"^  ^435 

maenig  set  me?ile       on  )>am  myclan  dcege, 
.  ,„  .  Jiset  bset  geweorSeS,       ]'?et  Seos  wlitige  gesceaft, 

\'*^'  heofon  ond  eorSe,       hreosap  togadore,  i 

ffir  awjeged  sie       worda  Eenig, 

)'e  ic  ]mrh  mlnne  muS       median  onginne.  1440  7^ 

Geseoh  nil  seolfes  swae^e,       swa  ]nn  swat  aget 

furh  bangebrec       blodige  stige, 

lices  leelan.       No  ])e  la6es  ma    ■-  "f  , 

^'^Toit  df  sjxaxv-    ]>urh  daroSa  gedrep       gedon  motan, 

-r    J>a  ]5e  heardra  mSst       hearma  gefremedan."  1445 

J^a  on  last  beseah       leoflic  cempa 

eefter  wordcwidum       wuldorcyninges ; 

geseh  he  geblowene       bearwas  standan 

blSdum  gehrodene,       swa  he  Sr  his  blod  aget. 

Da  worde  cwaecS       wigendra  hleo :  1450 

U  ■f^  *•  "  STe  (5e  (5anc  ond  lof,       peoda  waldend, 

1430  A',  wuldor  cyninges.  Edd.,  except  T/i.,  JV.  hleo'Srode. —  1434  -"IAS",  ofer  eall 
sigor-  with  no  indication  of  omission  ;  T/i.,  Gm.,  A',  indicate  the  omission  of  a  half- 
line  ;  Ettm.  supplies  so  as  to  read  ofer  eallne'middangeard  ;  Gti.  geond  middangeard  ; 
B.,  IV.  indicate  no  omission.  —  1435  ^"^-  gecy^ed.  — 1436  Ettm.  manig.  —  1438  Gm., 
A'.,  Ettm.  to  gadore. —  1441  Ettm.  swa'Se.  Gm.,  A'.,  Ettm.  ageat. —  1443  MS.  lie 
laelan  ;  Edd.  liclselan  ;  Gn.'^,  Spr.  ii,  162  lie  laelan,  laslan  inf.  =  livere  ;  Siev.  (PBB. 
X,  5/7),  Bright  [MLA^.  ii,  82,  with  alternative  laela)  liees  laelan,  laelan  ace.  sg.  ;  Cos. 
{PBB.  xxi,  18)  laela,  gen.  pt.  —  1446  Ettm.  geseah.  —  1447  A',  wuldor  cyninges.  — 
1448  Ettm.  geseah.    Sie7'.  {EBB.  x,  466)  geblowne.  —  1449  Gm.,  A'.,  Ettm.  ageat. 


58  ANDREAS 

to  widan  feore       wuldor  on  heofonum, 
■Saes  ^u  I  me  on  sare,       sigedryhten  min,  [f.  49^] 

ell))eodigne,       an  ne  forleete." 

Swa  se  dsedfruma       Dryhten  herede  '      1455 

halgan  stefne,       oSSaet  hador  saegl 
wuldortorht  gewat       under  wa(Su  scriSan, 
pa.  ]'a  folctogan       feorSan  slSe, 
'ic^  :  egle  ondsacan,       seSeling  iSddon 

t5  ))am  carcerne  ;       woldon  craefta  gehygd,  1460 

magorEedendes       mod  oncyrran 

on  J'ffire  deorcan  niht.       pa  com  Dryhten  God 

in  ]>aet  hlinr?eced,       haeleSa  wuldor, 

ond  ]'a  wine  synne       wordum  grette 

ond  frofre  gecwaeS,       faeder  manncynnes,  1465 

lifes  lareow  ;        heht  his  lichoman 

hales  briican  :        "  Ne  scealt  6u  in  henSum  a  leng 

searohsebbendra       sar  frowian." 

Aras  ]>a.  msegene  rof,       ssgde  Meotude  fane, 
hal  of  hsefte       heardrawita;  '  1470 

naes  him  gewemmed  wlite,       ne  wloh  of  hraegle 
lungre  alysed,       ne  loc  of  heafde, 
ne  ban  gebrocen,       ne  blodig  wund 
/a?fe  gelenge,       ne  /Ices  dsel 

]mrh  dolgslege       dreore  bestemed ;  1475 

ac  wses  eft  swa  £er     ]mrh  ]'a  feSelan  miht 
lof  Iffidende,       ond  on  his  lice  trum.  -'-"^c^ 

1454  Ettm.  el)>eodigne.  Edd.,  except  T/i.,  IV.  forlete. —  1457  -A'  omits  wa^u ; 
Gn.  (iiote,  wa'Sum  ?)  and  Sp7-.  ii,  642  wadu. —  1458  Ettm.  feordan,  yiot  feorde  us 
IV.  states. —  1460  Blount  craeftganyir  crasfta. —  1462  K.  omits  god. —  1464  Edd., 
except  Th.,  W.  sinne. —  1467  Gm.,  A'.,  Ettm.  hendum. —  1468  MS.  sa.s;  Edd.  sar. 
— 1472  A/S.,  T/i.  alysde. —  1474  MS.  lie  ge  lenge  ne  la'Ses  dx\;  T/t.,  Cm.,  Ettm. 
lie  gelenge  etc.;  A'.,  B.  licgelenge ;  Gn.,  W.  lice  lenge ;  Gm.  note,  Gn.  (Spr.  i,  421'), 
Cos.  i^PBB.  xxi,  iS)  lice  gelenge. 


V 


ANDREAS  59 


XIV 


HwKt"!  ic  hwile  nu       haliges  lare, 
leoSgiddinga,       lof  j'ffis  ])e  worhte, 
^''w^-c,,!^^ .'.  vvordum  wemde,        wyrd  undyrne,  1480 

ofer  min  gemet.       Mycel  is  to  secganne; 

V  —        -     —    — 

langsum  leornung,       pst  he  in  life  adreag, 

/  call  Kfter  orde.       ]7?et  scell  EeglEewra  r  ^  t  Lw^c J' ,^  r«uo 

^         _  mfinn  on  moldan       )'onne  ic  me  taelige 

findan  on  ferSe,       ]>oet  fram  fruman  cunne  1485 

call  ]'a  earfeSo,       ]'e  he  mid  elne  adreah, 

grimra  gil'Sa.       HwaeSre  |git  sceolon  [£.49*^] 

f-r  ■  '  ■         lytlum  sticcum       leoSworda  dffil 

furcSur  reccan.       pxt  is  fyrnscegen, 
O^vwx, — >ww~^'i'  hii  he  weorna  feala       wita  geSolode,  1490 

heardra  hilda,       in  fgere  hseSenan  byrig. 

He  be  wealle  geseah       wundrum  faeste 
f  '  under  saelwage       sweras  unlytle, 

stapulas  standan,       storme  bedrifene, 

eald  enta  gevveorc.       He  wiS  anne  ]£era,  i495 

mihtig  ond  modrof,       maeSel  gehede, 
"  v^^     WIS,  wundrum  gleaw,       word  stunde  ahof  : 

"  Geher  Su,  marmanstan,       Meotudes  raedum, 

fore  paes  onsyne       ealle  gesceafte 

forhte  gevveort>a6,       ])onne  hie  faeder  geseo;5  1500 

heofonas  ond  eor'San       herigea  mgste 

on  middangeard        mancynn  secan  ! 

1478  MS.  HALT  ;  Th.  hset,  note  hwoet  ?—  1481  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  482)  secgan.— 
1483  Etim.  sceall.  Cm.,  A'.,  Ettm.  aegleawra. —  1487  A',  sceal  on,  ending  the  line 
-with  sceal. —  1489  C;/.^,  B.  fyrnsjegen  ;  other  EJJ.  fyrn  sa;gen. —  1490  Ettm. 
feola.  MS.  geSole'de. —  1492  MS.,  Th.,  B.  faestne.  —  1493  ^^^■■>  ^'^'^-  saehvange, 
except  Gn.  saehvage  ;  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  18),  Root  {p.  j8)  as  Gn.  MS.  sweras,  not  as 
Th.,  JV.  state,  speras  ;  IV.  N^achtr.  (/.  j^j)  sweras  ;  Th.,  B.  text  speras.  —  1495  ^• 
asnne.  —  1496  MS.,  Th.  modrofe.  Ettm.  me^el. —  1497  Ettm.  wordum  ybr  wun- 
drum. —  1501  Ettm.  heofones  ? 


6o  ANDREAS 

Lset  nu  of  ])mum  sta]'ole       streamas  weallan, 
ea  inflede,       nu  Se  aelmihtig 

hateS,  heofona  cyning,       bsetjia  hrsedlice  1505 

on  pis  frsete  folc       forS  onsende 
wseter  widrynig       to  wera  cwealme, 
geofon  geotende.       Hwaet !   8u  golde  eart, 
sincgife,  sylla  ;        on  Se  sylf  cyning 

wrat,  wuldres  God,       wordum  cyMe  15 10 

recene  geryno,       ond  ryhte  ae 
getacnode       on  tyn  wordum, 
Meotud  mihtum  swl6  ;       Moyse  sealde, 
swa  hit  s56faeste       syti])an  heoldon, 

modige  magoj^egnas,       magas  sine,  1 5 1 5 

godfyrhte  guman,       losua  ond  Tobias. 
Nu  Su  miht  gecnawan,       ]>aet  ])e  cyning  engla 
gefrsetwode       furSur  mycle  ^ 

giofum  geardagum       j^onne  eall  gimma  cynn. 
coKtwvowci     )?urh  his  hahge  hSs       ]m  scealt  hraeSe  cySan,  1520 

gif  iu  his  ond gi tan       ^nige  hsebbe." 

Nses  ]>a.  wordlatu       wihte  )>on  mare, 
fset  se  Stan  togan  ;       stream  lit  |a\veoll,  [f.  50^] 

fleow  ofer  foldan  ;       famige  walcan 

mid  Eerdsege       eorSan  ])ehton,  1525 

myclade  mereflod.       Meoduscerwen  wearS      l^'-    •, 
after  symbeldsege  ;       slape  tobrugdon        r.  ..  . 
searuhffibbende.       Sund  grunde  onfeng, 
deope  gedrefed  ;       dugu8  wearS  afyrhted 

1504  T/i.,  G;;i.,  A',  in  flede  ;  Ettm.  on  flede.  —  1505  Etttn.  hras Slice.  —  1507  Tit., 
Gin.  wid  ryncg  ;  K.  widrincg  ;  Cw.  note  widryne  or  widrynig.  —  1508  MS.,  T/i.,  Cm., 
W.  heofon.— 1516  MS.,  T/i.  iosau.  —  1518  Ettm.  furSor. —  1520  Ettm.  hra'Se. — 
1 522  T/i.,  Cm  ,  Ettm.  word  latu.  —  1 526  MS.  meodu  scerwen  ;  so  A^ap.,  W.  Nacktr. 
(/.  565) ;  7h.,  Cm.,  A'.,  Ettm.,  B.  meodu  scerpen  ;  Cm.  note.  On.  meodu  scerwen  ; 
On.  note,  IV.,  Cos.  (PBB.  xxi,  ig)  meoduscerwen. — 1527-8  AfS.  tobrogdon ; 
haebende,  not  haebbende  as  JV.  states  ;   T/i.,  Cm.,  Ettm.  searu  hasbbende. 


ANDREAS 


6i 


.,f... 


k^' 


tu^V 


I'urh  j'cies  flodes  i^r ;        fSge  swulton,  1530 

geonge  on  geoi'ene       gu^rcBt;  fornam 
I'urh  sealtne  vvcg.       pvet  wses  sorgbyrjjen,  v-^ 

biter  beorpegu ;       byrlas  ne  gaeldon,  1^.    -  i 

ombeht])egnas  ;       ]>xv  \v?es  alcum  genog 
fram  dreges  orde       drync  sona  gearu. 
Weox  wasteres  prym  ;       weras  cwanedon, 
ealde  sescberend  ;       woes  him  ut  myne 
fleon  fealone  stream,       woldon  feore  beorgan, 
to  diinscra^fum       drohtaS  secan, 
eor6an  ondwist.       Him  ]i0et  engel  forstod,     -^ 
se  t5a  burh  oferbrregd       blacan  lige, 
hatan  heaSowcelme  ;       hreoh  wses  ]>sst  inne 
beatende  brim  ;       ne  mihte  beorna  hlo6 
fleame  spowan. 
wadu  hlynsodon, 
flod  ySum  weoll. 
innan  burgum 
geomorgidd  wrecen  ;        gehSo  nmndan 
forhtferS  manig,       fusleoS  golon. 
EgeslTc  seled       eagsyne  wearS,  1550 

heardlic  heretcam,        hleoSor  gryrelic  ; 
]'urh  lyftgelac       leges  bl^stas  Vy(/-^-A^l< 

weallas  ymbwurpon,       wKter  mycladon. 

JJSr  waes  wop  wera       wide  gehyred, 
earmlTc  ylda  gedraeg.       ]7a  )'£er  an  ongann,  ^555 


of  j'am  fasstenne 
Wsegas  weoxon, 
flugon  fyrgnastas, 
Dffir  wses  ySfynde 


1535 


1540 

1545 


UcC. 


1532  AfS.,  T/i.,  Gm.,  A',  scealtes  sweg  (A',  fr.  salt  ■auit'e) ;  Gm.  note  sealtes  or 
scealces  ?  Ettin.  note  svvealhes  =  al>vssi ;  Gn.,  />'.,  IV.  sealtes  sweg;  Cos.  {PBB. 
xxi,  ig)  sealtne. —  1533  A',  beorl'cgn. —  1534  A',  ombeht  |)egnas. —  1537  A'.,  Gn.^ 
utmyne.  — 1539  Ettin.  dunscrafum.  A'.  drohtoS. —  1540  MS.,  T/i.,  W.  eorSan 
^wist ;  Gm.,  Ettni.  eOi'San  and  wist ;  Ettin.  note  eor^an  onwist ;  A'.,  Gn.,  B.  andwist. 
—  1542  Gm.,  A'.,  Ettin.  -wealme. —  1545  MS.,  Th.,  Gm.,  Ettm.,  ]V.  wudu. —  1547 
MS.  Innan;  Th.  as  MS.  hinan,  text  innan. —  1548-9  MS.,  Edd .  wrecen,  mwnan, 
galen ;  Gin.  note  masned ;  Ettm.  note  wrecan,  galan.  Edd.,  except  A',  forht  fer'S. 
Th.,  Gm.,  Ettm.  fus  leoS. —  1551   A',  grynelic. —  1553   Gn.  note  ymbhwurfon  ? 


62  ANDREAS 

feasceaft  hjeleS,       folc  gadorigean, 

hean,  hygegeomor,       heofende  sprsec  : 

"  Nu  ge  magon  sylfe       soS  gecnawan, 

])3et  we  mid  unrihte       elI)'eodigne 

on  carcerne       clommum  belegdon,  1560 

|wltebendum  ;       us  seo  wyrd  scySe'8,  [f.  50^] 

heard  ond  hetegrim  :       ])get  is  [her]  swa  cu3. 

Is  hit  mycle  selre,       ]>aes  J>e  ic  so6  talige,  y 

faet  we  hine  alysan       of  leoSobendum, 

ealle  anmode       (ofost  is  selost),  1565 

ond  VIS  ]5one  halgan       helpe  biddan, 

geoce  ond  frofre.       Us  biS  gearu  sona 

sybb  sefter  sorge,       gif  we  secap  to  him." 

J>a  far  Andrea       orgete  wearS 

on  fyrh'Slocan       folces  gebgero,  1570 

])£er  wses  modigra       [maegen]  forbeged, 

wigendra  frym.       Wseter  fseSmedon, 

fleow  firgendstream,       flod  wses  on  luste, 

offset  breost  oferstag,       brim  weallende, 

eorlum  o5  exle.       J'a  se  seSeHng  het  15 75 

streamfare  stillan,       stormas  restan 

ymbe  stanhleoSu.       Stop  iit  hrae'Se 

cene  collenferS,       carcern  ageaf, 

gleawmod,  Gode  leof ;       him  [was]  gearu  sona 

furh  streamrsece       street  gerymed ;  0,    <■;    1580 

'  tf 2a^.>.,'f  Xsmeolt  waes  se  sigewangy?     symble  wses  dryge 

^       folde  fram  flode,       swa  his  fot  gestop. 

1557  Th.,  Gm.  hyge  geomor. —  1559  Ettm.  elheodigne.  —  1562  Th.,  Gtn.,  A', 
indicate  an  omission  before  \>7eX  ;  Gm.  note  supplies  haele'Sum,  apparently  before  cuiS  ; 
Ettm.  here-cu^;  C«.  her  swa  cu'5;  B.^  IV.  as  MS.,  with  710  fnark  of  otfiissioti. — 
1569  A'.,  Ettm.  note  ongete.  —  1571  Gn.  J>ast  waes  ?  for  l^aer  wses.  Th.  note,  Edd. 
except  R.,  supply  masgen  before  forbeged.  —  1573  Ettm.  firigenstream  ;  Gn,  firigend- 
stream.  —  1575  Ettm.  eaxle. —  1576  Cw.,  Ettm.,  IV.  stream  fare. —  1577  Edd., 
except  IV,  ymb.  —  1578  Gm.,  K.  carcerne  ;  Gm.  note  carcern.  —  1579  Gn.,  B.  supply 
was  after  him,  other  Edd.,  after  strait,  ijSo''. 


V"^ 


ANDREAS  63 

Wurdon  burgware       blicSe  on  mode, 
ferhftgefconde.       pa  wees  forS  cumen 
geoc  fcfter  gyrne ;       geofon  swafirode  ,        1585 

)mrh  haliges  has,       hlyst  yst  forgeaf,  \^,  - 

xju^c.  brimrad  gebad.        pa.  se  beorg  tohlad, 

eorSscraef  egeslic,       ond  pier  in  forlet 
flod  faeSmian,       fealewe  wSgas, 
J  ,..v>-'^'^  geotende  gegrind       grund  eall  forsvvealg.  1590 

Najas  he  par  yfie       ane  bisencte, 
ach  I'ces  weorodes  eac        cSa  wyrrestan, 
faa  folcsceatian,       feowertyne 
gewiton  mid  ]>y  w^ge       in  forwyrd  sceacan 
under  eorpan  grund.       ]'>a  \vear6  acolmod,  15 95 

forhtferS  manig       folces  on  laste  ;  — ^ 

wendan  hie  [wifa]       ond  wera  cwealmes, 
*   '  pearlra  |  gepinga       tirage  hnagran,  [f.  51=*] 

sy66an  mane  faa,       morJSorscyldige, 
(„  gu'Sgelacan       under  grund  hruron.  1600 

Hie  (Sa  anmode       ealle  cwaedon  : 
"  Nu  is  gesyne,       'Saet  |'e  so8  Meotud, 
cyning  ealhvihta,       cr?eftum  wealdeS, 
se  Sisne  ar       hider  onsende 

feodum  to  helpe.       Is  nu  pearf  mycel,  1605 

'i    -  ))^t  we  gumcystum       georne  hyran." 


15S4  Cm.,  Ettm.,  Gn.  ferhS  gefeonde.  A'.,  B.  for-Scumen.— 15S5  MS.,  B.,  IV. 
heofon.  FJim.  sweSrode. —  1588  77/.  {but  not  K.  as  W.  states),  in-forlet. —  1592 
A',  ah.  Gm.,  Gn.,  A'.,  Ettm.  weoiudes. —  1593  MS.  faa;  Edd.,  except  7/t.,  IV., ia.. 
—  1595  A'.  eorJSgrund. —  1596  Edd.  forht  ferS. — 1597  AfS.  hie  -]  wera;  T/i.,  Gm., 
B.,  as  AfS.  with  no  indication  0/ omission  ;  K.  indicates  omission  before  wera ;  Ettm., 
Gn.,  IF.  wifa  after  hie.  —  1598  After  fjo^  T/i.  sup/oses  a  folio  to  have  been  cut  out 
of  the  MS.,  and  indicates  an  omission  in  his  text ;  other  Edd.  see  tto  interruption 
of  the  narrative.  A',  hrasge.  —  1 599  J\/S.  faa ;  Edd.  fa,  except  Ettm.  fah,  77/.,  W. 
faa.  Siez'.  {PBB.  x,  ^jg)  -scyldge. —  1601  MS.  h'e. —  1603  Ettm.  eahvihta. — 1604 
Ettm.  supplies  us,  Gn.  este  before  onsende  ;  Gn.  note  hider  on  sende  .'  See  A'otes.  — 
1606  Gn.  gym- ;  Gnr  gum-. 


64  ANDREAS 

[XV] 

J?a  se  halga  ongann       hseleS  blissigean, 
wigendra  ]'reat       wordum  retan  : 
"  Ne  beo5  ge  to  forhte,       ['Eh  pe  fell  curen 
synnigra  cynn ;        swylt  ])ro\vode,  1610 

witu  be  gevvyrhtum  ;       eow  is  wuldres  leoht 
torht  ontyn,ed,       gif  ge  teala  hycgaS." 
Sende  ]>a  his  bene       fore  beam  Godes, 
.    baed  haligne       helpe  gefremman 

gumena  geogoSe,       pe  on  geofene  eer  161 5 

])urh  flodes  fseSm       feorh  gesealdon, 

■Sset  pa  gastas,       gode  orfeorme, 

in  wita  forwyrd,       wuldre  bescyrede, 

in  feonda  ge  weald       gefered  [;/("]  wurdan. 

pa  Saet  aerende       ealwealdan  Gode  1620 

sefter  hleoSorcwidum       haliges  gastes 

wses  on  ])anc  sprecen,       Seoda  r^swan ; 

het  pa  onsunde       ealle  arisan, 

geonge  of  greote,       pa  Sr  geofon  cwealde. 

J>a  peer  ofostllce       upp  astodon  1625 

manige  on  meSle,       mine  gefrege, 
eaforan  unweaxne  ;       tia  wses  eall  eador 
leoSolic  ond  gastlic,       peah  hie  lungre  ser 
purh  flodes  fSr       feorh  aleton  ; 

onfengon  fulwihte       ond  freofiuwEere,  1630 

wuldres  wedde       witum  aspedde, 

I  mundbyrd  Meotudes.        pa.  se  modiga  het,  [f.  51^] 

cyninges  creeftiga,       ciricean  getimbran, 


161 1  A'.,  B.  gewyrtum. —  1618  G/i.  7iote  ne  in? — 1622  MS.,  T/i.,  B.  raeswum. 
—  1625  77/.,  K.  uppastodon. —  1627  K.  geador. —  1630  Gn.  freo'So-. —  1633 
Gil.  note  craeftigan  ?  but  Spr.  i,  168  crceftiga ;  A",  crasftigra ;  Siev.  {FBB.  x,  4^0) 
craeftga. 


ANDREAS  65 

gerwan  Godes  tempel,       jjaer  sio  geogoS  aras 
jmrh  faeder  fulwiht       ond  se  flod  onsprang.  1635 

J>a  gesamnodon,        secga  j'reate, 
weras  geond  |'a  winburg       wide  ond  side, 
eorlas  anmode,       ond  hira  idesa  mid  ; 
cwiedon  holdlice        hyran  woldon, 

onfon  fromlice       fullwihtes  baecS  1640 

Dryhtne  to  willan,       ond  diofolgild, 
ealde  eolhstedas,       anforlStan. 
pa.  waes  mid  ]'y  folce       fulwiht  hrefen, 
seSele  mid  eorlum,       ond  £e  Godes 

riht  arseired,       raed  on  lande  1645 

jnid  pam  ceasterwarum,       cirice  gehalgod. 
Ipxr  se  ar  Godes       anne  gesette, 
wisfsestne  wer,       wordes  gleawne, 
in  )'£ere  beorhtan  byrig       bisceop  ])am  leodum, 
ond  gehalgode       fore  ]'am  heremsegene  1650 

]mrh  apostolhad,       Platan  nemned, 
))eodum  on  j'earfe,       ond  jTiste  bebead, 
])3pt  hie  his  lare       Iseston  georne, 
feorhried  fremedon.       Saegde  his  fiisne  hige, 
J)8et  he  pa  goldburg       ofgifan  wolde,  1655 

secga  seledream        ond  sincgestreon, 
beorht  beagselu,       ond  him  brimj'isan 
set  sees  faroSe       secan  wolde. 
J'aet  Wees  )iam  weorode       weorc  to  gej'oligenne, 
fset  hie  se  leodfruma       leng  ne  w'olde  1660 

wihte  gewunian.       pa  him  wuldres  God 
on  ]jam  siSfsete       sylfum  setywde, 

1635  G)i.^  burh  feeder  fultum. —  1636  A',  gesamnadon. —  1642  Gm.note,  A. 
ealhstedas.— 1647  ^^^S.  sio.— 1653  MS.  he.— 1658  MS.,  T/i.  foro-Se.  —  1659 
MS.,  Edd.  weor,  except  W.  weorce ;  A'hi,s;e  {Atiglia  /<■,  106%  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  20) 
weorc.     Sier.  {PBB.  x,  4S2)  -would  have  uninflected  infinitit'e  for  geholigenne. 


66  ANDREAS 

ond  I'aet  word  gecwse6,     vveoruda  Dryhten  : 

* 

*  * 

"  folc  of  firenuni  ?       Is  him  fus  hyge, 

ga<5  geomriende,       geoht5o  msenatJ  1665 

weras  wif  samod ;        hira  wop  becom, 

murnende  mod, 

I 

* 

*  * 

[me]  fore  sneowan. 
'^cf  Ne  scealt  'Su  ]>^t  eowde       anforl^tan 

on  swa  niowan  gefean,       ah  him  naman  |minne    [f.  52*]    1670 
on  ferSlocan       f^este  getimbre.  ' 

Wuna  in  ]  sere  winbyrig,        wigendra  hleo, 
salu  sinchroden,       seofon  nihta  fyrst ; 
sy8San  6u  mid  mildse       minre  ferest." 

J>a  eft  gewat       06 re  siSe  1675 

modig,  msegene  rof,        Marmedonia 
ceastre  secan.       Cristenra  weox 
word  ond  wisdom,       sySSan  wuldres  ]>egn, 
sepelcyninges  ar,       eagum  sawon. 

Leerde  ]>a.  )'a  leode       on  geleafan  weg,  1 680 

trymede  torhtlice  ;       tireadigra 
wenede  to  wuldre       weorod  unmgete, 
to  ])am  halgan  ham       heofona  rices, 

1663  7%.  a/fer  dryhten  «/  /east  hoo  lines  wanting ;  Gm.,  A".,  W.  indicate  the 
omission  of  one  or  more  lines  ;  Gn.  says  '■'■  Einige  wenige  Zeilen,  den  Anfang  dcr 
Rede  enthaltend,  sind  hier  ausgefallen,  etwa  des  Inhalts :  '  IVaruni  willst  die  die 
Leute  so  schnell  verlassen,  die  dock  so  eben  erst  bekehrt  sind  von  ihren  Sihiden'" ; 
B.  supposes  no  interruption  of  the  narrative.  See  Notes. —  1664  MS.,  W.  his  him. 
—  1666  Th.,  Gm.,  K.,  Gn.  him  \>'a.  for  hira. —  1667  There  is  no  indication  of  omis- 
sion in  the  MS.,  but  77/.,  Gm.,  A'.,  IV.  leave  space  for  tiuo  half-lines  after  mod; 
.  Gti.  supplies  as  follows  : 

murnende  mod,       [nu  J>u  on  merebate 

wilt  ofer  flodas]       fore  sneowan. 

B.  as  MS.,  without  interruption  ;  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  20)  supplies  me  before  fore.    See 
Notes.    K:xao%. —  167 1  Gm.,  K.  ferh^locan. —  16S1  Gm.  note,  Gn.,  VV.  tir  eadigra. 


,  ANDREAS  67 

]  sEr  Fiieder  ond  Sunu        ond  frofre  Cast 
in  j'rinnesse       prymme  wealdeS  1685 

in  woruld  worulda       wuldorgestealda. 
I         Swylce  se  halga       herigeas  j'reade, 

deofulgild  todraf       ond  gedwolan  f}lde. . 

J7aet  wses  Satane       sar  to  gepolienne, 

mycel  modes  sorg,       paet  he  (Sa  menigeo  geseah  1690 

hweorfan  higebliSe       fram  helltrafum 

]iurh  Andreas        este  lare 

to  fegeran  gefean,        ]>xt  nafre  feondes  ne  biS, 

gastes  gramhydiges,       gang  on  lande. 

f>a  wEeron  gefylde       sefter  Frean  dome  1695 

dagas  on  rime,       swa  him  Dryhten  behead, 
^Ma-iOA^J  .       j,^^  l^g  j,^  wederburg       wunian  sceolde. 

Ongan  hine  ]m  fysan       ond  to  flote  gyrwan, 
bUssum  hremig,        wolde  on  brim]nsan 
Achaie       oSre  sicSe  ■  1700 

sylfa  gesecan,       ]  aer  he  sawulgedal, 
beaducwealm  gebad.       ]?aet  pam  banan  ne  wear6     '- 
hleahtre  behworfen,       ah  in  helle  ceafl 
si6  asette,       ond  sySSan  no, 
'':',<t^'f  fah,  freonda  leas,       frofre  benohte.  pnsit-v-ti      1705 

Da  ic  liedan  gefraegn       leoda  weorode 
leofne  lareow       to  lides  stefnan, 
maecgas  |modgeomre;       ]'Sr  manegum  waes  [f.  52^] 

1685  Gn.  }>rinesse. —  16S9  Si'ev.  (PBB.  x,  482)  'would  change  ge)>olienne  to  the 
uninfieded  infinitive.  —  1694  Siev.  {PBB.  x,  460)  -hydges.  —  1699  B.  blyssum  ;  B.^ 
blissum.  —  1700  Bright  (MLJV.  it,  82)  supplies  eft  before  Achaie.  MS.  achaie  ;  77/. 
ac  hale,  indicating  the  omission  of  a  word  before  ac ;  Gm.  text  as  Th.,  note  wolde 
achaie  3e"Selingas  otire  si'Se  etc.  (achaie  =  onsund) ;  A'.  Achaie;  Gn.  Achaia;  Gn."^ 
as  A'.  —  1703  A",  hleafre.  —  1704  MS.  asette  t  sy5  no  ;  W.  betweeii  sy5  and  no,  a 
small  hole  in  the  parchment,  not  large  enough  to  have  contained  -^2in  ;  Th.  indicates 
omission  before  ond;  Gm.  and  sI'S  no,  note  and  si5  of  geaf  (or  ne  of  geaf)  no ;  A'. 
and  si'5  no  {tr.  '■never  since ^) ;  Gn.,  B.  sy'SSan ;  W.  as  MS. —  1705  Gm.  feonda 
corrected  (/.  1S2)  to  freonda. 


68  ANDREAS 

hat  set  heortan       hyge  weallende. 

Hie  Sa  gebrohton       set  brimes  naesse  1710 

on  wsegpele       wigan  unslawne ;  ,.c  , 

stodon  him  Sa  on  ofre       sefter  reotan,         - 'c-f "^ 

j^endon  hie  on  ySum       aeSelinga  wunn 

ofer  seolhpaSu       geseon  mihton, 

ond  )5a  weorSedon       wuldres  agend,  171S 

cleopodon  on  corSre,       ond  cwadon  ]ms  : 

"An  is  ece  God       eallra  gesceafta  ! 

Is  his  miht  ond  his  geht       ofer  naiddangeard 

breme  gebledsod,       ond  his  blsed  ofer  eall 

in  heofonprymme       halgum  scineS,  1720 

wHtige  on  wuldre,       to  widan  ealdre, 

ece  mid  englum.       J>aet  is  seSele  cyning  !  " 

1 7 1 3  Gn.  wynn.  —  1 7 1 4  MS.  plainly  seolh  pa'Su  ;  Th,  Edd.  seolhwa'Su  ;  Gn.  note 
pa^u  ?  Siev.  {PBB.  i,  4^2)  seolhpa'Su  ;  Cos.  {PBB.  xxi,  21)  seolhba^u.  —  1 7 1 5  Edd., 
except  B.,  ?F.,  weor'Sodon. —  171 6  T/t.  cwse'Son  ;  G>n.  cwaeden,  corrected  (/.  182') 
to  cwaedon.  —  1720  Gn.  on  for  in. 


THE  FATES  OF  THE  APOSTLES 

Hwset !  ic  J'ysne  sang       siSgeomor  fand 

on  seocum  sefan,       samnode  wide, 

hu  ]>3.  jE(5elingas       ellen  cy5don, 

torhte  ond  tlreadige.       Twelfe  wseron, 

dsedum  domfseste,       Dryhtne  gecorene,  5 

leofe  on  life.       Lof  wide  sprang, 

miht  ond  marSo,       ofer  middangeard, 

feodnes  J'egna,       pryrn  unlytel. 

Halgan  heape       hlyt  wisode, 

))aer  hie  Dryhtnes  ^       deman  sceoldon,  lO 

reccan  fore  rincum.       Sume  on  Romebyrig, 

frame,  fyrdhwate,       feorh  ofgefon 

furg  Nerones       nearwe  searwe, 

Petrus  ond  Paulus ;       is  se  apostolhad 

wide  geweorSod       ofer  werpeoda.  15 

Swylce  Andreas       in  Achagia 
for  Egias       aldre  geneSde  ; 
-n-   ,  IT  ne  freodode  he       fore  prymme  (Seodcyninges, 

aeniges  on  eorSan,       ac  him  ece  geceas 
langsumre  Hf,        leoht  unhwilen,  20 

sy}'J'an  hildeheard,       heriges  byrhtme, 
aefter  giiSplegan       |  gealgan  j'ehte.  [f.  53^] 

Hwset !  we  eac  gehyrdon       be  IShanne 
^/  ffiglffiawe  menn       ?e6elo  reccan  ; 

I  A/S.  waet,  7t'////  sface  left  vacant  for  the  omitted  H.  —  4  MS.  woron  ;  Gti.  fiote 
foron? — II  Gn.  Rome  byrig.  —  v^  MS.,  T/i.,  A'.,  Simons  {/>.  104)  neawe  ;  T/t. 
note  nearwe?  On.  nearo-seam-e. —  18  MS.  breodode  fore.  —  21  MS.,  Th.,  A'., 
On.  hilde  heard.  —  24  A'.,  Gn.  aegleawe. 

69 


yo  THE  FATES  OF  THE  APOSTLES 

'N         -  -  f  - 

se  manna  wses,        mine  geirege,  25 

Jmrh  cneorisse       Criste  leofast 

on  weres  hade,       syS6an  wuldres  cyning, 

engla  ordfmma,       eorSan  sohte 

Jmrh  feemnan  hrif,       faeder  manncynnes. 

He  in  Effesia       ealle  prage  30 

leode  Iffirde  ;       ]>anon  hfes  weg 

siSe  gesohte,       swegle  dreamas, 

-^    .^'v^    beorhtne  boldwelan.       Nses  his  bro6or  laet, 

si^es  ssene,       ac  'Surh  sweordes  bite 

mid  ludeum       lacob  sceolde  35 

fore  Herode       ealdre  gedeelan, 

feorh  \vi6  fl^sce.       Philipus  wce^ 

mid  Asseum  ;        j^anon  ece  \\i 

jmrh  rode  cwealm       ricene  gesohte, 

sySSan  on  galgan        in  Gearapolim  40 

ahangen  wtes       hildecorSre. 

Huru  !  wide  wearS       wurd  undyrne, 

jiaet  to  Indeum       aldre  gelaedde 

beaducrseftig  beorn,       Bartholameus ; 

j'one  heht  Astrias       in  Albano,  45 

heeSen  ond  hygebUnd,       heafde  beneotan, 

forpan  he  'Sa  hseSengild       hyran  ne  wolde, 

wig  weorSian  ;       him  waes  wuldres  dream, 

hfwela  leofra       j^onne  pas  leasan  godu. 

Swylce  Thomas  eac       ]»riste  geneSde  5° 

on  Indea       oSre  daelas, 

J5£er  manegum  wearS       mod  onlihted, 

29  Gn.  mancynnes.  —  30  IV.  Effessia  ;  Ahxclitr.  Effesia.  —  32  /v'.  swegledreamas. 
—  36  6'«.  ealdre  ;  Cw.^  ealdre.  —  37  C^.  Philippus.  —  39  A',  rodecwealm.  —  41  Th., 
A'.,  Gn.  hilde  cor^re ;  Gii.  {Sp7\  i/\  yj)  hildecorSre.  —  42  77/.,  A',  weard;  A".,  G;i. 
wyrd.  —  43  77/.,  A'.  gelcC'SSe  ;  6';/.  gelasdde  ;  C//.^  gene'Sde  ;  Av//.  gelcedde //(//;//}' 
altered f 7- om  gelas'SSe.  —  46  A',  beneosan.  —  49  MS.  plainly  I'as;  so  also  Nap.; 
Th..,  Gn.,  W.  )>aes  ;  7\.'.,  Gn!^  \>z.%. —  52  Ahip.  i  (^  onlihted  corrected  from  u. 


THE    FATES    OF   THE    APOSTLES  yi 

hige  onhyrded,        )mrh  his  halig  word  ; 

syfiftan  collenfer5       cyninges  broSor 

awehte  for  weorodum,       wundorcraefte,  55 

]mrh  Dryhtnes  miht,       \>xt  he  of  deaSe  aras, 

geong  ond  giitihwaet,       ond  him  \v?es  Oad  nama; 

ond  (Sa  I  Sm  folce       feorg  gesealde, 

sin  set  srecce,       s\veord|r£es  fornam  [f.  53^] 

])urh  hJeSene  hand,        )  Sr  se  halga  gecrang,  60 

wund  for  weorudum  ;       ])onon  wuldres  leoht 

sawle  gesohte       sigores  to  leane.  ^ 

Hwaet !  we  ]>2et  gehyrdon       jnirg  halige  bee, 
l^set  mid  Sigelwarum       soS  yppe  wearS, 
dryhthc  dom  Godes ;       d?eges  or  onwoc,  65 

leohtes  geleafan,       land  wses  gefielsod 
furh  Matheus       mare  lare  ; 
fone  het  Irtacus       tiurh  yrne  hyge, 
wselreow  cyning,       wgepnum  aswebban. 
Hyrde  we  pset  lacob       in  Ze;usalem  70 

fore  sacerdum       swilt  prowode  ; 
t5urg  stenges  sweng       stIISmod  gecrang, 
eadig  for  aefestum  ;        hafaS  nu  ece  lif 
mid  wuldorcining,        wTges  to  leane. 
"T         Neeron  Sa  twegen       tohtan  SEene,  75 

lindgelaces  ;       land  Persea 
sohton  sT^frome,       Simon  ond  Thaddeus, 
beornas  beador/3fe  ;       him  wearS  bam  samod 
an  ended?eg  ;       asSele  sceoldon 

■Surh  wsepenhete       weorc  j'rowigan,  •         80 

sigelean  secan,       ond  )'one  soSan  gefean, 
dream  sefter  deatSe,       l^a  gedeeled  wearS 
lif  wis  lice,       ond  ]'as  leenan  gestreon, 

63  Gn.  hurh.  — 70  G>i.  hyfdon  we  ?— 77  /«  t/ie  MS.  h  </ Thaddeus  h  v<riit(H 
tji  above  the  line. 


72  THE  FATES  OF  THE  APOSTLES 

idle  sehtwelan,       ealle  forhogodan. 

Dus  6a  aeSelingas       ende  gesealdon,  '         .  85 

XII.  tilmodige  ;       tir  unbrscne 

wegan  on  gewitte,       wuldres  ))egnas, 
Nu  ic  ])onne  bidde       beorn,  se  t$e  lufige 

]jysses  giddes  begang,       fset  he  geomrum  me 

])one  halgan  heap       helpe  bidde,  90 

friSes  ond  fultomes.       Hii !  ic  freonda  bepearf, 

liSra  on  lade,  ^ '.  ]>onne  ic  sceal  langne  ham, 

eardwic  unciiS,       ana  gesecan,  y 

Icztan  me  on  laste       he,  eorSan  dael, 

waelreaf  wunigean       weormum  to  hroSre.  95 

I  Her  maeg  findan       fore|'ances  gleaw,  [f.  54^] 

se  Se  hine  lysteS       leoSgiddunga, 

hwa  jjas  fitte  fegde.        y   )'^^  °^  ^rA^  standej), 
.  eorlas  ])3es  on  eorSan  brGca)) ;       ne  m5ton  hie  avva  aetsomne, 
«  woruldwunigende :         P   sceal  gedreosan,  100 

n  on  et5le,       aefter  tohreosan 

l^ne  lices  fraetewa,       efne  swa   f*    toglideS. 

Donne  h  ond  Ph       craeftes  neosaS 
•  nihtes  nearowe  ;       on  him  +   Hge6, 

cyninges  peodom.       Nil  6u  cunnon  miht,  105 

hwa  on  )'am  wordum        waes  werum  oncySig. 

84  MS.,  Th.,  K.  ealne.  —  85  MS.  Dvs ;  so  also  Nap.  ;  T/i.,  A'.,  W.  Dys  ;  Gn.  )>us. 

—  87  K.  waegon.  —  90  AIS.  halga.  —  91  A'.,  Gn.,  Siev.  x\u /or  hu.  —  92  iV.  onttts 
sceal.  —  93  MS.,  Th.,  W.  gesece  ;  Siev.  gesecean.  —  94  MS.,  Th.,  K.,  Gti.,  W.  last; 
Siev.  laete. — 96-122  For  the  MS.  readings  of  this  passage,  see  the  literal  trans- 
cript in  the  N'otes.  —  96  Nap.,  Siev.,  Tr.  foreJ>ances.  —  98  N^ap.,  Siev.,  Tr.  fegde, 
standeK     For  Nap.^s  line-division,  see  Notes.  —  99  Nap.,  Siev.,    Tr.,    IV.    brucaj). 

—  100  Nap.,  Siev.,  Tr.  supply  the  rune. —  loi  Nap.  tohreosa)';  Siev.,  Tr.  tohreo- 
san.—  102  All  read  laene. —  103  A^ap.  does  not  r'estore  II.  ioj-104 ;  he  reads 
doubtfully,  in  loj",  swa,  followed  by  faint  traces  of  two  runes.  Siev.,  Tr.  as  in 
text.  N'ap.,  Tr.  with  MS.  neotaS ;  Siev.  neosa'5.  —  104  Siev.  %  lige'S ;  Tr. 
•\.  legeS.  For  Nap.^s  suggestions,  see  N^otes. —  105  N'ap.,  Siev.,  Tr.  cyninges. 
AFS.  cunnon  ;  Nap.,  Siev.,  Tr.  cunnan.  —  106  Nap.,  Siev.,  Tr.  restore  hwa  on  ^am 
i^Siev.  \>xm)  wor-. 


THE    FATES    OF   THE   APOSTLES  73 

Sie  l>aes  gemyndig,       mann  se  iSe  lufige 

))isses  galdres  begang,       |)ait  he  geoce  me 

ond  frofre  fricle.^^--  Ic  sceall  feor  heonan, 

an  elles  forJS,        eardes  neosan,  no 

siS  asettan,       nat  ic  sylfa  hwEer, 

of  ))isse  worulde  ;       wic  sindon  uncuS, 

card  ond  eSel.lV  Swa  biS  gelcum  menn, 

nempe  he  godcundes       gastes  bruce. 

Ah  utu  we  ))e  geornor       to  Gode  cleopigan,  1 1 5 

sendan  usse  bene       on  ))a  beorhtan  gesc^aft,        • 
paet  we  )?aES  bo  ties       brucan  motan, 
hames  in  hehSo.       f>£er  is  hihta  meest, 
]'£er  cyning  engla       claenum  gilded 

lean  unhwilen.       Nu  a  his  lof  standee,  1 20 

mycel  ond  mare,       ond  his  miht  seoma)>, 
ece  ond  edgiong,       ofer  ealle  gesceaft.  Finit. 


107  Nap.  restores  mann  se  ^e  lufige.  —  108-109  Nap.  me  ond  frof-.  —  1 10  Nap. 
for^  ea-.  —  112  Ay?/,  of  Hsse  ;  W.  on  Hsse.  —  113  Nap.  bi'S.  —  115  A\ip.  Ah  utu, 
but  suggests  utun. —  116  IV.  beochtan,  7nisprinti —  119  iVap.,  Siev.,  W.  glide's. — 
121  Siev.  somaK 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 


In  the  MS.  the  narrative  is  divided  into  sections  of  approximately  equal  length. 
There  are  in  all  fifteen,  or  with  addition  of  Ap.  sixteen,  sections,  varying  from 
I  )^  to  zyi  fol.  in  length.  Each  section  begins  with  a  capital  letter  or  a  group  of 
capital  letters,  and  ends  with  a  period  or  a  more  distinctive  and  frequent  mark 
of  a  sectional  ending,  consisting  of  a  semicolon  followed  by  a  hook-shaped  symbol. 
Between  the  various  sections  a  space  is  left  blank,  usually  not  more  than  sufficient 
for  a  single  line.  For  further  description,  see  Introd.,  pp.  xxxvi  ff.  In  the  present 
edition  the  divisions  of  the  MS.  are  followed,  and  are  further  indicated  by 
bracketed  numerals.  The  earlier  editions  vary  widely  in  their  treatment  of  these 
sectional  divisions  of  the  MS.  Thorpe  follows  the  MS.,  except  that  he  unites 
sections  three  and  four.  Grimm  further  reduces  the  number  of  sections  to  seven. 
Kemble  prints  his  text  without  division  into  sections.  Grein  makes  eleven  sec- 
tions, Baskervill  thirty.  Wiilker  prints  his  text  as  Kemble  does,  without  division 
into  sections.  He  inserts  in  the  margin,  however,  the  numerals  which  designate 
Grein's  eleven  sections,  and  indicates  the  division  of  the  MS.  in  his  notes. 

I.  The  poem  opens  with  the  conventional  epic  formula,  citing  the  authority 
of  oral  tradition  for  the  story.    For  similar  openings,  compare  the  following : 

HwjEt !  we  Gardena       in  geardagum 
J^eodcyninga       [irym  gefrunon, 
hu  Sa  aejjelingas       ellen  fremedon. 
Beow.  1-3. 

Hwaet !  we  feor  ond  neah       gefrigen  haba'S 
ofer  middangeard       Moyses  domas 
wr^ecllco  wordriht       wera  cneorissum, 
in  uprodor       eadigra  gehwam 
ffifter  bealusrSe       bote  lifes, 
lifigendra  gehwam       langsumne  rSd, 
haele'Sum  secgan :       gehyre  se  Se  wille  ! 
Ex.  1-7. 

Gefraegn  ic  Hebreos       eadge  lifgean 
in  Hierusalem,       goldhord  dSlan, 
cyningdom  habban,       swa  him  gecynde  vjtks,  etc. 
Dan.  1-3. 

Hsbbe  ic  gefrugnen       Jjstte  is  feor  heonan 
eastdSlum  on       as^ielast  londa 
firum  gefrx'ge.  Ph.  1-3*. 

Cf.  also  y«/.  I;  Mod.  i;  Cro.fs  i  ;  Sa/.  179;  A/.  1-4.  An  interesting  occur- 
rence of  the  formula  is  that  in  Beow.  875,  where  it  introduces  an  indirect  report 

75 


•j^i  NOTES   ON   ANDREAS 

of  an  episodic  narrative.  The  citation  of  traditional  authority  is  also  frequently 
found  in  the  body  of  a  narrative  when  a  new  topic  is  introduced :  with  gefrignan, 
Beow.  y^;  C/ir.  301;  Gen.  2060;  £x.  98,  38S,  and  elsewhere;  with  gehyran, 
Maid.  117;  El.  364;  Ap.  23,  63,  70,  and  elsewhere.  Hzucet  occurs,  with  or  with- 
out the  epic  formula,  in  the  body  of  a  narrative  when  a  new  topic  is  introduced ; 
it  is  used  with  less  emphatic  sense,  also,  as  a  weak  interjection;  for  examples, 
see  Glossary.  Grimm,  Deutsche  Granimatik  IV,  44S-450,  points  out  that  this 
use  of  the  neuter  of  the,  interrogative  pronoun  as  an  exclamation  is  peculiar  to 
Old  Saxon  and  Anglo-Saxon.  The  use  persists  as  late  as  Elizabethan  English, 
frequently,  as  in  Mod.  Eng.,  in  introducing  interrogative  sentences,  but  also  as 
mild  interjection  in  introducing  declarative  sentences ;  cf.  Taming  of  the  Shrew 
I,  ii,  248  :  '  What,  this  gentleman  will  outtalk  us  all';  Richard  III  IV,  iv,  320  : 
'  What,  we  have  many  goodly  days  to  see.'  Cf.  63,  note,  and  for  the  use  of  hwat 
as  interjection  in  prose,  see  Wiilfing,  II,  688-692.  —  on  fyrndagum.  The  phrase 
limits,  not  gefriinan,  but  the  verbal  idea  implied  in  1.  2^.  Hall  translates  '  who 
lived  in  the  yore-days.'  The  construction  is  similar  to  that  of  in  geardagttm, 
Beow.  I  ;  and  cf.  Beoio.  S7S^~S7^'-  ^°  ^^  °'^  mht  gefraegn  under  heofones  hwealf 
heardran  feohtan ;  IVid.  i6''-i7  :  he  miest  gehah  J^ara  \>e  ic  ofer  foldan  gefraegen 
haebbe.    See  also,  among  numerous  examples,  Beow.  74;  2752-2754. 

2.  under  tungluni.  The  usual  formula  is  tinder  keo/onum,  or  wolcnum, 
changed  here,  Cosijn  thinks  {PBB.  XXI,  8),  chiefly  for  the  sake  of  the  alUteration. 
—  tireadige  haeleS.    Cf.  Ap.  4,  and  note. 

3.  peodnes  J^egnas.  Cf.  Beow.  1085:  heodnes  )>egne ;  Ap.  8:  heodnes  begna ; 
Beow.  1081  :  Finnes  l>egnas  ;  and  similar  uses  frequently.  The  phrase,  originally, 
as  in  Beotuitlf,  used  of  the  followers  of  a  temporal  prince,  applies  here  to  the 
followers  of  the  Lord,  pegn,  literally  '  servant,'  has  not  therefore  the  color  of 
that  word  in  the  Oriental  phrase  '  servant  of  the  Lord.'  The  word  in  Anglo- 
Saxon  verse  is  a  dignified  one,  and  its  connotation  is  epic,  heroic.  This  value  it 
derives  from  the  position  of  the  J>egn  in  the  Anglo-Saxon  social  system.  '  As 
the  royal  power  and  dignity  grew,  it  came  to  be  looked  on  as  the  highest 
honour  to  enter  into  the  personal  service  of  the  King.  Two  results  followed ; 
service  towards  the  King,  a  place,  that  is,  in  the  King's  coniitatns,  became  the 
badge  and  standard  of  nobility.  ...  It  marks  perhaps  a  decline  from  the  first 
idea  of  the  coniitatus  that  the  old  word  Gesith,  "companion,"  answering  exactly 
to  the  Latin  comes  used  by  Tacitus,  was  supplanted  by  the  name  Thegn,  literally 
"  servant."  But  when  personal  service  was  deemed  honourable,  the  name  of  servant 
was  no  degradation,  and  the  name  Thegn  became  equivalent  to  the  older  Eorl.'' 
Freeman,  Growth  of  the  English  Constittition,  pp.  51-52.  For  further  discussion  of 
the  coniitatus,  see  Kemble,  Saxons  in  England  1,  168-183;  Miillenhoff,  Deutsche 
Alterticmskunde  IV,  182-198;  255-280;  Andrews,  Old  English  Manor,  passim; 
Larson,  The  King's  Household  in  England  before  the  A^orman  Conquest  (Bulletin 
of  the  University  of  Wisconsin,  No.  100),  pp.  76-103  ;  1 46-1 71  ;  Chadwick,  Studies 
on  Anglo-Saxon  Institutioiis,  pp.  308-333  ;  378-400.  See  also  Gummere,  Germanic 
Origins,  pp.  261-269,  for  a  description  of  the  passages  in  Anglo-Saxon  verse 
illustrative  of  the  comitatus,  and  to  these  add  the  prose  story  of  Cynewulf  and 
Cyneheard,  Anglo-Saxon  Chronicle,  755;  cf.  also  Caesar's  interesting  account  of 


NOTES   ON    ANDREAS  •j'j 

the  soldiirii,  B.  G.  Ill,  22.  Cf.  405-414,  note.  —  Grimm  places  11.  3^'-4'*  within 
parentheses,  thus  making  the  sentence  a  parenthetic  exclamation  like  Beenu.  18'': 
bl5d  wide  sprang.     See  764'',  note.     Cf.  Beow.  1528:  hajt  his  dom  al£g. 

4.  canipriedenne.  Dicht.,  'in  dem  Kampf  erlag  .  .  .  ihre  Hochkraft  nimmer  ' ; 
Kemble,  'their  glory  failed  not,  of  their  warfare.'  Gn.,  Spr.  I,  155,  glosses  the 
form  as  gen.  sg.,  but  it  seems  best  to  take  it  as  dative,  '  in  or  at  the  battle.'  The 
present  is  the  only  occurrence  of  the  word,  but  cf.  toigr^Jen,  Wald.  22.  —  hncotan. 
The  form  Inteoiati  <  hnioton  <  Iniiton  is  pret.  pi.  of  the  first  ablaut-class,  eo  being 
a  development  of  £7-umlaut  of  /;  cf.  Bright,  MLiV.  II,  80,  and  Biilbring,  §§235 
note,  239,  and  241.  Cf.  also  1.  802  :  geweotan.  The  unumlauted  form  is  found.in 
Beow.  1327,  2544:  J>onne  hniton  feSan.  Cf.  Icel.  (Cleas.-Vig.,  p.  270)  ktiitu  reyr 
saman,  '  the  weapons  clashed  together.' 

5.  gedaildou.  .The  verb  is  best  taken  as  intransitive.  Cos.  {PBB.  XXI,  8)  cites 
Wulfstan,  ed.  Napier,  p.  204,  1.  24  :  iSsr  niefre  leofe  ne  gedSla'S.  Pogatscher(/?;;_f/i 
XXIII,  263)  considers  the  subject  of  gcdteldon  as  une.xpressed  after  sySSan ;  the 
hie  which  precedes  the  verb  he  regards  as  the  object;  cf.  An.  1012  ;  El.  1285. 

5-6.  For  the  apocryphal  legend  of  the  division  of  the  earth  among  the  Apostles, 
see  Introd.,  p.  lix. 

6.  hlyt.  Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  65  :  koX  i/x4pi^oi'  eavrois  rds  x'^P''-^i  ^dWovTes  K\-qpovs. 
Cf.  the  election  of  Matthias,  Acts  I,  24-26 ;  and  see  Ap.  9^  But  the  casting  of 
lots  was  a  custom  familiar  to  the  Anglo-Saxons  through  their  own  traditional 
inheritance.  Tacitus,  Ger mania  10,  gives  an  account  of  the  manner  of  casting 
lots  among  the  Teutonic  tribes  on  the  continent :  '  Auspicia  sortesque,  ut  qui 
maxime,  observant.  Sortium  consuetude  simplex :  virgam,  fruglferae  arbori 
decisam,  in  surculos  amputant,  eosque,  notis  quibusdam  discretos,  super  candidam 
vestem  temere  ac  fortuito  spargunt :  mox,  si  publice  consuletur,  sacerdos  civitatis, 
sin  privatim,  ipse  paterfamiliae,  precatus  deos  coelumque  suspiciens,  ter  singulos 
tollit,  sublatos  secundum  impressam  ante  notam  interpretatur.'  The  twigs  with 
which  the  divination  was  performed  were  called  tanas  in  Anglo-Saxon,  hence 
the  word  tan  came  to  mean  'lot,'  as  it  does  in  An.  1103.  Allusions  to  casting 
of  lots  are  not  frequent  in  Anglo-Saxon  except  in  translations ;  an  interesting 
example,  however,  is  Beow.  3126,  in  the  description  of  the  partition  of  the 
dragon's  treasure.  The  practice  must  have  been  a  common  one,  as  penalties 
were  fixed  for  it,  as  well  as  for  other  heathen  observances,  in  the  Poenitentiale 
Ecgberti  IV,  19  (ed.  Thorpe,  Ancient  Laws  ana  Institutes  of  England,  p.  380) :' 
'  Gif  hwa  hlytas  o'S^e  hwatunga  bega,  o'S^e  his  wasccan  set  ienigum  wylle  hasbbe, 
o'SSe  ast  Snigre  6'Sre  gesceafte  buton  set  Godes  cyricean,  faeste  he  III  gear,  Jiaet 
an  on  hlafe  ond  on  WKtere,  ond  ha  II  Wodnesdagum  ond  Frigedagum  on  hlafe 
ond  on  wKtere,  ond  ha  65re  dagas,  bruce  his  metes  buton  flSsce  anum.'  The  eccle- 
siastical attitude  towards  the  practice  comes  out  also  in  the  adjectives  hellcrcrftum, 
hx&eitgildion.  An.  1102.  Wulfstan,  ed.  Napier,  p.  27,  in  a  catalogue  of  the  wicked 
in  hell,  includes  wiccan,  'wizards,'  and  jvigleras,  'those  who  practice  divination.' 
See  further  Kent,  Teutonic  Antiquities  in  Andreas  and  Elefie,  pp.  39-4°- 

7.  For  similar  breaking  of  close  syntactical  agreement  by  the  hemistich  or  the 
end  of  the  line,  cf.  118,  119-120,  163,  224,  225,  234,  312,  557;  Beo7^\  758,813, 
201 1,  2928,  etc. 


yS  NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 

8.  frome  folctogan.  Cf.  Gti.  874:  from  folctoga  (of  Guthlac) ;  Ex.  14: 
freom  folctoga  (of  Moses)  ;  Beo-w.  1641,  2476:  frome  fyrdhwate. 

g.  rofe  rincas.  So  Gen.  2S6,  1651  ;  Goi.  2049:  rincas  wSron  rofe.  —  rond 
ond  hand.  For  other  examples  of  similar  riming  phrases  in  Anglo-Saxon  verse, 
see  Kluge,  PBB.  IX,  425-426. 

10.  on  herefelda.     So  18*;  El.  126. 

11.  nleotud^vange.  The  only  occurrence  of  the  compound  ;  but  cf.  meotud- 
gescea/t,  meotudsceaft,  'fate,  decree  of  fate.' 

12-13.  The  allusion,  not  contained  in  the  Greek  or  the  Legend,  is  evidently  a 
scholium  of  the  poet's. 

15.  lit  on  J7tet  igland.  Cf.  1.  28.  On  these  two  passages  part  of  my  note  in 
Modern  Philology  II,  403,  may  be  quoted :  '  There  is  no  equivalent  for  igland  or 
ealand  in  the  Greek  or  the  Anglo-Saxon  prose  versions  of  the  legend.  The  cor- 
responding passages  are  :  u%  ttjv  xcipav  rdv  a,vdp<i}iro<pd'yijiv,  Bonnet,  p.  65,  and  iv 
TTi  Tr6\ei  aiirGiv,  Bonnet,  p.  66 ;  se  eadiga  Matheus  gehleat  t5  Marmadonia  I'Sre 
ceastre,  Bright,  Reader,  p.  113;  ieghwylc  man  ['e  on  j^aere  ceastre  com  slheodisc, 
Bright,  p.  1 13.  A  parallel  situation  is  found  in  the  Pha-nix\  the  land  in  which  the 
Phoenix  dwells  is  twice  referred  to  as  an  island,  Snlic  is  fust  iglond,  Ph.  9,  on 
fidm  ealonde,  Ph.  287,  the  second  phrase  being  an  elaboration  of  eadig  e&ellond, 
Ph.  279.     The  corresponding  passages  in  Lactantius,  De  ave  Phoenice,  are  as 

follows : 

Est  locus  in  primo  felix  oriente  remotus, 

Qua  patet  jeterni  maxima  porta  poli ; 

II.  I,  2. 
Ast  ubi  primaeva  coepit  florere  iuventa 
Evolat  ad  patrias  iam  reditura  demos. 

11.  115,  116. 

The  word  in  the  above  passages  is  evidently  not  to  be  understood  in  the  specific 
sense  of  "island,"  but  rather  in  the  literal  sense  of  "water-land,"  "land  that  is 
reached  by  water."  To  the  insular  Anglo-Saxon  all  foreign  lands  must  have  been 
"water-lands";  perhaps  in  this  poetical  sense  the  word  also  carried  with  it  the 
connotation  of  remoteness;  in  both  the  Phanix  and  the  Andreas  it  is  used  for 
the  Orient.     Cf.  also  Sal.  and  Sat.,  i  ff. : 

Hwaet !     Ic  iglanda       eallra  hsebbe 
boca  onbyrged. 

The  elaboration  of  this  passage  makes  Iglanda  refer  to  Lybia,  Greece,  and  India, 
none  of  them  islands.' 

18.  gesoeode.  That  the  MS.  reading,  and  not  gesceod  (z.s.  Grimm  and  Kemble 
propose),  is  right,  is  determined  by  the  scansion  of  the  half-line.  Grimm  (in  his 
notes)  would  derive  gesceod  irom  gesceadaft,  '  sejungere  '  ('  from  joy '  or  '  happiness ' 
to  be  supplied  mentally).  Kemble,  deriving  the  form  from  the  same  verb,  trans- 
lates '  oft  had  the  hand  of  the  slaughterer  .  .  .  hardly  decided  for  him.'  Paul 
{PBB.  VI,  94),  Sievers  {ibid.  X,  506),  and  the  dictionaries  (cf.  Spr.  I,  448,  II,  406  ; 
B-T.  436),  all  apparently  going  back  to  Dietrich  {FJaupCs  Zs.  X,  320),  suppose 
a  contract  verb  sceon,  sceode,  'happen,'  'befall'  {Spr.  I,  448  'accidere,'  '  contin- 
gere,'  '  impetrire ').     Grein,  Dicht.,  translates  accordingly  'grimm  ereilte  sie  oft 


NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 


79 


die  Hand  der  Morder.'  Grein,  according  to  Wiilker,  tal<es  the  form  as  optative, 
and  Wiilker  adds,  -da  ein  futuraler  begriff  in  bezieiiung  auf  den  vorhergehenden 
satz  darin  liegt,  stimme  ich  Grein  bei ' ;  Wiilker  does  not  state  from  what  verb 
he  derives  the  form.  But  Grein  neither  in  the  Sprachschatz  nor  in  his  transla- 
tion gives  any  indication  that  he  takes  the  form  as  optative,  and  the  syntax  of 
the  passage  requires  only  the  pret.  ind.,  as  e.g.  1.  1420''.  Trautmann  (quoted 
by  Simons,  p.  60)  evades  the  grammatical  difficulty  by  emending  the  text,  reading 
hand gesceodiDi  —  '  hande  schadeten.' 

The  form  gesceode,  in  the  sense  demanded  by  the  context,  has,  however,  been 
satisfactorily  accounted  for  by  Professor  Bright  [ML A'.  XVII,  426)  in  a  discus- 
sion of  the  reduplicating  -verb gesceadan,  'separate,'  'decide,'  'deal  oni'Ex.  504- 
506.  By  the  side  of  the  regular  redup.  pret.  of  this  verb  is  found  a  weak  pret. 
gesceode,  Dan.  620,'  sceode,  Ex.  5S6 ;  and  a  weak  past  part,  gesceod,  Ex.  506.  A 
parallel  development  is  to  be  observed  in  the  verb  gesce&&an,  gescod,  -sceod  (with 
weak  pret.  -sce&ede,  cf.  Gram.,  §  392,  4,  note  6) ;  gesceode.  An.  18,  is  a  new  weak 
preterit  formed  on  the  old  strong  preterit.  The  verb  has  thus  three  preterit 
forms,  gescod  {-sceod),  gesce&ede,  and  gesceode.  The  hypothetical  sceon  is  therefore 
to  be  set  aside  and  all  the  examples  referred  to  sceadan  or  sce&&att. 

20.  feoudcs.  Cf.  1294;  Chr.  1395:  fScnun  feonde ;  Beo-iv.  2128:  feondes 
fa;6'(mum) ;  Gen.  453 :  Jiurh  feondes  craeft ;  ibid.  492  :  l^urh  deofies  crasft,  etc. 
Note  also  El.  207  :  se  ealda  feond;    Gospel  of  jVicodemtts  (Bright's  Reader,  p.  131, 

I.  24):  ham  ealdan  deofle ;  and  for  the  modem  uses,  see  N'ED.  s.v.  fend  and 
enemy,  and  Bradley's  remarks,  Making  of  English,  pp.  197-198. 

23-25.   For  this  tradition  of  cannibalism  see  Introd.,  p.  Ixvi.    Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  65, 

II.  7—8:  ol  bk  6.vdpuiroL  T^s  7r6Xec<;s  eKelvrjs  ovre  dprov  rjadiov  ovTe  olvov  einvov,  dXX' 
Tjcrav  {(rdiovres  ffdpKcts  avdpdnruyv  kcu  irivovres  avTuv  rb  of/ia.  Six  of  the  ten  MSS. 
read  \i5wp,  however,  instead  of  olvov.  Legend,  p.  113,  11.  6-8:  hlaf  ne  Ston,  ne 
waeter  ne  druncon,  ac  Ston  manna  Hchaman  and  heora  blod  druncon. 

Aside  from  the  Andreas,  no  other  allusions  to  the  practice  of  cannibalism  are 
made  in  the  extant  literature  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  period,  and  there  is  no  reason 
to  suppose  that  any  native  traditions  concerning  cannibalism  were  current  among 
the  Anglo-Saxons.  A  few  early  allusions  in  Continental  literature  to  a  belief  in 
the  existence  of  cannibalism  among  the  Finns  and  other  peoples  of  northeastern 
Europe  are  mentioned  by  IMiilienhoff,  Deutsche  Altertumskunde  II,  49,  354;  III, 
17-18.  See  also  Andree,  Die  Anthropophagie,  pp.  6-15.  The  nearest  approach 
to  cannibalism  in  Anglo-Saxon  literature  is  in  the  story  of  Grendel  and  his  dam  in 
the  Beownlf.  These  creatures  devour  the  bodies  of  men  and  drink  their  blood. 
They  are,  however,  only  half  human,  being  possessed  of  more  than  human 
strength  and  distinguished  by  monstrous  characteristics  both  of  figure  and  of 
mind.  The  story  of  Grendel  has  been  explained  as  a  survival  of  early  stories  of 
cannibalism,  dating  back  perhaps  to  the  period  of  the  cave-dwellers ;  see  Brooke, 
History  of  Early  English  Literature  I,  11 8- 11 9,  and  English  Literature  from  the 
Beginning,  p.  66;  for  the  theory  that  cannibalism  was  practised  by  the  cave- 
dwellers,  see  Andree,  ibid.,  pp.  1-6.  Perhaps  further  connection  between  the 
race  of  the  giants  and  cannibalism  may  be  seen  in  the  word  eoten,  '  giant,'  Icel. 
J2tu?in,  which  has  been  explained  as  derived  from   the  root  which  appears  in 


So  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

etait,  'eat,'  'devour.'  See  Miillenhoff,  II,  354;  Grimm,  Tent.  Myth.  II,  518-520, 
IV,  1437;  Golther,  Hafidbiich  d.  German.  Myth.,  p.  161.  It  is  possible  that  an 
Anglo-Saxon  might  have  drawn  a  parallel  between  the  story  of  Beowulf's  fight 
with  the  man-eating  Grendel  and  St.  Andrew's  conflict  with  the  man-eating 
Mermedonians. 

23.  ah.  Normally  ac,  but  also  ah  (eight  times)  and  ach  (once)  in  Andreas; 
see  Glossary  for  citations,  and  Gram.,  §  210,  3. 

24.  feorrancuinenra.  So  also  in  Gen.  iBi^d^,  feorrenciimenra,  appositive  to 
ell&eodigra,  1835^;  and  Beow.  t,6i,  feorranctimene,  appositive  to  Geata  leode, 
362'^;  cf.  also  Beow.  1819.  Kluge's  comment  [PBB.  IX,  188)  on  the  passage  in 
Beozvidf,  to  the  effect  th3.t  /eorrancnfnefi  as  substantive  compound  =  'stranger' 
is  better  stylistically  than  feorran  ctimen,  applies  with  equal  force  to  the  other 
two  passages. 

25b.  Cf.  Bemv.  178  :  Swylc  w£es  heaw  hyra  (in  a  passage  referring  to  the  Danes 
as  heathen);  Beow.  1246:  wses  ))eaw  hyra  (of  the  followers  of  Beowulf).  Note 
also  1.  I77^  with  which  cf.  Gu.  390:  swa  biS  geoguSe  J^eaw ;  Gii.  538:  swa  biS 
feonda  J^eaw  ;    Whale  31  :  swa  biS  scinna  J^eaw,  deofla  wise.     Cf.  177-179. 

28.  ealand.  See  15,  note.  —  sohte.  The  verb  is  singular,  as  is  usual  after 
l>dra  J>e  preceded  by  ^nig,  (bIc,  Sgh'cvylc,  7nanig,  etc.  See  380,  1153;  and  cf. 
Beow.  1460-1461  :  nsefre  hit  ast  hilde  ne  swac  manna  Engum  J'ara  ^e  hit  mid 
mundum  bewand ;  Beozv.  1405-1407  :  magohegna  bser  J'one  selestan  sawolleasne 
Jiara  \>e.  mid  Hro'iSgare  ham  eahtode.  Numerous  other  instances  are  cited,  Wiilfing, 
I,  416-419,  and  by  Grimm,  p.  94.  Grimm  points  out  that  a  similar  idiom  is  found 
in  Old  Saxon.  A  plural  verb  is  also  occasionally  used  after  hdra  he,  e.g.  El. 
967-970  :  Da  wses  .  .  .  lieded  mjere  morgenspel  manigum  on  andan  l^ara  he  dryhtnes 
ie  dyrnan  woldon  ;  El.  1 286-1 287  :  anra  gehwylc  hara  \>&  gewurdon  on  widan  feore. 

31^.  So  El.  119.  —  31''.  heafodgiminas.  Sievers  {PBB.  I,  503)  supposes  a 
plural  form  -gimme,  as  approximate  imitation  of  the  Latin  plural,  the  form  -gimme 
being  supported  by  the  rime  with  -grimme.  Cosijn,  in  emending  to  the  usual 
plural  form,  adduces  Gii.  1276^:  heafdes  gimmas,  and  Sievers,  in  a  remark 
appended  to  Cosijn's  note,  accepts  the  emendation,  explaining  -gimme  as  an 
unconscious  echo  of  -gri?>ij)ie.  For  the  metaphor  cf.  Chr.  1330;  Ex.  Gn.  44; 
Ph.  301  ff. ;  and  see  50,  note. 

32.  agetton.  Gm.  and  K.,  reading  aguton,  derive  the  form  from  dgeotan.,  '  to 
pour  out ' ;  K.  translates  '  the  eye-sight  .  .  .  the  gem  of  the  head  gallows-minded 
poured  out  with  javelin  points.'  Gn.,  Spr.  I,  22,  reads  dgeton,  and  derives  the 
form  from  dgitan,  '  destruere,  exstinguere,  subvertere  ' :  Dicht.,  '  grausam  zer- 
storten  mit  der  Geere  Spitzen.'  As  weak  verb,  however,  the  word  is  found  in 
this  phrase  in  Brtm.  18:  garum  ageted  (variant,  forgrunden) ;  and  cf.  An.  1143; 
Fates  of  Men  16:  sumne  sceal  gar  agetan,  sumne  gu'N  abreotan.  Simons,  p.  5, 
also  reads  aget[t]on.  The  quantity  of  the  radical  vowel  of  dgi'tan  is  discussed 
by  Sievers,  PBB.  X,  313. 

33-34.  Cf.  Chr.  1437-8:  Swylce  hi  me  geblendon  bittre  tosomne  unswetne 
drync,  —  a  paraphrase  of  Matt.  XXVII,  34. 

34.  dryas.  The  word  is  of  Celtic  origin.  Holder,  Alt-Celt.  Sprachschatz, 
col.  1321,  derives  it  from  the  intensive  prefix  dm,  +  wid-s,  from  the  root  meaning 


NOTES   ON   ANDREAS  8l 

'  know.'  The  whole  compound  would  mean  therefore  primarily  '  the  very  wise,' 
by  extension  'priests.'  The  word  was  probably  acquired  by  the  Anglo-Saxons 
from  the  Irish  missionaries  in  Northumbria,  and,  as  the  designation  of  the  priests 
of  a  non-Christian  religion,  it  was  given  an  evil  signification.  As  we  should  expect, 
the  word  and  its  compound  appear  in  Anglo-Saxon  only  in  the  later  Christian 
literature.  Cf.  6,  note  ;  765-766,  note  ;  and  see  A'ED.  s.v.  druid. 
35-39.  Cf.  the  similar  situation  in  Dan.  569-574 : 

ond  'See  wineleasne       on  wraec  sendetS 
ond  J^onne  onhweorfcS       heortan  Hne, 
J>aet  )>u  ne  gemyndgast       jefter  mandreame 
ne  gewittes  wast       butan  wildeora  Jieaw, 
ac  ^u  lifgende       lange  )nage 
heorta  hlypum       geond  holt  wunast. 

36.  heortan  on  hreSre.  Reading  heorta )i  hre&^-e  {^/ire&re  inst.  sg.),  Grein, 
Dicht.,  translates  '  der  das  Bewusstsein  der  Manner  wandte  im  Busen,  die  inner- 
sten  Gedanken.'  Heortan  is  plainly  appositive  to  inge}7anc  and  gewit,  and  the 
idiom  requires  a  preposition  to  govern  hre'dre ;  cf.  An.  69'',  S92-3  ;  Chr.  640-641  : 
bam  jje  deorc  gewit  haefdon  on  hreKe,  heortan  stienne.  In  1.  36^  on  has  evidently 
fallen  out  through  its  similarity  in  sound  to  the  final  syllable  of  heortan.  — 
Perhaps  36''  should  be  placed  within  parentheses  ;  see  764 '\  note. 

38.  heorogrtedige.  Appositive  to  hie,  37*,  though  the  epithet  seems  more 
appropriate  to  the  Mermedonians  than  to  their  victims. 

39.  Cf.  El.  612;  698:  meSe  and  meteleas.  The  unumlauted  form  -leaste 
instead  of  -lieste,  here  and  in  1157,  is  analogical  to  adj.  forms  in  -leas;  cf.  also 
neadcofan,  1309. 

40-413.  Cf.  El.  273''-274:  cwomon  in  J^a  ceastre  corSra  mEste;  El.  1203*'- 
1204*;  to  l^Sre  halgan  byrig,  cuman  in  >!  ceastre.  With  40 '^  cf.  287'^,  973  ^  and 
227^,  of  Heaven;   Chr.  1007,  on  }>one  jnieran  beorg,  of  the  New  Jerusalem. 

42.  Mermedonia.  For  the  forms  of  this  name  and  its  identification,  see 
Introd.  p.  Ixvi.  —  hlo<5.     See  992,  note. 

43.  fordenera  gedraeg.  The  word  ^^rt'r^r^,  ^^(/r^^^,  usually  'tumult,  outcry,' 
is  also  used  of  the  ocean,  ofer  deop  gedreag.  Rid.  VII,  10,  apparently  in  the  sense 
of  'wide  extent,'  and,  as  here,  is  used  in  phrases  indicating  large  numbers;  cf. 
Beow.-jifS:  secan  deofla  gedraeg ;  Wife^s  Complahit,  i,^:  sinsorgna  gedreag.  For 
a  third  use  of  the  word,  see  1555,  note. —  The  umlauted  forms  of  the  participle 
of  don,  found  only  in  Chr.  1207,  1266,  and  the  present  passage,  are,  according  to 
Sievers  (FBB.  IX,  299),  undoubted  survivals  from  an  original  Northumbrian  text. 

45a.  Cf.  Beow.  1626:  eodon  him  />rf  togeanes,  of  Beowulf  after  his  return  from 
the  fight  with  Grendel's  mother. 

46b.   Perhaps  to  be  enclosed  within  parentheses  ;  see  764^',  note. 

49.  f eondes  crfefte.  So  11 96,  1294.  Cf.  Gen.  492:  deofles  irir/t;  and,  for 
examples  of  both  phrases,  see  B.-T,  p.  168.  The  word  'craft  '  has  not  in  Anglo- 
Saxon  specifically  evil  meaning  (cf.  327,  484,  etc.). 

50.  hellfiise.  Chr.  11 23  is  the  only  other  occurrence  of  this  word.  —  segl. 
For  other  forms  of  the  word,  see  89'";   1246-^;  1456^     The  word  appears  also,  as 


82  NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 

simplex  and  in  compounds,  in  the  form  sigel  (Sievers,  PBB.  X,  507).  Note  the 
proper  name  Sigehvaras  =  Ethiopians,  AJ>.  64,  £x.  69,  etc.  For  the  figure  of  the 
eye  as  the  sun  of  the  head,  cf.  Skdldskaparmal,  Cap.  69,  SnE.  I,  538-539,  where 
the  poetic  names  of  the  eyes  are  given  as  the  sun  or  moon,  shields,  glass,  gems, 
or  jewels,  of  the  brows  or  eyelashes.     See  31,  note. 

51.  Sbreoton.  The  form  of  the  verb  is  probably  due  to  confusion  with  the 
verbs  of  the  reduplicating  class ;  see  Gram.,  §  384,  2,  and  Bright,  1\ILN.  II,  80. 
See  640,  note.  —  mid  billes  ecge.  Cf.  Beoio.  24S5  :  billes  ecgum  ;  ibid.  2508 : 
billes  ecg. 

51-53.  According  to  the  Ilpd^eis  (Bonnet,  p.  66,  11.  9-14)  Andrew  drinks  the 
magic  brew  which  the  Mermedonians  prepare  for  him,  but  his  reason  is  not 
affected  by  it  and  he  therefore  refuses  to  eat  the  hay  which  they  place  beside 
him,  but  continues  praising  God  as  before.  The  version  of  this  incident  in  the 
Legend,  p.  113,  11.  15-18,  is  confused:  ond  hie  him  sealdon  attor  drincan,  and 
hine  sendon  on  carcerne,  and  hie  hine  heton  )«t  attor  etan,  and  he  hit  etan  nolde  ; 
for  \>on  his  heorte  nass  tolesed,  ne  his  mod  onwended. 

52.  Cf.  Jul.  239 :  herede  aet  heorten  heofonrices  god.  Professor  Hart  calls 
attention  to  Cirdmoii's  Hymn  i :   Nil  scylun  hergan  hefaenrlcjes  uard. 

54.  bnmod.  Cf.  1638,  and  anried,  232,  983.  The  two  words  are  formed 
(Sievers,  Zache7'''s  Zs.  XXI,  362)  in  the  same  manner  as  oferinod,  and  mean, 
primarily,  '  having  the  attention  turned  in  a  certain  direction  or  against  something  ' ; 
then  in  a  good  sense,  '  eager,  resolute,  bold,'  or  with  more  emphatic  value,  'angry, 
enraged'  (cf.  Dan.  iii„  anmod;  Beoiv.  1576,  anried,  both  appositive  to  yrre). 
Note  also  anmedla,  oninedla,  'pride,'  Dan.  748;  Chr.  814,  etc.,  where  the  word 
has  developed  in  a  pejorative  direction.  Otimod,  anmod  is  to  be  distinguished 
from  dnmod;  cf.  1.  1565,  note.    Cf.  Gii.  717  ;  eadig  ond  onmod. 

55  a.  Cf.  806''. 

56.  halgan  stefne.  The  construction  weak  adj.  +  noun,  in  the  instrumental 
case,  is  found  frequently  throughout  Anglo-Saxon  verse  in  certain  traditional  set 
phrases  :  the  form  halgan  stefne  occurs  five  times  in  An.,  and  cf.  beorhtan, 
geoniran,  hliidan,  niwan  stefne  ;  sargan  reorde ;  Iiatan  heolfre  (2),  heaSo- 
^vaelme;  blacan  lige;  Jjriddan  si9e ;  see  Glossary  for  citations.  In  similar 
phrases  the  strong  form  of  the  adj.  is  found  in  brante  oeole ;  corcTre  mycle  (2) ; 
hea  liornscipe ;  o'Ore  siSe  (4) ;  mine  gefrege.  In  other  than  instrumental 
phrases  the  weak  inflection  of  the  adj.,  in  constructions  of  adj.  +  noun,  is  found 
as  follows:  gen.  sg.,  ecan  dryhtnes,  721  ;  dat.  sg.,  bestemdon,  487;  halgan 
heape,  Ap.  9;  wintercealdan  niht,  1265;  and  in  the  prepositional  phrases,  to 
\vldan  feore  (3  times) ;  to  Avidan  aldre  (2  times) ;  to  ftegeran  gefean,  1693, 
and  cf.  598;  under  niflan  na-s,  1305;  on  s^va  nioAvan  gefean,  1670.  See 
Lichtenfeld,  Hanpfs  Zs.  XVI  (IV),  327  ff.,  for  arguments  (not  altogether  valid) 
as  to  chronology  drawn  from  the  use  of  these  constructions. 

57-58.  Cf.  Jul.  233  :  to  carcerne.  Hyre  waes  Cristes  lof  in  ferj'locan  fa^ste 
biwunden.    Note  also /^w.  1671. 

59.  Cf.  Chr.  992  :  wepa'5  wanende  wergum  stefnum. 

61*^.  Cf.  Metr.  I,  84 :  geomran  stemne. 

62=^.   So  1282  ;  El.  814;  Ph.  465.—  62''.   Cf.  Introd.  p.  xlix. 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  '   **4=-L:i-C:^3 

63.  hu.  Introducing  exclamatory  rhetorical  questions,  hn  is  not  infrequently 
found,  e.g.  Wand.  95  :  hu  seo  prag  gewat ;  Chr.  362  :  hu  we  sind  geswencte  ]>urh 
ure  sylfra  gewill,  etc.  It  occurs  also  as  simple  interjection,  equivalent  to  liwat,  in 
Ap.  91  ;  Chr.  1459  :  Hu  )>3er  wees  unefen  racu  unc  gemiene  ! ;  and,  in  conjunction 
with  eala,  Hoi.  75:  Eala  Gabrihel  hu  )'u  eart  gleaw  and  scearp.  See  also  IIoL  84, 
100,  104  ;  Chr.  216,  278,  etc.  In  these  instances  ealdz-XidL.  hn  are  to  be  takpn  together 
as  constituting  the  interjectioual  phrase,  similar  to  the  phrase  eald  huuet,  Chr.  416  ; 
Sat.  316;  Metr.  IV,  25,  iMetr.  VIII,  55.  For  the  use  of  htl  as  interjection  in  the 
prosC;  see  Wiilfing,  II,  694. 

64.  seovvaS.  Gm.,  noting  Beow.  406,  translates  'consuunt.'  He  remarks, 
however,  that  seo'SaS  =  '  coquunt '  might  possibly  apply  to  the  welding  of 
fetters.  K.  follows  Gm.'s  first  reading;  Gn.  Spr.  II,  437,  B.,  and  W.  A'achtrdge, 
p.  20S,  his  second  intei-pretation.  But  no  justification  for  the  meaning 
j^^^(?«  =  ' seethe,  boil' =  ' weld,  fashion,  devise,'  as  accepted  by  Gn.,  W., 
and  B.,  can  be  found  from  the  other  metaphorical  uses  of  the  word  in  Anglo- 
Saxon.  In  Beow.  190  and  1993  the  word  is  used  transitively  with  mielceare, 
modceare,  respectively,  as  objects,  and  it  means  'to  be  troubled  about,  to  brood 
over.'  The  participle  soden  appears  in  Gti.  1046,  1236  (with  inst.  sorgwylmuitt), 
1123  (with  inst.  sdr^vylmuni),  and  in  An.  1239  (with  inst.  sarbenmini);  in  all 
these  passages  it  means  '  troubled,  afflicted.'  On  the  other  hand,  the  depen- 
dence of  64-^  upon  Bema.  406^,  searonet  seorved,  is  evident ;  in  both  passages 
the  word  means  'weave,  knit.'  For  a  similar  figure,  cf.  672'',  ^v^oht  Avebbade. 
The  MS.  reading  seoSaS  ( =  sco/>a&)  might  easily  arise  from  the  misreading 
of  w  for/  ;  a  similar  scribal  error  probably  explains  the  MS.  form  ^vfes  for  \>ses 
in  145''.  Cf.  Icel.  skyrta  hamri  s^d',  'a  shirt  sewed  with  the  hammer,'  'hammer- 
knit  '  (Cleas.-Vig.,  p.  518). 

65-66.  Cf.  £/.  267-268  :  Jjeodnes  willan,  geom  on  mode. 

65.  Surh  geohSa.  'Now  with  sorrow.'  Cosijn  (followed  by  Simons,  p.  49) 
would  read  geah&,  '  foolishness,  mockery  '  (anticipating  duiuban,  67''),  a  plausi- 
ble Ijut  not  a  necessary  change. 

67.  See  38^-39. 

70.  sie.  Here  monosyllabic  (Siev.,  FEB.  X,  478),  and  so  regularly  in  Andreas, 
except  417^. 

70-71.  Cf.  El.  1'Ti-T]\  •■  gif  j'Tn  willa  sle,  wealdend  engla,  bast,  etc. ;  789,  gif  hit 
sie  willa  Hn. 

72.  s^veordum  as-webban.  So  Ap.  69'';  Beow.  567,  679.  —  Cf.  Beo%u.  1825: 
ic  beo  gearo  sona.  , 

74.  eSelleasum.    The  pronominal  object  is  implied  in  the  adjective. 

76-78.  Concerning  the  restoration  of  Matthew's  sight,  see  91,  note. 

78.  aefter  billhete.  This  is  the  only  recorded  occurrence  of  billhete,  defined 
by  Grein,  Spr.  I,  117,  'odium  ope  ensium  manifestatum ';  by  B.-T.,  'the  hate  of 
swords.*  Cf.  ecghete,  ciimbolhete,  with  meaning  similar  to  that  of  billhete.  In  the 
present  passage  the  word  may  have  allusion  to  the  way  Matthew's  .eyes  were  put 
out ;  or  it  may  have  been  coined  merely  for  the  rime  (Bright). 

81.  to  amim  J7e.    Cf.  Ps.  LXXXVI,  6  :  on  anum  |>e. 

82.  Qi.  Jul.  221  :  ic  to  Dryhtne  min  mod  staj'elige. 


84  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

85.  scyldhetum.  The  only  occurrence  of  this  as  well  as  the  parallel  com- 
pound, nidhetuni,  834.  The  value  of  hete  in  compounds  is  othenvise  that  of  an 
abstract  noun,  'hate.'  Gm.,  p.  98,  suggests,  and  Simons,  p.  119,  would  read  here, 
-hatum,  in  order  to  make  the  form  agree  with  the  form  scyldhata,  1047,  1147  ; 
but  the  compound  nT&heUini  speaks  decisively  against  the  change.    See  1047,  note. 

86.  Averigum  ^vrohtsmiSuni.  Cf.  grj^nsmiiS,  917,  larsmitV,  1220.  The  exist- 
ence of  such  compounds  in  Anglo-Saxon,  in  which,  however,  the  second  element 
has  become  generalized  in  meaning,  is  an  indication  of  the  dignified  position  of 
the  smith  in  early  Teutonic  society.  Compare  also  the  conception  of  Weland  as 
smith,  which  was  not  unknown  to  the  Anglo-Saxons,  as  we  learn  from  Beow.  455, 
Deor  I,  and  IVald.  2.  Similar  compounds  in  other  Teutonic  languages  are  men- 
tioned by  Kluge,  PBB.  X,  440. 

86^-87.  Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  67  :  koX  /xt]  irapaduiffei^  fxe  t<2  davdnfi  rip  TriKpf  tovtijJ. 
Legend,  p.  114:  ne  me  ne  sele  on  I'one  bitterestan  dea^. 

88.  •wuldres  tacen.  Grein,  Spr.  II,  520,  and  Simons,  p.  134,  would  supply 
sancia  crux,  '  the  sign  of  the  cross,'  as  completing  the  meaning,  making  wiildres 
tdcen  thus  equivalent  to  the  sigores  tdcen  of  El.  88  and  elsewhere.  But  cf.  Ph.  96  : 
torht  tdcen  Codes,  appositive  to  Codes  condelle,  1.  91;  Gn.  1266:  o'S)>2et  eastan 
cwom  ofer  deop  gelad  dasgredw5ma,  wedertacen  wearm.  Note  also  Bonnet,  p.  67  : 
TaOra  S^  irpo(TevxofJ-ivov  toO  MarOeia  iv  rrj  <pv\aKri  e\a/j,\pev  <pG>s,  Koi  i^^Xdev  ^k  toD 
(fxiiTos  (pcovT)  X^yovaa,  and  Legend,  p.  114,  1.  9:  mycel  leoht  ond  beorht  onleohte 
J>£et  carcern,  and  Drihtnes  stefn  vvses  geworden  to  him  on  l^Em  leohte. 

89.  hadre.  One  expects  hddor  as  in  1456.  But  we  may  take  hadre  (with 
Bamouw,  p.  146)  as  weak  nom. ;  the  construction  may  cari-y  with  it  a  specific  or 
demonstrative  value  (cf.  note  on  tdcen,  1.  88),  and  it  is  so  translated  by  Grein  Dicht., 
Root,  and  Hall :  '  like  the  bright  sun.'  Kemble,  however,  makes  it  indefinite, '  like 
a  serene  star.'  One  might  almost  suppose  that  hadre,  the  adverbial  form,  is  a 
recollection  of  the  model  for  this  passage  : 

'  "Sa  cwom  leohta  mast 
halig  of  heofonum       hadre  scinan.' 

Gti.  1256-1257. 

—  segl.  This  spelling  is  supported  by  50,  saegl  by  1456.  No  other  example  of  f 
for  (V  occurs  in  the  MS. ;  but  iz  for  e  occurs  582,  -waege;  495,  staifnan. 

91,  helpe  gefremede.  Nothing  is  said  here  to  show  that  Matthew's  sight 
(cf.  51,  77)  is  restored  to  him;  both  the  Greek  and  the  Legend,  however,  are 
_  specific :  Bonnet,  p.  67,  Tvapd.ax'iv  ovv  /jlol  Ktjpie  rb  (pQs  tQv  6(p6a\nQv  p.ov,  and  later, 
/cat  evBiiiis  dv^^Xei/'ev ;  Legend,  p.  114,  1.  4 :  forgife  mlnra  eagna  leoht;  and  1.  12: 
Matheus  }>a  iSciende  he  geseah  Drihten  Crist.  In  the  passage  corresponding  to 
143  ff.,  when  the  Mermedonians  come  to  Matthew  in  prison,  the  Greek  and  the 
Legend  state  that  he  closed  his  eyes  in  order  that  they  might  not  perceive  that 
his  sight  had  been  restored.  Heinzel,  "Ueber  den  Stil  der  altgerm.  Poesie," 
Quellen  und  Forsch.  X,  43,  notes  this  passage  as  characteristic  of  Cynewulf's 
proneness  to  omit  even  necessary  steps  in  the  progress  of  a  narrative. 

92-93.  Similar  phrasing  occurs  in  11.  1429-1430;  and  ci.  Jul.  282-283:  Hyre 
stefn  oncwceh"  wHtig  of  wolcnum,  word  hleo'Srade. 


NOTES   ON   ANDREAS  85 

94.  niagupegne.  Of  the  14  occurrences  of  this  compound  in  Anglo-Saxon 
verse,  6  are  found  in  Becni'ulf,  5  in  Andreas,  and  the  remaining  three  as  fol- 
lows: Wand.  62,  Men.  82,  Jitd.  236.  Of  the  five  occurrences  in  Andreas  4 
refer,  as  in  the  present  passage,  to  the  servants  of  the  Lord ;  in  the  remaining 
passage,  1140,  the  epithet,  with  epic  impartiality,  is  used  of  the  heathen  Merme- 
donians. 

95.  under  heaniilocan.    So  El.  695. 

99.  ic  J7e  mid  \vunige.  Cf.  loi,  945,  1218,  and  Clir.  478,  488,  for  similar 
phrasing. 

100.  Th.  and  K.  place  of  ]?yssuin  in  the  first  half-line;  but  cf.  112. — leo'Su- 
benduni.     The  compound  occurs  five  times  in  ,-///.,  but  elsewhere  only  Gen.  382. 

102.  neorxna\vang.  An  ingenious  explanation  of  this  difficult  word  is  that 
offered  by  Bradley,  Academy  XXXVI,  254  (Oct.  19,  1889).  He  regards  it  as 
a  contraction  of  a  fuller  form,  *neorolisna  n'ang,  the  Gothic  equivalent  of  which 
would  be  *nawt-ro/isne-waggs,  '  the  field  of  the  palaces  of  the  dead.'  With  the 
first  element,  na^vi-,  he  compares  Anglo-Saxon  neo-,  as  in  neobed,  neosi&,  etc.,  and 
with  the  general  conception,  wcelheal,  '  Valhalla.'  A  more  probable  etymology  is 
that  of  Reinius,  Anglia  XIX,  554-556,  who  derives  the  first  element  from  a  hypo- 
thetical Anglo-Saxon  form  *ne  werksan,  '  not  working,  not  suffering  ' ;  the  whole 
compound  would  thus  mean  '  the  plain  or  field  of  the  idle.' 

104*.  Cf.  Doomsday  24:  ne  noht  hyhtllc  ham;  Sat.  138:  ne  mot  ic  hihtlTcran 
hames  brucan.  In  both  passages,  as  in  Andreas,  the  allusion  is  to  the  heavenly 
home.  —  104^'.   Cf.   Chr.  284,  11 89:  halgum  meahtum. 

105.  Cf.  161 1  ;  Chr.  1673:  ond  wuldres  leoht  torht  ontyned;  Sat.  556:  lis  is 
wuldres  leoht  torht  ontyned;  Sat.  593-594:  J'Sr  is  wuldres  bled  torht  ontyned; 
Gil.  457-458:  wses  me  swegles  leoht  torht  ontyned.  Gn.  and  W.  have  only  a 
comma  after  ontyned. 

106.  to  \vidan  feore.  Also  810,  1452;  El.  211,  1321  ;  Beow.  933.  Cf.  t5 
widan  aldre,  938,  1721  ;  wTdan  feorh,  1383,  also  El.  760,  800,  Beoio.  2014. 

107.  ]?rah.  Final  g  appears  as  h,  in  Andreas,  in  burh,  adreah,  gelah, 
astah,  and  the  present  instance ;  see  Gram.,  §  214,  i,  and  cf.  769'',  note. 

109.  syiinige.  I  quote  from  my  note.  Mod.  Phil.  II,  404  :  '  Reading  synne 
with  the  MS.  and  editors,  Grein,  Spr.  II,  518,  glosses  the  word  as  inst.  sg.(?)  of 
syn,  "evil,"  "  wickedness  ";  Simons,  p.  124,  glosses  the  form  as  a  reflexive  pronoun, 
but  he  gives  no  further  clue  as  to  his  interpretation  of  the  passage.  The  trans- 
lations treat  the  wOrd  as  an  adverb.  But  the  improbable  inst.  sg.  synne  is  clearly 
to  be  corrected  to  the  adjective  form  synnge  [or  synm'ge'\,  appositive  to  war- 
logan,  108*,  to  record  with  the  usual  phrasing  as  found  in  565*^,  710*,  964'';  cf. 
also  92^=".  The  MS.  has  regularly  the  unsyncopated  forms  in  this  word;  the 
form  synne  perhaps  looks  back  to  a  time  when  the  syncopated  forms  were  still 
written.' 

III''.  So  567;   Chr.  1 197. 

113.  taelmet.    The  only  occurrence  of  the  word  ;  /<r/w^rtr^  occurs  once,  6"«.  849. 

114.  seofon  ond  t^^entig.  The  chronology  is  consistent  and  follows  the 
sources;  cf.  Legend,  p.  114,  1.  18:  ac  onbid  her  seofon  and  twentig  nihta.  The 
Mermedonians  hold  a  meeting  every  thirty  days  (1.  157)  and  at  the  end  of  thirty 


86  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

days  Matthew  is  to  be  put  to  death  ;   after  twenty-seven  days,  however  (fore  J^reo 
niht,  1S5),  Andrew  is  to  set  out  to  rescue  him  from  this  fate.     Cf.  also  14S,  930. 

115.  iiihtgerinies.  The  term  commonly  used  by  the  Anglo-Saxons  in  reckon- 
ing a  period  of  time  was  fii'/ii,  not  dir^;  for  examples  in  Andreas,  see  Glos- 
sary, and  cf.  114,  note.  Tacitus  {Germania  11)  mentions  this  custom  among  the 
Germans  of  the  Continent :  '  Nee  dierum  numerum,  ut  nos,  sed  noctium  compu- 
tant';  and  he  adds:  'Sic  constituunt,  sic  condicunt :  nox  ducere  diem  videtur.' 
Caesar  (^De  Bello  Gallico  VI,  18)  records  the  same  custom  among  the  Gauls: 
'  Gain  se  omnes  ab  Dite  patre  prognatos  predicant  idque  ab  druidibus  proditum 
dicunt.  Ob  eam  causam  spatia  omnis  temporis  non  numero  dierum,  sed  noctium 
finiunt.'  And  he  also  adds  :  '  dies  natales  et  mensium  et  annorum  initia  sic 
observant,  ut  noctem  dies  subsequatur.'  This  custom  offreckoning  the  night 
with  the  day  which  followed  it  also  obtained  among  the  Anglo-Saxons  ;  cf.  Anglo- 
Ss.xor\f7'igecefen  =  Thursday  eve.\vmg,f7-igein/it  =  the  night  preceding  Friday  (see 
Kluge,  Etymolog.  Worterbiich,  s.v.  fasten).  Sunday,  according  to  the  Wulfstan 
homilist,  should  be  observed  'from  nontide  \>xs  saetemdaeges  o"5  monandaeges 
lihtincge  '  (Tupper,  "  Anglo-Saxon  Daeg-Msel,"  Fiib.  of  the  ML  A.  X,  134),  nontide 
being  the  ninth  hour  counting  from  sunrise.  This  custom  has  left  its  traces  in 
the  Mod.  Eng.  phrases  '  Hallowe'en,'  '  New  Year's  Eve,'  '  Christmas  Eve,'  etc. 
The  custom  of  reckoning  time  by  nights  instead  of  days  survives  in  the  phrases 
'fortnight,'  'sennight,'  'Twelfth  Night.'  See  further  ?iz)\xz.di&x,  Reallexikon  der 
Indogermaitischen  Altertiimsknnde,  p.  845,  and  Grimm,  Tent.  Myth.,  p.  753. 

116.  Cf.  Gu.  mo:  sarum  geswenced;  Beow.  975:  synnum  geswenced.  —  All 
Edd.  have  a  comma  after  geswenced ;  B.  and  K.  put  a  comma  after  ge^vy^3od 
also,  but  the  other  Edd.  have  no  punctuation  here.  Gn.'^  removes  the  comma 
after  geswenced,  adds  one  after  gewyrSod,  and  supplies  wesan  as  completing 
the  sense.  On  the  omission  of  w^esan,  cf.  1393,  note.  —  Ci.  Jiid.  299:  sigore 
geweor^od. 

118^.  Also  225a. 

120.  on  riht.  Simons,  p.  1 10,  forms  an  adj.  compound  onriht  =  '  wahr,  echt,' 
following  Gn.,  who  translates,  Dicht.,  '  er  ist  ein  rechter  Konig.'  But  the  words, 
metrically,  do  not  have  the  stress  of  an  adj.  compound;  cf.,  besides  the  other 
passages  in  An.,  Chr.  267  :  mote  arisan  ond  on  ryht  cuman ;  and  Ex.  586  :  reaf 
ond  randas,  heom  on  riht  sceode. 

las'*.  So  1303  ;  Gen.  1555,  1886;  Beow.  1789,  2594;  El.  1060, 1127.  —  nihthelm 
toglad.  Also.fi'/.  78;  cf.  1305.  Grimm,  TVz^^.  jI/j/^.,  753,  noting  these  passages, 
says:  'to  her  [i.e.  Night],  as  a  goddess,  is  ascribed,  quite  in  the  spirit  of  our 
olden  time,  a  terrible  and  fearful  hebnet,  like  a  cloak-of-darkne.'is.'  But  the  pas- 
sages hardly  justify  the  specific  picture.  Helm  is  probably  used  in  these  com- 
pounds in  the  general  sense  of  'covering.' 

123-128.  For  other  examples  of  the  figure  of  asyndeton  in  Andreas,  see 
11.  370  ff.;  391  ff.;   I545ff- 

125.  daegred\A'oma.  The  two  elements  of  this  word  occur  separately.  Dcegred 
(OHG.  tagar-at,  -ot,  Icel.  dagra&,  cf.  Noreen,  Ah-iss  der  indogcrm.  Lantlehre, 
p.  196)  was,  in  the  Anglo-Saxon  period,  a  technical  term  for  one  of  the  periods 
of  the  day.     The  Anglo-Saxon  night  was  divided  into  seven  parts,  the  seventh 


NOTES   ON   ANDREAS  8/ 

part  coming  just  before  dirs^red,  dicgrcd  xKseM  being  succeeded  by  stttinan  iipgaui^ 
(Tupper,  "Anglo-Saxon  Dajgmsel,"  Pub.  of  A/LA.  X,  126).  It  was  also  the  period, 
as  we  learn  from  the  Colloquy  of  ^{.Ifric  (Tupper,  p.  154),  when  the  husbandman 
went  to  the  fields:  '  (Arator)  :  Eala  leof,  J^earle  ic  deorfe;  ic  ga  ut  on  daegred 
(diluculo),  ))ywende  oxon  to  felda.'  In  later  English  the  word,  through  a  process 
of  popular  etymologizing,  w-as  supposed  to  be  made  up  of  the  elements  '  day ' 
and  '  red,'  '  the  red  of  the  break  of  day,'  '  the  rosy  dawn '  (cf.  NED.  s.v.  day-red). 
The  second  element  of  the  compound,  woma,  in  its  other  occurrences,  both  as 
simplex  and  in  compounds,  has  the  meaning  '  tumult,'  '  alarm,'  at  times  '  terror ' ; 
cf.  1355;  and  Chr.  834,  998,  heofonwoma  (tr.  Cook,  Christ,  p.  259,  'sound  from 
heaven,'  '  thunder  (?) ').  The  two  elements  combined  seem  to  mean,  therefore, 
'the  rush  or  tumult  of  the  dawn';  Brooke,  p.  414,  'the  trumpet  sound  of  the 
dawn.'  Grimm,  Teut.  Myi/i.,  720  ff.,  gathers  together  a  great  number  of  illustrar 
tions  showing  how  wide-spread  was  the  belief  that  ascribed  noise  or  clang  to  the 
rising  and  setting  of  the  sun,  and  explains  the  belief  by  supposing  the  existence 
in  the  popular  mind  of  '  a  deep  affinity  between  the  notions  of  light  and  sound, 
of  colors  and  tones.'  Wotan  himself,  he  points  out  (p.  745),  is  called  Wuomo, 
Woma ;  and  in  this  name  and  such  words  as  dtrgredwdma,  he  sees  the  survivals 
of  an  original  nature-myth,  according  to  which  the  dawn  was  an  actual  living 
person. 

I25''-I33''.  The  Edd.  vary  widely  in  the  punctuation  of  these  lines.  After 
samnade,  125^  W.  has  a  colon,  all  other  Edd.  a  comma;  after  hildfrecan, 
126%  K.  and  B.  have  a  comma,  the  other  Edd.  no  punctuation.  Gn.,  B.,  and 
Cos.  {PBB.  XXI,  8),  enclose  1.  127  within  parentheses,  thus  making  hrysedon, 
I27^  intransitive,  and  uniting  bolgeninode,  i28\  to  hildfrecan,  126-^.  After 
bordhreotfan,  i28'\  Gm.  has  no  punctuation,  all  other  Edd.  a  period  or  colon; 
after  ^vunedon,  131'',  Gm.  and  K.  a  semicolon,  all  other  Edd.  a  comma  ;  after 
berSdan,  I33^  Gm.  and  K.  a  question-mark,  all  other  Edd.  a  period.  "Woldon 
cunnian,  129'^,  has  two  objects,  (i)  the  clause  h-waetfer  .  .  .  wunedoii,  and 
(2)  hwylone  .  .  •  bersedan. 

127.  garas  hrysedon.  Kemble, '  they  brandished  their  javelins.'  But  the  pas- 
sage here  is  an  evident  reminiscence  from  Beoicmlf,  the  only  other  occurrence 
of  the  word  hrvsian  in  the  heroic  poetry  :  syrcan  hrysedon,  giuNgewiedo,  Beoiv.  226- 
227.  Translate  as  intransitive, '  rattle ';  Grein,  Diclit., '  die  Kampfspeere  rauschten.' 
Cf.  Beow.  327  :  byrnan  hringdon. 

128'^.  So  also  Beoiv.  2203. 

130.  Cf.  1378;  1560;  Chr.  734-735:  J'Sr  he  gen  ligeS  in  carceme  clommum 
gefaestnad. 

133^.  Also  El.  1034,  1268;  Ph.  223.  The  period  was  thirty  days  (cf.  114,  note). 
—  133''.   Cf.  El.  49S:  feore  berieddon. 

135.  Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  68:  koI  irpocT^devav  tji  x^'P'  avroO  ttj  Se^i^  rd^Xav,  iva  yvQa-L 
TTiv  Tr\ripuj(7iv  tGiv  TpLUKovTa  i]ix€pQv.  Note  also  149,  157.  These  details  are  omitted 
in  the  Legetid. 

136.  hwaenne.    Also  400 ;  cf.  Gram.,  §  65,  and  note  2. 

138.  caldheorte.  The  only  occurrence  of  the  epithet  in  Anglo-Saxon. — 
corSor  5(Jruni  getang.    For  other  examples  of  this  stylistic  device  of  using  o^er 


88  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

instead  of  repeating  the  noun,  cf.  443 ;  El.  233 ;  Fctd.  6 ;  Bemu.  653,  870,  24S4, 
2985.    See  360'',  note. 

139.  After  rsesboran  Gm.  and  W.  have  no  mark  of  punctuation,  the  other 
Edd.  a  semicolon.  —  Cf.  Chr.  706  :  s6)?es  ne  giemdon. 

140.  hira  mod.  Cf.  454:  ure  m6d='we';  1242:  J'ast  jeSele  mod  = '  he.' 
Other  examples  are  El.  597  ;  Jul.  26,  209;   Git.  711. 

141.  deofles  laruni.  'Through  or  by  the  instruction,  counsel  of  the  devil.' 
The  phrase  is  a  common  one  with  Wulfstan :  judeisc  folc  Jjurh  deofles  lare  hine 
forrsedde  (ed.  Napier,  p.  17,  1.  19);  eal  mancyn  wss  )>urh  deofles  lare  5r  )>am 
beswicen  (p.  22,  1.  i). 

142.  eaueSum.  The  late  writing  u  for  f  occurs  only  in  this  word  in  the  MS. 
of  Andreas,  but  the  use  is  sporadic  throughout  the  Anglo-Saxon  period ;  cf. 
Gravi.,  §  194. 

143.  gla\vne.    This  spelling  is  supported  by  gelah,  1074. 

145.  )j£es.  Lohmann  {Anglia  III,  126),  accepting  the  emendation  hwcrsior  the 
MS.  ivaes,  cites  /iuufs  in  this  passage  as  the  sole  example  of  the  interrogative 
used  as  relative  pronoun.  Zupitza  {Anglia  III,  369),  retaining  hwcBs,  regards  the 
form  as  interrogative,  and  the  clause  which  it  introduces  as  a  dependent  question, 
not  a  relative  clause.  But  the  right  reading  here  is  undoubtedly  J>ses,  the  first  letter 
of  which  was  miswritten  %v;  cf.  64,  note. 

I46\   So  Sat.  21,  239,  659;  Hy.  V,  6;  Ap.  28. 

147.  fruinra?denne.  The  only  occurrence  of  the  word.  Dicht.,  'die  Frist  der 
Vorbestimmung ' ;  K.,  '  Then  was  the  space  expired  of  the  predestined  time ' ; 
Root,   '  Then  was  accomplished  .  .  .  The  appointed  time,  the  season  fore-ordained.' 

148.  ]7inggeiiiearces.    Cf.  157,  note. 

149.  Cf.  135,  note. 

150.  Cf.  Becrw.  1567  :  banhringas  brasc. 

151.  Cf.  1472  ;  Beow.  1630  :  lungre  dlysed,  of  the  armor  of  Beowulf. 

152.  dugutfe  ond  geogotfe.  Also  1122,  arid  Beoto.  160,621,  1674.  The  two 
occurrences  of  the  phrase  in  Andreas  are  in  passages  of  similar  context,  and 
both  refer  to  the  Mermedonians.  The  phrase  is,  however,  a  dignified,  heroic  one, 
and  means  the  body  of  warriors,  young  and  old  ;  see  Miillenhoff,  Deutsche  Alter- 
tumskutide  IV,  263-264.  As  it  is  used  in  Andreas  it  perhaps  has  weakened 
and  become  generalized  into  the  sense  merely  of  'every  one,'  'one  and  all.' 

154.   Cf.  Beow.  1568:  fiegne  flieschoman. 
I54*'-I56.  Cf.  the  similar  phrasing  I227'^-I228. 

157-158^.  '  After  every  thirty  days  ' ;  cf.  Maid.  271  :  sefre  embe  stunde  ;  Chron. 
1 137  :  ieure  um  wile,  '  every  little  while  ' ;  Metr.  XXVIII,  28-30  : 

o^er  steorra  cymeS  efne  swa  same 
on  }>one  ilcan  stede  eft  ymb  'Sritig 
geargerlmes. 

157'  ping  gehedon.  Cf.  930;  Bemo.  425-426:  ana  gehegan  Ning  wi'S  J^yrse  ;  Ex. 
Gn.  18-19:  Hng  sceal  gehegan  frod  wi)'frodne.  Note  also  ma'iiTol  gehegan.  1049, 
1496,  and  seona^"  gehegan.  Ph.  493.  The  phrase  is  a  conventional  term  in  Anglo- 
Saxon  for  holding_a  parliament  or  meeting,  but  it  is  found  only  in  the  verse  and  is  not 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  89 

used  in  the  prose  of  the  meetings  of  the  witaii.  But  the  same  phrase  was,  and  is 
still,  used  in  Iceland  of  the  meeting  of  deliberative  or  legislative  bodies  ;  cf.  Cleas.- 
Vig.,  p.  260,  ^leyja  J>ing,  '  to  hold  a  parliament.'  The  word  J>ini^^,  according  to  May- 
hew,  Academy  XXXVI,  138  (Aug.  31,  1889),  is  cognate  with  Gothic /^///j,  'time,' 
the  form  J>iiig  being  derived  by  grammatical  change,  and  means  '  a  meeting  held 
at  an  appointed  time.'  This  derivation  is  also  given  by  Greenough  and  Kittredge, 
Words  and  their  Ways,  p.  236 :  '  The  word  is  thought  to  be  cognate  with  Latin 
tevipus,  "  the  (fitting)  time,"  "  the  right  moment."  If  so,  we  may  feel  confident  that 
the  oldest  sense  at  which  we  can  arrive  in  English  is  "  that  which  is  agreed  upon  as 
fitting."  '  The  word  piiiggcniearces,  which  occurs  only  twice.  An.  148  and  El.  3, 
certainly  refers  to  time,  and  thus  bears  out  the  above  derivation.  This  etymology 
has  been  questioned,  however,  by  F.  A.  Wood,  MLN.  XIX,  i.  In  discussing  the 
base  *te(ii)qo,  which  appears  in  the  meaning  '  stretch,'  '  lengthen,'  '  grow,' '  become 
strong,'  and  (what  seems  to  be  the  opposite  meaning)  '  draw  together,' '  contract,' 
'  make  compact,'  he  says  :  '  Here  belong  OE.  hing^  OHG.  ding,  pre-Germ.  tenqo-m, 
"  a  drawing  together,"  "  contract,"  "  compact,"  etc.  The  meaning  "  draw  together  " 
is  apparent  in  OE.>i//;^w«,  "settle,"  "reconcile,"  "arrange,"  "intercede,"  "plead."  ' 
But  Professor  Wood's  semasiological  grouping  is  not  convincing. 

158.  Gm.  has  only  a  comma  after  nihtgerimes,  all  other  Edd.  a  colon  or 
semicolon.  —  neod.     The  sense  here  is  'desire,'  as  in  Ph.  189-191  : 

'  LI'S  him  neod  micel 

Jjset  he  l-a  yldu       ofestum  mote 

Jiurh  gewittes  wylm       wendan  to  life.' 

B.-T.,  p.  714,  quotes  the  same  phrase  in  OS. :  '  was  im  niud  mikil  that  sie  selbon 
Krist  gisehan  mostin,'  '  they  desired  eagerly  to  see  Christ.'     Cf.  1166'',  note. 

164.  oft  his  lufan  adreg.  The  MS.  of,  'for  the  sake  of  (as  given  by  the 
translators),  has  not  the  support  of  other  examples ;  cf.  431'^.  The  emendation 
is  supported  by  Gu.  63 :  se  nSfre  ba  lean  alege'5  )>am  ^e  his  lufan  adreoge'S. 
Adrl'ogan  is  always  used  transitively  in  Andreas.  For  other  examples  of  the 
verb  in  an  active  sense,  cf.  Gu.  86'^:  gewin  drugon ;  Sat.  254''-2  55:  Hs  is  idel 
gylp  haet  we  ier  drugon  ealle  hwlle ;  Wulfstan  (ed.  Napier,  p.  28,  11.  1-3)  :  Jiaet 
[heofona  rice]  eow  is  gegearwod  to  ecan  edleane  eowres  geswinces,  ^e  ge  for 
minum  lufan  ier  on  worulde  adrugan.  For  a  similar  differentiation  in  meaning, 
cf.  rwfnan  ='  to  do,  perform,'  and  '  to  endure,  suffer.'    Cf.  13S0,  note. 

165-167.   See  Introd.,  p.  Iviii. 

166.  galdororaeftum.  The  first  element  of  the  compound  means  literally 
'  sound,'  '  song,'  then  '  incantation,'  '  magic  incantation  ' ;  cf.  Becno.  3052  :  galdre 
he'd'unden,  'protected  by  a  spell,'  of  the  treasure-hoard  of  the  dragon.  The  word 
appears  here  to  be  generalized  to  the  meaning  merely  of  things  evil  or  wicked ;  cf. 
6,  note  ;  34,  note;  765-766,  note. 

167a.  So  Gu.  875.-810.  Hall,  p.  67:  'The  article  in  line  167  is  treated  as 
definite  by  Grein,  but  we  have  always  felt  that  it  had  the  indefinite  value.'  Lich- 
tenfeld,  Haupfs  Zs.  XVI  (IV),  349,  notices  this  passage  but  gives  no  further 
examples  of  the  definite  form  with  indefinite  value.  It  seems  best,  however, 
to  take  sTo  as  Sievers  does  {PBB.  XII,  192),  not  as  indefinite,  or  as  referring 
to  the  voice  of  the  Lord,  but  to  the  voice  of  Andrew :   '  then  from  the  heavens 


90 


NOTES   ON  ANDREAS 


[i.e.  in  heaven  by  the  Lord]  his  voice  was  heard,  where  the  saintly  man  Andrew, 
in  Achaia,  was.'     Cf.  1074:  him  seo  wen  gela/t,  'his  hope  deceived  him.' 

170.  Cf.  Ap.  31 ;  Dom.  47  :  leode  IS  ran. 

171.  cirebaldum.  The  only  occurrence  of  the  word.  The  emendation  cyne- 
balduni  is  based  on  the  emended  reading  cynebalde  for  the  MS.  cyningbalde, 
Beow.  1634;  cyne-  or  cyningbalde  occurs  only  in  this  passage.  But  cf.  the  com- 
pounds cynerdf,  cynegod.  Spr.  I,  180,  glosses  cyrebeald  =  '■  ^ix&c^\x\\s  arbitrii ' ; 
B.-T.,  '  bold  in  decision ' ;  Sweet,  Diet.,  does  not  give  the  form  cirebald.  Dicht. 
translates :  '  gegen  den  Kiihnen  da ' ;  K.,  contrary  to  his  text,  '  to  him  royally 
bold' ;  Root,  '  to  him,  that  steadfast  saint ' ;   Hall,  '  to  him  bold  in  decision.' 

174.  ferS  liedan.    Cf.  282,  430,  and  337,  note.    Cf.  also  216. 

177.  Cf.  25^  note. 

179*'.   Cf.  1130^;  and/«/.  191-192  :  gen  ic  feores  \>%  unnan  wille. 

180-181^.  Cf.  Beow.  6-7:  sybjjan  ierest  wear>  feasceaft  funden. 

i84'\   So  also  1038,  1357;  Jul.  535,  625. 

185.  fore.  Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  68  :  en  701/0  rpets  ^/i^pat.  Note  also  114.  '\:\i^  Legend, 
p.  114,  11.  9-10,  reads:  'and  alaed  J^anon  Matheum  J>Tnne  br6J>or  of  )>iem  carcerne, 
for  Jjon  he  nu  git  l^ry  dagas  t5  lafe  syndon,  l^^et  hie,'  etc.  The  probable  word  in 
the  hypothetical  Latin  original  which  fore  translates  is  adhuc.  It  seems  best  to 
take  it  here  as  an  adverb,  not  as  Grein,  Spr.  I,  321,  does,  as  a  temporal  preposi- 
tion governing  niht.  The  suggestion  ofer,  of  Cosijn  and  Simons,  does  not  suit 
the  context  ;  ofer  means  '  past,'  '  gone  by,'  but  twenty-seven  days  have  gone  by, 
not  three,  according  to  the  narrative. 

187.  gast  onsendan.    See  1 326-1 327,  and  note. 

190.  ofer  deop  gelad.    So  Chr.  856;   Gu.  1266. 

193.  swa  Su  worde  bee  wist.    Cf.  210,  304,  418. 

194-195.  The  Edd.  put  no  punctuation  after  geferan,  but  a  comma  or  an 
exclamation  point  after  heofenum,  except  Kemble,  who  punctuates  as  in  the 
text.  Since  con  must  go  metrically  in  the  first  half-line,  no  punctuation  after 
heofenum  is  permissible. 

194.  eatf.  Here,  as  in  368%  evidently  comparative.  The  form  eatf,  as  positive 
of  the  adv.,  recorded  in  Spr.  I,  253,  and  B.-T.,  236,  is  derived  from  the  above- 
mentioned  passages  and  Gen.  2058  and  Gu.  528.  But  Ge7t.  2058  demands  met- 
rically ea&e,  and  also  the  positive  degree ;  ea&  for  Gu.  528  rests  upon  a  false  MS. 
reading,  the  MS.  having  ea&e  (cf.  Bibl.  Ill,  71).  The  only  authentic  passages  for 
eaS  are  consequently  these  two  in  Andreas,  both  of  which  are  comparative. 

igs'^.   Qi.  Jul.  112,  Meir.  XI,  30:  heofon  ond  eorSan  ond  (eall)  holma  begong. 

197.  ^va^o3faru^a.  For  similar  riming  compounds,  e.g.  wordhord,  eardgeard, 
etc.,  see  Kluge,  PBB.  IX,  423.    See  236,  note. 

198.  wegas  ofer  widland.  Cf.  my  note,  Mod.  Phil.  II,  405  :  '  All  the  editors 
read  wid  land  with  the  MS. ;  Grein,  however  {Germ.  X,  423),  changes  to  widland. 
The  whole  phrase  as  understood  by  the  editors  and  translators  is  out  of  keeping 
with  the  rest  of  the  passage.  Grein,  Dicht.,  translates  :  "  die  Wege  iiber  weite 
Lande  " ;  Kemble,  "  ways  over  wide  land  "  ;  Root,  "  the  tracks  across  the  boundless 
land";  Hall,  "the  ways  o'er  the  wide-lands."  But  the  word  is  appositive  to  and 
amplifies  the  sUstreamas,  ivaro&faru&a  gezviitn,  and  wicterbrogan  of  the  preceding 


NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 


91 


lines,  and  can  hardly  mean  "  roadways  on  the  dry  land."  It  will  be  noticed  also 
that  in  the  succeeding  Unes,  though  the  word  /terestrieta  occurs,  it  is  limited  by 
the  phrase  p/er  cald  -cvictcr;  the  whole  passage  is  consequently  descriptive  of 
joumeyings  by  water. 

'  The  right  understanding  of  the  passage  is  dependent  on  the  meaning  of 
'Midlaiul.  Asacompound  this  word  is  of  frequent  occurrence  and  means  :  (i)  "dry 
land,  terra  firma,"  as  distinguished  from  the  ocean  (cf.  Gen.  1538-  waeter  ofer 
widland;  and  Gen.  155-156:  njeron  Metode  >a  gyt  widlond  ne  wegas  nytte); 
(2)  "  world,  earth,"  in  general  (cf .  Chr.  605  :  welan  ofer  zotdlond,  "  prosperity  upon 
earth  ").  The  second  is  the  sense  in  which  the  word  is  used  in  the  present  passage. 
Again,  wegas,  appositive  to  sastreamas,  is  the  same  word  as  Tv'egas  in  Gen.  1 56, 
nom.  pi.  of  ti'ag,  "  fluctus,  unda,  mare."  The  usual  spelling  of  the  word  in  the 
Andreas  is  wiFg,  as  e.g.  'wages,  632,  zvagas,  373,  etc. ;  but  the  spelling  weg  is 
found  in  the  gen.  pi.  wega,  932.  Read  also  weges  weard.  An.  601,  "ward  of  the 
wave,"  not  -weges  weard  {Spr.  II,  655,  Hall),  "  ward  of  the  way."  '  —  Cosijn  i^PBB. 
XXI,  9)  would  read  weras  for  \>'inas,  and  remarks  :  '  Hatte  Andreas  sagen 
wollen,  dass  er  dort  keine  "  freunde  "  hatte,  so  ware  Jjser  vor  •uinas  unerlasslich.' 
But  all  the  passage  means  to  say  is  '  These  stranger  earls  are  not  my  familiar 
friends  ' ;   Root,  '  These  foreign  men  are  not  my  trusfy  friends.' 

200.  herestraita.  Originally  meaning,  from  the  main  purpose  of  roads,  '  a 
highway  or  paved  road  along  which  an  army  could  pass,'  this  word  became  gen- 
eraUzed  in  the  sense  '  highway,'  '  road.'  The  extent  of  this  generalization  may  be 
seen  from  the  fact  that  the  word  may  even  be  applied  to  '  water-way.'  For  a 
similar  development,  cf.  here-,  /ierpa&. 

201.  ofer  cald  ^^'aete^.    So  C/ir.  851  ;  Maid.  91  ;  cf.  222,  253. 
204.   So  211  ;  El.  219-220;  cf.  Ap.  34:  siSes  siene. 

206.  on  fold^vege.    'On  earth';  cf.  C/ir.  1 528-1 529: 

ondweard  ne  maeg 
on  Jiissum  foldwege       feond  gebidan. 

Cf.  468,  note,  501,  note,  for  other  examples  of  compounds  in  which  the  second 
element  has  lost  its  meaning. 

208.  under  swegles  gang.  '  Beneath  the  circuit  of  the  heavens,'  '  on  earth.' 
Cf.  455,  869.  Cook,  Christ,  p.  179,  notes  gyrus  caeli,  Eccles.  XXIV,  8;  meatus 
caeli,  Virgil,  Aen.  VI,  849;  and  vias  caeli,  Georg.  II,  477.  Cf.  Beow.  860,  1773, 
under  swegles  begong. 

210''.   So  1 71 5;   Chr.  1 197;  Jul.  223. 

211-214.  The  Lord  admonishes  Andrew  in  such  terms  as  a  Saxon  leader 
might  use  in  addressing  his  followers.    Cf.  89-99;   ^"^  IVand.  65-69: 

Wita  sceal  gejiyldig, 
ne  sceal  no  to  hatheort       ne  to  hraedwyrde, 
ne  to  wac  wiga       ne  to  wanhydig, 
ne  to  forht  ne  to  faegen       ne  to  feohglfre, 
ne  n£fre  gielpes  to  georn,       ar  he  geare  cunne. 

215.  Grimm  has  a  comma  after  A^-j'rSan.  all  other  Edd.  a  semicolon  or  period. 
217^.   Cf.  951  ;  Jul.  215  :  of  gramra  gripe. 


92  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

221.  aet  meres  ende.  Cf.  Ex.  128:  landes  aet  ende ;  Beow.  224:  eoletes  aet 
ende ;  Whale  15:  sundes  aet  ende.  Note  also  Jitd.  272:  }>(i  wv^j-  hyra  tires  irt 
ende,  discussed  by  Shipley,  p.  122. 

232^.  So  El.  244;  cf.  513.  The  word  baeS^veg  occurs  also  in  Ex.  290.  Cf. 
fisces  baeS,  293;  ganotes  bae'5,  Beow.  1861  ;  and  Kipling,  'The  Rowers': 

They  had  no  heart  for  the  rally  and  roar, 
That  makes  the  whale-bath  smoke  — 

224.  mine.    For  similar  word-order,  cf.  479*'. 

225-229.  An  evident  reminiscence  of  the  homiletic  style.  See  Introd.,  p.  Ivii, 
and  cf.  1686,  note;  Ap.  107-122,  note. 

226.  upengla  fruma.    Cf.  Men.  210  :  iipengla  weard. 

227^^.   So  Chr.  647  ;  cf.  978. 

228-229.  Cf.  Clu-.  1686-1687  :  pider  soSfoestra  sawla  motun  cuman  jefter 
cwealme ;  Gii.  762-763  :  Swa  soSfjestra  sawla  motun  in  ecne  geard  iip  gestlgan ; 
Gu.  1066  and  Ph.  645  :  aefter  lices  hi-yre. 

230''.   Cf.  Beoiv.  1312  :  a&ele  cempa,  of  Beowulf. 

230-244^.  This  passage  is  translated  into  English  blank  verse  by  Brother 
Azarias,  Developttient  of  Old  English   Thought,  p.  137. 

233*.  So  Gu.  926. — 233''.  hikllata.  Not  a  weak  adj.  but  a  noun.  The  only 
other  occurrence  of  the  word  is  Beow.  2846. 

234.  gearo,  giitJe  fram,  to  Godes  campe.  Translate  '  Ready,  valiant  in 
battle,  for  God's  combat.'  M.,  B.,  W.,  and  K.  in  his  translation,  put  a  comma 
after  gu9e,  W.  remarking  that  as  fram  is  an  adj.  and  does  not  modify  gu3e, 
it  should  be  separated  from  it  by  punctuation.  To  this  Cos.  {FBB.  XXI,  9)  re- 
sponds that  W.'s  punctuation  does  not  sufficiently  take  into  account  the  caesura 
of  the  line.  He  therefore  holds  gearo  and  to  godes  campe  together,  gu'Sefram 
(=  hildfram  =  nalas  hildlata)  being  regarded  as  a  second  phrase.  Although 
close  syntactical  concord  is  frequently  broken  by  the  caesura  (see  the 
examples  cited  under  7,  note),  in  a  verse  of  this  type,  X  X  |  _^  x  .1. ,  gui5e  frami 
should  have  the  value  of  a  compound.  Moreover  (as  Professor  Fred.  Tupper,  Jr., 
points  out)  the  usual  idioms  are  gearo  to  .  .  .  ,  as  in  1369;  El.  23:  gear-we  to 
gi'i&e,  etc.,  and  from,  followed  or  preceded  by  its  dependent  noun  without  prepo- 
sition, as  in  Rid.  LXIII,  2  :  forSslSes  from;  Bid.  LXXIII,  27:  feringe  from. 

235  ff.  Brooke,  p.  170,  says  of  this  passage  :  '  Andrew,  now  steadfast,  sets  forth 
with  the  rising  of  the  day,  and  the  description  of  his  path  to  the  sea  has  often 
recalled  to  me  the  approach  to  the  seashore,  over  the  dunes  of  sand  near  Bam- 
borough.'  He  adds,  p.  415  :  'The  very  verse  has  the  dash  and  salt  of  the  waves 
in  it,  and  the  scenery  is  Northumbrian.  No  one  can  mistake  it  for  that  of  an 
East  Anglian  or  a  Wessex  shore.' 

235.  on  uhtan  mid  ffirdsege.    So  1388;  Beow.  126;  El.  105. 

236.  ■warutfe.  The  appropriate  word  here  is  undoubtedly  waro&,  '  shore,' 
and  not  faro&,  '  sea.'  This  reading  is  supported  by  238*.  On  the  confusion  of 
faro&  and  waro&  in  Anglo-Saxon  poetical  texts,  see  my  note.  Mod.  Phil.  II, 
405-406. 

237'^.   So  El.  267;  zl.  Jul.  358:  l>riste  gehoncge ;  El.  1285:  l^ristra  gebonca. 


NOTES    ON   ANDREAS  93 

238.  gangan.  Construe  as  infinitive  after  gewat,  not  as  Cosijn  {PBB. 
XXI,  9),  noting  Beoio.  1009:  h'ft  to  liealle  ^^aiii;  Heal/denes  sititu,  suggests,  pre- 
terit plural  in  -an,  or  as  dependent  on  geivitiin  understood.  L.  237''  has  syntac- 
tically the  value  only  of  a  parenthetical'or  a  prepositional  phrase,  and  it  is  good 
idiom,  in  Modern  English  as  well  as  Anglo-Saxon  (see  Sweet,  New  English  Gram- 
mar II,  82-83),  to  make  the  verb  agree  only  with  the  first  subject  when  an  addi- 
tional subject  is  added  as  a  tag;  cf.  Becnv.  2341-2343  :  Sceolde  Ijendaga  ajieling 
Srgod  ende  gebidan  .  .  .  and  se  wyrm  somod  (note  also  Beo^v.  431);  El.  94-95: 
\>z.  ha^t  leoht  gewat,  up  srt'ode,  ond  se  ar  somed,  on  clienra  gemang;  Wulfstan, 
ed.  Napier,  p.  9,  11.  1-4:  ac  sona  swa  deofol  ongeat  j^set  mann  to  iSam  gescapen 
waes,  I'JEt  he  scolde  and  his  cynn  gefyllan  on  heofonum  J^aet  se  deofol  forworhte 
'Surh  his  ofermSdignesse,  }'a  waes  him  jiset  on  myclan  andan  ;  Chronicle,  ed.  Earle 
and  Plummer,  I,  141  :  Her  on  Hssum  gear  sende  se  cyng  ond  his  witan  to  "Sam 
here  ;  ibid.,  p.  143  :  forSan  i5Sr  waes  inne  se  cyning  .^J^elred  ond  purkil  mid  him. 
—  greote.  A  favorite  word  in  Andreas  (7  times),  occurring  only  once  (AV.  835) 
in  all  Cynewulf. 

240.  ^vidfa^3me.  Q,i.Beoiv.  302 :  sIdfae'Smed  scip;  1917:  sidfas^me  scip.  Bon- 
net, p.  69:  TrXotdpioj/  fxiKpbv;  Legend,  p.  116:  he  geseah  scip  on  J>dm  waro&e,  but 
later,  Inoider  loille  ge  faran  mid  his  medmiclum  scipe? 

242.  bearna  beorhtost.  That  is,  the  sun  ;  Cos.  {PBB.  XXI,  9)  notes  Heliand 
545,  where  the  phrase  is  used  of  the  guiding  star  of  the  three  kings.  With  mor- 
gentorht  as  compound  adj.,  cf.  heofontorht,  1018.  Cf.  Beow.  2777  :  beacna 
beorhtost  (of  the  segn,  i.e.  banner) ;   Chr.  1085  :  beacna  beorhtast  (of  the  cross). 

243.  After  heolstre,  Grimm,  Kemble,  and  Wiilker  have  no  punctuation,  Grein 
has  a  comma,  Baskervill  and  Cook  a  semicolon.  Since  the  construction  changes 
here  from  com  +  infinitive  to  simple  preterit,  a  semicolon  seems  necessary 
after  heolstre ;  otherwise  we  should  expect  the  infinitive  blican  instead  of  blac. 
Grein  puts  a  comma  after  blac,  but  Grein-  removes  it,  'da  bide  verbum  ist.' 
Cf.  1 541,  note,  for  the  meaning  of  blac;  and  for  the  construction  becom  .  .  . 
blican,  see  7SS-789. — heofoncandel.  The  word  occurs  also  in  Ex.  115,  with 
reference  to  the  pillar  of  fire  ;  Chr.  608,  the  sun  and  moon  ;  Wonders  of  Creation 
54,  the  stars.    Cf.  372,  note. 

253.  ceolum  lacatf.    Cf.  256'^ ;   Chr.  851  :  ofer  cald  waeter  ceolum  liSan. 

255.  fus  on  faroSe.  Cf.  Gii.  918  :  fus  on  for'Sweg ;  Gn.  -ji^  :  fusne  on  for'Sweg, 
etc.;  Beozti.  1916:  fus  aet  faro'Se.  —  255''.  faegn.  Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  70:  ix^^PV  x°-P^v 
tieytxKtjv  a-(p6dpa ;  Legend,  p.  1 16:  and  he  was  gefeonde  mid  mycle  gefean  and  him 
to  cwse'S.    Cosijn  also  calls  attention  to  602''. 

256.  h^A•anon.  Cf.  also  258''  and  264-^.  Bonnet,  p.  70,  reads:  IIoO  iropeveaOe, 
etc.,  and  in  answer,  HopevS/xeda  ev  ttj  x'^Pf  '''^^  dvdpu)Trocf>dywv ;  Legend,  p.  116: 
hwider  wi lie  ge  faran,  and  the  answer,  the  verb  being  omitted,  On  Marmadonia 
ceastre.  LI.  265-269  are  additions  of  the  poet.  —  256''.  So  Chr.  852 ;  Metr. 
XXVI,  60:  ceole  IrSan. 

257.  macraeftige.  Cf.  472;  these  are  the  only  two  occurrences  of  ma-,  com- 
par.  of  micel,  in  compounds.  The  meaning  of  the  word  appears  to  be  as  Grein, 
Spr.  II,  202,  translates,  'praepotens,  vor  andern  geschickt,'  Dtcht.,  'kraftvolle 
Manner.'    Gm.,  note,  says  :  '  Ich  vermute  ein  altes  subst.  md,  synonym  und  wurzel 


94  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

von  mere,  macraeftig  =  mere  cro'ftig' ;  so  K.,  in  his  translation:  'men  powerful 
on  the  sea.'  Unfortunately  no  root  md  =  mere  is  recorded.  Root  translates 
'  men  in  seamanship  expert ' ;  Hall,  '  ye  expert  mariners.' 

258.  ane  ^gflotan.  Translate  '  Whence  have  ye  come  sailing  in  ships,  in 
this  admirable  vessel,  valiant  men,  in  your  sea-rusher  (ship) .' '  Grein,  Spr.  I,  65, 
glosses  Eegflotan  as  inst.  sg.,  taking  the  phrase  thus  as  appositive  to  ceolum, 
256'';  so  also  Cook,  and  Root,  'Seafaring  on  your  ocean-coursing  bark,  Your 
lonely  ship.'  All  other  Edd.  take  the  phrase  either  as  appositive  to  ge,  256%  or 
as  vocative;  Dic/it.,  'im  Meeresboote  als  einsame  Fischer';  K.,  as  voc,  'solitary 
floaters  over  the  wave,'  Hall,  '  lonegoing  sailors.'  But  aigflota  should  mean 
'ship,'  not  'sailor';  cf.  flota,  397  ;  steflota,  381  ;  wsegflota,  487  ;  El.  246;  Beow. 
1907.  For  the  meaning  'admirable'  for  an,  cf.  Beow.  1885:  J>aEt  waes  an  cyning. 
The  Greek  here  reads  (Bonnet,  p.  70)  /ierd  tov  ttXoIov  tov  /xiKpov  roirov. 

259.  ofer  y9a  gewealc.  So  Beow.  464;  £c/g.  45  ;  ymb  y)'a  gewealc.  Sea/.  46; 
atol  y  Sa  gewealc,  £x.  45  5  ;  Sea/.  6. 

260.  aelmiliti.  Cf.  Chronicle,  Laud  MS.,  656,  ed.  Earle  and  Plummer,  I,  30  : 
aelmihti  god ;  Beozv.  218  :  famiheals  ;  Sat.  i,t,  :  hu  he  )'aet  scyldi  werud ;  Gen.  1463  : 
hungri  to  handa ;  and  so  frequently. 

261.  s^va  pxt  ne  wiste.  Translate  'Him  then  answered  almighty  God,  as 
though  He  knew  this  not,  He  who  awaited  his  words,  what  of  men  he  [Andrew] 
was,  of  human  kind  [nieSelhegendra],  whom  He  there  at  the  sea-shore  con- 
versed with.'  Grein,  Dicht.,  places  11.  261-263  within  parentheses,  translating 
STva  ]7aet  by  'wiewohl  das  nicht  wisste,  der  des  Wortes  harrte,' etc.  Kemble, 
Root,  and  Hall  take  swa  paet  as  conj.  introducing  a  result  clause.  Hall  remark- 
ing on  swa,  '  in  such  a  way  that  Andrew  did  not  suspect  that  it  was  God.'  But 
the  translators  are  certainly  wrong  in  translating  SAva  ]7aet  by  'so  that.'  Omitting 
the  parenthetic  clause  261'',  ]7cet  is  seen  to  be  the  object  of  ■\viste,  the  clause 
h^vset  .  •  .  wiSJ^ingode  being  appositive  to  it.  As  in  501,  Chr.  850  (see  An.  501, 
note),  and  Beow.  3050  (see  Kriiger,  PBB.  IX,  576-577),  s-\va=  'as  if.' 

262.  Cf.  El.  902-903 :  Hwaet  is  his,  la,  manna,  )>e  minne  eft  )>urh  fyrngeflit 
folgaJ>  wyrde^  ?  See  734,  note  ;  885,  note.  Cf.  Ap.  25,  Beow.  233  :  hwaet  )>a  men 
wEron  ;   Chr.  574  :  hwaet  se  Hlaford  is. 

265.  feorran  geferede.  So  El.  992;  cf.  1173,  and  Beow.  361:  Her  syndon 
geferede  feorrancumene  ;  Sal.  178:  feorran  gefered. 

266.  hranrade.  Literally,  the  '  whale-road ' ;  the  word  occurs,  beside  the  three 
passages  in  Andreas,  in  Beoio.  10  and  Gen.  205.  Cf.  swanrdd,  196;  Beow.  200; 
El.  997  ;  Jill.  675;  and  see  223,  note. 

267.  snellic  sSmearh.  Cf.  Beozv.  690:  snellic  sSrinc.  —  snude  bewunden. 
Cosijn  bases  his  emendation  on  the  lines,  Whale  17-18: 

ceolas  standa'5 
bi  sta^e  faeste       streame  biwunden. 

But  sunde  bewunden  is  commonplace,  whereas  snudc  bewunden,  '  enwreathed 
with  speed'  (Brooke,  p.  415),  is  quite  in  the  manner  of  the  poet  of  Andreas; 
cf.  19,  535,  772;  El.  733:  leohte  bewundene.  Snild,  noun,  occurs  only  in  this 
passage ;  sniide,  adverb,  occurs  a  number  of  times. 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  95 

271-276.  Cf.  474-479.  —  Brooke,  p.  416:  'The  extreme  naivete  of  the  demand 
for  payment  and  the  bargaining  on  the  part  of  God,  belong  to  the  freshness  of 
the  morning  of  poetry,  while  the  conversation  supplies  us  with  a  clear  picture  of  the 
manners  and  talk  of  travellers  and  seamen.  We  stand  among  the  merchant  car- 
riers of  the  eighth  century-  in  England.'  Neither  the  Greek  nor  the  Legend  h.di\e. 
at  this  place  the  remark  of  Andrew  that  he  has  no  money  with  which  to  pay  his 
fare ;  but  in  both,  immediately  on  stating  his  wish,  he  is  invited  to  enter  the  ship, 
—  without  condition  in  the  Greek,  but  the  Legend,  p.  116  (cf.  An.  295-297), 
says:  Astiga'5  on  )ns  scip  to  iis,  and  sellaS  us  eoweme  faersceat.  In  both 
versions  Andrew  then  explains"  that  he  is  without  money  or  other  provision  for 
the  journey. 

273.  brante  cede.  Cf.  Beow.  23S:  brontne  ceol ;  El.  238  :  bronte  brimjnsan  ; 
and  Beow.  2807:  brentingas  =  'ships.'  Grimm,  p.  103,  takes  the  adjective  to 
mean  'foaming,'  'rushing.'  But  cf.  Icel.  bratir  (Cleas.-Vig.,  p.  76),  'steep,'  and 
dial.  North-English  brant,  brent  —  'steep.' 

274.  hea  hornscipe.  The  only  occurrence  of  the  word  hornscip.  Grein, 
Spr.  II,  98,  107,  calls  attention  to  liringedstefna,  'ship,'  Becrw.  32,  1131,  1897,  and 
to  Icel.  Hringhorni,  the  name  of  a  ship  (cf.  Cleas.-Vig.,  p.  285) ;  cf.  also  hring- 
naca,  Becnu.  1862.  —  274*^.  So  Seaf.  60. 

276.  J^aet.  Cos.  {PBB.  XXI,  9)  regards  J>8et  as  equivalent  to  gif,  and  cites  a 
second  example  from  Boethius,  ed.  Fox,  p.  234,  1.  25.  But  the  probable  reading 
in  the  passage  from  Boethius  is/<F/-,  as  it  is  given  in  Sedgefield's  edition  (Oxford. 
1899),  p.  136,  1.  26.  According  to  Sedgefield's  glossary-,  /<?;-  —  gif  occxxxs  some  14 
times  in  Boethius,  but  no  example  of  Mt  =  gif  is  recorded.  The  clause  J^aet 
.  .  .  weor<5e  is  a  noun  clause,  the  subject  of  bi'S  (or  in  apposition  with  the  sub- 
ject), or  dependent  on  the  verbal  idea  in  hiS  meorcJ :  '  God  shall  reward  you 
that,'  etc.   (Kittredge).    Cf.  480-4S3. —  276''.  Cf.  A/.  92-^. 

279-360.  Cf.  Walker,  pp.  350-351  :  'And  Jesus  having  heard  Andrew  saying, 
I  too  am  going  to  the  country  of  the  man-eaters,  says  to  him :  Every  man  avoids 
that  city,  and  how  are  you  going  there  ?  And  Andrew  answered  and  said :  We 
have  some  small  business  to  do  there,  and  we  must  get  through  with  it ;  but  if 
thou  canst,  do  us  this  kindness  to  convey  us  to  the  country  of  the  man-eaters,  to 
which  also  you  intend  to  go.  Jesus  answered  and  said  to  them:  Come  on  board. 
And  Andrew  said :  I  wish  to  make  some  explanation  to  thee,  young  man,  before 
we  come  on  board  thy  boat.  And  Jesus  said :  Say  what  thou  wilt.  And  Andrew 
said  to  him :  We  have  no  passage-money  to  give  thee ;  we  have  not  even  bread 
for  our  nourishment.  And  Jesus  answered  and  said  to  him  :  How,  then,  are  you 
going  away  without  giving  us  the  passage-money,  and  without  having  bread  for 
your  nourishment  ?  And  Andrew  said  to  Jesus :  Listen,  brother,  do  not  think 
that  it  is  through  masterfulness  that  we  do  not  give  thee  our  passage-money,  but 
we  are  disciples  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  the  good  God.  For  He  chose  for 
Himself  us  twelve,  and  gave  us  such  a  commandment,  saying,  When  you  go  to 
preach,  do  not  carry  money  in  the  journey,  nor  bread,  nor  bag,  nor  shoes,  nor 
staff,  nor  two  coats.  If,  therefore,  thou  wilt  do  us  the  kindness,  brother,  tell  us 
at  once  ;  if  not,  let  us  know,  and  we  shall  go  and  seek  another  boat  for  ourselves. 
And  Jesus  answered  and  said  to  Andrew :  If  this  is  the  commandment  which  you 


96  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

received,  and  you  keep  it,  come  on  board  my  boat  with  all  joy.  For  I  really  wish 
you,  the  disciples  of  Him  who  is  called  Jesus,  to  come  on  board  my  boat,  rather 
than  those  who  give  me  of  their  silver  and  gold  ;  for  I  am  altogether  worthy  that 
the  apostle  of  the  Lord  should  come  on  board  my  boat.  And  Andrew  answered 
and  said:  Permit  me,  brother,  may  the  Lord  grant  thee  glory  and  honour.  And 
Andrew  went  on  board  the  boat  with  his  disciples.' 

286  ff.  Again  the  poet  heightens  the  statement  of  his  original ;  cf.  Bonnet, 
p.  70  :  Upayfj-d  tl  ixiKpbv  exo/J^ev  eKei  diairpd^affdaL ;  Legend^  p.  1 16  :  Medmycel  ierende 
we  Hder  habba^  and  iis  is  }>earf  \>s.i  we  hit  ^eh  gefyllon. 

293^.  Cf.  Rii7iic  Poem  46  :  ofer  fisces  be)?;  and  see  223,  note. 

294''-295^.  Cf.  Gic.  1061-1062  :  J^Sr  min  hyht  myneS  to  gesecenne.  J>8er  = 
*  to  which  ' ;  cf.  909,  note. 

297.  All  Edd.  have  a  comma  after  gescrifene,  except  C,  a  semicolon  ;  B.  also 
has  a  comma  after  aras  of  his  text,  the  other  Edd.  no  punctuation. 

298.  aras.  Reading  ara  with  Gn.^  (also  Diclit.  and  Spr.  II,  625),  Cook,  and 
apparently  also  Simons  (the  word  aras,  298,  is  not  given  under  dr,  but  see  under 
nnnan,  p.  146),  we  should  have  to  take  ara  as  the  genitive  object  of  unnan  wil- 
la3.  Thus  Root  translates  '  so  upon  our  bark  the  seamen  will  grant  honor  unto 
you.'  But  dr,  '  honor, '  hardly  seems  an  appropriate  meaning  for  the  word  in  the 
present  context. 

In  the  light  of  the  antithetic  phrase,  aras  on  earde,  400^,  it  would  seem  almost 
necessary  to  retain  the  form  aras  in  the  present  passage  ;  cf.  also  495^.  The  word 
would  thus  be  appositive  to  scip^vea^das,  as  in  1.  400  it  is  appositive  to  beornas, 
399''.  If  we  accept  this  reading  the  chief  difficulty  lies  in  the  disposition  of  unnan 
willajy.  Kemble  translates  '  after  ye  your  payment  have  given,  the  appointed  sum, 
according  as  the  ship-warders,  the  men  over  the  sea-board,  will  grant  to  you ' ; 
Hall,  '  and  pay  us  the  appointed  tribute  that  the  masters,  messengers  [following 
B.'s  punctuation],  demand  o'er  the  ship's  side.'  Hall's  treatment  of  swa  as 
equivalent  to  a  relative  pronoun  is  supported  by  other  examples,  see  B.-T., 
p.  940;  but  both  Hall's  'demand'  and  Kemble's  'grant'  (=  appoint)  are 
unauthorized  meanings  for  unnan.  Professor  Kittredge  suggests  taking 
unnan  -willaS  as  simply  summing  up  and  repeating  what  is  said  before,  in 
292  ff.  The  logical  object  of  unnan  AvillaS  is  thus  contained  in  s'wa,  the  ante- 
cedent idea  of  ST\'a  being  the  lines  292-297^'.  Professor  Bright  regards  swa  as 
conjunctive  adverb,  and  paraphrases  the  passage  as  follows :  '  as  the  sailors 
(aras)  will  be  willing  to  have  you  do,  that  is,  will  allow  you  to  pay.'  The 
phrase  unnan  \villa3  he  thinks  may  be  a  formula  of  polite  expression ;  it  occurs 
also  in  1.  146. 

It  seems  best  to  regard  unnan  ■willaS  as  referring  especially  to  the  paying  of 
the  fare  and  not  to  the  general  situation.  The  meaning  of  the  verb  phrase 
would  be  therefore  'agree  to,'  'adjudge.'  This  meaning  suits  the  context  also  in 
the  parallel  construction,  where  the  statement,  however,  is  negative,  11.  178-179. 
The  meaning  of  ■willatf  in  this  construction  appears  to  be  less  one  of  volition, 
desire,  than  of  mere  intention.  This  seems  clearly  the  value  of  unnan  ■\volde, 
146;  and  cf.  the  three  examples  of  the  construction  in  the  first  person,  84,  458,  1412. 

300.  winepearfende.    So  Gu.  1321. 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 


97 


301.  fieted.  A  nonn  fie  t,  'plate,'  'ornament,'  occurs  twice  in  Beowulf:  the 
adjective  ftJ/cd  occurs,  as  simplex  and  in  compounds,  ten  times.  Beside  the 
passages  in  Andreas  and  Beowulf,  the  word  occurs  elsewhere  only  twice,  litis- 
hainrs  Message,  1.  35  :  fiettan  (MS.  fSdan)  goldes  ;   and  Rid.  LII,  7  :  fieted  gold. 

302.  Avlra  gcspiiun.  Cf.  El.  11 33-1 134:  tearas  feollon  ofer  'lulra  gespoit, 
spoken  of  Elene;  Gen.  762  :  lucft  mid  hritiga  gespotine,  i.e.  'in  chains';  so  also 
Gen.  yi"].  Beow.  2413,  speaking  of  the  treasure  of  the  fire-drake,  reads  se  ivas 
innan  full  wrictta  ond  xutra.  Perhaps,  as  Professor  Fred.  Tupper,  Jr.,  suggests  to 
me,  fibulae  are  meant.  Numerous  examples  of  Anglo-Saxon  fibulae  and  armlets 
are  figured  in  Akerman,  Archcvological  Index  to  Hentains  of  Antiquity  of  the  Celtic, 
Romano-British  and  Anglo-Saxon  Periods,  plates  XVI,  XVII,  XVIII ;  in  Ue  Baye, 
Industrial  Ants  of  the  Anglo-Saxons ;  and  in  Read,  A  Guide  to  the  Anticpiities  of 
the  Bronze  Age  in  the  Department  of  British  and  Mediccval  Antiquities  (of  the 
British  Museum),  1904,  passim. 

303.  landes  ne  locenra  beaga.  The  half -line  seems  to  have  been  taken  over 
bodily  from  Beow.  2996  : 

sealde  hiora  gehws'Sruni       hund  l^usenda 
landes  ond  locenra  beaga. 

The  syntax  of  the  phrase  in  Andreas  is  not  clear.  Landes  cannot  be  a  genitive 
after  gespann,  in  the  same  construction  with  -wira.  Schroer  {Eng.  Stud.  X, 
121)  omitting  landes  ne  would  construe  locenra  beaga  as  appositive  to  AAnra. 
Sievers  [PBB.  X,  314),  who  regards  the  passage  as  corrupt,  would  apparently 
explain  it  in  the  same  way ;  metrically  he  thinks  both  landes  ond  and  landes  ne 
are  to  be  eliminated.  Lines  of  similar  structure,  however,  are  found  frequently 
in  Andreas;  cf.  51,  682,  779,  795,  796,  etc.  Shipley,  p.  48,  translates  'I  have 
neither  beaten  gold  nor  treasure,  riches  nor  food,  nor  ornaments  of  wire,  (nought) 
of  land  nor  closed  rings.'  As  Shipley  points  out,  this  is  the  only  instance  in 
Anglo-Saxon  poetry  of  nahban  followed  by  the  genitive  ;  but  for  examples  in  the 
prose,  see  Wiilfing  I,  21.  The  'nought'  of  Shipley's  translation  is  supplied  from 
the  general  negative  statement  of  the  preceding  clause ;  and  Professor  Kittredge 
suggests  that  landes  ne  locenra  beaga  is  to  be  regarded  as  partitive  genitive 
dependent  on  the  negative  idea  of  the  sentence.  It  is  possible,  however,  that  the 
passage  is  a  direct  borrowing  from  Beowulf  which  was  imperfectly  assimilated 
into  the  logical  and  syntactical  structure  of  the  sentence  in  which  it  occurs.  The 
extravagance  of  speaking  of  gifts  of  rings  and  of  land  is  of  course  part  of  the  gen- 
eral method  of  the  poem  ;  cf.  Introd.,  pp.  li  ff.  With  locenra  beaga  cf.  hringloca, 
'corslet,'  Maid.  145;  locene  leoSosyrcan,  Beo^o.  1505,  1890;  guiSbyme  .  .  .  hond- 
locen,  Beo7u.  322  ;  iTcsyrce  .  .  .  hondlocen,  Beow.  550. 

305.  bolcan.  Also  602 ;  the  only  other  occurrence  of  the  word  in  poetry  is 
Beow.  23 1  :  beran  ofer  bolcan. 

306.  -waroSa  geweorp.  K.  translates  '  the  dashing  of  the  waves,'  though  he 
does  not  change  his  text  to  faro&a.  Gn.,  Dicht.,  '  iiber  des  Ufers  Gewerfe.' 
Cook  suggests  '^  the  smiting  of  the  shores,  perhaps  meaning  the  plunging  of 
the  breakers.'  Sweet,  Diet.,  glosses  ^varo(1ia  ge^veorp  by  '  surf.'  But  cf.  B.-T., 
geweorp  =  '  heap  of  earth  thrown  up  by  a  beetle.'     The  picture  here  is  of  the 


98  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

ridge  or  heap  of  sands  at  the  sea-shore ;  the  thought  is  continued  in  saebeorgas, 
308*,  and  cald  cleofu,  310^. 

307.  J>aes.  The  construction  is  the  accusative  of  the  person  to  whom  a  thing 
happens,  with  the  genitive  of  the  thing  that  happens,  both  dependent  upon 
ge\veor?Jan,  as  impersonal.  Shipley,  p.  42,  points  out  similar  constructions  in 
Beozv.  1598,  1996,  2026.  —  307^    So  1431'';  Soul  1 2,^. 

308.  ■woldes.  Other  forms  with  -es  in  the  pret.  sg.  of  the  second  person  of 
weak  verbs  are  haefdes,  530;  feredes,  1363;  forhogedes,  1381.  See  Gram., 
§  356  and  notes. 

310'^.  So  Beow.  1806. 

313.  After  dugotSe  K.  puts  a  colon,  all  other  Edd.  a  question-mark.  —  313*^. 
Cf.  Ch7-.  856:  loins  se  drohta&  strong,  also  of  a  (figurative)  voyage.    Cf.  1385. 

314.  lange.  C.  takes  lange  as  adj.  agreeing  with  lagolade.  So  also  the 
translations.  But  cf.  579,  1363,  and  translate  'The  life  is  hard  for  him  who  for  a 
long  time  goes  on  a  water-joumey.' 

316.  "WIS  on  geAvitte.  See  552,  and  note.  —  %\"ordhord  oiileac.  So  601; 
Beow.  259;  Metr.  VI,  i  ;    Wid.  i. 

320-323.. Cf.  Beow.  1 384-1 385  :  selre  bi"5  jeghwSm  J)a;t  he  his  freond  wrece 
Jjonne  he  fela  murne. 

320.  sarcw'ide.  All  the  translations  take  sarcwide  as  inst.  sg.';  so  also  Sfr. 
II,  391,  and  Cook,  note,  'inst.  sg.  parallel  with  mid  oferhygdiini.'  But  the 
natural  parallel  is  between  onds-\vare  and  sa^c^vide.  Translate  therefore  as  obj. 
of  sece.    The  prep,  phrase  mid  oferhygdum  modifies  both  nouns. 

322.  cu?Flice.  '  Kindly,  friendly.'  The  following  passages  illustrate  the  mean- 
ing of  the  word :  hine  se  Codes  monn  up  h5f  ond  him  cuSlIce  to  sprasc  (Bright, 
Reader,  p.  62,  1.  12) ; 

Aras  J'a  metodes  J^eow 
gastum  togeanes,       gretan  eode 
cuman  cuJilice,       cynna  gemunde 
riht  ond  gerisno.  Gen.  2429-2432. 

—  swa  Jjset  Crist  bebead.  Apparently  a  general  allusion  to  such  passages  as 
Matt.  XXV,  35  ff. ;  Heb.  XIII,  2,  etc.  The  Greek  and  Anglo-Saxon  prose  quote 
an  entirely  different  verse,  Matt.  X,  10;  Mark  VI,  9,  at  this  place;  the  sense  of 
the  allusion  in  Andreas  is  implied,  however,  in  the  verse  as  quoted  in  the  Greek 
and  prose. 

323^.  So  479^;  Chr.  457,  944;  Ex.  363.  —  his.  Cf.  1664,  where  the  MS.  reads 
liis  and  the  context  demands  is.    Wiilker  inconsistently  reads  his  in  both  passages. 

324.  Cf.  Bema.  206:  cempan  gecorone ;   Gii.  jGc)  :  cempan  gecorene. 

327.  SAva  he.  Equivalent  to  'who';  cf.  151 4,  swa  hit  =  ' which.'  —  anes 
cra?fte.  So  Jut.  359;  and  cf.  525;  C/ir.  567:  anes  meahtum  ;  ibid.  6S5  :  tnnh 
his  anes  crasft. 

328.  hofon.  O-umlaut  of  e,  i,  is  regular  in  the  Andreas,  but  is  lacking  here  and 
in  brpgo  (twice)  and  "werod  (twice) ;  see  Glossary. 

329.  sigora  selost.  Translate  'best'  or  'most  eminent  in  victories.'  The 
phrase  does  not  occur  elsewhere.  Sigora  sellend  ocrurs  Jul.  668,  705,  and 
Panther  64.     Selost  with  the  partitive  genitives  beorna,  folca,  sigeleana,  and  other 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  99 

nouns,  forming  a  phrase  superlative,  is  of  frequent  occurrence.  I'ut  sigora  in  the 
present  passage  (not  recorded  by  Shipley,  p.  78)  is  not  a  partitive  genitive,  but  a 
genitive  after  a  form  of  the  word  god.  Cf.  Beow.  269 :  wes  J>Q  us  larena  god ; 
Seaf.  40 :  ne  his  gifena  t>aes  god ;  Brun.  47-48 ;  hlihhan  ne  'Sorfton  "Saet  hi 
beaduweorca  beteran  wurdo^i.  Root,  reading  sellemi,  translates  '  Giver  of  vic- 
tory.' Professor  Fred.  Tupper,  Jr.,  calls  my  attention  to  Ex.  433:  so'Sfaest  sigora. 
331.  geond  giiiiie  grand.  So  IVid.  51,  where  it  means  'over  the  spacious 
earth';  Beow.  1551  :  under gynne grintd,  'beneath  the  wide  earth  '  =into  Hell?; 
Jitd.  z  :  i)i  &ys  gtnnan  grtinde  =  '  upon  earth.'  Cf.  Gefi.  134  :  geond  sidne  grinid, 
'over  the  broad  earth.'  K.,  'beyond  the  abysmal  deep';  but  Ilall,  better,  'into 
all  the  world.' 

332-339.  This  paraphrase  is  apparently  made  up  from  two  passages,  Matt.  X, 
5  ff.,  and  Mark  XVl,  14  ff.  The  Greek  (Bonnet,  p.  71,  1.  14)  reads:  koI  irapdduKev 
rj/juv  ivTo\r)v  toiouuttiv,  X^yoiv  6ti.  wopevofxevoL  K-qpixJcreiv  p,r)  ^affrd^ere  dpyipiov  iv  tT] 
65(j3  /xijTe  S,pTov  p.-qT€  TT-qpav  p.r]T€  VTrodrj/jLaTa  /xTjre  pd/SSof  /UijTe  Sio  x''''w>'os.  Cf.  CAr. 
481-490  for  a  parallel  to  this  passage  : 

FaraS  nu  geond  ealne       yrmenne  grand, 

geond  widwegas  ;       weoredum  cy  SaS, 

bodiaS  ond  bremati       beorhtne  geleafan, 

ond  fulwia'5       folc  under  roderum ; 

hweorfa^"  to  [hae'Snum],       hergas  breota}), 

fyllaS  ond  feoga'5 ;       feondscype  dvvsscaS, 

sibbe  sawaS,       on  sefan  manna, 

t'urh  meahta  sped.       Ic  eow  mid  wunige 

for'5  on  frofre,       ond  eow  friSe  healde 

Strang  5u  staj^olfaestre       on  stowa  gehware. 

The  excellent  emendation  hH&num  for  the  MS.  /leo/oniini,  1.  485,  was  suggested 
by  Strunk,  MLM.  XVII,  186. 

333.  Cf.  Beotv,  1 221-1224: 

Hafast  ))u  gefered       \>:e.t  '5e  feor  ond  neah 
ealne  wldeferhf)       weras  ehtiga'5 
efne  swa  side       swa  sse  bebuge'S 
windge  [e]ardweallas. 

Beo7v.  92-93 :   se  aslmihtiga  eorSan  worhte  .  .  .  swa  waster  bebuge^ ;  Men.  230  : 
swa  bebugeS  gebod. 

334.  stedeAvangas  str^te  gelicga]?.  Cosijn  reads  stedewanga,  gen.  pi., 
'  denn  die  ganze  welt  sollten  sie  durchziehen.'  But  the  advantages  of  this  reading 
hardly  justify  changing  the  te.xt.  This  is  the  only  instance  of  geliogatJ  as  a  transi- 
tive verb.     The  prefix  ge-  makes  the  intrans.  licgatT  trans.  (Bright).     Cf.  774, 

1234- 

335'».  Cf.  Ex.  510:  bodigean  aefter  burgum.  —  335''-  So  Gu.  770;  cf.  leohte 
geleafan,  Ap.  66,  and  note. 

336.  freotSo  healde.  Cf.  also  915,  1432;  Chr.  4S9  ;  Gu.  281  ;  Gen.  2528.  For 
other  examples  of  healdan  with  inst.,  cf.  Beow.  296,  1182:  arum  healdan ;  with 
gen.,  cf.  Alald.  41  :  eow  friSes  healdan. 

337'\  Cf.  Beow.  37  :  fra^twa  geljeded. 


lOO  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

339.  ahwette.  Cook,  p.  217,  '  ah-wette  =  supply,  not  the  normal  sense  of 
the  word.'    See  303  for  an  example  of  the  usual  sense.  ♦ 

343.  ece.  The  MS.  §ce  is  interpreted  by  Wiilker  as  meaning  aece ;  for  examples 
of  the  form  aece,  see  Spr.  I,  230.  Cf.  also  1.  89,  where  the  MS.  reads  s^gl.  But 
the  usual  spelling  of  the  MS.  is  e,  e,  and  there  is  no'indication  that  the  hook,  or 
reversed  cedilla,  is  here  used  to  signify  the  digraph.  In  teglleawe,  A/>.  24,  ae  is 
written  for  e. 

348*^.  Cf.  Beo-w.  352,  Gen.  2357  :  swa  Jju  bena  eart ;  Beozu.  3140:  swa  he  bena 
wees  ;  Gen.  2248 :  swa  ic  bena  waes ;  Beow.  364  :  Hy  benan  synt. 

352'^.   Cf.  Panther  8  :  sealtyjja  geswing. 

356.  woriilde,  wuldre.  This  obvious  antithesis  of  Avoruld  and  Avuldor,  the 
latter  word  being  used  in  the  generalized  sense  of  '  heaven,'  occurs  less  frequently 
than  one  would  expect.  The  only  other  examples  are  1.  948,  and  Gti.  370 ;  wiildor 
in  Christ  and  Satan  59  has  a  different  meaning.    See  my  note,  Alod.  Phil.  II,  407. 

358*.  Cf.  on  ]jam  sitJfaete,  1662;  also  Ex.  521  ;  Rid.  XLIV,  7;  Vision  of  the 
Cross  150  ;  to  Syssum  siSfaste,  Beow.  2639  ;  to  l^am  siSfate,  Hy.  IV,  102  :  of 'Sam 
s\'Sia.\.&, /ltd.  336. 

359.  helnnvearde.  The  change  is  necessary  in  1.  396  and  extremely  probable 
in  the  present  passage.  All  the  translations  follow  the  MS.  The  Greek  (Bonnet, 
p.  72,  1.  12)  reads:  (cat  dcreXOwv  eKadecrdrj  irapa  to  IctLov  tov  irXoiov  ;  the  Anglo- 
Saxon  prose  (^Legend,  p.  117,  1.  2)  :  and  he  gesast  beforan  j^am  steorre)jran  \>s.s 
scipes,  \>s.\  was  Drihten  Haelend  Crist. 

360.  setfele  be  aeSeluni.  For  other  examples  of  repetition  of  the  same  word 
within  the  half-line,  cf.  615,  620,  738,  1012.  Kluge,  PBB.  IX,  426-427,  collects 
further  instances  throughout  the  poetrj'.  For  examples  of  the  opposite  device, 
the  avoidance  of  the  repetition  within  the  half-line,  cf.  138,  note.  —  ^TEfre  ic  ne 
hyrde.  Cf.  Beow.  38-39  :  ne  hyrde  ic  cymlicor  ceol  gegj'rwan  hildewSpnum  and 
hea'SowSdum ;  El.  240-242 :  Ne  hyrde  ic  si5  ne  Sr  on  egstreame  idese  Isedan  on 
merestraete  maegen  fsegrre.    Cf.  Beow.  1 842-1 843,  quoted  11.  505^-509,  note. 

362.  Kemble  has  no  punctuation  after  heahgestreonuni,  and  translates 
'  Never  heard  I  that  in  a  comelier  ship  laden  with  lofty  treasures  men  sat,  glorious 
kings,  beauteous  thanes.' 

364  ff.  On  this  passage  Brother  Azarias  {Develop?nent  of  Old  English  Thought, 
p.  137)  remarks  :  '  This  is  a  reminiscence  of  the  saga  of  Woden  playing  the  ferry- 
man to  deliver  men  from  danger.'  On  9S7  ff.,  he  says  (p.  13S)  :  '  Here  is  the  work 
of  the  mythical  tani-cap  without  the  name.'  And  on  125S,  hare  hildstapan,  he 
says  (p.  139):  'Here  is  more  than  personation.  "Rime  and  frost,  hoary  war- 
riors": these  were  real  gods  in  the  Northern  mythology.  But  Andrew  suffers  not ; 
his  wounds  are  healed  before  morning,  as  were  the  wounds  of  the  heroes  of  old 
in  the  Northern  sagas.'  But  the  motives  of  the  poem  Avere  all  derived  from  the 
source,  and  it  is  doubtful  if  they  suggested  to  the  poet  any  parallels  to  Norse 
mythology. 

365.  heht  his  engel  gan.  The  Greek  (Bonnet,  p.  72,  1.  14)  adds  :  ko.\  dviveyKe 
rpeh  dpTovs  —  a  loaf  for  each  of  the  strangers. 

366.  interne  magul^egii.  Cf.  Beow.  2079:  mTerum  fnagit/>egne,  of  llondscio, 
follower  of  Beowulf. 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  •  lOI 

367.  frefran  feasceafte.  Cf.  365,  note.  Cf.  Chr.  175:  afrefran  feasceaftne; 
1.  368  :  afrefre  feasceafte.  But  Andrew's  disciples  do  not  eat,  cf.  1.  385.  This  inci- 
dent is  omitted  in  the  prose  Legoui. 

369''-38i.  Cook,  p.  219,  note  3,  says  :  'There  is  no  hint  of  any  extraordinary 
commotion,  much  less  of  a  storm,  in  the  original.  Of  all  this  long  description 
there  is  nothing  except,  "They  were  troubled  because  of  the  sea."  '  Brooke,  p.  416  : 
'  The  storm  is  now  described  in  words  that  come,  one  after  another,  short,  heavy, 
and  springing,  like  the  blows  of  the  waves,  and  the  gusts  of  wind.  We  know  as 
we  read  that  the  writer  has  seen  the  thing.'    Cf.  427,  note. 

370.  hornfisc.  The  only  occurrence  of  the  word.  Cf.  Beow.  540  :  wit  unc  wi5 
hronfixas  werian  l)5hton.  Possibly  we  should  read  hroiifisc  in  the  present  passage. 
But  cf.  Icel.  hornfiskr  (Danish  hornfisIS),  and  /loriigccla,  '  the  garfish  or  greenbone  ' 
(Cleas.-Vig.,  p.  279). 

371a.  Cf.  Beoiv.  ^i^: glidon  ofer gdrsecg,  of  swimmers  in  the  sea.  —  se  grtSga 
miew.  The  mew  or  sea-gull,  frequently  mentioned  in  the  verse.  The  name 
(Germ,  vibwe,  Icel.  vtdr)  was  perhaps  originally  imitative  of  the  cry  of  the  bird 
(Whitman,  "  The  Birds  of  OE.  Literature,"  \\\  Jour,  of  Germ.  Phil.  II,  180). 

372.  ■\vedercandcl.  The  word  occurs  again.  Ph.  187  ;  cf.  also  iiiedertdceii,  Gu. 
1267,  and  wederes  blSst,  An.  S37,  both  in  the  sense  of  'sun.'  See  also  weder- 
burg,  1697,  note.  The  word  candel,  to  the  modem  mind  an  anticlimax  after 
•  sun,'  to  the  Anglo-Saxon  mind  must  have  connoted  dignified  ideas.  The  word 
was  ecclesiastical  in  origin  and  was  introduced  into  English  early  after  the  con- 
version to  Christianity.  Its  use  in  poetic  compounds  evidently  reflects  some  of  its 
sacred  character;  cf.  N'ED.  s.v.  'candle,'  and  Koin.  and  Jul.  Ill,  v,  9:  'Night's 
candles  are  burnt  out.'  Cf.  heofoncandel,  243  ;  da?goandel,  S35  ;  Godes  condelle, 
Ph.  91. 

374.  giirron.  Glossed  by  Grein  and  B.-T.  under  georran,  but  the  more  prob- 
able infinitive  \s  gierran,  gyrran  (cf.  Gram.,  §  388,  note  i,  and  Sweet,  £)ict.,-p.  75). 
The  only  other  occurrence  of  the  word  is  in  ^Ifric's  Grammar  (cf.  B.-T.,  p.  428), 
ic  gyrre,  'garrio.' 

375.  wsedo  gewaette.  Gm.,  translating  'vadum  madefiebat,  replebatur  aquis,' 
and  Gn.,  Dicht.,  'wogen  schwollen,'  take  waedo  as  nom.  pi.  of  wad  —  'wave, 
ocean.'  K.,  followed  by  Hall,  'wet  with  the  waters';  Root,  'dripping  with  the 
waves  ';  and  Brooke,  p.  171,  'wet  with  breaking  sea,'  understand  the  form  as  inst.  sg. 
of  the  same  word.  But,  as  Cosijn  points  out,  the  inst.  form  is  ivicde,  and  even  ■waede 
gewaette  is  not  a  plausible  reading.  Cosijn's  ivada  geiuealce  fits  the  context 
but  involves  too  great  a  departure  from  the  MS.  forms.  B.,  B.-T.  (s.v.  '.vied), 
and  Simons,  p.  148,  take  -wiedo  as  nom.  pi.  of  iv^d,  'sail,  cordage.'  The  present 
passage  is  the  only  occurrence  of  i.v<ed  in  this  sense,  except  in  the  glosses  ;  but 
the  following  examples  place  the  meaning  beyond  a  doubt :  \V.  W.  5,  44,  antemne, 
wcvde  (dL.  6,  \,antemna,  seglgterd);  IV.  /F.  450,  33,  ;«(7/«x«,  loa-de ;  IV.  IV.  515,  15, 
riidentilms  (indisruptis),  wccderapiim  {itiitosliteiuini).  Cf.  also  Icel.  (Cleas.-Vig., 
p.  683)  va&,  'a  piece  of  stuff,  cloth,'  metaph.  '  a  fishing-net,'  and  in  poetry  'a  sail,' 
with  compound  z'd&-hcefr,  adj.,  '  fit  for  sail.'  AViSdo  geAvsette  is  accordingly 
nom.  pi.,  and,  as  we  should  expect,  a  parallel  phrase  to  strengas,  374''.  For 
the  pret.  part,  form  gewaette  instead  of  gewccted,  cf.  Gram.,  §402,  2.  —  Grimm, 


102  •  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

Grein,  and  Wiilker  have  only  a  comma  after  gewaette,  the  other  Edd.  a  semicolon. 
—  stod.  Cook,  p.  219,  note  6  :  '  A  peculiar  use  oi  staiidun  to  indicate  motion  rather 
than  rest.  In  Mod.  Eng.  this  general  sense  is  represented  in  phrases  like  "stand 
back,"  "  stand  off  from  shore,"  "  stand  up,"  "  stand  out,"  etc'  The  examples  are 
numerous:  Beozv.  726:  him  of  eagum  stod  .  .  .  leoht  unfasger;  Citron.  892  (Parker 
MS.) :  men  cwe^aj)  on  Englisc  t>aet  hit  sie  feaxede  steorra  for))£em  \>x.x  stent  lang 
leoma  of  ;  Finnesb.  37  :  swurdleoma  st5d.  Cf.  the  similar  development  in  licgan  = 
'  extend,'  '  flow,'  said,  for  example,  of  rivers  and  bodies  of  water. 

376.  J»reata  J>ry(5um.  Brooke,  p.  171,  'with  the  strength  of  armies.'  'This 
seems  an  impersonation  almost  too  fine  for  so  early  a  time.  It  is  quite  in  the 
manner  of  the  modern  imagination.  It  is  Kemble's  translation,  and  Grein's  is 
more  probable,  though  I  do  not  like  to  surrender  the  other  —  "  Machtig  durch 
die  Massen."  '  Root,  'with  the  might  of  multitudes  ' ;  Hall, '  the  waves  in  battalions 
mast-high  mounted.'    An  even  more  dramatic  personification  is  that  of  11.  443-445. 

J»7''-38o.  Cf.  Beow.  691-692  :  NSnig  heora  j^ohte,  jjset  he  ))anon  scolde  eft 
eardlufan  Sfre  gesecean  ;  cf.  also  Beoiv.  1 596-1 599. 

381.  sund  wisode.    Cf.  488. 

382.  holmwege.  The  only  occurrence  of  the  word.  Should  one  read  here 
weg  ^  wcFg  (cf.  1.  601),  the  compound  meaning  'sea-wave'?  But  cf.  bu-&-,Jldd-, 
flotweg,  and  brimrdd. 

383.  argeblond  The  only  occurrence  of  this  word  and  its  companion  forms, 
aryiT,  532,  and  arwela,  853.  Argeblond  is  glossed  by  Gn.,  Spr.  I,  37,  '  remorum 
commixtio,  mare  remis  turbatum,'  aryS,  Spr.  I,  39,  '  unda  remis  pulsata,'  and 
ar-\vela,  '  divitiae  remorum,  mare.'  B.-T.,  and  Sweet,  Diet..,  follow  Spr.\  so  also 
Cook.  Professor  Hart  makes  the  unquestionably  correct  suggestion  that  arge- 
blond =  eargeblond  (arytf  =  eary&,  arwela  =  eariveld),  as  in  El.  239  ;  Bruit. 
26;  Metr.  VIII,  30.  The  fanciful  combinations  of  dr  =  'oar'  with  geblond,  y&, 
and  zvela,  as  they  .occur  only  in  these  passages  in  Andreas,  may  therefore  be 
dropped  from  the  dictionaries. 

387=*.   So  Gn.  565,  581  ;  Dan.  409. 

393.  geofon  geotende.  Cf.  Beow.  1690  :  gifen  geotende  ;  and  see  150S,  1585. — 
grund.  The' sense  demands  here,  as  in  1.  425,  the  meaning  'deep  sea,  ocean.' 
Spr.  I,  531,  cites  as  the  only  other  example  of  this  meaning  Beoiv.  1551  :  under 
gynne  grund \  but  cf.  331,  note.  Sagricnd,  however,  occurs,  Beow.  564,  and  else- 
where, and  wceiergrund  once,  Fs.  CVI,  23.  Cosijn  {FBB.  XXI,  10)  cites  a  gloss 
{^Blickl.  Gl.  p.  258):  grund,  ^  "proinwdwrn,''  grundas,  '  abys(s)os, -i.' 

394=*.   So  1529";   Chr.  168. 

395*.  So  Fl.  138,1292;  Fx.  101,300;  cf.  1.  1 57 1.  —  395''.  Cf.  Gu.  1 1 70:  mod- 
ge))anc  miclum  gebisgad. 

396.  helnian.    See  1.  359,  note. 

405-414.  The  response  of  Andrew's  disciples  in  the  Greek  is  as  follows  (Bonnet, 
p.  74,  11.  7—8)  :  Edi'  dwoaTiofjiev  dwo  croO,  ^h'OL  yevih/jLeda  tCjv  ayaOQv  wv  Trapeaxc  W'** 
6  K^ptos.  vvv  ovv  (jLerd  aov  i(rp.€v  Sttov  d  &v  TTopetjri.  The  Legend  {p.  1 17, 11.  1 1-13)  reads  : 
Gif  we  gewlta?!  fram  I'C,  )>onne  beo  we  fremde  fram  eallum  jiam  godum  I'e  )'U  us 
gearwodest ;  ac  we  beoS  mid  l^e  swa  hwyder  swii  I'fi  fairest.  The  passage  in 
Andreas  is  not,  therefore,  as  is  stated  by  Hall,  p.  75,  and  Cook,  p.  221,  entirely 


NOTES    UN    ANDREAS  IO3 

original  with  the  poet ;  its  feeling,  however,  for  the  comitatus,  the  ideal  of 
allegiance  to  an  over-lord,  is  original  with  the  poem.  For  a  discussion  of  the 
coniiicitiis,  see  1.  3,  note,  and  Introd.,  p.  Hi.  Tacitus,  Gerinnma  14,  tells  us  that 
among  the  Germans  it  was  considered  the  greatest  disgrace  for  a  retainer  to  sur- 
vive his  leader :  '  Jam  vero  infame  in  omnem  vitam  ac  probrosum,  superstitem 
principi  suo  e.\  acie  recessisse.'  And  the  same  motive  appears  in  the  reproach 
which  Wiglaf  addresses  to  the  cowardly  followers  of  Beowulf: 

Nu  sceal  sincl'cgo      and  swyrdgifu, 
eall  eSelwyn       eowrum  cynne, 
lufen  alicgean  ;       londrihtes  mot 
tiffire  mJEgburge       monna  ;Tgh\\7lc 
Idel  hweorfan,       sy'5'San  a;'5elingas 
feorran  gefricgean       fleam  eowerne, 
domleasan  dSd  !       DeaiS  biS  sella 
eorla  gehwylcum       J'onne  edwitllf. 

11.  2884-2891. 

See  also  Maid.  220-252  ff. 

406.  gode  orfeorme.  Also  1.  161 7;  /ud.  271  ;  Mod.  49.  Cosijn  quotes  the 
Greek,  see  405-414,  note.  Dicht.  translates  'gottverlassen ';  Kemble,  'of  good 
devoid';  Root,  'forsaken  quite  by  God';  Hall,  'God-forsaken.' 

408-409.  Cf.  Chr.  193''-I95^:  scyle  manswara  laj^  leoda  gehwam  lifgan  sijiljan, 
fraco^'  in  folcum. 

410.  seht  besittap.  Equivalent  syntactically  to  eahtia&,  of  which  the  following 
clause  maybe  considered  the  object.    The  same  phrase  occurs  1.  60S  and  El.  473. 

412.  hiaforde  a>t  hilde.  The  scansion  of  the  half-line  is  _^^x  X  I  —  X  ^ 
according  to  Sievers,  Altgermanische  Meiril-,  §  85,  note  2,  the  only  other  occur- 
rence of  a  trisyllabic  word  of  the  form  _^^x  ^s  the  first  element  of  a  line  of 
this  type  is  Gu.  602  :  gastllcne  goddream,  _L—  x    I  -^— • 

414.  nearu.  Cf.  Beow.  2594:  nearo  ^rowode.  The  ace.  sg.  is  regularly  -e, 
exceptionally  (Sievers,  PBB.  I,  493)  -ti,  -o,  in  Maid.  48,  Beow.  2350  (to  which  add 
Beow.  2594),  and  the  present  passage. 

4i6'\  So  1.  1497'';  El.  723. 

421.  ofer  fealuwTie  flod.  Cf.  j^t'c^Ti-.  1950:  ofer  fealone  flod.  '  The  most  com- 
mon use  of  fealo  is  in  connection  with  water.  .  .  .  But  the  various  passages  in 
which  the  sea  is  referred  to  as  fallow  flood,  seem  to  be  more  conventional  and 
to  introduce  the  word,  in  part,  perhaps,  because  of  the  convenient  alHteration. 
I  hardly  think  that  in  these  passages  the  word  means  dusky,  as  is  sometimes 
suggested,  but  perhaps  yellowish  green,  a  common  color  in  the  English  and  Irish 
channels.'    Mead,  "Color  in  Old  English  Poetry,"  Pub.  of  ML  A.  XIV,  198-199. 

424.  siind  is  geblonden.  Preserving  the  MS.  reading,  K.  translates  'the  sand 
is  mixed  together,  the  abyss  with  the  strand.'  Hall,  and  Brooke,  p.  171,  fol- 
low K.  Reading  sund,  Gn.,  Dicht.,  translates  '  die  Flut  ist  gemengt,  der  Grund 
mit  dem  Griesse.'  Wiilker  remarks  that  the  change  from  sand  to  sund  is  unnec- 
essary, '  wie  schon  v.  425,  grund  wi^  greote  hiitte  beweisen  konnen.'  But  grund 
is  appositive  to  sund,  and  as  grund  can  mean  here  only  'ocean'  (see  425,  note) 
its  evidence  bears   quite   the  other  way.     Cf.   the  parallel  picture,  Beow.  212: 


I04  NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 

streamas  wundon,  sund  wiS  sande.  Gu.  1308,  sondlond gespearn,  grond  wi^  greote, 
is  not  a  parallel,  as  it  describes  the  landing  of  a  boat  on  shore.  El.  251,  sande 
beii-irecette,  should  surely  read  sunde  bewrecene,  since  the  boats  here  were  not 
beached,  but  were  riding  at  anchor. 

425.  grund  \^'i'3  greote.  For  grund  =  'ocean,  deep,'  cf.  1.  393,  note.  With 
greote  =  '  shore,'  cf.  runic  inscription  {Bibl.  I,  282),  \>x.r  he  on  greut  giswom. 

425*^-426.  Cf.  Beow.  478''-479  :  God  ea>e  masg  Jjone  dolscaSan  dSda  getwjefan  ; 
Ch7-.  173-174:  God  ea^e  masg  gehielan  hygesorge.  Cf.  also  1.  933;  and  Beow. 
2764  :  sine  eaSe  m^eg  .  .  .  gumcynnes  gehwone  oferhigian. 

426.  heaSoliSendum.  The  word  occurs  twice  elsewhere,  Beozv.  1798  and  2955 
(appositive  to  sa-niaiunim).  The  first  element  appears  as  simplex  in  Beow.  1862  : 
sfceall  hring-naca  ofer  heajm  bringan  lac  ond  luf-tacen.  But  cf.  Beotu.  2477,  ofer 
heafo,  '  over  the  ocean.'  Gm.,  p.  106  (so  also  Spr.  II,  40,  B.-T.,  p.  523),  explains 
the  word  as  derived  from  heah&o,  '  altitudo,'  and  distinguishes  from  /lea&o,  '  bel- 
lum,' which  he  says  would  give  the  meaning  '  piratae.'  But  Kluge  {PBB.  IX,  190) 
would  change  Beow.  1862,  heahti,  to  /lea/u,  pi.  of  /ucf  (as  in  Beow.  2477),  '^^^ 
rejects  the  explanation  hea&o-  =  /lea/i&o-,  since  the  form  in  compounds  should 
be  kea&-.  He  would  read  therefore  kea&oli&ende  =  '  kampfseefahrer ' ;  so  also 
Sweet,  Diet.,  '  war-sailor,  sea-warrior.'  But  neither  argument  is  conclusive ;  the 
meaning  '  sea '  for  hea?fo-,  however,  may  be  accepted  as  certain. 

427.  It  is  not  until  this  point  in  the  narrative  in  the  Greek  version  that  the 
boat  Is  cast  loose  from  land;  cf.  Bonnet,  p.  74,  11.  13-14  :  Kai  evdvs  elwev  6  'Itjo-oOs 
evl  rCJv  dyy^Xuv,  ' Aw6\vaov  to  ttXoiov.  The  Legend  does  not  state  clearly  when 
the  voyage  begins. 

428.  wuldorspedige.  The  only  occurrence  of  the  adj.;  but  cf.  Gen.  87:  setl 
wiildorspediim  ivelig,  of  heaven. 

429.  Ge  J»a»t  gehogodon.    Cf.  Beow.  632  :  ic  J^ast  hogode  J'a  ic  on  holm  gestah. 

430.  fara  folc.  Cf.  1.  1060^. 

432.  .lElmyrcna.  There  is  nothing  in  the  Greek  or  the  Legend  to  correspond 
to  this  name.  The  word  is  an  adjective  used  as  noun,  the  first  element  ael  =  eal 
(cf.  irlmihtig,  crhvihte,  etc.,  for  the  form  «■/-),  with  the  value  of  an  intensive,  the 
second  element  the  adjective  myrce,  '  dark,'  'black' ;  cf.  alfccle,  'very  poisonous.' 
It  means  here  Ethiopians.  Cf.  Ap.  64  :  mid Sigelwariini,  which  corresponds  to  apud 
Aethiopiam,  in  Bede's  martyrology,  as  the  seat  of  Matthew's  labors.  Sigehvare 
is  also  used  with  the  same  meaning  in  Ps.  LXXI,  9;  LXXXVI,  3;  and  Ex.  69. 
See  note  to  Ap.  64.  It  is  evidently  from  this  traditional  source  which  ascribes 
Africa  or  Ethiopia  to  Matthew  as  his  mission  that  the  poet  has  drawn  the  infer- 
ence that  the  action  of  the  story  of  Andrew  and  Matthew  took  place  in  the  land 
of  the  Ethiopians.  For  a  discussion  of  the  probable  situation  of  Mermedonia, 
see  Introd.  p.  Ixvi. 

436.  ge?>yd  ond  geSreatod.  Cf.  1.  520  ;  and  Sal.  533  :  ge'Sy  ^"  hie  [i.e.  wiestmas] 
ond  geiSreataS.    Yo\  ge&yd,  contract  verb,  cf.  Gram.,  §  408,  note  18. 

438  ff.    See  yl/«r/&  IV,  36  ff. 

439^    So  Beozv.  507. 

442.  bord.stieiVu.  'The  cordage'  or  'rigging.'  This  is  the  only  occurrence  of 
the  word;  it  is  glossed  in  all  the  dictionaries  (except  Simons,  p.  17,  'schifftau') 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  I05 

as  'shore.'  But,  as  Cosijn  points  out  [PBB.  XXI,  10),  'sea-shore'  does  not 
satisfy  the  demands  of  the  context,  since  the  boat  is  now  in  the  open  sea.  Brooke, 
p.  171,  guesses  'bulwarks.'  The  right  meaning,  however,  is  indicated  by  .^l^lfric's 
glossary,  tio/nina  naviicm  et  iiistriimenta  eariim  ( VV.  VV.  I,  288,  26),  where  sticl>  is 
glossed  'safon.'  Safon,  saphon  (according  to  DuCange)  =  funis  in  prora.  The 
word  must  be  taken  as  a  synonym  of  strcngas,  374,  \vSeclo,  375.  The  first  ele- 
ment of  the  compound  would  mean  'ship,'  the  whole  word  'the  rigging  of  the 
ship.' 

443.  y5ff  otFerre.  Cf.  iMetr.  XXVI,  29-30  :  stunede  sio  brune  yS  wi5  oSre  ;  and 
Psalm  XLII,  7:  'deep  calleth  unto  deep.'    Cf.  138,  note. 

444''-445>.  The  suggestion  for  the  picture  was  found  in  the  original;  cf. 
Bonnet,  p.  75,  11.  3-4:  Kal  avifxov  fieyaXov  yevofj-evov  (cat  rijs  da\a.<T<ry)S  KVfiaivofiivris, 
uKTTe  TO,  Kiifiara  wj/oidrjvat  Kal  yevicrdai  iiirb  t^  laTiifi  tov  TrXoiOi/ ;  Legend,  p.  1 17,  1.  22  : 
fram  J>am  winde  waes  geworden  swa  >3St  \>z.  selfan  yj^a  wSron  ahafene  ofer  J>3et 
scip.    A  similar  but  much  weaker  personification  is  found  in  Becnv.  783-784 : 

NoriS-Denum  stod 
atellc  egesa       anra  gehwylcum. 

445.  yOTid.  Cf.  the  parallel,  ofery&bord,  1.  298.  Gm.,  reading  j.^//^,  translates 
'  undarum  iter,  via ';  so  also  Gn.,  Dichi.,  '  Schrecken  oft  am  Seeweg ' ;  but  Spr. 
II,  767,  '  navigium,  navis.' 

448-^.    So  Dan.  725^ 

449.  to  mtfrum.  '  At  the  hands  of  the  Lord,'  as  in  C/ir.  773:  Utan  us  to 
Fffider  freoJ>a  wilnian.  For  other  examples,  see  Spr.  II,  539.  Professor  Kittredge 
calls  attention  to  the  idiom  on  .  .  .  niman,  in  which  the  equivalent  phrase  in  MnE. 
would  demand  'from'  (see  Spr.  II,  297,  for  examples),  and  the  construction  to 
'  ask  at '  a  person  (see  N^ED.  s.v.  '  ask').  Cf.  further  at  .  .  .findan,  e.g.  Jul.  658- 
659:  hEr  ge  [frofra]  agun  aet  maegna  Gode  ;  El.  1215:  aet  j'am  bisceope  bote 
findan;  An.  908:  milts  aet  mierum.  For  similar  constructions  with  verbs  of  see- 
ing, hearing,  etc.,  see  Sievers,  FBB.  XII,  189.  See  also  Wiilfing,  II,  321,  s.v. 
loilnian. 

451.  Wiilker  has  no  punctuation  after  eadgifa,  all  other  Edd.  a  comma  or 
semicolon. 

453.  sessade.  The  only  occurrence  of  the  word.  A  noun  sess,  'seat,'  occurs 
Beo'M.  2717  and  2756. 

454.  Da  ure  mod  ahloh.  Cf.  Becm.'.  730  :  J^a  his  mod  ah  log ;  Sal.  178:  naefre 
jer  his  ferh))  ahlog.    Buttenwieser,  p.  49,  calls  attention  to  the  similar  idiom  in 

Icel.  {f)rymskwij>a,  31): 

H16  niorri|,a 

hugr  i  briosti. 
Cf.  1.  140,  note. 

455.  gesegon.    An  Anglian  form;  cf.  Gram.,  §  391,  2,  note  7.   . 
457'\   So  Gen.  2590. 

458.   Cf.  El.  574 :  ic  eow  t5  so^e  secgan  wille. 

458-460.  Cf.  Beow.  572-573 ;  Wyrd  oft  nereS  unfaegne  eorl,  honne  his  ellen 
deah.  Proljably  the  same  formula  stood  in  Rid.  LXXIII,  9,  where  the  phrase 
gif  his  ellen  di-ag  remains  in  an  otherwise  corrupt  passage.    Cf.  also  Fu-d.  48:  a 


I06  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

he  biS  gedaeled,  gif  \>e  deah  hyge  ;  GeJt.  12S7-12SS:  Diihten  wiste  }>aEt  \>xs  ae^e- 
linges  ellen  dohte  ;  /I'/V/.  LXII,  7  :  Gif  J^aes  ondfengan  ellen  dohte  ;  SaL  2S3-284  : 
For^on  maeg  gehycgan,  se  'Se  his  heorte  deah,  \>xi  he  him  afirre  frecne  gel'ohtas. 
Grimm,  p.  xUi,  and  Fritzsche,  p.  44,  note  HildebrandsHed  55  :  ibu  dir  din  ellen 
taoc.  Cook  {MLN.  VIII,  59)  cites  numerous  examples  of  the  formula  in  Latin 
literature,  from  which  the  MnE.  proverb,  '  Fortune  favors  the  brave,'  appears 
to  have  been  derived.  The  Greek  (Bonnet,  p.  75,  1.  8)  has  nothing  corresponding 
to  460*^ :  6  "yap  Kijpios  'Itjctovs  ov  fxr]  iyKaTaXiwrj  i]fi7.s.  Perhaps  the  poet  may  have 
had  in  mind,  however.  Psalm  XXXVII,  25  ff.,  and  similar  passages. 

On  these  passages  Gummere,  Gerinanic  Origins^  p.  236,  remarks  as  follows  : 
'  Fate,  says  Beowulf,  as  he  tells  of  his  battle  with  the  sea-monsters  \Beow.  572  ff.], 
fate  often  saves  a  man  tf  he  have  plenty  of  conrage. 

Oft  Wyrd  preserveth 
undoomed  earl,  —  if  he  doughty  be. 

The  same  idea  and  the  same  phrase,  with  very  slight  change,  passed  into  the 

Christian  poetry  of  our  ancestors,  and  have  since  become  a  commonplace.'    See 

1612,  note.    A  somewhat  similar  sentiment  is  that  of  Hy.  I,  IV,  116— 117  {^Bibl.  II, 

223) : 

God  bij>  jjst,       )ionne  mon  him  sylr  ne  mzeg 

wyrd  onwendan,       J^st  he  Jjonne  wel  Jjolige. 

461.   The  whole  line  occurs  again  in  Gii.  484. 

463^.   So  879  ;    Gil.  147. 

464.  Cf.  1.  820,  and  Beovj.  644-646 :  oH'ret  semninga  sunu  Healfdenes  secean 
wolde  Sfenraeste ;  Beozn.  1640-1641,  oJ^'Sast  semninga  to  sele  comon  frome 
fyrdhwate. 

468.  gryrehvvile.  Although  the  second  element  of  this  compound  usually 
carries  with  it  the  signification  of  'time,'  the  first  element  here  appears  to  bear  all 
the  meaning  of  the  word  —  'fright,  terror.'  Sievers  {PBB.  XVIII,  406)  discusses 
similar  compounds,  e.g.  earfo&J^rdg,  earfo&hwil,  with  the  value  merely  of  earfo& ; 
Beow.  242J,  orleghwila,  equivalent  to  the  gen.  pi.  of  orlege;  Beoiv.  2709,  sigehunla, 
equivalent  to  the  gen.  pi.  of  sige\  and  points  out  similar  compounds  with  other 
expressions  of  time,  e.g.  OHG.  sioh-tago,  'sickness,'  MUG.  we-tac,  tue-tage,  'pain, 
sorrow.' 

470^.  Cf.  1.  552,  note.  —  470^.  Cf.  1.  671  ;  Jul.  79:  ferj^locan  onspeon ;  El.  86: 
hreSerlocan  onspeon. 

471-474-   Cf-  11-  493-495'  note;  11.  553-554,  note. 

474-476.  Cf.  Beoza.  426-428 :  Ic  J>e  nu5a,  brego  Beorht-Dena,  biddan  wille, 
eodor  Scyldinga,  anre  bene. 

478.  Grimm  and  Baskervill  put  a  period  after  fsetedsinces. 

480.  godne.  The  strong  form  after  pinne  because  the  word  is  detached  from 
its  syntactical  group  .''  Professor  Kittredge  suggests  that  the  adj.  is  strong  because 
it  is  here  felt  as  an  appositive  to  ]7inne  freondscipe. 

483.  este  wyrtFest.  The  metre  confirms  the  reading  este,  as  in  Gen.  1509: 
J^a  him  ealra  wass  ara  este  aelmihtig  God ;  and  Beow.  945 :  J>3et  hyre  eald  metod 
este  wsere. 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  IO7 

484.  ora»ftes  neosan.    Cf.  A/>.  103. 

487.   Ix'steiiidoii.    The  spelling  -on  for  -an  finds  a  parallel  in  bruconne,  1.  2j. 

489.  on  yileO'e.  This  is  the  only  occurrence  of  the  phrase.  The  context  favors 
on  geofoue,  appositive  to  on  sajbate,  490'';  cf.  also  ttiv  6d\a<7<rav  of  the  Greek 
version,  1.  490,  note.  For  the  meaning  'fate,  lot,  chance,'  for  gifeSe,  cf.  Beovj. 
3085 :  waes  J>£Et  gifetSe  t5  swi5,  )>e  Sone  [J)eodcyning]  }>yder  ontyhte. 

490.  syxtync  siO'uin.  Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  75,  11.  17-18  :  el/catS^/carov  7dp  eirXtvcra  rrjv 
ddXaa-ffav,  /cat  ISoii  tovto  iirraKaiSiKaTov.  In  spite  of  this,  Brooke,  p.  172,  remarks: 
'  Then,  either  because  the  poet  wishes  to  give  local  color  and  invents  voyages  for 
Andrew,  or,  as  I  would  fain  believe,  introduces  his  own  personal  experience  of 
the  deep  and  imputes  it  to  Andrew,  he  tells  how  he  has  been  sixteen  times  at 
sea,  and  contrasts  these  old  journeys  with  his  present  one';  also,  p.  414,  '  There 
is  even  a  personal  touch,  as  I  believe,  in  one  passage,  which  speaks  of  his  having 
been  sixteen  times  on  sea-journeys.'  Hammerich-Michelsen,  Aelteste  christl.  Epik, 
pp.  99-100,  translates  this  passage,  11.  489-505,  remarking :  '  stehet  der  Herr  Jesus 
nicht  hier  ungefahr  ebenso  am  Bord,  wie  in  dem  Tagen  des  Heidenthums  Thor 
oder  Odin,  wie  im  Mittelalter,  der  heilige  Olaf  ? '    Cf.  1.  364  ff.,  note. 

491-492.  Translate  '  I  .  .  .  cold  as  to  my  hands  stirring  the  water-streams.' 
3Iiindum  freorig  is  paralleled  by  Ph.  86  :  fe&rmn  strong,  and  by  P/i.  100 :  fe&rum 
ivlonc  (Bright).  3Iuncluin  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  dative  of  specification.  Freorig 
is  nom.  sg.  masc,  agreeing  with  ic,  489',  and  hrerendiim  is  dat.  pi.,  agreeing  with 
mundum.  Cf.  Wand.  4  :  hreran  mid  hondum  hrlmcealdesS  ;  CIn\  677-678  :  sund- 
wudu  drifan,  hreran  holmj^raece. 

492.  is  (Sys  ane  ma.  '  Is  this  once  more.'  Grein's  translation,  Dicht.  and 
Spr.  I,  32,  '  doch  ist  dies  ein  grosser '  (ane  taken  as  nom.  sg.  neut.  weak)  does 
not  give  the  necessary  meaning  of  one  journey  more,  a  seventeenth.  Cook,  p.  226, 
translates  '  this  makes  another  journey,'  construing  ane  as  Grein  does ;  so  also 
Root  and  Hall.  Kemble  translates  '  this  is  once  more.'  As  there  is  no  reason 
why  ane  should  be  inflected  weak,  Kemble's  interpretation  of  ane  as  instrumental 
adverb  is  to  be  preferred  ;  syxtyne  siJfuni,  1.  490-^,  is  to  be  understood  as  adverbial, 
'sixteen  times'  (cf.  o'Sre  siSe  etc.),  rather  than  'on  sixteen  journeys.'     Cf.  Ps. 

LXVIII,  4: 

Hiora  is  mycle  ma       J'onne  ic  me  hsebbe 
on  heafde  nu       hitra  feaxes. 

493.  Swa  =  S7vd  hiah. 

493-495.  Cf.  11.  498-499;  Beow.  247''-249'^ :  Niefre  ic  maran  geseah  eorla  ofer 
eorl>an  Sonne  is  eower  sum,  secg  on  searwum  ;  Jul.  547''-55o-^: 

ic  to  sojie  wat 
Jjaet  ic  »r  ne  sIS       Snig  ne  mette 
in  woruldrlce       wij)  )>§  gellc 
))ristran  ge)>ohtes. 

Cf.  11-  553-554.  note. 

494.  ]?ry'ffbearn  lijeletJa.  The  metre  and  the  sense  are  both  improved  by 
Cosijn's  emendation.  Synonymous  nouns  in  juxtaposition  (except  Dryliien 
Hale7id,  541,  897,  1407)  are  not  found  elsewhere  in  Andreds,  and  but  rarely  in  the 
body  of  the  poetry;  examples  are  cited  by  Sievers  {PBB.  IX,  137)  as  follows: 


lo8  NOTES   ON   ANDREAS 

Beow.  398,    1259,  2198,  2493;    ^^'-  1119-    Holthausen   {Angl.  Beibl.  XV,   73-74) 
regards  El.  140:  daro&  iesc,  as  in  the  same  construction.    See  1340^ 

495.  steoran  ofer  staefnan.  Cosijn  {FBB.  XXI,  10)  takes  steoran  as  infin., 
in  which  case  ofer  is  illogical,  unless  with  Gn.,  Spr.  II,  481,  steoran  be  taken  as 
intransitive.  The  better  reading  is  that  of  Sievers  in  his  comment  on  Cosijn's 
note :  steoran  ace.  sg.  of  steora,  '  steersman,'  appositive  thus  to  prySbearn, 
494*,  and  niann,  493''. — hTiile(5.  'The  surge  resounds.'  Gm.,  K.,  Gn.,  read 
hwile&  from  a  hypothetical  hwilan,  '  to  delay.'  But  Gn.,  Spr.  II,  121,  cancels  the 
form  hwTle^  and  glosses  (p.  117)  under  hwelati,  '  clangere ' ;  so  Dicht.,  'Die 
Stromflut  walzt  sich.'  This  is  the  only  occurrence  of  the  word,  but  onhwile&, 
'  reboat,'  is  recorded  by  W.  W.  I,  528,  39,  and  a  noun  on  hwelunge,  '  in  clangore,' 
ibid.,  I,  423,  20. 

496.  beate}7  brimstseSo.  Baskervill  supposes  a  3d  sg.  beaiaj>,  citing  ]7reata?J, 
520,  and  ganga}?,  891,  as  further  examples;  but  preataS  is  the  normal  form 
for  the  2d  class  of  weak  verbs,  and  gangaS  is  plural  (cf.  Bright's  note,  JUL  A'. 
II,  81),  the  construction  looking  to  the  implied  sense.  Read  therefore  beatej?, 
streamwelni,  495'',  being  subject,  and  brinistaeSo,  ace.  pi.,  object ;  thus  Dicht., 
'  Die  Stromflut  .  .  .  peitscht  die  Brandungsgestade.'  K.,  taking  brimstaetfo  as 
two  words,  '  the  sea  beateth  the  shores.'  The  picture  of  the  surf  on  the  shore  is 
somewhat  incongruous  in  a  description  of  the  open  sea,  and  one  would  like  to 
read  as  in  1.  442  ;  but  the  other  seems  to  be  the  conventional  phrasing ;  cf.  besides 
239,  1543,  the  following:  Rid.  Ill,  6:  hwaelmere  hlimme'S,  hliide  grimme'S; 
streamas  sta})u  beata^;  and  Metr.  VI,  15:  eac  \>&  ruman  sE  nor'Serne  yst  nede 
gebiede'S,  l^get  hlo  strange  geondst3?red  on  staSu  beate'5.  —  ful  scrid.  Gm.  pre- 
sents the  alternatives  :  fulscryd,  '  plene  instructus,'  from  scrild,  '  vestitus,  orna- 
tus,  apparatus,'  quoting  £1.  258,  subst.,  gil&scrud \  ox  fnlscrid,  'plene  incedens,' 
from,  scri&an,  'ire,  ingredi,'  though  if  from  the  latter  word  he  thinks  the  form 
should hefulscj'ida.  Gn.,  Dicht.  and  Spr.  II,  41 1,  Root,  Hall,  and  Simons  (p.  118), 
follow  Gm.'s  second  explanation;  K.,  the  first,  translating  'this  boat  is  fully 
clothed.'  As  the  second  of  Gm.'s  explanations  fits  the  context  better  than  the 
first,  it  is  to  be  accepted;  cf.  also  Icel.  (Cleas.-Vig.,  p.  557)  7ne&  ftdbim  skri& 
{Biskupa  Sogur  II,  30),  where  skri&  means  the  gliding  motion  of  the  ship.  On 
the  other  hand  the  derivation  of  scrid  from  scrydan  <  scrud  derives  some  con- 
firmation from  the  MnE.  shrouds  of  a  ship ;  Icel.  skric&  (Cleas.-Vig.,  p.  558)  has 
the  same  meaning. 

497.  Cf.  Beow.  21S:  flota  fami-heals  fugle  gellcost. 

499.  ofer  ycTlade.  The  MS.  reading  ySlafe  would  mean  'on  the  shore';  cf. 
Ex.  585,  on  y&ld/e,  equivalent  to  o/i  geofones  sia&e,  1.  5S0 ;  ^.nd  fyres,  hoviera  Id/, 
meaning  '  sword.'  Bugge  {FBB.  XII,  88-S9)  comments  on  the  significance  of 
y&ldf,  '  shore.' 

501.  on  landsceare.  Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  76, 1.  i  :  oJs  itrl  rfis  yr/s.  The  word  occurs 
again,  1229;  and  cf.  folcsceare,  684.  The  word  is  another  illustration  of  the 
fact  that  the  second  element  of  a  compound  may  be  practically  meaningless;  see 
468,  note. 

501-502.  Cf.  C/ir.  850-851 :  Nu  is  ^on  gellcost  swa  we  on  laguflode  ofer  cald 
waeter  ceolum  liSan. 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  IO9 

504.  brondstaefne.  The  first  element  of  this  compound  has  of  course  nothing 
to  do  with  bra>td,  '  fire,'  as  in  1.  768.  The  picture  intended  is  evidently  the  same 
as  that  in  1.  273,  brante  ceole.  Grimm,  p.  xxxv,  suggested  the  reading  broiit- 
shrfiif,  followed  by  Grein  and  Cosijn.  But  perhaps  brond  is  to  be  retained  in 
the  same  sense  as  staefn,  forming  thus  a  pleonastic  compound;  cf.  Icel.  (Cleas.- 
Vig.,  p.  7O)  brandr,  'the  raised  prow  and  poop,  ship's  he^k' fellr  brattr  breki 
brdndiim  /urrri,  '  the  waves  rise  high  above  the  "  brandar." ' 

The  notion  of  shipwreck  expressed  by  brecan  brondstaefne,  'shatter  the 
high-prowed  (ship),'  seems  somewhat  too  violent  for  the  context  here.  One 
would  like  to  take  brondsta>fne  as  a  noun  compound,  '  prow,'  ',bow,'  and  read 
breean  on  (or  ofer)  brondstaefne,  'there  the  storm  nor  the  wind  may  move  it, 
nor  the  water-floods  break  over  the  high  prow.' 

Grimm,  Grein,  and  Wiilker  put  only  a  comma  after  brondstaefne,  the  other 
Edd.  a  semicolon.  —  snowetJ.    Cf.  1.  1430,  note. 

505''-509.   The  allusions  to  the  youth  of  the  pilot  are  developed  from  a  single 

word,  a  vocative  veavicTKe  (Bonnet,  p.  76,  1.  2),  in  the  Ilpdlets.    But  perhaps  the  poet 

of  Andreas  had  in  mind  the  following  words   spoken  by  Hro'Sgar  of  Beowulf, 

Beoia.  1841-1S45  : 

pe  l>a  wordcwydas       wi[t]tig  Drihten 

on  sefan  sende  !       ne  hyrde  ic  snotorlicor 

on  swa  geongum  feore       guman  J)ingian  ; 

\>VL  eart  maegenes  Strang       end  on  mode  frod, 

wis  wordcvvida. 
I 

506.  ■wintrunn  frod.  The  word  /rod,  literally  'wise,'  is  used  frequently  in 
the  sense  of  'advanced  in  years,'  'old,'  eg.  gcariim,  misserum,  fyrtidagum  f>-dd, 
etc. ;  see  Spr.  I,  351. 

507.  faroSlacende.  Nom.,  agreeing  with  ?fu,  1.  505,  or  the  implied  subject  of 
hafast,  1.  507.    Cook,  p.  227,  construes  the  word  as  vocative. 

511.  on  sielade.  So  Beow.  1157;  the  only  other  occurrence  of  the  noun  is 
Beo7ij.  1139:  to  Sffilade. 

512.  scipum  under  scealcum.  Grimm,  p.  109,  has  difiiculty  in  explaining 
this  phrase.  He  suggests  for  scealcuni  a  form  from  a  hypothetical  scealc  or 
seek,  Icel.  skelkr,  'fear,  terror.'  Cosijn  {FBB.  XXI,  n)  regards  both  scealcum 
and  the  plural  solpum  with  suspicion,  suggesting  that  the  half-line  may  have  been 
taken  bodily  from  some  other  poem.  But  the  plural  scipum  is  in  keeping  here  ; 
the  statement  is  a  generalization  and  need  not  apply  to  a  single  ship.  In  syntax 
the  word  is  to  be  taken  as  coordinate  with  briinhengestum,  513''.  For  scealc, 
'sailor,'  cf.  WItale  30-31:  ond  t>onne  in  deaSsele  drence  bifasste'b'  scipu  mid 
scealcum. 

515.  smJ  nesan.  Translate  '  At  times  it  befalls  us  grievously  on  the  waves, 
upon  the  sea,  though  we  survive,  pass  through  the  terrible  journey.'  The  evident 
parallel  to  this  passage  is  El.  1 003-1004  :  gif  hie  brimnesen  ond  gesundne  sI'S 
settan  mosten ;  and  on  the  strength  of  this  passage  Gn.,  Spr.  II,  446,  and  Cosijn 
{PBB.  XXI,  11)  would  read  here  si&nesaii,  as  noun,  object  of  geferan.  But 
the  passage  in  El.  confessedly  offers  difiiculties  (cf.  Bihl.  II,  183)  and  should 
not  carry  too  much  weight  in  determining  the  construction  in  Andreas.    The 


no  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

unconstrained  reading  here  is  that  which  takes  nesan  and  geferan  as  coordinate 
verbs,  in  the  optative  mood.    Cf.  Gen.  1341  :  J>am  \>e  mid  sceolon  mereflod  nesan. 

517''.   So  Gen.  1251  ;  Dait.  174;  Metr.  xi,  25. 

519.  brune  y<Ja.  Besides  the  passages  in  which  it  is  descriptive  of  the  waves, 
the  adjective  brun  is  used  of  armor  and  weapons.  Note  also  brunwann,  1306, 
and  cf.  the  ballad  phrase  '  wan  water.'     It  probably  means  merely  '  dusky,'  '  dark.' 

523.  \vuldras  fylde.  The  genitive  in  -as  is  also  found  in  1.  1501,  heofgnas; 
for  other  examples,  cf.  Sp7-.  I,  179,  s.v.  cytiing;  Napier,  Uber  die  Werke  des  alteiig. 
Erzbischofs  Wulfstan,  p.  67 ;  and  Sievers,  Gratii.,  §  237,  note  i.  These  -as  geni- 
tives in  Afidreas  are  to  be  regarded  rather  as  late  West-Saxon  forms  than  as 
survivals  from  an  early  Anglian  original  text.  The  construction  oifyllan  followed 
by  the  genitive  finds  a  parallel  in  Chr.  408-409  : 

for)5on  J>u  gefyldest,       foldan  ond  rodoras, 
wigendra  Hleo,       wuldres  Jnnes. 

Cf.  also  El.  1 134:  wuldres  gefylled.  The  usual  construction  zitQi  fyllan  is  the 
accusative  and  instrumental  (cf.  Shipley,  p.  t,t,). 

524.  beorhtne  boldwelan.    So  Jul.  503  and  Ap.  ;^^. 

525.  purh  his  anes  niiht.    Cf.  Gen.  272,  C/ir.  685:  )>urh  his  anes  craeft. 
528'^.   So  Jul.  262.  —  All  Edd.,  except  Grimm  and  Grein,  put  a  period  or  semi- 
colon after  J^rymsittendes. 

532.  arySa.  Cf.  1.  383,  note. 

535.  wuldres  blted.    Equivalent  merely  to  '  heaven  ' ;  cf.  1.  356,  note. 

541''.  Cf.  Beow.  954-955:  Jiczt Jiin  dotn  lyfa&  dwa  to  aldre,  of  Beowulf;  Chr. 
405  :  a  J>Tn  doin  %uunaj>,  of  the  Lord;  El.  450-453  :  ac  l^ara  dom  leofaS  .  .  .  Se  )'one 
anhangnan  Cyning  heriaj>  ond  lofia'5. 

543^.   So  669=' ;  Az.  187.    Cf.  Ap.  15  ;  Ps.  CIV,  6:  geweor'Sude  ofer  werJ)eoda. 

544-548.  Cf.  Gu.  862  :  n^nig  haslej^a  is  j^e  areccan  msge  o^^e  rim  wite  ;  Hy. 
Ill,  17-1S  {Bibl.  II,  214): 

ne  magon  by  nSfre  areccean       ne  \>-sX  gerim  wytan 
hu  J?u  mjere  eart,       mihtig  drihten  ; 

El.  635  :  Ic  ne  mceg  areccan,  nu  ic  Jjast  rim  ne  can.  Cf.  also  Jul.  313  ;  Chr.  222  ; 
Panther  3. 

546.  Saette.    '  Of  such  sort  that  he,'  etc.    Other  examples  are  given  in  Spr.  II, 

573- 

548.  daelest.    Pogatscher,  Attglia  XXIII,  263,  calls  attention  to  the  omission 

of  the  subject  after  hu. 

552.  wis  on  gewitte.  Cf.  11.  316,  470  ;  the  model  for  the  passage,  however, 
was  Craft.  1.  13:  wis  on  gewitte  o^j^e  on  wordcwidum.  In  both  passages  Bright 
{MLAf.  II,  81)  takes  ■wis  to  be  a  noun, '  wisdom,'  in  the  genitive  case  in  Crcrft.  13, 
in  the  dative  (apparently  coordinate  with  geofiiin,  1.  551'')  case  in  the  passage 
in  Andreas;  the  inflection  -e  in  both  passages  he  thinks  has  either  been  elided 
or  carelessly  dropped,  or  the  construction  has  been  misunderstood.  But  a  noun 
■  wis  =  wisdom  is  not  recorded,  and  in  the  light  of  the  other  occurrences  of  the 
phrase  it  seems  best  to  regard  it  not  as  an  amplification  of  geofum,  but  as  an  adj. 
in  the  nom.  case,  agreeing  with  <5u,  550.    This  is  also  Professor  Bright's  present 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  HI 

opinion.     Cf.  Ilbl.  78  :  ivTs  on  J>i>tii»i  i^civitte  otui  on  />tiium  'worde  snodor,  of  the 
angel  Gabriel. 

553-554-   Ci.Beo'c.  1842-1S43  : 

ne  hyrde  ic  snotorlicor 
on  swa  geongum  fGore       gunian  J)ingian  ; 

and  cf.  also  11.  471  ff. ;  493  ff. 

556*.  Q,i.  Jul.  258:  fraegn  J>a  fromllce.  —  556''.  So  Metr.  XX,  275;  cf.  Kid. 
LXXXIV,  10,  or  Olid  ende,  with  the  same  meaning.  See  Rfz\  I,  8,  11  ;  XXI,  6; 
XXII,  13. 

557.  Cf.  Nid.  XXXIII,  13-14  :  Rece,  gif  \>\\  cunne,  wis  worda  gleaw  ;  El.  856: 
Saga,  gif  '50  cunne. 

558''.   Cf.  be  (bi)  s^m  tweonum,  Beo7v.  858,  1297,  1685  ;  Ex.  442,  562  ;   Git.  237, 

1333- 

559.  3a   arleasan.    That    is,   Iiiden  cynn  ,  which   is  in  apposition.    Cosijn's 

emendation,  &(ct  drlease,  does  not  improve  the  grammar  and  is  bad  stylistically. 

561.  Grein  and  Wulker  have  only  a  comma  after  hearinc\vide,  but  the  other 
Edd.  a  period. 

564.  Cf.  El.  865-S66*  :  oSSaet  him  gecy 5de  cyning  aelmihtig  wundor  for  weoro- 
dum  ;   C/ir.  482  :  weoredum  cy5a5. 

565*.  So  Men.  129,  also  referring  to  the  miracles  of  the  Lord.  The  phrase  is 
a  favorite  one  with  Wulfstan ;  cf.  Napier's  ed.,  p.  159,1.  5:  swutol  and  gesyne ; 
p.  163,  1.  14:  swytol  and  gesyne,  etc.  Cf.  also  Gen.  2806:  sweotol  is  ond 
gesene. 

567.   Cf.  C/tr.  1 196  :  id  hleo  ond  to  hroher  hcrlehu  cytine,  of  Christ. 

568^-569-'.   See  i677''-i678'\ 

569.  So  650,  1678;  El.  334;   Gu.  1 104. 

570.  domagende.  Qi.  Jul.  186:  folcagende. — dsel  njenigne.  Cf.  Bonnet, 
p.  76,  11.  17-18  :  IIujs  o'vv  ovK  €Trl(7T€v<rav  avr^  oi  'lovSaiot. ;  raxo-  ovk  iTroiriffeu  ariij.ua 
fvujiriov  avrOiv,  the  frtetre  peode  of  1.  571  are  the  Jews  of  the  Greek  version. 
The  reply  which  Andrew  makes,  1.  573  ff.,  also  demands  nSnigne  in  1.  570. 

573.  Cf.  1.  137  ;  El.  643  :  hu  is  }>aet  geworden  on  J>ysse  werl-eode. 

575.  fpf-  The  word  is  regularly  feminine,  with  accusative  in  -e.  But  an  accu- 
sative plural  eardgyfu  occurs,  Ps.  LXXI,  10,  and  a  dative  singular  mid  J>dm  god- 
cundan  gyfe  (Bede,  ed.  Miller,  p.  34,  1.  17),  both  examples  being  pointed  out  by 
Cosijn  {PBB.  XXI,  252) ;  from  these  two  citations  an  ace.  sg.  gif  may  be  inferred 
for  the  present  passage.  Wiilker  cites  the  compounds  gifstol,  gif/ienl,  gifsceai,  in 
support  of  a  nominative  form  gif;  but  such  compounds  prove  nothing,  since  all 
tf-stems  as  first  element  in  compounds  end  regularly  with  a  consonant. 

576\  So  C/ir.  811. 

577  ff.  See  l\/att.  XI,  5;  Luke  VII,  21-22. 

580.  Cf.  Chr.  1508:  werge  wonhale. 

582.  on  grundwaege.  The  second  element  of  the  compound  is  not  the  word 
wag,  'wall'  (see  714,  732),  as  stated  by  Grimm,  p.  m,  also  Sjr.  I.,  531,  and 
B.-T.,  492.  It  is  a  form  of  7ueg,  '  way  ' ;  for  examples  of  cr  for  e,  cf.  -raeced,  709  ; 
saegl,  1456.  In  nieSlan,  1440,  e  appears  for  tr.  The  word  grundweg,  which 
occurs  only  in  this  passage,  is  a  compound  like  eor&weg,  foldweg,  Jlodiueg,  branrdd, 


112  NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 

etc.,  and  takes  its  meaning  from  the  first  element.  Translate,  therefore, '  the  earth.' 
See  206,  note. 

583^.  Cf.  El.  944-945 :  seSe  deadra  feala  worde  awehte. 

585.  Cf.  El.  558:  cy'Sdon  craeftes  miht ;  Chr.  1145:  cy5de  creeftes  meaht. 
See  1.  1460,  note. 

586-588.  See  John  II,  1-16.  The  Greek  (Bonnet,  p.  78, 1.  2)  reads  merely  xibwp 
eh  olvov  fj.eTe^a\€v.  Heremaegen,  literally  '  army-troop,'  appears  to  have  weakened 
merely  to  the  meaning  '  throng  ' ;  see  Glossary  for  citations. 

587.  ond  ■«'endan  het.  Cosijn  {PBB.  XXI,  12)  would  take  ond  as  equiva- 
lent to  a  relative  &(ct,  object  of  het,  and  he  cites  examples  in  which  he  regards  07id 
as  having  the  function  of  a  relative.  But  this  use  of  07id  is  not  established  by  his 
citations,  nor  is  it  necessary  in  the  present  passage. 

588.  on  J>a  beteran  gecynd.  A  formula;  cf.  El.  1038,  1061  ;  and  Wulfstan, 
ed.  Napier,  p.  145:  uton  wendan  georne  to  beteran  craefte. 

589-594.  See  Matt.  XIV,  1 7  ff. ;  3Iark  VI,  38  ff. ;  Lukeiy.,  1 2  ff. ;  John  VI,  8  ff. 
The  poet  was  apparently  not  sufficiently  familiar  with  the  version  of  the  story  vajohn 
to  recall  that  it  is  Andrew  who  is  there  said  to  have  provided  the  loaves  and  fishes. 

591^.   Cf.  Beow.  1424:  feha  eal  gesiet,  of  the  followers  of  Beowulf. 

592.  reonigmode.  Cf.  Whale  22-23:  h£ele)>  beob  on  wynnum  reonigmode 
raeste  gelyste ;  Gii.  1069:  waes  him  raeste  neod  reonigmodum.  The  MS.  reading 
reomiginode  is  the  only  occurrence  of  a  form  reoniig.  Grimm,  p.  112,  followed 
by  Spr.  II,  374,  compares  this  form  with  Goth,  rimis  '  quies  ' ;  but  Grimm  refrains 
from  a  decision,  noting  that  the  context  favors  the  reading  reonig-,  'w'eary.'  As 
Sievers  points  out  {PBB.  X,  506)  the  correct  reading  here  is  undoubtedly  reonig- 
mode; both  the  metre  and  the  sense  of  the  passage  demand  this  form. 

594.   Cf.  1484^;   Dan.  567:  man  on  moldan ;    Gii.  962:  mon  on  moldan. 

595-596.  Cf.  11.  811-812;  El.  511-512:  nil  Su  meaht  gehyran,  haele'S  mm  se 
leofa,  hu,  etc. ;  El.  523  :  hyse  leofesta. 

597.  speon.  The  other  occurrences  of  spanan  in  the  verse  are  all  in  the  evil 
sense,  '  entice,  allure '  (see  Spr.  II,  467) ;  but  the  word  occurs  frequently  in  homi- 
letic  or  biblical  prose  (see  B.-T.,  p.  898)  in  a  good  sense,  as  in  the  present  passage. 

598'^.  So  1693;  Gu.  1 154;  cf.  Ch7-.  913:  on  gefean  fasger;  to  J^am  langan 
geiean, /z(l.  670,  Gi/.  1063,  1281  ;  in  >am  ecan  gefean,  Gu.  1052,  1159,  1345;  to 
)>am  sS^an  gefean,  Gu.  1238. 

599*.   So  C/rr.  1247. 

600.  Cf.  Beow.  187  :   aefter  dea'Sdasge  Drihten  secean. 

601.  "weges  weard.  Kemble  translates  correctly  'ruler  of  the  wave';  so  also 
Root.  But  Spr.  II,  655,  and  the  other  translations  take  -weges  as  derived  from 
iveg,  'way.'    Cf.  1.  632. 

6o2'\  So  Gu.  998;  Ph.  550;  El.  1072. 

605.  Cf.  El.  817  :  J'ara  )'e  ic  gefremede  nalles  feam  siSum ;  Jul.  354:  )'ara  he 
ic  fremede  nalass  feam  sil>um. 

606.  foloiim  to  frofre.    So  El.  11 42,  Chr.  1422;  Beow.  14:  folce  to  frofre. 
611.  ]?urh  deopne  gedwolan.    So  Jul.  301.    The  Edd.  put  no  punctuation 

after  gedAVolan,  and  a  strong  pause  after  larum  ;  but  deofles  larum  and  Avra- 
<5uni  ^I'iSrlogan  should  be  held  together.    Cf.  1.  679. 


NOTES    ON   ANDREAS  II3 

613^.  Cf.  1297;  lVi(f.  9:  wrajjes  warlogan.  —  seo  wyrd.  Hall,  p.  82,  'The 
original  has  Wyr<l ;  siie,  in  the  religion  of  our  forefathers  before  their  conversion 
to  Christianity,  was  the  goddess  of  destiny,  and  presided  over  the  fates  of  men 
and  of  gods.  She,  of  course,  still  rules  the  affairs  of  these  unconverted  cannibals.' 
A  similar  use  of  the  word  is  found  in  1.  1561,  also  of  the  Mermedonians.  See 
Golther,  Ilandbuch  der  ge7->nan.  Mytliologie,  pp.  104-105;  Gummere,  Germanic 
Origins,  p.  372,  for  a  discussion  of  the  meaning  of  the  term  7oy rd  Tind  its  occur- 
rences in  the  literature  of  the  Germanic  peoples. 

The  word  in  its  later  development  has  had  an  interesting  history.  '  Aus  dem 
Schottischen  wohl  ist  ^veird  ins  Neuenglische  gedrungen.  Chaucer  kennt  zwar 
7verdes,  luierdes  neben  wirdes  (vgl.  Skeats  Glossar),  also  Formen  mit  kenti- 
schem  e  Inr  y,  aber  das  wort  scheint  bald  nach  ihm  ausgestorben  zu  sein.  Denn  in 
Holinsheds  Bericht  liber  Macbeth  iibernimmt  er  aus  Bellenden  den  schottischen 
Ausdruck  weird  sisters,  der  schon  bei  Wyntoun  (ed.  I>aing,  VIII,  1864)  und  bei* 
Douglas  (II,  142/24)  vorkommt,  in  der  schottischen  Schreibung  "weird,  und  findet 
es  notig,  ihn  durch  den  Zusatz  zu  erklaren :  "that  is  (as  ye  would  say),  the  god- 
desses of  destinie "  (vgl.  Delius'  Shakespeare,  II,  300).  Aus  Holinshed  hat 
Shakespeare  das  Wort  iibernommen,  aber  den  Druckern  der  Folios  war  es  offen- 
bar  fremd,  denn  sie  setzten  dafiir  weyward.  Erst  Theobald  stellte  auf  Grund  des 
Berichtes  Holinsheds  die  Lesung  weird  her,  und  erst  von  da  aus  scheint  der 
Ausdruck  wieder  in  weiteren  Gebrauch  gekommen  zu  sein,  aber  ohne  das  Zeichen 
seines  Ursprungs,  die  schottische  Schreibung  mit  ei,  aufzugeben.'  Luick,  Studien 
ziir  Englischen  Lautgeschichte,  pp.  185-186  {Wiener  Beitrdge  zitr  Englischeti 
Philologie  XVII). 

615.  Averige  mid  \\^eriguni.    Cf.  1.  360,  note. 

616.  bitcrne.  Professor  Hart  suggests  bitterne;  so  also  Sievers  {PBB.  X, 
496).    But  cf.  C/ir.  765:  biterne  strsel. 

619''.   Cf.  1086;   Gen.  1669:  folces  rieswan. 

620.  -w'undor  aefter  wundre.  So  Becnc.  931.  Grein  and  Wlilker  have  no 
punctuation  after  gesiehSe,  all  other  Edd.  a  period. 

622.  folcrted  freniede.  Cf.  Beow.  3006:  folcred  fremede,  of  Beowulf.  —  to 
friffe  hogode.    Cosijn  (PBB.  XXI,  12)  suggests  to  frioSe  hogde. 

625.  iiiaga  mode  rof.  So  984.  —  nifegen.  'Miracles.'  Cf.  Legend,  p.  117, 
11.  15-16:  spec  to  )>mum  discipulum  be  J'am  maegenum  t)e  )nn  Lareow  dyde. 
Other  examples  are  noted  by  B.-T.,  p.  655,  but  the  above  have  escaped  him. 
Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  77,  II.  13-14:  Trolai  elcnv  ai  8vi>d/j.eis  as  iiroi-qcrev  ev  Ttj}  KpvwTi^  \ 
4>av4pw(T6v  fjLoi  avrds.  The  word  in  the  Latin  original  which  is  translated  here 
nifegen  was  undoubtedly  'virtus  ';  cf.  J/uii.  VII,  22,  'in  nomine  tuo,  virtutes  multas 
fecimus,'  and  for  other  examples  see  Mark  VI,  2,  5  ;  Acts  VIII,  13  ;  Matt.  XI,  20. 

626.  deormod  on  digle.  Cf.  Gti.  c)2^:Hleormdd  on  degle,  of  Guthlac  in  his 
retreat. 

627.  besiEton.  The  subject  is  omitted  after  <5a,  'when':  'when  often  ye  held 
council  with  the  Lord.'    See  Pogatscher,  Anglia  XXIII,  264. 

630^.  So  1200;  Chr.  509.  —  geli-wa-re.  Sievers  {PBB.  X,  485)  would  regu- 
larly replace  ge/noiere  by  the  earlier  forms  ge/ncxrs,  gehwam  ;  see  also  Gram., 
§341,  note  4. 


114  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

631.  Jjiirh  snyttra  craeft.  Cf.  El.  1171:  nu  \<%  God  sealde  sawle  sigesped 
ond  snyttro  cr^ft ;  and  cf.  the  compound  snytriicraft,  Spr.  II,  460. 

635.  wynnuni  wrida<T.  Cf.  Ph.  237  :  wrlda^  on  wynnum.  For  the  quantity  of 
wrida'S,  see  Gram.,  §  382.  For  the  relation  of  rv7'idan  to  W7'i&an  and  wridian, 
cf.  Cosijn,  PBB.  XXI,  12. 

636.  aeSelum  ecne.  So  also  1.  8S2.  Ecne  means  'endowed,'  'teeming';  cf. 
toeacan,  eca?t,  etc.  The  usual  form  of  the  adjective  is  eacen,  but  cf.  C/ir.  1045  : 
on  ec7te  eard,  and  see  Cook's  note.  .fli^Selum  is  inst.  pi. ;  cf.  a;Selum  deore,  Dan. 
193;  Ex.  186;  Beow.  1949;  se'Selum  god,  Beow.  1S70. 

639!'.   Cf.  815^. 

640.  godbearn  on  grundum.  So  Chr.  682  ;  godbeam  of  grundum,  Chr.  499  ; 
si'SSan  of  grundum  godbearn  astag,  Clir.  702.  —  hweorfon.  See  1050,  and  51, 
note.  Wlilker  calls  attention  to  Dan.  267,  Inueorfon,  and  Sat.  341,  /nveorfan,  both 
preterits. 

641.  Cf.  809;  Ap.  32,  77'';  /lid.  350:  swegles  dreamas. 
642"^.   So  1476^   Git.  898. 

645^.  So  El.  357,  1 1 90. 

646''.   Cf.  909,  1435;  El.  1170-1171  (above,  631,  note). 

647'^.   So  Ge)i.  14. 

649^.  oor  ond  ende.  Cf.  556^  note.  Vowels  are  geminated  to  indicate 
length  also  in  faa,  1593,  1599,  and  taan,  1099. 

650.  on  wera  gemote.  But  the  Greek  (Bonnet,  p.  78,  1.  9)  reads  iv  r^  Kpvrrrf, 
the  exact  opposite  of  the  Anglo-Saxon. 

652-653.  side  herigeas  folc  iinm^te.    So  Afen.  5^-6'^. 

652-660.  There  is  nothing  in  the  Greek  version  corresponding  to  these  lines. 
After  the  response  of  Andrew,  648-651,  the  Greek  passes  on  to  the  account  of 
the  Twelve  Apostles  in  the  temple,  661  ff.  The  passage  appears  to  be  an  inven- 
tion of  the  poet's,  based  upon  such  allusions  in  the  New  Testament  as  Matt.  IX, 
35-36.  The  verses  immediately  following  these  give  an  account  of  the  Twelve 
Apostles  {Matt.  X,  1-5).  The  phrase  in  bold  oSer,  656,  is  not  specific  but  is  an 
allusion  to  the  Lord's  method  of  preaching  from  house  to  house. 

654.   Cf.  Gu.  979 :  wolde  hyrcnigan  halges  lara. 

659.  symble.  Spr.  II,  518,  glosses  as  adv.,  but  Gn.2  would  change  to  sytnbel, 
'festivitas.'    But  it  is  plainly  adverb  here. 

661.   sigedema.    The  only  other  occurrence  of  the  word  is  Chr.  1060. 

664.  ellefne.  Kluge  {PBB.  VI,  397)  remarks  that  this  is  the  only  occurrence 
of  the  numeral  ellefne  in  Anglo-Saxon  verse.  The  metrical  stress  here  falls  upon 
the  first  syllable  of  the  word;  but  the  modern  accentuation  and  the  phonetic 
history  of  the  word,  ellefne  <  andleofan,  would  indicate  that  the  first  syllable 
was  normally  unstressed. 

665^.  Cf.  883 ;  Ex.  232  :  .x.  hund  geteled  tireadigra. 

667.  tempel  Dryhtnes.  The  Greek  reads  (Bonnet,  p.  78,  1.  10) :  ets  Uphv  tC>v 
idvCiv,  i.e.  into  a  temple  of  the  Gentiles.  Apparently  the  Anglo-Saxon  poet  has  in 
mind  the  Hebrew  temple  at  Jerusalem. 

668.  heah  ond  horngeap.  The  half-line,  and  the  description  in  general,  is 
taken  from  Beim'.  82,  where  it  applies  to  the  great  hall,  Meort.    The  word  horn, 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  II5 

'gable,'  'pinnacle,'  is  several  times  used  in  descriptive  names  of  buildings;  see 
hornsael,  11 58,  also  horngestreon.  Ruin  23,  hornreced,  Beow.  704;  B.-T.,  p.  553, 
cites-  ofer  /tornptc  temples,  '  supra  pinnam  templi,'  Luke  IV,  9.  The  compound 
here  probably  means  'wide-gabled';  see  Miller,  Atiglia  XII,  397.  But  Grein, 
Dicht.,  translates  'an  Zinnen  reich';  Spr.  II,  (jS,  piiiHaculis  promineiis.  The 
meaning  'prominent,  high '  for  geap  is  supported  by  Sal.  510-51 1  :  munt  is  hine 
ymbutan,  geap  gylden  weal ;  see  further  B.-T.,  p.  366. 

669.  huscworde.  The  only  occurrence  of  the  compound;  translate  'with 
mocking  word.'  Husc,  hues  as  simplex,  meaning  '  scorn,  mockery,'  occurs  sev- 
eral times.  Grein,  Spr.  II,  112,  suggests  us  worde?  for  huscworde  \  cf.  Traut- 
mann's  emendation  in  the  variant  readings.  But  the  MS.  reading  fits  the  context 
admirably.    Kemble  has  only  a  comma  after  gewlitegod. 

670.  ealdorsacerd.  Professor  Hart  calls  my  attention  to  the  fact  that  this 
compound,  of  which  Grein  and  B.-T.  record  but  this  single  occurrence,  occurs 
frequently  in  the  Northumbrian  Gospels.  For  examples,  see  Cook,  A  Glossary 
of  the  Old  A'orthumbrian  Gospels,  s.v.  aldorsacerd,  p.  9. 

671.  hernie  hyspan.    Cf.  Chr.  11 20:  hysptun  hearmcwidum. 

672.  ^vroht  Avebbade.    Cf.  El.  308:   inwitj>ancum  wroht  webbedan. 

680.  eadiges  orhlytte  ae'Seling  cySatf.  The  nom.  pi.  orhlytte  refers  back 
to  the  idea  contained  in  earnie,  676,  and  in  the  two  following  lines.  The  special 
Teutonic  color  in  this  passage  is  the  addition  of  the  poet ;  the  Greek  text  says 
merely  '  O  wretches,  why  do  you  walk  with  him  who  says,  I  am  the  son  of  God  ? ' 
(Bonnet,  p.  78,  1.  12  ff.)  The  idea  contained  in  'son  of  God'  is  amplified  by  the 
poet  in  that  it  is  made  poUtical.  ..EOeling,  680,  is  the  technical  word  for  the  son 
of  a  king  and  is  so  used  regularly  throughout  the  Anglo-Saxon  Chronicle ;  eIlJ»eo- 
diges,  67S,  means  '  a  stranger,'  '  an  unlineal  claimant,'  and  butan  leodrihte,  679, 
'  contrary  to  the  accepted  custom  of  the  people.'  Gm.  and  B.  have  no  punctua- 
tion after  hyra3,  679,  and  a  comma  after  orhlytte,  680. 

683.  Cf.   JVid.  4''-5  :  him  from  Myrgingum  ae'Selo  onwocon. 

684.  on  J>ysse  folosceare.    So  El.  402  ;   Gen.  2680,  2829. 

686.  hamsittende.    The  compound  occurs  also  in  Gen.  1815  ;  Dan.  687. 

688'\   So  El.  381  ;    Whale  3. 

691.  suna  losephes.  Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  78,  1.  15:  6  mhs'l(^<77]<p  toO  tsktovos.  Did 
the  Tov  T^KTovos  seem  too  irreverent  to  the  poet  ?    See  3/arA  VI,  3. 

693.  dugoS  domgeorne.  So  1.  878;  El.  1290;  a  dignified  phrase,  and  in 
Elene  applied  to  the  righteous  at  the  day  of  judgment.  In  Andreas,  however, 
with  epic  freedom,  it  refers  to  the  wicked  persecutors  of  the  Lord.  The  word 
dugu3  is  not  usually  plural,  but  is  so  in  the  above  three  passages  and  in  E.r.  546. 

695-^.   So  2.\so  Jul.  506. 

696.  ]?egna  heape.  Cf.  Beo-cu.  1627:  «ry'5l!c  hegna  heap;  El.  549:  \>a.  cwom 
l^egna  heap;  cf.  1.  870,  Ap.  9.    See  A'ED.,  'forlorn  hope.' 

696-705.  In  the  Greek  (Walker,  p.  354) :  '  And  Jesus,  having  known  that  our 
hearts  were  giving  way,  took  us  into  a  desert  place,  and  did  great  miracles  before 
us,  and  displayed  to  us  all  his  Godhead.  And  we  spoke  to  the  chief  priests,  say- 
ing. Come  ye  also,  and  see ;  for,  behold,  he  has  persuaded  us.' 

698.  digol  land.    So  Beow.  1357,  of  the  dwelling-place  of  Grendel. 


Il6  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

700.  craefta.    Appositive  to  vrundra,  699. 

']o6-']o^^.  Cf.  Beow.  ()2d°-()2Z  :  swylce  self  cyning,  of  brydbure  beahhorda  weard 
tryddode  tirfaest  getrume  micle. 

707.  getrume  mycle.  The  Greek  version  is  specific  :  TpiaKOvra  dvdpes  tov  Xaov 
Kal  T^ffffapes  dpxi-epe'is  (Bonnet,  p.  79,  1.  10). 

711.  to  segon.  The  alliteration  is  on  to,  which  must  consequently  be  taken 
as  adverb,  not  as  the  unstressed  element  of  a  verb  compound. 

712.  wiindor  agraefene.  Wundor  is  ace.  pi.,  appositive  to  anlicnesse,  713; 
cf.  TV'undor,  736.  There  is  no  necessity,  therefore,  for  the  compound  Avundor- 
agrsefene,  '  wondrously  carved,'  of  Spr.  II,  752,  and  the  translations,  or  for  Cosijn's 
emendation,  -\viindruin  {^PBB.  XXI,  12). 

In  the  Greek  version,  these  wundor  agrsefene  are  not  the  cherubim  and  sera- 
phim, but  two  sphinxes :  etSev  7Xy0as  <T<f>iy'^a.s  dvo,  p-Lav  iK  Se^tQiv  Kal  plav  ef  ei)w- 
vdnuv  (Bonnet,  p.  79,  11.  1 1-12).  Since  the  whole  episode  is  omitted  in  the  Legend 
it  is  impossible  to  tell  what  the  reading  of  the  Latin  original  of  the  poem  was. 
The  Greek  version,  however,  compares  the  two  sphinxes  to  the  cherubim  and  the 
seraphim :  raOra  yap  6p.oid  eicriv  tov  xfpovl3l/x  Kal  tov  <Tepa(pip.  tQv  iv  oiipavf  (Bonnet, 
p.  79,  1.  14-15).  Probably  only  the  allusion  to  the  cherubim  and  seraphim  was 
taken  over  into  the  Latin  version. 

717-719.  Translate  '  This  is  a  representation  of  the  most  illustrious  of  the 
tribes  of  angels  which  is  in  that  city  [i.e.  heaven]  among  the  dwellers  there.' 
There  is  nothing  in  the  Upd^eis  corresponding  to  this  statement  that  the  cherubim 
and  seraphim  are  the  highest  of  the  angels,  or  to  the  further  description  of  the 
cherubim  and  seraphim,  11.  719-724.  The  grouping  of  the  seraphim  and  cherubim 
together  is  not  derived  from  the  Bible,  as  the  seraphim  are  mentioned  only  once 
there  {Isaiah  VI,  7)  and  then  not  in  connection  with  the  cherubim.  The  two 
names,  however,  were  early  associated  in  Hebrew  tradition;  the  Book  of  Enoch, 
for  example,  groups  '  the  seraphim,  the  cherubim,  and  ophanim,  and  all  the  angels 
of  power'  as  the  highest  of  the  hosts  of  heaven.  See  Ryle,  s.v.  'cherub,'  in  Has- 
tings, Diet,  of  the  Bible  (New  York,  1901).  Cf.  also  Dionysius  the  Areopagite 
(4th  century),  who  groups  the  seraphim,  cherubim,  and  thrones  as  the  highest  of 
the  heavenly  hierarchies ;  see  NED.,  s.v.  '  cherub.'  Note  also  the  Te  Deum  : 
'  Tibi  Cherubim  et  Seraphim  incessabili  voce  proclamant.'  These  allusions  are 
all  closely  related  to  Isaiah  VI,  1-3,  a  vision  of  the  Lord  in  his  glory.  Interesting 
paraphrases  of  these  verses,  closer  to  the  original  than  the  passage  in  Andreas, 
are  to  be  found  in  El.  739-749  and  Chr.  385-415. 

721.   So  Ph.  600;  cf.  fore  onsyne  eces  deman,  El.  745;   Gii.  1161 ;   Chr.  837. 

725^".  hnv.  The  meaning  here  is  '  countenance,'  '  appearance,'  not  as  Grimm, 
p.  114,  translates,  'familia,'  as  in  hiwraden,  hired,  etc.  —  725^.   So  Gen.  247. 

726'\  So  1026'^;  Ap.  87.  'The  thanes,  angels,  in  heaven.'  For  this  meaning 
of  wuldor,  cf.  1.  356,  note.  With  }7egnas,  cf.  Chr.  283  :  Cristes  hegnas,  '  angels  ' ; 
Gen.  15  :  j^egnas  hrymfajste  =  engla  J^reatas.  Holthausen,  PBB.  XVI,  550,  emends 
]7egnas  to  J^egna  in  order  to  make  it  synonymous  with  haligra,  1.  725;  but 
]?egnas  may  as  well  be  taken  as  appositive  to  hnv. 

728.  fore  J»am  hcreniaegene.  See  1.  707,  note.  The  phrase  occurs  again 
11.  1298,  1650;  El.  170. 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  II7 

730.  on  wera  geiiiango.    Simons,  p.  57,  would  read  Avera  on  gi'inangp.    Cf. 

Jul.  52S  :  niagum  in  gemonge  ;  Beoiu.  1643  '■  modig  on  gemonge.  The  more  usual 
construction,  however,  is  prep.  +  gen.  +  ace,  e.g.  EL  96:  on  clanra  gemang ; 
El.  108:  on  feonda  gemang;  El.  118:  on  gramra  gemang;  /iil.  420:  on  clSnra 
gemong. 

732.  ^vlitig  of  Avage.  Cf.  Beow.  1662:  ic  on  wage  geseah  wlitig  hangian; 
Rid.  XV,  1 2  :  wlitig  on  wage. 

733-734-  Kemble  and  Baskei-vill  put  a  semicolon  after  soOV-ividuni,  Grimm 
a  comma;  but  Wiilker's  punctuation,  which  I  have  followed  in  the  text,  gives 
undoubtedly  the  best  reading.  The  alliteration  s  :  sc,  which  led  Grein  (see. 
variants)  to  suppose  that  the  text  was  corrupt  here,  is  not  in  accordance  with  the 
use  of-the  best  early  verse,  but  it  is  found  more  or  less  frequently  in  the  later 
verse;  see  Sievers,  Altgerm.  Metrik,  §  18,  3;  Schipper,  Englische  Metrik,  I,  50.- 

734''.  CLJiil.  2S6:  hwaet  his  asj'elu  syn.  Uike  J>a;t  and /w  (see  11.  7,  248,  717, 
751,  906,  1 199),  hwcet  is  often  used  without  agreement  in  gender  or  number.  Cf. 
Germaa^j-  sind,  MnE.  'there  is,  there  are.' 

735-737-  dorste,  ahleop,  he.  The  number  changes  from  the  plural  (syndon, 
720;  standaS,  herigaO',  722;  pegnas,  726)  to  the  singular  here.  In  this  the 
poem  probably  followed  its  source,  as  in  the  Ilpd^eis  only  one  of  the  sphinxes 
(whose  place  is  taken  here  by  the  cherubim  and  seraphim,  see  712,  note)  is 
represented  as  acting:  'Then  Jesus,  having  looked  to  the  right, where  the  sphinx 
was,  said  to  it,  I  say  unto  thee,  thou  image  of  that  which  is  in  heaven,  which  the 
hands  of  craftsmen  have  sculptured,  be  separated  from  thy  place,  and  come  down, 
and  answer  and  convict  the  chief  priests,  and  show  them  whether  I  am  God  or 
man.'    Walker,  p.  354. 

736^.   So  El.  866 ;  cf.  1.  564,  note.    "Wundor  is  subject  of  dorste;  cf.  1.  712. 

737.  frod  fyrngeweorc.  So  P/i.  84,  of  the  grove  in  which  the  Phoenix  dwelt. 
The  antecedent  of  he  should  be,  grammatically,  fyrngeweorc,  but  the  poet  makes 
the  pronoun  masculine  by  personification. 

739.   Kemble  and  Basker\'ill  put  a  semicolon  after  dynede. 

740-741.  Grein  and  Wiilker  enclose  wr^tlic  .  .  .  ongin  within  parentheses, 
the  other  Edd.  set  off  the  clause  by  commas  or  periods. 

742.  septe  sacerdas.    Cf.  El.  528-530  : 

•gus  mec  faeder  min       on  fyrndagum 
umweaxenne       wordum  l£rde, 
septe  soScwidum. 
Also  Dan.  445-446 : 

Hyssas  heredon  drihten       for  Jiam  hrcSenan  folce, 
Septon  [MS.  stepton]  hie  so&widum. 

Grimm's  sercn?/,  accepted  by  Grein,  Spr.  II,  433,  we  may  safely  disregard ;  the 
stem-consonant  of  the  word  is  fixed  by  the  three  passages  as  /.  The  meaning 
also, '  instruct,' '  teach,'  is  the  appropriate  meaning  in  all  three  passages.  But  the 
form  and  derivation  of  the  word  are  not  certain.  Zupitza,  Ele;ie,  p.  73,  glosses 
as  seppaii  or  sepan?\  B.-T.  as  sipan  {seppa?i?)\  Simons,  as  Zupitza;  Sweet,  Diet. 
does  not  record  the  word.  Baskervill,  p.  76,  gives  the  form  as  seppan  — '  a  denom- 
inative verb,  akin  to  su-p,  root  *sapa,  Goth.  *sapjan,  OHG.  sewen,  seppen,  MHG. 


Il8  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

seben,  "  wahrnehmen."  '  Kluge,  Etymolog.  Wdrterbuch  ^  s.v.  saft,  thinks  an  ulti- 
mate connection  of  the  above  words  with  Latin  sapio  is  probable.  B.-T.,  p.  866, 
gives  the  same  explanation  of  the  word  as  Baskervill.  Swaen,  Eng.  Stud.  XX, 
149,  brings  Goth,  siponeis,  siponja7i,  into  the  discussion:  '  Sepan,  I  think,  can 
neither  be  proved  nor  defended.  Seppan  might  be  explained,  while  sticking  to  the 
stem  to  which  I  have  tried  to  reduce  the  word,  by  adopting  a  prehistoric  Anglo- 
Saxon  *sepjan,  by  which  form  the  transitive  meaning  of  sdpte,  in  contradistinction 
to  the  intransitive  of  siponjan  —  "  schiiler  sein,"  might  be  explained.'  Swaen's 
explanation  seems  the  most  probable. 

743.  witig  werede.  '  It  [i.e.  stan],  sagacious,  held  them  in  check.'  Cosijn's 
emendation  wenede  is  based  upon  1.  1682  ;  but  the  reading  of  the  MS.  is  sup- 
ported by  1.  1053,  -wordum  werede. 

744.  earmra  geJ>ohta.  Perhaps  it  is  best  to  take  the  genitive  as  dependent 
on  searowiim :  '  Ye  are  wretched,  deceived  by  the  snares  of  your  (own)  miserable 
thoughts.'  Earmra  gejjohta  would  thus  be  parallel  to  mode  gemyrde,  746. 
Dicht.  translates  '  Ihr  seid  unselig,  elender  Gedanken ' ;  K.,  '  ye  are  rude  of  poor 
thoughts.' 

746.  mode  gemyrde.  Qi.  Jul.  412:  mod  gemyrred ;  Chr.  1143=  egsan  myrde. 
—  ge  mon  cigaS.  Cosijn's  admirable  emendation  is  supported  by  the  reading 
of  the  Greek  version,  Bonnet,  p.  80,  1.  9  :  X^yovres  rbv  debv  ehai  dvOpwirov. 

747=^.   So  C//r.  744. 

748''.  So  Az.  141'^.    Final  h  is  also  lost  in  faa,  1593,  1599. 

750'^.  So  Gen.  1040 ;  £/.  729. 

752.   The  whole  line  occurs  £/.  398. 

755.  Ci./uL  76:  welum  weorjnan,  wordum  lofian. 

756.  Habrahame.  Although  this  name  occurs  three  times  with  initial  //, 
756,  779.  793.  and  only  once  without  it,  753,  the  alliteration  is  always  vocalic. 

757.  This  allusion  is  not  in  the  Greek  version.    See  Gen.  XXII,  17-18  ;  A/aU.  I. 
759-  open,  orgete.    So  C/ir.  11 16. 

761-762.  Bourauel,  p.  79,  sees  in  these  lines  a  recollection  of  ALneid  II,  i. 
See  1.  1 1 25,  note.  But  a  similar  situation  here  is  naturally  expresed  in  similar 
terms. 

764''.  Grein  encloses  the  half-hne  in  parentheses,  the  other  Edd.  set  it  off  only 
by  commas.  In  its  stylistic  effect  the  sentence  is  parenthetic  and  exclamatory ; 
see  my  study  of  '  The  Parenthetic  Exclamation  in  Old  English  Poetry,'  MLN. 
XX,  33-37. 

765-766.  drycraeftum  ;  soingelaoiim.  On  the  element  dry-  in  drycraeftum, 
cf.  1.  34,  note.  Both  words,  scingelacum  and  drycrfeftiim,  have  evil  connotation. 
Cf.  Wulfstan,  ed.  Napier,,  p.  loi  :  Jponne  se  deofol  cym'S  )>e  ana  cann  eall  J'aet  yfel 
and  ealle  \>z.  drycra;ftas,  h>e  Sfre  Snig  man  sefre  geleomode ;  and  for  the  meaning 
of  scin,  cf.   Whale  31-32: 

swa  bi'S  scinna  Jieavv, 
deofla  wise,       Jiast  hi  drohtende 
Jiurh  dyriie  meaht       dugu'Se  beswica'S. 
P'or  the  quantity  of  jr/ //(;/),  cf.  Sievers,  Eng.  Stud.  VIII,  157.    Ci.Jiil.  301,  stcgde 
hy  dryas  Tvicron,  the  devil's  charge  against  Crlstes  J>egnas,  1.  299. 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 


119 


769.  weoll  on  ge^\'itte.  Cf.  Beow.  2882  :  weoll  of  gewitte ;  AFetr.  VIII,  45: 
ac  hit  on  witte  weallende  byrnS;  /'//.  191  :  hurh  gewittes  wylni.  Sievers,  Anglia  I, 
579,  calls  attention  to  this  as  a  set  poetical  phrase.  Cf.  also  Beow.  2331  :  breost 
innan  weoll;  and  An.  1019,  1709.  Wyrmum  aweallen,  Clir.  625,  has  reference  to 
the  body  after  death.  —  ^veo^lll  bla'duiii  fag.  Grein,  Dic/it.,  'der  Wurm  dem 
Gliicke  feind.'  The  figure  appears  to  be  original  with  the  poet.  Did  he  have  in 
mind  the  fire-drake  (cf.  brandhata,  1.  76S)  of  the  Beowtilf}  The  form  weorm 
for  -ii'iirm,  ivyrin,  is  exceptional ;  cf.  Gram.,  §  72,  note,  and  Ap.  95.  Final  g  for 
h  occurs  also  in  befealg,  1326 ;  and  in  feorg,  Ap.  58 ;  J7urg,  Ap.  13,  63,  72 ;  cf. 
Gram.,  §  223,  note  i,  and  see  above,  1.  107,  note. 

770.  aelfaele.  For  ael-  =  eal-,  cf.  felmihtig,  iElmyrcan,  telAvihte,  etc.  Cf. 
Ridr  XXIV,  9:  ealfelo  attor.  —  orcnawe.  Cf.  El.  229:  Da  wass  orcnzewe  idese 
srSfaet. 

776\  grene  grundas.    Cf.  1.  798,  note.  —  776''.  So  Gu.  133,  696;  Chr.  1670. 

777.  laruiu  liudan.  It  seems  best  to  take  laruni  as  an  instrumental  adverb, 
'according  to  instructions.'  Kemble  translates  'in  doctrines  to  lead';  Hall, 
'with  their  blest-lore  bear.'  Gn.,  Diclit.,  and  Root  have  nothing  corresponding 
to  laruiu  Itcdan. 

778.  Kemble  has  a  semicolon  after  -worde. 

781''.  Cf.  Gil.  1073:  ece  aelmihtig  ierist  gefremede  .  .  .  Sajhe  of  deat?e  aras ; 
Ph.  495 :  I'onne  Sriste  ealle  gefremmajj  men  on  moldan. 

784.  frode  fyrntveotan.  Cf.  Beo-w.  zxz-i,:  frddan fyrnwitan,  of  ^schere  ;  El. 
343  :  frbd  fyrnweota,  of  David. 

788^.  So  El.  233. — Mambre.    See  Introd.,  p.  Iviii. 

789".  So  Chr.  701,  904;  Rid.  XXXV,  9. 

792^.  So  alsoy///.  5S2. 

795.  sneouie  of  slSpe]7£einfaestan.  Cf.  Chr.  888-889  :  hataS  hy  upp  astandan 
sneome  of  slSpe  \>y  f^estan.  The  allusion  in  the  Christ  is  to  the  day  of  judgment. 
Cf.  792  with  Chr.  888.  Cf.  also  Panther,  40-42 :  J^onne  ellenrof  up  astondeS  .  .  . 
sneome  of  slsepe. 

795-796.  Note  the  expanded  lines  here.  Grein  and  Baskervill  have  only  a 
comma  after  fa>stan. 

797.  Cf.  C(cdiiion^s  Hymn  7-9  :  )'a  middangeard  monncynnes  weard,  ece  drihten 
sefter  teode  firum  foldan,  frea  aelmihtig. 

798.  Cf.  Chr.  1 1 29:  eorJ>an  ealgrene' ond  uprodor;  see  1.  776. 

799.  hAva-r.  Probably  the  word  should  be  hAvaet ;  cf.  1.  262,  note,  especially 
Chr.  574.  Hall's  translation  is  hardly  allowable:  'and  where  the  Lord  God  lived 
who  laid  their  foundations.' 

800.  Cf.  Chr.  343 :  t>ast  he  us  ne  liete  leng  owihte. 
801-802.   Again  two  expanded  lines.    Cf.  795-796. 

802.  forbT'tan.  The  spelling  ai  appears  for  e  also  in  mae'ffelh^gende,  1.  609. 
Forlietan  is  a  preterit,  \\'unigean  an  infinitive  dependent  on  it. 

803.  iedre  gecySan.    So  Be<no.  354. 

805.  So  also/«/.  268;  El.  57,  1 128. 

806.  Cf.  1.  55  ;  Jul.  153:  ac  ic  weor^ige  wuldres  ealdor. 
807^'.  Also/«/.  06. 


120  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

808^.  So  Gu.  1091,  with  the  same  meaning. 

810.  willum  neotan.  Shipley,  p.  50,  translates  11.  809-Sio  'to  seek  in  peace 
the  joys  of  heaven  and  .there  forever  blissfully  enjoy  them.'  The  MS.  has  not 
^sr,  however,  in  810,  but  paes,  as  in  Chr.  1341-1343  : 

hateS  hy  gesunde       ond  gesenade 

on  ej?el  faran       engla  dreames, 

ond  baes  to  widan  feore       willum  neotan. 

Cook,  Christ,  p.  207,  suggests  reading  har  in  Chr.  1343  for  Jjaes,  as  in  An. 
810,  following  Wiilker's  reading.  But  the  two  passages  support  each  other  in  the 
retention  of  )78es.  The  antecedent  of  )?8es  m.  An.%\o  is  contained  in  swegles, 
809,  '  heaven.'  Grein,  Spr.  II,  292,  cites  this  passage,  willum  neotan,  as  a  sole 
example  of  neotan  followed  by  the  instrumental.  But  willum  is  inst.  adv.,  not 
object  of  neotan.    Cf.  also  Gu.  1347-1348:  willum  neotan- bliedes  ond  blissa. 

814^   So  Chr.  1 188. 

816.  3a  Su  artefnan  ne  miM.    S&q  John  XVI,  12. 

8i8'\   So  1274'^;  Beoio.  2115;   Gu.  1251.    Cf.  1.  1254'',  note. 

819.  herede.  '  Thus  Andreas  the  entire  day  praised  (or  glorified)  the  teach- 
ings of  the  Holy  One.'  The  reproduction  of  the  MS.  might  be  read  here  easily 
herede  or  berede.  Wiilker  reads  berede,  which  he  derives  from  berian,  'dar- 
legen,'  'an  den  tag  legen.'  In  support  of  this  word  he  cites  Dan.  142  :  \>z.  J^e  me 
for  werode  wisdom  bereS.  But  the  parallel  is  a  very  doubtful  one,  and  Cosijn 
{PBB.  XXI,  13),  citing  Dan.  121,  would  read  bera&  in  Dan.  142,  from  infin.  beran. 
Baskervill,  p.  76,  agrees  with  Wiilker  :  '  berian  (a  denominative  from  bizr)  means 
literally  "  to  make  bare  "  ;  cf.  benc/>elu  beredon,  Beow.  1240.'  Against  this  interpre- 
tation, however,  is  the  use  in  873,  998,  and  especially  the  invariable  rule  that 
demands  double  alliteration  when  the  second  foot  of  the  half-line  contains  two 
full  stresses  (that  is,  the  D-type  of  verse,  Sievers,  PBB.  X,  304). 

820.  The  disciples  are  already  asleep ;  see  1.  464. 

823*.  Cf.  Rid.  Ill,  2  :  under  5=J>a  gej^raec  ;  Rid.  XXIII,  7  :  atol  yj>a  gej^raec.  Cf. 
352-. 

824*'.  Cf.  Men.  39,  217,  Gu.  662:  on  Codes  waere;  Beotu.  27:  on  Frean  waere  ; 
Beo-w.  3109:  on  'Saes  Waldendes  wiere. 

826.  '  Until  sleep  overcame  them,  wearj-  of  the  sea.'  But  we  are  told  in  S20 
that  Andrew  is  asleep,  and  were  told  in  464  that  the  disciples  are  asleep.  Appar- 
ently this  line,  almost  a  repetition  of  820,  should  state  again  that  the  disciples 
have  fallen  asleep.  If  so,  something  seems  to  be  omitted.  Perhaps  we  should 
read  sS^verigne,  to  agree  with  leofne,  825^. 

828  ff.  That  practically  nothing  of  the  narrative  is  lost  here  may  be  seen  from 
the  corresponding  passage  of  the  Greek  version  :  '  And  Jesus  said  to  his  angels  : 
Spread  your  hands  under  him,  and  carry  Andrew  and  his  disciples,  and  go  and  put 
them  outside  of  the  city  of  the  man-eaters ;  and  having  laid  them  on  the  ground, 
return  to  me.  And  the  angels  did  as  Jesus  commanded  them,  and  the  angels 
returned  to  Jesus:  and  He  went  up  into  the  heavens  with  his  angels.'  (Walker, 
p. '356.)  Baskervill,  p.  76,  attempting  to  arrange  the  passage  as  it  is  preserved  in 
the  MS.,  would  translate  as  follows:  'Through  motion  through  the  air  he  came 


NOTES    ON   ANDREAS  121 

into  the  land,  to  the  city,  from  which  then  the  king  of  the  angels  arose  to  go  away 
from  him  in  blessedness  on  the  upway,  to  visit  his  native  seat '  —  a  translation 
which  satisfies  neither  the  demands  of  the  text  nor  the  sense  of  the  passage. 

In  order  to  keep  the  same  line-numbering  as  Grimm  and  Wiilker,  the  hypo- 
thetical missing  line  is  disregarded  in  the  numbering. 

830''.   So  Chr.  741. 

832''.   So  Chr.  606;  El.  507;  /'//.  374. 

834.  his  mOhetuni.  Grein,  Dicht.,  'vor  dem  Burgwalle  in  der  Niihe  seiner 
Feinde  ';  but  apparently  neh  must  apply  both  to  burh^veallc  and  nrflhetuni,  as 
translated  by  Hall,  'near  the  wall  of  the  borough,  near  his  fierce  enemies.'  Cf. 
the  construction  with  cuunian,  125-133,  note. — nihtlangne  fyrst.  So  1.  1309; 
Beow.  528;  El.  67;  Ex.  208. 

835.  daegcandelle.    See  372,  note. 

836.  Cf.  Gic.  1262:  scan  scirwered,  scadu  swej^redon ;  Ex.  113:  sceado 
swi'i^redon. 

837.  wonn  under  ■wolcnuni .  So  Beow.  6^1;  Gii.  1254;  Vision  of  the  C7-oss 
55.  '  IVann,  dark,  dusky,  is  also  a  favorite  word,  being  found  thirty-seven  times 
[in  Anglo-Saxon  verse].  Unlike  s-iveart  it  is  commonly  used  in  a  literal  sense.  It 
is  thus  applied  to  a  variety  of  objects,  —  to  the  raven,  to  the  dark  waves,  to  the 
gloomy  heights  overlooking  the  sea,  to  the  murky  night,  to  the  dark  armor,  etc' 
Mead,  "Color  in  OE.  Poetry,"  Btth.  of  MLA.  XIV,  187.  —  wederes  blSst. 
There  are  two  words  of  the  form  bISst :  (i)  as  in  Ex.  290:  birj^weges  bliest,  'the 
sea  blast  or  breeze,'  cf.  bldwan,  '  blow ' ;  (2)  the  word  in  the  present  passage,  which 
appears  also  in  1.  1552,  cognate  with  bhese.,  'torch,'  'fire,'  'flame.'  Ci.fyres  blast, 
Ph.  15;  Itges  blSst,  Ph.  434.  For  the  meaning  of  wederes,  cf.  372,  1697,  note. 
Kemble  mistranslates,  '  then  came  the  storm-blast ' ;  but  Root,  correctly,  '  then 
the  torch  of  heaven.' 

840''.  So  1.  1306;  Beoiv.  222,  of  the  sea-headlands. 

841.  yrnbe  harne  stan.  '  Seven  times  [in  Anglo-Saxon  verse]  har  is  applied 
to  the  hoary,  gray  stone,  once  to  the  gray  cliff,  four  times  to  armor,  once  to  a 
sword,  once  to  the  ocean,  once  to  the  gray  heath,  three  times  to  the  wolf,  twice 
to  the  frost,  and  seven  times  to  warriors,  in  each  case  with  some  touch  of  conven- 
tionality and  with  an  apparently  slight  feeling  for  the  color.'  Mead,  Pub.  of  MLA. 
XIV,  190.  Cf.  Beow.  887,  2553,  2744  :  under  harne  stan;  Beo7v.  1415  :  ofer  harne 
Stan. 

842.  tigelfagan  trafu.  The  word  tigel,  Lat.  tegiiln,  was  borrowed  with  the 
object  from  Latin  civilization.  '  Tiles,  mortar,  and  the  like  were  unknown  to  the 
German ;  and  he  seems  to  have  been  long  in  learning  to  use  actual  timber. 
Wattled  work,  twigs  or  flexible  branches  woven  together,  seemed  to  give  enough 
stability  for  all  his  purposes ;  and  even  on  the  column  of  Marcus  Aurelius  what 
we  may  take  to  be  contemporary  German  houses  are  "  of  cylindrical  shape  with 
round  vaulted  roof,  no  window,  and  rectangular  door ;  they  appear  to  be  woven 
of  rushes  or  twigs,  and  are  bound  about  with  cords."  Tacitus  says  [Germ.  i6]  the 
sole  material  for  German  houses  of  his  time  is  wood.'  Gummere,  Germanic  Ori- 
gins, p.  94.  See  Miillenhoff,  Deutsche  Alterttimskimde  IV,  2S6-287,  and  Hehn, 
Kiiltiirpflaiizcn  unci  Hausthiere^,  pp.    122-123,  for  a  list  and  discussion   of  the 


122  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

architectural  terms  taken  over  from  the  Mediterranean  nations  by  the  peoples 
of  the  North.  The  word  tigel  does  not  appear,  however,  to  have  the  same  poetic 
connotation  as  stdn  in  Anglo-Saxon  verse.  It  is  used  in  composition  only  in  the 
present  passage,  and  as  simplex  occurs  only  once.  Ruin  31  :  tigelum  sceade'5 
hrostbeages  hrof  (MS.  rof).     See  1236,  note. 

843.  windige  vveallas.  So  Beow.  572,  where  the  phrase  applies  more  aptly 
to  the  sea-headlands. 

845^.  So  Beow.  1951  ;  Jul.  452;  Ap.  32;  siSe  gesece'S,  Chr.  62;  sij^e  gesecan, 
Chr.  146;  siSe  gesohton,  Ge7i.  2425. 

848^.  So  Ap.  78.  —  biryhte.  The  second  element  of  the  compound  has  much 
the  value  of  MnE.  '  right '  in  similar  phrases.  Cf.  Cosijn,  PBB.  XXI,  13,  '  biryhte, 
i.e.  ryhte  bi,  "  dicht  bei,"  wie  cztrihte,  nl.  nabij  und  bijna,  proparoxytonon.  Rihie, 
"gerade,"  auch  va  J>ierrihte.''    This  is  the  only  occurrence  of  the  word. 

850.  wigend  weccean.    So  Beow.  3024. 

852.  gystran-daege.  The  first  element  appears  in  the  forms  gy strait  and 
gyrsia?i,  but  nQWQX  gyrsiran.  See  the  dictionaries,  and  Cosijn,  PBB.  XXI,  13, 
for  examples.  —  Cf.  El.  1200:  ofer  geofenes  stream. 

853.  ar\velan.    See  383,  note. 

855.  waldend  -werSeode.  Grein's  emendation  wer&eoda  is  supported  by  Chr. 
714:  waldend  laerj^eoda,  and  by  the  fact  that  the  plural  is  generally  used  to 
indicate  people,  or  nations  in  general,  the  singular,  usually  with  a  demonstrative, 
to  indicate  a  specific  nation.  But  the  singular  is  also  found  in  the  general  sense, 
cf.  Metr.  IX,  21  :  ofer  wer&iode,  and  Ait.  573.  The  interpretation  which  retains 
the  MS.  reading  as  a  verb  is  plainly  impossible. 

855-856.  Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  85,  11.  9-10:  'Etviyv^jov  aov  K^pie  tt]v  Ka\T]v  \a\i,dv,  d\X' 
ovK  ecpavepuxras  fxoi  eavrbv,  /cat  5td  tovto  ovk  eyvJjpiad  ere. 

859  ff.  Brooke,  p.  420,  translating  this  passage,  remarks :  '  And  this  poet  [of 
the  Atidreas'\  who  has  a  special  turn  for  various  incident,  invents  for  them  a 
dream  in  which  they  are  brought  into  the  heavenly  Paradise.'  But  the  whole 
episode  is  found  in  both  the  Greek  version  and  the  Latin  fragment  (Bonnet, 
p.  86  ff.).    See  Introd.,  p.  xxiii. 

86i^  So  Ily.  IV,  77;  with  other  forms  of  the  verb,////.  iSi,  Ps.  CXVIII, 
152- 

864.  feSerum  hremige.  Cf.  Ph.  86:  fe'Srum  strong;  Ph.  100:  feSrum  wlonc ; 
Ph.  123:  feSrum  snell.  Fe&er,  'feather,'  by  metonymy  becomes  'wing'  in  the 
plural;  the  same  development  takes  place  in  the  l^?iX.m  petttia.  Grimm,  p.  119, 
would  redid  fc&erttm  hrvitig  (citing  El.  29),  'dewy-feathered';  but  the  reading 
of  the  MS.  is  better,  'exultant  in  their  wings.'    Cf.  1.  1699. 

866.  flyhte  ou  lyfte.    So  Ph.  123,  340. 

868'.  Cf.  Metr.  XXVI,  63  :  lissum  lufode  liSmonna  frean.  —  in  lofe  Avunedon. 
Cf.  Chr.  102-103:  in  ^am  uplTcan  engla  dreame  mid  So^Sfaeder  symle  wunian. 

869.  swegles  gong.  Literally,  'the  circuit  of  the  heavens,'  cf.  11.  208,  455; 
and  elsewhere  the  phrase  occurs  frequently.  In  the  present  context  the  phrase 
is  inappropriate ;  Grein's  ond  and  Cook's  geond  are  inadequate  attempts  to 
bring  it  into  agreement  with  the  context.  Simons,  s.v.  gattg,  suggests  swegos 
gong.    But  the  most  probable  explanation  is  that  the  words  are  taken  bodily 


NOTES   ON   ANDREAS  I23 

from  stock  phraseology  for  the  sake  of  the  rime  with  sang,  and  are  not  perfectly 
fitted  into  their  context.    Cf.  1.  303,  note. 

871'^.  So  Ph.  164,  of  the  Phoenix. 

873^.  So  also  1.  998 ;  ////.  560. 

874'.  So  1151^;  Whale  84;  Chr.  405.  —  dream  waes  on  hyhte.  Cf.  11.  239, 
637.  The  phrasing  is  pleonastic,  and  one  might  prefer  Simons'  reading  hyh&e, 
e.xcept  that  again  (cf.  869,  note)  the  rime  may  have  determined  the  use  of 
on  hyhte. 

876''.  So  El.  283. 

878.  pier  waes  Dauid  mid.  Walker,  p.  357 :  '  We  beheld  also  Abraham, 
and  Isaac,  and  Jacob,  and  all  the  saints ;  and  David  praised  Him  with  a  song 
upon  his  harp.' 

879.  Essages  sunu.  The  form  of  the  name  in  the  Vulgate  is  '  Isai,'  cf.  /  Sainuel 
(=  /  Kings)  XVI,  passim.  For  the  development  of  the  consonant  between  the 
two  vowels,  cf.  Achagia,  Ap.  16;  Cabrihel,  Chr.  201  ;  Istnahel,  Gen.  2286.  Israhel 
and  similar  forms  occur  frequently. 

882-885.  Cosijn,  PBB.  XXI,  13,  would  put  a  semicolon  or  a  period  after 
standan,  1.  882,  and  remove  the  punctuation  after  haeletf,  1.  883,  thus  making 
1.  S83  appositive  to  J>rj'msittende  and  heahenglas.  Stylistically,  however,  it 
is  better  to  make  1.  883  refer  back  to  eowie,  1.  882,  i.e.  the  Twelve  Apostles ; 
tireadige  haele'5  should  also  refer  to  the  Apostles,  cf.  1.  2.  The  justification  for 
his  punctuation  Cosijn  finds  in  the  Greek  version ;  but  it  should  be  noticed  that 
the  number  twelve  is  used  first  of  the  Apostles  and  then  of  the  ministering  angels  : 
KoX  edeacrd/jLeda  €K€?  v/xds  roiis  SJiSeKa  dirocTToXovs  TrapeffTrjKdrai  evunrtov  tov  Kvpiov 
ijfiQv  I'>;(roO  XpicrroO,  Kal  i^uiOev  v/jluiv  dyyiXovs  ddideKa  KyKXavvras  v/xas.  (Bonnet, 
p.  86,  11.  7-9.)  The  Latin  fragment  is  imperfect  in  the  corresponding  passage,  but 
it  evidently  had  the  same  readings. 

885.  3am  MS  haeleSa  well.  '  A  well  defined  example  of  the  demonstrative 
se  with  genitive  occurs  in  An.  885  ..."  Well  is  it  for  those  of  men  who  may 
enjoy  those  delights."  '     Shipley,  p.  93.    See  262  ;  A/>.  25. 

887.  Cf. ////.  641:  wigena  wyn  ond  wuldres  ^rym ;  Gu.  1338:  winemaega  wyn 
in  wuldres  [irym.  The  same  assonance  occurs  in  Chr.  71  ;  cf.  also  957-958, 
where  it  holds  together  halves  of  two  different  lines. 

891.  ganga}?.  Grein,  S/>r.  I,  368,  glosses  this  word  as  singular  and  translates, 
Dicht.,  'wenn  er  von  hinnen  geht.'  But  the  plural  form  of  the  MS.  agrees  with 
the  context;  Pogatscher,  Anglia  XXIII,  274,  points  out  that  the  subject  is 
omitted  after  ponne. 

892.  Cf.  El.  874''-875:  j^a  ^ier  ludas  wjes  on  modsefan  miclum  geblissod. 

895.  onmunan  swa  mycles.  Cf.  Beoiu.  2640:  he  .  .  .  onmunde  usic  maer'Sa, 
otmiunaii,  '  to  regard  as  worthy,'  with  accusative  of  person  and  genitive  of  the 
thing.    Cf.  Shipley,  p.  53. 

897.  God  Dryhten.    See  494,  note. 

899.  Baskervill  has  a  semicolon  after  gestah. 

900.  One  expects  an  object  for  ongitan,  1.  901  :  heh  ic  he  on  y'Sfare  ?    Cf.  1.  922. 
904'^.   An  epic  formula;  cf.   Wid.  9:  ongon  )>a  worn  sprecan  ;  Beo-iv.  530-531  : 

Hwret  \>\\  worn  fela  .  .  .  ymb  Brecan  sprjece ;  Beow.  3094 :  worn  eall  gespraec. 


124  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

906.  frofre  gast.  So  1.  1684;  El.  1036,  1105;  Chr.  207,  728;  Jul.  724;  Jud. 
83.  The  phrase  is  a  translation  of  the  N.T.  irapaKXriTos  (cf.  /o/in  XIV,  16,  26  ;  XV, 
26;  XVI,  7),  and  is  thus  defined  by  yElfric  {//omil/es,  ed.  Thorpe,  I,  322)  :  He  is 
gehaten  on  Greciscum  gereorde  '  Paraclitus,'  >3et  is,  '  Froforgast,'  for'Si  "Se  he  fre- 
fra"5  Jja  dreorian,  J)e  heora  synna  behreowsia^,  and  sylS  him  forgyfenysse  hiht,  and 
heora  unrotan  mod  geliSega'S.  /o/m  XIV,  26,  Paracletiis  autem  Spiritiis  sanctus, 
is  translated  in  the  WS.  Gospels  by  se  Jidliga  frofre  gdst,  but  in  the  other  pas- 
sages ParacleUis  is  rendered  by  Frefrieiid;  cf.  Cook's  Christ,  p.  100,  and  Bright, 
Gospel  of  St.  John,  p.  160. 

907^^-909.  Cf.  11.  979t'-98o  ;  1153^-1154.  The  passage  is  plainly  a  reminiscence 
of  homiletic  phrasing. 

909.  See  294,  note,  11 53,  I539)  1568;  and,  for  other  examples  of  to  with  secan, 
see  Einenkel,  Streifzilge  dicrch  die  niittelejiglische  Syntax,  p.  202. 

910.  Cf.  Gil.  1028:  sij>)>an  he  me  fore  eagum  onsyne  wearb'.  Grein,  Spr.  II, 
352,  glosses  only  the  form  oiisyn,  noun,  but  B.-T.,  p.  758,  glosses  correctly  onsyn, 
noun,  and  onsyne,  adj. ;  cf.  gesyne,  1.  526,  etc.  The  only  occurrences  of  onsyne, 
adj.,  are  these  two  passages  in  the  Andreas  and  the  Gitthlac. 

912.  }7urli  cnihtes  had.  'In  the  form,  character,  of  a  boy.'  Cf.  Sat.  495: 
J^urh  faemnan  had;  El.  72,  Ap.  27:  on  weres  hade.  Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  87  :  uenit  ad 
eum  dominus  lesus  Christus  in  effigia  pulcerrimi  pueri. 

914^.  Cf.  Beozv.  407:  Wes  l^u,  Hro'Sgar,  hal.  A  regular  formula  of  greeting; 
cf.  MnE.  wassail.  —  \villgeclryht.  Cf.  willgeofa,  62,  1282;  ivilgestS;  Beow.  23, 
Gen.  2003;  wilboda,  Gu.  1220;  zvilgedryht  occurs  also  Ph.  342. 

915.  ferSgefeonde.    So  1584,  El.  174,  990. 

917.  gryiisniiTSas.  The  only  occurrence  of  the  compound.  For  the  meaning 
of  the  first  element,  cf.  Beow.  930 :  Fela  ic  laSes  gebad,  grynna  set  Grendle.  Cf. 
1.  86,  note. 

926-935.   The  Lord's  rebuke  to  Andrew  is  in  the  original;  see  Introd.,  p.  x.w. 

930.  ping  gehegan.  '  Accomplish  the  meeting,'  i.e.  the  meeting  with  Mat- 
thew.   Cf.  157;  and /"//.  493 :  seona'5  gehegan. 

932.  wega  gevvinn.  Grein  first  read  wega  gewinn,  but  Gn.-  c.hanges  to 
Avega  gewinn,  '  labor  viarum.'  I  find  no  parallel  to  wega  gewinn ;  but  with 
Avega  gewinn  cf.  1.  197,  and  Beow.  1469  :  under  ySa  gewinn.  —  932''.  Cf.  El.  945  : 
Wite  iSu  J)e  gearwor;  Jul.  556:  wiste  he  hi  gearwor. 

936.  raed  ^dre  ongit.  '  Straightway  learn  my  will.'  Hall  remarks,  '  This  hemi- 
stich is  a  crux  of  the  first  water ;  it  probably  means,  "  Be  not  afraid,  but  main- 
tain your  composure."  '  There  is  no  difBculty  in  interpreting  the  passage  if  one 
takes  rted  in  the  sense  of  'command,'  'counsel,'  'will,'  as  in  1.  149S.  The  lines 
939''  ff.  then  complete  the  meaning  of  this  half-line. 

938^.   So  1 721'';    Gu.  60S;    Chr.  1515;  ///(/.  34S;    Gen.  1015. 

939*.   Cf.  crasft  ond  miht,  Dan.  328,  Az.  44,  Chr.  218. 

940^.   So  1038,  1065;  Beo7v.  1928. 

942.  heafodmagan.  The  MS.  reading  is  -magu  =  -magum,  and  is  evidently 
due  to  inadvertence  ;  the  mistake  might  easily  occur  after  -dolgiini  and  pre- 
ceding -nettum,  MS.  -nettu.  The  reading  of  Grimm,  Kemble,  and  Grein  (so  also 
B.-T.,  p.  514,  Simons,  p.  74),  heafodmagan,  'cognatus  principalis  vel  pro.ximus.' 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  12$ 

looks  back  to  1.  940,  Jjin  broiJor.  The  form  heafodmaga  does  not  occur,  how- 
ever, except  in  this  emended  passage;  but  liiafodmSg  is  found  Gen.  1200,  1605, 
and  note  especially  Beow.  58S :  )>Inum  broSrum,  heafodmSgum.  As  simplex, 
mdga  is  common,  and  cf.  wuldormdga,  Gu.  1067.  If  we  read  heafodniagii  with 
liaskervill  and  Wiilker,  the  compound  would  mean  'leader,  captain,'  which  neither 
describes  the  relation  existing  between  Andrew  and  Matthew  nor  takes  sufficient 
account  of  1.  940''.  There  is  nothing  in  the  Greek  version  corresponding  to  1.  940'', 
or  to  lieafodniiigan ;  the  Legend,  p.  119,  says  merely  to  Matheum  J^Tninn  hreher. 
For  this  passage  Professor  Hart  suggests-  heafodmaga,  gen.  pi.,  appositive  to 
iiuT'nra,  1.  941  ;  but  the  word  is  somewhat  too  dignified  to  be  used  appropriately 
of  the  Mermedonians. 

946.  elpeodigra.    A  genitive  dependent  on  eal  paet  mancynn,  945. 

947.'  gebundene.  According  to  strict  law  of  concord  the  form  should  be  ge- 
bunden,  as  Holthausen  (see  variants)  suggests,  agreeing  with  inancynn,  1.  945. 
But  the  plural  idea  of  elJ;eodigra  easily  passes  over  into  the  word  that  follows  it. 

948.  See  356,  note. 

949.  secgende  w'aes.  This  is  the  only  example  of  the  periphrastic  historical 
preterit  in  Atidreas,  and,  according  to  Pessels,  T/ie  Present  and  Fast  Periphrastic 
Tenses  in  Anglo-Saxon,  p.  50,  the  only  other  example  in  verse  is  Beow.  1105, 
where,  however,  the  verb  is  in  the  optative  mood.  Apparently  Beo7v.  3028  :  sivd 
se  secg  hwata  secgende  wces,  has  escaped  Pessels.  In  prose  the  construction  is 
frequent. 

950.  edre  geneSan.  One  expects  aldre  gene&an,  as  in  1.  1351,  Ap.  17;  but 
cf.  Ap.  50. 

952.  dteled.  The  change  to  d«led  is  necessary  unless  one  takes  dtelan  as 
intransitive  (cf.  1.  5),  pin  hra  being  then  the  subject  of  sceal  dS^lan. 

954.  faran  flode  blod.  The  construction  is  awkward  and  the  .statement  a 
bit  extravagant.  Should  one  rea.d  /ara/i  on  foldan  blod'i  Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  88:  ita 
sanguis  tuis  fluent  in  terra  sicut  aqua. 

956.  siege.  Grimm's  reading  slagc,  accepted  also  by  Grein,  is  apparently  in 
deference  to  the  form  manslaga,  1.  12 18.  But  siege  is  an  authentic  form;  cf. 
Glossary,  and////.  229:  siege  Jjrowade. 

957''-g58^.    }7ryin,  -gewinn.    See  887,  note. 

962.  benuuin.  The  form  bennuin  occurs  twice  in  Andreas,  the  form  benduni 
the  same  number  of  times.  Wiilker,  p.  45,  incorrectly  ascribes  the  reading  ben- 
diim  to  the  MS.  in  1.  1038.  Cf.  also  Dan.  435,  benne;  Jul.  519,  bennian.  The 
forms  bendiim  and  bennum  are  to  be  regarded  as  doublets  and  need  not  be 
changed  all  to  bendum.    See  Kluge,  Anglia  IV,  105-106,  and  Bright,  MLA'.  I,  10. 

963.  weras  wansSlige.    So  El.  478, 977 ;  Beo-u.  105 :  wonsieli  wer  (i.e.  Grendel). 

965.  Grein  and  Wiilker  put  a  semicolon  after  gecytfan,  the  other  Edd.  only 
a  comma.  After  ]?ehte,  1.  966,  Kemble  puts  a  semicolon,  the  other  Edd.  a 
comma.  Cosijn  (PBB.  XXI,  13)  encloses  rod  wses  ara^red  within  parentheses, 
other^vise  following  Wiilker's  punctuation.    After  arSred  all  Edd.  have  a  comma. 

966.  gealgan  pehte.  So  Ap.  22.  The  word gealga,  literally  'gallows,'  is  used 
in  all  the  early  Germanic  dialects  to  indicate  the  cross  on  which  Christ  was 
crucified;   cf.  Kluge,  Etyin.    IVort.^,  s.v.  galgen.    So  also  the    appropriate  verb 


126  NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 

which  is  used  for  '  crucify'  in  Anglo-Saxon  is  hon,  dhoii ;  see  Ap.  41.  Crucifixion 
does  not  appear  to  have  been  a  method  of  punishment  with  which  the  early  Ger- 
manic peoples  were  acquainted  ;  hanging,  however,  was  a  familiar  penalty.  '  The 
punishment  of  the  gallows  was  widely  used  by  our  earliest  ancestors,  and  finds  a 
varied  expression  in  the  older  literature, — chiefly  in  Scandinavian  poetry.  It 
was  by  no  means  so  ignoble  an  exit  from  life  as  it  is  now,  and  indicated  no  abso- 
lute disgrace  like  the  vile  indignities  of  the  hurdle  and  the  swamp.  The  gallows 
did  not  mutilate  a  body,  and  its  victim  had,  moreover,  a  chance  to  join  the 
Wild  Huntsman  as  he  swept  by,  and  so  to  storm  the  heights  of  Heaven  and  Val- 
halla. Nay,  Odin  himself,  as  he  tells  us  in  the  Hdvavidl,  "  hung  nine  nights  on 
the  windy  tree,"  that  is  upon  the  gallows;  and  whether  or  not  this  be  a  Norse 
version  of  the  Crucifixion,  the  honorable  association  remains.  .  .  .  Later  it  was  the 
prerogative  of  nobles  to  be  beheaded,  while  common  men  were  hanged ;  but  the 
poet  of  Beowulf  seems  to  indicate  that  if  the  old  king,  Hrethel,  had  punished 
Haethcyn  in  the  way  of  blood-feud  for  the  innocent  murder  of  the  elder  brother 
Herebeald,  it  would  have  been  by  the  gallows.  The  monarch  cannot  bring  him- 
self to  it: 

Grievous  it  is  for  the  gray-hair'd  man 

To  bide  the  sight  that  his  son  must  ride 

Young  on  the  gallows. 

11.  2444-2446. 

We  may  conclude  that  a  gallows-destiny,  while  not  yearned  for,  and  far  less 
noble  than  death  by  sword  or  spear,  did  not  acquire  its  peculiar  disgrace  until 
the  middle  ages.'  Gummere,  Gerfiianic  Origins,  pp.  240-241.  See  further  Bugge, 
SUidier  over  de  nordiske  Gude-  og  Heltesagns  Oprindelse,  1st  series,  pp.  291-304, 
in  his  discussion  of  Hdvamdl. 

967'^.  So  El.  886;  cf.  Chr.  1065-1066:  ond  seo  hea  rod,  ryht  arjered ;  Vision 
of  the  Cross,  44:  rod  wass  ic  arSred. 

968-969^.  Cf.  Chr.  1 1 12:  and  of  his  sidan  swa  some  swat  forletan ;  Chr. 
I449-I450''^:  of  minre  sidan  swat  iit  gutun,  dreor  to  foldan  ;  Sat.  545''-546'^:  \>^r 
he  his  swat  forlet  feallon  to  foldan.    See  Jo/iu  XIX,  34. 

970^.  So  Gu.  905. 

971.  purh  bluTne  hige.  '  With  kindly  intent.' 

972.  This  line  is  variously  interpreted.  It  seems  best  to  take  on  ell}jeode  as 
meaning  '  in  this  foreign  land,'  i.e.  in  Mermedonia,  and  s-\va  as  meaning  '  how,' 
'  according  as.'  Translate,  accordingly,  '  I  wished  therein  with  kindly  intent  to 
give  to  you  an  example  according  as  it  shall  be  shown  [i.e.  the  example  shall  be 
realized]  in  this  foreign  land.'  Cf.  Legend,  p.  119,  1.  23:  ac  eall  ic  hit  arasfnede 
bset  ic  eow  steowe  hwylce  gemete  ge  sculon  arnsfnan.  Of  the  translators,  only 
Kemble  makes  on  ellpeode  refer  specifically  to  Mermedonia. 

975^.   So  Chr.  1352,  1507. 

978^.  So  Chr.  136;  215,  1681  ;  ////.  289;  Hy.  HI,  22  ;  cf.  also  11.  874,  1192,  and 
see  Cook's  Christ,  p.  133. 

979.  ea<5mecluni.  The  word  usually  means  '  humbly,'  but  translate  here  'joy- 
fully '  (Grein,  Dicht.,  '  mit  Grossmut ') ;  and  cf .  Git.  299  :  ou  ehie  ond  on  ?<]&m?diim, 
a.nd  f lid.  170:    hie  mid  ea&mcdutn   in  forleton  {Cook,  Judith   (1889),  translates 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 


127 


'  in  lowly  wise  they  let  her  in,'  but  the  context  shows  that  mid  ea&mi-ihttn 
means  'joyfully').  —  J?J6r  is  ar  gelaiig.  Ci.  Jul.  645:  haer  is  help  gelong;  SeaJ. 
121  :  \>^x  is  llf  gelong;  Ckr.  152,  365:  is  seo  hot  gelong  eall  act  \>c.  See  also 
Wulfstan,  ed.  Napier,  p.  151  :  J'onne  us  forlStaS  ealle  ure  woruldfrynd,  ne  magun 
hi  us  |)onne  jenigum  gode,  ac  biiS  act  gode  anum  gelang  eall  hwa;t  we  gefaran 
sceolon.    See  907-909,  note. 

980''.  So  1 1 54''. 

982'^.  beadu^ve  heard.    Cf.  Beoiv.  1539:  beadwe  heard. 

985.  Cf.  Beo7o.  320:  strjet  waes  stanfah,  stig  wisode. 

986.  Grein's  reading  hine  for  him  should  probably  be  accepted  here,  as  there 
appears  to  be  no  reason  why  the  dative  should  be  used. 

988'.  iJo  Beow.  27S6;  EL  1104;  Chr.  802;  cf.  of  Jtd/n  7vaii<^stede.,  El.  793; 
Pa/it/io-  45. 

991'.   So  Gil.  124. 

992.  hlo<y.  The  word  may  have  here  specific  meaning.  Cf.  Lethal  Code  of 
Alfred,  ed.  Turk,  p.  114:  Deofas  we  hataS  o5  .vii.  men,  from  .vii.  hl65  o'S 
.XXXV.,  siSSan  biS  here. 

994''.  a.  fill.  675:  swylt  ealle  fornom ;  Beo'io.  1436:  J^e  hine  swylt  fomam  (of 
one  of  the  water-monsters)  ;  El./^\1  :  Sr  J>ec  swylt  nime.  Kent,  Teutonic  Antiqui- 
ties in  Andreas  and  Elene,  pp.  4-5,  groups  together  a  number  of  similar  expres- 
sions, e.g.  Beotu.  1205:  hyne  wyrd  fomam;  Beow.  1080:  wig  ealle  fomam;  El. 
131  :  sume  wig  fomam,  etc.,  in  all  of  which  he  sees  personifications  of  Fate,  or 
Wyrd.  But  there  is  probably  no  conscious  figure  in  the  passages.  See  613'',  note  ; 
1531^  note. 

996.  heorodreorige.  HaeleS  must  be  plural,  to  agree  with  donilease,  1.  995, 
and  the  number  in  1.  994 ;  and  the  more  probable  reading  is  that  which  holds 
haelecJ  and  the  adjective  following  it  together,  rather  than  the  adjective  and 
deaSrais,  995.  Grein,  Spr.  II,  70,  supposes  an  uninflected  accusative  plural, 
-dreorig. 

997.  bil\vytne.  B.-T.,  p.  loi,  explains  this  word  as  follows  :  ^ lu'le,  "the  beak," 
/ru'it,  "  white,"  referring  to  the  I'eaks  of  young  birds,  then  to  their  nature  ' ;  this 
remarkable  explanation  the  dictionary  ascribes  to  Junius.  It  has  been  frequently 
repeated,  e.g.  by  Sweet,  Anglo-Saxon  Primer,  p.  96.  The  AED.,  s.v.  bileioliit, 
states  that  the  etymology  is  doubtful,  but  that  the  word  is  probably  derived  from 
'OTeut.  *hili-,  cognate  with  Olr.  bil,  "good,"  "mild,"  and  found  in  OHG. 
hillich.  Mod.  Ger.  billig,  "just,"  "reasonable,"  +  wit,  giving  the  sense  "mild  of 
wit  or  mind."  Cf.  Ger.  bilwiz,  "a  good  friendly  house-spirit,"  Grimm,  Germ. 
Myth.  (ed.  4),  III,  137  (Eng.  ed.  II,  473),  and  Billy-blind.  The  intei-pretation 
"white  of  bill  '■'  like  a  young  bird  (from  OE.  bile  +  Invit)  was  current  at  an  early 
date,  as  shown  by  12th  century  spellings;  cf.  French  bec-jaune,  Ger.  gelb-selmabel, 
though  these  are  depreciatory  rather  than  laudator^',  and  it  must  be  noted  that 
the  earlier  spellings  had  not  // 717/,  but  wife.''  The  word  Billy-blind  is  found  in 
ballads  in  the  sense  of  a  benevolent  household  spirit ;  cf.  Child,  English  and 
Scottish   Ballads  I,  67. 

999.  Godes  dryhtendoin.  The  MS.  has  god,  but  the  quantity-mark  is  fre- 
quently found  where  the  vowel  is  surely  short,  as  e.g.  1.  i030-\  where  the  MS.  has 


128  NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 

god,  but  the  context  demands  god.  Wiilker  inclines  to  the  opinion  that  god 
must  be  taken  as  \-\oxm.  =  mtniificenUa,  object  of  herede,  '  ein  begriff  d^r  z\i 
bilwytne  faeder  ganz  gut  passen  wiirde.'  But  stylistically  this  reading  is  very 
awkward;  cf.  11.  722-724,  in  which  the  phrasing  is  exactly  similar  to  the  present 
passage.  Dryhtendoiu  as  compound  occurs  only  in  the  present  passage ;  the 
formation,   however,  is  normal;  cf.  dryhtenbealu,   Git.   1323. 

999''-iooo.   Kemble    reads    dura,    translating    '  Soon  he   attacked  the   door.' 

Cf.   Beow.  721-722  : 

Duru  sona  onarn 
fyfbendum  fSst,       sy|>5an  he  hire  folmum  hran. 

The  Legend,  p.  120,  11.  lo-ii,  reads:  Se  Iidlga  Andreas  l>d  eode  id  Jxrs  carcernes 
diirii,  and  he  ^uorhte  Cristes  rode  fdcen,  and  raj^e  J>d  dura  ivaron  oniynede,  agree- 
ing with  the  Greek  version,  Walker,  p.  358,  'and  he  marked  the  gate  with  the 
sign  of  the  cross,  and  it  opened  of  its  own  accord.' 

1000.  haliges  gastes.  The  only  other  occurrence  of  gast  meaning  a  human 
being  in  Andreas  is  1.  1621. 

iooi'\   So  1263''.    Cf.  Gu.  1268*:  eadig  elnes  gemyndig. 

1002.  haele  hildedeor.  So  Beozv.  1646,  1816,  311 1  ;  El.  935  :  hffile)^  hildedeor. 
Hea&ndcor  occurs  twice  in  the  Beowidf.  —  htetJene  svviefon.  Sine/an,  '  sleep 
the  sleep  of  death';  cf.  Beoiu.  2060:  eefter  billes  bite  blodfag  swefe'5;  so  also 
Beow.  2256,  2746;  Ex.  495.  Cf.  also  sweorduin  aswebban,  1.  72;  w^pnuni 
asAvebban,  Ap.  69. 

1003.  dreore  druncne.  Cosijn  would  emend  to  bi'ore  druncne,  following  Beo'w. 
480  and  /ill.  486 ;  in  both  these  passages,  however,  beore  druncne  is  in  keeping 
with  the  context.  In  the  Andreas  the  context  demands  dreore;  cf.  1.  1003^  and 
heorodreorig,  1.  996. 

1005'.   So  1054'^;   Chr.  534;    Gen.  1550,  1709;  Jud.  303. 
1008 '.   Cf.  El.  322  :  geh'Sum  geomre. 

loio''.  So  Chr.  529,  Gu.  926,  Vision  of  the  Cross  148;  ci./nd.  97-98:  \>a.  wear'5 
.  .  .  hyht  genlwod. 

1012.  Cf.  Beow.  1626:  gode  J'ancodon  .  .  .  h^s  he  hi  hyne  gesundne  geseon 
moston ;  Beozv.  1997:  gode  ic  hanc  secge  l^aes  '5e  ic  "Se  gesundne  geseon  moste ; 
Beozo.  1874:  him  waes  bega  wen  .  .  .  haet  hie  seo'5'San  geseon  moston.  The  con- 
struction in  Beoza.  1874  is  mentioned  by  Kluge,  PBB.  IX,  190,  and  Bright,  MLN. 
II,  82,  as  affording  proof  of  the  use  of  geseon  as  intransitive  reflexive ;  Sievers, 
PBB.  IX,  140,  overlooking  the  parallel  between  the  passage  in  Beozainlf  d,x\A  that 
in  Andreas,  suggests  a  number  of  textual  emendations  which  a  comparison  of 
the  passages  shows  to  be  unjustifiable.  Pogatscher,  Anglia  XXIII,  273,  suggested 
that  hie,  1.  1012',  be  taken  as  the  object  of  geseon,  the  subject  being  une.xpressed  ; 
but,  afterwards,  Anglia  XXIII,  299,  inclines  to  accept  geseon  as  intransitive. 

1013.  syb  waes  genijene.  Cf.  Beozv.  1857  :  sib  gemsene ;  Chr.  581  :  sib  sceal 
gemiene. 

1015''.   So  El.  1235  (of  Christ  upon  the  cross). 

1016^.  Cf.  Wand.  42  :  clyppe  and  cysse ;  and,  for  frequent  occurrences  of  the 
formula  in  later  literature,  see  Fehr,  Die  for}nelhafte)i  Elemente  in  den  alten 
englischen  Balladen,  table  XIII. 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  I29 

1019''.   See  769,  note. 

1023  ff.  The  passage  m  the  Legend,  p.  120,  1.  14  ff.,  corresponding  to  the 
omitted  parts  of  the  narrative  here,  is  as  follows :  Se  eadiga  Matheus  ))a  and  se 
haliga  Andreas  hie  wSron  cyssende  him  betweonon.  Se  halga  Andreas  him  to 
cwa.  (S,  '  Hwaet  is  Jjaet,  bro^or  ?  Hu  eart  J>u  her  gemet  ?  Nu  )>ry  dagas  to  lafe 
syndon  J'3et  hie  H  willa'S  acwellan,  and  him  to  mete  gedon.'  Se  halga  Matheus 
him  andswarode,  and  he  cwceS,  'Bro^or  Andreas,  ac  ne  gehyrdest  Ki  Drihten 
cwel'ende,  "  For  \>ox\.  J'e  ic  eow  sende  swa  swa  sceap  on  middum  wulfum  ?"  panon 
\v?cs  geworden,  mid  |>y  )'e  hie  me  sendon  on  Hs  carcern,  ic  baed  Qme  Drihten  l^aet 
he  hine  asteowde,  and  hraj>e  he  me  hine  asteowde,  and  he  me  to  cwaeS,  "  Onbid 
her  XXVII  daga,  and  sefter  \>ovi  ic  sende  t5  )>e  Andreas  Knne  broSor,  and  he  \>h 
ut  alSt  of  }'issum  carcerne  and  ealle  J^a  [I'e]  mid  \>%  syndon."  Swa  me  Drihten  to 
cwaeS,  ic  gesTo.  Bro'Sor,  hwast  sculon  we  nu  don  .■"  Se  halga  Andreas  ^a  and  se 
halga  Matheus  gebiedon  to  Drihtne,  and  aefter  \>o\\  gebede  se  haliga  Andreas  sette. 
his  hand  ofer  J'ara  wera  eagan  j^e  tjjer  on  })Sm  carcerne  wEron,  and  gesiht>e  hie 
onfengon.  And  eft  he  sette  his  hand  ofer  hiora  heortan,  and  heora  andgit  him 
eft  to  hwirfde.  The  Greek  version  agrees  in  the  main  with  the  Legend,  but  as 
usual  is  somewhat  more  detailed. 

1028.  Grimm,  Kemble,  and  Baskervill  set  only  a  comma  after  Godes ;  but  a 
heavier  pause  is  better.  Se  halga,  1.  1029,  refers  specifically  to  Matthew,  and  it 
is  his  special  prayer  that  follows,  1.  1030  ff. 

1034''.   Cf.  Dan.  438  :  ac  hie  on  fri'6'e  drihtnes. 

1035.   Cf.  El.  2-3  :  tu  hund  ond  Keo  geteled  rimes,  swylce  .xxx.  eac. 

1035  ff.  It  seems  quite  probable  that  the  second  half  of  lines  1036  and  1040 
were  never  filled  out;  it  should  be  noticed  that  the  first  half  of  both  lines  gives 
merely  a  number.  If  the  lines  are  thus  regarded  as  incomplete,  it  is  not  necessary 
to  suppose  any  omissions  in  the  text.  Comparison  with  the  Legend  and  the  Greek 
version  indicates  also  that  nothing  has  been  lost. 

The  numbers  in  the  different  versions  vary :  the  Legend,  p.  121,  gives  248  men 
and  49  women;  the  Greek  version  (Bonnet,  p.  94)  has  in  some  MSS.  270  men, 
in  others  249  men ;  the  number  of  women  in  all  MSS.  is  49.  If  1.  1036  is  to  be 
filled  out,  the  completed  number,  249,  is  the  most  probable  reading.  Wiilker's 
reading  seofontig  is  an  attempt  to  make  the  Anglo-Saxon  agree  with  the  Greek 
version ;  but  the  regular  form  for  70  would  be  Jnindseofontig,  not  seofontig. 

B.'-  suggests  retaining  the  MS.  reading  on,  1.  1039,  changing  pier  to  paem, 
and  emending  1.  1040  to  read  anes  wana  orwyrJ»e  fiftig.  The  passage  as  thus 
reconstructed  he  would  translate  '  Two  hundred,  counted  by  number,  also  seventy 
[following  Wiilker],  he  saved  from  destruction  ;  there  he  left  not  one  fast  with 
bonds  in  the  city  inclosure,  out  of  which  [i.e.  on  )>jem]  then  also,  in  addition  to 
the  men,  of  women  fifty  wanting  one  he  freed  from  ignominy,  from  fright.' 

1037^.  Cf.  Beoiv.  827:  genered  wi'S  nl^e ;   Chr.  1258  :  generede  from  niScwale. 

1040.  anes  wana  ]7e  fiftig.  Wana,  usually  as  indeclinable  adj.  w^ith  the  geni- 
tive, is  of  frequent  occurrence  :  see  Shipley,  p.  S3;  Sievers,  Gram.,  §  291,  note  2, 
and  PBB.  IX,  255,  264.  There  is  no  example  beside  the  present  passage,  how- 
ever, in  which  it  is  followed  by  the  particle  fte  before  a  numeral.  But  see  B.-T., 
pp.  1 1 64-1 165,  for  examples  of  wan  J>e,  Ices  J>e,  followed,  as  here,  by  a  numeral. 


I30  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

The  construction  wana  pe  is  probably  due  to  contamination  with  -uian  /,e,  hrs 
J>e,  etc. 

1044  a.  Matthew  here  drops  out  of  the  story,  his  name  not  being  mentioned 
again.  The  poem  does  not  make  clear  what  becomes  of  him ;  but  in  the  Legend 
and  the  Greek  version  we  are  told  more  specifically  of  the  action  of  Matthew  and 
the  throng  of  the  rescued.  The  rescued  men  and  women  are  commanded  to  go 
to  the  lower  parts  of  the  city  and  sit  under  a  fig-tree  and  eat  of  its  fruit  until 
Andrew  shall  come  to  them.  Matthew  and  his  disciples  are  conveyed  under 
cover  of  a  cloud  to  St.  Peter,  with  whom  they  remain  (cf.  Legend,  p.  121,  Bonnet, 
p.  94).  The  narrative  in  the  Andreas  compresses  the  account  in  that  Matthew 
leads  out  the  rescued  men  and  women,  the  whole  party  being  covered  with  the 
cloud ;  and,  as  indicated,  nothing  is  said  as  to  their  destination. 

1046.  weorod  on  wilsKf.  Cf.  Beow.  216:  weras  on  wilslS ;  EL  223  :  wif  on 
willsljj. 

1047.  scyldhatan.  'Wicked  persecutors,  enemies,'  appositive  to  ealdgeniS- 
lan,  104S.  The  only  other  occurrence  of  this  word  is  1.  1147;  probably,  how- 
ever, scyldhetiim,  1.  85,  is  to  be  regarded  merely  as  a  variant  form.  The  first 
element  is  intensive  as  in  scyldfrece,  Gen.  898.  A  noun-compound  of  similar 
formation  is  found  in  El.  1299:  lease  leodhatan ;  Jnd.  72:  la'Sne  leodhatan,  etc. 
The  second  element  in  all  these  compounds  is  to  be  connected  with  hatian, 
'  to  hate,'  '  persecute.'  The  word  scyldhata  is  accordingly  not  to  be  connected 
with  Mod.  Germ,  schultheiss,  'judge,'  which  appears  in  QWG.  scuUheitzo  \s\\.\).  the 
meaning  tribunus,  centurio,  as  is  done  by  Grein,  Spr.  II,  415,  under  the  form 
scyldhata  ;  the  word  is  correctly  glossed  by  B.-T.,  p.  847,  under  scyldhata.  Cf. 
Wulfstan,  ed.  Napier,  p.  164,  1.  11  :  cyrichatan  hetole  and  leodhatan  grimme.— 
scyMan.  The  usual  form  of  this  verb  is  sce&&an,  the  only  examples  with  y  as 
the  radical  vowel  being,  according  to  Sievers,  EBB.  IX,  210,  the  present  passage 
and  1.  1 561. 

1048.  After  ealdgeniman,  Grimm,  Grein,  and  Wiilker  have  only  a  comma. 
I056\   So  Ex.  432  ;   //y.  IV,  43  ;   El.  80. 

1059^  Cf.  Eh.  519,  Chr.  576:  gonga'5  glaadmode  ;  £1.  1095:  glredmod  code; 
/nd.  140:  o«  hie  gla^dmode  gegan  ha;fdon.— to  pans  Se.  To  followed  by  the 
genitive  occurs  three  times  in  Andreas  (cf.  11.  1070,  1123),  and  in  all  three  pas- 
sages the  construction  plainly  has  the  sense  of  limit  of  motion.  Shipley,  p.  iiS, 
groups  such  constructions  as  occurring  after  verbs  of  motion  to  express  the  object 
of  motion,  and  points  out  that  the  construction  is  unknown  to  Anglo-Saxon  prose. 

1061.  oTOait.  Cosijn,  EBB.  XXI,  14,  thinks  the  word  J^aBr  should  appear 
after  0(J9a;t,  but  the  expression  looks  back  to  1.  io58i'  and  is  complete  as  it 
stands. 

1062.  stapul  ^renne.  The  words  correspond  to  <ttu\ov  xaXK-oDi',  Bonnet,  p.  94, 
and  Legend,  p.  121,  1.  21,  swer;  in  both  the  Greek  and  the  Legend  the  column 
is  surmounted  by  an  image,  which  is  described  in  the  Legend  as  arm  onlTcnessc, 
though  the  column  itself  is  not  said  to  be  made  of  brass.  Nothing  is  said  of  the 
image  in  the  poem. 

1065.  I^anon  basnode.  The  expression  indicates  the  direction  from  which 
that  which  he  awaits  is  to  come;  cf.  Sievers,  EBB.  XII,  193. 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  131 

1068.  frumgaras.  The  word  is  frequently  used  in  the  sense  'patriarch,'  see 
B.-T.,  p.  342  ;  but  also,  as  here,  '  leader,  chief.'  Cf.  the  Roman  priinipilus,  the 
first  centurion  of  the  first  cohort ;  and  see  T.  Rice  Holmes,  "  Who  were  '  the  Cen- 
turions of  the  First  Rank  '  ?  ",  in  his  Ctcsar's  Conquest  of  Gaul  (London,  1899),  pp. 
^7 1-3S3.  The  term  primipilus  was  evidently  a  technical  term  of  rank  in  the  Roman 
army,  although  the  limits  of  its  inclusion  do  not  appear  to  be  definitely  deter- 
mined. In  Anglo-Saxon,  however,  the  term  fruiiigdr  does  not  appear  to  have 
technical  meaning. 

1 069=*.   So  Chr.  1614. 
1071^.   So  Jul.  544. 
1072-1074.   Cf.  Gu.  635  : 

Wendun  ge  ond  woldun       wij>erhycgende, 

\>2t\  ge  scyppende       sceoldan  gelice 

wesan  in  wuldre ;       Sow  \>5Lt  [J)3bs  ?]  wyrs  gelomp.  ' 

1074''.   So  Beow.  2323  ;   Gen.  49,  1446. 
1075-1077.   Ci./ul.  236-7237: 

Da  wres  mid  clustre       carcernes  duru 
behliden,  homra  geweorc. 

1078.  unhy?5ige.  The  only  other  occurrence  of  this  word  in  the  poetry  is  Gu. 
1302;  a  single  occurrence  has  also  been  noted  in  prose,  cf.  B.-T.,  p.  1119,  and 
Cosijn,  PBB.  XXI,  14,  where  it  is  synonomous  with  earjn,  the  opposite  to  luelig. 

1079.  laSspell  beran.    Cf.  1.  1295^ 

1081-1082.  Wiilker,  reading  Snig  in  1081,  takes  this  word  as  subject  of 
geinette,  10S2.  He  translates  '  dass  der  Fremden  nicht  einer  iibrig  geblieben 
im  Gefangnisse  (ihnen)  lebendig  begegnet  sei.'  But,  as  Sievers  points  out  {PBB. 
XVI,  551),  -metan  is  used  here  as  a  synonym  oi  findan,  and  demands  an  object. 
He  remarks  that  ienigne  to  lafe  '  nicht  in  den  vers  passt,'  and  suggests  £en(i)ge 
to  lafe,  in  carcerne,  cwic  ne  gemetton.  But  the  metrical  argument  does  not 
seem  to  be  sutificient  reason  for  rejecting  the  natural  reading  Snigne  in  1081. 

1084.  gaste  berofene.  Cf.  since  berofene,  Ex.  36 ;  golde  berofene,  Beow. 
2931. 

1085''.  a.  Beo-cv.  1568:  faegne  flseschoman. — 1085^'.  Cf.  Ch>-.  Soi  :  hser  sceal 
forht  monig;  and  see  1549,  1596.  ^^ 

1086*.   So  also /u I.  267. 

1087^.  So  1557,  Gen.  879;  heane  hygegeomre,  £1.  1215,  C/ir.  994. 

1088.  blates  beodgastes.  There  is  nothing  in  the  Legend  or  the  Greek  ver- 
sion corresponding  to  this  striking  figure. 

1090.  deade  gefeormedon.  Cf.  1077''.  Cosijn  {PBB.  XXI,  15)  would  read 
hra  gefeoriiiedoii :  hum  Jjegnuni  wearS,  etc.,  citing  Chr.  789  in  proof  that 
hiiru  may  carry  the  main  metrical  stress.  But  durujjegnum  is  so  appropriate 
to  the  context  that  one  hesitates  to  change  it.  Sievers  regards  the  line,  which 
scans _lx  X  I  -^x  X'  ^s  metrically  imperfect,  because  in  lines  of  this  type  only 
one  unstressed  syllable  should  follow  the  first  stressed  syllable.  But  he  himself 
{PBB.  X,  255)  records  a  verse  of  the  type  _^x  X  X  I  —  —  X-  Cf.  also  Ap.  4: 
torhte   ond   tiread(i)ge,    _Lx  X  I  —  —  X'    ^"^   An.    iioS',    >o<  X  X   I— X— • 


132  NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 

1092.  hildbedd  styred.  '  For  them  all  was  the  war-couch  prepared.'  The 
passage  with  which  one  would  like  to  connect  this  is  Beow.  2436  :  inor&orbed 
stred\  so  Cosijn  {PBB.  XXI,  15)  derives  stjTed  from  sti-ewian,  and  sired, 
emended  to  streid,  in  the  Beo7viilf,  from  the  same  verb.  But  it  is  difficult  to  see 
how  styred  can  derive  from  strewian.  B.-T.,  p.  931,  glosses  styred  under  styrian, 
'  stir,  disturb,'  and  explains  the  passage  as  meaning  that  their  bed  was  disturbed 
when  they,  the  dead  watchmen,  were  portioned  out  as  food  to  the  Mermedonians  ; 
so  also  Grimm,  p.  125,  'so  mag  liildbedd  styran  sein  "  das  ehrenbett  verwehren, 
entziehen,  storen,"  eher  als  "  das  todesbett  steuem,  ordnen." '  But  Grimm  and 
B.-T.  appear  to  overlook  the  meaning  of  the  first  half  of  1.  1092;  the  hildbedd 
is  styred  as  result  of  a  grievous  conflict,  i.e.  the  struggle  with  Andrew  and 
Matthew.  Grein's  explanation  of  the  word,  Sp7-.  II,  491,  as  derived  from  infini- 
tive styran,  stieran,  with  the  first  meaning  '  guide,  direct,'  a  w-ell-defined  second 
meaning  '  restrain,  control,'  and  for  the  present  passage  a  third  meaning,  'appoint, 
ordain,  arrange,'  seems  altogether  to  be  the  most  probable  one.  Cf.  Hall,  '  For 
each  of  the  door-thanes  was  the  deathbed  appointed.' 

1094.  burg^varu.  Sievers  {PBB.  I,  489),  notes  this  example  and  one  other, 
liifii,  Hy.  VII,  30,  as  the  only  instances  of  the  ace.  sg.  of  fem.  w-stems  ending  in  -u. 

1095.  gengan.  A  form  of  the  verb  found  only  in  the  poetrj' ;  see  Gram., 
§  396,  note  2. 

1096.  modige.  This  example  seems  to  have  escaped  Sievers,  PBB.  X,  460. 
1097^.   So  Rid.  XXIII,  II.  —  1097'^.  Cf.  Beow.  835:  J^Srwaes  eal  geadpr  Gren- 

dles  grape. 

1099.  taan.    See  6,  note  ;  649^,  note. 

1 100  ff.  The  poet  omits  a  necessary  step  in  the  motivation  of  the  narrative 
here.  This  whole  episode  of  the  choosing  of  a  victim  from  their  own  number  by 
the  Mermedonians  is  omitted  in  the  Legend;  but  the  Greek  version  (Bonnet, 
pp.  94-95)  relates  that  as  the  hands  of  the  Mermedonians  were  lifted  in  the  act 
of  mutilating  the  bodies  of  the  dead  watchmen,  at  the  prayer  of  Andrew  the 
knives  fell  from  their  hands  and  their  hands  were  turned  to  stone.  It  thus  be- 
came necessary  to  cast  lots  in  order  to  determine  which  of  their  number  should 
be  offered  as  food  for  the  rest.  Another  interesting  detail  is  omitted  by  the  Anglo- 
Saxon  version  in  the  present  passage.  According  to  the  Greek  (Bonnet,  p.  96)  the 
Mermedonians  determine  to  subsist  upon  the  bodies  of  the  seven  dead  watchmen 
until  they  shall  be  able  to  send  out  their  young  men  in  boats  to  attack  the  neigh- 
boring countries  and  bring  in  some  victims  with  which  to  satisfy  their  hunger. 
Gutschmid,  p.  382,  points  out  that  this  statement  accords  with  the  identification 
of  Mermedonia  as  the  voXixvi-ov  MvpfiTjKLOv  of  Strabo,  Bk.  VII,  4,  5,  since  the 
Achaians  of  the  east  coast  of  the  Black  Sea,  as  well  as  other  tribes  of  the  region, 
were,  according  to  Strabo,  notorious  pirates  (cf.  Introd.,  p.  Ixvi). 

iio4ff.  In  the  Greek  version,  the  lot  falls  upon  seven  old  men  ;  of  these  seven 
one  offers  his  son  in  his  stead,  and  later  his  daughter  as  well.  The  Anglo-Saxon 
version  says  nothing  of  the  seven  men  or  of  the  daughter. 

1107^.  Cf.  Gu.  599:  feores  or^venan. 

mi.  lac.  For  the  etymology  of  this  word,  see  Bradley,  Academy  XXXVI, 
24-25  (July  13,  1889). 


NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 


^35 


1112^.  Cf.  Gu.  95-96:  t»am  \>e  his  giefe  willaS  hicgan  t5  j^once. 

H13.  iiiodgeoinrc.  The  compound  occurs  also  1708  and  Beow.  2894;  but 
the  more  frequent  form  is  gcoinoriiidd.  The  syntax  here  is  nom.  pi.,  agreeing 
with  the  sense,  not  the  grammar,  of  peod,  nom.  sg.  fem. 

Iii5''-iii6'^.  ^i.  Beow.  2278-2279:  Swd  se  &eoJscL'a&a  .  .  .  hl-old  on  Itrusan 
hordicrna  stem,  of  the  dragon  which  guarded  the  treasure. 

1 1 16.  reow  ricsode.  The  metre  requires  double  alliteration  and  therefore 
favors  the  change  from  hreow  to  reo^v.  The  MS.  reading  hreow  in  the  present 
passage  is  the  only  occurrence  of  that  form  for  reow  (cf.  Sievers,  PBB.  IX,  257). 

1118^.  So  /'//.  550.  —  The  Edd.  have  no  punctuation  after  onbryrded,  but  a 
period  after  bcadulace. 

1 1 19;'.  So  Edg.  34  {Bihl.  II,  3S4). 

1122.  eogo'Se.     Initial  g  is  also  omitted  in  eador,  1627  ;  see  Gram.,  §  214,  ■]. 

1 124.  herigweardas.  Corresponding  to  the  Greek  01  5riixioi,  Bonnet,  p.  96, 
1.  5,  and  frequently  in  this  episode.  Perhaps  nowhere  is  the  grotesqueness  of  the 
narrative  in  the  Andreas  so  striking  as  in  the  present  passage,  in  which  an  army  is 
called  together  with  all  the  accompaniments  of  battle  for  the  purpose  of  devouring 
their  single  victim. 

1125.  ceastre^va^ena.  Perhaps  one  should  read  here  ceaster-,  as  in  1646, 
El.  42,  as  is  suggested  by  Napier,  Old  English  Glosses,  p.  103,  note.  But  the  MS. 
of  the  Andreas  presents  in  many  respects  a  late  text,  and  it  may  be  that  here  we 
have  an  example  of  the  tendency  in  late  West  Saxon  to  extend  the  -e  of  the 
oblique  case  of  feminine  nouns  to  the  nominative  ;  cf.  Ap.  1 1,  Koinebyrig,  and  see 
Meyer,  Ztir  Sprache  d.  jilng.  Tlieile  d.  C/ironik  von  Peterboroitgh,  §  38.  That  the 
word  is  to  be  taken  as  compound,  and  not  as  two  words,  as  is  done  by  Grein  and 
Baskervill,  is  sufficiently  established  by  its  use  in  other  passages.  Wiilker,  note 
to  1.  1 1 25,  mcorrectly  ascribes  ceasterwarena  to  Spr.  I,  159;  the  citation  there 
agrees  with  Grein 's  text.  —  cyrni  upp  astah.  Bourauel,  p.  82,  unnecessarily 
supposes  this  phrase  to  have  been  derived  from  Virgil,  AetieidY,  451,  //  clamor 
coelo;  see  also  11.  761-762,  note.  Cf.  Beow.  782  :  sweg  upastag;  Gii.  234  :  w6^'  iip 
astag  cearf ulra  cirm ;  Jul.  62  :  reord  up  astag. 

1 127*'.  Also  1.  1342'^  ;/?</.  615  ;  hearmleoS  agol. 

1128*.  So  Gen.  210c,  2479,  2699. 

1 130.  The  logical  relation  of  the  clause  introduced  by  J?e  is  that  of  a  clause 
explanatory  of  what  precedes;  thus  Pogatscher,  Anglia  XXIII,  272,  translates 
'  Schonung  bei  dem  volke,  dass  es  ihm  das  leben,  das  dasein,  gonnen  wollte.' 
Examples  of  similar  construction  are  Dan.  607  ;  Beow.  1334,  2606.  Grein,  Dic/it., 
takes  ]7e  as  relative,  its  antecedent  being  folce :  '  doch  der  Arme  konnte  da  durch- 
aus  nicht  finden  Gnade  bei  dem  Volke,  die  ihm  gonnen  wollte  seines  Lebens 
Fristung.' 

1132.  saecce  gesohte.  Ci.  Beoic.  1989:  sascce  secean ;  ibid.  2562:  saecce  to 
seceanne.  Cf.  El.  940 :  SEce  raeran ;  Beo7i'.  2499,  ^''^-  LXXXVIII,  29 :  sa:cce 
fremman. 

1133.  sciirheard.  The  exact  meaning  of  the  compound  has  not  been  satis- 
factorily determined.  It  is  found  only  in  this  passage  and  in  Beoi.L<.  1033,  and  is 
defined  by  B.-T.  '  made  hard  by  blows,'  by  Grein,  Spr.  II,  4 1 5,  '  ictu  durus,'  Dicht. 


134  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

'  schauerhart.'  Pearce,  MLN.  VII,  193,  explains  scurheard  as  meaning  '  hardened 
in  water,'  'shower  of  water'  passing  into  'water  at  rest.'  Professor  Hart,  AILX. 
VIII,  61,  quotes  the  following  phrase  (from  Lumby,  Be  Domes  Dccge,  p.  16, 
1.  264)  :  ne  }>^r  hagiil  scuras  hearde  mid  siiawe,  i.e.  hagidscuras,  and  takes  scur- 
. heard  as  =  'sharp,'  '  cutting  like  a  storm.'  Palmer,  MLN.  VIII,  122,  gives  the 
compound  an  active  sense  and  takes  it  to  mean  '  hard  in  battle,'  scur  '  the  strokes 
of  the  sword  in  battle.'  This  seems  the  most  probable  meaning  of  the  word,  and 
although  SCU7'  is  not  found  in  Anglo-Saxon  in  the  sense  of  'battle,'  clearly  defined 
examples  occur  in  Chaucer,  Tr.  and  Cr.  Ill,  1063-1064,  IV,  47-49  (see  my  note, 
MLN.  XIX,  234),  and  later  in  the  ballads,  in  the  derived  sense  'attack,'  e.g.  'It 
was  a  shouir  o  sad  sickness,'  Child,  The  English  and  Scottish  Popular  Ballads 
III,  385 ;  also  I,  68,  II,  105,  III,  3S6. 

1137-1138^.   Cf.  Beow.  1477-1478'^  :  gif  ic  ^t  }:>earfe  Jnnre  scolde  aldre  linnan. 
1 139.  The  fact  that  the  first  haK-line  is  too  short  metrically,  as  it  is  preserved 
in  the  MS.,  does  not  seem  to  Wiilker  sufficient  reason  for  an  emendation;  if  the 
half-line  is  to  be  filled  out,  however,  he  suggests  prist  ondjjrohtheard,  as  in  1. 1264. 
1140-^.   So  also  1.  1515  ;  Wand.  62;  Me7i.  82;  Beozu.  2757:  mago^egn  modig. 
1142-1143.   A  reminiscence,    Cosijn    thinks    {PBB.   XXI,    15),  of  the   earlier 
passage,  11.  50-51. 

1144''.  So  Chr.  760,  "]%()■, /ill.  263;  El.  10S6;  Gil.  910;  cf.  also  Gii.  1061  : 
halig  on  heahjiu. 

1145.  The  figure  is  not  found  in  the  Greek  version;  cf.  Walker,  p.  362,  'and 
straightway  the  knives  were  loosened  and  fell  out  of  the  hands  of  the  executioners.* 
Perhaps  the  poet  had  in  mind  Beoiu.  1608,  J^ct  hit  eal  gemealt  Ise  gelicost,  of  the 
sword  of  Beowulf  with  which  he  slew  Grendel's  mother.  But  the  use  of  wax  in 
the  figure  is  quite  likely  due  to  association  in  the  poet's  mind  with  the  altar 
candles  ;  cf.  Chr.  989  :  byrnejj  waeter  swa  weax. 

1 147.  The  scribe  evidently  wrote  scea?fan  here  as  an  appositive  to  seyldhatan. 
But  the  metre  and  the  sense  both  require  the  verb  ;  the  forms  of  the  word  which 
appear  in  the  Andreas  are  scyJTiJan,  1.  1047,  ^"d  scy'd'e^,  1.  1561.  Perhaps  one 
should  read  here  scytJffan. 

1154.  Translate  'eternal  peace  for  him  who  can  attain  it.'  Retaining  both 
freond  and  hie  as  in  the  MS.,  it  would  be  necessaiy  to  make  hie  refer  back  to 
geoce,  1.  1 1 52  —  a  possible  but  improbable  construction.  Grein,  Dicht.,  trans- 
lates '  Freundliebe  unverganglich  dem  der  sie  finden  kann ' ;  K.  inconsistently 
retains  hie  and  translates  '  an  eternal  friend  for  him  who  can  find  him ' ;  Root, 
*  There  is  eternal  "peace  ever  prepared  for  those  who  can  attain,'  omitting  the 
object.    See  907'-909,  note. 

1155''.  Cf.  Beozv.  128:  ^a  wses  aefter  wiste  w5p  up  ahafen.  — 1155''.  So  Rid. 
XXXV,  I. 

1156*.  So  Ex.  107.  — 1156''.  So  El.  54,  550. 

1157-1158.  Cf.  El.  6ii''-6i3'':  he  on  westenne  me'Se  ond  meteleas  morland 
tryde^,  hungre  gehasfted. 

1158-1159.  Hornsalu  and  A^'inrieced  are  subjects  of  Avunodon.  But  Gn.2, 
placing  only  a  comma  after  gehtrfte,  takes  hornsalu  and  Aviiira'ced  as  accu- 
satives.   In  Dicht.,  however,  he  translates  according  to  his  first  reading,   'die 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 


135 


Homsale  blieben  leer,  die  Gastgemacher.'  Cosijn  {PBB.  XXI,  15)  cites  weste 
>>'inrti'ced  wunian,  and  remarks  'contradictio  in  terminis.'  Tlie  phrase  would 
be  self-contradictory  if  one  took  ■\vIiiricoecI  as  accusative,  but  not  if  it  is  taken 
as  subject  of  the  intransitive  \vuncclou,  'stood,'  'remained,'  cf.  802;  Af.  95. 

1 159.  \vinrfcce(l.  Grimm,  p.  xxxvii,  derives  ^vln^a'ced,  as  also  Avlnburg, 
11.  1637,  1672,  and  similar  compounds,  from  zuine,  'friend,'  or  zuyn,  'joy,'  not  from 
■win,  'wine'  — ' denn  es  wurde  bier  und  meth  getrunken.'  But  the  word  for 
friend  should  appear  in  compounds  as  wine,  e.g.  winedry/iteii,  loinenncg,  etc.,  and 
the  word  for  joy  as  %vyn,  e.g.  luyttbeam,  wyndicg,  etc.  Wine  is  mentioned  all 
through  the  poetry,  e.g.  Beow.  1 162  :  byrelas  sealdon  win  of  wundorfatum  ;  1.  1233  : 
druncon  win  weras  ;  Jtid.  8,  win/idte,  '  invitation  to  the  wine  ' ;  Jiid.  16,  wTngedriiic, 
'wine-drinking.'  For  an  account  of  the  cultivation  of  the  vine  and  the  use  of 
wine  throughout  Europe,  see  Hehn,  Knltiu-pflaiizen^.  p.  77  ff . ;  Gummere,  Gerin. 
Origins,  pp.  71-72.  Cf.  meodiibii7gntii.  Husband^ s  Message  16;  medobyrig,  Jicd. 
167  ;  viedocern,  Beow.  69.    Similar  compounds  with  win  are  numerous. 

1 160.  brucanne.  Sievers  {PBB.  X,  482)  reads  brucan  for  the  sake  of  the 
metre  ;  a  similar  change  is  proposed  for  the  inflected  infinitive  in  1481,  1659,  1689. 
But  it  should  be  observed  that  all  "these  lines  have  metrically  the  same  form, 
-^  X  X  I  —  -^  X I  ^^^  it  is  extremely  likely  that  they  have  the  poet's  sanction  in 
the  form  in  which  they  appear,  in  the  MS. 

1 161.  Cf.  Wand,  iii :  ges^t  him  sundor  aet  rune. 

1165^.  So  El.  382.  —  1165^   Cf.   Vision  of  the  Cross  80  :  Is  nu  sSl  cumen. 

1166''.  So  1605'';  EI.  426  :  nu  is  {^earf  mycel ;  Jul.  695  :  is  me  Jjearf  micel ;  Ckr. 
751,  84S  :  is  lis  J'earf  micel.    Cf.  158,  note. 

1 169.   Cf.  Clir.  1564:  won  ond  wliteleas,  hafaS  werges  bleo. 

1 170''.   So  /ltd.  90,  of  Holofemes  ;  /tul.  93  has  tires  brytta,  appositive  to  dryhten. 

1171.  hellehinca.  The  only  occurrence  of  the  word  in  Anglo-Saxon;  it  is 
in  apposition  with  deoful,  1.  11 68,  and  inorJ»res  brytta,  1.  11 70.  Grimm,  p.  129, 
derives  the  second  element  from  a  hypothetical  Anglo-Saxon  hincan,  '  claudicare.' 
Grein,  Spr.  II,  31,  glosses  the  word  by  '  Hollenhinker,  Teufel,'  and  cites  Anglo- 
Saxon  ddloma,  '  devil,'  in  Gu.  884,  which  he  explains  as  compounded  of  dd-, 
'fire,'  and  -lama,  'lame.'  I  have  not  been  able  to  discover  other  early  allusions 
to  the  popular  belief  that  the  devil  was  lame.  Modem  allusions  are  familiar,  e.g. 
in  Le  Sage's  Diable  Boiteux  (adapted  from  the  Spanish  El  Diablo  cojitelo,  of 
Guevara).  Le  Sage  (ed.  Jannet,  1867, 1,  1 2-13)  draws  the  obvious  parallel  between 
his  limping  devil  and  Vulcan,  both  of  whom  were  crippled  through  falling  fro^ 
the  mid-regions  of  the  air  to  the  earth.  The  belief  in  the  lameness  of  the  devil 
is  quite  probably  an  outgrowth  of  the  story  of  the  fall  of  Satan.  Cf.  Heine, 
IVerke,  ed.  Elster,  I,   1 1 1  : 

Ich  rief  den  Teufel  und  er  kam 
Und  ich  sah  ihn  mit  Verwundrung  an  ; 
Er  ist  nicht  hasslich  und  ist  nicht  lahm, 
Er  ist  ein  lieber,  scharmanter  Mann. 

Cf.  'hinke-bein,'  and  see  Grimm,  Tent.  Myth.  Ill,  993;   IV,  1603. 
1176.  neon.    Cf.  Gram.,  §  112,  §  150,  3. 
1178''.   So  Dan.  250,  492. 


136  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

1180.  Holthausen  {PBB.  XVI,  551)  changes  to  gewyrhtan,  '"dem  tiiter, 
urheber,"  da  nur  Andreas  gemeint  ist.'  Cosijn  {PBB.  XXI,  16)  objects,  however, 
that  the  word  means  here  merely  '  mitschuldige.'  Grein,  Dicht.,  translates  '  an  dem 
Wiirker';  Root,  'on  their  author.'  It  seems  simpler,  however,  to  take  the  word 
as  a  plural  rather  than  alter  the  text.  The  logic  which  leads  Holthausen  to  change 
to  a  singular  should  demand  also  a  singular  for  oncySdaJda,  since  only  one  deed 
is  mentioned  in  the  preceding  lines  —  the  leading  out  of  the  people  from  the 
prison.  But  it  is  a  good  rhetorical  device  to  change  from  the  particular  and  the 
singular  to  the  general  and  the  plural.  —  1180'^.  Gn.'s  emendation,  Av^epna  spor, 
is  based  on  Jitl.  623  ;  the  exact  reading,  however,  at  that  place,  is  wmpnes  spor. 

1 181.  ealdorgeard.  'The  life-enclosure,  the  body.'  Grimm  mentions  Maid. 
296-297;  gar  oft  liitrhivod  fages  feorhhus  \  and  this  passage  confirms  the  admi- 
rable emendation  of  Kemble  and  Napier.  The  word  is  thus  a  synonym  of  feoiii- 
hord,  1.  11S2.  Grimm,  p.  129,  retains  the  MS.  reading  eador-,  as  equivalent  to 
edor,  eodor,  '  enclosure,'  '  court,'  '  dwelling,'  the  compound  eadorgeard  meaning 
'  aula  septa,' '  domus.'  The  whole  phrase  eadorgeard  ftoges  he  defines  as  '  domus 
moribundi,'  'caput.'  Wiilker  follows  Grimm,  except  that  he  takes  the  phrase  as 
meaning  not  merely  'head'  but  'body'  in  general.  Grein,  Spr.  I,  234,  explains 
eador-  as  meaning  '  vein  '  (cf.  ddr,  iedre,  '  vein  '),  the  compound  as  meaning 
'  domus  venarum,'  '  corpus  '  ? 

1182a.     So   />/;.    221. 

1 1 88''.  Cf.  Beoio.  Si  i  :  he  [Grendel]  fag  wi'5  God  ;  Sat.  97  :  ic  eom  fah  wi5  God. 

1 189.  H\Vcet !  TJu  deofles  strail.  The  corresponding  phrase  in  the  Legend 
(p.  122,  11.  lo-ii)  reads:  J)u  heardeste  strSl  to  sghwilcre  unrihtnesse.  But  the 
Greek  version  (Bonnet,  p.  100,  1.  13)  has  merely  '12  BeX^a  ex9pl>TaTe.  Zupitza 
{Haiipfs  Zs.  XVIII,  185)  sees  in  the  strtel  of  the  two  Anglo-Saxon  versions  a 
reflection  from  their  common  Latin  original.  Str^l  he  supposes  to  be  a  transla- 
tion of  Latin  sagttta  or  telum,  which  in  turn  is  a  mistranslation  of  the  BeX/a  of 
the  Greek,  taken  not  for  Belial,  but  for  /SeXos  =  '  dart,  spear.'  Cf.  Chr.  779 : 
ne  I'earf  him  ondrjedan  deofla  s  trie  las  ;  Wulfstan,  ed.  Napier,  p.  214,  1.  13:  eall 
mid  deofles  straelum  awrecen. 

iigo^.   Cf.  1384;  Hy.  IV,  93  :  yca&  /lis  yrnij>ii,  of  the  sinner. 

1191*.   Cf.  Beow.  1274:  gehniegde  hellegast  }'a  he  hean  gewat. 

1193.  Satan.  The  name  Satan  is  not  of  frequent  occurrence  in  the  verse.  Gn., 
Spr.  II,  793,  records  only  nine  examples,  three  in  Gen.,  four  in  Sat.,  and  two  in 
Ati.\  to  these  add  one  in  C/ir.  1.  1522. 

1 194.  For  the  phrase  Dryhtnes  s^  deman,  cf.  1. 1403,  Ap.  10.  Deman  in  the 
sense  'glorify,  celebrate,'  is  found  elsewhere,  e.g.  Gen.  17;  Jtil.  2;  Git.  498,  etc., 
but  the  above  three  passages  are  the  only  occurrences  of  ai  deman.  Perhaps 
Kemble's  reading  sk  should  be  followed;  the  MS.  form  maybe  an  echo  of  a,  1.  1 193. 

1 197''.  So////.  243,  345. 

1198.  Cf.  1.  1445  ;  and  Beow.  2645  •  for  ^^^"^  he  manna  mSst  maerSa  gefremede. 

1 201  ff.  Here  again  (cf.  1 100  ff.,  n6te)  the  poet  fails  to  make  clear  the  motiva- 
tion of  his  narrative  ;  in  the  Greek  version  and  the  Legend  this  episode  is  clearly 
distinguished  from  the  first  coming  together  of  the  Mermedonians  (cf.  1067  ff., 
1093  ff-)-    Iri  the  present  passage,  when  Andrew's  voice  is  heard,  the  devil  bids  his 


NOTES    ON   ANDREAS  137 

followers  go  in  search  of  him;  the  passage  in  the  Legend  (p.  122,  11.  19-21)  corre- 
sponding to  1 201-1205,  is  as  follows:  Da  burhleode  J>a  umon,  and  hi  betyndon 
haere  ceastre  gatu,  and  hi  sohton  })one  halgan  Andreas  J>3et  hie  hine  genamon. 
Cosjjn  {^PBB.  XXI,  16)  draws  a  parallel  between  this  threefold  description  of 
the  arming  of  the  Mermedonians  and  the  threefold  description  of  the  coming 
of  Grendel  in  Becruui/f,  inferring  therefrom  the  naturalness  of  such  repetitions  in 
Anglo-Saxon  epic  narrative.  But  the  passages  in  Andreas  are  merely  a  reflection 
—  and  a  confused  reflection  at  that  —  of  its  source.    Cf.  12 12,  note. 

1202''.  So  AJ>.  21:  heriges  byrhtme  ;  Ei.  205:  heriges  beorhtme.  Cf.  1271'', 
note. 

1204''.  So  /itd.  333.  —  1204''.  Cf.  Gen.  1652,  2453  :  corSrum  miclum  ;  C/ir.  57S  : 
cor■^"re  ne  lytle ;  £dg.  2:  corSre  mycclum ;  A7.  274,  /*//.  167:  corLi'ra  m^ste. 

1207.  So  Scii.  262;  C/ir.  716;  GV/'/j-  of  Men  4;  metod  .  .  .  mihtum  swiS,  Dan. 
284,  Az.  5. 

1208.  ellen  fremman.  Cf.  Beoiu.  3:  ellen  fremedon;  Beow.  636-637:  ic 
gefremman  sceal  eorllc  ellen. 

1210'^.  Cf.  Gil.  875  :  nses  seo  stund  latu. 

121 2.  ceahlan  clommum.  The  only  example  of  inst.  pi.  in  -<7«  in  the  Andreas ; 
for  examples  in  the  Becmndf,  cf.  Beoio.  963,  1502,  1505,  1542,  2692.  Cf.  Seaf.  10: 
caldum  clommum.  —  cy3  J7e  sylfne.  The  poet  has  omitted  to  mention  that 
Andrew  has  made  himself  invisible  to  the  Mermedonians ;  the  Greek  version  and 
the  Legend  st2ite  this  specifically.    Cf.  1201  ff.,  note. 

1218.  niiinslaga.  It  seems  best  to  take  nianslaga  as  ace.  pi.,  assuming 
thus  an  otherwise  unrecorded  feminine  -slagii,  parallel  to  the  masculine  siege. 
This  whole  passage  is  an  evident  reminiscence  of  11.  954  ff .,  where,  however,  the 
text  reads  siege  as  object  of  Solie..  Simons,  p.  97,  would  read  mdnshrge,  and 
Cosijn  {FEB.  XXI,  16)  7ndnsl(egas,  thus  reducing  the  word  to  the  same  form  as 
in  1.  956.  B.-T.,  p.  670,  suggests  manslagan,  in  apposition  to  soyldige,  1.  12 16. 
Kemble  retains  the  MS.  reading  as  gen.  pi.,  translating  '  though  thou  mayst  suffer 
wounds  dark  of  the  slaughterers  I  abide  with  thee.'  But  the  readings  of  both 
B.-T.  and  Kemble  are  stylistically  contrary  to  the  spirit  of  the  verse. 

1220.  larsiiicoiUas.    See  86,  note. 

1222.  Grein  and  Wiilker  put  a  comma  after  gebundon,  all  other  Edd.  a 
period.  A  comma  is  as  much  punctuation  as  is  permissible,  since  the  clause 
11.  1223-1225,  is  explanatory  of  what  precedes,  'after  the  best  of  princes  was 
revealed,'  i.e.  had  laid  aside  his  invisibility.    Cf.  1212^ 

1223.  feSelinga  wynn.  So  1713,////.  730  ;  and  cf.  Gn.  1081  :  eorla  ii<ynn\  Ph. 
70:  lagiifloda  wynn;  Ph.  290:  tr&elttingla  wyn;  and  see  Sievers,  Anglia  XIII,  6, 
for  similar  examples  throughout  the  later  Christian  poetry.  Cook,  Christ,  p.  86, 
thinks  that  '  the  expression  comes  from  the  Latin  (and  no  doubt  originally  from  the 
Greek)  hymns.'  In  Chr.  71,  Marv'  is  called  wifa  uynn  and  in  Hymn  III,  26,  ealra 
famueua  7c>yn  \  this  is  also  the  application  of  the  phrase  in  the  Latin  hymns,  e.g. 
'angelorum  gaudium,'  'coeli  gaudium,'  'mundi  gaudium  ' ;  for  full  citations,  cf. 
Cook,  1.  c.    The  expression  is  \vo\.  found  in  Beo7,'tilf  or  any  of  the  early  heroic  poems. 

1224.  Grein,  Spr.  I,  6 :  hi  hine  andweardne  eagum,  etc. 

1225.  sec.    For  other  examples  of  this  spelling,  see  Spr.  II,  420. 


138  NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 

1226.  wel-wange.    Cf.  sel,  762;  fregn,  1163;  mecHe,  1436,  1626. 

1227*.  So  Ex.  183,  228,  Beo7v.  2238,  2915;  Sal.  366:  mid  leoda  duguj^um. — 
1227''.   So  Gti.  209^ 

1230.  Sragmieluni.  Grein's  T&2.diu\^tragmccliiin,  which  is  repeated  in  Spr.  II, 
596,  is  made  for  the  sake  of  the  alliteration;  but,  as  Bright  points  out  {MLN. 
II,  82),  the  logically  important  word  here  is  teon.  Sievers  {PBB.  XVIII,  406)  dis- 
cusses the  meaning  of  the  first  element,  tfrag-,  '  time,'  not  as  Cosijn  (^Aaiiteeke- 
ningen  Qp  den  Beozmilf,  p.  6)  would  have  it,  '  affliction,  oppression.'  Cosijn  {PBB. 
XXI,  15)  later  accepts  Sievers'  interpretation.  —  torngeniO'lan.  All  the  transla- 
tions (also  Spr.  II,  547)  take  torngeniSlan  as  ace,  sg.,  meaning  Andrew,  except 
Kemble  who  regards  it  as  nom.  pi.,  appositive  to  the  subject  of  beton.  One 
would  like  to  take  the  word  as  ace.  sg.,  since  otherwise  no  object  to  liedan  is 
expressed.  On  the  other  hand,  torngemSlan  is  not  a  word  that  the  poet  would 
be  likely  to  use  to  designate  Andrew.  The  word  occurs  twice  elsewhere,  El.  568, 
where  it  refers  in  a  hostile  manner  to  the  Jews,  and  El.  1305,  where  it  refers  to 
the  wicked  on  the  day  of  judgment.  Cosijn's  insertion  of  hine  in  1.  1229*  removes 
the  difficulty ;  but  perhaps  it  is  not  necessary  to  supply  the  pronoun. 

1234.  efne  Siva  T*-ide  s%va.  So  Beozu.  1221,.  —  lagon.  Perhaps  '  run,  extend  '  ? 
See  375,  note  on  stod.  Baskervill  has  no  punctuation  after  lagon,  apparently 
taking  enta  tergeweorc  as  object  of  the  verb. 

1235.  enta  iSrgeweorc.  So  Bemv.  1679  (of  a  sword),  2717  (of  the  cave  of 
the  fire-drake),  2774  (of  the  fire-drake's  treasure)  ;  Wand.  87  (buildings)  ;  Ruin  2 
(buildings) ;  Gu.  C.  2  (citadels) ;  An.  1495  (columns,  pillars).  Grimm,  Tent.  Myth. 
II,  534,  remarks :  '  Ancient  buildings  of  singular  structure  which  have  outlasted 
many  centuries,  and  such  as  men  of  to-day  no  longer  take  in  hand,  are  vulgarly 
ascribed  to  giants  or  to  the  devil. .  .  .  These  are  the  enta  geiveorc  of  Anglo-Saxon 
poetry.'  So  also  Gummere,  Germa7iic  Origins,  pp.  9S-99  :  'The  "street"  {strata 
via)  and  the  "ceaster"  {castra)  were  soon  borrowed,  thing  and  word;  and  in 
Beo'Midfy^^  are  told  that  the  road  which  led  up  to  Hrothgar's  burg  was  "stone- 
variegated  "  —  strat  loivs  stditfdh,  —  paved  in  the  Roman  fashion  ;  although  it  is 
plain  that,  as  with  stone  in  houses,  so  with  these  paved  roads,  the  Germanic 
instinct  regarded  the  process  as  something  uncanny  and  savoring  of  those  myste- 
rious giants  who  long  ago  had  rolled  up  the  huge  piles  of  masonry.' 

1236.  strSte  stanfage.  The  elaboration  of  the  allusion  to  the  street  is  char- 
acteristic of  the  poetic  style.  The  Legend,  p.  123, 1.  5,  in  the  passage  correspond- 
ing to  11.  1 232-1 236  says  merely,  and  hie  hine  tiigon  geond  Jicere  ceastre  lanan. 
The  word  '  street,'  Lat.  strata,  conveyed  to  the  Anglo-Saxon  a  dignified  idea, 
connoting,  possibly,  something  of  the  greatness  of  the  traditional  Roman  civiliza- 
tion in  England.  Cf.  Beozu.  320—321  :  Street  zairs  stdnfdh,  stlg  wTsode  gutninn 
atgcedere,  and  the  frequent  poetic  compounds  with  street,  e.g.  faro&-,  here-,  lagii-, 
merestrat.  In  a  similar  way  allusions  to  the  city  of  the  Mermedonians  are  elab- 
orated; cf.,  besides  the  present  passage,  11.  40-43,  2S7,  839-843,  973,  1155,  1649. 
See  Introd.,  p.  liii.  Ruins  and  ancient  roads  might  readily  pass  into  the  stock  of 
common  poetic  tradition,  and  this  development  would  be  furthered  by  the  attitude 
of  the  Anglo-Saxons  towards  towns  and  roads.  'AH  records  seem  to  show  that 
in  early  Saxon  times  towns  counted  for  very  little  in  the  life  of  the  people,  and 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 


139 


the  question  at  once  arises,  What  of  the  Roman  cities  ?  .  .  .  It  may  be  said  gener- 
ally that  the  Teutonic  invaders  made  little  account  either  of  the  Roman  towns  as 
places  of  habitation  or  the  Roman  roads  as  routes  of  intercourse,  and  the  country 
would  have  been  settled  in  just  the  same  manner  had  these  not  been  in  existence 
at  all.  As  in  Britain  so  in  the  Gallic  provinces,  the  Teutonic  invaders  of  the 
Empire,  whether  Goths  or  Saxons  or  Franks,  cared  little  for  the  life  of  the 
Romanized  cities.  .  .  .  The  most  striking  object  lesson  on  Roman  roads  is  to  be 
gained  by  opening  a  large-scale  map  of  the  center  of  England,  where  the  great 
Fosse  Way,  which  can  be  more  or  less  clearly  followed  from  the  borders  of 
Devon  to  Leicester  and  Lincoln,  is  seen  sweeping  across  the  country  in  but 
little  connection  with  the  present  life  of  its  inhabitants.  In  its  comparative  isola- 
tion this  immensely  extended  track  is  very  significant  of  the  mental  attitude  of 
the  Saxon  settlers  towards  these  monuments  of  the  unifying  influence  of  the 
Roman  rule.  To  sum  up,  therefore,  the  Teutonic  settlements,  it  is  evident,  were* 
independent,  self-centered  little  communities,  and  did  not  regard  as  a  matter  of 
primary  importance  the  means  of  intercourse  with  their  neighbors.  We  are 
reminded  of  the  words  of  Tacitus  about  the  Germans,  that  they  avoided  cities  and 
even  contiguous  habitations,  setthng  down  in  detached  bodies  apart  from  each 
other,  just  as  spring  or  field  or  grove  offered  attractions  {Germania,  chap.  16). 
All  over  the  country  the  existing  Roman  roads  pass  through  certain  villages  and 
towns  that  had  their  origin  in  military  stations,  but  as  a  rule  the  seats  of  the 
Teutonic  communities  will  be  found  a  mile  or  two  away  on  either  side.'  The 
Arts  in  Early  England,  by  G.  Baldwin  Brown,  I,  52-64.  See  842,  note,  and 
Cook's  Christ,  p.  73,  on  the  use  of  stone  in  building  in  the  Anglo-Saxon  period. 
—  lase"^*.  Cf.  Ex.  459-460:  storm  tip  geivdt,  .  .  .  herezodpa  mixst,  and  for  similar 
figurative  uses  of  storm,  see  Spr.  II,  485. 
1238^.   So  Jul.  5S9. 

1239.  sarbennum  soden.  Cf.  Git.  1046:  sorgwylmum  soden ;  Gu.  1123: 
soden  sarwylmum ;   Gu.   1236:  soden  sorgwaelmum. 

1240.  banhiis  abrocen.  Cf.  Beoio.  3147:  o^'  J^aet  he  '5a  banhus  gebrocen 
haefde,  hat  on  hreSre. 

i24o'^-i24i^.  Hatan  heolfre  is  syntactically  parallel  to  ySuni,  1240.  Cf. 
Beotj.  849  :  baton  heolfre,  heorodreore  weol ;  Beoiv.  2693  =  ^^^'^^  y  Sum  weoll ; 
Beoiv.  1422-1423:  Flod  blode  weol  (folc  to  sSgon),  hatan  heolfre;  and  Beow. 
3147,  quoted  in  note  to  1.  1240^  In  1.  1241-^  Cosijn  would  read  hat  of  hre^re, 
citing  Riddle  XCIII,  16-17:  blod  iit  ne  com,  heolfor  of  hrej^re.  But  the  two 
passages  are  not  parallel,  while  the  evidence  of  the  above  passages  from  the 
Becnoiclfis  borne  out  by  An.  1277.    Cf.  also  Gu.  1314  :  teagor  ySum  weol. 

1242.  ellea  iintnveonde.  Ci.  El.  797:  hyht  untweondne.  — 1242*".  See  140, 
iTote. 

1243^.   So  El.  1308,  Hy.  IV,  10;  synnum  asundrad,  Gu.  486,  Ph.  242. 

1245.  So  BecniK  1235,  2303. 

1246.  sigetorht  swungen.  The  adj.  agrees  with  the  subject  of  wjes,  unex- 
pressed. Cosijn  remarks :  "  Der  sigerofa  Andreas  heisst  hier  wie  Crist  in  Sat. 
240,  sigetorht :  er  hielt  die  folterung  mit  heldenmut  aus.'  He  also  calls  attention 
to  the  inappropriateness  of  sigeltorht,    '  radiant,'   as  descriptive  of   the   night 


140  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

which  comes  to  put  an  end  to  Andrew's  torments.  K.  retains  sigeltorht,  con- 
necting it  with  Andrew :  '  Thus  was  the  whole  day  long  until  the  evening  came 
the  star-bright  one  beaten.'  Grein,  Dicht.,  translates  '  der  Siegstrahlende  gegeiselt ' ; 
but  in  Sp>-.  II,  448,  he  suggests  Sfen  sigeltorht.  W.,  placing  a  comma  after 
sigeltorht,  Root,  and  Hall  follow  Grein  in  Spr.\  Simons,  p.  124,  'sigeltorht, 
wohl  zu  andern  in  sigetorht,  siegstrahlend,  =  Andreas.'  Reading  aJfen  sigel- 
torht we  should  have  a  weak  repetition  in  sunne  swegeltorht,  1248*. 
lasi*^.  So  El.  173. 

1252.  neh.  Bright  {MLN.  II,  82)  remarked  that  neh,  possibly  representing  an 
older ^^//  repeated  from  1.  1250,  should  be  omitted.  But  neh  (as  Professor  Bright 
now  also  believes)  is  necessary  to  the  meaning  here  and  is  good  idiom ;  cf .  Gii. 
III4-II17  :  Com  se  seofe'Sa  daeg 

jeldum  andweard,       has  \>&  him  in  gesonc 

hat  heortan  neah       hildescurum 

flacor  flan)>racu. 

1253-1269.  On  this  passage  Brooke,  p.  iSo,  remarks:  'In  the  Andreas  the 
weather  of  Northumbria  is  described  and  it  is  as  wild  and  hard  as  that  of  which 
we  hear  in  Beowulf  2lx\^  are  told  in  the  Seafa7-er^  All  of  the  present  passage  is 
elaborated  from  the  following  bare  hint,  Legcjid,  p.  123, 11.  8-9  :  Da  aefen  geworden 
wses,  hi  hine  sendon  on  J^set  carcem  and  hie  gebundon  his  handa  behindan  and 
hie  hine  forleton. 

1254^.   So  Gu.  1 138.  —  1254''.   So  also  Beow.  2938;  Gii.  1261.    Cf.  1.  818^,  note. 

1258.  ahre  hildstapan.  Grimm,  p.  xxxv,  suggests  hlidstapaii,  '  viatores 
tegminibus  involuti '  ?  or  Jice&stapan,  '  die  iiber  die  heide  stapfen  ' ;  cf.  Beoio. 
1368:  ha^stapa,  of  the  stag;  Fates  of  Men  13  (cited  below),  of  the  wolf;  and 
the  emended  hdi-  /la&stapa  (MS.  hdr  ha&,  see  Rieger,  Vershaist,  p.  46,  Bright, 
MLN.  XVII,  213),  appositive  to  westengryre,  in  Ex.  118.  But,  as  Cosijn  sug- 
gests {PBB.  XXI,  16),  the  picture  here  is  epic,  heroic;  the  frost  is  personified 
as  a  gray-haired  warrior,  stalking  abroad.  Cf.  hdr  kilderinc,  Beow.  1307,  3136; 
Maid.  169  ;  Briin.  39  ;  hdr  hea&orinc,  Ex.  241  ;  hdr  heorowulf  Ex.  181  ;  in  all  the 
above  passages  the  phrases  are  descriptive  of  men.  Hdr  is  also  the  favorite 
adjective  in  descriptions  of  the  wolf;  cf.  above,  Ex.  181, -figuratively  applied  to 
men  ;  se  hdra  wulf  IVaiid.  82  ;  sceal  hine  wulf  etati,  hdr  hce&stapa.  Fates  of  Men  13 
{Bibl.  Ill,  148).  The  mythic  feeling  pervading  this  passage  is  illustrated  by,  the 
following  related  Teutonic  traditions  :  '  Nowhere  is  the  hostile  omen  of  the  north 
better  expressed  than  in  old  Frisian  law,  where  winter  and  darkness  are  repre- 
sented as  ruthless  invaders :  si  ilia  tenebrosa  nebula  et  f rigidissima  hiems  in  hortos 
et  in  sepes  descendit  —  a  bold  personification  [Grimm,  Teut.  Myth.,  p.  762]. 
The  north  wind  is  often  called  the  "schwarze  Bise."  Winter,  like  night  and 
storm-cloud,  is  the  dragon  of  many  a  myth.  For  the  Scandinavian,  that  famous 
"  catastrophe,"  or  "  night  "  of  the  gods,  will  be  preceded  by  a  terrible  winter. ...  A 
favorite  emblem  for  winter  as  well  as  darkness  is  one  of  man's  fiercest  enemies, 
the  wolf.  The  home  of  Grendel,  in  Beowulf  is  marked  by  wulfhleo&ic  [1.  13 58] 
and  hrtmde  bearwas  [1.  1363  ;  the  MS.  has  hrinde,  usually  read  hriiiige  by  the  Edd.]. 
Winter  is  used  as  convertible  term  with  Death  in  many  old  folk-rites  ;  and  the 
metaphor  is  universal.'    Gummere,  "  On  the  Symbolic  Use  of  the  Colors  Black  and 


NOTES    ON   ANDREAS  I41 

White  in  Germanic  Tradition,"  in  Ilai'erforti  College  Studies  I,  122.  '  Ymir,  or  in 
giant's  language  (Jrgelmir,  was  the  first-created,  and  out  of  his  body's  enormous 
bulk  were  afterwards  engendered  earth,  water,  mountain  and  w^ood.  Ymir  him- 
self originated  in  melted  hoarfrost  or  rime  {hritn),  hence  all  giants  are  called 
/irii>!/>iirsiir,  "rime-giants,"  Sn.  6;  Stem.  85=^,'';  krtmkaldr,  "rime-cold,"  is  an 
epithet  of  J>iirs  and  iotiinn.  Seem.  33'',  90^ ;  they  still  drip  with  thawing  rime,  their 
beards  {kinnskogr,  "chin-forest")  are  frozen,  Scent.  53'';  I/rimntr,  Hrlnigrimr, 
Brimger&r  are  proper  names  of  giants,  Sam.  %y^,  86%  114,  145.'  Grimm,  Tent. 
Myt/i.,  p.  532. 

1260'.  So /'//.  59.  —  wae teres  ]7rym.    See  1536. 

1260-1262.  Translate  'The  might  of  the  water  shrank  together  (i.e.  the  water 
became  hard  and  motionless)  over  the  river-streams,  the  ice  formed  a  bridge  over 
the  dark  sea-road.'  B.  puts  a  semicolon  after  prym,  with  no  punctuation  after  ea- 
streainas,  1.  1261.  K.  and  Gn.''^  as  B.,  except  a  comma  instead  of  semicolon  after 
pryin.  All  other  Edd.  have  no  punctuation  after  pryni,  but  a  comma  after 
eastreamas.  K.  translates  '  over  the  river-streams  the  ice  made  a  bridge,  a  pale 
water-road ' ;  Grein,  Dic/tt.,  translates  according  to  his  first  punctuation,  '  die 
Kraft  des  Wassers  schwand  hin  iiber  die  Fluten  und  die  Hiille  des  Eises  liber- 
briickte  die  glanzende  Brandungstrasse.'  Root  and  Hall  follow  Grein.  Reading 
with  K.,  Gn.,-  and  B.,  we  must  make  brinirade  an  appositive  to  a  noun  brycg 
contained  in  bryogade  ;  but  brinirade  means  the  water  itself  and  not  a  bridge 
over  it;  cf.  1.  1587,  where  the  word  is  in  apposition  with  geofon  (MS.  heofon), 
and  such  compounds  as  brimldd,  faro&strat,  etc.  Cf.  Ex.  Gti.  72-73:  Forst  sceal 
freosan,  ...  is  brycgian. 

1262.  bltece  brimrade.  '  BLrc  is  our  modem  black,  and  is  used  comparatively 
seldom  —  once  in  describing  the  black  sea-roads,  once  as  applied  to  the  raven, 
once  in  referring  to  adders.  .  .  .  Conventional  and  symbolical  is  the  use  of  black 
in  mentioning  evil  spirits.'  Mead,  "  Color  in  Old  English  Poetry,"  Ptib.  of  the 
ML  A.  XIV,  1 82. 

1265-1266.  L.  1266*  is  parenthetical,  ]7aes,  1266^  being  governed  by  blon, 
1.  1265'';  cf.  1.  1380^. 

1266.  Cf.  Git.  664  :  acol  for  '5am  egsan ;  Dan.  726:  acul  for  }jam  egesan. 

1268.  wmldres  gim.  'The  jewel  of  the  heavens,'  'the  sun';  for  this  sense 
of  wuldor,  cf.  1.  356,  note.  Cf.  Ph.  92  :  glsdum  gimme  =  Codes  condelle,  1.  91  ; 
67/^.695-696:  sunne  ond  mona  .  .  .  gimmas  swa  scyne.    See  1.  31,  note  ;  50,  note. 

i269''-i270.  Cf.  Beoiv.  497''-49S:  hjer  wjes  hasleSa  dream  dugu'S  unlytel. 

1270.  diug.    The  only  recorded  occurrence  of  the  word. 

1271''.  Cf.  1202b;  El.  39:  werodes  breahtme  ;  Ex.  65:  werodes  bearhtme. 
Cf.  A  p.  2i>\ 

1274.  The  subject  here,  as  frequently,  is  omitted  after  «5a.  For  the  phrase 
eft  s-\va  ter,  cf.  1.  1341,  1476;   Gn.  361  ;  Beow.  643,  1787. 

1275.  s^vat  y?funi  ^veoll.    So  Beotv.  2693.    Cf.  11.  1240,  1546. 

1275-1276.  Lifer  in  the  sense  'blood,  clotted  blood'  is  not  found  elsewhere 
in  Anglo-Sa.xon,  but  cf.  Icel.  blo&lifr,  f.  pi.," '  clotted  blood '  (Cleas.-Vig.,  p.  69). 
It  seems  better  stylistically  to  take  blod  and  lifriiin  together  as  a  compound 
than  to  separate  them  as  is  done  by  all  Edd. ;  the  subject  of  svvealg  is  then  swat, 


142  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

blodlifrum  is  the  logical  object  (cf.  Spr.  II,  505,  for  examples  of  swelgan  vixX^a 
inst.),  hatan  heolfre,  1.  1277,  is  instrumental.  The  passage  means  that  the  fresh 
blood  breaking  out  from  Andrew's  wounds  flowed  over,  or  swallowed  up,  the 
clotted  blood,  the  marks  of  his  old  wounds.    See  Cosijn,  PBB.  XXI,  17. 

In  the  corresponding  passage,  the  Greek  version  (Bonnet,  p.  103,  11.  4-6)  reads : 
Kai  TrdXti'  at  crd/j/ces  avrov  fKoWdvTo  iv  rrj  7^  /cai  rb  alfia  aiirov  ^v  peov ;  the 
Lege}id,  p.  123,  1.  6,  leads:  mid  Jn  he  se  eadiga  Andreas  wzes  togen,  his  lichama 
wass  gemenged  mid  j^Sre  eor'San,  swa  J>ast  blod  fleow  ofer  eorSan  swa  waeter. 
Gn.,  Spr.  II,  185,  glosses  lifrum  as  inst.  pL,  'die  Leberklumpen  im  ausfliessen- 
den  Blut,  gelibertes  Blut.'  The  word  lifrum  and  the  passage  in  which  it  occurs 
are  not  cited  by  B.-T.  ;  Simons,  p.  92,  glosses  lifrum  as  '  blutklumpen,  geron- 
nenes  blut.-"  and  S'wealg,  p.  131,  as  '  reichlich  fliessen  ?'. 

1277.  lira  weorces  ne  sann.  Translate  '  His  body  did  not  cease  from,  or 
have  relief  from,  suffering.'  Gn.,  Spr.  II,  453,  glosses  sann,  from  sinnan,  '  repu- 
tare,  curare,  rationem  habere  alicujus';  Dicht.  translates  'die  Leiden  fiihlte 
kaum  noch  der  wundenmatte  Leib.'  Kemble  translates  '  the  body  thought  not 
of  work,  weary  with  wounds  ' ;  Root  as  Dicht. ;  Hall,  '  his  wound-weary  body  was 
unconscious  of  suffering,'  adding  in  a  note  that  Andrew  '  had  swooned  from  the 
brutal  treatment ' ;  B.-T.,  p.  S77,  '  care  for,  mind,  heed,'  and  Simons,  p.  124,  '  ver- 
iangen  nach.'  The  above  explanations  receive  some  confirmation  from  Icel. 
sinna,  '  mind,  care  for,  give  heed  to  '  (Cleas.-Vig.,  p.  529) ;  but  neither  the  mean- 
ing '  regard '  nor  '  feel '  fits  the  context  in  the  present  passage.  There  is  nothing 
in  the  Greek  to  justify  the  inference  that  Andrew  was  unconscious.  A  more 
probable  explanation  of  the  word  is  that  offered  by  Sievers  {PBB.  XI,  352-353) : 
sinnan,  primarily  '  go,  pass  '  (cf.  Gen.  1853),  develops  in  the  two  directions  '  strive, 
seek  for'  (cf.  Gii.  290),  and  'pass away,  cease,'  as  in  the  present  passage.  Sievers 
would  translate,  therefore,  '  kein  aufhoren,  keine  unterbrechung  des  leids  kam 
dem  wundenmiiden  leibe.'  The  same  explanation  is  offered  for  Rim.  Poem  52 : 
sdr  ne  sinni&,  '  sein  schmerz  hbrt  nicht  auf.' 

1278.  wopes  bring-  The  phrase  refers  to  the  sound  of  Andrew's  lamenta- 
tion, and  is  so  understood  by  most  of  the  commentators.  Gm.,  p.  130,  translates 
'fletus  intensissimus,  quasi  circulatimerumpens';  Gn.,  Spr.  II,  106,  bring,  'sonus.' 
II,  732,  wop,  '  lamentatio,'  etc.,  Dicht.,  'des  Wehklagens  Laute.'  B.-T.  follows 
Gm.,  and  Zupitza  and  Kent,  in  the  glossary  to  the  same  phrase  as  it  occurs  in 
Eletie,  follow  Gn. ;  Simons,  p.  82,  also  follows  Gn. ;  K.  translates  '  then  came  the 
ring  of  weeping';  Root,  'The  sound  of  weeping';  Hall,  'a  cry  of  great  sorrow.' 
But  Cook,  Christ,  pp.  126-127,  comparing  the  phrase  as  it  occurs  in  Chr.  537  with 
the  present  passage  and  the  two  other  occurences  of  it,  FJ.  1131  and  Gu.  1313, 
excludes  the  notion  of  sound  or  noise,  and  thinks  that  the  phrase  means  only 
tears ;  represented  as  issuing  from  the  troubled  bosom,  and  gushing  from  the 
eyes,  the  succession  of  drops  may  '  be  thought  of  as  pearls  upon  a  string,  or  as 
beads  in  a  necklace  or  rosary.'  '  Perhaps  the  idea  of  wopes  bring  might  be  sug- 

^gested  to  the  modem  reader  by  "  circling  fountain  of  tears."  '    But  this  ingenious 

.    explanation  hardly  takes  sufficient  account  of  the  fact  that  wop  usually  signifies 

sound,  tumult,  clamor;  cf.  Spr.  II,  732,  and  cf.  here^vop,  Icel.  dp  (Cleas.-Vig., 

p.  472),  and  MnE.  luhoop.    In  the  passage  in  Andreas,  in  particular,  wopes  bring 


NOTES    ON   ANDREAS  I43 

appears  to  be  equivalent  to  wonle  t-wfcS,  1.  1280.  Cf.  also  Chr.  992.  Again, 
although  the  usual  meaning  of  hriii<;  is  '  annulus,  circulus  '  (cf.  Spr.  II,  106),  the 
meaning  'sonus'  is  supported  by  Beow.  327  :  byrnan  hringdon  ;  Sal.  366:  searo^ 
hringeiN".  Wopes  hriiig  might  be  translated  '  a  ringing  cry ' ;  cf.  the  construction  ^ 
atres  drync,  53.  At  any  rate  tears  could  hardly  be  spoken  of  as  coming  through 
the  hero's  breast,  1279^  In  1.  1280''  the  expression  is  best  taken  as  figurative; 
see  769^.  The  phrase  wopes  bring  is  used  in  Eleiie  as  an  expression  of  joy ;  in 
the  other  three  passages,  of  grief. 

1279.  blat.  As  noun,  this  is  the  only  occurrence  of  hldt.  It  is  appositive  to 
hring,  1278:  'then  came  a  ringing  cry,  a  moan,  issuing  from  the  breast  of  the 
hero.' 

128471286.  Cf.  Gu.  609-613  : 

ond  ic  )5£et  gelyfe       in  llffruman  • 

ecne  onwealdan      eaira  gesceafta, 

)jaet  he  mec  for  miltsum      ond  masgenspedum, 

niSSa  nergend,       nSfrc  wille 

l^urh  ellenweorc       anforlzetan. 

1288.  a.  Jul.  119-120:  Ic  \>-s.\.  gefremme  gif  min  feorh  leofaS,  gif  \>\\  unrsedes 
jer  ne  geswicest. 

1291.    Cf.  Chr.  775:  )>2et  he  us  gescilde  wiS  scea^-an  waepnum. 

1293-1295.   The  object  of  by.sinrian  and  belecgan  is  not  expressed. 

I294\  facnes  frumbearn.  So  also  of  Satan,  Gu.  1044;  oi.  godes  frttmbearn, 
'  Christ,'  Sat.  470  ;  frumbearn,  '  Christ,'  Chr.  507.  —  1294^.   So  Gen.  453. 

1296''.   Cf.  Gtt.  87  :  se  atela  gSst. 

1300-1301.  Cf.  Acts  XXIII,  2.  The  Greek  (Bonnet,  p.  104,  1.  i)  says  merely: 
Ti^TFTere  avrov  rb  (rrS/xa  tva  firj  X0X77. 

1301.  Pogatscher,  Aiiglia  XXIII,  263,  notes  that  the  subject  of  reorda]?  is 
unexpressed  after  nu. 

1305.  under  niflan  naes.  Cf.  1.  1710;  Beow.  1912;  and  elsewhere  frequently, 
where  the  word  nets  means  'sea-headland.'  The  sun  here,  as  in  i;  1457,  sets  in 
the  ocean.  Grimm,  Tetit.  Myth.  II,  742-743,  gives  numerous  illustrations  of  this 
wide-.spread  mythological  belief. 

1306.  brunivann.  '  Night  is  described  as  brumvann,  a  color  that  can  scarcely 
be  distinguished  from  "dark."    Milton  twice  uses  a  similar  expression: 

To  arched  walks  of  twilight  groves 
And  shadows  brown  that  Sylvan  loves. 

II  Petts.  133-134. 

And  where  the  unpierc't  shade 
Imbrown'd  the  noontide  bow'rs. 

Par.  Lost  4.  245.' 

Mead,  Pub.  of  ML.l.  XIV,  194.  Professor  Hart  suggests  that  the  compound 
may  be  a  noun  =  '  crepusculum.'     This  is  the  only  occurrence  of  it. 

1308.  deor  ond  domgeorn.    Cf.  Rid.  XXXII,  16:  deor  domes  geom. 

1309.  sceal.    Tense-sequence  would  demand  sceolde. 
1310''.   a.  Jul.  238:  wierfaest  wunade. 


144  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

131 1.  seofona  sum.  Cf.  Legend,  p.  123, 1.  22  :  Dast  deofol  J>a  genam  mid  him 
6)?re  seofon  deoflo  ;  so  also  the  Greek  version,  Bonnet,  p.  104,  1.  5.  Cf.  Matt. 
XII,  45. 

1312.  Cf.  El.  901  :  eatol  aeclaeca  yf ela  gemyndig.  The  combination  atol  iegiaca 
occurs  also  Bcow.  592,  732,  816,  and  Sat.  161. 

1313.  luorSres  nianfrea.  So/;//.  546;  £/.  ^41.  —  gescyrded.  'Shrouded  or 
enveloped.'  Gn.,  S/r.  1,  449,  supposes  gesctyded,  'vestitus,'  ox  gescyrted  ?  Traut- 
mann,  quoted  by  Simons,  p.  60,  interprets  ^'&^QyvA^A=gescynded —gescended, 
'  confusus  ' .''  A  form  gescyrd  occurs,  however,  as  Cos.  [PBB.  XXI,  17)  points 
out,  in  Eadzaines  Psalter  (E.E.T.S.,  No.  92),  Ps.  XCII,  i  ;  cf.  B.-T.,  p.  438. 

ISIS*^.  a.  Jul.  189:  hospwordum  sprsec. 

1316.  Sievers  [PBB.  XII,  478)  points  out  that  the  scansion  of  the  line  becomes 
normal  if  the  name  Andreas  is  omitted. 

1317.  hwajr.    Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  104,  1. 10  :  ttou  scttlv  ri  duva/xis  aov  Kal  6  06/3os  troi/,  etc. 
1319.  gild  gehnfegdest.    Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  104,  1.  13:  Kal  eiroirjcras  to,  lepa  rjiiwv 

olKias  fpTj/xovs  yeveadat  iva  iirj  av€vex0(i}cnv  dvcriai  iv  avrois,  ottws  Kal  'qfieti  repcpdw/xev. 
Qi.  Jul.  146:  Jia  )'U  goda  iissa,  gield  forhogdest. 

1322.  The  punctuation  here,  1.  1322*  in  parenthese's  and  a  comma  after  pin, 
1321'^,  was  suggested  by  Cosijn,  PBB.  XXI,  17.  The  Edd.  have  only  a  comma 
after  J»in. 

1323*^.  See  1393^. 

1324.  Herodes.    See  Introd.,  p.  Iviii.  —  1324''.  So  Beow.  2924. 

1326-1327.  a.  Jul.  481-483'^:  Sume  ic  rode  bifealh,  Jjjet  hi  hyra  dreorge  on 
hean  galgan  iTf  aletan ;  ibid.  310:  )>ast  he  of  galgan  his  gaest  onsende ;  El.  480: 
on  galgan  his  gast  onsende.    K.  marks  the  hemistich  in  1.  1327  after  his. 

1328-1329.  Cf.  Jul.  1 1-12  :  Foron  aefter  burgum  swa  he  biboden  hasfde,  hegnas 
Ky'Sfulle. 

1331.  attre  gema'l.  This  is  the  only  occurrence  oi  gewiclcis  adjective,  but  cf. 
////.  591  :  fyre  gemSled.    On  the  use  of  poisoned  arrows,  cf.  Cook,  Christ,  p.  149. 

1334-1335-  Cf.  Git.  377-378  :  wseron  hy  reowe  to  rSsanne  gifrum  grapum  ;  Gii. 
96S-969 :  ac  hine  riese'5  on  gifrum  grapum. 

1335.  hine.  The  antecedent  is  Andrew;  cf.  1.  1143. 

I337~i340'  Cf.  Legend,  p.  123,  1.  31  :  and  hie  gesawon  Crlstes  rode  tacen  on 
his  onslene ;  hi  ne  dorston  hine  genealScan,  ac  hratie  hie  on  weg  flugon. 

1340.  forhte,  afterde.  Construe  both  as  adjectives  agreeing  with  hie,  1339. 
So  Chr.  892;  Ph.  525:  forht  afSred.  Dicht.  translates  'von  Furcht  bestiirzt ' ; 
K.  omits  afierde  in  text  and  translation ;  Root,  '  sorely  afraid ' ;  Hall,  '  fearful, 
affrighted.'  Simons,  p.  42,  takes  forhte  with  Grein,  Dicht.,  as  a  noun  ;  Spr.  I,  326, 
however,  glosses  yi?^///  in  all  three  of  the  above  passages  as  adjective.  Bright 
regards /c>r/;/^  in  the  parallel  passage  in  the  Christ  (cf.  Cook's  Christ,  p.  179)  as 
adverb.  But  two  coordinate  adjectives  without  connective  in  the  same  half-line 
are  occasionally  found,  e.g.  759,  Chr.  953,  993,  1059,  11 16,  1193,  I507'  ^^c.  See 
494,  note.  —  on  fleam  numen.  The  only  occurrence  of  this  form  of  expression  ; 
cf.  1386,  and/;//.  630:  on  fleam  sceacan. 

1342^*.  So  Jul.  246. 

1343.  rineas  mine.    So  Ge)i.  2S80,  in  direct  address. 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  I45 

1348.  ga  pe  sylfa  to.  Cf.  11.  340,  505,  860.  But  the  construction  of  oblique 
form  with  a  nominative  sy//,  sylfa,  is  also  frequently  found;  cf.  Wiilfing,  I,  355, 
for  numerous  examples. 

1351'^.  So  El.  604.  —  1351''.  So  Beoro.  1469;  Ap.  17:  aldre  gene<5de. 

1352-1356.  Translate  '  We  may  easily,  dearest  of  earls,  teach  thee  something 
better  at  this  sword-play,  before  thou  openly  make  attack,  raise  the  tumult  of 
battle,  no  matter  how  it  turn  out  for  thee  at  the  conflict.'  The  better  plan  which 
they  propose  is  given  in  11.  1356  ff.  Reading  ^veald  J>u  with  Grimm,  K.  translates 
'  We  may  easily,  dearest  of  earls,  at  the  play  of  men  teach  thee  better,  before 
thou  again  attempt  war,  the  rush  of  battle  ;  guard  thyself  the  better  in  the  change 
of  blows.'  Dicht.  translates  '  Leicht  mogen  wir  dir,  liebster  der  Manner,  in  dem 
bitteren  Kampf  zum  Besseren  raten :  ehe  off  en  du  zum  Angriff  schreitest,  zu  dem 
Waffengraus,  sieh  wol  erst  zu,  wie  dir's  beim  Gegenschlage  gehe ! '  The  other 
translations  follow  Grein.  B.-T.,  p.  1172,  also  takes  Aveald  as  imperative  oT 
ii<eah{aii,  '  decide  thou  how  it  shall  happen  to  thee.'  The  more  probable  reading 
is  that  of  Cosijn  {PBB.  XXI,  17)  and  Simons,  p.  150,  who  take  tveald  as  con- 
junction, 'however';  for  e.xamples  cf.  B.-T.,  p.  1171. 

1355'^,  Cf.  El.  19:  wiges  woma;  ////.  576:  wiges  womum. 

1358.  wraecsrS.  The  word  here,  as  in  1.  1431,  is  used  in  the  generalized  sense 
of  '  affliction,  sorrow.'  Its  specific  and  usual  meaning  is  '  exile,'  e.g.  Beow.  338 ; 
in  An.  889  it  is  used  in  the  sense  of  '  e.xiled  from  heaven,'  as  also  in  Gii.  595,  1047. 
Cf.  B.-T.,  p.  1270. 

I359''.  So  Beow.  425. 

1361.  witum  bewSled.  Cf.  Gii.  396:  witum  waelan.  K.  translates  'stained 
with  torments';  but  cf.  B.-T.,  p.  11 53,  for  examples  of  the  word  wielaii  in  the 
sense  '  torment,  afflict.' 

1367.  hroSra  leas.    Cf. ////.  390  :  hroKa  bidSled. 

1368='.  So  P/i.  369. 

1371.  unfyrn  faca.  Cf.  Hy.  IV,  42  :  ful  unfyr  faca.  The  scansion  of  the  half- 
line  is  _£.  ^  I  v5  X  • 

1376.  Supply  in  sense,  with  Ettmiiller,  maeg  alysan. 

1377^-1385.  See  Introd.,  p.  Ivii. 

I379f'.   So    El.  771. 

1380.  in  Avraec  ■wunne.  The  primary  meaning  of  'tvinnan  is  'to  struggle, 
oppose ' ;  from  this  is  developed  a  passive  sense,  '  endure,  suffer.'  For  examples 
of  the  second  sense,  cf.  Chr.  1272,  1428,  Gen.  1014;  and  for  the  opposite  devel- 
opment, a  verb  meaning  'to  suffer'  becoming  active,  'to  perform,  show  forth,' 
cf.  adreogan,  164,  note. 

1384''.   Cf.  1190%  note. 

1393.  hit  ne  niihte  SM'a.  So  Beoiu.  2091;  cf.  Rid.  XXX,  6:  gif  hit  s-wa 
vteahte ;  and  for  numerous  other  examples  of  omission  of  infinitive,  Spr.  II,  268, 
and  Sievers,  Auglia  XIII,  2. 

1407.  on  daeges  tide.  A  contrast  is  evidently  intended;  Andrew  compares 
his  three  days  of  suffering,  1.  1414,  with  the  one  day  of  Christ's  suffering  on  the 
cross.  The  Legend,  p.  124,  1.  17,  reads:  ane  tid  on  rode  \>\\  {'rowodest,  and  hu 
cwjede,  '  Faeder,  for  hwon  forlete  J>u  me  ? '    Nu  iii  dagas  syndon  sy'SNan,  etc.    The 


146  NOTES    ON    ANDREAS 

Greek  version  (Bonnet,  p.  107,  1.  11)  gives  three  hours  as  the  period  of  Christ's 
suffering,  following  thus  Matt.  XXVII,  46.  Dicht.  translates  '  an  einem  Tage  ' ;  K., 
'  in  the  day-time  ' ;  Root,  '  that  day  when  from  the  cross  ' ;  Hall,  '  a  day's  length.' 

1413.  hwaet  forl^test  3u  me?    Cf.  Matt.  XXVII,  46. 

1415*.  So  Jul.  264.  —  Baskervill  and  Wiilker  place  a  question-mark  after  witii. 
But  this  is  a  statement  of  fact,  the  question  being  ended  in  1.  1413''. 

1418-1424.  This  passage  is  evidently  an  elaboration  of  Matt.  X,  30,  which  is 
preserved  in  Legend,  p.  124,  1.  23:  Gif  ge  me  gehyra'5,  and  ge  me  beoiS  fylgende 
ne  an  loc  of  eowrum  heafde  forwyr'S. 

142 1.  o39eoded.  The  word  need  not  be  taken  as  a  finite  verb,  as  Gm.  and 
Ettm.  suggest,  but  as  a  participle,  di«l  being  coordinate  in  construction  with 
synu  and  ban. 

1425.  toslopen,  adropen.  The  only  occurrence  of  adropen ;  for  examples  of 
toslopen,  cf.  Spr.  II,  548,  and  Sawen,  Eng.  Stud.  XXVI,  130.  The  misreadings 
tosloiuen,  a&rowen,  have  been  the  occasion  of  much  unnecessary  discussion. 

1430.  hlot^rode.  Perhaps  the  form  should  be  changed  to  the  more  usual 
hleoSrode  ;  but  cf.  1.  504,  sno^veS  for  sneo^veS. 

1433.  imindbyrde.  The  term  mundbyrd  (see  724,  1632)  is  a  technical  one 
in  Anglo-Saxon  law.  It  means  'surety'  or  'protection,'  and  definite  fines  were 
imposed  for  the  violation  of  the  mundbyrd.  "  The  king's  niitnd  .  .  .  seems  origi- 
nally to  have  been  120  shillings.  This  sum  was  subsequently  doubled  .  .  ." 
(Chadwick,  Studies  on  Anglo-Saxon  histitutions,  p.  125).  See  Seebohm,  Tribal  Cus- 
tom in  AS.  Law,  p.  374  ff.,  and  passim.     The  Lord  offers  Andrew  his  safe-conduct. 

1435.  soU.  Perhaps  so3  in  1.  644  is  also  to  be  taken  as  adverb.  Cf.  Spr.  II, 
462,  for  other  examples. 

1436.  myclan  daege.  Cf.  Chr.  868:  se  micla  daeg ;  Jul.  723:  on  J^am  miclan 
dasge ;  so  also  Soul  50,  89.  Cf.  also  Beozv.  978:  miclan  domes;  Wulfstan,  ed. 
Napier,  p.  136:  ondrjedon  us  \>o\\q.  micclan  dom  and  '5a  micclan  wita ;  p.  167: 
understandan  l^one  miclan  d5m  \>&  we  ealle  to  sculan.  The  phrase  is  evidently 
due  to  a  recollection  of  a  Biblical  phrase;  cf.  Joel  II,  11,  'magnus  enim  dies 
Domini,  et  terribilis  valde ' ;  II,  31,  '  veniat  dies  Domini  magnus  et  horribilis'; 
Acts  II,  20,  '  dies  Domini  magnus  et  manifestus,'  etc.  Cf.  MnE.  Great  Day  ;  see 
NED.  s.  vv.  day  and  great. 

1437-1440.   See  Matt.  V,  18. 

1441.  swa  = 'where.'  See  1449,  1582;  Chr.  984;  El.  971,  for  similar  use 
of  swa. 

1443.  llces  lielan.  The  emendation  is  made  on  the  strength  of  the  parallel 
to  Gu.  670-671  :  Ne  sy  him  banes  bryce  ne  blodig  wund,  llces  Ijela  ne  lal^es  wiht. 
Laelan,  ace.  sg.,  is  thus  appositive  to  bangcbree,  as  in  Gu.  it  is  appositive  to 
banes  bryce.  Cf.  1473-1474.  K.  apparently  understands  llces  Itelan  to  be  an 
amplification  of  blodige  stige,  1442'^';  he  translates  'where  thy  blood  poured 
forth  through  the  breaking  of  bones  a  bloody  path,  the  body's  spots.'  Gn.,  Diclit., 
takes  hvlan  as  object  of  geseoh,  1441  :  'wo  durch  Verwundung  sich  ergoss  dein 
Blut  auf  die  Gefilde  !    Sieh  die  blutigen  St.eige  und  auch  des  Leibes  Striemen.' 

I443''-I444.   Cf.  Gu.  284-285  :  ne  ge  me  laj'es  wiht  gedon  m5tun. 

1445.   a.  Jud.  181  :  \>&  lis  monna  mSst  mor'Sra  gefremede. 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  I47 

1447".  So  Beo7i'.  2753. 

1449.  blieduiu  gehrodene.  Cf.  'Les^eiid,  p.  125,  1.  4  :  geblowen  treow  waestm 
berende. 

1454.  an  ne  forltete.  'That  thou  didst  not  abandon  me.'  See  12S7,  1642, 
1669.  Cf.  fs.  CXVIII,  8  :  snne  ne  forlste ;_////.  104:  an  ne  forlSte.  W.  retains 
the  MS.  reading,  regarding  it  as  a  form  of  the  present  tense  ;  the  other  Edd.  change 
to /o)-/ete,  preterit.  The  form  is  evidently  preterit,  but  need  not  be  changed:  cf. 
802,  forlajtan  =  forleton ;  609,  -hSgende  =  -hegonde. 

1456-1457.  See  1305,  note. 

1458.  feoriSan  siiSe.  Really  only  the  third  time.  The  first  time  is  indicated 
in  1.  1250,  the  second  in  11.  1305  ff. ;  in  1.  1391  we  are  told  that  he  was  taken  out 
to  be  tortured  for  the  third  time,  and  the  return  to  the  prison  would  consequently 
be  the  third  time.  The  Iljoci^fts  and  the  Z^^^;/(/ simply  say  that  he  was  taken  back 
again  to  the  prison. 

1460.  crtefta  gehygd.  The  phrase  is  evidently  equivalent  to  mod,  1.  1461. 
The  Greek  (Bonnet,  p.  108)  says  merely  that  they  hoped  to  find  Andrew  lifeless 
in  the  morning.  Dicht.  '  die  Kraft  des  Mutes,'  K.  '  the  thought  of  power,'  Root 
'  the  hero's  mighty  soul,'  Hall  '  the  doughty  spirit,  the  dauntless  courage.'  A 
somewhat  similar  expression  is  craeftes  miht,  585,  also  El.  558,  Chr.  1145. 
Dr.  Blount  suggests  cnrftgan,  gen.  sg.  of  crtr/tga,  appositive  therefore  to  mago- 
rSdendes,  1.  1461,  for  oraefta. 

1461''.  So/«/.  226,  326,  363,  439. 

I462''-I463.  a.  Jul.  242^-243:  Da  cwom  semninga  in  ^aet  hlinraeced  haele'Sa 
gewinna. 

1464.  synne.    The  spelling  y  for  i  appears  also  in  scyna,  766  ;  tyres,  105. 

1467.  hales,  //if/ as  noun  does  not  occur,  and  the  form  may  be  taken  as  adj. 
here,  agreeing  with  lichonian.  K.,  'commanded  his  body  to  enjoy  safety,'  Root, 
'  bade  him  once  again  soundness  enjoy,'  and  Simons,  p.  82,  take  hal  as  a  noun. 

1469.  msegene  rof.    Also  1.  1676;  cf.  Beow.  2084  :  masgnes  rof. 
1469-1477.  Cf.////.  589b-594^: 

Da  gen  sio  halge  stod 
ungewemde  wlite  ;       naes  hyre  wloh  ne  hraegl. 
ne  fea.x  ne  fel      fyre  gemSled, 

ne  lie  ne  leolni.       Heo  in  lige  stod  • 

seghwaes  onsund,       saegde  ealles  J^onc 
dryhtna  Dryhtne. 

Also  Da)i.  437-440 : 

na;s  hyra  wlite  gewemmed      ne  nsenig  wroht  on  hraegle, 
ne  feax  fyre  beswSled,       ac  hie  on  friJSe  Drihtnes 
of  ^am  grimman  gryre       glade  treddedon 
gleawmode  guman       on  Gastes  hyld. 

1470.  Translate  '  from  his  prison  he  gave  thanks  unto  the  Lord,  healed  of  his 
grievous  tortures.'  A  parallel  to  heardra  ■^^^ta  occurs  in  ////  56.  Grein,  Dicht., 
translates  this  line  as  follows  :  '  heil  von  der  Haft  der  harten  Qualen  ' ;  K., '  whole 
from  his  captivity,  of  the  savage  torments';  Root,  'freed  from  the  bondage  of 
his  grievous  pains ' ;  Hall,  '  Freed  from  the  baleful  bondage  of  torture.'    But  of 


148  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

haefte  connects  logically  with  1.  1469'^',  not  with  hal  or  heardra  ■wita.    Heardra 

wita  is  gen.  pi.  dependent  on  hal,  as  e.g.  Beow.  1974  :  heaSolaces  hal. 

1474.  Apparently  there  has  been  a  general  transposition  of  the  parts  of  this 
passage  in  the  MS. ;  it  should  read  latfe  gelenge  ne  lices  dtel.  A  parallel  to 
la<5e  gelenge  is  Jul.  371  :  leahtrum  gelenge  \  with  lioes  dtel  of.  An.  1421.  The 
sense  of  the  passage  is,  'nor  bloody  wound,  of  harmful  nature,  nor  part  of  his 
body  made  wet  with  gore  from  sword-wound.'     See  my  note.  Mod.  Phil.  II,  408. 

1476''.   So  Gil.  898. 

1477.  Fritzsche,  Anglia  II,  441,  calls  attention  to  the  break  in  the  narrative 
after  1.  1477,  due,  he  thinks,  either  to  the  fact  that  the  poet  grew  weary  of  his 
subject  and  laid  the  poem  aside  for  a  time,  or  that  the  second  part,  11.  147S  ff., 
was  written  by  a  different  person  from  the  first  part.  There  is  nothing  in  the 
poem  to  support  either  supposition.  W.,  1.  1478,  note,  states  incorrectly  that 
Fritzsche,  followed  by  B.,  assumes  an  omission  in  the  text  after  1.  1477  (W. 
also  gives  the  line  incorrectly  as  1.  1478),  but  both  assume  merely  a  break  in  the 
narrative.    See  Introd.,  p.  Iviii. 

1478-1487.  Translate  '  Lo,  I  now  for  a  time  have  set  forth  in  words,  in  song, 
the  story  of  the  saint,  the  praise  of  that  which  he  wrought — a  story  (-wyrd) 
famous  and  beyond  my  power.  Much  is  yet  to  tell,  a  lasting  lore,  that  which 
he  performed  in  life,  all  after  the  beginning.  That  shall  a  wiser  man  upon  earth 
than  I  count  myself  find  in  his  heart,  that  from  the  beginning  he  knows  all  the 
hardships,  the  grim  conflicts,  which  he  endured.'  This  passage  has  been  variously 
punctuated  and  interpreted.  The  difficulties,  with  the  main  suggestions  that  have 
been  made,  will  be  considered  as  they  occur  in  the  notes  following. 

1478.  haliges  lare.  That  is,  '  the  story  of  the  saint ' ;  cf.  the  equivalent  phrase 
langsum  leornung,  1.  1482,  and  with  this  cf.  Chr.  44,  Gii.  766:  lare  longsume. 
In  the  Christ  the  allusion  is  to  the  fulfilment  of  prophecy ;  in  Gn.  the  words  are 
appositive  to  wordiun  ond  weoraun  wuldorcyninges,  1.  765. 

1479.  Gm.,  p.  132,  translates  this  line  'so  weit  ich  bisher  den  preis  des  liedes 
wirkte,  dichtete.'  But  the  more  probable  reading  is  that  of  Gn.  {Sp7-.  II,  574), 
'  laudem  ejus  quod  ille  fecit.'  Pogatscher  {A^iglia  XXIII,  274)  lists  this  passage  as 
an  example,  though  doubtful,  of  the  omission  of  a  subject  after  the  relative  pe. 
The  subject  of  worhte,  according  to  this  explanation,  would  be  Andrew.  Perhaps 
he  should  be  inserted  before  worhte ;  at  any  rate  it  must  be  supplied  in  sense. 
LeoSgiddinga  is  best  taken  not  as  gen.  pi.  but  as  inst.  sg.,  appositive  to  wor- 
duiii,  1480^  The  present  and  Ap.  97  are  the  only  occurrences  of  this  compound; 
gidding  is  also  of  rare  occurrence  as  simplex. 

1480.  wemde.  Cf.  1.  740  ;  and  Soul  64  :  wemman  mid  wordum.  Gm.,  fol- 
lowed by  K.  and  B.-T.,  p.  1187,  explains  this  word  as  it  occurs  in  Andreas  as 
derived  from  wemm,  '  spot,  defilement,'  a  meaning  which  suits  Soul  64,  but  not 
the  other  passages.  Weman,  'resound,  make  known,'  cf.  Spr.  II,  657,  may  be 
compared  with  ^vonla,  '  sound,  tumult.'  —  W.  has  a  period  after  undyrne,  thus 
uniting  the  phrase  ofer  min  gemet  closely  with  what  follows  ;  so  also  Hall  in 
his  translation.  Cos.  {PBB.  XXI,  18)  would  read  with  the  other  Edd.  wyrd 
undyrne,  ofer  mln  gemet.    Cf.  Ap.  ^2^  for  the  meaning  of  ^vyrd. 

1481.  secganne.  See  1 160,  note. 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  I49 

1481-1482.  Cf.  Beoni.  2879:  ofer  min  gemet ;  and  Git.  502-503: 

micel  is  to  secgan 
eall  ffifter  orde       J)Kt  he  on  elne  adreag. 

With  1.  1482''  cf.  1.  I486'>.    Cf.  also  El.  11 54:  eall  asfter  orde. 

1482.  liiiigsuni  leoriiung.  See  1478,  note.  Not  'wearisome';  cf.  'the  long 
home.'    Cf.  ,'//.  20-^. 

1485.  lindan  on  ferSe.  The  phrase  means,  freely  translated,  'compose,'  cf. 
Ap.  1-2  :  fand  on  seocuni  sefaii ;  and,  in  a  more  literal  sense,  EL  641  :  findan 
onfyrh&e.  Fand,  Ap.  i,  is  in  apposition  to  sanmode,  'compose,'  Ap.  2;  for  a 
discussion  of  this  use  of  samnian,  see  Barnouw,  Herrig's  Arcliiv  CVIII,  371- 
375.  —  J78et  frani  frunian  cunue.  A  clause  appositive  to  J7a;t,  1483.  The 
commentators  (including  myself,  Mod.  Phil.  II,  409)  have  been  much  troubled 
over  the  disposition  of  Jjaet.  Gn.  {^Spr.  I,  353)  translates  J»8et  by  cpii,  a  nom.  sg.* 
masc.  relative,  subject  of  cunne,  its  antecedent  being  niann,  1484-^.  But  this  is 
plainly  impossible.  Cosijn  {PBB.  XXI,  18)  explains  ]7aet  as  equivalent  to  swd 
iJglhna  J>(ci  {/le),  etc.,  deriving  this  meaning  from  ifgliewra,  1483''.  Pogatscher 
{Aitglia  XXIII,  266)  translates  correctly:  'Das  soil  ein  kliigerer  mann  auf 
erden,  als  ich  mich  halte,  im  geiste  finden,  dass  er  (namlich)  vom  anfang  alle  die 
leiden  kenne.'  The  poet  wishes  to  condense,  and  in  order  to  give  some  excuse, 
he  makes  the  conventional  literary  disclaimer  that  he  does  not  know  the  whole 
story  of  St.  Andrew,  adding  that  he  leaves  it  to  some  wiser  or  better  instructed 
man  to  tell  the  whole  story  some  day  (Kittredge).  It  is  not  necessary  to  suppose 
that  he  actually  gave  over  his  task  at  this  point,  or  even  that  it  suffered  a  tem- 
porary interruption. 

i486.  Cf.  C/ir.  1201  :  and  eal  Sa  earfeSu  he  he  fore  ieldum  adreag  ;  Jul.  496: 
eal  ha  earfe)>u,  he  ic  £er  and  s\\>  gefremede  t5  facne. 

1487*'.  Gm.,  p.  li,  taking  git  as  dual  of  the  pronoun,  suggests  that  the  two 
referred  to  are  Ine,  king  of  Wessex,  and  .(Efielburg,  his  wife,  the  author  himself 
being  Aldhelm ;  but,  p.  182,  he  notes  the  correct  view:  'nimmt  man  git  fiir 
'  adhuc,'  so  fallt  alles  auf  die  dualform  gebaute  weg.'  The  usual  form  of  this 
adverb  in  Andreas  is  Sa  git,  cf.  Glossary,  but  git  is  probably  used  here  for  the 
alliteration.  —  seeolon.  Pogatscher,  Anglia  XXIII,  285,  cites  CcedmoiCs  Hymn 
I  :  II ji  scyluti  /lergan,  for  similar  omission  of  the  subject. 

1490-1495.  Cf.  Beow.  2542-2546  : 

Geseah  Sa  be  wealle,      se  'Se  worna  fela 
gumcystum  god       gu5a  gedlgde, 
hildehlemma,       {>onne  hnitan  feSan, 
sto«dan  stanbogan,       stream  ut  Jionan 
brecan  of  beorge. 


Also  Beoia.  2715-2719: 


Da  se  3e'5eling  giong, 
J'set  he  hi  wealle       wishycgende 
gesaet  on  sesse ;       seah  on  enta  geweorc, 
hu  "5a  stanbogan       stapulum  fsste 
ece  eorJSreced       innan  healde. 


I50  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

1491^.   Cf.  El.  83:  heardre  hilde  ;  Fight  at  Finnesbiirh  28:  heordra  Hilda. 

1492.  faeste.  An  adj.  agreeing  with  sweras,  1493.  ^-i  P-  77'  would  retain  the 
MS.  reading,  taking  faestiie  as  appositive  to  Avealle;  he  translates  'He  won- 
drously  saw  by  the  wall,  by  the  fortress,'  etc.  But  neither  the  syntax  of  the  pas- 
sage nor  the  form  of  the  word  admits  this  construction. 

1493.  under  saelAvage.  'In  the  hall  or  prison.'  B.,  retaining  the  MS.  reading, 
translates,  p.  77,  'at  the  foot  of  the  hall-plane';  W.  translates  'aus  dem  felde 
heraus,  vor  der  ebene.'  But,  as  Cosijn  points  out  {PBB.  XXI,  18),  under  strl- 
wange,  as  in  Rid.  IV,  2,  means  '  under  the  earth.'  A  comparison  with  the  Greek 
justifies  the  emendation:  koX  deacydixevos  0  ' Xvbpias  eis  /xeaov  rrjs  <pv\aKi]i  eJdev  arv- 
\ov  effTuiTa,  Kal  iirl  top  <ttv\ov  avSpias  eirLKelixevos  dXajSacTTpivo!  (Bonnet,  p.  109, 1.  8)  ; 
and  cf.  Legend,  p.  125,  14-15  :  he  geseah  on  middum  J'Sm  carcerne  swer  standan, 
and  ofer  bone  swer  stienenne  anlicnesse.  It  seems  best  to  take  under  in  the 
sense  here  of  'in'  (cf.  11.  95,  144,  940,  1005,  1038,  1065,  1071,  1253,  and  >S/)r.  II, 
618,  for  other  examples)  rather  than,  with  Cosijn,  PBB.  XXI,  18,  in  the  sense 
'  dicht  unter,'  'close  by' ;  the  s"weras  are  within  the  prison,  and  Andrew  himself 
is  of  course  still  in  the  prison,  cf.  1458  ff. 

The  image  mentioned  in  the  Ilpd^ets  and  the  Legend  does  not  appear  in  Andreas, 
probably  because  the  poet,  following  as  he  does  the  Beoiatdf  (ci.  An.  1490-1495, 
note),  conceives  of  the  s^\'eras  as  pillars  which  hold  up  the  roof  of  the  prison. 
That  s'tveras  and  not  speras  is  the  right  reading  is  of  course  confirmed  by  the 
reading  of  the  Greek  and  the  prose  version. 

1494.  storine  bedrifene.    Cf.  JVand.  76  :  winde  bewaune  weallas  stondaj). 
1495'^.  See  1235,  note. 

1498-1503.  Cf.  Legend,  p.  125,  11.  17-21  :  Ondrsed  J>e  Drihten  and  his  rode 
tacn,  beforan  J>Sm  forhtiga'5  heofon  and  eox\>e.  Nu  J'onne,  anlicnes,  do  }>aet  ic  bidde 
on  naman  mines  Drihtnes  HSlendes  Cristes  ;  send  mycel  wseter  hurh  J>inne  mu^>, 
swa  bast  sTen  gewemmede  ealle  ba  on  \>\sse  ceastre  syndon.  The  change  in  the 
poem,  of  pinuni  sta]7ole,  1.  1503,  was  necessary,  since  the  poet  omits  all  mention 
of  an  image;  cf.  1493,  note. 

1500-1501.  Grein's  interpretation  of  heofonas  and  eorSan  as  genitives  after 
faeder  is  the  correct  one.  Perhaps  heofonas  should  be  changed  to  heofones, 
but  see  523,  note.  \V.,  note  to  1501,  takes  heofonas  ond  eortfanas  amplification 
of  gesceafte,  1499;  this,  however,  supposes  an  improbable  plural  eor&an. 

The  allusion  of  the  passage  is  to  the  day  of  judgment ;  cf.  Vision  of  the  Cross 

■^  '  He  "Sa  on  heofonas  astag;       hider  eft  funda|> 

on  bysne  middangeard       mancynn  secan 
on  domdffige       dryhten  sylfa, 
aelmihtig  God       ond  his  englas  mid, 
baet  he  J>onne  wile  deman,       se  ah  domes  geweald, 
anra  gehwylcum,       swa  he  him  Srur  her 
on  byssum  iSnum       life  geearna^  : 
ne  maeg  ^Sr  Snig       unforht  wesan 
for  I'am  worde,       be  se  W'ealdend  cwy^ ! 

1504^.  Cf.  Geti.  231-232:  Tigris  .  .  .  ea  inflede. —  I504'\  Perhaps  hatetf, 
I505^  should  be  placed  in  this  half -line. 


NOTES    ON   ANDREAS  I51 

1507.  ■widrynig.    The  only  occurrence  of  the  compound. 

1508.  geofon.  See  393,  note.  Retainmg  the  MS.  reading,  Hall  translates 
'  A  streaming  heaven.' 

1508-1509.  Gm.,  p.  133,  '  vvie  gliinzest  du  von  golde  ! ' ;  he  cites  also  NIIG. 
'  von  golde  sein.'  But  K.,  correctly,  '  Lo  thou  art  than  gold  or  gift  of  treasure 
more  precious.'    The  translations  all  agree  with  K. 

151 1,  reoene.  Translate  '  awful  mysteries.'  The  form  rccene,  not  mentioned 
by  B.-T.,  is  glossed  by  Gn.,  Spr.  II,  370,  and  Simons,  p.  113,  as  adverb;  Dicltt. 
translates  '  offenbar,'  K.,  '  at  once.'  Ikit  recene  is  better  taken  as  adjective. 
Cf.  Ps.  CV,  18  :  /^  oil  Egyptiim  ic&ele  lounditr  .  .  .  and  recene  witndur  on  }>dm 
Kiadan  Sie,  translating  '  Deus  qui  fecit  magnalia  in  yEgypto,  terribilia  in  Mari 
Rubro  ' ;  B.-T.,  p.  789,  explains  the  word  here  as  meaning  'coming  swiftly  and 
so  causing  terror,'  and  cites,  in  support  of  this  meaning,  yi?;-  and  its  compounds. 
This  meaning  is  also  the  one  appropriate  to  the  passage  in  the  Andreas.  — 
1511''.  Cf.  Chr.  671  :  reccan  ryhte  S;  El.  280-281  :  J^a  '5e  deoplicost  dryhtnes 
geryno  J^urh  rihte  ie  reccan  cu(Son. 

1514.   swa  hit.    See  327,  note. 

1515-1516.  There  is  nothing  in  the  sources  to  account  for  the  mentioning  of 
Joshua  and  Tobias  here.  The  allusion  to  Joshua,  the  successor  of  Moses  (cf. 
Numbers  XXVII,  18  ff.),  is  intelligible,  but  why  should  Joshua  and  Tobias  be 
mentioned  together .'  Professor  Hart  makes  the  very  plausible  suggestion  that 
Tobias  is  a  blunder  for  Caleb,  who  is  intimately  connected  with  Joshua  in  the 
Old  Testament  narrative,  cf.  NnmbersYAN ,  6;  XXXII,  12.  The  Vulgate  spelling 
of  Joshua  is  Jostie;  of  Moses  it  is  Moyses  in  the  nom.,  Moysen  in  the  ace,  the 
other  forms  being  Moysi,  Aloyse. 

1520^.   Cf.  15S6;  El.  86:  burh  j^ces  halgan  hSs. 

1525.  mid  jerdaege.  Cf.  1527''.  There  is  no  allusion  to  the  morning  in  the 
Legend.,  but  the  Ilpd^ets,  p.  no,  1.  9,  mentions  the  time,  wptxiias. 

1526.  meoduscerwen.  The  passage  is  an  evident  imitation  of  Beow.  767-769  : 
Denum  ealliim  7aear&  .  .  .  eorliim  ealuscerweti,  of  the  Danes  on  the  occasion  of 
Grendel's  visit  to  Heorot.  In  both  passages  the  general  idea  of  meoduscerwen, 
eahisceriuen,  is  'terror,'  'fright,'  but  the  specific  meaning  or  figure  is  uncertain, 
Gm.,  pp.  xxxvi-.xx.xvii,  taking  scerwen  as  participle,  settles  on  the  meaning 
'  effusum,'  '  evomitum ' :  the  mead  or  ale  was  spewed  forth  as  result  of  the 
fright.  K.  translates  scerpen  of  his  text  by  'spilled.'  Gn.,  Spr.  II,  401,  glosses 
scerwen  as  part,  under  sceriaan,  '  vergeuden,'  '  verschiitten  ? ',  Dic/it.,  '  der  Meth 
ward  vergossen  nach  dem  Schmausgelage.'  B.  reads  scerpen  and  translates, 
p.  78,  'The  mead  became  sharp,'  —  i.e.  terror  arose  because  the  mead  became 
sharp  or  spoiled  after  the  feast  day. 

Gn.,  note,  suggests  holding  the  two  elements  of  his  text,  mcodu  scer«-en, 
together  as  compound,  and  Bugge,  Tidskrift  for  Philologi  og  Pirdagogik  VIII, 
293-295,  follows  the  suggestion  of  Grein's  note,  taking  the  word  as  compound 
noun  formed  like  edu<enden  and  compounds  with  raden,  in  the  sense  '  mead- 
pouring,'  Gn.,  'methvergeudung  ? '.  The  passage  would  thus  be  an  ironical  allu- 
sion to  the  flood :  '  there  was  a  sufficient  mead-pouring  for  all  after  the  feast- 
day.'    Heyne,  Beowulf^,  p.  93,  accepts  the  word  as  compound  but  interprets  it 


152  NOTES    ON  ANDREAS 

somewhat  differently:  '^ ealiiscerzven,  meoduscer-wen  ware  im  eigentlichen  Sinne 
der  Gegensatz  von  meodii-rSden  (Grein,  Spr.  II,  239)  und  bezeichnete  einen 
plotzlichen  Ausgang  oder  eine  plotzliche  Wegnahme  des  Bieres.  Das  Bild  mag 
schon  friihe  verdunkelt  sein.'  Still  another  explanation  is  offered  by  Cosijn 
{PBB.  XXI,  19),  who  cites  Cura  Pastoralis  295,  6,  &d  him  &iEt  IT&  gesctred  was 
(translating  digesto  vino),  freely  translated,  'als  der  rausch  voriiber  war.'  With 
gesci7-ed  Cosijn  would  connect  -scer\ven,  remarking,  'dass  durch  einen  plotz- 
lichen schrecken  ein  zustand  von  niichtemheit  wider  eintritt,  ist  allbekannt :  die 
bier-  und  schlaftrunknen  Danen  werden  also,  wie  die  Marmedonier  nach  ihrem 
hungerschmaus  wider  niichtern,  der  rausch  nach  dem  feste  war  geschwunden.' 
Cf.  the  similar  situation  and  phrasing  in  Beoiu.  128-129:  /a  zuas  crfter  wiste  lodp 
up  dhafeti,  micel  morgenszveg,  in  which  after  wiste  is  to  be  taken,  with  Kock, 
Anglta  XXVII,  223,  and  others,  in  the  general  sense  'after  the  feast,'  'after 
joy,'  not  as   referring  to  the  ravages  of  Grendel. 

1527.  sl^epe  tobrugdon.    Cf.  Gen.  2665  :  ha  sliepe  tobrasgd. 

1531''.  Cf.  .-i/.  59 :  sweordrtes  fornam ;  Beow.  557:  heaj'orjes  fomam.  See 
994'',  note. 

1532.  ]?urh  sealtne  Tt'eg.  See  196,  sealte,  the  same  mistake  being  made  by 
the  scribe  as  in  the  present  passage;  in  1.  196  the  MS.  has  s  ealte,  with  a  letter 
erased  after  s.  In  the  present  passage  the  scribe  has  omitted  to  erase  the  unneces- 
sary letter;  probably  temporary  confusion  with  forms  of  sailan  troubled  him. 
But  the  passage  still  contains  too  many  letters,  ^tv/// =' ocean '  is  not  found 
elsewhere  and  is  not  a  probable  word.  Reading  sealtes  as  noun,  Dicht.  translates 
'  durch  der  Salzflut  Tosen,'  followed  by  the  other  translations.  As  adjective, 
however,  sealt  (cf.  Spr.  II,  434)  is  a  conventional  epithet  as  applied  to  the  ocean. 
Cosijn  would  change  therefore  to  sealtne,  retaining  sweg.  But  sealtne  sweg  = 
'  salt  noise,  tumult,'  is  meaningless.  Evidently,  in  the  general  confusion  of  the 
scribe,  an  unnecessary  s  was  prefixed  to  Aveg  =  '  wave '.  For  this  spelling,  cf. 
19S,  601,  932;  and  cf.  Ex.  333:  ofer  sealtne  mersc;  Dan.  323:  geond  sealtne 
w5g ;  and  An.  748-749. 

iSSS''-  So  El.  140. 

I538\  Cf.  Beo7i<.  1 292-1 293:  wolde  tit  J>anojt  feore  beorgatt,  of  Grendel's 
mother;  EL  \'^i,:  fliigon  on  fasten  ond  feore  bnrgon  after  stdticlifian,  of  the 
heathen  Huns  ;  Maid.  193-194:  J>one  wudu  sohton,  flugon  on  )>at  fasten  and  hyra 
feore  burgon,  of  the  traitorous  Godrinc  and  Godwig. 

1539^.   So  Gen.  1818;  Ph.  416:  drohtab' sohton. 

1540.  eortfan  ondwist.  A  second  form  of  the  word  ondzvist  occurs  Ex. 
16-18:  J'5r  him  gesealde  sigora  waldend  .  .  .  onwist  eSles  Abrahames  sunum. 
Cf.  the  compound  neaivest,  -wist.  Perhaps  the  form  in  the  Andreas  should  be 
changed  to  agree  with  that  in  the  Exodus;  but  ond-,  and-,  is  of  frequent 
occurrence  in  similar  compounds. —  1540''.  Cf.  Legend,  p.  125,  1.  27:  send  me 
|>Tnne  'engel  of  heofonum  on  fyrenum  wolcne ;  and  1.  30 :  fyren  wolcen  astah  of 
heofonum.  Note  the  realism  of  the  description  of  the  fire  in  the  Andreas,  and 
see  Gummere,  Germanic  Origins,  p.  96  ff.,  for  a  discussion  of  this  theme  in 
Anglo-Saxon  poetry. 


NOTES    ON   ANDREAS  I53 

1541.  blacan  lige.  '■Bide  is  merely  an  ablaut  form  of  the  stem  bluan,  'to 
shine,'  and  perhaps  hardly  means  white  at  all.  In  a  few  cases  it  evidently  means 
pale  or  ghastly.  It  is  properly  applied  to  the  fire,  or  the  fire-light,  and  even  to 
the  red  flame,  or  to  the  lightning,  or  to  the  light  of  stars.  Of  the  twenty-eight 
instances  where  the  word  occurs  —  either  alone  or  as  part  of  a  compound, — 
nearly  all  seem  to  lay  emphasis  on  the  brightness  rather  than  on  the  whiteness.' 
Mead,  Pitb.  of  MLA.  XIV,  177. 

1542^.  Cf.  Be<no.  2819:  hate  heatSowylmas ;  Gen.  324:  hatne  heaSowelm  ;  El. 
579:  hattost  heaSowelma.  Cf.  also  Beoiv.  2522:  hea'Sofyres  hates;  ibid.  2547: 
heaSofyrum  hat. 

1545.  -wiidii  hlynsodon.  Gn.,  Z'/V///.,  translates  'die  Wasser  rauschten,'  but 
Spr,  II,  745,  he  glosses  wudii,  nom.  pi.  for  the  present  passage,  with  the  mean- 
ing 'arbor,'  and  Spr.  II,  89,  inconsistently,  wadn.  Reading  witdu  with  W.,  Hall 
translates  'wood  snapped  and  crackled.' 

1547a.  So  Geti.  1993;  Beow.  138,  Ex.  579:  l^a  wres  eaSfynde. 

1548.  geh(Jo  niiendan.  Cf.  1665;  C/ir.()0:  gehjnmi  mSnaS ;////.  391  :  gehtSu 
mienan;  Beo-i>.  2267:  giohlSo  mSnde. 

1549.  forhtfcrS.  Cf.  1596,  and  Iv/d.  XVI,  i^,  forhtmod.  —  fusleot(  golon. 
Cf.  Gil.  1320:  fusleobagol;   C/ir.  623:  fusleoS  galan. 

I550'\  So  Ph.  522. 

1551.  hereteam.  Translate,  with  B.-T.,  p.  533,  'plundering,'  'devastation.' 
Gm.,  and  Grein,  Diclit.,  take  the  word  in  the  sense  of  'plundering  expedition.' 

1555.  earmlic  ylda  gedraeg.  Cf.  Chr.i^<^<^:  earmlTc  aclda  gedreag ;  and  An. 
43,  note. 

I555''-I556.  Cf.  BeouK  loo-ioi  :  oiSSast  an  ongan  fyrene  fremman  ;  Beow. 
2210-2211  :  oSSast  an  ongan  deorcum  nihtum  draca  ricsan.  — 1556^.  Cf.  Hy.  IV, 
112:  feasceaft  hsele. 

1557.  Cf.  Beozii.  2408  :  hasft  hygeglomor  sceolde  hean  Sonon ;  C/ir.  994 :  heane 
hygegeomre. 

1558-1559,  Cf.  /ill.  34i^'-342  :  Nu  )ni  sylfa  meaht  on  sefan  Hnum  s6'5  gecnawan 
J>3et  ic,  etc. 

1561.  seo  AViTd.    See  613'',  note. 

1562.  ]7a»t  is  her  swa  ofiS.  Htrle&iiin  ci'i&,  as  Cosijn  points  out  {PBB.  XXI, 
20),  would  mean  '  universally,  everywhere  known,'  a  meaning  which  does  not  suit 
here ;  her  swa  cuS  he  translates  '  das  ist  hier  deutlich  genug.'  W.  regards  the 
metrically  imperfect  line  as  characteristic  of  the  work  of  the  poet  of  the  Andreas. 

1563.  \>xs  pe  ic  so?f  talige.    So  Becw.  532  ;  Clir.  794. 

1565.  ealle  anmode.  So  1601  ;  El.  11 17.  For  the  meaning  cf.  Eadwine's 
Psalter  (E.E.T.S.  No.  92)  LXVII,  6  :  D?7  so&lice  man  dnmod,  translating  tu  vera 
homo  unanimis.  See  54,  note.  — 1565''.  So  Beoiv.  256;  Ex.  293.  Cf.  Beow. 
3007  ff. :  Nu  is  ofost  betost  haet  we,  etc. 

1566.  Cf.  Ap.  90. 

1571.  }?ier.    Perhaps  one  should  read  ]>{et 

1574.   So  Beow.  847. 

i579\   Qi.  Jul.  131  :  gleaw  ond  Gode  leof ;  Gii.  1035:  glaedmod,  Code  leo£ 


154  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

1581.  smeolt  ■W8BS  se  sigewang.    So  Ph.  33,  Git.  714. 

1585.  geofon.  B.,  p.  78,  retaining  heofon,  translates  '  the  lamentation  ceased  ' ; 
'  these  words,'  he  says,  '  continue  the  thought  in  pa  ■\vaes  .  .  .  aefter  gyrne.'  Cf. 
11.  1615,  and  465,  533. 

1589.  flod  fseSmian.    So  Beoiv.  3133. 

1591.  bisencte.    The  only  occurrence  of  the  prefix  bi-  in  the  poem. 

I5g6\  See  1549. 

1598.  Srage  hnagran.    Genitive  after  wendan. 

1599.  mane  faa.    So  Beow.  978  :  maga  mane  fah. 

1602.  'Sait  J>e.  The  usual  form  of  this  conjunction  is  pa^tte,  cf.  Spr.  II,  572. 
Cf.  the  pronoun  Ssette,  1.  546. 

1603.  Cf.  Chr.  687  :  cyning  alwihta  craeftum  weor'SaJj. 

1604.  As  the  line  stands,  the  alliteration  is  defective.  Perhaps  one  should  read 
pider  or  J»yder  for  hider,  the  action  being  conceived  of  from  the  point  of  view 
of  the  one  who  sends. 

1606.  gumcystum.  Translate  as  adverb,  '  virtuously,'  '  righteously,'  or  with 
B.-T.,  p.  492,  as  adv.  phrase,  '  with  virtuous  zeal.'  Gumcyst  is  found  a  number 
of  times  with  adjectives,  e.g.  j^^tfTc.  i486:  gumcystum  godne ;  Ge7i.  1769:  gum- 
cystum god;  ibid.  1810:  gumcystum  til.  No  other  example  of  the  adverbial  use 
oi gumcystum  is  recorded;  but  cf.  IVid.  56:  hu  me  cynegode  cystum  dohten.  K. 
translates  gumcystum  as  adj.,  'that  we  this  excellent  man  should  gladly  hear.' 
But  there  is  no  authority  for  an  adj.  gumcyst.  Cf.  1639  for  another  example  of 
the  absolute  use  of  hyran  (Kittredge). 

1609.  curen.  The  verb  is  plural  to  agree  with  the  collective  subject  cynn,  1610. 

1610''.  So  Ap.  71^;  Chr.  1540  :  swylt  J>rowiaS. 

1612.  gif  ge  teala  hycgaS.  Cf.  Beow.  289:  se  J>e  wel  J>ence&,  likewise  in  a 
didactic  passage.    See  458-460,  note. 

1616''.   So  Ap.  58;  Gen.  1739;  J\Ien.  133  ;  feorh  sele'S,  Beow.  1370. 

161 7.  gode  orfeorme.    Cf.  406,  note. 

1618.  in  ^vlta  forwyrd.  So  El.  764;  Sermoti  071  Fs.  28  {Bibl.  II,  108)  10; 
////.  556. — i6i8'\  So  Gil.  116. 

1619.  in  feonda  geiveald.  Cf.  11.  1273,  1317.  The  phrase  of  1.  1619  is  also 
found  in  Beow.  808,  903;  Chr.  1416;  /ul.  159.  —  gefered  ne  ■wurdan.  Not  a 
Christian-like  prayer  as  the  MS.  reads. 

1621.  haliges  gastes.  See  1000,  note. 

1626''.  So  Ap.  25  ;  mine  gefrjege,  Beow.  776,  837,  1955,  2685,  2837  ;  Gen.  1 173  ; 
Ex.  368;  Ph.  176;    Wid.  71  ;   Eadgar  9,  34;  Men.  27  ;  Metr.  XX,  82,  XX,  248. 

1627.  Cf.  Beo7v.  835-836  :  )>Sr  waes  eal  geador  Grendles  grape.  For  the  omis- 
sion of  the  initial  g,  cf.  Gen.  2557  :  eall  eador  \  and  see  Gram.,  §  212,  note  2  ; 
PBB.  IX,  208.  One  expects  here  a  plural  verb,  agreeing  with  eaforan,  1.  1627, 
and  hie,  1.  1628;  but  apparently  for  the  moment  the  poet  thinks  of  the  members 
of  the  throng  individually  — '  each  was  then  all  united  both  body  and  soul.'  Cf. 
El.  887-889  : 

he  sona  aras 
gaste  gegearwod,       geador  bu  samod 
lie  ond  sawl. 


NOTES   ON   ANDREAS  I  55 

1628-1629.  Note  the  rime  tarifaBr;  also  the  rime  in  1.  1631.  In  1.  1627  there  is 
assonance  of  the  four  stressed  vowels  ea,  in  1.  1624  of  the  three  vowels  eo,  the 
fourth  being  ea,  almost  an  assonance. 

1629.   (li.  Jul.  477-47S' :   Kxt  hi  fSringa  feorh  aleton  l^urh  aedra  vvylm. 

1633.  fyiiiiif^cs  c'r«'ftijj;a.  Cf.  Bonnet,  p.  1 14,  11.  9-10  :  koX  ixera  ravra  ix'^P^^^ 
TVTTOv  eKKXrjaias  Kai  iiroiricrev  oiKoboiXTjOrivat  Tr]v  iKK\r]crlav ;  and  Legend,  p.  I  27,  11.  5-7  : 
And  ffifter  )>issum  se  haliga  Andreas  het  cyrican  getimbrian  on  biere  stowe  ^aer 
se  swer  stod.  These  passages  show  that  modiga,  1.  1632,  and  consequently 
ora'ftiga,  1.  1633,  must  refer  to  Andrew,  cyninges,  1.  1633,  meaning  God.  K., 
reading  cru-ftigra,  translates  '  then  commanded  the  bold  one,  than  a  king  more 
powerful';  Grein's  suggested  reading  craiftigan  makes  the  word  accusative  — 
'  th^n  the  valiant  one  commanded  the  king's  architect,'  etc. ;  but  this  reading  is 
not  carried  over  into  Spr.  I,  168,  as  W.,  note  to  1.  1633,  states,  the  word  there 
being  glossed  craeftiga,  nom.  sg.    Cf.  C/ir.  11-14: 

Nu  is  Jjam  weorce  })earf 
J>aet  se  Craeftga  cume      and  se  Cyning  sylfa, 
and  J>onne  gebete  —         nu  gebrosnad  is  — 
hus  under  hrofe. 

1635.  ]7urh  f seder  fulwlht.  Grein's  emendation////////;/,  accepted  by  Simons, 
p.  46,  is  a  slight  improvement  in  the  sense  of  the  passage,  but  the  change  is  not 
necessary;  cf.  11.  1630-1631. 

1636^  So  El.  271. 

1637''.  So  Chr.  394;  Git.  854;  Gen.  10;  Vision  of  the  Cross  81  ;  Fs.  LVI,  6; 
LVI,  13  ;  side  and  wide.  El.  277  ;  Gen.  118;  Ph.  467. 

1640.  fuUwihtes  baeS.  So  El.  490,  1032 ;  Sat.  546. 

1643.  Cf.  El.  889-890  :  haer  waes  lof  hafen  fseger  mid  \>y  folce. 

i645'\  So  Chr.  1066;  Gu.  1286. 

1647.  se  ar.  The  change  from  the  MS.  sio  is  probably  necessary :  but  cf. 
Gram.,  §  337,  note  2. 

1649-^.   So  (in,  to)  Chr.  519  ;  Jitd.  327  ;  El.  821. 

1650.  Sc,  hine  gehalgode. 

1651.  ]7urhapostolhad.  The  phrase  refers  to  Andrew,  not  Platan  ;  cf.  Hall, 
'Through  his  [Andrew's]  power  as  apostle  (he  was  Platan  entitled)' — Platan. 
No  mention  whatever  is  made  of  the  appointing  of  a  bishop  in  the  Upd^eLS  ;  cf. 
Bourauel,  p.  84.  But  the  Legend,  p.  127,  11.  9-10,  reads:  And  ienne  of  heora 
aldormannum  to  bisceope  he  him  gesette,  and  he  [Andrew]  hi  gefuUode  and 
cwas'S,  '  Nu  honne  ic  eom  gearo  )i?et  ic  gange  to  minum  discipulum.'  The  name 
Platan  was  evidently  derived  from  the  lost  Latin  source  of  the  poem.  It  is  found 
frequently  in  the  Martyrium  Matthaei,  Bonnet,  pp.  217-262,  in  the  Latin  version 
in  the  form  Plato  (cf.  p.  228,  1.  22),  in  the  Greek  version  in  the  form  nXdrwi'  (cf. 
p.  222, 1.  14),  as  the  name  of  the  bishop  of  the  Mermedonians.  Cf.  Lipsius,  I,  6i6. 
For  the  quantity  of  the  word,  see  Sievers,  PBB.  X,  493. 

1654.  Sfegde  his  fusne  hige  =  scrgde  h>rt  his  hige  fus  ware;  for  similar  con- 
struction with  secgan,  cf.  Gu.  90;   Chr.  137;  El.  588.    See  also  1.  xdd^^. 
1656-^.  Cf.  Rid.  LXIV,  I  :  Oft  ic  secga  seledreame  sceal  faegre  onj^eon. 


156  NOTES   ON   ANDREAS 

1659.  weorc.  '  That  was  to  the  band  a  grief  to  endure.'  Gm.,  Gn.  Spr.  II, 
677,  B.-T.,  p.  1 199,  all  retain  the  MS.  reading  weor  as  positive  degree  of  -wyrs, 
the  present  being  the  only  occurrence  of  the  form.  W.,  1.  1659,  note,  would 
change  to  7veorce,  adj.,  citing  Beow.  1417:  weorce  on  mode  to  ge^olianne ;  Gen. 
2791:  weorce  on  m5de ;  also  lueorce,  Jul.  72,  135.  But  these  constructions  are 
not  parallel  to  the  present  passage,  and  as  Sievers  {Z/t.  f.  d.  Phil.  XXI,  358) 
points  out,  iveorce  in  such  constructions  as  weorce  on  mode  is  primarily  adver- 
bial;  the  adjective  form  should  be  loyrce.  The  right  reading  weorc  was  sug- 
gested by  Kluge,  Anglia  IV,  106,  and  is  accepted  by  Bright,  MLA\  I,  11,  and 
Cosijn,  PBB.  XXI,  20.  Kluge  points  out  the  parallel  passage  in  Jul.  569 :  J>aet 
>am  weligan  waes  weorc  to  J'olianne. 

1660-1661.  Hie  is  object  of  gewunian;  for  other  examples  of  this  construc- 
tion, cf.  Beoio.  22  ;  Ph.  481. 

1663.  Comparison  with  the  Legend  and  the  II/3d|eis  shows  that  the  omission 
in  the  MS.  here  is  inconsiderable;  the  Legend,  p.  127,  11.  19-27,  reads:  Him 
setiwde  Drihten  Hselend  Crist  on  l^am  wege  on  ansTne  fasgeres  cildes,  and  him 
to  cwae'5,  '  Andreas,  for  hwam  gsest  )?u  swa  buton  wsestme  J?ines  gewinnes,  and  \<Vi 
forlete  ^a  J>e  J)e  bSdon,  and  jju  naere  miltsiende  ofer  heora  cild  >a  J^e  Jpe  wieron 
fyliende  and  wepende  ?  para  cirm  and  wop  to  me  astah  on  heofonas.  Nil  >onne 
hwyrf  eft  on  t>a  ceastre,  and  beo  l^ier  seofon  dagas,  oj?  haet  Jju  gestrzingie  heora 
mod  on  minne  geleafan.'  This  passage  is  a  close  translation  of  the  Upd^ets, 
p.  115, 11.  6-13.  B.,  reading  as  the  MS.,  without  interruption,  places  1.  1664'^  within 
parentheses  and  remarks  (p.  78) :  '  As  the  MS.  shows  no  vacant  space,  I  have 
endeavored  to  get  the  following  out  of  this  passage :  Then  to  him  the  God  of 
glory  appeared  on  the  journey,  and  this  word  spoke  the  Lord  of  hosts:  "The 
people  in  consequence  of  their  evil  deeds  (their  mind  is  ready  (for  death  ?))  go 
mourning,  they  lament  their  grief,  men  and  women  together ;  their  weeping  goes 
hastening  forth,  their  mourning  mood  etc.  makes  itself  heard."  '  B.2,  p.  96,  retains 
this  reading,  remarking,  in  answer  to  W.'s  objection  that  1.  1664''  refers  to  the 
departure  of  Andrew:  'is  him  fiis  hyge,  their  mind  is  sad,  does  refer  to  the 
departure  of  Andrew.  For  fus  =  sad,  tristis,  see  Sprachschatz  I,  359,  under  fus. 
Grein  quotes  this  passage  and  understands  it  as  I  do.  But  he  is  mistaken,  I 
think,  in  supposing  that  they  are  not  also  sad  "  on  account  of  their  sins  "  (of  fire- 
num).  What  would  be  so  likely  to  occur  to  them  on  the  eve  of  his  departure 
as  the  remembrance  of  their  former  evil  deeds  and  unholy  lives,  from  which  they 
had  been  rescued  by  Andrew  ?  Hence  they  thought  if  he  should  leave  them  they 
should  relapse  into  their  former  sinful  state.'  But  the  MS.  is  plainly  defective 
here.    Grein,  Dicht.,  supplies  two  lines  after  1.  1663  : 

Warum  verlassest  du  die  Leute  denn  so  schnell, 
Da  kaum  erst  ist  bekehrt  von  seinen  Siinden  — 

Root  follows  Grein ;  K.  and  Hall  do  not  fill  in  the  passage. 

1664.  folc  of  flreniim.  In  the  complete  form  this  phrase  was  probably  f)art 
of  an  interrogative  sentence.  See  the  corresponding  passage  of  the  Legend,  1663, 
note.  —  W.  retains  the  MS.  reading  his  =  is  on  the  ground  that  the  form  his  is 
sometimes  found  in  the  Kentish  dialect ;  but  his  is  here  more  probably  a  scribal 


NOTES    ON    ANDREAS  I  57 

error;  cf.  1.  323'',  where  is  is  written  for  his.  —  fus.    K.,  B.  (cf.  1663,  note),  Root, 
and  Hall  translate  '  ready  for  death  ' ;  but  Grein,  Dickt.,  '  Ihnen  ist  freudlos  der 
Sinn.'    Other  instances  are  given  Spr.  I,  359. 
1666^.  Soy«</.  163. 

1667.  niiirnondc  mod.    So  Beow.  50;  Rid.  I,  15. 

1668.  lue  fore  sneowan.  Cosijn's  reading  is  confirmed  by  the  Legend,  p.  127, 
1.  24 :  ):^ara  cirm  and  wop  to  me  astah  on  heofonas.  For  the  order  of  words,  cf. 
El.  yiT-,  Jill.  277  :  me  fore  standa}\  It  is  probable,  however,  that  me  is  only  part 
of  the  omitted  passage;  there  is  nothing  in  the  Andreas  to  correspond  to  the 
phrase  ott  heofonas  of  the  Legend,  and  the  alliteration  in  the  half-line  me  fore 
snecwan  should  fall  on  f,  not  m,  as  comparison  with  El.  577,  Jnl.  277,  cited 
above,  and  Gu.  2.\~i  :  su<d  ic  cow  fore  stonde,  proves.  An  omission  is  therefore 
indicated  after  1.  1667-^.    For  the  construction  of  sneoM'an,  cf.  1.  242. 

1669.  eoAvde.  There  is  no  equivalent  to  this  word  in  the  Legend  or  the 
Ilpdfets ;  the  figurative  use  of  eowde,  meaning  the  Christian  congregation,  aside 
from  the  translations  of  the  Psalms,  is  found  elsewhere  in  the  poetry  only  in 
Chr.  257. 

1670.  Ilio^van.  Lichtenfeld,  p.  364,  finds  only  one  other  example  of  a  weak 
adj.  after  sivd:  J\lald.  319,  be  swa  leofan  men.  Swa  has  here  almost  demonstra- 
tive force.   ■ 

i677'^-i678''.  See  56S'^-569^ 

1679.  sawon.  The  subject  is  unexpressed  after  sytJcJan  (Pogatscher,  Anglia 
XXIII,  263). 

1681.  tireadigra.  The  w'ord  is  a  genitive  dependent  on  weorod,  1682.  Grein, 
Dicht.,  reading  tir  eadigra,  translates  '  Er  unterwies  drauf  die  Leute  in  dem  Weg 
zum  Glauben,  glanzvoU  begriindend  der  Beglilckten  Ruhyn  ' ;  Hall  follow's  Grein, 
'  To  the  saints '  honor  [Andrew]  added  mightily.'  K.  and  Root  take  the  word  as 
compound;  so  also  Cosijn  {PBB.  XXI,  20). 

1685.  in  J^rinnesse  Jjrynime.  So  El.  177  ;  Chr.  599;  Gu.  618;  fud.  86.  For 
the  quantity  of  ]7rinnesse,  cf.  Gram.,  §  230,  note  i. 

1686.  in  woruld  Avorulda.  So  Fs.  LXXVIII,  14;  CX,  5  (and  frequently, 
translating  in  saeciilum  saecnli,  in  saecula  saectdortivi)  ;  El.  452  ;  }>nrh  woruld  ivor- 
ulda  occurs  Chr.  778  and  Ph.  662.  The  whole  passage,  11.  1683-16S6,  is  an  evident 
reminiscence  of  the  closing  formula  usually  found  at  the  end  of  sermons,  as  in 
the  following  examples  from  the  Wulfstan  homilies  :  An  is  jelmihtig  God  on  Kym 
hadum,  J^aet  is  Feeder  and  Suna  and  Halig  Gast ;  ealle  )>a  Ky  naman  befehJS  an 
godcund  miht  and  is  an  ece  God,  waldend  and  wyrhta  ealra  gesceafta.  Him 
symle  sy  lof  and  weorSmynt  in  ealra  worulda  woruld  a  butan  ende,  amen  (Wulf- 
stan, ed.  Napier,  p.  107) ;  biddan  we  .  .  .  )>3ct  we  magan  and  motan  becuman  to 
■Sam  ecan  life  ^aes  heofoncundllcan  rices,  'S5r  we  motan  a  orsorhllce  libban  and 
rixjan  mid  urum  HSlende  and  mid  eallum  his  halgum,  mid  Faeder  and  mid  Suna 
and  mid  bam  Halgan  Gaste  a  in  ealra  worulda  woruld  a  butan  ende,  amen  (ibid, 
p.  215) ;  we  wjeron  hider  gehatene  and  gelaSede  to  Sam  halgan  ham  and  to  'Sam 
cynelTcan  friSstole,  hier  Drihten  Crist  wuna'JS  and  rixaS  mid  eallum  halgum  sawlum 
aa  butan  ende  in  ealra  worulda  woruld,  amen  (ibid.  p.  265).  For  other  examples, 
cf.  Wulfstan,  pp.  87,  190,  205,  242,  291,  and  the  B lidding  Homilies,  and  the  homilies 


158  NOTES    ON   ANDREAS 

of  /Elfric.  Kluge,  Eng.  Stud.  VI,  324,  commenting  on  the  concluding  passage  of 
the  Seafarer,  points  out  its  similarity  to  the  set  form  found  at  the  end  of  sermons, 
citing  examples  from  the  Blickliug  Homilies.  Cf.  also  Hy.  IV,  43-47  {Bihl.  II, 
no) ;  and  Ap.  107,  note. 

1687.  herigeas.  This  whole  passage,  11.  1687-1694,  is  the  addition  of  the 
poet ;  the  Ilpd^ets  says  merely :  koX  eTrot'ijo-ei'  kKil  rj/iipas  evTo.  didduKuv  /cat  iwi(7TT)- 
pl^wv  avToi/s  iirl  tov  Kiipiov 'Ir]<Tovv  XpiarSv  (Bonnet,  p.  116,  11.  9-1 1);  the  Legend 
(p.  128,  11.  5-7)  repeats  the  Il/jdlets:  and  he  hSr  wunode  mid  him  seofon  dagas, 
Iserende  and  strangende  hira  heortan  on  geleafan  ures  Drihtnes  Hslendes  Cristes. 
The  word  herig,  the  more  usual  form  of  which  is  hearg,  hear/i,  is  used  in  both 
the  senses  'idol'  and  'heathen  temple,'  see  B.-T.,  p.  522.  The  allusion  to  hell- 
trafum,  1691,  indicates  that  the  word  is  to  be  taken  in  the  second  sense  here. 
The  exact  meaning  of  the  word  in  the  sense  '  temple '  has  been  much  discussed ; 
see  C/zr.  485,  and  Cook's  note;  Golther,  Hatidbiuh  der gerniatiischeii  Myt/iologie, 
p.  590  ff. ;  De  la  Saussaye,  T/ie  Religion  of  the  Teutons,  tr.  Vos,  pp.  355-362  ; 
Gummere,  Germanic  Origins,  pp.  440-444. 

1688.  Cf.  El.  1040:  deofulgildum,  ond  gedwolan  fylde. 

1689.  gejjolienne.    See  1160,  note. 
1690^.   So  fill.  718. 

legs'*.   See  598^,  note. 

1694-1695.  Perhaps  a  recollection  of  Beow.  1402-1404:  Ldstas  w^ron  crfter 
7c<alds7vaJ>ii»i  wide  gesyne,  gang  ofer  grundas,  where  the  allusion  is  to  Grendel's 
mother. 

1696.  dagas  on  rime.    So  Gii.  iioS.    Cf.  1.  1673,  and  1.  1687,  note. 

1697.  wederburg.  '  Pleasant  city.'  This  is  the  only  occurrence  of  the  word. 
It  is  glossed  by  Gn.,  Spr.  II,  654,  '  dem  Wetter  ausgesetzte  Burg'  ;  Dicht.  trans- 
lates '  die  Wetterburg  ' ;  K.,  '  the  city  of  storms  ' ;  B.-T.,  p.  1 1 82,  '  a  town  exposed 
to  storms,  a  weather-beaten  city.'  But  weder  means  specifically  not  only  'bad 
weather,'  'storm,'  but  also  'good  weather,'  'warm  weather';  see  the  examples 
cited  by  B.-T.,  p.  11S2.  Cf.  lueder  also  in  compounds:  wedercandel,  'sun,'  372 
and  Ph.  187;  ivearme  wederdagas,  Az.  96;  -wedertdcen,  'sun,'  Gu.  1267;  weder- 
wolcen,  Ex.  75,  the  pillar  of  fire  which  guided  the  children  of  Israel.  The 
compound  wederburg,  since  the  poet  is  here  giving  a  favorable  description  of 
the  city  of  the  Mermedonians,  means  '  city  exposed  to  (pleasant)  skies.'  Cosijn 
{PBB.  XXI,  20)  and  Simons,  p.  150,  define  the  word  as  'sun-city,'  but  there  is 
no  warrant  for  assigning  the  meaning 'sun'  to  -cueder.  In  using  the  epithet  the 
poet  may  have  thought  of  Mermedonia  as  situated  in  Ethiopia ;  cf.  ^ElmjTcna, 
432  and  note,  and  Ap.  64 :  mid  Sigelwarum. 

1698.  Cf.  El.  225-226 :  Ongan  J>a  ofstllce  eorla  mengu  to  flote  ^san. 
1699'.  So  ^/.  1137;   Ph.  126,  592;   Gu.  1079. 

1702-1705.  The  poet  looks  for%vard  to  the  martyrdom  of  Andrew;  cf.  Ap. 
16-22. 

1704.  syTOan,  The  metre  of  the  half-line  demands  the  full  form  sySSan;  the 
MS.  form  syS  occurs  only  in  this  passage,  although  the  form  sytTSan  is  found 
twenty-one  times  in  the  poem.    See  Introd.,  p.  xlviii. 

1709.  hat  aet  heortan.    So  El.  628;   Gn.  1182,  1310;   Chr.  500,  539. 


NOTES   ON   ANDREAS  159 

1710-1722.  This  description  of  the  departure  of  Andrew  is  considerably  elab- 
orated in  the  poem ;  neither  in  the  Upd^en  nor  the  Legend  is  there  any  mention 
of  a  journey  by  water.  The  ITpd^eis  (Bonnet,  p.  116,  11.  11-15)  reads:  koX  TrXijpoj- 
divTwv  tC)v  iiTTa  rj/jLepdv  iyivero  iv  T<p  iKiropeiiecrdai  rbv  fj.aKdpiov  '  Avdp^av,  avv-qx^rfaav 
TrdvTes  iir'  avrbv  dirb  rraidiov  ?ws  Trpe(j(-ivT^pov,  Kal  Trpo^irep.wai>  avrbv  X^yovTti.  Eh  ^«ds 
'  Avdp^ov,  els  KVpios  ' Irja-ovs  Xpi<TT6i,  (p  i)  56$a  Kai  to  Kpdroi  eis  toi)s  aiCovas.  dp.'^v.  The 
Legend  (p.  128,  11.  8-14)  follows  the  Ilpd^eis  closely,  except  that  the  city  of  the 
anthropophagi  is  mentioned  by  name :  Mid  \>\  \>%  )>a  wseron  gefyllede  seofon 
dagas,  swa  swa  him  Drihten  bebead,  he  ferde  of  [Marjmadonia  ceastre  efstende 
t5  his  discipulum.  And  eall  Jjaet  folc  hine  ISdde  mid  gefean,  and  hie  cwSdon, 
'An  is  Drihten  God,  se  is  Hselend  Crist,  and  se  Halga  Gast,  J^am  is  wuldor  and 
gewpald  on  t)3ere  Halgan  I'rynnesse  Jmrh  ealra  worulda  woruld  soSlIce  a  butan 
ende.    Amen.' 

In  the  poem,  1.  1718,  ofer  inuldangeard,  is  antithetic  to  1.  1720,  in  heofon- 
]?rymine,  the  latter  phrase  being  paralleled  by  1.  1 721,  on  wuldre ;  for  this  sense 
of  ic'iildor,  cf.  1.  356,  note.    In  1.  1722  mid  englum  is  parallel  to  halgum,  1. 1720. 

1713.  aeSelingaivunn.  Cf.  1.  1223,  note.  The  form  wunn  is  late  ;  cf.  Gra7n., 
§  72,  note,  and  see  Ap.  42,  wurd. 

1714.  ofer  seolhpaSu.  Cosijn  rejects  both  -pa?fu  and  -wacJu,  reading  seolh- 
ha&it,  with  Rid.  XI,  1 1  :  ofer  seolhbaho,  on  the  ground  that  pa^  is  masculine ; 
but  cf.  1.  788,  ofer  mearcpacTii. 

1722.  Da!t  is  seSele  cyning.  The  phrase  is  reminiscent  both  of  the  opening 
of  the  Beowulf,  cf.  1.  1 1  :  h<tt  was  god  cyning  (cf.  El.  13'',  he  zvizs  riht  cyning),  and 
of  the  close,  11.  3 179-3 183: 

Swa  begnornodon       Geata  leode 

hlafordes  hryre,       heorfigeneatas ; 

cwJedon  \>'sti  he  wSre       wyruldcyninga, 

manna  mildust       ond  monJivvSrust, 

leodum  liSost       and  lofgeornost. 

Cf.  also  Beow.  1885  :  hat  -wees  an  cyning;  Hy.  Ill,  120:  s^vilc  is  mare  cyningc, 
also  at  the  end  of  the  poem;  Panther  74'':  hat  is  cehele  stetic;  Jul.  224'':  /«•/  is 
S0&  cyning;  and  the  concluding  passage  in  Sat.,  295-298: 

Swa  wuldres  weard       wordum  heriga^ 
J)egnas  ymb  {leoden;       hSr  is  J^rym  micel, 
sang  ffit  selde :       is  sylf  cyning, 
ealra  aldor      in  "Sare  ecan  gesceft. 


THE   FATES   OF  THE  APOSTLES 


I  ff.  For  the  epic  formula,  cf.  An.  i,  note.  Sievers  {PBB.  IX,  134)  points  out 
the  general  similarity  of  the  opening  of  the  Ap.  to  the  opening  of  the  Beo'cu., 
inferring  from  the  genitive  of  1.  8^,  dependent  on  1.  6^  that  the  poet  of  the  Ap. 
read  in  the  parallel  passage  in  the  Beo7u.  a  genitive  eaferan,  1.  19,  and  not  a  nom- 
inative ea/era,  as  the  MS.  reads.  The  poet  again  alludes  to  his  sources  in  11.  23, 
63,  and  70. 

i''.  sTSgeonior.  Brandl  {Archiv  C.  330-334)  understands  this  word  literally, 
'  reisesorgend,'  and  takes  the  poem,  as  a  whole,  as  a  traveler's  charm.  He  com- 
pares it  with  the  charm  printed  in  Bibl.  I,  328-330,  and  supposes  that  the  story  of 
the  fates  of  the  Apostles  was  chosen  as  the  subject  of  the  body  of  the  poem 
because  the  Apostles  had  all  traveled  widely.  He  considers  it,  therefore,  as  an 
independent  poem  which  follows  a  native  literary  tradition.  '  Die  Gattung  der 
Reisesegen  war  eine  altgermanische  ;  wir  finden  sie,  samt  der  dafiir  charakteris- 
tischen  Ausmalung  der  Beschiitzer,  im  Ahd.  und  Altn.  (vgl.  Kogel,  Geschichte  der 
deutschen  Litteratur  I,  2,  158  ff.) ;  Cynewulf  hat  ihr  wohl  nur  einen  hoheren  Ton 
und  christlicheren  Sinn  gegeben  '  (p.  331).  But  Brandl  surely  was  not  acquainted 
with  the  sources  of  the  poem,  or  with  the  type  of  ecclesiastical  composition  to 
which  it  belongs  ;  for  comparison  of  the  poem  with  the  approximate  sources,  and 
with  related  forms,  deprives  his  theory  even  of  its  slight  degree  of  probability. 
—  For  the  meaning  of  faud,  cf.  An.  1485,  note.  K.  connects  1.  2^  with  2^  placing 
a  comma  after  fand ;  but  cf.  the  examples  given  under  An.  1485,  to  which  add 
Soul  133  :  funden  on  ferhSe;    Geii.  266:   ast  his  hige  findan. 

2.  Cf.  G21.  1050  :  ne  beo  \>vl  on  sefan  to  seoc.  —  samnode  wide.  Cf.  Ph.  547  : 
leoS  somnige,  write  wo'Scrsefte. 

3.  Cf.  Beow.  3  :  hu  ^a  jej^elingas  ellen  fremedon  ;  Beow.  2695  ■  ellen  cySan. 
4*.   Cf.  An.  2;   Partridge  lo:  torhte  tireadge. 

5*^.   Cf.  dry /line  gecoren,  Dan.  150,  736;    Gen.  181 8. 

6^.  Cf.  Beow.  18:  blsed  wide  sprang;   ibid.  1588:   hra  wide  sprong;  /ui.  5S5  : 
lead  wide  sprong. 
8'^.  Cf.  An.  3,  note. 
9'^.  Cf.  1.  90  ;  and  Ex.  382,  568  ;  hdlige  /leapas,  of  the  children  of  Israel. 

10.  Cf.  An.  1 194,  and  note. 

11.  Roinebyrig.  Simons  also,  p.  115,  separates  the  elements  of  this  word  ;  but 
the  combinations  Pome-,  Ronia-biirh  are  frequent  in  the  prose;  see  B.-T.,  p.  801, 
for  examples. 

ii''-i5.  Cf.  Me>i.  120-130^: 

Wide  is  geweor'Sod,       swa  I'a-t  wel  gerlst, 
haligra  tid       geond  haileSa  beam 
160 


1 


NOTES    ON    THE    FATES    OF  THE   APOSTLES  16 1 

Petrus  ond  Paulus.       Hwaet!  [a  apostolas, 
)>eoden  holde,       lirowedon  on  Rome 
ofer  midne  siimor       miccle  gewisse 
furSor  fif  nihtum       folcbealo  jreallc, 
maerne  martyrdom.       Ha;fdon  ma;nige  £r 
wundra  geworhte       geond  wKrl-eoda, 
swylce  hi  xfter  jiam       unrim  fremedon 
swutelra  ond  gesynra       }>urh  sunu  meotudes 
ealdor)>egnas. 

11-22.  The  subject  proper  of  the  poem  begins  with  1.  1 1.  There  is  an  evident 
reminiscence  of  the  theme  of  The  Fates  of  tlie  Apostles  \n  Jtt/.  302-311,  in  a  pas- 
sage in  which  Satan  gives  a  list  of  his  evil  deeds : 

NeJ'de  ic  nearobregduni,       )j£er  ic  Neron  bisweac, 

J)Et  he  acwellan  het       Cristas  l^egnas  » 

Petrus  and  Paulus.       Pilatus  Sr 

on  rode  aheng       rodera  waldend 

meotud  meahtigne       minum  larum. 

Swylce  ic  Egias       eac  gelSrde, 

Jiaet  he  unsnytrum       Andreas  het 

ahon  haligne       on  heanne  beam, 

Jiaet  he  of  galgan       his  gSst  onsende 

in  wuldres  wlite. 

A  ME.  version    of  the   whole    subject  is  found   in   Cursor  Mitiidi,  ed.  Morris, 
App.  I,  vol.  Ill,  p.  1587. 

12*.   So  Beo7u.  1641;   2476;  cf.  An.  8. 

13.  J»urg.  See  An.  769'\  note.  —  13''.  Cf.  El.  i  icS  :  )>urh  nearusearwe. 

14''.  Note  the  strong  demonstrative  force  of  se;  cf.  An.  613,  1561. 

15.  Cf.  Ati.  543,  and  note. 

16-22.   Cf.  Men.  215-218^: 

ond  }>aes  embe  seofon  niht       sigedrihtne  leof 
«el>ele  Andreas       up  on  roderum 
his  gast  ageaf,       on  Codes  ware 
fus  on  for'Sweg. 

I7^\  Cf.  An.  135 1''  and  note. 

ig''.  So  Chr.  200;  Fk.  136. 

21^'.  So  An.  1202;  El.  205.    Cf.  An.  1271'',  note. 

22-^.  So  Chr.  573.  —  22''.   So  An.  966. 

23-33='.    C^  J/<?«.  1 1 5*"-!  1 9  : 

f'aenne  wuldres  liegn 
ymb  hreotyne,       Jeodnes  dyrling, 
lohannes  in  geardagan       wearS  acenned, 
tyn  nihtum  eac  :       we  \>z,  tiid  healda'5 
on  midne  sumor      mycles  on  aef>elum. 

24.  »glaawe.  Cf.  An.  802,  forlietan  =  forleton.  —  feSelo  reccan.  John 
was  the  son  of  Zebedee  and  the  brother  of  James  (cf.  Matt.  IV,  21).  K.,  Gn., 
and  W.  have  only  a  comma  after  reccan;  but  the  force  of  se,  1.  25,  is  demon- 
strative rather  than  relative. 


l62    NOTES  ON  THE  FATES  OF  THE  APOSTLES 

25^.  Cf.  All.  262,  885.-25''.  Cf.  Afi.  I626^  note. 

26>'.  Criste  leofast.    S&e/o/ui  XIII,  23;  XIX,  26;   XXI,  7,  20;  and  Introd., 

p.  XXX. 

27".   So  ^/.  72. 

28'^.  See  An.  I46^  note. 

29^.   Cf.  C-^r.  425  :  J'urh  his  modor  hrif. 

3o'\  So ///(/.  237;    Wid.  88;  Ps.  CI,  25. 

31.  Cf.  An.  170. 

32.  Cf.  An.  641  and  note,  and,  for  the  phrase  siSe  gesohts,  An.  S45\  note. — 
32''.  As  a  descriptive  epithet  swegl  usually  occurs  as  the  first  element  in  com- 
pounds (see  Spr.  II,  504).  But  s\vegledreamas,  as  K.  reads,  is  impossible ;  the 
form  should  be  SAvegl-,  or  swegeklreanias.  Swegl  as  adj.  occurs  once,  how- 
ever, beside  the  present  passage,  Beow.  2749 :  swegle  searogimmas. 

33^*,  Cf.  An.  524,  note. 

33''~37^*  James  and  John,  according  to  RIatt.  IV,  21,  were  the  sons  of  Zebedee. 
James  was  put  to  death  by  Herod  {Acts  XII,  1-2).  See  below,  11.  70-74,  note. 
Cf.  Men.  130^-136=': 

paenne  £dre  Gym's 
emb  twa  niht       Jjss  tidlice  us 
lulius  monatS,       on  [lam  lacobus 
ymb  feower  niht       feorh  gesealde, 
ond  twentigum,       trum  in  breostum,    ' 
frod  ond  faestraed       folca  lareow, 
Zebedes  afera. 

34.  Cf.  An.  204,  note. — svveordes  bite.  Cf.  Beo7u.  2060:  nsfter  billes  bite; 
ibid.  2259:  bite  irena ;  /ul.  603:  )>urh  sweordbite. 

37''-4i.  In  the  Menologiiim,  11.  80-82,  Philip  and  James,  brother  of  Jesus,  are 
mentioned  together: 

Swa  \)\  ylcan  daege  aejjele  geferan, 
Philippus  ond  lacob  feorh  agefan, 
modige  magoj^egnas      for  meotudes  liifan. 

40-41.   Cf.  El.  179-180:  on  galgan  wearS  godes  agen  beam  ahangen. 

42''.  ^vu^d.  The  MS.  reading  is  supported  by  An.  1713,  ^vunn.  Cf.  also 
An.  1480. 

43*^.  aldre  gelSdde.  Grein's  suggestion,  genc&de  for  gel^dde,  is  repeated 
by  Simons,  p.  56.  The  construction  is  plainly  influenced  by  the  construction  with 
genc&an,  which  regularly  takes  the  instrumental.  But  the  construction  gelicdan 
with  the  instrumental  probably  resulted  from  the  use  of  gelicdan  in  the  sense  of 
genc&an,  as  in  Gen.  191 1  :  ForiSon  wit  liedan  sculon,  teon  wit  of  {>isse  stowe,  ond 
unc  sta'Solwangas  rumor  secan. 

44'''.  So  Crtcft.  40. 

46''.   So////.  604. 

47.  hyraii.  A  more  appropriate  word  would  be  heriau,  'praise,' parallel  to 
weor'^ian,  1.  48.    Klaeber,  Modern  Philology  II,  146,  makes  the  same  suggestion. 

48".  Cf.  Dan.  208  :  ne  )>ysne  wig  wur'Sigean. 


NOTES    ON    THE    FATES    OF   THE  APOSTLES  163 

5  ■        •-<••--  i-  Sw-ylce  emb  eahta  ond  twelf 

nihtgerimes,       t)a'tte  Nergend  sylf 
Jristhydigum       Thomase  forgeaf 
wis  eaifeSum       ece  rice 
bealdum  beomwigan      bletsunga  his. 

51.  The  phrase  o'Sre  dtvlas  is  apparently  equivalent  to  'the  farther  —  i.e.  the 
eastern  —  parts.'  Kemble  translates  '  So  Thomas  also  boldly  adventured  in  India, 
on  the  other  hand.'  But  o<5re  dielas  probably  represents  the  phrase  a^/  orientaUni 
plagam  of  the  Brez'iarinm,  cf.  Introd.,  p.  xxxi.  The  same  phrase  occurs  in  the  De 
vita  et  obitti  utriusijtte  Tesiametiti  Sanctorum  of  Isidorus  Hispalensis,  quoted  by 
Bourauel,  p.  105:  Thomas  .  .  .  evangelmm  praedicavit  Part/tis  .  .  .  et  Iiidis,  tetiens 
orientalcm  plagam,  ibique  .  .  .  lanceis  traiisfixus  occubuit  in  Calafnia  Indiae  civitate. 

53^.   The  Edd.  have  only  a  comma  after  word. 

55.  awehte.  Cf.  An.  584%  and  B.-T.,  p.  61,  for  examples  of  aweccan  in  the 
sense  of  '  raise  from  the  dead.'   For  the  source  of  this  episode,  see  Introd.,  p.  xxxii. 

58''.  Cf.  An.  1616'^  and  note. 

59''.  Cf.  An.  1531'',  note. 

60^.  B.  and  W.  put  a  semicolon  after  hand. 

ei*".  So  Sat.  141,  253,  449,  617,  650  ;  cf.  Sat.  68  :  drj-htnes  llht ;  Sat.  28  :  swegles 
leoht ;  ^(7/.  85  ;  wuldres  leoman. 

62'^.  sawle.  Other  examples  of  a  nominative  sdzvle  are  Chr.  1327;  Soul  10; 
Aletr.  XX,  162;  cf.  Spr.  II,  162.  —  62^.   So  Beozo.  1021. 

63.  So  El.  364,  670,  852. 

63-69.   The  death  of  Matthew  is  recorded  in  the  Menologucm,  11.  169-173,  as 

^°^'°^^'^  '■  pa;nne  dagena  worn 

ymbe  Jireotyne    ■  t>egn  unforcuS, 
godspelles  gleaw       gast  onsende, 
Matheus  his       to  metodsceafte 
in  ecne  gefean. 

64'''.  Sigel'waruin.  This  name,  which  is  of  frequent  occurrence  as  a  designa- 
tion of  the  Ethiopians  (cf.  B.-T.,  p.  873;  Bourauel,  p.  127;  and  see  An.  432, 
note),  appears  in  the  forms  Sigel-hearwa,  Sil-hearwa,  Sigel-iparas.  The  first 
element  of  the  compound  is  sigel-,  'sun'  (cf.  sigel-hweorfa,  'heliotrope'),  the 
whole  word  meaning  'sun-people.'  The  blackness  of  the  Ethiopians  is  frequently 
mentioned  in  Anglo-Saxon  allusions  to  them,  and  this  would  be  connected  with 
the  idea  of  the  heat  of  the  sun.  See  Ovid,  Met.  II,  235-236  (Kittredge) ;  and 
cf.  also  ^vederburg,  A71.  1697  (and  note),  as  the  epithet  applied  to  the  city  of 
the  Mermedonians,  which  is  placed  by  the  poet  of  the  Andreas  in  Ethiopia.  — 
64''.  Cf.  El.  435  :  gif  '5is  yppe  biS. 

66'.  So  Jul.  378;  leohte  (leohtne)  geleafan,  El.  491,  1137;  Gu.  624,  1084; 
Jul.  653  ;  Metr.  V,  26 ;  Ph.  479.  Cf.  An.  335''  and  note  ;  Ap.  20''.  —  66''.  gefielsod. 
The  same  word  is  used  of  Beowulf  when  he  destroys  Grendel  and  Grendel's 
mother,  Beow.  825,   11 76,  1620. 

esi^.  So  Chr.  620;  El.  685  {eorne). 

69''.  Cf.  An.  72^  note. 


l64  NOTES    ON    THE    FATES    OF  THE   APOSTLES 

70-74.  The  New  Testament  mentions,  besides  James  son  of  Zebedee  (cf. 
above,  11.  33*^-37*),  a  James  son  of  Alpheus  (A/ait.  X,  3;  Ma7-k  III,  18),  and  a 
James  brother  of  Jesus  {Mark  VI,  3).  Whether  or  not  these  two  latter  are  the 
same  person  has  been  a  subject  of  dispute  in  the  church  since  the  second  cen- 
tury (see  Lipsius,  III,  229).  Tradition  has  very  little  to  say  about  James  son  of 
Alpheus,  but  the  legendarj-  histoiy  of  James  brother  of  Jesus,  is  extensive.  He 
was  made  the  first  bishop  of  Jerusalem ;  he  was  thrown  from  a  pinnacle  of  the 
temple  at  Jerusalem  by  the  angry  Jews,  and  was  then  beaten  on  the  head  with 
a  fulling-staff  until  he  was  dead;  see  Lipsius,  III,  241,  and  Bede's  Martyrology. 
fullonis  in  cerebro  perctissiis  fiiste  occiibiiit. 

71*'.  Cf.  An.  1 610''  and  note. 

73.  for  sefestum.    So  An.  610;  El.  496;   Gii.  684;    Gen.  982;  Mod.  37. 

75-84.   Qi.  Men.  189^-193*: 

We  J  a  asfjelingas 
fyrn  gefrunan,       J^set  hy  foremSre, 
Simon  ond  Judas,       symble  wSron 
drihtne  dyre :       for  J)on  hi  dom  hlutan, 
eadigne  upweg. 

77^.  So  An.  641.  —  Thaddeus,  also  called  Lebbaeus  and  Judas  (Jude)  (see 
Matt.  X,  3,  Acts  I,   13),  was  the  brother  of  James. 

78\   So  An.  84S. 

80''.  Cf.  Rid.  LXXII,  13:  weorc  J>ro2i>ade,  appositive  to  earfo&a  dal,  1.  14; 
Becnv.  1721  :  weorc  J^rowade,  appositive  to  leodbealo  longstcm,  1.  1722. 

81^.  Cf.  Gu.  1238:  to  J'am  soban  gefean  sawel  fundaS;  Chr.  451;  saegdon 
soSne  gefean.    See  An.  598*,  note. 

83*.  So  Beow.  733. 

87=^.  Cf.  Craft.  1-3  :  Fela  brS  on  foldan  .  .  .  geongra  geofona  ha  ha  gSstberend 
wega'S  in  gewitte ;  El.  61:  modsorge  wsg  Romwara  cyning ;  ELGi"^:  gnomsorge 
w£Eg;  similarly  Chr.  1577;  Gen.  2238.  Sievers  {PEE.  XIL'ijS)  distinguishes 
between  wegan,  'bear,'  and  wegan,  'oppose,  fight'  (as  in  Eeow.  2400).  "Wegan  = 
W£egon;  cf.  An.  198,  601,  932,  1532,  etc.  —  87''.   Cf.  An.  726^  note. 

88-95.  Cf.  107-122,  and,  for  the  significance  of  this  double  ending,  see 
Introd.,  p.  xlv. 

90.   Cf.  1.  9;  An.  1566. 

91b.  K.  changes  hu  to  nu,  translating  '  Now  I  am  in  need  of  friends  favorable 
on  my  course,  when  I  must  the  long  home,  an  unknown  land,  seek  alone,'  etc. 
Siev.  also  changes  hu  to  nu  and  puts  only  a  comma  after  fultonies ;  Skeat, 
p.  419,  follows  Siev.  in  his  translation  of  the  passage,  nu  =  '  now  that.'  The 
readings  of  Siev.  and  Skeat  make  a  very  cumbersome  and  ill-joined  sentence. 
There  is,  moreover,  no  reason  why  the  MS.  reading  should  be  altered  here.  For 
an  example  of  hu  =  exclamation  '  lo,  behold,'  cf.  A)i.  63,  and  note.  The  com- 
plaint of  loneliness  and  of  the  need  of  friends  at  death  (cf.  1.  iio-^)  occurs  also  in 
the  Vision  of  the  Cross,  131  ff. 

92^.  Cf.  An.  276.  —  92''.  Cf.  Chr.  1464:  Mt  longe  lif,  'eternal  life';  similarly, 
Gu.  1063,  1 281  :  to  ham  longan  gefean  ;  Gii.  91  :  J>d  longan  god  herede  on  heofontim, 
antithetic  to  ^ds  eor/tan  .  .  .  Icene  under  lyfte. 


NOTES  ON  THE  FATES  OF  THE  APOSTLES     165 

94'''.  \V.  retains  the  MS.  reading  liet  (as  also  gesere  in  1.  93,  omitting  sccal  in 
1.  92),  and  accounts  for  the  loss  of  the  inflectional  e  on  the  supposition  that  ie  is 
to  be  understood  as  following  the  verb.  A  second  reason  which  W.  gives,  that 
the  e  was  omitted  in  order  to  enable  the  scribe  to  insert  the  following  me  before 
a  rent  in  the  parchment,  may  be  disregarded,  inasmuch  as  the  rent  follows  the 
me  of  1.  89  and  not  the  me  of  1.  94.  —  94''.  So  Gu.  1340,  appositive  to  bd/t/ius 
dbrocen,  1.  134I;  and  antithetic  to  wtddres  dcel,  1.  1342. 

96-122.  An  exact  copy  of  the  passage  on  f.  54'  is  given  by  Napier,  Ilaupfs 
Zs.  XXXIII,  71-72;  by  Wiilker,  liibl.  II,  566-567,  and  Cod.  Verc,  p.  viii.  As 
Napier's  keener  vision  enabled  him  to  decipher  several  letters  that  were  illegible 
to  Wiilker,  his  readings  are  here  given.  The  copy  reproduces  the  MS.  literally 
Italics  are  used  to  indicate  letters  that  are  somewhat  faded,  but  still,  according  to 
Napier,  plainly  legible ;  italicized  letters  enclosed  in  parentheses  are  either  very 
much  faded  or  only  partly  legible,  so  that  the  reading  is  somewhat  uncertain. 
The  probable  number  of  letters  that  have  been  rendered  entirely  illegible  in  each 
line  is  indicated  by  colons  ;  the  colons  represent  the  greatest  number  of  letters 
that  could  have  stood  in  the  respective  passages  if  the  passages  had  been  occu- 
pied by  single  words ;  if  the  passages  were  occupied  by  several  words  with  the 
usual  spacing  between  them,  the  number  of  letters  would  be  less. 

Her  mjeg  findan  for  hances  ^deaw.  se'Se  //ine  lystcS  leo^  gid  dunga.  Hwa  J'as 
fitte  iegde  Y ■  )>3er  on  ende  standah  eorlas  \>s.%  oneor"San  b{r') :  cah-  Nemoton  hie 
awa  ast  somne  woruld  vixxnigetide  .(^).  sceal  gedreosan  .  p)  .  on  e^Sle  aefter  to{/^) 
:::::::(/):  ^ne  lices  frastewa  efne  swa  .  I^.  to  glide-5.  :  {swa) .  (|— j)  (Ffl  ?).  craeftes 
neotaS.  nihtes  nearowe  on  him.  ::::::::::  ninges  J^eo  dom.  Nv  "Su  cunnon 
miht.  (//):::::::::  (r)^/um  wa^s  weru  on  cySig  Sie  )>aes  ge  myndig  :::::::::: 
(///)fige  )?isses  gal  dres  begang  \>xi  he  geoce  :::::::::  re  fricle  ic  sceall  feor  heo 
nan  an  elles  (/?)  ::::::  rde?,  neosan.'  si5  asettan.  Nat  ic  sylfa  hwjer.  0  :  :  {/)sse 
worulde  wic  sindon  un  cu'5  eard  t  eSel.  Swa  {b)  :  &  aelcii  menn.  nemj^e  he  god 
cundes  gastes  bruce.  {A)h.{u)tvL  we  \>e  geornor  togode  cleopigan  sendan  usse 
be;;e.  on  ha  beorhtan  gesceaft.  Jjset  we  hss  botles  brucan  motan  hames  in  hehSo 
haer  is  hihta  masst  >3er  cyning  engla.  claenum  glide'5.  lean  un  hwilen  nu  ahis  lof 
stande"5  mycel  ~\  maere  t  his  miht  seoma)?  ece  ~\  ed  giong.  ofer  ealle  gesceaft.  finit. 

The  passage,  so  far  as  he  attempted  its  restoration,  is  translated  as  follows 
by  Sievers  {Aitglia  XIII,  10):  'Nun  kann  hier,  wer  da  will,  des  dichters  namen 
finden.  An  dessen  ende  steht  em  feoh.  ly&s  feoh  bedienen  sich  die  menschen 
hier  auf  erden  :  aber  keinem  von  ihnen,  den  weltbewohnern,  ist  es  beschieden,  sein 
ewig  zu  geniessen.  Vergehen  wird  der  wonnigliche  besitz,  das  gut  im  erbsitze, 
und  zerfallen  wird  des  leibes  vergiinglicher  schmuck,  wie  eine  woge  zergleitet. 
Dann  suchen  C  und  Y  nach  kraft  nachts  in  bedrangung  :  aber  iiber  ihnen  steht 
gottes  verhangniss.  Nun  kannst  du  sehen,  wer  in  diesen  worten  den  menschen 
zu  erkennen  war.' 

Trautmann's  translation  {Kyneicitlf,  p.  54)  is  as  follows  : 

Hier  kann  der  denkende  und  vveise  mann, 

der  lust  an  dichtungen  hat,  finden, 

wer  diesen  sang  gefiigt  hat.    Ein  feoii  (der  laut/)  steht  da  am  ende, 


l66    NOTES  ON  THE  FATES  OF  THE  APOSTLES 

Des  FEOH  (besitzes)  geniessen  die  menschen  auf  der  erde ;  doch  keiner  der  weltbewohner 

kann  es  immerfort :  der  reichtum  muss  vergehn, 

das  GUT  im  erbsitze ;  zerfallen  muss  spater 

des  leibes  fliichtiger  schmuck,  gerade  wie  die  woge  zergeht. 

Wenn  sorge  und  leidenschaft  die  kraft  [der  menschen]  verzehren 

in  der  bedrangniss  der  naclit,  legt  ihnen  die  not 

den  dienst  des  herren  auf.    Jetz  kannst  du  wissen, 

wer  in  diesen  worten  den  menschen  zu  erkennen  war. 

Skeat  {English  Miscellatiy,  pp.  418-419)  translates  the  whole  passage  as  follows  ; 
Here  may  one  who  is  skilled  in  penetration  discover, 
one  who  takes  delight  in  poetic  strains, 

who  it  was  that  composed  this  Fit.    Feoh  [wealth]  stands  at  the  end  thereof,! 
which  men  enjoy  while  upon  earth  ;  but  they  cannot  always  be  together 
while  dwelling  in  this  world.     Wynn  [joy]  must  fade. 
Or  [ours]  though  it  be  in  our  home.    So  must  finally  decay 
the  transitory  trappings  of  the  body,  even  as  Lago  [water]  glides  away. 
Then  shall  Cen  [bold  warrior]  and  Yfel  [the  wretched  one]  seek  for  help 
in  the  anxious  watches  of  the  night.    Nyd  [constraint]  lies  upon  him, 
the  service  due  to  the  King.     Now  mayst  thou  discover 
who  in  these  words  has  been  revealed  to  men. 
Let  him  who  loves  the  study  of  this  poem 
be  mindful  of  one  thing,  namely,  to  give  me  help 
and  desire  my  comfort.    I  must  needs,  far  hence, 
all  alone  seek  elsewhere  a  new  habitation, 
and  undertake  a  journey,  I  myself  know  not  whither, 
out  of  this  world.       My  new  chambers  are  unknown, 
my  new  dwelling-place  and  home.       So  will  it  be  for  every  man, 
unless  he  cleave  fast  to  the  divine  Spirit. 
But  let  us  the  more  earnestly  cry  unto  God, 
let  us  send  up  our  petitions  to  the  bright  heaven, 
that  we  may  enjoy  the  habitation, 
the  true  home  on  high,  where  are  the  greatest  of  joys, 
where  the  King  of  angels  grants  to  the  pure 
an  everlasting  reward.       Now  his  praise  shall  endure  forever, 
great  and  all-glorious,  and  his  power  with  it, 
eternal  and  freshly  young,  throughout  all  creation. 

GoUancz  {Cynewulfs  Christ,  p.  183)  translates: 

A  man  of  cunning  thought  may  here  discover, 

if  he  taketh  pleasure  in  song, 
F*       who  wrought  this  lay.     Wealth  cometh  last, 

the  friend  of  man  on  earth,  while  he  dwelleth  in  the  world, 

but  they  cannot  keep  together  always. 
U'  W-  Our  earthly /oj  shall  fade,  and  the  frail  gauds  of  the  flesh 

L"       Shall  afterwards  decay,  even  as  nHitcr  glideth  away. 
C-  Y-   Bold  warrior  and  afflicted  wretch  shall  then  crave  help, 
N  •       in  the  anxious  watches  of  the  night ;  but  Destitty  o'errules, 

the  King  exacts  their  service.       Now  thou  canst  know, 

who  was  revealed  to  men  in  these  words. 

1  I.e.  at  the  end  of  the  name,  viz.  Cynwulf,  which  ends  with  Fcoh  or  F.    (Skeat's  note.) 


NOTES  ON  THE  FATES  OF  THE  APOSTLES    167 

The  three  well-known  passages,  besides  the  present  one,  in  which  Cynewulf 
gives  his  name  in  runic  letters,  are////.  695-710;  El.  1257-1271  ;  and  Chr.  796-806. 
It  has  never  been  questioned  that  these  are  genuine  signatures  of  the  poet,  although 
the  methods  of  interpreting  the  runes  differ  widely.  They  have  been  explained  as 
standing  (i)  merely  for  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  forming  the  name  Cyn(e)wulf ; 
(2)  for  the  names  of  the  runes,  e.g.  Y  (or  F),  feoh  (money) ;  f^  (or  L),  lagu  (water, 
sea),  etc.  But  since  in  certain  passages  the  names  of  the  runes,  e.g.  p|  (or  U),  ur 
(bull),  were  meaningless,  the  runes  have  been  taken  to  stand  (3)  for  words  similar  in 
sound  to  their  names  ;  e.g.  p  (U)  =  iir  (of  old),  ure  (our),  ur  (possession,  wealth) ; 
and  finally,  (4)  for  other  words  beginning  with  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  to  which 
the  runes  respectively  correspond;  e.g.  p)  (U)  =  ufau  (from  above),  unne  (pos-* 
session).  For  a  summary  of  the  discussion  of  the  Cynewulf  runes,  cf.  Trautmann, 
Aynewulf,  pp.  43-70;  a  briefer  summary  is  given  by  Cook,  Christ,  pp.  151-165. 
For  a  general  discussion  of  the  runes  and  runic  inscriptions,  cf.  Wimmer,  Die' 
Runetischrift;  Sievers,  in  Paul's  Griuidriss  I,  238  ff ;  Stephens,  Handbook  of  the 
Old  A'orthern  Runic  Monuments  of  Scandinavia  and  England ;  and  for  further 
bibliography  see  Kahle,  Altisldndisches  Elementarbuch,  pp.  2-3. 

The  order  of  succession  of  the  runes  in  the  other  passages  is  consecutive  :  Jul., 
CYN  EWULF;  Chr.,  C  Y  N  W  U  L  F ;  i?/.,  C  Y  N  E  W  U  L  F.  The  order  in 
the  Ap.  is  as  follows:  F  W  U  L  [C]  [Y]  [N].  The  runes  will  be  considered  in 
their  context  as  they  occur.  It  should  be  observed  that  the  reader  is  not  left 
without  help  in  determining  the  proper  order  of  the  letters  in  Ap.  They  are 
given  in  three  groups,  first  F,  second  W  U  L,  and  third  CYN.  F,  we  are  told, 
stands  at  the  end  (of  the  name).  L.  99*^  may  have  a  twofold  meaning,  dependent 
on  the  double  meaning  of  moton :  (i)  they,  wealth  (feoh)  and  mankind  (eorlas), 
may  not  always  remain  together;  (2)  they,  the  letter  F  and  those  which  follow  it, 
W  and  U,  need  not  or  must  not  stand  together,  that  is,  you  must  separate  the  F 
from  the  W  and  the  U.  Then  'after'  the  U  comes  the  L,  completing  the  second 
group.  The  poet  then  turns  to  his  third  group  (cf.  Donne,  103).  The  order  is 
normal,  first  C  and  Y,  then  '  on '  them  lies  or  follows  (cf.  the  common  use  of  licgan 
in  the  sense  of  'flow')  the  third  letter,  N.  The  first  and  alliterating  syllable  of 
105^  then  unites  these  three  letters  in  the  syllable  cyn-.  Given  the  groups 
C  Y  N,  W  U  L,  and  F,  no  Anglo-Saxon  would  have  felt  any  uncertainty  as  to  how 
they  were  to  be  joined. 

96.  forejjances.  The  MS.  form  forjiancdoes  not  occur  elsewhere  ;  for  fore- 
]7anc,  cf.  El.  356;  Jul.  227  ;  Beow.  1060. 

98''.  Y •  All  commentators  are  agreed  as  to  the  value  and  the  name  of  this 
rune.  It  is  equivalent  to  F  and  its  name  is  feoh,  'money,'  'wealth.'  In  the  pres- 
ent passage  it  has  the  value  both  of  a  letter  and  of  the  word  which  is  its  name  : 
'  F  (or  the  letter  feoh)  stands  at  the  end  (of  the  name) ;  earls  enjoy  it  (i.e.  feoh, 
wealth  or  property)  on  earth.' 

Napier  ends  1.  98  with  ende.  His  next  line  extends  from  stande]?  to  brucaO", 
followed  by  ne  .  .  .  aetsomne,  which  is  made  a  full  line  by  the  insertion  of  eardian 
between  a-wa  and  tetsonine.  By  this  line-division  Napier  gains  one  line  in  the 
numbering  over  Sievers  and  Trautmann,  whose  line-division  is  followed  in  the 
text. 


l68    NOTES  ON  THE  FATES  OF  THE  APOSTLES 

99 .  The  line  as  it  stands  makes  a  good  hypermetric  verse,  and  Napier's  inser- 
tion of  eardian  is  unnecessary.  LI.  98  and  102  are  also  hypermetric  verses;  cf. 
Sievers,  Anglia  XIII,  i. 

99*^-100^.  ne  iiioton.  The  meaning  of  the  verb  is  to  be  completed  by  Avesan, 
understood.  Sievers  (Anglia  XIII,  2)  would  infer  brucan  as  completing  the 
meaning  of  moton,  although  he  points  out  the  possibility  of  the  alternative 
construction,  moton  sc.  wesan.  ^Etsomne  he  understands  in  the  sense  of 
'all,'  as  in  Sat.  41:  haet  we  sceolun  jetsomne  susl  )?rowian  ;  Beow.  2847:  tyne 
astsomne ;  and  cf.  An.  994.  Ne  .  .  .  hie  .  .  .  aetsomne  he  accordingly  translates 
'none,'  'not  a  one.'  No  other  example  of  7ie  .  .  .  crisonifie  occurs.  Traut- 
mann  (Kyttewulf,  p.  54)  follows  Sievers.  Skeat  and  Gollancz  (see  translations 
above)  understand  wesan  as  completing  the  meaning  of  moton.  This  seems  the 
natural  and  unforced  meaning  of  the  passage.  The  subject  of  moton  is  hie,  i.e. 
feoh  and  eorlas;  woruldAvunigende  is  an  appositive  to  hie,  'wealth  and  man- 
kind, these  dwellers  in  the  world,  may  not  always  be  or  remain  together.'  The 
succeeding  lines  maintain  the  parallel:  wealth  shall  pass  away,  then  afterwards 
the  transitory  graces  of  the  body,  i.e.  mankind,  eorlas,  shall  perish. 

100''.  p.  All  editors  agree  in  supplying  the  rune  P  =  W,  in  order  to  obtain 
an  alliterating  letter  in  the  second  half-line.  Sievers  [Anglia  XIII,  3-4),  Cosijn 
(Verslag.  Ill,  VII,  p.  59)  and  Gollancz  {Cynewidf's  Christ,  p.  178)  understand 
the  rune  as  meaning  wyn,  'joy'  (Sievers,  ' wonniglicher  besitz').  Trautmann 
[A'ynewulf,  p.  52)  interprets  it  as  wela,  'riches.'  Wyn,  'joy,'  gives  an  appropriate 
meaning. 

loi.  p)  .  The  commentators  differ  widely  in  their  interpretation  of  this  rune, 
but  the  most  reasonable  explanation  of  it  is  that  it  stands  for  the  letter  U  and 
for  the  poss.  pronoun  ur,  referring  back  to  Avyn.  The  proper  name  of  the  rune 
in  the  runic  alphabet  is  fir  =  the  !i?-!ts,  a  species  of  wild  ox ;  cf.  the  description 
in  the  Runic  Poem  4-6  {Bibl.  I,  331) : 

n  (ur)  byl>  anmod  and  oferhyrned, 
fela-frecne  deor,  feohte))  mid  homum 
meere  morstapa :  J>set  is  modig  wuht. 

The  meaning  '■nriis,''  however,  is  appropriate  to  none  of  the  Cynewulf  passages. 
The  following  substitutions  have  been  proposed  for  the  passage  in  the  Ap.  Cosijn 
(Verslag.  Ill,  VII,  p.  59)  substitutes  iir  =  'our,'  the  possessive  pronoun,  noting 
(p.  57)  that  iir,  instead  of  ure,  is  a  form  of  the  possessive  pronoun  in  the  Ves- 
pasian Psalter.  Gollancz  (Cynewulf^s  Christ,  pp.  181-182)  follows  Cosijn,  adding 
the  evidence  '  that  in  a  runic  alphabet  {Domitian,  A,  g)  the  rune  is  actually  glossed 
^^  noster."  '  The  alphabet  is  printed  in  Hickes,  Thesaiirns  I,  136.  Sievers  [Anglia, 
XIII,  7)  understands  ur  as  a  synonym  of  feoh,  strengthening  his  position  by  the 
citation  of  Chr.  806  ff.  :  ur  waes  longe  laguflodum  bilocen,  Hfwynna  dSl,  feoh  on 
foldan  ;  and  El.  1266  ff.  :  ur  waes  geara,  geoguShades  gl5m  :  nu  synt  geardagas  .  .  . 
forS  gewitene,  lifwynne  geliden.  His  translation  is  '  das  gut.'  In  both  the  above 
passages,  however,  the  word  is  represented  by  the  rune  ;  no  example  of  ilr, '  wealth,' 
as  an  Anglo-Saxon  word,  is  known.  Trautmann  [Kynewiilf,  p.  52)  rejects  the 
reading  of  Cosijn  and  Gollancz  on  the  ground  that  the  runes  never  stand  for  other 
parts  of  speech  than  nouns.  He  suggests  unne,  '  permission,'  '  what  is  granted,' 
'  grant,'   extending   (without  sufficient  authority)   the   meaning  of   the  word  to 


NOTES    ON    THE    FATES    OF  THE   APOSTLES  169 

'possessions,'  'property,'  'die  habe ' ;  Sievers's  reading  he  rejects  on  the  ground 
that  the  existence  of  ur  =  '  weahh '  as  an  Anglo-Saxon  word  cannot  be  proved. 
To  Trautmann's  substitution  iinne  as  an  appositive  to  ^vyn  and  feoh  we  may  make 
the  same  objection  that  he  makes  to  Sievers's  ur,  —  the  word  does  not  occur;  to 
his  statement  that  the  runes  never  stand  for  any  words  except  nouns  the  gloss 
cited  by  GoUancz  is  a  sufficient  answer.  The  interpretation  of  Cosijn  and  Gollancz 
is  altogether  the  most  reasonable.  —  loi''.  tohreosan.  Sievers  {^Anglia  XIII,  7) 
notes  that  the  rime  with  gedreosan  confirms  the  restoration  tohreosan,  rather 
than  Napier's  tdhreosaJ>,  observing  also  that  the  infinitive  here  gives  a  smoother 
sentence-structure. 

102''.  r.  The  equivalent  of  this  rune  is  L.  All  commentators  agree  in  the  sub- 
stitution of  lagu  =  'water,  wave,  sea,'  as  its  name.  The  half-line  occurs  again, 
also  with  the  rune,  in  El.  1268''. 

103.  The  first  half-fine  is  almost  illegible  in  the  MS.  Napier  (p.  71)  says:  '  Das 
s%\'a  selbst  ist  sehr  undeutlich  und  ich  bin  keineswegs  sicher,  richtig  gelesen  zu 
haben.  Darauf  folgt  ein  punct  und  hinter  diesem  glaube  ich  das  runenzeichen 
h  erkennen  zu  konnen.  Dahinter  sind  undeutliche  spuren  eines  zweiten  runen- 
zeichens  sichtbar,  die  darauf  schliessen  lassen,  dass  It>i  hier  gestanden  habe  :  es  sind 
dies  ein  7.V  mm.  langer  senkrechter  strich,  ein  3  mm.  langer  querstrich,  der  mit 
dem  oberen  ende  des  ersten  einen  winkel  von  ca.  57°  bildet,  und  ausserdem  vier 
kleine  puncte.  Zwischen  den  beiden  runenzeichen  ist  raum  fiir  einen  buchstaben 
(etwa  ■]),  es  braucht  aber  keiner  da  gestanden  zu  haben.'  Sievers  (p.  9)  doubts  the 
reading  s^va ;  if  it  is  to  be  accepted  he  thinks  the  abbreviation  for  ond  must  have 
stood  before  it.  Better  than  swa,  however,  as  he  points  out,  is  the  reading  pon 
=  ]7onne,  as  in  Chr.  797  and////.  705.  Gollancz,  p.  176,  and  Trautmann,  p.  50, 
follow  Sievers's  second  reading. 

All  agree  in  the  insertion  of  the  two  runes  in  the  first  half-line ;  the  alliteration 
demands  the  rune  h  =  C ;  the  equivalent  letter  of  the  second  rune  is  Y.  As  to 
the  interpretation  of  the  two  runes  there  is  wide  divergence  of  opinion.  It  is 
evident  that  1.  103-^  must  have  contained  the  subject  of  the  verb  neosa<5,  and  it 
is  probable  that  the  runes  in  this  half-line  stand  for  nouns  which  could  fulfill  that 
function.  These  nouns  would  naturally  be  parallel  to  eorlas,  99,  and  woruld- 
■wunigende,  100.  The  most  plausible  interpretation  is  that  the  runes  stand  for 
cene,  '  bold,'  and  yfel,  'wretched,'  adjectives  used  as  nouns. 

Napier  does  not  attempt  the  restoration  of  this  and  the  following  fine.  Sievers 
(p.  10)  says  :  '  Mit  C  und  Y  weiss  sich  nichts  anzufangen  :  sie  werden  bloss  die 
geltung  von  buchstabennamen  haben,  welche  hier  die  zu  fordernden  subjecte 
("  sie  "  =  "  die  menschen  ")  andeuten.'  According  to  Gollancz  (p.  1 78), '  the  words 
represented  by  the  C-Rune  and  the  Y-Rune,  which  are  co-ordinated,  must  evidently 
be  the  same  part  of  speech  ;  if  C  =  cene,  "the  bold  warrior,"  in  the  same  sense  as 
in  the  other  passages  [i.e.  the  other  runic  signatures  of  Cynewulf],  one  would 
expect  Y  to  stand  for  an  adjective  or  substantive,  in  any  case  of  masculine  gender; 
but  in  passage  A  \^Chr.  796-806]  the  Y-Rune  is  co-ordinated  with  the  N-Rune; 
concerning  the  meaning  of  this  latter  rune  there  is  no  doubt ;  it  represents  the 
abstract  noun  nyd,  "  necessity  "  ;  therefore  the  Y-Rune  in  this  latter  passage  must, 
I  think,  stand  for  some  similar  abstract  noun.  Judging  by  A  [i.e.  Chrisf\  and 
C  [C  =  the  present  passage],  the  Y-Rune  represents  a  j-word  that  can  discharge 


170    NOTES  ON  THE  FATES  OF  THE  APOSTLES 

the  two-fold  functions  of  a  masculine  adjective  (or  noun)  and  of  an  abstract 
noun.  The  only  Anglo-Saxon  word  that  satisfies  these  requirements  is  j'fel  = 
(i)  "wretched";  (2)  "affliction";  and  there  is,  I  venture  to  think,  strong  reason 
for  favoring  this  interpretation  of  the  Y-Rune  in  the  three  passages.  In  passage' 
A,  yfel  and  11yd  =  "affliction  and  distress";  in  passage  B  \^El.  1257-1271],^^^/ 
gnornode  nydgefera  =  "  afflicted,  mourned  the  companion  of  sorrow "  ;  in  pas- 
sage C,  cene  and  yfel  =  "  the  bold  warrior  and  the  afflicted  wretch."  '  Trautmann 
(p.  53)  differs,  from  both  Sievers  and  Gollancz :  'Da  ihnen  [i.e.  the  two  runes] 
das  selbe  praedicat  gemein  ist,  werden  sie  doch  wohl  ahnlichen  sinn  haben ;  und 
da  von  ihnen  ausgesagt  wird  craeftes  neotaS  nihtes  nearwe,  "sie  verzehren  die 
kraft  in  der  bangigkeit  der  nacht,"  so  miissen  sie  doch  wohl  so  etwas  wie  "  angst, 
sorge,  gram,  leidenschaft,  not,"  bedeuten.  Da  ergeben  sich  denn  sofort  cearu, 
"sorge,  kummer,"  und  yst,  "leidenschaft,"  als  die  mit  C  und  Y  gemeinten  worte.' 
To  this  it  may  be  answered  that  the  words  represented  by  the  runes  need  not  be 
synonyms,  but  may  be,  as  Gollancz  suggests,  antithetic ;  and  second,  that  Traut- 
mann's  interpretation  depends  upon  an  impossible  meaning  for  neotaS,  see  103'', 
note.  Unless  one  prefers,  with  Sievers,  to  regard  the  runes  as  standing  for  letters 
only,  and  not  words,  the  explanation  of  Gollancz  is  to  be  accepted.  The  chief 
difficulty  in  the  way  is  the  meaning  assigned  to  j'fel.  The  meaning  'bold  (war- 
rior) '  for  cene  is  a  probable  one  and  finds  numerous  parallels ;  see  Glossary. 
But  yfel,  usually  'wicked,'  but  also  'miserable,'  is  not  used,  like  cene,  as  an 
adjective  noun;  neither  is  the  antithesis  between  'bold'  and  'wretched'  quite 
a  perfect  one.  Nevertheless  it  must  be  remembered  that  this  runic  passage  is 
somewhat  of  the  nature  of  a  riddle,  that  the  language  of  riddles  is  not  always 
unconstrained  and  natural,  and  that  the  number  of  j'-words  which  the  poet  had  to 
choose  from  was  a  very  limited  one.  —  neosa'd.  The  MS.  reads  plainly  neota?f. 
Trautmann  (p.  53)  retains  the  MS.  reading,  extending  the  meaning  of  iieotan  — 
'  use,'  '  enjoy,'  to  the  meaning  '  consume,'  '  devour,'  '  verzehren.'  For  this,  how- 
ever, there  is  no  authority.  Sievers  (pp.  8-9),  Gollancz  (p.  176),  and  Skeat  (see 
translation  above)  change  to  neosaS,  'inquire  for,'  'search  out,'  'seek.'  Sievers 
cites  the  parallel  in  An.  484  ;  his  translation  of  the  passage  is  as  follows  :  '  Wenn 
so  alles  dahingeht,  dann  suchen  C  und  Y  nach  craeft  (einen  rettenden  ausweg, 
oder  schiitzende  starke?)  in  angstvoller  bedrangniss:  (aber  vergebens),  denn  iiber 
ihnen  steht  ihres  herren  ehernes  verhangniss.' 

104.  nihtes  nearowe.  Plainly  an  adverbial  phrase  limiting  the  idea  contained 
in  neosatJ.  The  phrase  occurs  twice  elsewhere  in  similar  construction  :  El.  123S- 
1 239  :  gek,anc  reodode  nihtes  nearwe,  in  the  personal  epilogue  of  that  poem ; 
and  Gu.  I181-1183:  geotnor  sefa  gekj^a  gemanode  .  .  .  nihtes  nea7-we.  —  All  agree 
in  the  insertion  of  the  rune  "f  =  N,  which  is  demanded  by  the  alliteration.  Its 
equivalent  word  is  nied,  nyd,  'fate,'  'necessity,'  an  appositive  to  peodom,  105. 
This  is  the  interpretation  of  Sievers  (p.  7),  Gollancz,  and  Skeat.  Trautmann  (p.  54) 
understands  nyd  in  the  sense  of  'distress'  and  J>eodoni  in  the  sense  of  'service,' 
the  former  being  nominative  case  and  the  latter  accusative ;  instead  of  ligeti  he 
also  reads  legeS.  He  translates  'auf  sie  [die  menschen]  legt  die  not  den  dienst  des 
herren,  d.i.  die  not  fiihrt  die  menschen  zu  gott.'  The  other  reading,  however,  pre- 
serves the  sequence  of  thought  much  better.    All  agree  in  the  restoration  cyninges. 


NOTES    ON    THE    FATES    OF  THE   APOSTLES  171 

Napier  (p.  72)  suggests  the  possibility  tliat  two  runes  are  to  be  supplied  in  1.  104'', 
•f  =  N  and  f*^  =  E.  There  appears,  however,  to  be  hardly  sufficient  space  in  the 
obliterated  part  of  the  MS.  for  this  second  rune,  |^.  In  the  runic  signature  to 
the  Chr.,  also,  Cynewulf  spells  his  name  without  the  e.  Sievers  (p.  11)  points  out 
that  the  fuller  form  Cyne-  is  relatively  the  earlier  of  the  two,  and  that  syncopation 
of  e  takes  place  in  proper  names  before  /,  r,  w,  and  h,  although  examples  of  the 
full  form  Cync-  are  found  throughout  the  whole  Anglo-Saxon  period.  '  Auf  alle 
Falle  ist  die  Namensform  Cynvviilf  als  gut  Ags.  fiir  das  8.  Jahrhundert  bezeugt, 
und  man  braucht  also  auch  von  dieser  Seite  her  an  dem  Schwanken  Cynewulf's 
in  der  Wiedergabe  seines  Namens  keinen  Anstoss  zu  nehmen.  Leider  lasst  sich 
weder  die  Entstehungszeit  noch  das  Verbreitungsgebiet  der  Form  Cyn-  genauer 
bestimmen.  Belegt  ist  sie  fiir  Northumbrien,  Mercia,  und  Kent ;  dem  rein- 
Sachsischen  scheint  sie  dagegen  bis  auf  das  stereotype  Cynric  fremd  zu  sein.' 

106''.  oncySig.  '  Revealed,  made  known.'  A  word  uncy&ig  occurs  El.  960,* 
in  the  sense  'ignorant,  unknowing'  (although  Cosijn  Verslag.,  p.  59,  would 
give  it  the  opposite  meaning),  and  in  Gu.  1199,  where  it  means  'lacking,  want- 
ing,' in  the  phrase  elnes  iiiicy&ig.  In  El.  724  the  form  oncy&ig  occurs  in  the 
same  phrase  as  Gii.  11 99.  OnoySig  in  the  sense  'revealed,  manifest,'  does 
not  occur  elsewhere ;  but  cf.  V^esp.  Psalter  XXIV,  7,  unondcy& ignis,  translating 
ignorantia.  Napier  translates  'jetzt  kannst  du  wissen,  wer  durch  diese  (die  vor- 
hergehenden)  worte  den  menschen  bekannt  gemacht  werden  sollte.'  So  also 
Sievers,  Skeat,  and  Gollancz. 

107-122.  Cf.  11.  88-95,  ^''"i'  ^°''  ^^  similarity  of  these  endings  to  the  concluding 
paragraphs  of  sermons,  see  An.  1686,  note. 

107^.   For  the  restoration,  cf.  88^. 

no.  an  elles  forS.  The  idea  of  loneliness  at  the  last  day  is  dwelt  on  also  in 
the  Vision  of  the  Cross,  122-146.  Elles  for?f,  parallel  to  elles  Inv^r,  hwergeii, 
hiotder,  does  not  occur  elsewhere. 

III.  sT<$  asettan.  See  An.  1704,  and  Spr.  I,  41,  for  other  examples  of  this 
phrase. 

.115.  utu.  For  the  contracted  form,  see  Gram.,  §  360,  2.  Napier  restores  Ah 
before  utu. 

116.  on  ]7a  beorhtan  gesceaft.  'Into  heaven.'  So  El.  1088;  cf.,  with  the 
same  meaning,  El.  1031  :  Jnirh  }>a  halgan  gesceaft;  Jul.  728:  J>urh  \>a.  scTran 
gesceaft.    Cf.  also  1.  122''. 

118.  hihta  luiest.  Cf.  Wulfstan,  ed.  Napier,  p.  139,  1.  25:  and  "Sonne  mot 
habban  heofonan  rice,  ^aet  is  hihta  mSst ;  El.  196-197:  waes  him  frofra  mast 
ond  hyht[a]  nihst  (perhaps  to  be  read  hyhst);  Gu.  34:  hyhta  hyhst ;  Ily.  VI, 
252  {Bibl.  II,  269)  :  heofonan  rice,  bajt  is  hihta  mSst. 

121.  seouiaj?.  The  word  as  a  verb,  'await,'  'endure,'  parallel  to  standeTF, 
1.  120,  gives  a  satisfactory  meaning  here;  cf.  An.  183;  Jul.  709:  seoma'S  sorg- 
cearig ;  El.  694 :  siomode  in  sorgum.  Sievers  (p.  23)  changes  to  sotna&, '  together,' 
'  together  with,'  remarking,  '  die  form  somo&  statt  des  sonst  iiblichen  soniod, 
samod,  ist  northumbrisch :  some&,  A'ns/mi.  A/are  XV,  41.  Das  verbum  scotna& 
gibt  keinen  befriedigenden  sinn.'    Skeat  in  his  translation  follows  Sievers. 

122''.  Cf.  F/i.  607-608:  )'2er  se  longa  gefea,  ece  and  edgeong,  Sfre  ne  swe'SraS. 

f       "^       0<^    THF  ^ 


GLOSSARY     * 

TO 

ANDREAS  AND  THE  FATES  OF  THE  APOSTLES 


The  vowel  ce  is  treated  as  equivalent  in  rank  to  a  ;  initial  'S  follows  t ;  the  order  otherwise  is 
alphabetic.  Arabic  numerals  indicate  the  classes  of  the  ablaut  verbs  according  to  Sievers'  classifica- 
tion ;  Wi,  etc.,  the  classes  of  the  weak  verbs  ;  R  the  reduplicating,  PP  the  preteritive-present  verbs. 
When  the  designations  of  mood  and  tense  are  omitted,  ind.  pres.  is  to  be  supplied ;  when  of  mood 
only,  supply  ind.  if  no  other  has  immediately  preceded,  otherwise  the  latter.  When  a  reference  or 
group  of  references  is  given  without  grammatical  indication,  the  description  of  the  preceding  form 
is  to  be  understood.  Optatives  are  so  classified  only  when  the  forms  are  distinctive  for  that  mood. 
The  citations  are  intended  to  be  complete,  e.vcept  for  the  commonest  forms  of  the  pronouns  and  for 
the  conjunctions  and  adverbs  ond,  tie,  ne,  and  &a.   References  are  to  Andreas  unless  Ap.  is  prefixed. 


a,  adv.  I.  ez'er,  akuays:  64,  541,  959, 
1 193,  1267,  1379,  1384,  Ap.  120.— 
2.  ever^at  any  time:  203,569.  —  3.  ne 
.  .  .  a,  by  no  means,  not:   1467. 

«,  f.,  Ia2v:  ns.  1644;  as.  1403,  151 1, 
Ap.  10;  a  1 194. 

abeodan,  2,  a?inounce,  declare,  com- 
mand: pret.  3  sg.  abead  96 ;  pp. 
aboden  231. 

aberan,  4,  endure :  imp.  2  sg.  aber  956. 

ablendan,  \\\,  blind:  pp.  ablended  78. 

Abraham,  pr.  n.,  Abraham  :  as.  Ha- 
braham  793 ;  ds.  Abrahame  753, 
Habvahame  756,  779. 

abrecan,  5,  break,  crush  :  inf.  1 50  ;  pp. 
abrocen  1240. 

abregdan,  3,  remove,  carry  away :  pret. 
3  pi.  abrugdon  865. 

abreotan,  2,  destroy  :  pret.  3  pi.  abreo- 
ton  51. 

ac,  conj.,  but:  38,  634,  637,  736,  1476, 
Ap.  19,  34,  ah  23,  232,  281,  569, 
1083,1209,  1670,  1703,  Ap.  115,  ach 
1592. 

acennan,  Wl,  bear,  bring  forth:  pp. 
acenned  566,  685. 


ach,  see  ac. 

Achaia,  pr.  n.,  Achaia  :  ds.  Achaia  169, 

927,  Achagia  Ap.  16  ;  as.  Achaie  1700. 
acl^ccraeft,  m.,  magic  power :  dp.  ac-  » 

lieccraeftum  1362. 
aclian,  see  geaclian. 
acol,  adj.,  terrified:   nsm.   1266;  npm. 

acle  1339. 
acolniod,   adj.,  terrified:    nsm.    1595; 

npm.  acolmode  377. 
acsigan,  W2,  aV/«a«</:  inf.   11 34.     See 

geascian. 
tedre,    adv.,    immediately,   forthwith  : 

no,  189,803,  936;  edre  401,643,950. 
adreogan,  2.     i.  practice,  show  forth: 

pret.  3  sg.  adreg    164.  —  2.  endure, 

suffer :  pret.  i  sg.  adreah  969 ;  pret. 

3  sg.    i486,    adreag    1482;    inf.  369; 

ger.  adreoganne  73. 
adreopan,  2,  flo'iu,  drip  :  pp.  adropen 

1425. 
afseran,  Wl,  affright,  terrify;  pp.  npm. 

afierde  1340. 
afedan,  Wl.    i.feed:  pret.  3  sg.  afedde 

589.  —  2.   rear,  bring  up  :  pp.  afeded 

684. 
Sfen,  n..  ez'ening:  ns.  1245. 


174 


GLOSSARY 


aferian,  Wl,  lead  oiit:  pret.  3  sg. 
aferede   11 77. 

8efe.st,fn.,//<^?/6',  dissension:  dp.  aifestum 
Ap.  73,  sefstum  610. 

sefre,  adv.,  ever,  at  any  time  :  360,  493, 
499.  553'  1012,  1057. 

afrefraii,  Wl,  co??i/o?t,  console:  pp. 
afrefred  638. 

aefter,  prep.  -vi.  dat.  i.  after:  37,  78, 
88,  133,  156,  229,  468,  593,  600,  620, 
761,  1026,  1219,  1483,  1527,  1568, 
15S5,  1621,  1712,  Ap.  22,  82.— 
2.  through,  throughout,  over:  335, 
581,  1232,  1237,  1426.  —  3.  according 
to:   1447,    1695. 

aefter,  adv.  i.  afterward,  then:  124, 
182,  738,  904,  1228,  Ap.  ioi. — 
2.  after,  from  behind:   171 2. 

afyrhtan,  ■Wl./^vV/^/'^w:  pp.  afyrhted 
1529. 

agan,  PP.,  oran,  fossess :  3  sg.  ah  51 8. 

agan,  anv.,  pass:  pp.  agan  147. 

agen,  adj.,  070/1 :  asm.  agenne  339. 

agend,m.,  Lord:  ns.  210;  as.  760,  1 715. 
See  doniagende. 

ageotan,  2.  i.  shed,  pour  out:  pret. 
3  sg.  aget  1449.  —  2.  besprinkle: 
pret.  3  sg.  aget  1441. 

agetan,  "Wl,  injure,  destroy:  pret.  3  pi. 
agetton  32  ;  inf.  1 143. 

Eegflota,  m.,  ship  :  is.  Sgflotan  258. 

ieghwa,  pron.,  every  one :  dsm.  Sg- 
hwam  320. 

segh-waetJer,  pron.,  each:  nsm.  1015, 
aegtier  1051. 

aighwylc,  pron.,  every  one  :  gsm.  xg- 
hwylces  508  ;  dsm.  Sghwylcum  350  ; 
asm.  Ecghwylcne  26. 

agifan,  b.  i.  give,  entrust:  pret.  3  sg. 
agef  189,  285,  572,  617,  628,  643,  1184, 
1345'  1375;  pret.  3  P^-  agef  an  401-, 
pp.  agifen  296  ;  inf.  1416.  —  2.  depart 
from  :  pret.  3  sg.  ageaf  1578. 

Seglaeca,  m.  i,  warrior, foe:  ns.  1312; 
np.  Sglascan  1131.  — 2.  viagician: 
ds.  «glScan  1359.     .S'.^i-  acla'ccra'ft. 


ajgleaw,  adj.,  learned  in  the  law  :  comp. 
nsm.  ieglSwra  1483;  apm.  jeglieawe 

Ap.  24. 
agrafan,  6,    engrave,    carve :    pp.  apn. 

agraefene  712. 
JegSer,  see  iegh^vseSer. 
ah,  see  ac. 
ahebban,  6,  raise :  pret.  3  sg.  ahof  344, 

416,  521,  561,  674,  1322,  1497. 
iihleapaii,   R,   leap,   run :   pret.   3   sg. 

ahleop    736 ;    pret.    3    pi.     ahleopon 

1202. 
ahliehhan,  6,  laugh,  rejoice  :  pret.  3  sg. 

ahloh  454. 
ahon,  R,  crucify:  pp.  ahangen  Ap.  41. 
aeht,  f.,  council:  as.  410,  608. 
{L'ht,  f.,  possession,  pozuer  of  possession  : 
___  ns.  1 7 18. 
aihtgeweald,  n., pozoer,  possession:  as. 

I  no. 
teht"wela,  m.,  riches :  ap.  Shtwelan  Ap. 

84. 
ahweorfan,  3,  turn  :  inf.  957. 
ah\vettan,  Wl.     i.  ir-vtv/^  :  inf.  303. — 

2.  satisfy,  supply?  i  sg.^hwette  339. 
aluetan,  R,  give  up :  pret.  3  pi.  aleton 

1629. 
Albanum,  pr.  n.,  Albania  :  ds.  Albano 

Ap.  45. 
tele,   pron.,    every,   each  :    dsm.   Slcum 

1534,  Ap.   I  [3. 
aldor,  m.,  leader,  prince  :  ns.  708,  913  ; 

as.  55'  354'  806;  vs.  70. 
aldor,  see  ealdor. 
a^led,  m.,fre  :  ns.  1550. 
aelfaile,  adj.,  baleful:  nsn.  770. 
alicgan,  h,fail:  pret.  3  sg.  alaeg  3. 
aelnilhtlg,    adj.,    almighty,    the    Lord: 

nsm.     249,     365,     445,     1376,     1504, 

aslmihti  260,    relmihtiga   1190;    vsm. 

aelmihtig  76,  902,  1287. 
.iElniyrcan,    pr.    n.,    Ethiopians:    gp 

TElmyrcna  432. 
selwihte,  see  eallwilite. 
alysan,  Wl.      i.   redeem,  release:   i  sg. 

alyse    100;    3    sg.    alyselS    112;    opt. 


GLOSSARY 


175 


pres.  3  sg.  alyse  1373  ;  opt.  pres.  i  pi. 
alysan  1 564  ;  pp.  alysed  1 1 49  ;  inf. 
944.  —  2.  tear  off:  pp.  alysed  1472. 

amearcian,  Wa.  i.  set  boundaries  to: 
pret.  3  sg.  amearcode  750.  —  7..  de- 
lineate :  pp.  amearcod  724. 

an, num.  i.  one,  certain  one:  nf^vc^.T^zd, 
703,  1555,  171 7,  Ap.  79;  gsm.  anes 
327,  483,  1040;  gsf.  anre  475;  asm. 
anne  1495,  1^47'  Sine  1104;  asf. 
ane  1091;  gp.  anra  933,  1283. — 
2.  'alone:  nsm.  an  Ap.  no;  ana  68, 
636,  1007,  Ap.  93;  gsm.  anes  525; 
dsm.  anum  81,  1320;  asf.  ane  1591. 
—  3.  iini(/ne,  admirable :  ism.  ane  258. 
See  ane,  anforl^tan. 

and,  see  ond. 

anA^it,  \\.,  meaning,  purport :  as.   509. 

Andreas,  pr.  n.,  Andre^u:  nom.  Andreas 
169,  189,  270,  285,  299,  315,  352,  383, 
572,  617,  628,  643,  818,  1020,  1058, 
1 1 84,  1 1 99,  1375,  Ap.  16;  voc.  203, 
859,914,950,  1208,  13 16,  1362;  ace. 
no,  379,  1 1 75;  gen.  1692;  dat.  An- 
drea 1 135,  1569. 

andswaru,  ands^^^arian,  andsvrer- 
ian,  see  onds^va^u  etc. 

andu'eard,  adj.,  present:  asm.  and- 
weardne  1224  ;  apm.  andweard  783. 

ane,  adv.,  once  :  492. 

anforlietan,  "R,  forsake,  abajidon  :  pret. 
2  sg.  an  ne  forliete  1454;  inf.  1287, 
1642,  1669. 

anhaga,  m.,  riff/z/j-t' :  ds.  anhagan  1351. 

eenig,  adj.  pron.,  any:  nsm.  15,  377; 
nsn.  1439;  gsm.  Sniges  199,  Ap.  19; 
dsm.  aengum  17S;  asm.  Snigne  493, 
517,  1081  ;  asf.  Snige  1521  ;  dpm. 
snigum  888. 

seninga,  adv.,  suddenly,  straightioay : 
220,  1141,  1370,  aninga  1392. 

anlicnes,  f.,  image,  statue:  ns.  717,  on- 
llcnes  731  ;  ap.  anllcnesse  713. 

anniod,  see  onmod. 

anniod,  adj.,  unanimous  :  np.  anmode 
1565,  1601. 


anrivd,  adj.,  resolute:  nsm.  232,  983. 
apostolhad,   m.,  aposlleship:    ns.    A  p. 

14;  as.  1 65 1.  {y.2X.  apostolus. "[ 
iir,  m.,  messenger,  attendant ;  ns.  1647  i 

as.  1604,  1679 ;  np. aras  298 ;  ap.  400, 

829?. 
ar,  f.,  favor,  mercy  :    ns.  979 ;  ds.  are 

76  ;  as.  are  11 29. 
ser,  adv.,  before:    188,  695,  949,   1070, 

1266,   1274,    1341,    1449,   1476,   1615, 

1624,  1628;  sup.  ^rest,  frst,  at  frst : 

12,  132,  756,  1020,  1 100.    See  Sr  J»an. 
ser,  con].,  before :   1050,  1354,  1439. 
arsefnan,  Wl,  endure  :  inf.  816. 
ar^ran,  Wl,  set  tip,  establish  :  pret.  2 

sg.  arserdest   13 18;  pp.  arSred  967, 

1645. 
Srdaeg,  m.,  early  part  of  the  day  :  ds. 

Srdasge  220,  235,  1388,  1525. 
areccan,  Wl,  recount:  inf.  546. 
jeren,  adj.,  of  brass :  ^sm.  serenne  1062. 
airende,  n.,  errand,   message:  ns.  230, 

1620;  gs.  jerendes  215;  ap.  serendu 

776. 
Eerest,  f.,  resurrection  :  as.  780. 
wrest,  see  aer. 

argeblond,  n.,  sea  :  as.  383. 
terge%veorc,n. ,(?««>«/  %vork :  np.  1235. 
arisan,  l.      i.  arise,  pret.    3   sg.    aras 

450,    695,    ion,    1236,    1303,    1469; 

imp.  2  sg.  arls  936.  —  2.   rise  {from 

the  dead):  pret.  3  sg.  aras  1634,  AP. 

56;  inf.  1623.  [Cf.  «rest.] 
arleas,  adj.,    impious :    npm.  arleasan 

_  559- 

aer  ]?an,  conj.,  before:   1031. 

ar-vvela,  m.,  sea  :  as.  arwelan  853. 

ary?f,  f.,  wave:  gp.  arySa  532. 

sesc,  m.,  spear  :  ip.  asscura  1097. 

aeseberend,  m.,  spear-bearer,  warrior  : 

np.  47,  1076,  1537. 
ascian,  see  geascian. 
asettan,  Wl.    1.  place,    transfer:   pp. 

aseted  208.  —  2.  with  siS,  to  make  a 

journey  :  pret.  3  sg.  asette  1 704 ;  inf. 

Ap.  hi. 


176 


GLOSSARY 


aspedan,  Wi,  w.  dat.,  survive,  escape 

from:  pp.  npm.  aspedde  163 1. 
Asseas,  pr.  n.,   Asiatics :    dp.   Asseum 

Ap.  38. 
astandan,    6.      i.  arise:    pret.    3    sg. 

astod  443.  —  2.   rise  from  the  dead: 

pret.  3  pi.  astodon  1625;  inf.  792. 
astigan,  l,  rise  up  :    pret.  3  sg.   astag 

708,  astah  1 125. 
Astrias,  pr.  n.,  Astrages  :  ns.  Ap.  45. 
asundrian,    Wa,    separate :    pp.    asun- 

drad  1243. 
aswebban,  Wl,  kill:  opt.  3  pi.  asweb- 

ban  72  ;  inf.  Ap.  69. 
aet,  prep.  w.  dat.    i ,  at,  iti  (titne,  place 

and  circutnstafice):  221,  403,  412,  414, 

553.   797,    13-5.    ^33°^    i353.    135^, 

1436, 1658, 1709, 1710,  Ap.  59.  —  2.  of 

from   {joiih  verbs  of  receiving):  90S, 

1 130. 
£et,  m.,food:  ds.  iete  132;  as.  aet  1073. 
Sta,  see  sylfit'ta. 
aetfaistan,  Wi,  inflict:  inf.  1347. 
a»tgaedere,  adv.,  together:  992. 
atol,    adj.,    dire,   hateful:    nsm.    131 2, 

atola  1296;  asm.  atulne  53. 
ator,  n.,  poison  :  ns.  attor  770  ;  gs.  atres 

53;  is.  attre  1331. 
aetsomne,   adv.,   together:    994,    1091, 

Ap.  99. 
8et?fringan,  3,  expel,  destroy  :  pres.  opt. 

3  pi.  astKingan  1371. 
aetywan,    Wi,    appear :    pret.    3    sg. 

aetywde  1168,  1296,  1662;  inf.  729. 
seSelcyning,    m.,     noble   king,    Christ: 

gs.  aej^elcyninges  1679. 
aiiSele,  adj.,  noble,  gloriotis:  nsm.  360, 

1722;  nsn.  1242,   1644;  gsm.  aeiSeles 

756;    dsm:    aeSelum    230,    360;    asf. 

as'Selan  642,  1476;  asm.  aeSelne  871, 

1020;  npm.  ae'Sele  Ap.  79. 
je?felic,  adj.,  noble,  glorious :  nsn.  888. 
jeSeling,  m.,  hero,  prince.  Lord:  ns.  853, 

911,  990,  1 575  ;  gs.  ae'Selinges  44,  649 ; 

ds.  ae'Selinge   568 ;  as.    reveling   680, 

793,  1272,  1459;  np.  a;'5'elingas  805, 


857,   Ap.   3,   85;    gp.  ^'Selinga    277, 

623,  655,  1 1 74,  1223,  1 7 13. 
aeSelu,  npl.     i.  family,  race:    n.  6S3, 

as'Selo  734 ;  d.  ae'Selum  689 ;  a.  aeSelo 

Ap.  24.  —  2.   excellences,  virtues  :   ip. 

as'Selum  636,  8S2. 
awa,  aidv .,  fore:'er :  Ap.  99.     Cf.  a. 
awtegan,  Wl,  annul:  pp.awseged  1439. 
aweallan,  R,  flow :  pret.  3  sg.  aweoU 

15-3- 
a'weccan,   Wl,   a^vake,    bring    to  life: 

pret.  3  sg.  awehte  5S4,  Ap.  55. 
a«'ecgan,  Wl,  tjtove:  inf.  503. 
avvellan,  Wl,  luell  up,   be  stirred:  pp. 

Swelled  1019. 
awergaii,Wl,  curse  :  pp.  awerged  1 299. 
awritan,  l.     1.  -write:  pp.  awriten    135, 

149.  —  2.    carve:  pp.  awriten  726. 

B 

btiel,  n.,fre:  gs.  bsles  11 86. 
bald,  see  cirebald,  beald. 

baeldan,   Wl,   encourage,  incite:    2  sg. 

baeldest  11 86. 
baldor,  m.,  prince  :  vs.  547. 
bam,  see  begen. 
ban,  n.,  bone  :  ns.  1422,  1473. 
bana,  m.,  murderer  :  gs.  banan  617  ;  ds. 

1702  ;  as.  1293;  gp.  bonena  17. 
bancofa,  m.,  body  :  as.  bancofan  1276. 
bangebrec,  n.,  breakittg  of  a  bone :  as. 

1442. 
banhring,  m.,  vertebra  :  ap.  banhringas 

banhus,  n.,  body:  ns.  1240,  1405. 
bannan,  R,  summon:  inf.  1094. 
Bartholaineus,  pr.   n.,  Bartholomezo : 

ns.  Ap.  44. 
basnian,  Wa.     i.    await:   pret.   3  sg. 

basnode    1065.  —  2.    remain,    abide: 

pret.  3  sg.  447. 
bat,  m.,  boat :  ns.  496 ;  gs.  bates  444. 

See  mere-,  Sfe-,  Avudubiit. 
baeS,  n.,  /'(////. :  as.  293,  1640. 
bie(J^veg,  m.,  sea:  as.  223,  513. 


GLOSSARY 


177 


be,  prep.  \v.  dat.      i.  beside,  by:    360, 

465,   831,    1061,    1063,    1492.  — 2.  ac- 

cording  to  :   1 366,  1 6 1 1 .  —  3 .  concern- 
ing: Ap.  23. 
beaeen,  n.,  sign,  token:  ns.    1201  ;  as. 

7-9!  gP-  beacna  242. 
beadu,    f.,    battle:    ds.    beaduwe    982, 

beadowe  1  i86]f 
beaduora'ft,    m.,    skill  in   battle :    as. 

219. 
beaduorseftig,  adj.,   skilful  or  strong 

in  laitle  :  nsm.  Ap.  44. 
beaduc>vealm,  m.,  death  in  battle:  as. 

1702. 
beadidac,  n.,  battle :  ds.  beadulace  1 1 18. 
beadiirof,    adj.,    bold  in    battle:    asm.  , 

beadurofne    145 ;    dsm.    beadurofum 

96;    npm.   headuiofe    Ap.   78;    apm. 

beadurofe  848. 
beadmvang,  m.,  battle-field:  ds.  beadu- 

wange  413. 
beag,  m.,  ring:  gp.  beaga  271,  303,  476. 
beagsel,  n.,   hall   in  which  rings   are 

distributed:  ap.  beagselu  1657. 
beald,  adj.,  bold:  nsm.  602.    See  cire- 

bald. 
bealu,  n.,  evil:  ds.  bealuwe  947.    See 

tfeodbealo. 
beam,    n.,    child,    son  :    ns.    576 ;     ds. 

bearne  560;  as.  beam  747,  1028,  1613  ; 

np.    409 ;    dp.    bearnum     1328.    See 

cyne-,  fruni-,  god-,  (Jryffbearn. 
bearu,  m.,groT'e:  ap.  bearwas  1448. 
beatan,  R.     i.  beat  upon  :  3  sg.  beate'5 

496;    pret.    3    pi.    beoton    442.  —  2. 

clash  :    pret.  3  pi.   beoton   239 ;    ptc. 

nsn.  beatende  1543. 
bebeodan,  2,  cot)imand:  i  sg.  bebeode 

729,   1328;    pret.  3  sg.  bebead    322, 

773'  789,  845,  1045,  1652,  1696. 
bebod,  n.,  comtnand:  as.  735. 
bebiigan,   2,    reach,  extend:  3  sg.  be- 

buge-5  2>7>Z- 
becuman,  4,  come,  reach  :   pret.  3  sg. 

becom  788,  1666,  becwom  827  ;  3  pi. 

bec5mon  666 ;  inf.  929. 


bec'AveSan,  5,  say:  2  sg.  becwist   193, 

304,  418;  3  sg.  becwiS  210. 
-bed,  see  gebed. 

bedielan,  Wi,  w.  dat.,  deprive  of,  be- 
reave: pp.  bedaeled  309. 
bedd,  see  hihibedd. 
bedrifan,  1,  beat  upon :  pp.  apm.  bedri- 

fene  1494. 
befeolan,  3,  consign,  commit:  pret.  3 

sg.  befealg  1326. 
befon,   R,  confine,  encompass :    pret.   3 

sg.  befehS  327  ;  pp.  befangen  1057. 
beforan,  prep.  w.  dat.,  i)i  the  presence 

of:   571,  619. 
beforan,  adv.,  openly  :  606. 
began,  see  forbegan. 
begang,  m.     i.  extent,  circuit :  ns.  530  ; 

as.  195.  —  2.  study,  practice  :  as.  Ap. 

89,  108. 
begen,  adj.,    both  :   npm.  begen    1016, 

1027;  dpm.  bam  1014,  Ap.  78. 
begitan,  5.     i.   reach  :  pret.  opt.  3  sg. 

begete  37S.  —  2.   secure,  obtain:  inf. 

480. 
behabban,  W3,  comprehoid:  inf.  817. 
behelan,  4,  cover,  bury :  pp.  beheled  791. 
behweorfan,     3,     exchatige  for:    pp. 

behworfen  1703. 
belecgan,  Yi\, place  upon,  cover:  3  pi. 

belecga'5    121 1;   pret.  3  sg.  belegde 

1 192;  pret.  3  pi.  belegdon  1560;  inf. 

1295. 
beleosan,  2,  deprive  of:  pp.  npm.  be- 

lorene  1079. 
belJffan,  l,  only  in  pp.,  lifeless:  pp.  apm. 

belidenaiwo89. 
belucan,  2,  confine:  pp.  belocen  164. 
bemiTfan,  1,  conceal:  pp.  bemi'Sen  856. 
beniurnan,   Wl,  grieve,  have  regard 

for :  pret.  3  pi.  bemurndan  1 54. 
ben,  i.,  prayer  :  ds.  bene  476;  as.  or  p. 

1028,  1613,  Ap.  u6. 
bena,  m.,  suppliant :  np.  benan  348. 
bend,    mfn.,    bond:    dp.    bendum    184, 

'357'  bennum  962,  1038.    See  leo<5u-, 

^vitebend. 


178 


GLOSSARY 


beneah,  anv.,  w.  gen.,  possess :  pret.  3 

sg.  benohte  1705;  pret.  3  pi.  benoh- 

ton  1 1 59. 
beneotan,  2,  deprive  of:  inf.  Ap.  46. 
benn,  f.,  «'('»;/(/:  np.  benne  1405.    See 

dolg-,  sarbenn. 
benohte,  benohton,  see  beneah. 
beodan,    2.      i.  amunince,     conunand: 

pret.  3  sg.  bead  346;  inf.  779.  —  2. 

make  known:    pp.   boden    1201.    See 

a-,  be-,  gebeodan. 
beodgast,  m.,  gicest  at  meal:  gs.  beod- 

gastes  1088. 
beon,  see  wesan. 
beorg,  m.,  /lill:  ns.  1587  ;  np.  beorgas 

840 ;  ap.  1 306.    See  sSbeorg. 
beorgan,  3,  save,  protect :  inf.  1 538. 
beorht,  adj.  i .  shining,  bright,  radiant : 

nsf.   1247;  dsf.  beorhtan   1649;  a-sm. 

beorhtne  Ap.  33;  asf.  beorhtan  Ap. 

116  ;  vsm.  beorht  903  ;  npm.  beorhte 

867  ;  apn.  beorht  1657  ;  superl.  nsm. 

beorhtost   103;    nsf.   242.  —  2.   clear, 

loud  :  isf.  beorhtan  96.  —  3.  glorious, 

illzfstrious :    nsm.    84,   145,   447,  656, 

937  ;  dsf.  beorhtre  647  ;  asm.  beorhtne 

335.  524- 
beorhte,  adv.,  brightly  :  789. 
beorn,  m.      i.   man, hero:  ns.  239,  602, 

982,  Ap.  44;  gs.  beornes  1247,  1279; 

ds.  beorne  11 20;  as.  beorn  Ap.  88; 

vs.  937  ;  np.  beornas  399,  447,  660, 

1094,  it6o,  Ap.  78;  gp.  beorna  219, 

305,  768,  1543  ;  ap.  beornas  848  ;  dp. 

beornum    588.  —  2.   children,    sons  : 
■  np.  beornas  690. 
heor\}egu,{.,  beer-drinking:  ns.  1533. 
beorSor,  see  hysebeorSor. 
bertedan,  Wl,   deprive  of:  pret.  3  sg. 

berSdde  1326;  inf.  133. 
beran,  4.     i.   bear,  carry:  pret.  3  sg. 

baer  265;  pret.  3  pi.  bSron  1221  ;  inf. 

216.  —  2.   make  known:   3  pi.  beraS 

1295;  inf.  1079.    See  ei-,  geberan. 
bereafian,  W2,  bereave:  pp.  bereafod 

1314- 


berend,  see  aesc-,  reordberend. 
bereofan,  2,  deprive  of:  pp.  npm.  bero- 

fene  1084. 
bescufan,  2,  thrust:  pret.  3  sg. besceaf 

1191. 
bescyrian,  Wa,  deprive  of:  pp.  npm. 

bescyrede  161 8. 
beseon,  5,  look,  observe:  pret.  3  sg.  be- 

seah  1446. 
besettan,    Wl,    surround,    encotnpass : 

I  sg.  besette  1433  ;  pp.  beseted  943, 

1255. 
besittan,  5,  sit  [in  council),  hold  {coun- 
cil): 3  pi.  besitta)>  410;  pret.  3  pi. 

besieton  60S,  627. 
besnySSan,  Wl,  deprive  of:  pret.  3  sg. 

besnybede  1324. 
besteman,    Wl,    wet :    pp.    bestemed 

1239,  1475  !  PP-  '^^'^-  dsm.  bestemdon 

487. 
bes^vican,  l,  deceive  :  pret.  3  sg.  beswac 

613;  pp.  npm.  beswicene  745. 
beteldan,  3,  cover,  surroiuid:  pp.  be- 

tolden  988. 
betera,     adj.,      better:     asm.     beteran 

1088 ;    asf.   beteran    588.      See   god, 

selra. 
betweoniim,   prep.    w.    dat.,    among: 

1099,  betwinum   1103,  be  .  .  .  tweo- 

num  558. 
beSeccan,  Wl.     i.  cover:  pret.  3  sg. 

bel^ehte  1046.  —  2.  embrace:  pret.   3 

sg.  bejiehte   1015. 
beSurfan,  3,    w.    gen.,   have   need  of: 

pret.  I  sg.  bejiearf  Ap.  91. 
bew^selan,    Wl,    afflict:    pp.    bewseled 

1361. 
be'wnndan,  3.    i .  encompass,  surround: 

pp.  bewunden   19,   267,   535,   772. — 

2.   implant,  fix  :  pp.  58. 
beAvrecan,    5,  drive,  impel:  pp.   npm. 

bewrecene  269. 
bidan,  l,  w.  gen.     i.  await:  pret.  3  sg. 

bad    261  ;    pret.    3   pi.   bidon    1042-, 

inf.  145.  —  2.   remain:  inf.  S33.    See 

gebidan. 


GLOSSARY 


179 


blddan,  5,  w.  ace.  and  gen.,  asl;  pray  : 
I  sg.  bidde  14 15,  Ap.  88;  pret.  3  sg. 
baed  1030,  161 4;  opt.  pres.  3  sg. 
bidde  Ap.  90;  opt.  pies,  i  pi.  biddan 
1566;  inf.  84,  271,  353,  476.  See 
gebiddan. 

bill,  n.,  sword:  gs.  billes  51  ;  ip.  bilhim 

413- 
billhete,  m.,  s-won/  hosiility,  ivarfare; 

ds.  billhete  78. 
bilivit,  adj.,  kind,  gracious  :  asm.  bil- 

wytne  997. 
bindan,   3,   bind:   3  sg.   binde'S    519; 

pret.  3  sg.  band  1255.  See  gebindan. 
birylite,  prep.  \v.  dat.,  beside :  848. 
bisceop,  m.,  bishop:  as.  bisceop  1649; 

np.  bisceopas  607.  [Lat.  episcoptts.'] 
bisencan,  \Vl,  cause  to  sink  :  pret.  3  sg. 

bisencte  1591. 
bite,  m.,  bite,  wound:  as.  bite  Ap.  34. 
biter,    adj.,    bitter:    nsf.    1533;    asm. 

biteme  616;  asf.  bitran  1160. 
bitere,  adv.,  bitterly:  2,3- 
bliec,  adj.,  black  :  asf.  blsc  1262. 
blac,  adj.,  shining:  ism.  blacan  1541. 
blted,  m.      i.  glory  :  ns.  1719  ;  as.  535  ; 

gp.  blsda   103.  —  2.  prosperity,  hap- 
piness: gs.  blades  17  ;  as.  blEd  356  ; 

dp.  bljedum  769.  —  3.  flowers,  fruit: 

dp.  blaedum  1449. 
blaedgifa,  m.,   dispenser  of  happiness. 

Lord:  ns.  656;  vs.  84. 
blandan,  see  onblandan. 
bltest,  m.,  flame,  torch  :    ns.  837  ;   np. 

blSstas   1552. 
blat,  gend.  not    determinable,    sound, 

cry}  ns.   1279. 
blat,  did]., pale:  gsm.  biates  1088. 
bleaW,  adj.,  timid,  fearful :  nsm.  231. 
bledsiaii,  see  gebledsian. 
blendan,  see  ablendan. 
bletsiing,  f.,  blessing  :  as.  bletsunge  223. 
blican,  1,  shine,  gleam  :  pret.  3  sg.  blac 

243  ;  inf.  789,  838. 
blind,  adj.,  blind:  npm.  blinde  581.    See 

hyge-,  modblind. 


blinnaii,   3,  w.    gen.     i.  desist  from  : 

pret.    3    -sg.   blon    1265. — 2.  forfeit : 

pret.  2  sg.  blunne  1380.    [be  +  lin- 

nan.] 
bliss,  i.,  Joy,  bliss:   ns.  blis   1014;  gs. 

bli.sse    1064;    ds.   588;    is.    647;    gp. 

blissa  886  ;  dp.  blissum  1699. 
blissigean,  Wa.     i.  tnake  happy:  inf. 

1607.  —  2.   rejoice  :  3  sg.  blissa'S,  634  ; 

pret.  3  sg.  blissode  578.    See  geblis- 

sian. 
bll<5,  see  IiigeblT3. 
birffe,  adj.     i.  happy  :  asm.  blrSne  833  ; 

npm.  bliSe  867,  1583. — 2.  gracious, 
favorable :    nsm.     bllSe    903 ;     asm. 

bliSne  971. 
bliSheort,  adj.,  blithe  of  heart:   nsm. 

1262  ;  npm.  bliSheorte  660. 
blod,  n.,  blood:  ns.  954,  1240;  as.  23, 

1449. 
blodfag,  adj.,  blood-stained  :  nsn.  1405. 
blodig,    adj.,    bloody:    nsf.    1473;    ^^f- 

blodige  1442  ;  ipm.  blodigum  159. 
blodlifer,  f.,    clot,   blood-clot:   ip.  blod- 

lifrum    1276. 
blondan,  see   geblondan. 
blowan,  R,  bloom  :  3  sg.  bloweS  646. 

See  geblowan. 
boo,  f.,  book :  ap.  bee  Ap.  63. 
bocere,  m.,  scribe  :  np.  boceras  607. 
-bod,  see  bebod. 
bodian,     \V2,      ajuiounce,     proclaim  : 

imp.   2   pi.  bodia'5  335 ;    pp.  bodad 

1 120. 
boloa,  m.,  gang'way  :  ds.  bolcan  305 ; 

as.  602. 
bold,  n.,  house,  habitation  :  as.  656 ;  gs. 

botles  Ap.  117. 
boldwela,  m.,  glorious  habitation :  ns. 

103  ;  as.  boldwelan  524,  Ap.  2>2)- 
bolgciiiiiod,  2iA].,  angry:  npm.  bolgen- 

mode  128,  1221. 
bona,  see  bana. 
-bora,  see  rtesbora. 
bord,  n.,  shield:  ip.  bordum  1 205.    See 

y?Fbord. 


i8o 


GLOSSARY 


bordhreotJa,    r.i.,    shield:     ap.    bord- 

hreo'San    12S. 
bordstaeS,  n.,   ship-7'ope,  cordage :    ap. 

bordstse'Su  442. 
bosm,  m.,  bosom  :  ds.  bosme  444. 
bot,  f.,  help  :  ns.  947. 
botl,  see  bold, 
-brttce,  see  unbrace, 
brandhat,  adj.,  very  hot^  fiery:   nsm. 

brandhata  768. 
brant,  adj.,  steep:  ism.  brante  273. 
-brec,  see  gebrec. 
brecan,  4.      i.   break,  shatter  :  inf.  504. 

- — 2.  go,   make   ivay:     i     pi.    breca'5 

513;  inf.  223.  See  vi-,  gebrecan. 
bregdan,  see  a-,  ofer-,  tobregdan. 
brego,    m.,  prince.  Lord :    ns.  breogo 

305 ;  as.  brego  61  ;  vs.  brego  540. 
brehtm,  m.,  shout,  clamor :    is.  breht- 

me  1202,   1271,  byrhtme  Ap.  21  ;  ip. 

brehtmum  867. 
breme,  2A].,  famous :  nsm.  breme  209; 

sup.  gsm.  bremestan  718. 
breme,  adv.,  famously :  1 7 1 9. 
breogo,  see  brego. 
breogostol,  m.,   city,  principality:  ns. 

209. 
breost,  n.,  breast,  heart :  ns.  647 ;   as. 

breost    768,    1247,    1279,    1574;    dp. 

breostum  51,  1 118. 
breostgehygd,  fn.,  thought :  dp.  breost- 

gehygdum  997. 
breotan,  see  abreotan. 
brim,  n.,   sea,   deluge:   ns.    442,    1543, 

1574;     gs-    brimes    444,    17 10;     as. 

brim    504;    ap.    brimu    519,    breomo 

242. 
brinihengest,   m.,    sea-steed,    ship :    ip. 

brimhengestum  513. 
brimrad,  f.,  sea :  ns.    1 587  ;  as.  brim- 

rade  1262. 
brimstaeS,    n.,    shore :    ap.    brimstae'So 

496. 
brimstream,    m.,    oceati   stream :    ds. 

brimstreame  903 ;    np.  brimstreamas 

239 ;  ap.  348. 


briin]7isa,  m.,  boat :  as.  brimHsan  1657  ; 

ds.  1699. 
bringan,  Wl,  bring:  pret.  3  sg.  brohte 

259.    See  gebringan. 
broga,  see  Avaeterbroga. 
brondstaefn,    adj.,   steeppro7ued:   asm. 

brondstjefne  504. 
broSor,  m.,  brother :  ns.  940,  Ap.  2,Z ! 

as.  Ap.  54.    See  ge-,  sigebrotfor. 
broSorsybb,    f.,    relationship    between 

brothers  :  ip.  bro'Sorsybbum  690. 
briican,  2,  w.  gen.,  enjoy,  partake  of: 

3  pi.  brfica^'  280,  Ap.  99 ;  opt.  pres. 

3  sg.  bruce  Ap.  114;  inf.  17,  106,  229, 

886,    1467,   Ap.    117;   ger.   bruconne 

23,  brucanne  1160. 
briin,  ad j .,  brown,  dark :  apf .  brune  519. 
brunAvann,    adj.,    dark,    dusky:    nsf. 

brunwann   1306. 
bryfS'i'^D*    W2,  for?)!  a  bridge :    pret. 

3  sg.  brycgade   1261.  - 
bryne,  m..,  flame, fire:  as.  bi-yne  616. 
bryrdan,  see  onbryrdan. 
brytta,  m.,  dispenser:  ns.  822,  11 70. 
bryttian,  Wa,  giz'e :  pret.  3  sg.  bryttode 

_754- 
bugan,  see  bebugan. 

burg,  f.,  city:  ds.  byrig  40,  287',  973, 
1491,  1649;  as.  burg  iii,  burh  982, 
1120,  1541  ;  dp.  burgum  78,  231,  335, 
1155,  1235,  1547.  ^t'f  gold-.  Koine-, 
weder-,  \A'inburg. 

burggeat,  n.,  city  gate  :  dp.  burggeatum 
840. 

burglooa,  m.,  city  prison  :  das.  burg- 
locan  940,  1038,  burhlocan  1065. 

burgAvaru,  f.,  citizen,  the  body  of  citi- 
zens, i.e.  the  city  :  as.  burgwaru  1094  ; 
np.  burgware  1 5S3  ;  dp.  burgwarum 
184,  209,  718. 

biirhsittend,  m.,  citizen  :  dp.  burhsit- 
tendum  1201. 

burhstede,  m.,  city:  dp.  burhstedum 
581. 

burhiveall,  m.,  city  7vall:  ds.  Iniih- 
wealle  833. 


GLOSSARY 


i8i 


burhweard,  m.,  defender  of  the  city : 

'gs.  burhweaides  660. 
butan,  prep.    \v.  dat.     i.  except :    148. 

—  2.   without:  679. 
butan,  conj.,  unless:  188. 
-byrd,  see  iiiundbyrd. 
byrhtm,  see  brehtiii. 
byrig,  see  burg. 

byrle.  m.,  cupbearer  :  np.  byrlas  1533. 
byrSen,  see  sorgbyriffen. 
bysen,  f.,  example:  as.  bysne  971. 
bysgian,  W2,  oppress,  afflict :  pp.  gebys- 

god  395. 
bysnirian,  W2,  mock,  scorn  :  pret.    3 

pi.  bysmredon  962  ;  opt.  pres.   i  pi. 

bysmrigen  1357;  inf.  1293. 

c 

C  =  rune  h  A  P.  104  ;  for  tneaniitg,  see 

A'otes. 
cald,  adj.,  cold:  asn.  201,  222,  253;  apn. 

310;  ip.  cealdum  1260,  cealdan  121 2. 

See  ^vinterceald. 
caldheort,    adj.,    cold-hearted,    cruel: 

npm.  caldheorte   138. 
oanip,  m.,  battle:  ds.  campe  234,  1325. 
■eainpra;den,   f.,    battle:    ds.    camprS- 

denne  4. 
candell,  see  daeg-,  heofon-,  weder- 

candell. 
carcern,  n.,/r/j-^«  :  gs.  carcernes  1075; 

ds.  carcerne  57,  90,   130,  991,   1082, 

1250,    1460,    1560;  as.   carcern   1578. 

[Lat.  career  and  A.-S.  cern.'] 
ceafi,  m.,  Ja'cu:   as.    1703;    ip.  ceaflum 

159- 
ceald,  see  cald. 

cearig,   adj.,    troubled:    isf.    cearegan 

iioS. 
cearo,  see  lifcearo. 

ceaster,  f.,  city :  ns.  207  ;  ds.  ceastre 
2S1,  719,  828;  as.  ceastre  41,  929, 
939,  105S,  1 1 74,  1677. 

ceasterhof,  n.,  house  in  the  city  :  dp. 
ceasterhofum  1237. 


ceastcrwaro,  pm.,  citizens  :  gp.  ceastre- 
warena  1 125  ;  dp.  ceasterwarum  1646. 

cempa,  m.,  7C'arrior:  ns.  461,  538,  991, 
1446;  ds.  cempan  230;  np.  cempan 
1055  ;  dp.  cempum  324. 

cene,  adj.,  bold:  ns.  1578  ;  np.  1204. 

cennan,  Wl,  bear,  bring  forth :  pp. 
cenned  757.    See  aoeunan. 

oeol,  m.,  ship:  gs.  ceoles  310;  ds.  ceole 
450.  555'  854;  as.  ceol  222,  349,  36 r, 
380,  899 ;  is.  ceole  273 ;  ip.  ceolum 
253,  256. 

ceosaii,  2,  choose,  seek  :  opt.  pret.  3  pi. 
curen  1609,  curon  404.   6><?  geceosan. 

Channaneas,  pr.  n.,  dioellers  in  Ca- 
naan: dp.  Channaneum  778. 

Cheruphini,  pr.  n.,  Cherubim  :  ns.  719. 

cigan,  Wl,  imme,  call:  2  pi.  cTga'5  746. 

cildgeong,  adj.,  young  as  a  child:  nsm. 
685. 

cirebald,  adj.,  bold  in  decision:  dsm. 
cirebaldum  171. 

cirice,  f.,  church  :  ns.  1646  ;  as.  ciricean 

1633- 
cirni,  m.,  tumult,  outcry:  ns.  41,'  1237, 

cyrm  1 125,  1 156. 
cirinan,  Wl,  make  outcry  :  pret.  3  pi. 

cirmdon  138. 
cltenc,  adj.,  pure:   asm.   clSnan    978; 

dpm.  clffinum  Ap.  119. 
cleofa,  see  clustorcleofa. 
cleopian,  W2,  call:  pret.  2  sg.  cleopo- 

dest  1410  ;  pret.  3  sg.  cleopode  1 108  ; 

pret.  3  pi.  cleopodon  1716;  inf.  1398, 

cleopigan  Ap.  115,  clypian  450. 
clif,  n.,  cliff:  ap.  cleofu  310. 
clingan,  3,  shrink,  freeze :  pret.  3  sg. 

clang  1260. 
cloniin,  m.,  fetter,  bond:    is.    clamme 

1 192;  ip.  clommum  130,  1212,  1378, 

1560. 
clustorcleofa,  ni.,  prison  :  ds.  clustor- 

cleofan  1021.     [Lat.  claustriim.'] 
clyppan,  Wl,  embrace :  pret.  3  pi.  clyp- 

ton  1016. 
cna^van,  see  ge-,  oncnaTran. 


l82 


GLOSSARY 


-cnaTTc,  see  orcnawe. 

cneomseg,  m.,  kinsntan  :  dp.  cneoma- 
gum  6S5. 

cneoriss,  f.  i.  family,  race  :  as.  cneo- 
risse  Ap.  26.  —  2.  coiintiy  :  as.  cneo- 
risse  207. 

ciiiht,  m.,  />oy:  gs.  cnihtes  912,  1121. 

cofa,  see  ban-,  niortJor-,  neadcofa. 

eolian,  W2,  become  cold:  pret.  3  pi. 
coledon  1256. 

coUenferhS,  adj.,  coiirageotis,  bold- 
spirited:  nsm.  538,  1 108,  collenfer'S 
1578,  Ap.  54;  npm.  collenfyrhSe  349. 

CorSor,  n.,  croiad,  troop:  ns.  138;  ds. 
cor'Sie  1075,  1716;  is.  1121,  1204.  See 
hildecor?5or. 

cost,  adj.,  tried,  excellent:  npm.  coste 

1055- 

craeft,  m.,  skill,  craft, poiver:  gs.  craeftes 
484,  585,  Ap.  103  ;  as.  craeft  500,  631, 
1294;  is.  crsefte  49,  327,  939,  1196; 
gp.  crffifta  700,  1460;  ip.  crzeftum 
1603.  See  aclJBC-,  beadu-,  dry-, 
d-wol-,  galdor-,  hell-,  inorSor-, 
rim-,  searo-,  wundorcraeft. 

craeftig,  see  beadu-,  macrseftig. 

cra^ftiga,    m.,    bziilder,    architect:    ns. 

1633- 

cringan,  2,  fall:  opt.  pret.  3  sg.  crunge 
1 03 1 .    See  gecringan. 

Crist,  pr.  n.,  Christ:  ns.  322,  1322; 
gs.  Crlstes  57,  991,  1337 ;  ds.  Crlste 
1016,  1250,  Ap.  26;  as.  Crist  880. 
[Lat.  Christiis.'\ 

Cristen,  adj.  as  n.,  Christiaii :  gp.  Cris- 
tenra  1677. 

-crod,  see  gecrod. 

cuman,  4,  come  :  3  sg.  cyme'5  512  ;  pret. 
3  sg.  com  88,  124,  241,  837,  1219, 
1245,  1269,  131 1,  1388,  1462,  cw5m 
738,  1278;  pret.  2  pi.  comon  256; 
pret.  3  pi.,  658,  863,  1069,  1094;  opt. 
pres.  2  sg.  cyme  188,  400;  opt.  pret. 
3  pi.  comon  247,  1047;  pp.  cumen 
41,  880,  1 165,  1584;  inf.  783.  See 
feorrancumen,  be-,  forcuinan. 


cunibol,  n.,  banner;  np.  4;    dp.  cum- 

blum  1204. 
cuunan,  PP.     i.  knoiv  :  2  sg.  canst  68, 

508,  const  1282  ;  3  sg.  con  195  ;  pret. 

3  pi.  cii'Son  752  ;  opt.  pres.  2  sg.  cunne 

1485;  inf.  341,  Ap.  105.  —  2.   be  able: 

3  sg.  cann  9S0,  1 1 54  ;  prpt.  i  sg.  cuSe 

901  ;  pret.  2  sg.  928  ;  pret.  3  pi.  cution 

1 194;  opt.  pres.  2  sg.  cunne  557. 
cunnian,  W2.      i.  exainine,  find  out: 

inf.   129.  —  2.  experieiice,  endtire :    3 

sg.  cunna>  314,.,^  3.  essay,   attempt: 

pret.  I  pi.  cunnedan  439. 
eiitf,  adj.,  kiumni  :    nsn.  cu^  380,   527, 

682,  1562;  npm.  cu'Se  198;  npf.  cu'Se 

201.     See  un-,  unforcuS. 
cuSlice,  adv.,  kindly,  friendly  :  322. 
c^valii,  see  swyltcAvalu. 
c-wanian,  Wa,  lament:  pret.  3  pi.  cwane- 

don  1536. 
cwealni,  m.,   torture,  death  :   ns.    182  ; 

gs.  cwealmes  1 597  ;  ds.  cwealme  1 507 ; 

as.  cwealm  281,   1121,  1186,  Ap.  39. 

See  beaducwealni. 
cwellan,  Wi,  kill:  pret.  3  sg.  cwealde 

1624. 
CTveSan,  5,  say :  pret.  2  sg.  cwSde  14 1 1 ; 

pret.  3  sg.  cwae'S  62,   173,  329,  354, 

539,  716,   727,   743,   850,  913,    1 109, 

1206,  1280,  1450;  pret.  3  pi.  cwSdon 

1 60 1,    1639,    1 7 16.      See    be-,   ge-, 

onc^\'e3an. 
C'wic,  adj.,  alive:   asm.  cwicne    10S2 ; 

npm.  cwice  129;  gpm.  cwicera  912. 
cwide,    m.,   speech  :    ds.    cwide     1021. 

See  gen-,  hearm-,  hleo?for-,  lar-, 

sar-,  so«5-,  teon-,  ^vo^dcwide. 
cyleglcel,   m.,    icicle:    ip.    cylegicelum 

1260. 
cyme,  m.,  approach,  arrival:  is.  cyme 

660.    See  hidereynie. 
oymlic,  adj.,  comely,  fair :  comp.  asm. 

cymllcor  361. 
cynebearn,  n.,  royal  child :  as.  566. 
cynerof,  adj.,    noble,  illustrious:  nsm. 

585  ;  vsm.  484. 


GLOSSARY 


183 


cynestol,   m.,    capital  city :    ds.  cyne- 

stole  666. 
cyne<yrym,  m.,  royal  dignity:  as.  1322. 
cyning,  ms.,  kittg:   ns.   120,   145,  324, 

450,    700,    1325,     1505,     1509,    1 51 7, 

1603,   1722,  Ap.  27,  69,    119,  cining 

416,    828,    880,    912,    978,    1 192;  gs. 

cyninges  527,  778,  1633,  Ap.  54,  105; 

as.  cyning  53S,  1055,  cining  880;  vs. 

cyning   903;  gp.    cyninga    555,    854, 

899,   978,    1 192,    cininga    171,    141 1. 

See  iBcJel-,   Leah-,  heofon-,  <Jeod-, 

3ry<5-,  Aviildorcyning. 
cynn,    n.,    race,    stock,    kind:  ns.    560, 

1610;  gs.  cynnes  545,  582,  590,  1374; 

ds.  cynne    567,    757,    907;   as.    cynn 

1 519.     See  engel-,  nianncynn. 
cyrraii,  see  ge-,  oncyrran. 
cyssau,    \Vl,    kiss:   pret.  3  pi.  cyston 

1 01 6. 
cyst,  see  gunicyst. 
cy?fan,  Wl,  make  kfiowii,  reveal:  2  pi. 

cySa'S    6S0 ;  pret.  3    sg.    cyiSde    571, 

575'  585.    606,  625,  704,  812,   1510; 

pret.  3  pi.  cyNdon  Ap.  3  ;  imp.  2  sg. 

cy5  121 2.     See  gecySan. 
-cy3ig,  see  oncySig. 
oycKT,  f.,  race,  country :  d.  or  as.  cy SSe 

734- 

D 

d^d,  f.,  deed:  as.  dSde  67  ;  dp.  djedum 
Ap.  5  ;  ip.  596.     See  oncySdiT'd. 

diedfrunia,  m.,  performer  of  deeds, 
hero  :  ns.  75,  1455. 

dafenian,  see  gedafenian. 

daeg,  m.,  day  :  ns.  1 397  ;  gs.  djeges 
1407,  1535.  Ap.  65;  ds.  daege  1385, 
1436;  as.  daeg  818,  1245,  1274,  i'385; 
np.  dagas  1696;  ap.  1414.  See  aer-, 
ende-,fyrn-,  gear-,  gj'stran-.  sym- 
beldaeg. 

daegoaiidell,  f.,  day-caudle,  sitn :  as. 
da?gcandelle  835. 

dapgh\va'inllce,  adv.,  daily  :  682. 

daegred^voma,  m.,  daivn  :  ns.  125. 


-dal,  see  gedal. 

dwl,  m.     I.  part,    division:    ns.    1421, 

1474;  as.  diel    570,   1 122,  1488,  Ap. 

94. — 2.  region:  ap.  djelas  A  p.  51. 
dti'lan,  Wl,  part,  deal  out :  2  sg.  dSlest 

54S ;  pp.  dSled    952.    See   be-,  ge-, 

todtelan. 
daroS,  m.,  spear  :  gp.  daro^a  1444. 
Dauid,  pr.  n.,  David:  ns.  878. 
dead,  adj.,  dead:  ap.  deade  1077,  1090. 
deaf,  adj.,  deaf:  np.  deafe  577. 
deall,  ci.d].,  proud :  npm.  dealle  1097. 
deaS,  m.,  death  :  as.  87,  431  ;  ds.  dea^e 

583,  600,  955,  1217,  Ap.  56,  82. 
dea<5r{es,  m.,  sudden  death  :  ns.  995. 
dea<Jreo-\v,  adj.,  deadly  cruel,  savage: 

nsm.  1314. 
deaSwang,  m.,yftV(/ (y"f/<frt//i :  as.  1003. 
dema,  see  sigedema. 
deman,   Wl.     i.   appoint:    inf.    75. — 

2.    acknowledge,    glorify:    inf.    11 94, 

1403,  Ap.  10. 
deniend,  m..  Judge,   Lord:    as.    11S9; 

vs.  87. 
deoful,  n.,  devil:  ns.  116S,  1314,  dlo- 

ful   1298;    gs.    deofles  43,    141,  611, 

1 1 89. 
deofolgild,  n.,  idolatry:  as.  1688,  dio- 

folgild  1 64 1. 
deogollice,  adv.,  secretly:  621. 
deop,  adj.,  deep  :  asn.  190  ;  asm.  deopne 

611  ;  dp.  deopum  1244. 
deope,  adv.,  deeply:  394,  1529. 
deor,  adj.,  brave,  bold:  nsm.  1308.    See 

hildedeor. 
deorc,  adj.,  dark:  dsf.  deorcan  1462. 
deorniod,  adj.,  bold,  brave:  nsm.  626; 

asm.  deormodne  1232. 
digol,  n.,  secret,  secret  place :  ds.  dlgle 

626. 
digol,  adj.,  secret:  asn.  dlgol  698. 
dim,  adj.,  (///«,  dark :  dsf.  dimman  1 270 ; 

asn.  dimme  130S. 
diiiiseiia,  m.,  darkness :  ds.  dimscuan 

141. 
dolg,  see  heoru-,  seonodolg. 


i84 


GLOSSARY 


dolgbenn,  f.,  uwund:  ip.  dolgbennum 

1397- 
dolgslege,  m.,  stroke,  blow :  as.   dolg- 

slege  1475;  <iP-  dolgslegum  1244. 
doni,  m.     I.  decision,  jtidgmeiit,  decree: 

ds.  dome  653,  796,  1695  ;  as.  d5m  339. 

—  2.  glory,  power:  ns.  541,  Ap.  65; 

gs.   d5mes   959;   as.   dom  1151.    See 

dryhten-,  ?Jeo-,  wisdom, 
domagende,     adj.,     exercisiiig    judg- 
ment :  nsm.  570. 
doiiifaest,  adj.,  illustrioiis :  npm.  d5m- 

faeste  Ap.  5. 
domgeorn,  adj.,  ambitious,  noble:  nsm. 

130S;  npm.  domgeorne  693,  878. 
donileas,  adj.,  inglorious:  npm.   dom- 

lease  995. 
domlice,    adv.,  gloriously :   sup.    nsm. 

domllcost  1267. 
domweor^fung,    f.,    glory :    as.    dom- 

weor'Sunga  355,  domweor'Singa  1006. 
don,  anv.    i.  make,  perform  :  pret.  2  sg. 

dydest  927  ;  pret.  3  pi.  dydan  27.  — 

2.  do  (pro-verb) :  pret.  3  sg.  dyde  1321. 

See  forden,  gedon. 
dragan,  6,  drag:  pret.  3  pi.  drogon  1232. 
dream,  m.,  joy :   ns.  874,  Ap.  48 ;   as. 

Ap.  82  ;  ap.  dreamas  641,  809,  Ap.  32. 

See  man-,  sele-,  swegldream. 
dreccan,  see  gedrecean. 
drefan,  see  gedrefan. 
dreogan,    2,    endure:    inf.    1244.     See 

adreogan. 
dreopan,  see  adreopan. 
dreor,   m.,   blood:   as.  969;  is.   dreore 

1003,  1475. 
dreorig,  see  heorodreorig. 
dreosan,  '2,  fall,  die:  pret.  3  pi.  druron 

995.    See  gedreosan. 
drifan,  see  be-,  for-,  to-,  (Jurhdrifan. 
drihten,  see  dryhten. 
drohtatf,  m.     i.  condition,  lot,  life:  ns. 

313,  1385;  as.  1281,  drohta)>  369.-^ 

2.  place  of  abode:  as.  drohta'5  1539. 
drohtigan,   W2,  pass   life,   live :   opt. 

pres.  2  pi.  drohtigen  682. 


drohtnoS,  m.,  cottdition  of  life :  as.  1402. 

druncen,  adj.,  drunk:  npm.  druncne 
1003. 

dry,  m.,  7nagician  :  np.  dryas  34. 

drycrseft,  m.,  magic:  ip.  drycrjeftum 
765. 

dryge,  adj.,  dry:  nsf.  1581. 

dryht,  see  'willgedryht. 

dryhten,  m.,  prince.  Lord:  ns.  5,  202, 
317.  343.  35i:.435.  510,  621,  698,  727, 
835,  1206,  1462,  1663,  1696,  drihten 
173,  248;  gs.  dryhtnes  431,  667,  721, 
1034,  1 194,  1403,  Ap.  id,  56;  ds. 
diyhtne  959,  1006,  1151,  1641,  Ap. 
5;  as.  dryhten  600,  626,  874,  1267, 
1.455;  vs.  190,  541,  897,  1281,  1407, 
drihten  73;  gp.  dryhtna  874,  1151. 
See  sige-,  Avinedryhten. 

dryhtendom,  m.,  glory,  majesty :  as. 
999. 

dryhtlie,  -Sid.].,  glorious :  nsm.  Ap.  65. 

drync,  m.,  drink:  ns.  22,  1535;  as.  34, 

53.313- 
drype,  m.,  stroke,  blow:  as.  955,  1217. 
dufan,  see  gedufan. 
dugan,  anv.  avail,  hold  out :  pres.  3  sg. 

deah  460. 
diiguS,    f.    I.   benefit,    sustenance :    ds. 

diigoSe    313;    dp.    dugu'Sum    342. — 

%.  potver,  glory :  dp.  dugu'Sum   1314. 

—  3.  host,  multitude,\x\  the  singular; 

7nen,  warriors,  in  plural :   ns.  dugu  J^ 

125,    394,    1270,    1529;     gs.    dugu'S'e 

1227,  dugoiSe  1105;  ds.  dugu'Se  152, 

dugcSe   1 168;  is.  dugub'e   1122;  np. 

dugo'5  693,  878  ;  gp.  dugo'Sa  87,  1 1S9, 

duge'Sa 75,  24^,  698;  dp.  duguSum  682. 
dumb,  adj.,  diimb:    npn.  dumban  67; 

dpm.  dumbum  577. 
dung,  i.,  prison:  ds.  ding  1270. 
dunsora»f,  n.,  motmtain  cave:  dp.  dun- 

scrasfum  1232,  1539. 
durran,  anv.,  dare,  have  courage  :  2  sg. 

dearst  1350;   pret.  3  sg.  dorste  735; 

pret.   3  sg.    dorste   735  ;    pret.  3  pi. 

dorston  Soo. 


GLOSSARY 


185 


(luni,  f.,  c!oo7-:  ns.  999;  as.    1075.     ^^^ 

hliiuliiru. 
durir<>V<!;n,  m.,  door-keeper:    dp.  duru- 

tiegnum  1090. 
-dw'ola,  see  gedwola. 
d'woh'rfpft,  ni.,  magic :  as.  34. 
dyiinan,  Wi,  resound:  pret.  3  sg.  dy- 

nede  739.  ' 

dyriiaii,  \Vl,  conceal:  inf.  693. 
dyriie,  see  undyrne. 

E 

ea,  f.,  stream:  as.  1504. 
eao,  adv.,  also  :  584,  1592,  Ap.  23,  50. 
eaoa,  m.,  addition  :  ds.  eacan  1039. 
eadfruina,    n.,    author    of  prosperity. 

Lord:  vs.  1292. 
eadgifa,  m.,  dispenser  of  good.  Lord: 

ns.  451  ;  vs.  74. 
eadig,   n.,   happiness,    prosperity :    gs. 

eadiges  680. 
eadig,  adj.,  happy.  Messed:   nsm.    54, 

463,  S79,  Ap.  "j-ii^  npm.  eadige  599; 

apm.  830.    See  tireadig. 
eador,  see  geador. 
eadAvela,  m.,  joy,  blessec(ness :  ds.  ead- 

welan  808. 
eafora,    m.,    descendant :    as.   eaforan 

mo;  np.  1627;  dp.  eaforum  779. 
eafoS,  n.,  strength,  power,  violence:  ns. 

30;  dp.  eaueSum   142. 
cage,  n.,  eye  :  gp.  eagena  30 ;  dp.  eagum 

910;  ip.  759,  1224,  1679. 
eagorstream,  m.,  stream  :  ns.  258 ;  as. 

379  ;  np.  eagorstrtfamas  441 ;  ap.  492. 
eagsyne,  adj.,  x'isible:  nsm.  1550. 
eahtigan,  \V2,  meditate:  inf.  11 62. 
eala,  interj.,  alas:  203. 
ealad,  f.,  ii<ater-ivay,  ocean  :  np.  ealada 

441. 
ealand,  n.,  island  :  as.  28.     , 
eald,  adj.,  old:  asm.  1495;  npm".  ealde 

1537 ;  apm.  1642  :  sup.  npm.  yldestan 

763.     See  efeneald. 
ealdgenrSla,  m.,  arch-enemy:  ns.  1341  ; 

np.  ealdgeniJSlan  1048. 


ealdgesity,  m.,  chieftain,  leader:  gp. 
ealdgesiSa  1 104. 

ealdor,  n.,  life:  gs.  ealdres  11 31;  tis. 
ealdre  1721,  aldre  938;  is.  ealdre 
1 137,  1324,  Ap.  36,  aldre  1351,  Ap. 

17'  43- 

ealdorgeard,  m.,  home  of  life,  body  : 
as.  1181. 

ealdornian,  m.,  elder,  magistrate :  np. 
ealdormeim  608. 

ealdorsacerd,  m.,  chief  priest :  ns. 
670. 

ealgian,  Wa,  defend:  pret.  3  pi.  eal- 
godon  10. 

ealiSend,  m.,  voyager  :  dp.  ealiSendum 
251. 

call,  adj.,  all,  the  whole  of:  gsm.  ealles 
1 1 50;  asm.  ealne  1245  !  ^^f.  ealle  loi, 
Ap.  30,  122;  asn.  eall  1320,  1434, 
1519,  1719,  eal  945;  npm.  ealle  762, 
1565,  1601  ;  npf.  1499;  gp.  ealra  68, 
eallra  326,  703,  978,  1717  ;  dp.  eallum 
568,  1091,  1292  ;  apm.  ealle  332,  676, 
895,  994,  1623,  Ap.  84  ;  apf.  327  ;  apn. 
eall  1359,  i486. 

eall,  adv.,  cotnpletely,  entirely:  1097, 
1 146,  1483,  1590,  1627,  eal  19. 

eallgrene,  adj.,  entirely  or  very  green  : 
asf.  798. 

eall'W'ealda,  adj.,  omnipotent.  Lord: 
nsm.  eahvalda  751,  925;  dsm.  eal- 
wealdan  1620,  eallwealdan  205. 

eallAvihte,  npl.,  all  creatures  :  gp.  eall- 
vvihta  1603,  aelwihta  118. 

eard,  m.,  land,  habitation  :  ns.  Ap.  113; 
gs.  eardes  280,  1025,  Ap.  iio;  ds. 
earde  400  ;  as.  eard  1 76,  599. 

eard\A-io,  n.,  habitation  :  as.  Ap.  93. 

earfetf,  n.,  suffering,  hardship:  ap.  ear- 
fe^'o  i486. 

earfo<51ice,  adv.,  hardly,  unfortunately ; 
514. 

earfoSsRf,  m.,  toilsome  journey,  hard- 
ship :  gp.  earfo'SsiSa  678 ;  ap.  earfe'S- 
siSas  1 283. 

earh,  n.,  arrozv  :  as.  1331. 


1 86 


GLOSSARY 


earhfaru,  inflight  of  at-ron^s  :  ds.  earh- 

fare  1048. 
earin,  m.,  arm  :  is.  earme  1015. 
CAvm,  ad].,  poor,  tor  etched:  npm.  earme 

676 ;  gpm.  earmra  744. 
earnillc,  adj.,  zoreic/ied,  miserable:  nsm. 

182;  nsn.  1555;  asn.  1135. 
earnisceapen,    adj.,    wretched,    miser- 
able: nsm.  1 1 29,  1345. 
earn,  m.,  eagle :  np.  earnas  863. 
eastream,   m.,   zoater-streaf?i :    ap.    ea- 

streamas  1261. 
eaSe,  adv.,  easily:  425,  859,  933,  11 79, 

1352,  1376;  comp.  ea'5  194,  36S.    See 

uneaSe. 
eaSnieclum,  adv.    i.  hiivibly  :  321. — 

2.  joyfully:  979. 
eatFniod,  adj.,  humble:  nsm.  270. 
eaue<5,  see  eafotf. 
Ebreas,  pr.n.,  Hebreivs:    dp.   Ebreum 

165. 
ecan,  see  ican. 
ece,  adj.,  eternal:   nsm.  202,  249,  326, 

343.  36S'   510,  703.  1717;  nsf.  1722, 

Ap.   122;    gsm.  ecan  721;    asn.  ece 

747,  1064,  Ap.  19,  38,  73;  vsm.  1287, 

1292. 
ecen,   adj.,   endowed:    asf.    ecne    636; 

apm.  882. 
ecg,  f.    I.  edge:  ns.  1132  ;  ds.  ecge  51  ; 

ip.  ecgum  71. —  2.  sword:  gp.  ecga 

1 1 48. 
ecgheard,  adj.,  hard  of  edge :  asn.  1 181. 
edgiong,  adj.,  -ccnth youth  renezued:  nsf. 

Ap.  122. 
edlean,  n.,  reward:  ns.  1228. 
ednnve,  adj.,  renewed:  nsf.  1014. 
edniwinga,  adv.,  straightway:   7S3. 
edre,  see  ajdre. 
ed^'itspraec,    f.,    scornful  speech:    as. 

edwitsprsece  81. 
efeneald,  adj.,  of  equal  age:   ds.  efen- 
•  ealdum   553. 

Effessia,  pr.  n.,  Ephesus :  ds.  Ap.  30. 
efne,  adv.,  even,  just,  indeed :  294,  1 104, 

1234,  Ap.  102,  emne  114,  221,  333. 


eft,  adv.     I.  then,   again,   afterwards: 

~~lli  655,  706,  763,  1246,  1274,  1302, 

1341,  1476.  —  2.  back:  400,  466,  531, 

694,  1078,  1356,  1675. 
egesa,  m.,fear  :  ns.  445,  532 ;  ds.  egesan 

457  ;  is.  805,  1266.  ^^^  waeteregesa. 
egeslic,  adj.,  y^(7;y}//:  nsm.  1550;  nsn. 
_  1588. 

Egias,  pr.  n.,  Egias :  as.  Ap.  17. 
egle,  adj.,  horrible:   npm.   1148,  1459; 

npf.  441. 
eld,  f.,  time,  age:  dp.  eldum  1057. 
ellefne,  num.  adj.,  eleven:  npm.  664. 
ellen,  n.,  strength,  courage:    ns.  460; 

gs.   elnes    looi,    1263;     ds.  elne   54, 

i486;  as.  ellen  1208,  1242,  Ap.  3;  is. 

elne  983. 
f:\\eiihea.r(\,?Ld]., courageous:  nsm.  1254. 
ellenrof,  adj.,  brave,  bold:  gsm.  ellen- 

rSfes  1392;  npm.  ellenrofe  350,  410, 

1141. 
ellenAveorc,    n.,    courageous   deed:    gs. 

ellenweorces   232 ;   ip.  ellenweorcum 

1370. 
elles,    adv.,   otherwise,    elsewhere :    Ap. 

no. 
ellorfus,  adj .,  ready  or  anxious  to  depart : 

asm.  ellorfusne  188,  321. 
ellreordig,    adj.,    speaking   a    strange 

language:  gp.  ellreordigra  1081. 
ellSeod,  f.,_/i'r^/o-;/  ?tatiott:  ds.  ellJ>eode 

972. 
ellSeodig,   a.d].,  foreign,  hostile:    gsm. 

ell)>eodiges    678 ;    asm.    ellheodigne 

1454,  1559;  npm.  elJ)eodige  63,  199, 

280;"  gpm.  elljjeodigra  16,   1175,  ell- 

'Seodigra    26,    el^eodigra   946 ;    dpm. 

ell^eodigum  163,  ell'eodigum   1073. 
emne,  see  efne. 
ende,   m.     1.   end:    ns.   1382;   ds.   221, 

Ap.  98  ^  as.  649,  Ap.  85;  is.  1057. — 

2.  Lord,  the  Omega :  ns.  556. 
endeda'g,  m.,   day  of  death  :    ns.  Ap. 

79- 
endeleas,  adj.,  endless:  nsn.  695. 
cndestajf,  m.,  end,  doom:  as.  135. 


GLOSSARY 


187 


Qu<^(il,m.,ti//^i;-e/:  ns.  194,  1540;  as.  365  ; 

np.  englas  871  ;  gp.  engla  74,  83,  119, 

146,  278,  290,  434.451.  525.  642.  7^3^ 

828,  900,  1007,  1064,  .1412,  1517,  Ap. 

28,  119;  dp.  englum  249,  599,  1722; 

ap.  englas  823.    [Lat.  atigeliis.']    See 

up-,  lieahougcl. 
cnselcyn,  n.,  race  of  angels:  gp.  engel- 

cynna  717. 
ent,  m.,  ,^'-/(/«/ :  gp.  enta  1235,  1495. 
code,  eodon,  see  gan. 
eogo'S,  see  geogoS. 
eolhstede,  m.,  temple,  altar :  ap.  eolh- 

stedas  1642. 
eorl,  m.,  c/iief,  hero  :  ns.  1254,  1263  ;  gs. 

eorles  508 ;  as.  eorl  460  ;  vs.  475  ;  np. 

eorlas  199,  251,  401,   734,   1638,  Ap. 

99;  gp.  eorla  1051,   1105,   1352;  dp. 

eorlum  1575,  1644;  ap.  eorlas  463. 
eorre,  see  jTre. 
eortSe,  i.,  earth:  ns.   143S;  gs.  eor'San 

332,'  1 50 1,  1540,  Ap.  94,  eorjian  1595; 

ds.  eorSan  460,  604,  Ap.  19,  99;  as. 

7/87,  328,  731,  748,  798,  970,  1255, 

1525,  Ap.  28. 
eorSscraef,  n.     i.  cave,  sepulchre:   ds. 

eor^scrsefe  780 ;  ap.  eor'Sscraefu  803. 

—  2.  crevasse:  ns.  eor'Sscraef  15S8. 
0Or?fv\'are,mpl.,  inhabitants  of  the  earth  : 

dp.  eor'Swarum  568. 
eo'vvde,  n.,y?(;(-/' :  as.  1669. 
eo\\'er,  poss.   pron.,  yoicr :    asf.  eowre 

295  ;  asm.  eowerne  339. 
erin<5u,  see  yrniSu. 
ern,  see  nioldern. 

Essag,  pr.  n.,  fesse :  gs:  Essage.s  879. 
eat,  i.,  favor,  grace:  as.  339,  517,  121 5, 

1374- 
este,  adj.,  gracious:     nsm.   483;     asf. 

1692. 
estlice,  adv.,  loillingly :  292. 
et,  conj.,  Lat.,  and:  719. 
eSel,  mn.,  home,  native  la  fid:    ns.  21, 

525,  Ap.  113;  gs.  e'Sles  t6, •830;  ds. 

eSle  1 162,  Ap.  ioi  ;  as.  eSel  176,  226, 

274,  642,  1258. 


cd'elleas,  adj.,  homeless:  dsm.  eJSellCa- 

sum  74. 
eOelrlce,  n.,  native  land,  country :  ds. 

e^'elrice  120,  432. 
exl,  f.,  shoulder:  as.  exle  1575. 


F  =  rutie  Y    Ap.  98  ;  for  meanifig,  see 

Notes. 
faa,  see  fah. 

faee,  n.,  time,  interval:  gp.  faca  1371. 
facen,  n.,  crime,  treachery :  gs.  facnes 

1294  ;  is.  facne  20. 
feeder,  m.,  father :  ns.  330,  687,  846,- 

937.  1465,  1684,  Ap.  29  ;  gs.  824,  1635  ; 

ds.   1346,  1410;   as.  804,  997,    1500; 

vs.  83,   1412  ;   np.  fasderas  752.    See 

heahfa»der. 
fag,  adj.,  discolored,  spotted:  nsf.  1134. 

See  tigel-,  blod-,  stanfiig. 
faige,  adj.,  doojned  to  death  :  gsm.  fSges 

154,    1 182,    1332;    npm.   fffige    1530; 

gpm.  fsegra  1085. 
ftegen,  did].,  fain,  glad:  nsm.  faegn  255  ; 

npm.  faegen  1041. 
faeger,  adj  .,fair,  pleasant :  dsm.  f aegeran 

598,  1693;  superl.  nsm.  fasgrost  103. 
fa?gSo,  f .,  feud,  strife :  as.  faeg'Se   284, 

feh«o  1386. 
fah,  adj.,  hostile:  n.sm.  1346,  1705,  fag 

769,  1 1 88  ;  npm.  faa  1 593, 1 599  ;  gpm. 

fara  430,  1023,  io6o. 
ffele,  see  a^lfsele. 
ftelsian,  see  gefwlslan. 
fainig,  adj.,y(wwj' :  npm.  famige  1524. 
faniigheals,  adj.,  foamy-iiecked :  nsm. 

497- 
fTemne,  f.,  zuofnan  :  gs.  faemnan  Ap.  29. 
fier,  m.,  sudden  peril:  as.  1530,  1629. 
tumn,  Q,  go,  fare :  3  sg.  f aere^  497 ;  imp. 

2  pi.  fara'S  332  ;   inf.  773,  796,  864, 

954.  1279- 
fieran,  see  afleran. 
faro?f,  n.,  surge,  ocean:  ds.  faro'Se  255, 

165S.    See  mere-,  AvaroWaroB ;  see 

also  waro3. 


GLOSSARY 


farotJlacende,    adj.,    seafaring:     nsm. 

507- 
faroSridende,   adj.,    seafaring:    npm. 

440. 

faroSstrSt,  f.,  ocean  :  ds.  faro'Sstraete 
311,898. 

fterspell,  n.,  bad  news:  ds.  fasrspelle 
1086. 

faru,  see  earh-,  stream-,  wSg-, 
ySfaru. 

faest,  adj .  i  .fixed, fastened :  nsm.  1 1 07 ; 
asm.  fsestne  184,  962,  1038,  1357; 
npm.  faeste  130;  apm.  1492. —  2.  stead- 
fast :  asf.  f aeste  83.  —  3.  sound,  heavy  : 
dsm.  fsestan  795.  See  dom-,  soS-, 
staSol-,  3rym-,  wter-,  wisfaest. 

fgestan,  see  aetfeestan. 

faeste,  adv.,7fr;«/j':  58,  1671. 

faesten,  n.,  inclosure,  fortress  :  ds.  faes- 
tenne  1034,  1068,  1177,  1544-  See 
lagufaesten. 

fsestllc,  see  soSfaestlio. 

faestnian,  '^^ fasten,  secure:  pret.  3 pi. 
fasstnodon  49.     See  gefaestnian. 

faet,  see  si<5faet. 

fteted,  adj.,  ornamented:  asn.  301. 

f  Eetedsinc,  n.,  treasure  :  gs.  fietedsinces 
478. 

fseSm,   m.      i.   ontstretcked  arms,   em- 
brace: ds.faeSme6i6;  as.  fae^m  1616; 
ip.  fae'Smum  824.  —  2.  boso7n  (of  ship), 
hold:    as.    fae'Sm   444.  —  3.   expanse 
as.  252,  336. 

faeSme,  see  ^vidf^e?J^ne. 

faeSniian,  Ws,  expand,  spread:  pret. 
3  pi.  fae^'medon  1572  ;  inf.  1589. 

fea,  adj.,/f7f  :  ipm.  feam  605. 

-f  ea,  see  gef  ea. 

feala,  indecl.  n.,  many:  564,  584,  699, 
710,  961,  969,  975,  1243,  1301,  1363, 
1490. 

feallan,  R,  fall:  pret.  3  sg.  feoU 
918. 

fealu,  adj.,  yelloiv,  dull-colored:  asm. 
fealone  1538,  fealuwne  421;  apm. 
fealewe  1589. 


feasceaft,     adj.,     destitute,     wretched: 

nsm.    1128,    1556;    asm.    feasceaftne 

181  ;  apm.  feasceafte  367. 
fedan,  see  afedan. 
fegan,    \Vl,  join,    unite:     pret.    3   sg. 

fegde  Ap.  98. 
fcl,  n.,  skin,  hide  :  as.  23. 
feld,  see  herefeld. 
fell,  va.,fall,  destruction  :  as.  1609. 
-feng,  see  onfeng. 
feohgestreon,  n.,  money,  treasure :  as. 

301. 
feoht,  see  gefeoht. 

teohte,  i.,  fight,  battle:  as.  1023,   1350. 
feohtend,  see  ^vi^el•feohtend. 
feolan,  see  befeolan. 
f  eon,  see  gef  eon. 
feond,  m.,  enemy,  devil:  gs.  feondes  20, 

49,  1 196,  1294,  1693;  gp.feonda  161 9. 
feor,  z.d].,far  away,  distant:  nsm.  898  ; 

nsn.  feorr  423  ;  asm.  feome  191,  252, 

II73- 

feor,  adv.,/?;-:   542,  638,  Ap.  109. 

f  eorh,  n.  i.  life :  ns.  Ap.  37  ;  gs.  feores 
133,  179,  iioi,  1 107,  1 130;  ds.  feore 
1538,  to  -widau  feore  =  ever,  forever 
106,  810,  1452;  as.  feorh  216,  282, 
430,954,  1117,1134,  1371,  1616,  1629, 
widan  feorh  =  forever  1383,  Ap.  12, 
feorg  Ap.  58  ;  is.  feore  284.  —  2.  soul : 
ns.  feorh  1288;  as.  154. 

feorhgedal,  n.,  death  :  ns.  181,  1427. 

feorhhord,  m.,  body:  as.  1182. 

feorhried,  m.,  salvation:  as.  1654. 

-feornie,  see  orfeorine. 

feorinian,  see  gefeormian. 

feorran,  z.A\'.,from  afar:   265,  282. 

feorraiicuineii,  m.,  one  come  from  afar, 
stranger  :  gp.  feorrancumenra  24. 

feorrciind,  adj.,  foreign:  gp.  feorr- 
cundra  1080. 

feorSa,  num.  zdi]., fourth  :  ism.  feor'San 
1458. 

feor^veg,  m.,  distant  way  or  region  :  ap. 
feorwegas  928. 

feowertig,  num.  adj.,/(v7i':   1036. 


GLOSSARY 


189 


feo^ve^tyIlP,  num.  z-d^^.^fottrtccu  :  1593. 

-fera,  see  gefera. 

f eran,  W 1 ,  ,^tj :  2  sg.  ferest  1674;  pret. 

3  sg.  ferde  662  ;  opt.  pres.  2  sg.  fere 

224;  inf.  174,  330,  7S6,  928,  931.  See 

geferaii. 
ferend,  see  scip-,  ^vldfe^end. 
ferian,    W2.     i.    bear,   carry,   convey: 

pret.  3  sg.  ferede  853,  906 ;  pret.  3  pi. 

feredon  866 ;  inf.  ferian  347,  ferigan 

293,  ferigean  824.  —  2.  deal  in,  carry 

(7;/:,  pret.  2  sg.  feredes  1363.    See'^-, 

geferian. 
fer3,  mn.    i.   spirit,   mind:   ns.   fyrh'5 

63S;  ds.  fyrhSe   507,  feriSe   14S5. — 

2.  life :  as.  fer^'  1 74, 1 332.    See  collen-, 

forht-,  stl'S-,  sta?rce?J-,  \^■erigfe^<y. 
f er?fgef  eonde,  adj .,  rejoicing  in  spirit : 

nsm.  915;  npm.  ferh'Sgefeonde  1584. 
fertJloca,  m.,  breast,  heart:  ds.  fer^locan 

167 1,  fyrh'Slocan  58,  1570. 
fetoriN'rasen,  i.,  fetter,  chain  :  dp.  fetor- 

wrasnum  1 107. 
f e3a,    m.,    troop,    infantry :    as.   feSan 

1 188;  np.  591. 
feSer,  f.,  7oing:  ip.  fe'Serum  864. 
fex,  n.,  hair:  ns.  1427. 
fif,  num.  adj.,yfrv:   590,  591. 
fiftig,  num.  adj.,y?/?)':   1040. 
findan,  3.     i.  fnd,  discover:  2  sg.  fin- 

dest  1349;  pret.  3  pi.  fundon   1076; 

inf.  1129,   1 231,  Ap.  96.-2.  attain: 

inf.  980,   1154. —  3.  itivent,  compose: 

pret.  I  sg.  fand,  Ap.  i  ;  inf.  14S5.    See 

onfindan. 
finit,  Lat.,  Ap.  122. 
firas,  mpl.,  men:  gp.  fira  24,  160,  291, 

409,  590,  920,  961,  980,  1286. 
firen,  f.,  critne,  sin  :  dp.  firenum  1664. 
firgendstreain,  m.,  mountain  stream  : 

ns.  1573;  as.  firigendstream  390. 
first,  see  f yrst. 
fisc,  m.,fsli :  gs.  fisces  293;  dp.  fi.xum 

5S9.    See  hornfisc. 
fitt,  f.,  song,  poem  :  as.  fitte  Ap.  98. 
fix,  see  fisc. 


flJT'SC,  n.,  body:  ds.  flzesce  Ap.  37. 
fla'schonia,  m.,  body :  np.  flKschaman 

1085;  ap.  fijeschoman  24,  154,  160. 
^^a.vci,Vi\.,  flight :  ds.  flcame  1386;  as. 

fleam  1340;  is.  fleame  1544. 
-flede,  see  iiiflede. 

fleogan,  %  fy :  pret.  3  pi.  flugon  1546. 
fleoii,  %flee,  escape  from  :  inf.  1538. 
flitan,    1,  oppose,   dispute:    3   sg.    flite^ 

1 1 99. 
flod,  m.    I.  ocean  :  gs.  flSdes  252,  367, 

1530;  ds.  flode  265  ;  as.  flod  421;  ap. 

flodas  906.  —  7..  flood,  deluge :  ns.  flod 

1546,    1573'    1635;    gs.    flodes   1616, 

1629  ;  ds.  flode  1 5S2  ;  as.  flod  1 5S9.  — 

3.  stream  :  is.  flSde  954.     See  lago-, 

ivaeter-,  niereflod. 
flod-wylm,  m.,  ragi  tig  flood :  ns.  516. 
flot,  n.,  sea:  ds.  flote  1698. 
flota,  m.,  ship :  as.  flotan  397.    See  «g-, 

sie-,  Avtegflota. 
flowan,  'R,Jlo7i):  pret.  3  sg.  fleovv  1524, 

1573- 
f^y\it,v!\.,  flight:  ds.  flyhte  864;  is.  866. 
foddor3egu,  f.,  food:    ds.   foddor))ege 

160,  foddurj'ege  iioi. 
folc,   n.,  people,   nation :    ns.  653,   804, 

1023,  1664?;  gs.  folces  29,  619,  662, 

1068,    1086,    1301,    1570,    1596;    ds. 

folce  784,  796,  1080,  1 130,  1 144,  Ap. 

58  ;  as.  folc  430,  1 196,  1506,  1556;  is. 

folce  1643;  gp.  folca  330;  dp.  f oleum 

409,  606. 
folcniaegen,  n.,  cotnpatiy  of  people:  as. 

1060. 
folcr*d,  m.,  public  benefit:  as.  622. 
folcscearu,  f.,  people,   land:    ds.   folc- 

sceare  684. 
folcsceatfa,    m.,    evil-doer:     np.    folc- 

sceaSan  1593. 
folcstede,  m.,  land:  ns.  20;  ds.  179. 
folctoga,  m.,  leader,  prince  :  np.  folc- 

togan  8,  1458. 
foldc,  f.    I.  earth,  world:  gs.  foldan  336. 

—  2.  groutid,  soil :    ns.  folde  1 582 ; 

ds.  foldan  737,  918,  969,  1427,  1524. 


I  go 


GLOSSARY 


foldweg,  m.,  ear/A  :  ds.  foldwege  206 ; 
as.  foldweg  775. 

folgian,  \V2,  follow :  pret.  i  pi.  fol- 
godon  673. 

folni,  f.,  hand:  ds.  folme  1133;  ip. 
folmum  522.     [Cf.  "LzX.  palmai\ 

foil,  see  be-,  for-,  onfoii. 

for,  prep.  w.  dat.,  inst.,  and  ace.  i.  be- 
fore, in  the  presence  of:  w.  dat.  165, 
509,  586,  767,  881,  924,  1 1 27,  1 1 68, 
1200,  1209,  1298,  Ap.  55,  61  ;  w.  ace. 
880,  Ap.  17. — 2.  for,  on  account  of, 
because  of:  w.  dat.  39,  457,  610,  1086, 
1285,  Ap.  73;  w.  inst.  1266.  —  3./^^' 
the  sake  of:  w.  dat.  431,  633. 

for,  i.,  journey :  as.  f5re  191,  216,  337, 
846. 

foran,  see  beforan. 

forbegan,  Wl,  humble:  opt.  pies.  2  pi. 
forbegan  1333;  pp.  forbeged  1571. 

forcuman,  4,  overcome,  vanquish  :  pret. 
3  sg.  forc5m  1325. 

forcuS,  see  iiiiforcfiS. 

forden,  pp.,  corrupt,  wicked:  gp.  for- 
denera  43. 

fordrifaii,  l,  drive:  pret.  3  sg.  fordraf 
269. 

fore,  prep.  w.  dat.  and  ace.  i.  before 
(local)  :  w.  dat.  728,  736,  840,  910, 
993,  1032,  1650;  Ap.  II,  36,  71;  w. 
ace.  1028,  1613;  case  indeterminate 
721,  1499,  1668. — 2.  because  of, 
through  :  w.  dat.  186,  Ap.  18. 

fore,  adv.,  beforehand,  yet,  still:  185. 

fore'danc,  m.,  deliberation,  perception  : 
gs.  fore)?anees  A  p.  96. 

forfon,  R,  seize,  come  upon  suddenly : 
pret.  3  sg.  forfeng  995. 

forgifan,  5,  give,  gratit :  pret.  3  sg. 
forgef  486,  forgeaf  1 586 ;  pres.  opt. 

•  3  sg.  forgife  355;  imp.  2  sg.  forgif 
76. 

forgildan,  3,  repay  :  pres.  opt.  3  sg. 
forgilde  387. 

forgrindan,  3,  hack,  injure  :  pp.  for- 
grunden  413. 


forht,  adj.,  afraid:  nsm.  98,  1085;  np. 

forhte  448,  1340,  1500,  1609;  ap.  457, 

1 04 1. 
forhtfer??,    adj.,    timid,  fearful:    nsm. 

1549,  1596. 
forhycgaii,  W3,  despise,  disdain  :  pret. 

2  sg.    forhogedes    1381  ;  pret.   3   pi. 
forhogodan  A  p.  84. 

forhylnian,  Wl,  neglect:  inf.  735. 
forlacan,  R,   mislead:  pret.   2  sg.  for- 

leolce     1364;    pret.     3    sg.    forleolc 

614. 
forlSran,  Wl,  mislead,  instruct  wroitg- 

ly:  pret.  2  sg.  forljerdest  1364;  pret. 

3  sg.  forlSrde6i4. 

forllfitan,  R.     i.   leave,  abandon  :  2  sg. 

forlietest  1413  ;  3  sg.  forlSteS  459; 

pret.  3  sg.  forlet  1037  ;  pret.  3  pi.  for- 

IStan  802  ;  opt.  pret.  3  pi.  forleton 

403.  —  2.  let,    grant,    permit:    pret. 

3  sg.  forlet  835,  968,  158S. 
forlor,  m.,  loss,  destruction  :  ds.  forlore 

1423. 
fornieltaii,  3,  ?)ielt  away,  be  consufned : 

inf.  1 146. 
forniman,  4,  ca7-ry  off,   destroy:  pret. 

3  sg.  fornam  994,  1531,  Ap.  59. 
forst,  xa..,  frost:  ns.  1257. 
forstandaii,  6.     i.  defend:  pret.  3  sg. 

forstod  1 143,  1335.  —  2.  oppose,  deny  : 

pret.  3  sg.  forstod  1540. 
forswelgaii,  3,  siuallow  up :  pret.  3  sg. 

forswealg  1590. 
for?f,    adv.      \.  forth,  forioards:    775, 

1 506,  1 5S4.  —  2.  still,  yet,  henceforth  : 

54,  Ap.  I  id. 
forpan,    conj.      i.   therefore,    thereby: 

458,526.  —  2.   because:  529,  Ap.  47. 
foT-w^T(\yVi.,  destruction:  as.  1594,  161 8. 
fot,  m.,foot:  ns.  1582. 
fracoS,  adj.,    hateful,   despised:    npm. 

fraco'Se  409. 
fram,  adj.,  see  from, 
fraiii,  prep.   w.    dat.,  from  :   697,    738, 

1034.   I037>  1243.   1485.    1535'    1 58-. 
1691. 


GLOSSARY 


191 


fra't,  adj.,  obstinate,  proud :  dsf.  frietie 

571  ;  asn.  frSte  1506. 
fraetwe,  fpl.,  treasures,  ornaments  :  ap. 

frstwe  337,  frastewa  Ap.  102. 
fraet^'ian,  see  gefraetwian. 
frea,  m.,  lord:  ns.  662,  714,  786;  gs. 

frean  457,  653,  796,  1401,  1695;  vs. 

frea  629,  1410.     See  vd^ntv^a.. 
free,  see  gutffrec. 
freca,  m.,  hero,  warrior  :  ns.  1 163.     See 

guO'-,  hildfreca. 
frecne,  adj.,  dangerous,  terrible:  nsm. 

1432  ;  asm.  516  ;  asf.  1350  ;  npf.  440  ; 

sup.  asn.  frecnost  1231. 
frefran,  Wl,  comfort,  console :  imp.  2  sg. 

frefra  421 ;  inf.  367.     See  afrefran. 
-frege,  see  gefrege. 
fremde,  adj.,  strange,  estranged  /ro/n 

(w.  gen.) :  nsm.  890. 
freminan,  Wl.      i.  do,  make, perform: 

opt.  pres.  2  sg.  fremme  1354  ;  prat. 

3   sg.  fremede    619,   622,   639,   815  ; 

pret.   3  pi.   fremedon   1654;   inf.  67, 

780,     1208.  — 2.  aid,    advance:     inf. 

934.    See  gefremnian. 
freo,  2.6!].,  free,  joyful :  npm.  598. 
freod,  f.,  loi'e,  good  will :  ns.  11 54;  as. 

freode  390. 
freolice,  adv.,  gladly,  willingly  :  293. 
freond,   m.,  friend:    gp.   freonda   934, 

1128,  1705,  Ap.  91. 
freondscipe,  va..,  friendship:  as.  478. 
freorig,  2lA\.,  freezing,  cold:  nsm.  491  ; 

npn.  1259. 
freotyian,  see  gefreoSian. 
freoQoleas,  adj.,  hostile,  zoicked:  nsn.  29. 
freoSu,  see  fri'5. 
fl•eoSll^vter,  f.,  covena7it  of  peace:  as. 

freo'Suwaere  1630. 
fricca,  m.,  herald:  np.  friccan  11 56. 
friclan,  Wl,  w.  gen.,  seek,  ask  for  :  opt. 

3  sg.  fricle  Ap.  109. 
frignan,  3,  ask,  inquire :  i  sg.  frlne  633  ; 

2  sg.  frinest  629;   pret.  3  sg.  fraegn 

556,  919,  fregn  1163;  inf.  1412.    See 

gefrignau. 


frliian,  see  frignan. 

frio'ffo,   f.,  peace:   gs.    918;    as.   freo'Se 

1 1 30;  is.  freo'So  336. 
fri'd',  mn.,  peace,  safety :   gs.  fri'6es  448, 

1 1 28,  Ap.  91  ;  ds.  fri^e  622;  as.  fri15 

174,  1034;  is.  fri-5e  915,  1432. 
frod,  adj.     i.  wise:  apm.  f rode  784. — 

2.  old:  nsm.  506;  nsn.  737. 
frofor,  f .,  comfort,  consolation  :  gs.  f rof re 

906,   1567,   1684,  1705,  Ap.   109;  ds. 

311,  606;  as.  95,  1465. 
from,   adj.,    brave,    eager;    nsm.    fram 

234;   npm.   frome   8,  frame   Ap.    12. 

See  hild-,  sKffroni. 
fromlice,  adv.,  boldly  :  556,  1182,  1332, 

1640. 
fruma,  m.     i.  beginning:    ds.  fruman 

1485.  —  2.     Lord,     the    Alpha:     ns. 

fruma  226,    556.      See   deed-,   ead-, 

leod-,  leoht-,  lif-,  ordfrunia. 
frumbearn,  n.,  first-born  child,  leader  : 

as.  1294. 
frumgar,    m.,    leader :    np.   frumgaras 

1068. 
frunirteden,  f.,  arratigement  previously 

agreed  upon,  period :  gs.  frumrSdenne 

147. 
fruinsceaft,f.,(:;-^i7//^« :  ds.frumsceafte 

797- 
friini'n'^eoro,  n.,  creature,  creation :  gp. 

frumweorca  804. 
fugol,  m.,  bird:  ds.  fugole  497. 
ful,  adv.,  fully,  very :  496.    See  sj'n-, 

3rym-,  ?yry3ftil. 
fidtum,  m.,    help :    gs.    fultomes    Ap. 

91. 
fuHviht,    n.,    baptism:    ns.    1643;    S^- 

fulhvihtes   1640;  ds.  fulwihte    1630; 

as.  fulwiht  1635. 
furSuni,  adv.,  even,  just:  797. 
fiirSur,  zdv.,  further  :  1350,  1489,  1518. 
fus,   adj.     I.    ready  to   set   out,  eager: 

nsm.  255  ;  asm.  fusne  1654.  —  2.  sad, 

declining:     nsm.    1664.     See    ellor-, 

hell-,  hynfus. 
fusleoS,  n.,  death-song:  as.  1549. 


192 


GLOSSARY 


fyllan,  Wi,  overt/n-ow,  destroy,    pret. 

3  sg.  fylde  1688. 
^llan,    Wi,   w.   gen.,  Jill:   pret.    3  sg. 

fylde  523.    See  gefyllan. 
-fynde,  see  ySfynde. 
fyrdh^vaet,  adj.,  active  in  war:   npm. 

fyrdhwate  8,  Ap.  12. 
fyreii,  z.d].,Jie7y:  dpm.  fymum  1378. 
fyrgiiast,    m.,    spark  of  fire:    np.  fyr- 

gnastas  1546. 
fyrht,  see  god:^'rht. 
fyrhtan,  see  afyrhtao. 
fyrh?J,  see  ferS. 
fyrh?Oufe,  f.,  heartfelt  love :   as.  fyrh'S- 

lufan  S3. 
fyrmSl,  n.,  mark  of  fire  :  ip.  fyrmffilum 

1134- 
fyrn,  see  unfvrn. 
fyrndagas,    mpl.,    former    days :    dp. 

fymdagum   i,  752,  976. 
fyrng-e'weorc,  n.,  ancieiit  fabric,  crea- 
tion :  ns.  737. 
fyrnsaegen,  n.,  old  tradition  :  ns.  1489. 
fjTnscea]?a,    m.,    ancient    enemy:     ns. 

1346. 
fyrnvveorc,  n.,  creature,  creation :  gp. 

fymweorca  1410. 
tyTn\vita,m. , patriarc/i :  np.fyrnv\:otan 

784. 
tyrst,  m..,  period  of  time  :  ns.  first  147  ; 

as.  fyrst  834,  1309,  1673. 
fyrstgeniearc,  n.,  appointed  time:  gs. 

fyrstgemearces  931. 
fyrstniearc,    n.,    appointed   time :    ds. 

fyrstmearce  133. 
fjT}>ran,  Wl,  advance,  help:  inf.  934. 

See  gefjTtfran. 
lysan,  Wl.    i.  prepare,  get  ready  :  inf. 

1698   — 2.  incite:   1  sg.  fysest  1187. 

G 

Gad,  pr.  n.,  Gad:  ns.  Ap.  57. 
gadrigeaii,  W2,  collect,  gather  together : 

inf.  78 1,  gadorigean  1556. 
gafulrji'den,  f.,  tribute,  fare:  as.  gaful- 

rSdenne  296. 


galan,  6,  sing:  pret.  3  pi.  golon  1549; 

inf.  1 1 27,  1342. 
g^lan,  \V],  delay:  pret.  3  pi.  gieldon 

1533- 
galdor,  m.,  song:  gs.  galdres  Ap.  108. 
galdorcraeft,  m.,  magic  art:  ip.  galdor- 

craeftum  166. 
galga,  see  gealga. 
gan,  zn\.,go :  3  pi.  gaS  1665  ;  pret.  3  sg. 

code  982,  looi ;  pret.  3  pi.  eodon  45  ; 

imp.  2  sg.  ga  1348;  imp.  2  pi.  gaS 

1 182, 1332 ;  inf.  365, 775.   ^^^gangan, 

agan,  ofer-eode. 
gang,    m.,  passage,    circuit,  path :    ns. 

1694,  gong  869;   as.  gang   208,  455. 

See  begang. 
gangan,  anv.,  go:   3  pi.  gangah  891; 

imp.  2  sg.  gong  939;  inf.  23S,   1059, 

1356,  gengan  1095,  geongan  131 1. 
gar,  xa..,  spear:  gs.  gares  187,  1330;  np. 

garas   127;   gp.  gara  32;    dp.  garum 

1 143  ;  ip.  45.    See  frumgar. 
gargewinn,   n.,    battle,    opposition :    as. 

958. 
gaers,  n.,  grass  :  ns.  38. 
garsecg,  m.,  ocean  :  ns.  238,  392  ;   gs. 

garsecges  530;  as.  garsecg  371. 
gaesne,  adj.,  dead:  npm.  10S4. 
gast,  see  beodgast. 
gast,  m.     I.  mind,  soul,  life:  ns.  468; 

gs.  gastes   155;   ds.  gaste   782,  917, 

1084;  as.  gast  187,   1327,   1416;  np. 

gastas  640,  1 61 7;  gp.  gasta  331,  54S, 

901.  —  2.  spij-it  (Jioh>):  ns.  728,  906, 

1684;  gs.  gastes  531,  1000,  162 1,  A  p. 

114.  —  3.  spirit  {evil):  ns.   1296;  gs. 
gastes  1694. 
gastgehygd,   n.,   thought:   ip.    gastge- 

hygdum  86 1. 
gastgeryne,  n.,  spiritual  mystery :  ip. 

gastgei^num  858. 
gastlie,  adj.',   living,   having  mind  or 

soul:  ns.  1628. 
go  .  .  .  ge,  conj.,  both  .  .  .  and:  542. 
gcaclian,   W2,  frighten :    pp.    geaclod 
805. 


GLOSSARY 


193 


geador,  adv.,  together:  1097,  eador  1627. 
gealga,  m.,  galloivs,  cross :  as.  gealgan 

966,  Ap.  22;  ds.  1327,   1409,  galgan 

Ap.  40. 
gealgniod,  adj.,  cruel,   wicked:   npm. 

gealgmode  32,  563. 
geap,  see  horiigeap. 
geara,  a.d\'.,/or/iierh  :   1387. 
Gearapolis,  prn.,  Hierapolis :  d.  Geara- 

polim  Ap.  40. 
geard,  see  ealdor-,  iiiiddangeard. 
gearclagas,  vn\i\.,for7Her  days,  old  times : 

dp.  geardagum  15 19. 
geare,  adv.,  well,  certainly :  comp.  gear- 

wor  932. 
gcaru,  adj.,  ready:  nsm.  72,  214,  1535, 

gearo  234  ;  nsf.  907, 1 1 53,  1 567,  1 579  ; 

npm.  gearwe  1369;  apn.  gearu  135S. 
geascian,   W2,   learn   of:    pret.    3   pi. 

geascodon  44. 
geat,  see  burg-,  weallgoat. 
gebaero,  f.,  behavior,  action:  ns.  1570. 
gebed,  n.,  prayer :  ds.  gebede  1027. 
gebeodan,  2,  offer:  pp.  geboden  219. 
geberan,  4,  bring  forth,  bear  :  pp.  npm. 

geborene  690. 
gcbidan,  1 .    i .  await :  pret.  3  sg.  gebad 

1702  ;  opt.  pres.  3  pi.  gebidan  399.  — 

2.  remain  still :  pret.  3  sg.  gebad  1 587. 
gebiddan,  5,  beseech,  implore :  pret.  3  sg. 

gebaed  996. 
gebindan,  3,  bind:  pret.  3  pi.  gebundon 

48,   1222;  pp.  gebunden  1379,  1396, 

npm.  gebundene  580,  apm.  947. 
gebledsian,  W2.    i.  bless:  pp.gebled- 

sod  524,  937.  —  2.  revere,  honor :  pp. 

gebledsod  540,  1719. 
geblissian,  W2,  gladden,  bless :  pp.  ge- 

blissod  351,  468,  892. 
geblond,  n.,  commotion  :   ns.  532.    See 

argeblond. 
goblondaii,  R,  mix,  stir  up  ■■  pret.  3  pi. 

geblendan  33  ;  pp.  geblonden  424. 
geblowan,  R,  bloom,  blossom  :  pp.  apm. 

geblowene  1448. 
gebrec,  see  bangebrec. 


gcbrceaii,   ."),  break  do^an,  injure:  pp. 

gebrocen  1404,  1473. 
gebringan,  Wl,  bring:  pret.  3  pi.  ge- 

brohton  17 10;  opt.  pret.  2  sg.  gebrohte 

273- 
Q^\ivoSor,m^\.,  brothers:  np.  1027;  dp. 

gebrotirum  1014. 
geceosan,  2,  choose:  pret.  3  sg.  geceas 

Ap.  19;   pp.  gecoren  324,  npm.  geco- 

rene  Ap.  5. 
gecna^vaIl,R,  recognize:  inf.  1517, 1558. 
gecringaii,  3,  fall,  die :  pret.  3  sg.  ge- 

crang  Ap.  60,  72. 
gecrod,  see  lindgecrod. 
gecAveQ'an,  .5,  speak  :  pret.  3  sg.  gecwae'S 

896, 1 172, 1299, 1361, 1400,  1465, 1663. 
gecynd,  f.,  kind:  as.  58S. 
gecyrraii,  Wi,  return:  pret.  3  pi.  ge- 

cyrdon  1078. 
gecytfan,  Wi,  make  kjiown,  show :  3  sg. 

gecy'Se'S    1435;    i   pi.   gecy'Sa'S  .859; 

pret.  2  sg.  gecy'Sdest  390 ;  pret.  3  sg. 

gecy'Sde  564,  700,  711  ;  pp.  gecySed 

90,    358;    inf.    289,    784,    796,    803, 

965. 
gedafenian,  W2,  bejit:  3  sg.  gedafena'5 

gedal,  see  feorh-,  sa^\'ulgedal. 
gedtelan,  \Vi.    i.  give  ove.r  to,  consign 

to:  inf.  955,  1 2 17.  —  2.  separate,  part 

from  :  pp.  gedieled  Ap.  82 ;  inf.  Ap 

36.  —  3.   part,   disband:    pret.    3    pi 

gedieldon  5. 
gedon,  anv.,  do  :  pp.  765  ;  inf.  342,  1444 
gedraeg,  n.    \.tta7inlt,  lamentation:  ns 

1555. —  2.  throng:  ns.  43. 
gedreccan,  Wl,  afflict,  Jorment:  pret 

3  sg.  gedrehte  39. 
gedrefan,    Wl,    trouble,   stir   tip :    pp 

gedrefed  369,  394,  1529. 
gedreosan,  2, /aJJ  azfo'jj' :  inf.  Ap.  100 
gedrep,  n.,  stroke:  as.  1444. 
gedryht,  see  Avillgedryht. 
gedufaii,  2,  sink,  pctietrate:  inf.    1331. 
ged«"ola,    m..   error,  false  belief:    as. 

gedwolan  611,  1688. 


194 


GLOSSARY 


gefSelsian,  W2,  cleanse:  pp.  gefaelsod 

Ap.  66. 
gefaestnian,  Ws.     i.  establish:  pret.  3 

sg.  gefoestnode   522.  —  2.  place,  fix: 

pret.  3  sg.  gefrestnode  1378. 
gef  ea,   m.,  joy,  happiness :    ds.  gefean 

347'  598)  866,  1670,  1693  ;  as.  Ap..8i  ; 

gp.  gefeana  890. 
gefeoht,  n.,  fight,  conflict:  ds.  gefeohte 

1 1 88,  1 1 96. 
gef  eon,  5,-  \v.  inst.,  enjoy :    pret.  3  pi. 

gefegon  592,  659.    See  ferSgefeontle. 
gefeorniian,   W2,  devour :    pret.  3  pi. 

gefeormedon  1090.  -  ' 

gefera,  m.,  ir(^w/««z(?;/ :  as.  geferan  1009,  ^ 

1020.  ,  "^  ,; 

geferan,  Wl,  accomplish,  pass  through  :^ 

2  pi.  geferaS  677  ;  pret.  i  sg.  geferde 
1401  ;    pres.  opt.   i  pi.  gefei'an  ■516;  ' 
inf.  194,  2i6.'  '■-■  '  '    -  ■•    ■ 

geferiau,  W2,  cofidtict,  bring:  pp.^-£f,e-  1 
red  1173,  1619}  npm.  geferede  ?65 ;-- 

inf-  397-  "\    .        ,    ,  ;    ^      .      ,^  ,  ; 

gefra^tAvian,  W2,  ^dbrn,  honor:  pret. 

3  sg.  gef rastwode  1*5 1(8^  pp.  gef rJetWed  ' 

715-  '  h'i.       '  ■■    ■  •    '- 

gefrege,  n.,  knozvledge  :  185,16.26,.  Ap.  25. ,  i . 
gefrege,  adj.,   knozvn,  celehratecl:    nsn.  • 

668,  961,  II 19.  ' '    ■  . 

gefremnian,  Wj,  perform,   cwk^^i   Sg. 
Of  gefremme  1288;  pret.  2  sg.' ^^emi^n'.*; 
"■'d^^t  926;  pret.  3  sg.  gefremed^  gj^|   j 

605,  1^198,  1387;  pret.  3  pi.  gefiien^9^-,j 

dan  1445;  pp.  gef  reined  976;  inf.  191; 

426,  1614;  'ger.  gefremmanne  206. 
gefreoSiau,  ^^4iberate,  setfiree:  pret.  ^-^ 

3  sg.  gefreo'Sode' 1041. 
gefrignan,  3,  learn  of,  ^ear :  pret.  i  sg. 

gefreegn   1093,   1706;  pret.   i  pi.  ge- 

friinan  i  ;  pp.  gefrsegen  687,  1060. 
gefyllan,   Wi,  complete:  pp.  njgn.  ge- 

fylde  1695.  ^i  ._ 

gefyrSraii,   Wl,  support,  protect  :j^. 

gefyrSred  9S3.  .-r. 

gegninga,     adv.,     straightway:     I349>.) 

■354-  ,^i;„. 


gegnslege,  m.,  interchange  of  blows:  ds. 

1356- 
gegretan,  W\,  greet :    pret.   3  sg.  ge- 

grette  254. 
gegrind,    n.,    commotion,    tumult:    as. 

1590. 
gehteftan,    Wl.       i.    bind,   imprison: 

pp.  gehjefted   1127.  —  2.  afflict:   pp. 

npm.  gehasfte  11 58. 
gehalgian,  W2,  consecrate :  pret.  3  sg. 

gehalgode  586,   1650;    pp.  gehalgod 

1646.    '" 
gehatan,  'R,promise :  pret.  2  sg.  gehete 
■--"1418. 
igehealdan,  R,  maintain,  keep :  pret.  2 

pi.  geheoldon.346 ;  inf.  213. 
gehegan,  WM,  perform,  hold  (council  or 

meeting) :    pret.  3  sg.   gehede    1496; 

pret.  3  pi.  gehedon  1 57,  gehedan  1049 ! 

inf.  930. 
gehered,  see  gehyran. 
gehladaii,  6,  load:  pp.  asm.  gehladenne 

361. 
gehnsegan,  Wl,  hzimble:  pres.  opt.  2  pi. 

gehnSgan  1183;  pret.  2  sg.  gehnSg- 

dest  1319;  pret.  3  sg.  gehn^gde  1191. 
gehreodaii,  2,  adorn:  pp.  apm.  gebro- 

dene  1449. 
gehSu,  see  geoh3u. 
gehAA'a,  pron.,  each  :  gsm.  gehwass  912  ; 
■'-  gsf.  gehwSre  630;  gsn.  gehwass  330, 
;<  •338  ;  dsm.  gehwam  65,  637  ;  dsf.  121  ; 
■■  .dsn.  408. 
^ehAVCorfan,  3.      i.    turn,  jail:    pret. 

3' sg.   gehwearf  694,    1103.  —  2.  con- 
^  rOr/Y'  2  sg.  gehweorfest  974. 
gi^livyl^^  pron.,  each,  all:  gsm.  (anra) 

•gf^^yy^§eQ,  1283;     dsm.    gehwylcum 

908,980,  1 152  ;  asm.  (anra)  gehwylcne 

933;  asn.  (landa)  gehwylc  935. 
geliycgftn,'  \¥i,'j-////<^jv:    pret.    2   pi. 

gehogOflWn  429.  ^ 
geliygd,  ii\:,i'm'ii!d\"ihought :  as.  1460; 

ap.   gehygdct  6i8V-  fecfo'.     See  biT'Ost-, 

gjist-,  niisSehj'-gdC    '■   .' 
gehyld,  n., pratli-iiou:  pA.  ,1^7,  1045. 


GLOSSARY 


'95 


gehyran,  Wl.  i.  hear,  learn,  heed 
2  pi.  gehyraS  1197;  pret.  i  sg.  ge 
hyrde  651  ;  pret.  i  pi.  gehyrdon  Ap 
23,  63  ;  pret.  3  pi.  S94  ;  opt.  pret.  2  sg 
gehyrde  574  ;  imper.  2  sg.  geher  1498 
pp.  gehyred  92,  1554,  gehered  168 
inf.  341,  595,  811.  —  2.  receive  hear 
iii^  :  pret.  3  pi.  gehyrdon  577. 

gehyrstan,  Wj,  equip :  pp.  gehyrsted 

45- 
gelac,  n.,  cont/notiou,  conflict:  as.  1092. 

See  liud-,  Ij-ft-,  scingelac. 

gelaca,  sec  <»uOgelaoa. 

gelad,  n.,  'way:  as.  190. 

geltedaii,  Wi.      i.  lead,  conduct:  3  pi. 

gelSdah    2S2 ;    pret.    3  sg.    gelSdde 

1033;  pret.  2  pi.  gelaeddon  430;  inf. 

822.  —  2.    feuture,   risk:    pret.   3  sg. 

gelsedde  Ap.  43. 
gelaug,  adj.,  near  at  hand,  attainable  : 

nsf.  979. 
gelieran,  Wl,  instruct:  inf.  1353. 
gelSstan,  Wl,  support,  help  :  pret.  3  sg. 

gelieste  411. 
gcleafa,  m.,  belief,  faith :  gs.  geleafan 

16S0,  Ap.  66;  as.  335. 
gelenge,  ^.d].,  pertaining  to,  of  the  tui- 

ture  of:  nsf.  1474. 
geleogan,  2,  w.  dat.,  deceive :  pret.  3  sg. 

gelah  1074. 
gelettan,  Wl.     i.   let,  hinder :  inf.  518. 

—  2.  procrastinate  :  inf.  Soo. 
gelic,    adj.,    like  :    asm.    gelicne    494 ; 

superl.  nsm.  gelTcost  497  ;  nsn.  gelic- 

cost  501,  953. 
gelice,  adv.,  like:  superl.  gellcost  1145. 
gelicgaii,  5,  stretch  along:  3  pi.  gelic- 

gaJ'  334- 
gelome,  adv.,  ^^«  :  1163. 
gelyfan,  Wl,  have  faith  in,  trust:    i  sg. 

gelyfe  1284  ;  pret.  3  pi.  gelyfdon  142, 

562,  813;  inf.  733. 
genifel,  adj.,  stained,  spotted:  nsn.  1331. 
gemSne,  adj.,  mutual:  nsf.  1013. 
geniang,    n.,    cotnpany :    ds.  gemange 


gemaTsian,  W2,  celebrate  :  pp.  gemaer- 

sod  544. 
geniearc,  see  fyrst-,  iJinggeniearc. 
geiiiede,   adj.,  pleasant:    superl.    nsn. 

gemedost  594. 
geinet,  n.,  limit,   measure :    as.   gemet 

309,  1481  ;  np.  gemeotu  454. 
geinet,  adj., yf///w^:  nsn.  1178. 
gemetan,  YJ\,  flnd,  meet:   pret.  3  sg. 

gemette  241,  245,  1061  ;   pret.  3  pi. 

gemetton  143,  1082. 
gemot,  n.,  assembly :   ds.  gemote  650 ; 

as.  gemot  1059. 
geinunau,  PP,   remember :   pres.  3  sg. 

geman  639. 
geinyltan,  Wl,  soften,  melt:  inf.  1393. 
geniynfl,  fn.,  memory,  thought :  dp.  ge- 

myndum  960.  See  mod-,  upgemynd. 
gemyndig,   adj.,   mindful:    nsm.    161, 

981,  looi,  1263,  1312,  Ap.  107. 
gemyrran,   Wl,   hinder,    disturb:    pp. 

npm.  gemyrde  746. 
gen,  sec  (Ja  gen. 
gena,  see  nu  gena. 
genc\%"ide,  m.,  answer :  ip.  gencwidum 

858. 
generian,  Wl,  save, preserve:  pp.  apm. 

generede  1037. 
geneO'an,   Wl,   w.  inst.,  voiture,   risk: 

pret.  3  sg.  geneSde  Ap.  17,  50;  inf. 

950,  1351- 
gengan,  see  gangan. 
genrffla,  see  eald-,  man-,  torngenrdla. 
geni^vian,  W2,  reneiu:  pp.genhvad  loio. 
genog,  adj.,  enough  :  nsm.  1534. 
geoc,  f.,  help^  comfort:    ns.  1585;    gs. 

geoce  1030,  1567,  Ap.  108;  as.  11 52. 
geocend,  m..  Comforter,  Lord:  vs.  548; 

as.  901. 
geofa,  see  \^'iIIgeofa. 
geofon,  n.,  ocean:  ns.  393,  1585,  1624; 

gs.  geofones   852 ;   ds.  geofone  498, 

geofene  1531,  161 5;  as.  geofon  150S. 
geogotf,  f.,  young  persons,  youth  :    ns. 

1634;    ds.    geogoSe    152,    161 5;    is. 

eogo'Se  II 22. 


196 


GLOSSARY 


geogo?fhad,  m.,  yoidhfuhiess  :  ds.  geo- 

go'Shade  782. 
geohSu,  f.,  care,  tribulation  :  as.  geohSo 

1665,  gehSo  1548;  dp.  geoh'Sum  1008; 

ap.  geoh'Sa  66. 
geomor,  adj.,  scut:    nsm.   1008,   1408; 

dsm.  geomrum  Ap.  89 ;  isf.  geomrau 

61,  1 1 26.     See  hyge-,  mod-,  srSgeo- 

mor. 
geomorgidd,  n.,  co7nplaiut,  death-soiig: 

ns.  1548. 
geoniormod,   adj.,    sad:    nsm.    1398; 

npm.  geomormode  406. 
geoniriaii,    Wa,  grieve,    sorrow,    ptc. 

npm.  geomriende  1665. 
geond,  prep.  w.  ace,  through,  through- 
out,  over:   25,  42,  331,  332,  371,  576, 

709,     762,     76S,     961,      1 120,      1434, 

1637. 
geong,  adj.,ji'('««:o-:  nsm.  505,  11 50,  Ap. 

57,  geonga  1 1 26 ;  gsm.  geongan  1x17; 

asm.geongne  551,  1 1 10;  npm.  geonge 

392,858;  apm.  1 531,  1624.    ^^^  cUd- 

gcong,  edgiong. 
geongan,  see  gangan. 
geopenian,  Wa,  open,  reveal:  pp.  ge- 

openad  889. 
georn,  adj.,  eager:  nsm.  66,  959.     See 

donigeorn. 
georne,  adv.      i.    zealously,  earnestly: 

612,  1606,  1653;  comp.  geomor  Ap. 

115.  —  2.   certainly,  truly  :  498. 
geotan,  2,  pour,  gush  :    ptc.  nsn.  geo- 

tende   393,   1508,   1590.      See  ageo- 

tan. 
gereordian,  W2,yir^</,  refresh  :  pp.  ge- 

reordod  385. 
gerini,  see  nihtgeriin. 
ger>van,  see  gyrwan. 
geryman,  \Vl,  give  place,  make  rootn  : 

pp.  gerymed  1580. 
geryne,  n.,  secret:  ap.  gerynu  419,  ge- 

ryno  1 5 1 1 .     See  gastgeryne. 
gesielan,    Wl,    befall,    happen:     3    sg. 

gesiele'S  511,  515  ;  pret.  3  sg.  gesaelde 
1:438,  661. 


gesamnian,  \V2,  assemble,  collect :  pret. 

3  pi.  gesamnodon  652,  1636,  gesam- 

nedon    1067;     pp.    gesamnod    109S. 

See  samnian. 
gesceaft,  f.      i.    creation    {heaven   or 

earth):    ns.   1437;   as.  Ap.   116,   122. 

—  2.  creature:    np.  gesceafte    1499; 

gp.  gesceafta  326,  703,  17 17. 
gescenan,  Wl,  break,  wound:  inf.  1142. 
gesceiJtfan,  6,  with  wk.  pret.,  harm,  in- 
jure:  pret.  3  sg.  gesceod  11 76,  wk. 

pret.   gesceode    18;    pret.  opt.  3  sg. 

gesceode  1420;  inf.  917. 
gescirpla,  m.,  garment :  ap.  gescirplan 

250. 
gescnfan,  1,  prescribe,  appoint:   pret. 

3  sg.  gescraf  846 ;  pp.  gescrifen  787 ; 

apm.  gescrifene  297. 
gescyldan,  '^\,protect :  3  sg.  gescylde'5 

434- 
gesoyldend,  m., /r(7/^£-/«7r :  ns.  1291. 
gescyrdan,  \Yi,  veil,  shroud:   pp.  ge- 

scyrded  131 3. 
gescyrigan,  Wl,  allot:  opt.  pres.  2  sg. 

gescyrige  85. 
gesecau,  Wl,  seek,  go  to,  reach  :  pret. 

3  sg.  gesoht^  3S0,  Ap.  32,   39,  62; 

pret.  3  pi.  gesohton   268,   1121;   pp. 

gesohte  845,  1132  ;  inf.  175,  1701,  Ap. 

93;  ger.  gesecanne  295,  424. 
gesecgan,    Wl,  tell,   say:    pret.   3   sg. 

gessegde  384 ;  inf.  603,  624. 
gesellan,  ^\,grant,  give  up  (life) :  pret. 

3  sg.   gesealde   Ap.    58 ;    pret.  3  pi. 

gesealdon  433,  1616,  Ap.  85;  pp.  ge- 

seald  646,  909,  1435. 
geseon,  5.     i.  see,  behold:  3  pi.  geseoS 

1 500 ;   pret.    i  sg.   geseah  493,   499 ; 

pret.  3  sg.  1492,  1690,  geseh  714,  847, 

992,    1004,    1009,    1448;    pret.    I   pi. 

gesegon  455,   881  ;    imper.  2  sg.  ge- 

seoh  1281,  1441  ;  inf.  760,  987,  1714, 

geslon  1225. — 2.  rei[.  see  one  another : 

inf.  1013.  —  3.  receive  sight:  pret.  3  pi. 

gesegon  581. 
geset,  n.,  habitation  :  ap.  gesetu  1259. 


GLOSSARY 


197 


gesettaii,  Wl,  appoint:  pret.  3  sg.  ge- 

sette  1647;  pp.  geseted  156. 
"•osiohiV,  g,esih'<J,  see  gesyhff. 
gesittan,    5,    sit:     pret.    3    sg.    gesxt 

359,     1063  ;      pret.     3    pi.    gesxton 

1161. 
gesu^,  see  ealdgesiTF. 
gespann,  n.,  ri)!g,  spangle:  as.  302. 
gespo>van,  R  impers.  w.  dat.,  succeed: 

pret.  3  sg.  gespeow  1344. 
gesprec,  n.,  speech:  as.  577. 
gesp;recan,  5,  speak  :  pret.  i  sg.  gesprasc 

9-3- 
gestandan,  R,  stand :  pret.  3  sg.  gestod 

707. 
gesta'ppan,  6,  step :  pret.  3  sg.  gestop 

.5S2. 
gestacyolian,    Ws,    establish,  fashion : 

pret.  3  sg.  gesta'Selode  162,  gesta'So- 

lade  536. 
gesteald,  see  Aviildorgesteald. 
gestealla,  sec  liiidgestealla. 
g^stigan,  1,  inotint,   etiter  •  pret.  i  sg. 

gestah  899  ;  inf.  222. 
gestillan,  Wl,  become  qiiiet:  pret.  3  sg. 

gestilde  532. 
gestreon,  n.,  possession,  treasure :   ap. 

Ap.   83.     See  feoh-,  heah-,  hord-, 

sinogestreon. 
gesAvencan,   \Vi,   torment,  afflict:  pp. 

geswenced  116,  394. 
gesA>ncan,  l,  w.  dat.,  cease,  depart:  i  sg. 

geswice  1290. 
gesAviiig,  n.,  surge,  beating,  swell:  as. 

352- 
geswingan,  .?,  afflict:    pp.  geswungen 

1 396.     See-  SAviiigan. 
gesAATOan,  Wl,  strengthen:  pp.  geswT- 

■Jied  697,  701. 
gesyhiT,  f.,  sight:  ds.  gesyh'J?e  705,  ge- 

sieh^'e  620  ;  as.  gesih'5  30. 
gesyne,   adj.,  tnanifest:  nsn.  526,  549, 

1602;  gpn.  gesynra  565. 
get^can,  Wl,  instruct,  indicate;  pret. 

3  sg.  getShte  6:  opt.  pret.  2  sg.  ge- 

tiehte  4S5.  / 


getacnian,  W2,  express,  symbolize:  pret. 

3  sg.  getacnode  1512. 
getsiii,  see  agetan. 
-gete,  see  orgete. 
gctcllan,  Wl,  tell,  count:    pp.  geteled 

665,  1035,  apm.  getealde  883. 
geteon,  Wa,  appoint,  order  :  pret.  3  sg. 

geteode  14. 
getihhian,    W2,    consider,    claim  :    pp. 

getihhad  1320. 
gctiinbran,  Wl.     i.  build:  pp.  getim- 
bred    667;    inf.    1633.  —  2.  confirm: 
imp.  2  sg.  getimbre  1671. 
getingan,  3,  w.  dat.,  press  upon :  pret. 

3  sg.  getang  138. 
getrahtian,  Wa,  consider :  pp.  getrah- 

tod  1359.      [Cf.  Lat.  tractare^ 
getreoAve,  2id].,  faithful:  nsm.  984. 
getrum,  n.,  troop  :  is.  getrume  707. 
geSanc,  m.,  thought,  mind:  ds.  gei^ance 

237.     See  ingeJfanc. 
ge'ffancul,   adj.,  thoughtful,  sagacious: 

nsm.  gel'ancul  462. 
geSeon,  \, grow, prosper,  in  pp.  virtuous, 

excellent:  pp.  ge)jungen  528. 
go«Ving,  n.     i.  fate,  experience,  destiny  ; 
gp.  geHnga  1598  ;  ap.  ge^ingu  756.  — 
2.  appoiiitme)it,    comtnand :     ds.    ge- 
)nnge  794.     See  guSgeiSingu. 
goSofta,  see  treoAvge<Jofta. 
ge'Oolit,   m.,   thought,    meditation :    gp. 

gel^ohta  744. 
getSolian,  W^2,  suffer,  endure :  pret.  3  sg. 
ge'Solode  1490;    imper.  2  sg.  ge^ola 
107;     ger.    ge'Solianne    1136,   ge}>oli- 
genne  1659.  gejiolienne  1689. 
geO'raec,  n.,  tumult,  violence  :  as.  gej^rasc 

823. 
geSreatian,   Ws,  suppress,   overcome : 

pp.  ge  Sreatod  436,  geJ>reatod  1115. 
gearing,  n.,  crowd,  tumult :  as.  368. 
getfi'iiigan,  3,  approach,  draw  near:  pp. 

gehrungen  990. 
geO'yldig,  see  niodgeSyldig. 
geO'yn,  Wl,  rebuke,  subjugate :  pp.  ge'Syd 
436- 


198 


GLOSSARY 


geunnan,  3,  w.  gen.,  grant:    inf.  179, 

1131. 
ge\vadan,  6,  arise,  come:    pret.   3  sg. 

gewod  1246. 
gCAvaetan,  Wl,  wet:    pp.  npf.  gewstte 

375- 
gewealc,  n.,  rolling,  tossing:  as.  259. 
ge^veald,  n.,/('7tw  :  as.  518,  1273,  1317, 

1 61 9.     See  £ehtge weald, 
gewealdan,  R,  w.  inst.,  rule:  inf.  1365. 
geAveniinan,  Wl,  spot,  defile :   pp.  ge- 

wemmed  1471. 
geweorc,  n.,/al>riaition  :  as.  1077  ;  ap. 

1495.     -^^^  ter-,  fyrngeAveorc. 
geweorp,  n.,  ridge,  heap :  as.  306.     See 

^vintergeworp. 
geweorSan,  3.     i.  happen,  take  place: 

3  sg.  geweorSe'S  1437  ;  3  pi-  geweor- 

'Sa'5   1 500 ;    pret.  opt.  3  sg.  gewurde 

558  ;  inf.  730,  gewyrSan  573-—  2.  be- 
come, be  :  pret.  3  sg.  gewear'5  167,  804  ; 

pret.  opt.  2  sg.  gewurde  550  ;  pp.  apm. 

gewordne  457.  —  3.  occur,  befall  (im- 

pers.)  :  pret.  3,  sg.  gewear'S  307. 
geweorSian,  W2,  honor :  3  sg.  geweor- 

"SaS    938;     pp.    geweor^od   Ap.  15, 

gewyr'Sod  1 1 6. 
gCAviun,  n.     i.  conflict,  tmnult:  as.  197, 

932.  —  2.  sorrow,    trouble:    ns.    888. 

See  gar-,  gutf-,  hand-,  ^yal•u'^ge- 

winn. 
gfi\\\\vi\Vi,ra..,  opponent,  rival:  as.gewin- 

nan  1197,  1249,  1301. 
gewitan,  1,  go:  pret.  3  sg.  gewat  118, 

225,  235,  655,  696,  706,  786,  977, 1044, 

1058,  1247,   1304,    1457,    1675;  pret. 

3  pi.  gewiton  1594,  geweotan  801. 
gewitt,  n.,   mind,   understanding:    ds. 

gewitte  212,  316,  470,  552,  672,  769, 

1265,  Ap.  87  ;  as.  gewit  35,  645. 
gewlitigian,  W2,  beautify,  adorn  :  pp. 

gewlitegod  669,  gewlitegad  543. 
gCAvorp,  see  A\intergeworp. 
ge'wunian,   W2.       i.    acco?npany,  stay 

•with:   inf.   1661.  —  2.   remain,  abide: 

inf.  279. 


ge^vyrcan,    Wl.       i.  fashion,    make: 

pret.  3  pi.  geworhton  1073  >  PP-  ^P^- 

geworhte    716.  —  2.    deserve:     pret. 

I  sg.  geworhfe  920. 
gewyrht,  n.,  deed:  dp.  gewyrhtum  1366, 

1611  ;    gewyrht,  case  indeterminable, 

1025. 
ge-wyrhta,  m.,   doer :    dp.  gewyrhtum 

1180. 
ge^vyrSian,  see  ge^veor^ian. 
gejlipan,    Wl,    reveal:     pp.    geypped 

1223. 
giccl,  see  cylegicel. 
gidd,  n.,  song:  gs.  giddes  Ap.  89.     See 

geoniorgidd. 
giddung,  see  leoSgiddung. 
giellan,  "A,  yell:  pret.  3  pi.  gullon  127. 
gif,  n.,  gift,  grace  :  'as.  575. 
gif,  conj.,  if:  70,  21c,  212,  288,344,407, 

417,  460,   479,   482,  557,  1350,   1424, 

1521,  1568,  1612. 
gifa,    see   blajd-,    ead-,    sjinbelgifa, 

Avlllgeofa. 
gifan,  5,  give:   3  sg.  gifeS  1151  ;   pret. 

3  sg.  geaf  317;   opt.  pres.  3  sg.  gife 

388.     See  a-,  for-,  ofgifaii. 
gifeQ'e,  \\.,fate,  chance :  ns.  1066 ;  as.  489. 
gif  re,  2.d].,' greedy:    dpf.  gif  rum    1335. 

See  ■«  Eelgifre. 
gifu,  f.,  gift:  as.  480,  530,  548,  754  ;  ip. 

geofum  551,  giofum  1519.     ^^^sinc-, 

Muldorgifu. 
gild,  n.,   idol:   ap.  13 19.     See  deofol-, 

hjedenglld. 
gildan,  3,  bestoiu,  grant:    3  sg.  gildeS, 

Ap.  119.     6"^^  forgildaii. 
giman,  Wl,  w.  gen.,  regard,  be  heedful : 

pret.  3  pi.  gimdon  139. 
giiiiin,  xn.,  gem,  jewel:   ns.  gim  1268; 

gp.    gimma    1519.        [Lat.    gemma."] 

See  heafodgimm. 
giiian,  see  toginan. 
gingra,  m.,  disciple:  np.  gingran  S94, 

1330;  ap.  427,  847. 
ginn,  adj.,  spacious,  broad:  asm.  ginne 

3Z^' 


GLOSSARY 


199 


giiiiinu,  sec  oiig,iiiiiaii. 

git,  adv.,  yet,  furihe}-:   1487.     See  Oil 

git,  iiu  gyt. 
gitaii,  sec  be-,  ongitaii. 
g'la'diiiod,    adj.,    luxppy,  joyful:    nsm. 

1059. 
g•lea^v,  adj.,  wise:  nsm.  557,  817,  1497, 

Ap.  96;   asm.  gleawne  1648,  glawne 

143.     See  a'glea^v. 
gleaAvlice,  adv.,  loisely:  427,  861. 
gleaivmod,  adj.,  7vise  of  mind:   nsm. 

1579- 
glidaii,  1,  glide,  go :   3  sg.  glideS  498 ; 

pret.  3  sg.  glad  371  ;  inf.   1248,  1304. 

See  toglidan. 
gnast,  see  f  yrgiiast. 
guoruhof,    n.,    house    of  sorroia :     ds. 

gnomhofe  1008,  1043. 
god,  m.     I.   God:  n.  14,  91,  260,  326, 

425,  459'  534.  563.  703,  751.  758,  894, 
925,  1 143,  1335,  1376,  1462,  1510, 
1661,  1717;  g.  godes  117,  234,  560, 
747.  776.  794.  999'  1028,  1045,  1613, 
1634,  1644,  1647,  -A^P-  65;  d.  gode 
205,958,  ion,  1150,  1398,  1579,  1620, 
Ap.  115;  a.  god  275,  657,  760,  785, 
1030,  1 188,  1387;  V.  god  76,897,  1 28 1, 
1409,  1415. —  2.  in  the  pi.,  heathen 
gods:  gp.  goda  1319  ;  ap.  godu  Ap.  49. 

^o(\,  n.,  prosperity,  happiness  :  is.  gode 
406,  1 61 7;  gp.  goda  338. 

god,  adj.,  ^^ood :  asm.  godne  480,  922. 
See  bctera,  selra. 

godboarn,  n.,  son  of  God:  ns.  640. 

godcund,  adj.,  divine :  gsm.  godcundes 
Ap.  114. 

godfyrht,  adj.,  Godfearing:  asm.  god- 
fyrhtne  1022;  npm.  godfyrhte  1516. 

godspell,  n.,  ^^j/^/:  as.  12. 

gold,  n.,^^A/:  ds.  golde  1508;  as.  gold 

30 1'  33^- 
goldburg,  f.,  io7i'n  :  as.  1655. 
gong,  see  gang, 
gongan,  see  gangan. 
grgedig,  adj.,  i,'';v(.'(/r:  npm.  gr^dige  155. 

See  heoro-,  vvailgrtedig. 


grafan,  see  agrafan. 

grSJg,  adj.,  gray  :  nsm.  graega  371. 

gram,  adj.,  angry,  hostile  :  npm.  grame 

917,  grome   563;   gpm.  giamra  217, 

951,  1059. 
grainliydig,  adj.,   hostile:   gsm.  gram- 

hydiges  1694. 
grap,  f.,  clutch, grip  :  dp.  giapum  1335. 
^veiw,s.(}i].,  green  :  apm.  776.    See  ea\\- 

grene. 
greet,  w.,  ground,  beach  :  ds.  gieote  238, 

254.  425.  794'  847.  1084,  1624. 
gretan,  Wi,  greet,  address:  pret.  3  sg. 

grette  61,  1030,  1464;  inf.  1022.     SeS 

gegretan. 
grinini,  adj.,y?^;T^  :  asf.  grimme  1387; 

asn.    grim    958;      npn.    1365;     gpf. 

grimra    1487.      See   heoro-,    hete-, 

waelgrini. 
grind,  see  gegrind. 
grindan,  3,  grind,    dash :    pret.    3   pi. 

grundon  373.     See  forgrindan. 
gripe,  m.,  clutch,  grip:    as.  gripe  187, 

217'  951- 
grom,  see  gram. 

grund,  m.     i.  deepi ocean  :  ns.  393,425. 

—  2.    abyss:    ns.    1590;    as.    1595. — 

3.  ground,  earth:    ds.  grunde    1528; 

as.  grund  331,   747,   1600;   dp.  grun- 

dum  640;  ap.  grundas  776. 
grund-xvaeg,  m.,  earth  :  ds.  grundwsege 

582. 
grynsini'S,  m.,  evil-doer  :   np.  grynsmi- 

^'as  917. 
gryrehAvD,    f.,  period   of  terror :    ds. 

gryrehwlle  468. 
gryrelic,  adj.,  terrible:  nsn.  1551. 
guma,  m.,  ma)i:  ns.  11 17;  np.  guman 

1516;    gp.  gumena  20,  6i,  575,  5S2, 

621,  986,  1152,  1615. 
gumoyst,  f.,  virtue,  right  practice :  ip. 

gumcystum  1606. 
gu3,  f.,  luar,  battle:  ns.  951  ;  ds.  gii^'e 

234.  1330;   as.  1349,  1354;   gp.  guSa 

1487. 
guSfrec,  adj.,  bold  in  battle:  nsm.  1 1 17. 


200 


GLOSSARY 


guSfreca,  m.,  warrior:  gs.  guSfrecan 

1333- 
guSgelaca,  m.,  luarrior:  np.  gu'Sgela- 

can  1600. 
giitfgeSingu,   npl.,   battle,   contest :    ap. 

guSge'Singu  1022,  gu'SgeHngo  1043. 
giiSfgcwiiin,  n.,  battle:  ns.  217. 
guSh^vaet,   adj.,   bold  in   battle :   nsm. 

■Ap.  57. 
gu(Jplega,    m.,    battle:    ds.    gu'Splegan 

1369,  Ap.  22. 
gutfrajs,  m.,  rush  of  battle:  ns.  153I- 
gu?Jrinc,   m.,  warrior:    np.   gu'Srincas 

_i55.  392- 
guiffsearu,  n.,  ivar  armor :  np.  gu'Ssearo 

127. 
giicJAveorc,     n.,     war -deed:     gp.    guS- 

weorca  1066. 
gyldan,  see  ongyldaii. 
gylp,  m.,  boast:  as.  1333. 
gyrn,  n.,  sorro'cu,  affliction :    ds.  gyrne 

1 1 50,  1585. 
gyrran,  3,    sound,    creak :    pret.   3   pi. 

gurron  374. 
gy^^van,  Wl,  get  ready,  prepare :  inf. 

795,  1698,  gerwan  1634. 
gystrandtege,  z.6m.,  yesterday  :  852. 
gyt,  see  git;   uu,  <Ja  gyt. 

H 

habban,  Wa,  ha%'e :  i  sg.  hasbbe  897 ; 
2  sg.  hafast  357,  507,  1320;  3  sg. 
hafaS   Ap.   73;     i    pi.   habba'5   687; 

2  pi.  296 ;  pret.  2  sg.  hsefdes  530 ; 
pret.  3  sg.  haefde  534,  787,  844,  856, 
987,990,  1060,  1063,  1 169,  1 241 ;  pret 

3  pi.  haefdon  134,  149,  785,  1131 ;  opt 
pres.  2  sg.  hffibbe  1521;  opt.  pres.  3  sg, 
1 164;  opt.  pres.  3  pi.  habban  976 
imper.  2  sg.  hafa  223  ;  imper.  2  pi.  hab 
baS  1358.     See  bchabban,  nabban 

luebbend,  sec  searoha^bbend. 

Habraliiim,  see  Abraham. 

had,  m.,  nature,  form  :  ds.  hi|de  Ap.  27 

as.  had  912.    ^S'^'c' apostol-,  geoguJJ- 

had. 


hador,  adj.,  bright:  nsm.  83S ;  nsn. 
1456,  hadre  89. 

haeft,  m.  i.  captivity:  ds.  haefte  1399, 
1470.  —  2.  captive:  np.  hasftas   1070. 

haeftan,  see  gehteftan. 

haeftling,  m.,  captive:  ns.  1342. 

haga,  see  anhaga. 

haegelscur,  m.,  hail-storm  :  ip.  haegel- 
scurum  1257. 

hal,  adj.  i.  healthy,  well:  nsm.  914. 
—  2.  whole,  uninjured,  sound:  nsm. 
1470;  gsm.  hales  1467.    ^5"^^  Avanhal. 

haele,  m.,  hero:  ns.  1002;  as.  144. 

hS'lend,  m.,  Savior:  g.  hielendes 
574,  735;  a.  hSlend  1031  ;  v.  541, 
1407. 

haeleS,  m.,  hero,  man:  ns.  919,  1556; 
as.  1005,  1273;  vs.  484,  624;  np.  50, 
362,561,612,  1024,  1054,  haelej>38; 
gp.  haeleSa  21,  200,  396,  494,  545, 
567,692,885,  907,  1197,  1258,  1269, 
1463;  dp.  haeleSum  668;  ap.  hsele'S 
2,  883,  996,  1607. 

halgian,  see  gehalgian. 

halig,  adj.,  holy,  the  holy  one,  saint: 
nsm.  14,  91,  461,  542,  loio,  1 144, 
1252,  halga  118,  168,  225,  346,  359, 
382,  977,  996,  1029,  1045,  1253,  1307, 
1395,  1607,  1687,  Ap.  60;  nsf.  halig 
243;  nsn.89,  1018;  gsm.  haliges  531, 
654,  709,'^T^r^93,  1000,  1389,  1478, 
15S6,  162 1,  halgan  1238;  dsm.  48, 
467,  1222,  131 5,  1683,  Ap.  9;  asm. 
haligne  144,  481,  loio,  1614,  halgan 
831,  1171,  1566,  Ap.  90;  asf.  halige 
1520;  asn.  halig  14 18,  Ap.  53;  isf. 
halgan  56,  537,  873,  1399,  1456;  npm. 
halige  885;  gp.  haligra  725;  dp.  hal- 
gum  1720  ;  apm.  halige  875  ;  apf.  Ap. 
63;  ip.  halgum  32S,  723,  1054,  hale- 
gum  104.     See  heofonhalig. 

ha'lo,  f.,  health  :  as.  95. 

ham,  m.,  home:  gs.  hames  Ap.  118; 
ds.  ham  1683;  as.  227,  978,  Ap.  92; 
gp.  hama  104. 

hainer,  m.,  hammer:  gp.  hamera  1077. 


GLOSSARY 


201 


hainsittond,  m.,  one  dwelling  at  home  : 

np.  hamsittende  686. 
hand,   f.,    Iiaiid:    ns.    9,    17,  412;    as. 

941,    141 7,   Ap.    60;    ap.    handa   48, 

1222. 
haiidgo'winii,  11.,  struggle,  coijlict:  ds. 

haiulgewinne  1S6. 
Iiaiidhrinc,  m.,  touch  of  the  hand:  as. 

1000. 
handina>gon,  n.,  strength  0/ the  hands: 

as.  725. 
ha;*,  adj.,  hoary, gray :  asm.  harne  841 ; 

npm.  hare  1258. 
harii,  f.,  wave,  sea  :  ns.  531. 
ha's,  f.,  command :  as.  1520,  1586. 
hat,  adj.,  hot:  nsm.   1709;  asm.  hatne 

1 187;    ism.   hatan    1542;    isn.    1241, 

1277.     See  brandliat. 
hata,  see  scyldhata. 
hataii,    R.      i.    bid,    command:    3   sg. 

hate 6'  1505  ;  pret.  i  sg.  het  931  ;  pret. 

3  sg.  het  330,  587,  792,  795,  807,  822, 

1145,  1575,  1623,  1632,  Ap.  68,  heht 

365,  1466,  Ap.  45;  pret.  3  pi.  heton 

1229,    1272,    1390.  —  2.    name:    pp. 

haten  686.     See  gehatan. 
ha''Oen,adj.,//^rt///^«  :  nsm.  Ap.46  ;  gsm. 

hseSnes    1238;    dsf.   hSSenan    1491  ; 

dsn.    hJe'Senum    1144;     asf.    hie'Sene 

Ap.  60,  hsiSenan   in;    np.  hS'Sene 

1002,    1 124,    hSSne    126,    1070;    gp. 

hSSenra    186,   218,    957,    992,'  1032, 
J389. 
ha'cTeiigild,  n.,  idol,  idolatry:  dp.  hae- 

(Sengildum  1102;  ap.  hsSengild  Ap. 

47- 
he,  pron.,  he:  nsm.  51,  53,  54,  etc. ;  nsn. 
hit  695,  765,  1323,  1393,  1563;  gsmn. 
his  50,  60,  94,  164,  etc.;  dsmp.  him 
45,  57,  118,  145,  etc.;  asm.  hine  502, 
551,  820,  943,  1 143,  1326,  1335,  1564, 
1698,  Ap.  97  ;  asf.  hie  980,  1 1 54  ;  asn. 
hit  149,  210,  1231,  1514  ;  np.  hie  5,  23, 
26,  31,  etc.;  gp.  hira  3,  11^  25,  140, 
etc.;  dp.  him  5,  17,  27,  33,  etc.;  ap. 
hie  254,  464,  613,  795,  etc. 


heafod,  n.,  head:  gs.  heafdes  50;  ds. 

heafde  1423,  1472,  Ap.  46. 
hOatbdg'iniin,  m.,  eye:  ap.  heafodgim- 

mas  31. 
hcafodiiiaga,  m.,  near  kinsman :    as. 

heafodmagan  942. 
hcalbla,  m.,  head:  as.  heafolan  1142. 
heah,    adj.,  high:   nsn.  668;    isn.  hea 

274. 
heahoyning,  xr^., great  king.  Lord:  ns.  6. 
hoaheiigel,  m.,  archangel:  np.  heaheng- 

las  S85. 
heahfaider,  m.,  patriarch  :    gp.  heah- 

fffidera  791  ;  ap.  heahfsderas  875.     • 
heahgesti'f'on,  n.,  great  treasure :   ip. 

heahgestreonum  362. 
hoahiveced,  n.,  great  hall:  as.  708. 
heahstefii,     adj.,      high-pro-wed     or 

-stemmed:   nsm.   266. 
healdan,  R,  hold,  preserve,  keep :  i  sg. 

healde  336,  915,  1432;  3  pi.  healdaj> 

176;  pret.  3  pi.  heoldon  1514.     See 

gehealdan. 
healdend,  m.,  keeper,  ruler:  ns.  225. 
hcalf,  f.,  side  :  ds.  healfe  1063  ;  ap.  715. 
heals,  see  faniigheals. 
healt,  adj.,  lame:  dp.  healtum  578. 
hean,  adj.,  abject,  wretched:  nsm.  89 1, 

1087,  1367,  1557;  asm.  heanne  1191. 
heap,   m.,  throng,  company :    ns.  870 ; 

ds.  heape  Ap.  9  ;  as.  heap  Ap.  90;  is. 

heape  696;  ip.  heapum  126. 
heard,  adj.     i.  bold,  resolute :  nsm.  233, 

839,  982,  1399.  —  2.  grievous,  severe : 

nsm.  1395;  nsf.  1562;  asn.  1092;  gp. 

heardra  1445,  1470,  1491 ;  ip.heardum 

952,  1257;  comp.  asm.  heardran  1402. 

—  3.  hard:   asm.  heardne  .739.     See 

eeg-,  ellen-,  Wide-,  seur-,  <5roht- 

heard. 
hearcle,  adv.,  sternly,  severely  :  1.8. 
heardlie,  adj .,  sei'ere,  destructive :  nsm. 

1551- 
hearni,  m.,  harm,  injury,  contumely :  as. 
hearm    1071,    1367;    is.   herme   671; 
gp.  hearma  1198,  1445. 


202 


GLOSSARY 


hearmcwide,  m.,  calmnny,  blasphe7ny : 

as.  79,  561. 
hearmleoiS,  n.,  covt plaint,  song  of  grief : 

as.  1127,  1342. 
hearmloca,  m.,/;'/^;^:  ds.  hearmlocan 

95'  1029. 
heaSoirSenrte,  m.,  sailor:  dp.  hea'SolI- 

Sendum  426. 
hea'ffoAvaelin,  va..,  fierce  billow :  is.  hea'So- 

wselme  1542. 
hebban,  6.     i.  raise:  pp.  hsefen  1155. 

—  2.  celebrate:  pp.  haefen  1643.     See 

ahebban. 
hogaii,  see  gehegan. 
hegende,  see  maeSelhegende. 
hehSu,  f.,  height,  glory  :  ds.  heh^'o  873, 

998,  1 1 44,  Ap.  118. 
helan,  4,  conceal:  opt.  3  sg.  hele  1164. 

See  behelan. 
hell,  f.,  hell:  gs.  helle  1052,  129S,  1342, 

1703  ;  ds.  1 187. 
hellcraeft,  m.,  hellish  art:  ip.  hellcraef- 

tum  1 102. 
hellehinca,  m.,   hell-limper,  devil:  ns. 

1171. 
hellfus,  adj.,  bound  for  hell:  npm.  hell- 
fuse  50. 
helltraef,  n.,  heathen  temple:  dp.  hell- 

trafum  1691. 
helm,  m.   i.  helmet :  as.  10.  —  2.  guard- 
ian:   ns.    118,   277,   623,     655.      See 

iiihthelin. 
helma,   m.,  helm,  rudder :  ds.  helmau 

396. 
helmlan,  Wa,  conceal,  cover:  pret.  3  sg. 

helmade  1305. 
heliuAveard,  m.,  pilot :  ds.  helmwearde 

359- 
help,  f.,  help:  ns.  907;  gs.  helpe  1031, 

1566,  Ap.  90;  ds.  1605;  as.  91,  426, 

1614. 
hengest,  see  brim-,  steheiigest. 
henSu,    f.,    hitmiliation :    dp.    hen'Sum 

117,  1467. 
heofan,  2,  lament:  ptc.  nsm.  heofende 

1557- 


heofon,  m.,  heaven:  ns.  1438;  gs.  heo- 

fonas  1 501 ;  as.  heofon  748,  hefon  32S ; 

gp.  heofona6, 192, 1505, 1683;  dp.heo- 

fonum  1452,  heofenum  89,  168,  195  ; 

ap.  heofonas  977.     See  lipheofon. 
heofoncandel,  f .,  snji :  ns.  243. 
heofoncyning,  m.,  heavenly  king:  gs. 

heofoncyninges  92,   723,  998,   1381  ; 

ds.  heofoncynmge  821. 
heofonhalig,  adj.,  of  celestial  holiness: 

nsm.  728. 
heofonh\vealf,  f.,  z'anlt  of  heaven  :  ds. 

heofonhwealfe  545,  1402. 
heofoiileoht,    n.,    heavenly   light:    ds. 

heofonleohte  974. 
heofoiileoma,   m.,   heavenly  radiance: 

ns.  838. 
heofonlic,  adj.,  heavenly  :  asm.  heofon- 

iTcne  3S9. 
heofourico,  w.,  kingdom  of  heaven:  gs. 

heofonrices  52,  56,  1052. 
heofontorht,    adj.,     heavenly    bright: 

nsm.  1269;  nsn.  1018. 
hoofouiUrymm,  xa..,  heavenly  glory  :  ds. 

heofonJ>rymme  481,  1720. 
heolfor,  n.,  blood,  gore:  is.  heolfre  1241, 

1277. 
heolstor,   m.,    darkness :    ds.    heolstre 

243;  as.  heolstor  1191. 
heolstorloca,  m.,  dark  place,  prison : 

d.  or  as.  heolstorlocan  144,  1005. 
Iieolstorscu-\va,  m.,  darkness  :  d.  or  as. 

heolstorscuwan  1253. 
heonan,  adv.,  Iience:  Ap.  109,  heonon 

891. 
-heore,  see  miheore. 
heorodreorig,  adj.,  blood-stained :  npm. 

heorodreorige  1083;  apm.  996. 
heorograidig,  adj.,  bloodthirsty:    npm. 

heorogrSdige  38  ;  gpm.  heorugrSdig- 

ra  79. 
heorogrimm,  adj.,  warlike:  npm.  heo- 

rogrimme  31. 
lieorte,  f.,  heart:  ds.  heortan  52,  1252, 

1709  ;  as.  36,  1 2 13.    See  bllff-,  oald-, 

mildlieort. 


GLOSSARY 


203 


heorutlols,  n.,  suwrd-iooiuui:  ip.  heoiu- 

dolgum  942. 
heornsAveiig,  vi\.,s'ivord-stroke:  ip.  heo- 

ruswengum  952. 
\iKV,z.<k\- .,  here,  liillier  :  724,  1173,  1562, 

A  p.  96. 
hcrdan,  Wl,  confirm,  strengthen:   im- 

per.  2  sg.  herd  1213. 
here, m.,  host,  artny, throng:  gs.  heriges 

1 106,  1 156,  1202,  1238,  Ap.  21  ;  ds. 

herige    1127,    1198;    as.    here    11 24, 

1^187 ;    np.  herigeas   652,    1067;    gp. 

herigea  1501. 
herefeld,  m.,  battlefield:  ds.  herefelda 

10,  18. 
heremjegen,  n.,  army,  multitude :   ds. 

heremcegene  586,  728,  1298,  1650. 
herestrait,    f.,    army-road :     ds.    here- 

straete  831  ;  np.  herestrseta  200. 
Lereteam,  m.,  plunder,   devastation  ? : 

ns.  1551. 
herian,  '^l, praise,  glorify:  3  pi.  heri- 

gaJS  722  ;  pret.  3  sg.  herede  52,  819, 

998,  1267,  1455;  pret.  3  pi.  heredon 

S73  ;   ptc.  npm.  herigende  657. 
lierig,  m.,  heathen  temple:  ap.  herigeas 

1687. 
herlgw'eard,  m.,  guardian  of  the  tem- 
ple: np.  herigweardas  11 24. 
herm,  see  hearm. 
Herodes,  pr.  n.,  Herod:  ns.  1324;  ds. 

Herode  Ap.  36. 
hete,  m.,  hate :  ds.  944.    See  bill-,  leod-, 

iii3-,  Avjepenliete. 
hetegrinim,    adj.,  fierce,   cruel:    nsm. 

1395;  nsf.  1562. 
heterof, adj.,  hostile:  gp. heterofra  1420. 
hettend,  m.,  enemy:  np.  31. 
liider,  adv.,  hither:    207,   1604,  hyder 

1024. 
hidercyme,  m.,   cof/iing,  arrival:    as. 

1316. 
hig,  n.,  hay  :  ns.  38. 
hij>e,  see  liyge. 
higebirff,  adj.,  blithe  of  mind:  asf.  hige- 

bliiSe  1 69 1. 


liigcrof,  adj.,  bold  of  mind:  nsm.  233; 

asm.  higerofne  1003;   npm.  higerofe 

1054. 
hiht,  see  hyht. 
Iiild,  f.,  battle,  war  :  ns.  1420  ;  ds.  hilde 

412  ;  gp.  hilda  1491. 
Iiildbedd,  n.,  death-bed:  ns.  1092. 
liildecorSor,  n.,  luar-troop  :   is.  hilde- 

corSre  Ap.  41. 
hlldedeor,  adj.,  bold  in  battle  :  ns.  1002. 
hlldeheard,  adj.,  brave  in  battle:  nsm. 

Ap.  21. 
hilde'Oryniin,  m.,   valor  in  battle:  ds. 

hildelnymme  1032. 
hilde^voIlla,  m.,  sound  of  battle:    as. 

hilde  woman  218. 
hildfreea,  m.,  zvarrior:  np.  hildfrecan 

126,  1070. 
hildfrom,  adj.,  brave  in  battle:  npm. 

hildfrome  1202. 
taildlata,  m.,  one  slow  in  battle,  coward: 

ns.  233. 
hildstapa,  m.,  warrior:  np.  hildstapan 

1258. 
liiiica,  see  hellehinca. 
hm',  n.,   appearance,  countenance:    ns. 

725;  as.  1 169. 
hladan,  see  gehladan. 
hlaf,  m.,  bread:  gs,  hlafes^2i,  312  ;  as. 

hlaf  389  ;   dp.  hlafum  590. 
hlaford,  m.,  lord:  ds.  hlaforde  412. 
hlafordleas,  *dj .,  without  a  lord :  npm. 

hlafordlease  405. 
lileahtor,   m.,    laughter :     is.    hleahtre 

1703- 
hleapan,  see  alileapan. 
hleo,  n.     I.  cover,  protection:  ds.   iii, 

567  ;  as.  832.  —  2.  protector :  ns.  896, 

1450  ;  vs.  506,  1672.  • 
hleoleas,  adj.,  cheerless:  asm.  hleolea- 

san  131. 
hleotaii,  2.      I.    receive,    obtain:    2   sg. 

hleotest  480.  —  2.  cast  lots  :  pret.  3  pi. 

hluton  1 102. 
hlf'o'iVor,  n.,  noise,  talk:  ns.  739,  1551  ; 

ip.  hleob'rum  723.    ^'t^tf  AvordlileotJor. 


204 


GLOSSARY 


hleotJorc^A-ide,  m.,  speaking,  words : 
as.  893;  dp.  hleo'6"orcwidum  1621; 
ip.  Si 9. 

hleoSrian,  Wa,  speak,  talk :  pret.  3  sg. 
hIeoiSrode  461,  hleo'Srade  537,  1360, 
hl5"5rode  1430;  pret.  3  pi.  hleo'Srodon 
692. 

hlldan,  see  on-,  tohlidan. 

hliehhan,  see  ahliehhan. 

hiifiau,  W2,  to7i)er,  stattd  high  :  pret. 
3  pi.  hlifodon  841. 

hlinduru,  f.,/;vj-(7«-(/<)t;r  :  ds.  hlindura 

993- 
hlinraeced,  n., /r/i-^;; :  as.  1463. 
liliiiseu-«^a,  m.,  darkness  of  p7-isoii :  as. 

hlinscuwan  1071. 
hliS,  n.,   slope,   hill:     np.   hleoSu   841. 

See  sand-,  stanlili??. 
hlosnian,   W2,   listen,   hearken :    pret. 

3  sg.  hlosnode  761. 
hloS,  f.,  troop,  company:  ns.  42,   1389, 

1543;  as.  992. 
hlud,  adj.,  lond:  nsm.  11 56;  nsf.  739; 

isf.  hliidan  1360. 
hi  utter,  adj.,  bright,  pure  :    asm.  hlut- 

terne  312;  asf.  hlfittre  1063. 
hlyminan,  3,  resound:  3  sg.  hlymme'S 

39^- 
hlynnan,  Wl,  resound:  pret.  3  sg.  hly- 

nede  238. 
hlynsian,    Wa,    resound:     pret.    3    pi. 

hlynsodon  1545. 
hlyst,  m.,  heed,  attention :  as.  1 586. 
hlyt,  m.,  lot,  fate:  ns.  Ap.  9;  as.  6,  14. 
hnag,  adj.,  ivr etched,  miserable:  comp. 

gsf.  hnagran  1598. 
hnSgan,  Wl,  humble:  opt.  pres.  3  pi. 

hnsgen  1329.     ^^^  gehnSgan. 
hnitan,  1,  clash  :  pret.  3  pi.  hneotan  4. 
liof,  n.,  house:  ds.  hofe  1307  ;  ap.  hofu 

S38.     See  ceaster-,  gnornhof. 
hold,    adj.,  gracious:     nsm.    550;    asf. 

holde    1 164.     See   Seodenhold. 
holdlice,  adx., faithfully:   1639. 
holm,  m.,  ocean:   as.   429;    gp.  holma 

195.     ^V<f  saeholm. 


holmtfracu,  f.,  tossing  sea:   ns.  holm- 

J^racu  467. 
holmweg,  m.,  sea-toay :   ds.  holmwege 

3S2. 
homa,  see  fltesc-,  lichonia. 
lion,  see  ahon. 

hord,  see  feorh-,  mod-,  -wordhord. 
hordgestrf'on,  n.,  treasure :  dp.  hord- 

gestreonum  11 14. 
hordloca,  m.,  treasure-place :  as.  671. 
hornfisc,  m.,  garfish,  szuordfish  ? :    ns. 

370. 
horngeap,  adj.,  wide-gabled:  nsn.  668. 
liornssdlyn.,  gabled  hall :  ap.  hornsalu 

1 1 58. 
hornsclp,   n.,    beaked  ship:    is.    hom- 

scipe  274. 
hosp^vord,    n.,    insulting    word:    ap. 

i_3i5- 
hra,  n.,   corpse:    ns.    1031,    1277;    as. 

952;  np.  791. 
hraedlice,    adv.,    quickly:     192,    936, 

1505- 
\\TseQ\,  n.,  garfne7it :  ds.  hraegle  147 1. 
hranrad,    f.,     -whale-road,    ocean :     ds. 

hranrade  266,  634,  hronrade  821.' 
hra?Je,   adv.,    quickly:    341,    947,    982, 

1106,  nil,  hraeSe  1221,  1272,  1520, 

1577- 
hrcmig,    adj.,    exultant:    nsm.    1699; 

npm.  hremige  864. 
lu'eodan,  see  gehreodan. 
hreof,  adj.,  leprous:  dp.  hreofum  578. 
hreoh,    adj.,    rough,  fierce:    nsf.    467; 

nsn.  1542;  apm.  hreo  748. 
hreosan,  2,  fall,  perish  :  3  pi.  hreosa}> 

1438;   pret.  3  pi.  hruron   1600.     See 

tohreosan. 
hreoSa,  see  bordhreoSa. 
hreow,  see  reo^v. 
hreran,  Wl,  mo7'e,  stir:  ptc.  dpf.  hre- 

rendum  491.     6"t'^  onhreran. 
hre'Sor,  m.,  breast,  heart:  ns.  1018;  ds. 

hre'Sre  36,  69,  817,  893. 
hrif,  n.,  womb  :  as.  Ap.  29. 
hrim,  m.,  rime,  hoar-frost :  ns.  1257. 


GLOSSARY 


205 


hriiuui,  1,  tinicli,  assail:  pp.  hrinen  942. 

hrlne,  sec  haiulhriiu'. 

hring,  m.,  r/;/^',  sound:  ns.  1278. 

hroden,  see  siiiclirodoii. 

hronmd,  see  liraurad. 

hropiin,  R,  shout:  pret.  3  pi.  hreopon 

1.56. 
liroO'or,    n.,    comfort,    consolation :    ds. 

hrob're  iii,  567,  Ap.  95;  gp.  hroiSra 

1367- 
hryre,  m.,fall,  decay:  ds.  229. 
lirysian,  W2,  shake,  clatter:  pret.  3  pi. 

hr'ysedon  127. 
hu,  adv.,  how:   155,  163,  190,  307,  419, 

487,  547.  558,  573.  575.  596,  639,  812, 

920,  960,  1355  (weald  hu),  1490,  Ap.  3. 
hu,  interj.,  how,  lo:  63,  Ap.  91. 
hundteoutig,  num.,  hundred:   1035. 
hungor,  m.,  hunger  :  gs.  hungres  1087  ; 

is.  hungie  11 14,  11 58. 
huru,  adv.,  verily,  indeed:  549,  Ap.  42. 
hus,  see  banhiSs. 
husc'vvord,  n.,  scornful  zvord:  is.  husc- 

worde  669. 
hvca,  pron.,  who  ;  neut.,  what,  of  what 

sort:  nsm.  381,  797,  905,  Ap.  98,  106; 

nsn.  hwaet  262,  734,  1066,  1343  ;  -gsn. 

hwa?s  145;  asn.  hwst  342,  1316.     See 

Sg-,  gehwa. 
h^wael,  m.,  whale :  gs.  hwasles  274. 
h\vaelinere,  m.,  ocean  :  ns.  370. 
h\vaenne,   conj.      i.  u>itil:    400.  —  2. 

when :   1 36. 
h%vanon,  adv.,  whence :  256,  258,  683. 
hwa-r, adv.,  where:  799,  1517,  Ap.  in. 
h^va't,  adj.,  see  fyrd-,  gu?ni\vaet. 
Ii\va't,  adv.,  why,  how:  629,  1413. 
hwaet,  interj.,  what,  lo:  i,  676,   1185, 

1189,    1363,    1376,  1406,   1478,  1508, 

Ap.  I,  23,  63. 
hWcEcJer,    conj.,    whether:     129,    604. 

See  Sgh^vai'ffer. 
hwa-tfre,  conj.,  ho'wever, yet:  51,  1487, 

hwreSere  504. 
h^voalf,  see  hoofoiihAvealf. 
hwearfian,  Wq,  go,  turn  :  inf.  891. 


lnv(>Iaii,  4,  roar,  resound:  3  sg.  hwileS 

495- 
hwcorfaii,  3,  turn,  go:    i  pi.  hweorfa'5 

405 ;  pret.  3  pi.  hweorfon  640,  hweor- 

fan  1050;  inf.  117,  1691.    Seea.-,  be-, 

gchweorfan. 
liwettan,  \Vl,  'whet,  incite :  3  sg.  hwete'S 

286.     See  ahwettaii. 
h^vidoFjadv.,  ivhither:  405. 
h^vil,  f.,  'while,  titne:  gs.   hwhile   113; 

as.  131,  1478.     .S't't' gryrehwil. 
h^v^eIl,  see  vin^vhileii. 
h-\viluin,  adv.,  at  titnes  :  443,  514. 
h^vyh",  pron.,  which,  who:   nsm.  411,. 

1372;  nsn.  1228;  asm.  hwylcne  132, 

785,  HOC.     6'd'«?  ieg-,  gehwylc. 
hycgan,  W3,  think  :  2  pi.  hycga^  1612  ; 

pret.  2  sg.  hogodest  1316;  pret.  3  sg. 

hogode  622.     See  for-,  gehyc-gan. 
hycgende,  see  stitf-,  wiOerhycgende. 
hydig,  see  gram-,  ^vilSerhydig. 
hygd,  see  ge-,  oferhygd. 
hyge,  m.,  mind,  heart:  ns.  3*^,  231,  578, 

1664,   1709,  hige  634,   1252,  Ap.  53; 

as.  hyge  Ap.  68,  hige  971,  1213,  1654. 
hygeblind,  adj.,  spiritually  blind:  nsm. 

Ap.  46. 
hygegeomor,  adj.,  sad  of  mind:  nsm. 

1087,  1557. 
hygetfanc,  m.,  thought :  gs.  hygejiances 

"817. 
hyge}7aiicol,  adj., thoughtful:  nsm.  341. 
hyht, m.    \.  hope, expectation:  ns.  loio, 

1 1 14,  hiht   287;    as.  hyht  1052.  —  2. 

joy:  ds.  hyhte  239,  637,  874,  as.  hyht 

481  ;  gp.  hihta  Ap.  118. 
hyhtlic,  adj.,  joyful:  sup.  nsm.  hyhtll- 

cost  104. 
hyld,  see  gehyld. 
hyldan,  Wl,  bend,  bo7v  :  pret.  3  pi.  hyl- 

don  1027. 
hyldu,  f.,   kindness,  favor :    as.   hyldo 

389- 
hylnian,  see  forhylman. 
hynfus,  adj.,  ready  to  die  :  np.  hynfuse 

612. 


2o6 


GLOSSARY 


hyraii,  Wl.    i.  heai-,  listen  to  :  pret.  i  sg. 

hyrde  360;    pret.   3  sg.  herde    11 76; 

pret.  I  pi.  hyrde  we  Ap.  70;  opt.  pres. 

I  pi.  hyran  1167.  —  2.  obey,  follow  :  2 

pi.  hyra'5  679  ;  pret.  3  pi.  hyrdon  612  ; 

opt.  pres.  T  pi.  hyran  1606;  inf.  1639, 

Ap.  47.     See  gehyran. 
hyrcnian,    W2,    listeii    to:    pret.   3   pi. 

hyrcnodon  654. 
hyrdan,  see  onhyrdan. 
hyrde,  v\.,  guard:  ns.  807;   np.  hyrdas 

1083;  ap.  993,  1077. 
hyrstan,  see  gehyrstan. 
hyse,  m.,  ma}i,  youth  :   ds.  hysse  550  ; 

vs.  595,  811. 
hysebeorSor,  m.,  yoroig  7>ian  :  ds.  hyse- 

beor'Sre  1 142. 
liyspan,    Wl,    scorn,    mock:    inf.    671. 

[liosp.] 
liyffig,  see  unhySig. 


lacob,  pr.  x\.,  Jacob,  James  :  ns.  691,  Ap. 
35,70;  ds.  locobe  754  ;  as.  lacob  794. 

ic,  pron.,  /:  ns.  64,  72,  77,  81,  etc.;  for 
genitive,  see  niin  ;  ds.  me  63,  76,  198 
200,  etc. ;  as.  me  71,  85,  389,  905,  etc 
np.  we  I,  264,  268,  292,  etc. ;  for  geni- 
tive, see  user;  dp.  us  276,  288,  292 
342,  514,  1420,  1566,  1567;  ap.  265 
269,  273,  330,  434,  596,  852,  862 
1419,  1561,  usic  286. 

lean,  Wl,  increase:  2  sg.  icest  1190; 
inf.  ecan  1384. 

idel,  adj.,  vain  :  apm.  idle  Ap.  84. 

ides,  f.,  woman  :  np.  idesa  1638. 

leriisalem,  pr.  n.,  Jerusalem  :  ds.  Ap.  70. 

igland,  n., /j/rt;/^/:  as.  15. 

ilea,  pron.,  j«;«^  :  nsm.  751;  asf.  ilcan 
911. 

in,  prep.  w.  dat.  and  ace.  i.  in,  on, 
■within,  amid,  among,  at,  by  (w.  dat.) : 
51,  52,  69,  78,  121,  163,  169,  231,  281, 
304,  356,  562,  573,  597,  707,  719,  854, 
868,  927,  948(2),  973,  976,  1004,  1008, 
1029,  1043,   1082,   1 1 55,   1 187,  1264, 


1299,  1309,  1377,  1467,  1482,  1491, 
1649,  1672,  1685,  1720,  Ap.  16,  30,  40, 
45,  70,  118. —  2.  into,  to,  totaards  (w. 
ace):  41,  III,  117,  217,  349,  656, 
911,  929,  939,  951,  982,  1091,  1273, 
1308,  133-'  1380,  1463,  1594.  1618, 
1619,  1686,  1703. 

in,  adv.,  in,  inside:  362,990,  looi,  1331, 
1588,  inn  1058. 

Indeas,  pr.  n.,  India  :  gp.  Indea  Ap.  5 1  ; 
dp.  Indeum  Ap.  43. 

inQ.^x\e,zA].,  full  of  water :  asf.  1504. 

ingej>anc,  mn.,  thought,  reason  :  as.  35. 

iniian,  prep.  w.  dat.,  in,  within:    1235, 

1547- 
innan,  adv.,  wzV/^/;/ :   1018,  1241. 
innanweard,  adv.,  within  :  647. 
inne,  adv.,  within  :   1542. 
in-\vit,  n.,  guile,  deceit:  as.  610. 
inwdtSanc,  m.,  er'il  thought :   as.  670 ; 

ip.  inwidl^ancum  559. 
in^vit■^vrasen,  f.,  et'il  chain  :  as.  inwit- 

wrasne  63  ;  ip.  inwitwrasnum  946. 
lohannes,  pr.   n.,  John :    ds.   lohanne 

Ap.  23. 
loseph,   pr.    n.,  Joseph :    ns.   688 ;    gs. 

losephes  691. 
losua,  pr.  w.,  Joshua  :  ns.  losua  1516. 
iren,  n.,  sword:  as.  1181. 
irnan,  see  onlrnan. 
Irtacus,  pr.  n.,  Irtacus :  ns.  Ap.  68. 
is,  n.,  ice  :  ns.  1261. 
Isaac,  pr.  n.,  Isaac:  ds.  Isace  753  ;  as. 

Isaac  793. 
Israhel,  pr.  n.,  Israelite  :  gp.  Israhela 

880;  dp.  Israhelum  165. 
Ill,  adv.,  o)ice,  long  ago,  formerly :  438, 

489,  661,  1377,  1386. 
ludeas,  pr.  r\..,Jezvs :  gp.  ludea  166,  560, 

1325;  dp.lrideumi2,966, 1408,  Ap.  35. 


Li=  rujie   Y  Ap.  102  ;  for  meaning,  see 

Not::. 
lilt',    f.,   gift,    offering:    as.    11 11.     See 

beadii-,  gelaOj 


GLOSSARY 


207 


-laca,  -IsT'ca,  see  wglteca,  guffgclaca. 
Ia<'uii,    K,    (oss,    mort'd    i\ipidly :    3    1)1. 

lacaS    253 ;     ptc.  nsm.  lacende   437. 

See  forlat'an. 
lacende,  see  farotflacende. 
lad,  f.,  -way,  Journey  :  ns.  423;  ds.  lade 

276,  Ap.  92.     See  ea-,  ge-,  lago-, 

saj-,  ytOiid. 
liUdaii,  Wl,   lead,  conduct :    pret.  3  pi. 

ISddon  1459,  Ijeddan  1249;  ptc.  nsm. 

ISdende  1477;  pp.  lieded  1307;  inf. 

174'.  337,  777,  i044,  1229,  1272,  1390, 

1706.     See  gelSdan. 
laf,   leaving,   remnant:    ds.   lafe    1081. 

See  ylfflaf. 
lagoflod,    m.,    zcater-flood,    ocean :    ap. 

lagoflodas  244. 
lagolad,  f .,  sea-way,   ocean :    as.    lago- 

lade  314. 
lagu,  m.,  sea,  flood:  ns.  437,  Ap.  102 

(rune  \). 
lagufgesten,  n.,  sea  :  as.  398,  825. 
lagustreani,  m.,  oceaii :  as.  423. 
Itela,  m.,  bruise,  ivouttd:  as.  lielan  1443 
land,n.    i.  land,  dry  land:  ns.  423  ;  ds 

lande  398  ;  as.  land  378,  404,  827. — 

2.  country,  province:  ns.  Ap.  66;  ds 

lande  294,  1645,   1694;   as.  268,  698 

1321,    Ap.  76;    gp.   landa   408,    935 

961.  —  3.  ground,    earth:    ds.   lande 

1426;  np.  land  1259.  —  4.  land, prop 

erty,  estate :  gs.  landes  303.     See  ea- 

ig-,  nieart'-,  ^vIdland. 
landrest,  f.,  totnb:  as.  landreste  781. 
laudsi'caru,  f.,  {portion  of)  land:  ds. 

landsceare  501,  1229. 
liene,    adj.,    transitory,  fleeting:    npf. 

Iffine  Ap.  102  ;  apn.  ISnan  Ap.  83. 
laDg,adj.  I.  /(?;/^:  nsm. 420 ;  asf.lange 

790. —  2.   eternal:     asm.  langne   Ap. 

92.     See  ge-,  niht-,  ondlang. 
lange,  adv.,  long,  a  long  time  :  314,  579, 

1363;  comp.  leng  80,  800,  1042,  1364, 

1467,  1660. 
langsuin,  adj.,  long,  ez'er lasting:  nsf. 

1482;  comp.  asn.  langsumre  Ap.  20. 


lar,  f.    I.  instruction,  wisdom,  counsel: 

ds.  lare  654;  as.  597,  709,  819,  1164, 

1424,  1653,   1692,  Ap.  67;  gp.  larna 

482;    dp.  laium  679,  813,   1290;    ip. 

141,  611,  777.  —  2.   narration,  story: 

as.  lare  1478. 
l^ran,  Wl,  insti-uct,  teach  :  2  sg.  laerest 

1 185  ;  pret.  3  sg.  Ijerde  1 70,  420,  462, 

1 195,  1297,  1680,  Ap.  31.     See  for-, 

gel  ie  ran. 
larcivide,  m.,  doctrine,  teaching:  as. 674. 
lareo\v,  m.,  teacher:    ns.   1321,    1466; 

as.  404,  1707. 
larsniiS,  m.,  teacher:    np.  larsmeoiSas 

1220. 
las,  see  ?fy-l*s. 
last,  m.,  track,  trace  (on  last,  laste, 

behind):  ds.  laste  1596,  Ap.  94;  as. 

last  1446.     See  wTdlast. 
Itestan,  "SN I,  follozv, pei-form  :  pret.  3  pi. 

ISston    674,     1653;     inf.     1424.     See 

gelSstan. 
laet,  adj.,  slo^v,  behindhand :  nsm.  Ap. 

33;  nsf.  latu  1 210;  npm.  late  46. 
lata,  see  hildlata. 
l^tan,  R.    I.  let,  allow  :  pret.  3  pi.  leton 

1099;  imper.  2  sg.  Iset  397,  957,  960, 

1293,  1503;  imper.  2  pl.  15ta5  1180, 

1330.  —  2.  leave,  leave  behind:  pret. 

3    pl.    leton   831  ;    inf.    781,    Ap.   94. 

See  a-,  iJnfor-,  forlaBtan. 
latu,  see  Avordlatu. 
la'5,  n.,  injury,  harm:   gs.  laSes  1443; 

ds.  la'Se  1474;  as.  laS  1347. 
laiS,  adj.  I.  hateful,  despised:  asm.  laSne 

1249;    npm.    la'Se   408.  —  2.   hostile: 

gpm.  la^ra  80,  944. 
latJspell,  n.,  evil  tidings  :  as.  or  p.  1 079. 
laT^u,  see  ^vo^dIa?Jn. 
-leafa,  see  geleafa. 
leahtor,  m.     i.  slander:  ip.  leahtrum 

1295.  —  2.    wound,   disease:    ip.  leh- 

trum  1216. 
lean,  n.,    reward:    ns.    948 ;    ds.   leane 

Ap.  62,   74;    as.  lean  387,   Ap.   120. 

See  ed-,  sigelean. 


208 


GLOSSARY 


leas,  adj.     i.  deprived  of,   lacking  (w. 

gen.):    nsm.    1367,    1705.  —  7..  false: 

apn.  leasan  Ap.  49.     See  ar-,  doin-, 

ende-,    eSel-,    freotfo-,    hlaford-, 

hleo-,  w£er-,  wliteleas. 
-least,  see  nieteleast. 
lecgan,  see  beleogan. 
leg,  see  llg. 
-lege,  see  orlege. 
leng,  see  lange. 
-lenge,  see  gelenge. 
leode,  fpl.,  vieii, people,  nation  :  n.  T249 ; 

g.  leoda  268,  663,  1227,  1259,  1363, 

1390,   1706;  d.  leodum  1649;  a.  170, 

1093,  1321,  1680,  Ap.  31. 
leodfruma,  m.,  leader  of  the  people:  ns. 

1660;  as.  leodfruman  989. 
leodhete,  m.,   hostility:  ns.    1138;   ds. 

112,  1149. 
leodmeare,  f.,  bonndary,  country :  as. 

leodmearce  286,  777. 
leodriht,  n.,  law  :  ds.  leodrihte  679. 
leodseeacTa,  m., public  enetny:  gp.  leod- 

sceaSena  80. 
leof,    adj.,    dear,   beloved:     nsm.    1251, 

1579  ;  asm.  leofne  404,  825,  944,  989, 

1707;  npm.  leofe  1017,  Ap.  6;  comp. 

nsm.  leofra  Ap.  49,  nsn.  leofre  1428; 

sup.  nsm.    leofast   Ap.  26,  nsn.  leo- 

fost    935;    vsm.    leofost  575,    1352, 

leofesta  288,  307,  595,629,811,  1431. 
leof  lie,  adj.,  beloz'ed:  nsm.  1446. 
leofoii,  f.,  sustenance  :  ds.  leofne  11 23. 
leofwende,   adj.,  gracious:    dpf.    leof- 

wendum  1290. 
leogan,  see  geleogan. 
leoht,  n.,  light:   ns.   124,   1017,    1611; 

as.  77,  Ap.  20,  61.    ^^^  heotbnleoht. 
leoht,   adj.,  light,  joyful :  nsm.    1251  ; 

gsm.  leohtes  Ap.  66. 
leohtfruma,  m.,  creator  of  light:  ns. 

387;  vs.  1413. 
leoma,  see  heofonleoma. 
leoran,    Wi,  go,    depart:   pret.    3    sg. 

leoide  124;  pret.  3  pi.  leordan  1042. 
leornung,  f.,  j/z/rt^' :  ns.  1482. 


leosan,  see  beleosan. 

leo3,  see  113. 

leo3,  see  f  us-,  hearmleoiJ. 

leoSgidding,  f.,  song,  poem  :  is.  lecSgid- 

dinga  1479;  gp.  Ap.  97. 
leotfolie,  adj.,  corporal:  nsm.  1628. 
leotfubeiid,  mf.,  bond,  fetter :  dp.  leo'Su- 

bendum  100,  164,  1373,  leo'Sobendum 

1033,  1564. 
leo?J\vord,   n.,    word  in   a  poem  :  gp. 

leo^worda  1488. 
lettan,  see  gelettau. 
libban,   Ws,  live:  3  sg.  leofa'5    1288, 

lyfa'S  541  ;  pret.  3  pi.  lifdon  129. 
lie,  n.,  body:  ns.  1238,    1404;  gs.  llces 

229,   1421,   1443,   1474,  Ap.  102;  ds. 

lice  1477,  Ap.  83  ;  as.  lie  151,  Ap.  94. 
liegan,  5,  lie:  3  sg.  lige'5  Ap.   104;  3 

pi.    licga"5    1426;    pret.    3   pi.    lagon 

1234,     1422,    lagan    1083.      See   a-, 

geliegan. 
lichoina,  m.,  body:  as.  lichoman  12 16, 

1466;  np.  790. 
licnes,  see  anlienes. 
lid,  n.,  ship:  gs.  lides  403,   1707;    as. 

lid  398.     See  ymid. 
lida,  see  sailida. 
lid^vea^d,  m.,   sailor,    boat-guard:    ap. 

lidweardas  244. 
lidAverig,  adj.,  lueary  of  seafaring:  dp. 

lidwerigum  4S2. 
liehtan,  see  onliehtan. 
lif,  n.,  life:  ns.  Ap.  83;  gs.  lifes  170, 

229,  387.  518,  822,  nil,  1123,  1413, 

1466,  Ap.  31;  ds.  life  77,  597,  1482, 

Ap.  6 ;  as.  lif  Ap.  20,  38,  73. 
lifeearo,    f.,    anxiety    concerning  life : 

ns.  1428. 
\\ffr\nwA,m., Creator :  ds. Iiffruman562 ; 

vs.  iTffruma  1284. 
lifgan,    W3,  live  :  ptc.  nsm.    lifigende 

378,  459;  vsm.  1409. 
ITfnerii,    f.,    7tourishment :    ds.    lifnere 

10S9. 
llfwela,  m.,  riches  of  life  eternal:  ns. 

Ap.  49. 


GLOSSARY 


209 


Vi%,m..,  flame,  fire:  gs.   leges  1552;  is. 

lige  1 54 1. 
Iihtan,  Wl,  become  light,  dawn:   pret. 

3  sg.  iThte  1397. 
limseoo,  adj.,  lame:  np.  limseoce  579. 
liiicl,  f.,  shield:  ds.  linde  46. 
\\xv(\^^iti^vof\,\\. , troop  armed  with  shields  : 

ds.  lindgecrode  1220. 
lindgelac,  n.,    battle:    gs.    lindgelaces 

Ap.  76. 
lindgcstealla,  m.,  comrade   in   battle : 

vp.,  lindgesteallan  1344. 
linnan,  3,  w.  inst.,  cease,  depart  from  : 

inf.  1 1 38.     See  bliniian. 
liss,  f.    I.  pleasjire,joy  :  dp.  lissum  S25  ; 

ip.  868.  —  2.  welfare:  ds.  lisse  nil. 
V8S,\^.,  liinb:  np.  leo"5u  1404;  ap.leoSo 

781. 
lT5an,  l,  sail:  inf.  256.     See  beluKan. 
Ii3'e,  2^.^].,  gentle,  agreeable:  nsm.   276; 

npm.  867  ;  gpm.  liSra  Ap.  92  ;  comp. 

nsm.  irSra  437. 
irffend,  see  ea-,  heaSo-,  niereirffend. 
loc,  m.,  lock  of  hair:  ns.    1423,    1472; 

np.  loccas  1426. 
loea,     see    burg-,     ferS-,     hearm-, 

heolstor-,  hord-,  -wordloca. 
lof,  n.     \. praise;  ns.  57,   1451,  Ap.  6, 

120;  as.  877,  1006,  1295,  1477,  1479. 

—  2.  favor,  joy  :  ds.  lofe  868,  989. 
loga,  see  \\aerloga. 

lucan,  2,  close  up,  confine  :  pret.  3  pi. 

lucon  1259;  pp.    gpm.    locenra  303. 

See  be-,  on-,  tolucaii. 
lufe,  f.,  love:  ds.  lufan  431  ;    as.    164, 

1063.     See  fyrhtflufe. 
lufian,  \V2.      I.  love,   be  pleased  with  : 

opt.  pres.  3  sg.  lufige    Ap.  88,   107. 

—  2.  show  favor  to  :  pret.  3  sg.  luf  ode 
597  ;  pret.  3  pi.  lufodon  865. 

lungre,  adv.  i.  suddenly,  quickly  :  46, 
77,  124,  151,  614,  674,  1042,  1093, 
1 123,  1 138,  1347,  1421,  1628.  —  2. 
grievously,  severely  :  518,  1472. 

lust,  m.  I.  desire:  ns.  286,  294;  ds. 
luste    1079;    as.   lust   303.  —  2.   on 


\\\?,tv,  joyful,  eager  :  ds.    1 023,    11 40, 

_i573- 

lyfan,  see  gelyfan. 
lyft,  f.,  air :  ds.  lyfte  420,  866. 
lyftgelac,  n.,  wc//o;/  through  the    air: 

as.  827,  1552. 
lysan,  see  a-,  tolysan. 
lystan,  Wi,  impers.  w.  ace.  of  pers.  and 

gen.  of  thing,  take  pleasure  in:  3  sg. 

lyste'5  Ap.  97.     See  oflysted. 
lysii,    3.d].,  false,    wicked:   npm.  lyswe 

1220. 
\yt,i\.,  few:  as.  271,  476. 
lyt,  adv.,  little,  to  a  slight  degree  :   1227, 

1290,  1344. 
"lytel,  adj.,   small,    short:    ipn.    lytlum 

1488.     See  unlytel. 

M 

nia,  n.,  more :  ns.  492,  662  ;  as.  924, 
1 178,  1443. 

niaecg,  m.,  man,  warrior :  ap.  maecgas 
422,  1708;  gp.  mascga  772.  See 
orettnijecg. 

macraeftig,  adj.,  very  skilful:  vpm. 
macraeftige  257 ;  comp.  asm.  ma- 
crseftigran  472. 

m«g,  m.,  kinsman:  np.  magas  151 5. 
See  cneomSg. 

maga,  m.,  man,  hero:  ns.  639,  815, 
984;  vs.  625.    .S"^^  heafodmaga. 

magan,  PP.  i.  may,  can:  i  sg.  maeg 
851;  2  sg.  miht  340,  595,  811,  860, 
1364,  1 51 7,  meaht  211  ;  3  sg.  maeg 
215,  425;  2  pi.  magon  1179,  1558, 
magan  759;  3  pi.  magon  279,  121 5; 
pret.  I  sg.  mehte  479 ;  pret.  3  sg. 
mihte  16,  573,  11 29,  1393,  meahte 
1323;  pret.  3  pi.  mihton  132.  —  2 
be  able:  i  sg.  maeg  190,  933;  2  sg 
miht  603,  624,  816,  Ap.  105  ;  3  sg, 
mffig  194,  502,  516,  546,  A  p.  96 ;  I  pi 
magon  1352,  magan  1347;  3  pi 
magon  954;  pret.  i  sg.  mihte  477 
meahte  272,  922;  pret.  2  sg.  mehte 
929;    pret.    3  sg.   mihte    986,    1543; 


2IO 


GLOSSARY 


pret.  3  pi.  mihton  368,  565,  964,  1147, 

1714,  meahton  1224,  1231  ;  opt.  i  sg. 

masge  303. 
maegen,  n.     i.    power:    ds.    maegene 

1469,    1676 ;    as.    maegen    \2.\i^\    is. 

maegene  701,  1433-  —  2.  troop,  band: 

ns.    391,    1571;     as.    876.  —  3.    deed, 

miracle :  ap.  maegen  625.     See  folc-, 

hand-,  heremaegen. 
msegensped,   f.,  power :    dp.   mzegen- 

spedum  1285. 
niagorSdend,  m.,    coujiselor  of  men  : 

gs.  magoraedendes  1461. 
niEeg'd',  f .,  race,  tribe  :  ds.  mSg'Se  264, 

275;  as.  844. 
magu,  see  heafodmagu. 
maguSegn, m.,  retainer:  ds. magu^egne 

94,  magojiegne   1207;   as.  maguj^egn 

366;    np.   magu^egnas    1140,    mago- 

J>egnas  1515. 
maeg-wlite,  m.,  face,  coiintetiance :   ds. 

masgw'lite  1338;  as.  856. 
mail,  see  f  yr-,  gemgel. 
m^elan,  Wl,  speak:  pret.  3  sg.  maelde 

300,  767. 
mailuni,  see  ?frag-,  Susendmielum. 
Manibre,  pr.  n.,  Mamre:  ds.  788. 
man,    n.,   crime,  wickedness :    ns.    694, 

767  ;  is.  mane  1 599. 
msenan,  Wl,  cotnplain,  bejnoan  :    3  pi. 

maenaS   1665;    pret.    3   pi.   mSndon 

1 1 57,  mEndan  1548. 
mandream,  m.,  Joy  of  juen  :  ds.  man- 

dreame  37. 
mEene,  adj.,  "wicked:  gp.  maenra  941. 
meinfr&ii,  m.,  prince  of  ez'i/ :  ns.  1313. 
manful,  adj.,  evi/,  tuicked:  npm.  man- 

fulle  180  ;  gpm.  manfulra  42. 
mangenitJla,  m.,    evil  foe :    np.   man- 
gem  51an  916. 
manig,  adj.,  viany,  many  a  {one):  nsm. 

1085,  1 1 16,  1225,  maenig  1436;  nsmn. 

manig    1 549,    1 596 ;    dsm.   manegum 

1 1 20;  asn.  manig  814;  npm.  manige 

658,    973,    1626;    apm.    583;    dpm. 

manegum  960,  1708,  Ap.  52. 


mann,  m.,   man:   ns.    1484,  Ap.    107; 

ds.   menn   Ap.    113;    as.   mann   493. 

mon  746 ;  np.  menn  594,  814,  men  7  ; 

gp.  manna   262,   486,  517,  544,  637, 

908,  1374,  Ap.  25,  monna  1023;  dp. 

mannum  767 ;    ap.    menn   246,  676, 

895,  Ap.  24,  men  583;  vp.  menn  257. 

See  ealdormann. 
manncynn,  n.,  tna7ikitid,  human  being: 

gs.  manncynnes  357,  1178,1293,  1465, 

Ap.  29,  mancynnes  69,  172,  446,  540, 

846;  as.  mancynn  945,  1502. 
manslagu,  f .,  cricel  bloia  :  ap.  manslaga 

1218. 
mara,  see  mycel. 
maere,  s^d].,  fatnons,  glorious  :  nsn.  Ap. 

121;  gsm.  maeres  94;  dsm.  mSrum 

449,  908 ;    dsf.  maeran  40,  287,  973 ; 

asm.  maerne   366,  maeran    227 ;    asf. 

mSre  Ap.  67  ;  asn.  815, 1338  ;  npm.  7. 
Maria,  pr.  n..  Maty:  ns.  688. 
marmanstan,   m.,   marble:    vs.    1498. 

[Lat.  marmor.'\ 
miersian,  see  gem^rsian. 
martyr,  m.,  martyr :  gp.  martyra  876. 

[Lat.  martyr?^ 
mx:r'So,  i.,  fame :  ns.  Ap.  7. 
maest,  m.,  mast:  ds.  maeste  465. 
maest,  see  mycel. 
-miSte,  see  or-,  unmSte. 
Matheus,  pr.  n.,  Matthew:  ns.  11,  40, 

122,1044;  gs.  Ap.  67  ;  as.  941,  1004  ; 

vs.  97. 
mae?fel,  m.,  meeting,  council:  ds.  me'Sle 

1436,  1626;  as.  mae'Sel  1049,  1496. 
mseO'elhcgende,  adj.,  deliberating,  hold- 
ing council :  gp.  me'Selhegendra  262  ; 

np.  mae'Selhegende    1096,   maeSelhS- 

gende  609. 
ma<Jm,  m.,  trcastire:  ds.  ma'Sme  11 13; 

dp.  maSmum  309. 
maiw,  m.,  sea-gull:  ns.  371. 
mearc,  see  fyrst-,  go-,  leodmearo. 
mearcltin,  see  ameart-ian. 
mearcland,  n.,  country;    ns.    19;    as. 

802. 


GLOSSARY 


211 


mearcpaVS,  n.,  path  through  the  land: 

ds.  mearcpaSe  1061  ;  ap.  mearcpaJSu 

788. 
inearh,  m.,  horse,  steed:   dp.  mearum 

1096.     See  ste  inearh. 
-mede,  see  ge-,  Avi'Sermede. 
-meduiii,  see  eaiffmeduin. 
incldigan,  Wa,  reveal,  betray  :  inf.  1 170. 
meltan,  sec  fornicltan. 
ineuiso,  i.,  multitude :  ns.  449;  gs.  177; 

ds.  1200,  1209;  as.  10 1,   1044,  meni- 

geo  1690. 
ineoduscer^ven,  f.,  terror,  grief:   ns. 

1526. 
meor'ff,  f.,  reward:   ns.  275. 
ineotud,  m.,  ruler,  God,  Lord:  ns.  172, 

357,  386,  446,  789.  1207,  1 513,  1602; 

gs.  meotudes  140,  517,  681,  694,  724, 

881,    1498,    1632;    ds.    meotude   924, 

984,  1469;  vs.  meotud  69,  902,  1289. 
meotudn'ang,  xa..,  field  of  fate,  battle- 
field: ds.  meotudwange  11. 
mere,  m.,  sea :  ns.  465  ;  gs.  meres  221  ; 

ds.  mere  491  ;    as.  283.     See  h^vfel- 

mere. 
merebat,    m.,    vessel:     ds.    merebate 

246. 
nierefaroS,  m.,  sea  Jdurtiey  ;  ds.  mere- 

faro"5e  289,  351. 
tnereQod,  m.,  fiood  of  7vater  :  ns.  1526. 
inereirSend,  m.,  sailor :  dp.  mereli^en- 

dum  353. 
inerestream,    m.,     ocean-stream :     gp. 

merestreama  309,  454. 
meretfyssa,  m.,   ship :   ds.  merej'yssan 

446,  merelnssan  257. 
Mermedonia,  pr.  n.     i.  Mermedonia  : 

as.  42,    180.  —  2.   Mermedotiian:   gp. 

Marmedonia  264,  844,  1676. 
-met,  see  gemet. 
metan,    Wl,    meet,  find:    pret.    i    sg. 

mette  471,  553.     ^^-ff  gemetan. 
mete,  m.,  food:    gs.  metes   1113;    as. 

mete  366. 
ineteleast,  f.,  lack  of  food,  famitie  \  ds. 

meteleaste  39;  as.  1157. 


meteJJearfende,  adj.,  lacking  food:  dp. 
mete^earfendum  27,  136'. 

mC'Sie,  adj.,  weary:  np.  11 57;  ap.  39, 
465. 

meO'el,  see  maeffel. 

ine5ffelstede,m.,//ar^  of  meeting,  council- 
place  :  ds.  meSelstede  658,  697. 

inetHaii,  Wl,  speak:  inf.  1440. 

micel,  see  mycel. 

mid,  prep.  i.  with  (accompaniment): 
w.  dat.  114,  209,  249,  292,  681,  779, 
1049,  i°53'  1674;  w.  ace.  379,  626, 
914.  —  2.  by,  ill,  by  means  of  (tnanner'): 
w.  dat.  51,  54,  265,  319,  347,'  521,- 
809,  825,  866,  989,  1021,  1048,  1057, 
1075, 1 153,  1220,  1401,  i486,  1559;  w. 
inst.  1 594.  —  3.  among:  w.  dat.  1 2, 85, 
184,  599,  615,  685,  718,  758,  966,  1408, 
1644,  1646,  1722,  Ap.  35,  38,  64;  w. 
inst.  1643.  —  4.  at:  w.  dat.  220,  235, 
1388,  1525.  —  5.  in  presence  of:  w. 
ace.  Ap.  74.  —  6.  postpositive,  with  : 
99,  loi,  945,  1218. 

mid,  adv.,  together,  at  the  same  time : 
237,  87S,  1638. 

middangeard,  m.,  earth  :  gs.  middan- 
geardes    82,    227 ;    as.    middangeard 

161,  224,  345,  701,  1323,  1372,  1434, 
1502,  171S,  Ap.  7. 

miAityi., power,  might:  ns.  1434,  17 18, 
Ap.  7,  121;  as.  486,  525,  574,  585, 
642,  1336,  1476,  Ap.  56;  is.  mihte 
939;  ap.  mihte  694;  ip.  mihtum  104, 

162,  328,  536,  697,  785,  1207,  1513. 
mihtig,  adj.,   mighty:    nsm.   662,  786, 

1372,  1496.     See  aelmilitig. 
milde,  adj.,  gracious,  kind:    nsm.  902. 
mildheort,  adj.,  kindly  disposed:  nsm. 

1285. 
milts,  f.,  favor,   mercy  :    ns.   908  ;    gs. 

mildse   140;   ds.   1674;   as.  289;  gp. 

miltsa  353,  449 ;  ip.  mihsum  544. 
min,  pron.,  my:  nsm.  634,  1425;  nsn. 

1 289  ;    gsf.    minre    1 433  ;    dsf .    968, 

1674;    asm.  minne  975,    1281,  1416, 

1440,  1670;  asf.  mine  97,  224,  1215, 


212 


GLOSSARY 


1374  ;  asn.  min  1214,  1481  ;  vsm.  73, 
190,  1284,  1453;  isn.  mine  1626,  Ap. 
25  ;  npm.  mine  391,  1368;  npn.  min 
734 ;  gpm.  mlnra  934 ;  gpn.  924 ; 
dpn.  minum  1328;  vpm.  mine  1343. 

niirce,  adj.,  dark,  evil:  apf.  12 18. 

misgehygd,  n.,  evil  thought:  ns.  772. 

missenlic,  adj.,  various:  npm.  missen- 
llce  583. 

niidan,  l,  conceal:  imper.  2  sg.  mlS 
1209.     »S"<f<f  bemrSan. 

mod,  n.  I.  mind,  heart:  ns.  351,  637, 
771,  1667,  Ap.  52;  g.s.  m5des  143, 
287,  1690  ;  ds.  mode  66,  99,  422,  448, 
639,  746,  1017,  1251,  1583;  as.  mod 
69,  82.  —  2.  courage:  ds.  mode  625, 
984;  as.  mod  1393,  1461.  — 3.  Jjaet 
aeSele  mod  —  he  1242 ;  ure  mod  = 
w^  454 ;  liira  mod  =  they  140.  See 
aool-,  bolgen-,  deor-,  eaS-,  gealg-, 
geomor-,  glsed-,  glea^v-,  reonig-, 
sti<!J-,  vverigmod. 

modblind,  adj.,  spiritually  blind :  npm. 
modblinde  814. 

modgemynd,  n.,  intelligence,  informa- 
tion :  as.  688. 

modgeomor,  aid].,  sad  of  heart:  npm. 
modgeomre  11 13;  apm.  1708. 

modgeSyldig,  adj.,/a//^«/':  nsm.  m5d- 
ge^yldig  981. 

modhord,  m.,  mind,  thought:  as.  172. 

modig,  adj.,  brave:  nsm.  241,  1676, 
modiga  1632 ;  npm.  modige  802, 
1096,  1140,  1515,  modigan  1049; 
gpm.  m5digra  395,  1571.  See  tilmo- 
dig. 

modiglio,  adj.,  brave:  apm.  modigllce 
246.^ 

modrof,  adj.,  brave,  bold:  nsm.  1496. 

mo(\&iifii,m.,  mind,  heart:  ns.  892  ;  ds. 
mSdsefan  554;  as.  1209. 

modur,  f.,  mother  :  ns.  687. 

molde,  f.,  earth  :  ds.  moldan  594,  1289, 
1484. 

moldern,  n.,  dwelling  in  the  earth, 
grave :   as.  802. 


morgen,  m.,  jtiorning :  ds.  morgene  221. 
morgentorht,    adj.,    gleaming  in   the 

m orning :   nsf .  241. 
mortfor,  mn.     i.  murder :  g?,.vciox^res 

1 140.  —  2.     crime,    wickedness  :     gs. 

mor'Sres  975,  1313,  morJ?res  11 70;  is. 

mor'Sre  19,  772. 
morSorcofa,  m.,  prisoji  :   ds.  mor'Sor- 

cofan  1004.  . 
morSorcraeft,  m.,  crime,  murder :  ip. 

mor'Sorcrseftum  177. 
morSorseyldig,  adj.,  guilty  of  crime: 

npm.  moriSorscyldige  1599. 
mos,  r\.,food:  ds.  mose  27,  136. 
-mot,  see  gemot, 
motaii,  anv.      i.    may,   be  able:    2  sg. 

most  105,  115;   I  pi.  motan  Ap.  117 ; 

3  pi.  moton  228,  598,  886,  916,  1215, 

Ap.  99,  m6tan_  109,  1444;  pret.  3  pi. 

moston  1 01 2;   opt.  pres.  i   sg.  mote 

141 6. 
Moyses,  pr.  n.  Moses:  ds.  Moyse  1513. 
munan,  see  ge-,  onmunan. 
mund,  f.,    hatid:  ip.  mundum  491,  750. 
mundbyrd,  f.,  protectio7t :    gs.   mund- 

byrde  1433;  as.  mundbyrd  724,  1632. 
murnan,  Wl,  mourn,  grieve  :  pret.  3  pi. 

mumdan  37 ;  imper.  2  sg.  murn  99 ; 

ptc.   nsn.  murnende    1667.     See  be- 

murnan. 
miiTS,  m.,  mouth:  as.  651,  1300,  1440. 
mycel,    n.,    much,    many    things :    ns. 

148 1  ;  gs.  mycles  895. 
mycel,   adj.       i.    much,   great:    nsm. 

micel  41,  mycel  287  ;  nsf.  micel  158, 

mycel  1166,  1605,  1690;  nsn.  mycel 

Ap.  121;  dsm.  wk.  miclan  1436;  isn. 

micle    707,    1204;    comp.    nsf.    mare 

1522;  asf.  maran  554;   sup.  w.  gp., 

ns.  mjest   Ap.    118;    as.   1198,  1445; 

is.  mieste  1501.  —  2.  long:  nsf.  micel 

107,  mycel  422;  asn.  mycel  815. 
myc\e,z.d\.,  much,  greatly  :   142S,  1518, 

1563- 
myoliaii,  W2,  increase  :  pret.  3  sg.  myc- 
lade  1526;  pret.  3  pi.  mycladon  1553. 


GLOSSARY 


213 


mychnn,  adv.,  greatly :   395,  892,  mic- 

lum  122. 
myltaii,  sec  fteinyltaii. 
-iiiynd,  see  {;('-,  AvyrO'inynd. 
myndig,  see  geiuyndig. 
myne,  m.,  desire,  purpose :  ns.  1537. 
inynnaii,  Wl,  direct,  lead:  3  sg.  mynetS 

294. 
nijTce,  adv.,  darkly,  evilly  :   1 31 3. 
myrrau,  see  gcmyrran. 

N 
N  =  rune  "^  A  P.  104  ;  for  t?iea7ti?ig,  see 

Notes. 
nabban,   \V3,    lack,    not   have :      i    sg. 

naebbe  301  ;  2  sg.  nafast  311. 
naca,   m.,   s/iip :    ns.   266 ;     gs.  nacan 

yi. 
ntefre,   adv.,    never:    459,    471,    1286, 

1382,  1401,  1693. 
nalas,  adv.,  no,  not  at  all :  46,  233,  506, 

605,  1042,  1 59 1. 
nama,  m.,  name:   ns.   542,   1322,   Ap. 

57  ;  as.  naman  975,  1670. 
n^nig,  pron.,  none,  not  any  :  nsm.  544, 

986;  asm.  nienigne  570,  1037. 
nses,  see  wesan. 
ii£ess,  m.,   cliff,    headland:    ds.   n^ESse 

1710;  as.  naes  1305. 
nat,  see  Mitan. 

ne,  adv.,  not:   16.  37,  85,  98,  etc. 
ne,  conj.,  nor,  neither:  22,  99,  199,  200, 

etc. 
neadcofa,  m.,  prison  :    ds.  neadcofan 

1309.     See  ned. 
neah,  prep.  w.  dat.,  near,  near  to :  359, 

1062,  neh  821,  833,  991,  1252. 
neah,  adv.,  near  :  638,  neh  542. 
nearoned,  f.,  oppression,  bondage :   dp. 

nearonedum  102. 
iioaroAve,    adv.,    diligently,    earnestly  : 

A  p.  104. 
iiearu,  f.,  oppression,  cruelty  :  as.  414. 
nearu,  adj.,  cruel,  severe:  asf.  neanve 

Ap.  13. 
neat,  n.,  beast,  cattle:  np.  67. 


ned,  f.     I.   desire,  necessity  :  ns.  neod 

158;    ds.    nede    115.  —  2.    hardship, 

suffering:     dp.     niedum     1377.  — 3. 

rune  "^  ;  /or  weaning,  see  note  to  Ap. 

104.     See  nearo-,  3'reaned. 
neh,  see  neah. 
nenuian,  Wi,  name,  call :  pret.  3  pi. 

nemdonii93;  pp.  nemned  720,  1651  ; 

inf.  1 1 76. 
nemne,  conj.,  besides,  except:  664. 
neintJe,  conj.,  unless:  nemj^e  Ap.  114. 
neod,  sec  ned. 

neon,  adv.,  nearly,  greatly  :   1 176. 
neorxnawang,  m.,/araa'w:  ns.  102. 
neosan,  Wl,  w.  gen.     i.  visit,  come  to: 

inf.  310,  830,  1025,  1389,  Ap.  iio. — 

2.  inquire  for,  seek  for:  3  pi.  neosaS 

Ap.  103  ;  inf.  484. 
neotan,  1,  \v.  gen.,  enjoy  :  inf.  810.     See 

beneotan. 
nergend,  m.,  Savior :  ns.  neregend  29 1 , 

1377  ;  vs.  nergend  549,  921,  nerigend 

1286. 
nerian,  see  generian. 
Neron,  pr.  n.,  Nero:  gs.  Nerones  Ap. 

13-  '_ 

neru,  see  lifneru. 
nesan,  5,  survive  :  opt.  pres.  i  pi.  nesan 

515- 
net,  see  searonet. 
neSan,  see  geneffan. 
nifol    (neol),    adj.,    precipitous,    steep, 

deep:  asm.  niflan  1305. 
niht,  f.      I.   night:  ns.  1305;  ds.  1462; 

as.     1254,     1265.  —  2.     day     (i.e.    24. 

hours')  :  np.  185  ;  gp.  nihta  930,  1673  ! 

dp.  nihtum  148.  , 

nihtes,  adv.,  by  night:  Ap.  104. 
nihtgerinies,  adv.,  counting  by  nights 

{i.e.  days)  :   1 1 5,  1 58. 
nihthehn,    m.,     coz'er    of   night:    ns. 

123. 
nihtlang,  adj.,   throughout  the   night: 

asm.  nihtlangne  834,  1309. 
niman,  4,  take,  carry  off:  pp.  numen 

1340.     See  forniman. 


214 


GLOSSARY 


niowinga,    adv.,    anew:      1394.     See 

edniwinga. 
nis,  see  wesaii. 

mS,  m.,  man  :  gp.  ni'Sa  1377. 

mS,  m.,   hostility,  hate:   ns.  768,   1303, 

1394  ;  ds.  ni5e  1037. 
nTffhete,  m.,  enemy  :  dp.  ni^hetum  834. 
iiTSla,  see  genrffla. 

nTSplega,  m.,  battle  :  ds.  ni'Splegan  414. 
lli^ve,  adj.     i.  fresh,  renewed:  isf.  ni- 

wan  123,  1303.  —  2.  new, recent:  asm. 

niowan  1670.     See  edniwe. 
ni^vian,  see  geniAvian. 
no,  adv.,   no,   not  at  all:    3,   562,  926, 

1265,  1443,  1704. 
nu,  adv.,  now  :  66,  185,  283,  332,  340, 

39''  397.  595'  614,  648,  678,  729,  759, 

811,  897,  902,  904,  932,  936, 950,  1023, 

1165,  1166,   1179,  1197,   1281,  1293, 

1320,   1328,  1364,  1414,   1425,   1441, 

1478,   1503,   1504,  1517,  1558,  1602, 

1605,  Ap.  73,  88,  105,  120. 
nu,  conj.,   now  that,   since:    317,   485, 

1301 :  correl.  nu  .  .  .  nu  644-648. 
nu  gena,  adv.,  still,  further  :  422,  475. 
nu  gyt,  adv.,  still,  further :'^\d^.     See 

git. 
nu  pa,  adv.,  now :   489,  in  phrase  Tu 

and  nu  J>d. 
nyston,  nyton,  see  witsm. 

O 

of,  prep.  w.  dat.  i.  from,  out  of:  57, 
89,  100,  112,  115,  117,  168,  195,  243, 
264,  278,  291,  396,  444,  555,  583,  587, 
589,  590,  732,  736,  757,  774,  780,  794, 
795'  944.  968,  1033,  U33,  1 1 44,  1 1 49, 
1150,  1177,  1373,  1385,  1399,  1409, 
1423,  1470,  1471,  1472,  1503,  1544, 
1564,  1624,  1664,  Ap.  56,  112. 

ofer,  prep.  w.  ace.  i.  over,  upon, 
throughout:  7,  87,  190,  198,  201,  223, 
224,  236,  242,  244,  247,  252,  259,  274, 
283,  293,  298,  306,  310,  336,  345,  348, 
352.  367.  368,  383.  390,  398.  421,  423. 
439.  445.  495.  499.  513.  602,  701,  788, 


823,  825,  838,  853,  863,  906,  932,  970, 
1 104,  1 173,  1229,  1261,  1300,  1323, 
1372,  1434.  1524.  1714.  1718,  1719, 
Ap.  7,  122.  —  2.  among:  543,  Ap.  15. 
—  3.  contrary  to:  517,  1215,  1374.— 
4.  beyond,  above:  676,  895,  1481. 

ofer,  m.,  shore:  ds.  of  re  17 12. 

oferbregdan,  3,  cover,  protect :  pret.  3 
sg.  oferbraegd  1541,  oferbrSd  1306. 

ofereode,  anv.,  come  upon,  overpower: 
pret.  3  sg.  464,  820,  826,  862. 

oferhygd,  fn.,  pride  :  dp.  oferhygdum 
319;  ip.  oferhigdum  1318. 

oferstigan,  l,  rise  above:  pret.  3  sg. 
oferstag  1574. 

ofgifan,  5,  depart  from,  give  up:  pret. 
3  pi.  ofgefon  Ap.  12;  inf.  1655. 

oflysted,  part.  adj.  w.  gen.,  desirous: 
1 1 12,  1226. 

ofost,  f.,  haste  :  ns.  1565. 

ofostlice,  adv.,  quickly:  1625,  ofstlTce 
299,  792. 

ofsltepan,  Wl,  sleep:  ptc.  dpm.  ofslae- 
pendum  865. 

oft,  adv.,  often  :  17,  140,  164,  442,  511, 
618,  626,  652. 

ombehtSegn,  m.,  servant :  np.  ombeht- 
hegnas  1534. 

on, prep.  A.  w.dat.  i.  on,upon,in,with- 
in:  10,  1 1,  18,  22,  36,  58,  65,  66,  9S,  99, 
102,  130,  137,  179,  180,  185,  206,  212, 
237,  238,  239,  240,  246,  254,  255,  257, 
263,  266,  276,  289,  305,  31 1,  316,  351, 
358,  382,  400,  408,  413,  422,  432,  438, 
446,  448,  450,  460,  470,  481,  490,  498, 
501,  504,  507,  511,  514.  515.  554.  582, 
594,  604,  616,  620,  626,  634,  637,  639, 
640,  644,  650,  672,  684,  689,  699,  705, 
714,  720,  726,  730,  734,  737,  769,  774, 
821,  832,  847,  849,  S64,  866,  873,  874, 
893,  898,  900,  903,  905,  923,  960,  972, 
985,  988,  998,  1017,  1021,  1024,  1073, 
1084,  1087,  1096,  1 140,  1 142,  1^46, 
1165,  1180,  1214,  1226,  1241,  1251, 
1265,  1289,  1327,  1338,  1339,  1386, 
1422,  1427,  1452,  1453,  1477,  1484, 


GLOSSARY 


215 


1485,  1509,  1512,  1531,  1560,  1570, 
1573.  1583.  1596,  1615,  1626,  1645, 
1652,  1662,  1670,  1671,  1694,  1699, 
1711,  1712,  1713,  1716,  1721,  Ap.  2, 
6,  r9,  27,  40,  87,  92,  94,  99,  loi,  104, 
106.  —  2.  in,  at,  during:  i,  77,  752, 
788,  1 106,  1407,  1436,  1462,  Ap.  II, 
98.  —  3.  according  to,  by:  134  (2),  489, 
1696.  —  B.  w.  inst.,  in,  by  :  970.  — 
C.  w.  ace.  I.  to,  into:  86,  207,  286,  430, 
588,  777,  824,  827,  935,  1034,  1045, 
1050,  1058,  mo,  1 191,  1317,  1340, 
1385,  1417,  Ap.  51,  116.  —  2.  upon, 
in:  15,  191,  222,  250,  252,  253,  284, 
337.  379.  429.  444.  500,  504,  715,  830, 
852,  899,  928,  1046,  1446,  1502,  1506. 
—  3.  by,  according  to:  120,  170,  324, 
339,  700,  1622,  16S0.  —  4.  at:  214, 
235,  1 160,  1388. 

on,  adv.,  on,  upon  :  11 99,  1334. 

onblandan,  R,  mix,  mingle :  pp.  on- 
blonden  675. 

onbryrdan,  l,  excite,  stir  up  :  pp.  on- 
bnrded  122,  1 118. 

onona^van,  R.  i.  recognize,  perceive : 
I  sg.  oncnawe  644 ;  pret.  i  sg.  on- 
cneow  855  ;  pret.  3  sg.  529,  672,  843  ; 
pret.  I  pi.  oncneowon  875  ;  pret.  3  pi. 
1337  ;  opt.  pres.  3  pi.  oncnawan  1214  ; 
pp.  oncnawen  527 ;  inf.  566.  —  2. 
know:  2  sg.  oncnawest  631;  pret. 
3  pi.  oncneowan  764.  —  3.  address, 
approach  :  opt.  pres.  3  sg.  oncnawe 
322. 

Oiicwetfan,  5,  answer,  respond:  pret. 
3  sg.  oncwae«  270,  396, 442,  555,  1346, 
1429. 

oncjTran,  Wl.  i.  change,  pervert: 
pp.  oncyrred  36;  inf.  1461. —  2.  in- 
trans.,  turti,  turn  away :  pret.  3  sg. 
oncyrde  466. 

oncytfdied,  f.,  injury :  ap.  oncy^dSda 
1 1 79. 

onoy?Hg,  adj.,  revealed:  nsm.  Ap.   106. 

ond,  conj.,  a«(/:  945,  looi,  1039,  1203, 
1307,    1395,    1400,    1719;    all  other 


occurrences  are  represented  in  the 
MS.  by  the  abbreviation. 

ondglte,  f.,  understanding,  comprehen- 
sion: as.  ondgitan  1521. 

oiidlaii";,  adj .,  livelong,  entire :  asm.  ond- 
Iangne8i8,  1274;  asf.  ondlange  1254. 

ondsfet',  n.,  opposition  :  as.  927. 

ond.saca,  xn..,foe,  opponent:  np.  ondsa- 
can  II 48,  1459. 

ondsAvarian,  W2,  attswer :  pret.  3  sg. 
ondswarode  260,  277,  290,  343,  510, 
623,  ondswarude  202,  andswarode 
925;  opt.  pres.  2  sg.  ondsware  319. 

ondswaru,  f.,  answer :  as.  ondsware 
285,  315,  401,  508,617,  628,643,  1 184, 
1345'  1375'  andsware  189,  572. 

ondsAverian,  \V2,  answer :  pret.  3  pi. 
ondsweorodon  857. 

(indA\ist,  f .,  support,  station  :  as.  1 540. 

onfeiig-,  m.,  attack  :  ds.  onfenge  1339. 

onfindan,  3,  discover :  3  pi.  onfindaj" 
iSi. 

onfon,  R,  w.  dat.,  receive,  seize  :  pret.  3 
sg.  onfeng  1528  ;  pret.  3  pi.  onfengon 
1 122,  1630;  opt.  pret.  3  sg.  onfenge 
53  ;  inf.  782,  1640. 

onginn,  n.,  action,  behavior:  ns.  888, 
ongin  466,  741. 

onginnan,  3,  begin,  commence :  i  sg. 
onginne  1440;  pret.  3  sg.  ongan  12, 
427,  449,  469,  669,  1019,  1170,  1315, 
1341,  1398'  1698,  ongann  352,  S49, 
1126,  1266,  1555,  1607;  pret.  3  pi. 
ongunnon  763 ;  opt.  pret.  2  sg.  on- 
gunne  1419. 

ongitan,  5.  i.  perceive:  pret.  3  pi. 
ongeton  534 ;  pp.  ongiten  785,  897 ; 
inf.  861,  901,  922,  986. —  2.  hear,  take 
heed:  imper.  2  sg.  ongit  936. 

ongyldan,  3,  w.  gen.,  yield,  give  up: 
inf.  1 1 01. 

onhlidan,  l.  i.  open:  pp.  onhliden 
1077. — 2.  appear:  pret.  3  sg.  on- 
hlad  1269. 

onli  reran,  Wl,  stir  up:  pp.  on  h  re  red 
370,  393'  1302,  1394- 


2l6 


GLOSSARY 


oiihyrdan,  Wl,  eiicourage :  pp.  onhyr- 

ded  Ap.  53. 
oniruan,  3,  yield,   burst  open  :    pret.  3 

sg.  onarn  999. 
onlic,  adj.,  similar,  like:   npm.  onlice 

251. 
onlicnes,  see  anlicnes. 
oiiliehtan,  Wl,  enlighten:  pp.  onlihted 

Ap.  52. 
onlucan,  2,  ope7i,    ti7ilock :  pret.  3    sg. 

onleac  172,  316,  601. 
onmod,  adj.,  resolute  :  nsm.  54;  npm. 

anmode  1638. 
onmunan,  PP,  w.  gen.  and  ace,  deem 

■worthy:  inf.  895. 
onsendan,  Wl.    i.  send:  i  sg.  onsende 

no;    pret.  3   sg.    1604;  opt.  pres.   2 

sg.  1508.  —  2.  dismiss,  give  up:  pret. 

3  sg.  onsende  1327  ;  inf.  187. 
onspannan,   R,   reveal,  disclose:    pret. 

3  sg.  onspeonn  470,  onspeon  671. 
onspriiigan,  3,   rise,  spring  up  :    pret. 

3  sg.  onsprang  1635. 
onstellan,  Wl,  set:  inf.  971. 
onsund,    adj.,    uninjured,    sound :   np. 

onsunde  1012;  ap.  1623. 
on»yn,  i.,  sight,  face :  as.   onsyne   721, 

1499. 
onsyne,  adj.,  visible:   nsm.  910. 
ontynan,    Wi,    disclose:    pp.    ontyned 

105,  1612. 
onAvaoan,  6.       i.  awake:     pret.    3  sg. 

onwoc   839,   Ap.   65.  —  2.    originate: 

pret.  3  pi.  onwocon  683. 
onn'adan,  6,  w.  dat.,  enter,  penetrate : 

pret.  3  sg.  onwod  140. 
onivendan,   Wl,  pervert:    pret.    3  sg. 

onwende  35. 
on\vindan,  3,  return,  retreat:  pret.  3  sg. 

onwand  531. 
open,   adj.      i.  open:   asn.   803;    npf. 

opene    1076. — 2.  known,    vianifest: 

nsf.  open  759. 
openian,  see  geopenian. 
or, n.    I.  beginning:  ns.  1382,  Ap.65;  as. 
oor  649.  —  2.  front,  van  :  ds.  5re  1 106, 


orona\ve,  adj.,  manifest:  nsn.  770. 
ord,  m.     I.  point,  spear:  as.  1330;  ip. 

ordum  32,  1205.  —  2.  beginning:  ds. 

orde  1483,  1535. 
ordfruma,  m.,  prince,  chief,  Lord:  ns. 

146,  Ap.  28;  ds.  ordfruman  683. 
oretta,  m.,  warrior :  ns.  879,  983,  oreta 

463. 
orettmaeog,    m.,    warrior:    np.    orett- 

maecgas  664. 
orfeorme,  adj.  w.  inst.,  destitute,  lack- 
ing: npm.  406,  161 7. 
orgete,  adj.,  manifest:  nsf.  759,  1569; 

nsn.  526;  asn.  851. 
orhlytte,  adj.  w.  gen.,  devoid  of:  npm. 

680. 
orlege,  n.,  strife,  battle:  ns.  1302;   ds. 

47,  1 146,  1205. 
ornia'te,  adj.,  very  great,  excessive  :  nsf. 

1166. 
orwena,  adj.    w.    gen.,  hopeless:  nsm. 

1 107. 
o3,  prep.  w.  ace,  to,  up  to  :   1575. 
otJer,  pron.,  other,  another  :  dsm.  SSrum 

1051  ;    dsf.  o'Serre   443  ;  dsn.  55rum 

138;  asm.   oSerne   1015,   1163;    asn. 

oSer  656;  isf.   oSre  706,  1675,  1700, 

ohre  S08  ;  npm.  oSere  689  ;  gp.  oSerra 

704;  dp.  6 brum  1 100  ;  ap.  oSre  Ap.  51. 
oJPffset,  conj.,  until :  464,  820,  826,  1061, 

1245,    1268,    1456,    o'5j>aet   268,   835, 

1247,  oJ'l>3et  1574,  o)>"S3et  1304. 
o?rae,  conj.,  or  :   334,  546,  638,  745. 
offSeodan,    Wl,    dismember,   separate: 

pp.  o'S'Seoded  142 1. 
oSwitan,  l,  taunt,  reproach:  opt.  pres. 

1  pi.  0(Switan  1358. 
otJyAvan,  Wl,  reveal:  pp.  o'Sywed  91 1. 
o\viht,  pron.,  used  adverbially,  at  all : 

is.  owihte  800. 


pae?J,  see  mearc-,  seolhpaeS. 
Paulus,  pr.  n.,  Paul:  ns.  Ap.  14. 
Perseas,    pr.    n.    pi.,    Persians:    gp. 
Persea  Ap.  76. 


GLOSSARY 


217 


Petrus,  pr.  n.,  Peter  :  ns.  Ap.  14. 
PhilipiiB,  pr.  n.,  J'liilip  :  ns.  A  P.  37. 
Platau,  pr.  n.,  Platan  :  a.s.  Platan  1651. 
plega,  see  gu3-,  niO'-,  set'gplega. 
picg'ian,  Wa,  play,  move  about  quickly  : 
pret.  3  sg.  plegode  370. 

B 

rsBced,  n.,  hall,  Imildiiis^:  as.  1308. 
See  heah-,  hiiii-,  Avinra'ccd. 

raoian,  Wa,  w.  dat.,  rtile:  inf.  521. 

r^cu,  see  streaiiiracu. 

rad,  see  brim-,  hraii-,  s^vanrad. 

raed,  m.  i.  command,  order:  as.  936; 
dp.  rSdum  1498.  —  2.  counsel,  plan 
of  action:  as.  ried  1088;  dp.  riedum 
469.  —  3.  ride,  authority:  ns.  rSd 
1645.     ^^^  an-,  feorli-,  folerted. 

riedan,  see  beriedaii. 

-ra^deii,  see  eanip-,  frum-,  gaful- 
raeden. 

rSdend,  m.,  ruler:  ns.  816;  np.  627. 
See  inago-,  seler^dend. 

rasdsnottor,  adj .,  wise  in  council :  comp. 
asm.  rSdsnotterran  473. 

raefnan,  see  arspfiian. 

rieran,  see  araTan. 

ries,  see  dea'ff-,  8"u<5-,  s^veorrtrtes. 

r^san,   Wl,  rush  :    pret.  3  pi.  rcesdon 

1334- 
rtesbora,   m.,    leader,   chief:  ds.    ra;s- 

boran  385  ;  np.  139. 
r^swa,  m.,  prince,   ruler:    ns.    1086; 

ds.  rSswan  1622  ;  np.  692  ;  dp.  ras- 

wum  619. 
reaf,  see  ^%a?lreaf. 
reaflan,  see  bereafian. 
reocaii,  Wl,   set  forth,   narrate:    imp. 

2  sg.  rece  419;  inf.  1489,  Ap.  11,  24. 

See  areoean. 
recen,  adj.,  awful :  npn.  recene  1511. 
reodan,  2,  stain,  rcddeU  :  pret.  2  pi.  ju- 

don  1003. 
reoftin,  see  bereofan. 
reonigmod,    adj.,    sad:    npm.    reonig- 

mode  592. 


rcord,  f.,  speech  :  is.  reorde  60,  1108. 
rcordberond,  m.,  man  :  ap.  419. 
reordig,  see  ellrcordig. 
reordigan,  Wa,  speak :  3  sg.  reordah 

1301  ;  pret.  3  sg.  reordode  364,  reor- 

dade    255,    415,  602;    inf.  469.     See 

gereordian. 
reotan,  2,  weep,  lament:  inf.  171 2. 
rfoAv,  adj.,  rough,  fierce:    nsm.   reow 

1 1 16;  npn.  reovve  1334.     See  d<"a?S-, 

^vael^eo^v. 
rest,  f.,  rest:  is.  reste  592.     See  land- 
rest, 
restan,    Wl,    rest,    become    quiet:     inf. 

1576. 
retan,   Wl,  comfort,  cheer:    inf.    1608. 

[rot.] 
re'<5e,  adj., yf^;r^:  npm.  139. 
rice,    n.,    realm,    kingdom  :      gs.     rices 

S07,  1326,  1683.     6'if^  eSel-,  heofon- 

riee. 
rice,   adj.,  powerful:    nsm.   364,    415; 

dsm.  ricum  385. 
ricene,  adv.,  straightway,  quickly  :  807, 

A  p.  39. 
riesian,  Ws,  hold  sway,  prevail:  pret. 

3  sg.  ricsode  1 116. 
ridende,  see  farotJridende. 
riht,  n.,  right,  equity,  justice:  ns.  1645; 

gs.    rihtes    139;    ds.    rihte    521;    as. 

riht  1 20,  324,  700.    See  leod-,  iinriht. 
rilit,    adj.,  just,    equitable:    asf.    ryhte 

1511. 
rim,  n.,   number:    ds.    rime    1696;    as. 

rim  546;  is.  rime  1035.     ^S"^*?  unnm, 

nihtgerimes. 
rimcrteft,  m.,  computation,  figures  :  ds. 

rimcraefte  134. 
rinc,  m.,  man,  warrior:  ns.   11 16;  np. 

rincas  9 ;   gp.   rinca  967 ;  dp.  rincum 

Ap.  II;    vp.  rincas  1343.     See  gutf- 

rinc. 
risan,  see  arisan. 
-riss,  see  eneoriss. 
rod,  f.,  cross :    ns.  967  ;    gs.   rode  Ap. 

39;  ds.  1326;  as.  1337. 


2l8 


GLOSSARY 


rodor,  m.,  siy,  heaven',   as.  521;  gp. 

rodera  627,  816. 
rof,  adj.,  hold,  brave  :  nsm.  984,   1469, 

1676  ;  npm.  rofe  9 ;  dpm.  rSfum  1343  ; 

comp.  asm.  rofran  473;  vsm.  rof  625. 

See   beadu-,   cyne-,    ellen-,  hete-, 

hige-,  mod-,  sigerof. 
Komeburg,  pr.  n.,  Ro7ne:   ds.  Rome- 

byrig  Ap.  ii. 
rond,  m.,  shield:  ns.  9,  412. 
rowend,  m.,  sailor  :  as.  473. 
run,  f.      I.   writing:  ds.  rune  134.  —  2. 

secret  discussion:   ds.  rune   1 161;   as. 

627. 
ryht,  adj.,  see  riht. 
-ryhte,  see  biryhte. 
ryinan,  see  geryman. 
ryne,  see  ge-,  gastgeryne. 
ryuig,  see  widrynig. 

S 
S£e,  m.,  sea  :  ns.  453  ;  gs.  sSs  236,  1658  ; 

ds.  sSwe  515;  as.  sS  247. 
sa^bat,  m.,  ship :  ds.  siebate  438,  490. 
sSebeorg,  m.,   sea-hill:    ap.   ssbeorgas 

308. 
saec,  f.,  conflict,  struggle :  ds.  saecce  Ap. 

59;  as.  1 132.     &^  onds£ec. 
-saca,  see  ondsaca. 
sacerd,  m.,  priest:  dp.  sacerdum  Ap. 

71  ;    ap.   sacerdas    742.      [Lat.   sacer- 

dos.]     See  ealdorsacerd. 
saeflota,  m.,  ship:  ds.  sjeflotan  381. 
saegen,  see  fyrnsaegen. 
saegl,  see  segl. 
siehengest,  m.,  sea-steed,  ship :  ds.  sse- 

hengeste  488. 
saeholni,  m.,  sea  :  ns.  529. 
sa;l,   n.,    hall :  as.    sel    762 ;    ap.    salu 

1673.     See  beag-,  hornssel. 
sail,  mf.,  time,  occasion:  ns.  1 165. 
salad,  f.,  voyage:  ds.  sSlade  511. 
saBlan,  Wl,  impers.,  befall,  cha7tce :  pres. 

opt.  3  sg.  siele  1355.     See  gesaelan. 
sielida,   m.,   sailor  :    as.    saelidan   47 1  ; 

as.  sEleodan  500. 


saelig,  see  iin-,  Avansa'lig. 
salt,  see  sealt. 

saelwag,  m.,  -wall  of  the  hall:  ds.  sael- 

wage  1493. 
SEemearh,  m.,  sea-steed,  ship:  ns.  267. 
samnian,  Wa,  assemble,  gather  together, 

collect:   pret.   i    sg.   samnode    Ap.   2; 

pret.  3  sg.  samnade  125;  pret.  3  pi. 

samnodan  11 24.     ^Vf  gesamnian. 
samod,    adv.,    together,    in    company : 

1666,  Ap.  78. 
sandliliS, n.,  sand-hill:  ap.  sandhleo'Su 

236. 
S£ene,   adj.,    dilatory,   shno:    nsm.    204, 

211,  Ap.  34;  npm.  Ap.  75. 
sang,  m.    i .  singijig :  ns.  869.  —  2.  song, 

poem  :  as.  A  p.  i. 
sar^n.,  paifi :  ns.  1246;  gs.  sares  1243; 

ds.  sare  1453;  is.  1396,  1404;  as.  sar 

956,  1468. 
sax,  nd].,  painful:  nsn.  1689;  asf.  sare 
_i368. 
sarbenn,f.,7c'w/;/^/;  ip.  sarbennum  1239. 
sarcwide,  m.,  offensive,  hostile  speech  : 

as.  320,  965. 
sarig,  adj.,  sorrowful :  isf.  sargan  60. 
sarslege,  m.,  painful  blow:  ip.  sarsle- 

gum  1275. 
ssestreani,  m.,  water  of  the  ocean :  ap. 

siestreamas  196,  749. 
Satan,  pr.  n.,  Satan  :  ds.  Satane  1689; 

as.  Satan  1193. 
saeTverig,  adj.,  weary  of  voyaging:  apm. 

sSwerige  826,  862. 
sa^vul,  f.,  soul,  life :  ns.  sawle  Ap.  62  ; 

as.  151,  433,  865  ;  np.  sawlS  228;  gp. 

549,  921,  1417. 
sawulgedal,  n.,  death:  as.  1701. 
scaed,  n.,  shadozu  :  np.  sceadu  836. 
sceacan,  6,  move  quickly,  depart :  pret. 

3  pi.  sceocan  11 39;  inf.  1594. 
scealc,  m.,  servatit:  dp.  scealcum  512. 
sceapen,  see  eannsoeapcn. 
scearii,  see  folc-,  landscearn. 
sceat,  m.,  region,  quarter  (if  the  earth): 

ap.  sceattas  332. 


GLOSSARY 


219 


sceatt,  m.,  7iio)iey,  payment :  ap.  sceat- 
tas  297. 

sceatfa,  m.,  enemy:  gs.  sceaSan  1133, 
1291.  See  folc--,  fyrn-,  leod-,  <Seod- 
sceaJfsi. 

sceaAvian,  W2,  behold:  pret.  3  sg.  scea- 
wode  S39. 

soenan,  see  gesoenan. 

soeor,  m.,  slunver,  storm:  ns.  512.  See 
haegelsfiir. 

socoran,  l,  <iit:  inf.  1181. 

sce^p,  adj.,  sharp:  nsf.  1133. 

sce^^ven,  see  Ineodusoe^^ven. 

sceO'San,  6,  injure  :  3  sg.  scy'Se'S  1561  ; 
inf.  1 147,  scy5"5an  1047.  See  ge- 
sceTOan. 

scinan,  l,  shine  :  3  sg.  scTne'5  1720;  inf. 
836.     See  ymbscinan. 

scingelac,  n.,  magic  :  dp.  scingelacum 
766. 

scip,  n.,  ship:  as.  240;  ip.  scipum  512. 
See  hornsc'ip. 

scipferend,  m.,  sailor :  dp.  scipferen- 
dum  250. 

scippend,  see  scyppend. 

scip%\'eard,  m.,  guardian  of  the  ship  : 
np.  scipweardas  297. 

scire,  adv.,  brightly:  836. 

scirpla,  see  gescirpla. 

scrfff,  see  dun-,  eoriJscraif. 

scrid,  adj.,  rapid:  nsm.  496. 

scrifan,  see  gescrifan. 

si'vxSa.n,  \,  speed,  glide :  inf.  1457. 

sciia,  see  dimscua,  heolstor-,  hlin- 
scu\N'a. 

soufan,  see  bescfifan. 

sciilan,  anv.  a.  must,  must  needs  (obli- 
gation and  command^  :  I  sg.  sceal  66, 
sceall  Ap.  109;  2  sg.  scealt  174,  216, 
943,  950,  1208,  1366,  1520,  1669 
scealtu  220;  3  sg.  sceal  185,  435 
1309,  Ap.  100,  scell  1483;  3  pi.  sceo 
Ion  614,  733  ;  pret.  i  sg.  sceolde  924 
1403,  1414;  pret.  3  sg.  1 137,  1244 
Ap.  35;  pret.  3  pi.  sceoldon  137,  796 
Ap.  10,  79.  —  2.  will,  shall  (futurity') 


I  sg.  sceal  341  ;  2  sg.  scealt  1383, 
1467  ;  3  sg.  sceal  520,  S90,  947,  seel 
952;  1  pi.  sceolon  1487;  pret.  3  sg.  . 
sceolde  757,  iioo,  1132,  1697;  pres. 
opt.  I  sg.  scyle  77.  —  3.  be  accustomed : 
3  sg.  sceall  181. 

scur,  see  sceor. 

ec'urheard,  adj.,  effective  in  battle:  nsf. 

scyldan,  see  gescyldan. 
scyldend,  see  gescyldend. 

Si-yldhata,  m.,  wicked  persecutor, 
enefny :  np.  scyldhatan  1047,  1147; 
dp.  scyldhetum  85. 

scyldig,  adj.,  guilty:  npm.  scyldige 
1 216.     ^'iv  mortJor-,  unsoyldig. 

scyne,  adj.,  bright,  beautiful:  nsm.  wk. 
scyna  766. 

scyppend,  m..  Creator:  ns.  119,  396, 
434,  486,  787,  scippend  278;  vs. 
scyppend  192. 

scyrdan,  see  gescyrdan. 

scyrian,  see  bescyrian,  gescyrigan. 

se,  seo,  Sa't,  i.  dem.  pron.,  def.  art., 
the,  this,  that:  nsm.  se  118,  168,  225, 
239,  262,  313,  346,  359,  371,  382,  639, 
661,  696,  751,  766,  773,  799,  815,  843, 
977,  990,  996,  1029,  1045,  1 103,  II 15, 
1 1 26,    1 138,    1 190,    1 195,    1253,    1296, 

1307.  1395.  1455.  1523.  1575.  1581. 
1587,  1607,  1632,  1635,  1647,  1660, 
1687,  Ap.  14,  25,  60;  nsf.  seo  107, 
.  449,  613,  758,  1074,  1210,  1561,  sio 
167,  207,  1634;  nsn.  'Saet  558,  636, 
1 199,  1437,  1620,  J'aet  7,  19,  205,  248, 
511,  573,  609,  682,  804,  906,  960, 
1119,  1135,  1228,  1242,  1489,  1532, 
1562,  1659,  16S9,  1702,  1722;  gsmn.v 
haes  29,  145,  155,  204,  211,  215,  261, 
307,  480,  649,  718,  810,  1056,  1117, 
1121,  1238,  1247,  1279,  1499.  153O' 
1592,  Ap.  99,  107,  117  ;  gsf.  )>Sre  177  ; 
dsmn.  Sam  658,  1205,  Hm  14,  22,  47, 
48,  119,  179,  294,  381,  467,  598,  666, 
683,  697,  699,  728,  795,  796,  846,  854, 
889,  988,  1004,  ioc8,  1029,  1034,  1043, 


220 


GLOSSARY 


1068,  1080,  1086,  1098,  1 1 18,  1 1 30, 
1142,  1146,  1222,  1226,  1298,   1315, 

i339>  135I'  1353'  1356.  1359.  1369. 
1436,  1460,  1544,  1650,  1659,  1662, 
1683,  1702,  )?Sm  795,  Ap.  58;  dsf. 
'Szere  1270,  J'sere  40,  113,  137,  185, 
275,  281,  287,  719,  828,  1168,  1462, 
1491,  1649,  1672;  asm.  'Sone  752, 
})one  86,  227,  831,  978,  1171,  1175, 
1324,  1431,  1566,  Ap.  45,  68,  81,  90; 
asf.  '5a  mi,  1386,  1541,  1690,  \>a  25, 
41,  loi,  216,  284,  286,  588,  642,  777, 
911,  929,  939,  1120,  1160,  1476,  1637, 
1655,  1680,  1697,  Ap.  116;  asn.  'Sjet 
194,  329,  1418,  t>ast  15,  28,  261,  322, 
429.  433'  566,  762,  799,  896,  920,  945, 
956,  1 172,  1288,  1299,  1308,  1361, 
1400,  1435'  1463.  1483'  1540,  1663, 
1669,  Ap.  63;  is.  'Son  970,  J?on  361, 
501,  1522,  \>e  368,  932,  Ap.  115,  \>y 
733'  1266,  1365,  1594,  1643;  np.  'Sa 
559'  763'  801,  1053,  1249,  1592,  Ap. 
75,  85,  J>a  67,  401,  720,  790,  80s,  857' 
1027,  1049,  1070,  1458,  1617  ;  gp.  I'ara 
569,  886,  890,  1051,  J'Sra  1495;  "^P- 
'Sam  885,  J>am  184,  209,  718,  1014, 
1219,  1646,  1649,  Ap.  ic6;  ap.  }'a4i9, 
605,  829,  1089,  i486,  Ap.  3,  "Sa  Ap. 
47.  —  2.  rel.  pron.,  w/io,  which,  nsm. 
se  12,  35,  1 105,  1198,  1199,  1377' 
1 54 1,  1604;  gsm.  )33es  1056;  gsn. 
'Saes  1453;  dsm.  J^am  1322;  asn.  haet 
1482,  ^zet  =  double  relative,  id  quod, 
73'  346;  ap.  ha  625,  1295,  1624,  «a 
816.  See  further  se  Se,  (Jaes,  (Ties  tSe, 
3y  laes. 

sealt,  adj.,  salt,  briny :  asm.  sealtne 
1532;  apm.  sealte  196,  salte  749. 

searocraeft,  m.,  treachery:  as.  109. 

searohaibbend,  m.,  warrior :  np.  searu- 
hasbbende  1528;  gp.  searohjebbendra 
1468. 

searonet,  n.,  7cii/e,  snare :  as.  64 ;  ip. 
searonettum  943. 

searo'Sanc,  m.,  sagacious  thought:  ip. 
searohancum  1255. 


searu,  fn.,  cunning,  treachery :  as. 
searwe  1348,  Ap.  13;  ip.  seanvum 
1396,  searowum  745.  See  gu?f- 
searo. 

searuSanool,  adj.,  xoise,  clever:  npm. 
searujjancle  1161. 

sec,  see  secg. 

secan,  Wl.  i.  visit,  go  to:  3  pi.  se- 
ca'5  600 ;  pret.  3  sg.  sohte  28,  Ap. 
28;  pret.  3  pi.  sohton  641,  Ap.  77; 
opt.  3  sg.  pres.  sece  731  ;  inf.  226, 
308,  698,  809,  977,  1502,  1658,  1677, 
Ap.  81.  —  2.  search  out,  try  to  find, 
ask  for:  3  sg.  sece'S  909,  11 53;  i  pi. 
secajj  1568  ;  opt.  2  sg.  pres.  sece  320 ; 
inf.  943,  1539.     6V<?  gesecan. 

secg,  m.,  man:  ns.  sec  1225;  np.  sec- 
gas  1368;  gp.  secga  1636,  1656. 
See  garsecg. 

secgan,  W3.  1.  say,  declare,  tell,  nar- 
rate: I  sg.  secge  618;  2  pi.  secga)' 
345;  3  pi.  secga'S  681;  pret.  3  sg. 
sasgde  755,  1207,  1654,  siede  1022; 
pret.  3  pi.  ssegdon  1080;  opt.  pres. 
3  sg.  secge  733 ;  imper.  2  sg.  saga 
557  ;  ptc.  nsm.  secgende  949 ;  ger. 
secganne  1481  ;  inf.  458,  648,  764, 
851.  —  2.  give  {thanks):  pret.  3  sg. 
saegde  1469;  inf.  1006.  See  gesec- 
gan. 

secgplega,  m.,  battle:    ds.    secgplegan 

1353- 
sefa,    m.,    mind,    heart:  ns.    1251  ;  ds. 

sefan  98,  1165,  Ap.  2.    See  modsefa. 
segl,  mn.,  sail:  ds.  segle  505. 
segl,  n.     I.   sun:   ns.  89,  saegl  1456. — 

2.  eye :  as.  segl  50. 
sel,  see  sael. 
sel,  adv.,  better :  745. 
sele,  m.,  hall:  gs.   sales    714;  ds.  sele 

1311. 
seledream,  m.,yt'j-//V7/i' :  as.  1656. 
seleriedend,  m.,  hall-ruler,  house-oivner: 

np.  659. 
sellan,  see  gesellan. 
selost,  see  selra. 


GLOSSARY 


221 


Selra,  adj.,  comp.  and  sup.  only,  better  : 
comp.  nsm.  sylla  1 509  ;  nsn.  selre  320, 
1563;  asm.  selran  471;  asn.  selre 
1353  ;  sup.  nsm.  selost  329,  411;  nsn. 

1565- 
seniiiini^a,  adv.,  sudcienly:  464,  820. 
seiican,  see  bisenoan. 
scndan,  Wl,  sen  J:  pret.   3  sg.    sende 

1613;  pret.  3  pi.    sendon    1028;  inf. 

Ap.  116.     ^t-t- onsendan. 
seoc,  adj.,  sad,  troubled:  dsm.  seocum 

Ap.  2.     See  liniseoc. 
seofon,  num.  adj.,  seven:   uninfl.   114, 

1673;  npm.  seofone   994;  gpm.  seo- 

f ona  1 3 1 1 . 
seolf,  see  sjlf. 
seolfor,  n.,  silver  :  as.  338. 
seolhpa!^,    n.,    ocean :    ap.    seolhpa'Su 

1714. 
seoniian,   Ws,  remain,  endure :  3   sg. 

seomajj  Ap.  121  ;  inf.  183. 
seon,  5,  see,  behold:  pret.  3  pi.  segon 

711,  sawon  1679.     See  be-,  geseon. 
seonodolg,  n.,  sinew-wound:  np.  1406. 

See  synu. 
seoSan,   2,   lit.    boil,   cook,  met.  afflict: 

pp.  soden  1239. 
seo^van,  W2,  sexo,  zoeave :    3  pi.    seo- 

wa^  64. 
seppan,   Wl,  teach  :   pret.  3  sg.  septe 

742. 
Seraphim,  pr.  n..  Seraphim  :  n.  719. 
sessiau,  W2,  subside :  pret.  3  sg.  sessade 

453- 

set,  n.,  setting:  ds.  sete  1248,  1304. 
See  geset. 

settan,  see  a-,  be-,  gesettan. 

se  3e,  pron.,  who,  which  :  nsm.  161,  254, 
261,  519,  521,  535,  566,  1 164,  1386, 
Ap.  88,  97,  107  ;  gsmn.  haes  t>e  344, 
1266,  1479,  haes  ^^  1012;  dsm.  J^am 
J>e  314,  638,  909,  980,  1 1 54;  asm. 
hone  \>e  747;  np.  ^a  "5e  1194,  ba  '5e 
282,  600,  I'a  \>e  130,  1370,  1445,  Sa 
N  579;  gP-  J'ara  l-e  28,  379,  974, 
1152. 


sid,  adj.,  extensive  :  asn.  side  762  ;  npm. 

652,  1067. 
side,  f.,    side  {of  the  body) :  ds.    sidan 

968. 
side,  adv.,  Tf/V/^  :   1637. 
sigebro'd'or,  m.,  victorioiis  brother :  as. 

1S3. 
sigedema,  m.,  triumphant  judge :  ns. 

661. 
sigedryhten,  m..  Lord  of  victory:  ds. 

sigedryhtne  S77  ;  as.  sigedryhten  60; 

vs.  1453. 
sigelean,  n.,  reward  of  victory  :  as.  Ap. 

81. 
Sigel'ware,    pr.    n.,     Ethiopians :     dp. 

Sigelwarum  A  P.  64. 
sigerof,   adj.,    brave:    asm.    sigerofne 

1225^ 
sigesped,  f.,  success,  ability :  as.  646. 
sigetorht,  adj.,  victorious:  nsm.  1246. 
sigewang,  m.,  plain  ofvictoiy :  ns.  1 58 1 . 
sigor.  m.,  victory :  gs.  sigores  760,  Ap. 

62;   is.  sigore    116;   gp.  sigora    329, 

714,  987,  1406. 
sigorsped,    f.,  prosperity,    success :  ns. 

909;  as.  1435. 
Simon,  pr.  n.,  Simon:  ns.  691,  Ap.  77. 
sin, poss.  pron.,  his:  dsm.  sinum  io2i 

dsn.    989;    asm.    synne    1464;    asn 

sin    Ap.    59;  npm.  sine   151 5;    gpm 

sinra  663,  713  ;  dpf.  sTnum  813  ;  apm 

sine  427,  823,  847  ;  ip.  sTnum  522,  750 
sine,  see  fietedsinc. 
sinc'gestreon,  n.,  treasure:  as.  1656. 
sinogifu,  i.,gift  of  treasure :  ds.  sincgife 

1509. 
sincliroden,  adj.,  richly  adorned :  apn. 

1673- 

sineweorSung,  f.,  costly  gift,  gift  of 
treasure  :  gp.  sincweor'Sunga  272,  477. 

singal,  adj .,  contitiuous,  unending :  nsm. 
869. 

singan,  3,  sing,  offer  in  song:  pret.  3  pi. 
sungon  877. 

sinnan,  3,  w.  gen.,  cease  from,  have  re- 
lief from  :  pret.  3  sg.  sann  1277. 


222 


GLOSSARY 


sittan,  5,  sit,  sit  dmvn  :  pret.  3  sg.  saet 

305,  1007  ;  pret.  3  pi.  sSton  362,  591  ; 

inf.  247.     See  be-,  gesittaii. 
sittend,     see   biirh-,    ham-,    tSrjTii- 

sitteud. 
sT5,   m.      1.  journey :    gs.    siSes     1041, 

Ap.  34  ;  ds.  siSe  795  ;  as.  siiS  44,  340, 

515,  860,  Ap.  Ill  ;  is.  sI'Se  175,  845, 

Ap.   32.  —  2.   time,  occasion  :    is.  siSe 

706,  808,  1391,  1458,   1675,  1700;  ip. 

si6'um  490,  605.  —  3.  fate,  experiejice  : 

ns.    155.      See    earfoci-,   ge-,   ^vil-, 

wra?csi3. 
siSfaet,  xa..,  journey,  expedition  :  ns.  420; 

gs.  siSfaetes  204,  21 1  ;  ds.  siSfaste  358, 

1662,  sKfate  663. 
srSfrom,   adj.,    ready  for  the  journey, 

expeditiojts:   npm.  si^frome  641,  Ap. 

77  ;  apm.  siSfrome  247. 
siSgeoiiior,   adj.,    sad  or   lueary  from 

traveling:  nsm.  Ap.  i. 
siSigean,  W2,  go,  journey :  inf.  829. 
sitrSan,  see  sySSan. 
slagu,  see  nianslagu. 
slSp,  m.,  sleep :  ns.  464,  820,  826,  862  ; 

ds.  slaepe  795,  849;  is.  1527. 
sl^pan,  see  ofsla^pan. 
slaTT,  see  unslaw. 
slean,  6,  strike :  pret.  3  pi.  slogon  964  ; 

imper.  2  pi.  sleaS  1300. 
siege,  m.,  dlow :  as.   956.     See   dolg-, 

gegn-,  sarslege. 
slupaii,  see  toslupan. 
smeolt,    adj.,    gentle,   pleasant:    nsm. 

1581  ;  npn.  smylte  453. 
smiS,  see  gryn-,  lar-,  wrohtsmiSJ. 
smylt,  see  smeolt. 
snaw,  m.,  snow  :  ns.  1255. 
snel,  adj.,  swift:  nsm.  505. 
snellk",  adj.,  swift:  nsm.  267. 
sneomo,  adv.,  quickly :  795. 
SIleo^van,  Wl,    hasten,  proceed:  3    sg. 

snoweS  504;  inf.  242,  1668. 
snottor,  adj.,  wise:    nsm.    469;    npm. 

snottre  659.     See  raedsnottor. 
snowan,  see  sneowan. 


smid,  n.,    speed,   swiftness :    is.    snude 

267. 
snyttru,  f.,  wisdom,  sagacity :  as.  snyt- 

tro   554,    1165;  gp.  snyttra  631;  dp. 

snytrum  1153  ;  ip.  snyttrum  646. 
snyStfan,  see  besuyS9an. 
somne,  see  aetsomne. 
sona,  adv.,  immediately :  72,  450,  529, 

849,  999,  1334,  1535,  1567,  1579. 
sorg,  f.,    care,    sorrow:  ns.    1690;    ds. 

sorge  1568;  ip.  sorgum  116. 
sorgbyrSen,  f.,   burde7i  of  so7-rcnu :  ns. 

sorgbyrhen  1532. 
sorgian,  W2,  regard,  be  solicitous  :  pret. 

3  pi.  sorgodon  1227. 
so3,   n.,    tr2ith :  ns.    526,   Ap.    64 ;    ds. 

so5e  114,  458,  618;  as.  s65  603,  631, 

644,  764,  851,  965,  1558,  1563. 
soS,  adj.,  true:  nsm.  1602;  asm.  so'San 

Ap.  81  ;  gpn.  so'Sra  710. 
so3,  adv.,  in  truth,  in  sooth:   1435. 
sotJcwide,  m.,  truthful  speech  :  ip.  s6"5- 

cwidum  733. 
So3fa?st,  adj.,  truthful,  just:  nsm.  386; 

gsm.  sob'faestes  673 ;  npm.  so'Sfseste 

1 514;  gpm.  so'Sfasstra  228. 
soWaestlic,  adj .,  truthful,  sincere :  asn. 

_877. 
sotOice,  adv.,  truly:  681. 
spanan,  R,  persuade,  allure :  pret.  3  sg. 

speon  597. 
spann,  see  gespann. 
spannan,  see  onspannan. 
sped,    see    mtegen-,     sige-,     sigor-, 

■woruldsped. 
spedan,  see  aspedan. 
spedig,  see  wuldorspedig. 
spell,  n.,  tale,  narrati7'e:   as.  Si 5.     See 

ffer-,  god-,  lad'spell. 
spildan,    Wi,    w.    inst.,    destroy:    opt. 

pres.  2  sg.  spilde  284. 
spor,  n.,  track,  tnark  :  as.  iiSo. 
spo^van,   R,    succeed:   inf.    1544.     See 

gespoAvan. 
spree,   spraec,    see  edwitspraec,   ge- 

sprec. 


GLOSSARY 


223 


sprecan,  5,  speak :   pret.   i   sg.  spraec 

904;  pret.  3  sg.  1557  ;  opt.  pres.  3  sg. 

sprece  732;    pp.  sprecen   1622;    inf. 

131 5.     6"^!?  gesprecan. 
springaii,  3,  extend,  be  diffused:  pret.  3 

sg.  sprang  Ap.  6.     See  onspringan. 
stiPf,  see  eiidestaef. 
stipfn,  see  brondstaefn. 
sta>fna,  sie  stefna. 
Stan,  m.,  stotie:  ns.  738,  766,  1523;  gs. 

stanes  741 ;    ds.  stane  738 ;  as.  stan 

774,  841.     See  mariiianstan. 
standan,  6.     i.  stand :    3  sg.  standeb 

Ap.   98;    3   pi.   standa^   722;    pret. 

3   sg.    stod    254,    737;     pret.    3   pi. 

stodon  842,    871,    1 157,    1 71 2;    opt. 

pres.  3  sg.  stande  502 ;  inf.  882,  993, 
■    1062,  144S,   1494. — 2.  rise  up:  pret. 

3    sg.    stod    375.  —  3.    last,    endure: 

3  sg.  stande"5  Ap.  120.     See  a-,  for-, 

ge-,  wiiSstandan. 
staiifag,    adj.,    adorned    with    stones, 

pai'ed :  npf.  stanfage  1236. 
stanhlit^,  n.,  stony  slope,  cliff:  ap.  stan- 

hleoJliu  1577,  stanhleo'c^o  1233. 
stapa,  see  hildstapa. 
staeppan,  6,  go,  proceed:   pret.    3    sg. 

stop  985,  1577.     6"!?^  gestaeppan. 
stapul,    m.,    columti:    as.     1062;    ap. 

stapulas  1494. 
staercedferhty,  adj.,  stotit-liearted:  asm. 

staercedferhlme  1233. 
staeS,  see  bord-,  brinistaeS. 
sta<ToI,  m.,  base,  pedestal :   ds.  sta)?ole 

1503- 

statJolfaest,  adj.,  established, Jirm  :  nsm. 
121,  staSulfaest  1336. 

staSolian,  W2.  i.  confirm,  make  stead- 
fast :  I  sg.  sta^olige  82  ;  imper.  2  sg. 
sta'Sola  12 10,  1213. —  2.  create,  estab- 
lish :  pret.  3  sg.  sta^olade  799.  See 
gestaSolian. 

-steald,  see  Muldorgesteald. 

-stealla,  see  gestealla. 

steap,  adj.,  steep:  npm.  steape  840; 
apm.  1306. 


stede,  see  burh-,  eolh-,  folc-,  meO'el-, 

JWug-,  Avangstede. 
stedewang,  m.,  plain  :  ds.  stedewange 

774;  np.  stedevvangas  334. 
stefn,  m.,  time\  is.  stefne  123,  1303. 
stefn,  m.,  prow:   ds.  stefne  291.     See 

heahstcfn. 
stefn,  f.,  voice:  ns.  92,  167,  738,  1429; 

is.  stefne  56,  61,  96,  537,  873,  11 26, 
1360,    1399,   1456;    ip.  stefnuni  722, 
1054. 
stefna,  m.,  prow  :  ds.  stef nan  403 ;  as. 

1707,  stasfnan  495. 
stellan,  see  onstellan. 
stenian,  see  besteman. 
steng,  m.,    stake,   cudgel:    gs.    stenges 

Ap.  72. 
steora,  m.,  steers7tian  :  as.  steoran  495. 
steorend,   m.,  pilot,  guide:   ns.    1336, 

styrend  121. 
sticce,  n.,  piece,  portion :    ip.   sticcum 

144S. 
stig,  f.,  path,  way:   ns.  985;    as.  stige 

1442. 
stigan,  1,   ascend,   mount:    pret.    2   pi. 

stigon  429;    pret.  3  pi.  349.     See  a-, 

ge-,  oferstigan. 
stillan,    \Vl.       i.    become    quiet:     inf. 

1576.  —  2.  w.  dat.,  make  quiet:  pret. 

3  sg.  stilde  451.     See  gestillan. 
stille,  adj.,  still,  motionless :  nsm.  502. 
stiSfer'ff,  adj., yfrw  0/ heart:  npm.  stiS- 

ferSe  722. 
stTShyegende,  adj.,  resolute:  dp.  stlt?- 

hycgendum   741,  1429. 
strSniod,  adj.,  resolute:  nsm.  Ap.  72. 
stol,  see  cynestol. 

storm,  m.,  storm  :  ns.  502,  1236  (figura- 
tively); is.  storme  1494;  ap.  stormas 

1576. 
sto'W',  i., place:  gp.  st5wa  121. 
strtel,  m.,  dart:  vs.  1189. 
Strang,  adj.,  hard,  sez'ere:   nsm.  313; 

asf.  strangan   1336;    dpm.  strangum 

1 2 10;    ipm.    162,    536;    comp.   nsm. 

strengra  13S5. 


224 


GLOSSARY 


stranglice,  adv.,  sternly-   167. 

street,  f.,  street:    ns.   1580;    ds.  strSte 

774,  985,  1062;    np.   1236;    ap.  334. 

See  faroS-,  herestrtet. 
stream,    m.,    stream,  flood:    ns.    1280, 

1523;    as.  852,    1538;    np.   streamas 

374;     ap.     1503.      See   brim-,    ea-, 

eagor-,     firgend-,    lagu-,    mere-, 

ssestream. 
streamfaru,  f.,  current:  as.  streamfare 

1576. 
streamracu,     f.,     water-course :       as. 

streamraece   1580. 
streaniAvelm,  m.,  billow:  ns.  495. 
streng,  m.,  rope,  cordage :  np.  strengas 

374- 
-streon,  see  gestreon. 

streonan,  Wi,  w.  gen.,  imii:  inf.  331. 
stund,  f.,  time,  hour:  ns.  12 10. 
stunde,  adv.,  straightway:  416,  1497. 
styran,  Wl,  arrange:  pp.  styred  1092. 
styrend,  see  steorend. 
styrian,  Wa,  stir,  be  in  cofiimotion :  pret. 
•     3  pi.  styredon  374. 
sum,  pron.,  one,  certain  one:   nsm.  11, 

967,  1 174,  131 1  ;  npm.  sume  Ap.  ii. 
simd,  n.      I.  course,  sailing:    as.   38 1, 

4S8.  —  2.  ocean,  flood:   ns.  sund  424, 

1528;  as.  747. 
sund,  adj.,  see  onsund. 
sundor,  adv.,  apart,  asunder:   1161. 
sundrian,  see  asundriau. 
sunne,  f.,  sun  :  ns.  1248,  1304  ;  ds.  sun- 
nan  1013. 
sunu,  m.,  son:  ns.  879,  1684;  ds.  suna 

681,  881;    as.  sunu   1109;    np.  suna 

691. 
susi,  n.,  torture:  is.  susle  1379. 
swa,  adv.     i.  so,  thus:    157,   177,  438, 

461,  524,  661,  692,  1053,  1137,  1 149, 

1245.  1323-  1328,  1343.  1344.  1393. 
1455,  1562,  1670,  Ap.  113.  —  2.  so, 
very:  710,  895,  922,  1243. 
S^va,  conj.  i.  as,  according  as:  5,  67, 
149,  269,  297,  304,  322,  345,  348,  357, 
389,  418,  594,  622,  649,  786,  7S9,  845, 


931,  949,  972,  1045,  1231,  1274, 1321, 
1341,  1476,  1514,  1696,  Ap.  102. — 
2.   inasmuch  as,  for  :  327,  937,  II 15. 

—  3.  so  that  (result)  :  986.  —  4.  as  if: 
261,  501.  —  5.  yet:  493.  —  6.  likeivise: 
582,  1288.  —  7.  where:  1441,  1449, 
1582.  —  8.  swa  .  .  .  swa,  as  .  .  .  as 
(adv.  and  conj.) :  192-193,  iT^-Tyi  926- 
927,  1234.     See  swa  Seah. 

s'W'anrad,    f.,    swan-road,     ocean :    as. 

swanrade  196. 
-swaru,  -s^varian,  -swerian,  see  ond- 

s^varu,  etc. 
swses,  adj.,  dear:  asm.  svvsesne  1009. 
swaesende,  n.,  food,  repast :    gp.  swS- 

senda  386. 
swat,  m.,  blood:  ns.   1275,  1425,  1441  ; 

as.  swat  968;  is.  swate  1239. 
swatig,  adj.,  bloody:  npm.  swatige  1406. 
s"\va  tfeah,  conj.,  yet,  nevertheless :  813, 

1250. 
s\va?Srian,  see  s^vetfrian. 
s^va?Jvl,  i.,path,  track  :  ds.  swa'Se  1422  ; 

as.  673,  swaeSe  1441. 
SAvebban,  see  as^vebban. 
s-\vefau,   5.      I.   sleep:    inf.    832,    849. 

—  2.  lie  dead:  pret.  3  pi.  swSfon 
1002. 

siveg,  m.,   tumult,   noise :    ns.   93 ;    as. 

1532- 

S'tvegeldream,  m.,  heavenly  joy:  dp. 
swegeldreamum  720. 

s^vegeltorht,  adj.,  radiant:  nsf.  1248. 

sivegl,  n.,  heaven :  gs.  swegles  208,  455, 
641,  760,  809,  832,  S69 ;  ds.  swegle 
98,  1009;  as.  swegl  749. 

s\vegle,  adj.,  bright:  apm.  Ap.  32. 

s^velc,  see  s^vyk•. 

SAvelgan,  3,  \v.  ace.  and  inst.  i.  ac- 
cept, receive:  pret.  3  pi.  swulgon  710. 

—  2.  flow  over,  swallow  tip:  pret. 
3  sg.  swealg  1276.     See  fors'wolgan. 

sweltan,  3,  die:    pret.   3  pi.    swulton 

1530- 
swenoan,  Wi,  trouble:    inf.   109.     See 
Kes^vencan. 


GLOSSARY 


225 


swens,  m.,  stroke:    as.   Ap.   72.      See 

heoiHiswcng. 
sweorcan,  3,  durl-e/i,  become  dim  :  pret. 

3  sg.  swearc  372. 
sweord,  n.,  sword:  gs.  sweordes  1132, 

Ap.  34 ;  ip.  sweordum  72. 
SAveordrtes,  m.,  attack  with  the  stoord : 

ns.  Ap.  59. 
siveotol,  adj.,  clear,  evident :  gpn.  sweo- 

tulra  565  ;  ipn.  sweotolum  742. 
SAveotSeriiin,  see  sweSrian. 
SAver,  m.,  column:  ap.  sweras  1493. 
S^ve?frian,  Wa.     i .  subside,  become  still : 

pret.  3  sg.  swa'Srode  1 585,  sweoSerade 

465;  pret.  3  pi.  swjE'Sorodon  533. — 

2.   vanish :     pret.   3   pi.   swe'Serodon 

836. 
s«-icau,  1,  w.  dat.,  desert:   i  pi.  swica'S 

407  ;  opt.  pres.  2  sg.  swice  958.     See 

be-,  gcsAvican. 
SAA-igian,  W2,  be  silent :  pret.  3  pi.  sw'i- 

godon  762. 
s^vilt,  see  s^vylt. 
SA\ing,  see  gesAving. 
SAvingan,  3,  scourge,   chastise,    afflict: 

pret.  3  pi.  swungon  964  ;  pp.  swungen 
•1246,  1275. 
swuJ,  adj.,  strong:  nsm.  1207,  1513. 
switfan,  see  gesAvTtJan. 
SAvRfe,  adv.,  very,  exceedingly  :  423,  618, 

926. 
swylo,  pron.,  stick  :  nsm.  swelc  25  ;  nsn. 

swylc  29. 
swylce,  adv.,  likewise,  also,  thus:   166, 

584,  589,   621,  704,    712,  881,    1029, 

1036,  1257,  1687,  Ap.  16,' 50. 
SAvylce,  conj.    i.  as  if:  247.  —  2.   like 

as,  as :   89. 
SAvylt,  m.,   death:  ns.   994;    as.    1610, 

swilt  1348,  Ap.  71. 
SAvyltcAvalu,     f.,     death-torture :     ds. 

swyltcwale  156;  as.  1368. 
syb,  i.,  peace,  good  will :  ns.  1013,  sybb 

1568;  as.    sybbe    98,  358,  809,    832. 

See  bro'Oorsybb. 
syfre,  see  unsyfre. 


-syli?f,  see  gesyhtf. 

sylf,  pron.,  self',  himself:  nsm.  5,  248, 
665,  845,  1509,  sylfa  329,  433,  860, 
1348,  1701,  Ap.  Ill,  seolfa  340,  505; 
gsm.  sylfes  651,  1109,  1417,  seolfes 
1300,  1441  ;  dsm.  sylfum  644,  648, 
1662  ;  asm.  seolfne  921,  sylfne  1212  ; 
npm.  sylfe  1558;  dpm.  sylfum  949. 

sylfieta,    m.,    cannibal:    np.    sylfaetan 

175- 
sylla,  see  selra. 

syllan,  \\^\,  give,  give  over:  i  sg.  sylle 
97;  pret.  3  sg.  sealde  577,  1513;  inf. 
272,  366,  477,  1 109.     6"^^  gesellan. 

syllic,  adj.,  strange,  wonderful :  comp. 
asm.  syllTcran  500. 

synibeldffg,  m.,  feast-day  :  ds.  symbel- 
da;ge  1527. 

syinbelgifa,  m.,  entertainer,  provider  : 
vs.  141 7. 

syiiible,  adv.,  always,  ever:  157,  659, 
1384,  1581,  symle  411,  651,  1153, 
symles  64. 

synile,  symles,  see  symble. 

syn,  see  onsyn. 

syne,  see  eag-,  ge-,  onsyne. 

synfull,  adj.,  sinful:  npm.  synfulle  764  ; 
gpm.  synfulra  987. 

synn,  f.,  sin  :  as.  synne  926 ;  dp.  syn- 
num  1243  ;  ip.  407. 

synnig,  adj.,  j?/{/>^/:  nsm.  921  ;  asm.syn- 
nigne  1300;  npm.  synnige  109,  565, 
710,  964;  gp.  synnigra  956,  1610. 

synu,  f.,  sinew:  ns.  1422;  np.  sionwe 
1425. 

sjTian,  Wa,  plot,  devise :  pret.  3  pi. 
syredon  610. 

sytTtTan,  adv.  i.  after,  from  the  time 
that:  5,  295,  455,  1075,  ^Z27^  1381. 
1599,  1678,  Ap.  27,  40,  54,  sy'5j>an 
240,  S93,  sy)>|>an  43,  iSo,  Ap.  21,  s\\>- 
J>an  1223,  seo'Sj'an  534.  —  2.  after- 
wards: sy'SSan  33,  1193,  1379-  '674, 
1 704,  sy'SJ'an  1 5 1 4,  sy))J>an  706,  siiS'San 
1 106. 

syxtyne,  num.  adj.,  sixteen  :  490. 


226 


GLOSSARY 


T 

tsecan,  see  getiecan. 

tacen,  n.     i.  sign:  ns.  88;    as.    1338; 
gp.  tacna   711;    ip.    tacnum    742. — 

2.  mark,    characteristic :    ns.    29.  — 

3.  covenant:  as.  214.    ^^1? weatacen. 
tacnian,  see  getacnian. 

tsel,  f.,  blame  :  ds.  tsele  633. 

taligan,    W2,    coiuit,    consider:     1    sg. 

talige  1563,  taelige  1484. 
taelmet,  n.,  measure,  portion  :  ns.  113. 
tan,  m.,  lot:  ns.  1103;  as.  taan  1099. 
teala,  adv.,  -well,  thoroughly  :  1612. 
team,  see  hereteam. 
tear,  m.,  tear :  ip.  tearum  59. 
teldan,  see  beteldan. 
tellan,   1,  connt,  calculate :    pret.  3  pi. 

teledon  1103.     6"^,?  getellan. 
tempel,  n.,  temple :  ns.  667  ;  ds.  temple 

707  ;  as.  tempel  1634.   [Lat.  templtnn^ 
teon,  W2,  fashion,  create :  pret.  3   sg. 

teode  797.     See  geteon. 
teon,  2,  draw,  drag:  inf.  1230. 
teonc'wide,  m.,  censure:  as.  633,  771. 
Thaddeus,  pr.  n.,  Thaddeus:  ns.    Ap. 

77- 
Thomas,  pr.  n.,  Thomas:  ns.  Ap.  50. 
tid,  f.,  time:  ds.  tide  1 13,  1407  ;  as.  tid 

214,  911,  1091,  1160. 
tigelfag,  adj.,  adorned  with  tiles:  npn. 

tigelfagan  842.     [Lat.  tegula.'] 
tihhian,  see  getihhian. 
tilmodig,  adj.,  noble-minded:  npm.  til- 

modige  Ap.  86. 
timbran,  see  getimbran. 
tingan,  see  getingan. 
tir,  xn..,glory:  gs.  tyres  105  ;  as.  tir  4S5, 

Ap.  86. 
tireadig,  adj.,  glorious  :  npm.  tireadige 

665,  Ap.  4  ;  apm.  2^  8S3  ;  gpm.  tlrea- 

digra  16S1. 
to,  prep.  w.  gen.  and  dat.    i.  w.  gen.  in 

phrases  to  Sas,  to  Saes  (Te,  there, 

where:  1059,  1070,  1 123.  —  2.  w.  dat., 

to,  to7vards,  unto,  into,  upon  :  40, 47,  81, 

90,  113,  119,  236,  287,  294,  398,  483, 


598,  622,  658,  666,  778,  808,  828,909, 
918,  969,  974,  1027,  1068,  1098,  II 18, 
1 1 52,  1 186,  1 188,  1 196,  1203,  1205, 
1248,  1250,  1270,  1304,  1307,  131 1, 
1351,  1398,  1410,  1423,  1460,  1568, 
1682,  1683,  1693,  1698,  1707,  Ap.  43, 
115.  —  3.  as,  for,  in:  w.  dat.  27,  76, 
106  (to  w^idan  feore  =  ybr^'^r), 
III  (2),  132,  136,  153(2),  160,  234, 
311,  313,  324,  342,  45S,  567(2),  5S8, 
606,  618,  794,  795,  810,  938,  1039, 
1081,  iioi,  nil,  1112,  1113,  1114, 
1 123,  ii6r,  1162,  1284,  1369,  1452, 
1507,  1605,  1641,  1721,  Ap.  62,  74, 
95.  —  4.  on,  at:  w.  dat.  221,  1539. — 
5.  of,  from:  w.  dat.  449.  —  6.  accord- 
ing to:  w.  dat.  653,  796.  —  7.  w.  inf. 
1 160,  1481,  1659,  16S9;  w.  ger.  23, 
73,  206,  295,  424,  1136." 

to,  adv.  I.  too:  98,  212,  612,  1301, 
1432,  1609.  —  2.  there,  thither:  711, 
1234,  1348. 

Tobias,  pr.  n.,   Tobias  :  ns.  15 16. 

tobregdan,  4.  i.  tear,  rend;  pret.  3 
pi.  tobrugdon  1 59.  —  2:  shake  off 
(vv.  inst.)  :  pret.  3  pi.  tSbrugdon  1527. 

todailan,  ^\,  portion  out:  inf.  152. 

todrifan,  l,  scatter,  dispel,  destroy : 
pret.  3  sg.  todraf  1688;  pp.  npm. 
todrifene  1426. 

toga,  see  foiptwga. 

togadore,  adv.,  together:   1438. 

togenes,  prep.  w.  dat.,  towards,  in  the 
direction  of:   45,  657. 

togenes,  adv., /oTi'fzrrt'j :   iioi. 

toginan,  1,  separate,  split :  pret.  3  sg. 
togan  1523. 

toglidan,  1,  glide  away,  disappear:  3 
sg.  toglide^  Ap.  102;  pret.  3  sg.  to- 
glad  123. 

tohlidan,  l,  open  up  :  pret.  3  sg.  tohlad 
1587. 

tohreosan,  2,  perish,  pass  away:  inf. 
Ap.  ioi. 

tohte,  f.,  battle,  conflict :  gs.  tohtan  Ap. 

75- 


GLOSSARY 


227 


toluoan,  2,   dislocate,  pull  apart :    pp. 

tolocen  1404. 
tolysan,  Wl,  separate:  inf.  151. 
torht,  adj.,  bright,  glorious  :  nsm.  105  ; 

nsn.   1612;    npm.   torhte  Ap.  4.     See 

hoofon-,  inorgcn-,  sigcl-,  swegel-, 

^v^ll<lol•torllt. 
torhto,  adv.,  brightly  :  715. 
torhtlu'P,  adv.,  gloriously  :   1681. 
torngciiWla,    m.,   fierce    enemy :    np. 

torngeniSlan  1230. 
torr,  m.,  to^aer :  np.  torras  S42.      [Lat. 

turris.'\ 
toslupaii,   2,    relax,     destroy :    pp.    to- 

slopen  1425. 
tosoimie,  adv.,  together:  23^  I093- 
to  Oa's,  to  (5a;s  O'e,  see  to. 
traef,  n.,  teut,  building:  np.   trafu  S42. 

See  helltra»f. 
trahtian,  see  getrahtian. 
tredan,  4,  traverse:  inf.  775,  802. 
treowc,  zA].,  faithful :   asn.   214.     See 

getreoAve. 
t^eo^vge(yofta,  m.,  trusty  comrade  :  np. 

treowgej'oftan  1050. 
truin,  adj.,  sound,   whole:   nsm.    1477. 

See  getrum. 
tryininan,  \Vl,  encourage,  cheer  :  pret. 

3  sg.  trymede  463,    1051,    16S1  ;  inf. 

428,  1419. 
tu,  see  twegen. 

tungol,  n.,  star :  dp.  tunglum  2. 
twegen,  num.,  two:  nm.  689,  Ap.  75; 

dm.  twam  249,  589,  tvviem  779 ;   af. 

twa  715;  an.  tu  1035,  1050. 
twelf,  num.,  twelve:   nm.  twelfe  Ap.  4, 

XII  Ap.  86;  am.  twelfe  2,  883,  1419. 
tAvelfta,  num.,  twelfth  :  nsm.  665. 
twentig,  num.,  twenty  :  ns.  114. 
t^veogaIl,  1,  doubt :  ptc.  nsn.  tweogende 

771- 
tAveoiide,  see  unt^veonde. 
tAveonuni,  see  betweonum. 
tyddro,  see  untyddre. 

tyn,  num.,  ten  :  dn.  151 2. 
tynan,  see  ontyiian. 


tyr,  see  tir. 

tyrgaii,  Wi,  tease,  torment:  pret.  3  pi. 
tyrgdon  963. 


iSa,  adv.,  thoi,  thereupon:  92,  122,  143, 
147,  etc.,  I'a  40,  45,  59,  118,  etc.  See 
nil  9'a. 

(Jil,  conj.,  when  :  626,  1177,  1409,  I'a  385, 
429,  899,  1319,  1419,  Ap.  82. 

(Jaligan,  W2,  agree,  consent:  inf.  402. 

cSa  gen,  adv.,  again,  a  secottd  time:  601, 
^a  gen  727. 

Sa  git,  adv.  I.  yet,  as  yet:  \>3.  git  15, 
Jja  gyt  380.  —  2.  still:  632,  \>z.  git  51. 
—  2,.  further,  moreover:  \>z.  git  383, 
ha  gyt  1039,  '(5a  gyt  1195. 

(ffan,  see  icr  J^an,  forTJan. 

Sane,  m.  i.  thought:  gs.  J)ances  557; 
as.  hanc  1622. —  2.  thanks:  ns.  Sane 
1451,  )ianc  1 150  ;  ds.  to  J'ance  {gladly, 
thajikfully)  1 1 12;  as.  j^anc  3S4,  1469. 
See  fore-,  ge-,  hyge-,  inge-,  in^\it-, 
searoSanc. 

(Tancian,  \V2,  trans.,  thank :  pret.  3  sg. 
^ancade  loi  i. 

JJanciil,  see  ge-,  hyge-,  searuJfancul. 

(9anon,  adj.,  thence:  J>anon  1065,  Ap. 
31,  38,  honon  Ap.  61. 

3tier,  adv., ///^r^,  iti  that  place  :  183,  244, 
562,  875,  1007,  1080,  1296,  1547,  haer 
21,  41,  48,  90,  181,  199,  263,  279,  280, 
445,  654,  662,  770,  869,  878,  887,  888, 
907,  979,  looi,  1037,  1039,  1049,  1083, 
1 153,  1192,  1222,  1225,  1349,  1382, 
1534,  1542,  1554,  1555,  1569,  1571, 
1588,  1591,  1625,  1647,  1701,  1708, 
Ap.  52,  60,  98. 

3air,  conj.  i.  where:  217,  657,  ^ier 
15,  105,  168,  175,  228,  294,  305,  502, 
598,  607,  667,  695,  711,  790,  940, 
1379,  1634,  1684,  1693,  Ap.  10,  118, 
119.  —  2.  wherever:  )ijer  224,  935, 
1403. — 3.  when:  J>Sr  805,923,  967. 

<y«es,  adv.,  so,  to  that  extent:  1365,  1372. 

Saes,  conj.,  tfj:  687. 


221 


GLOSSARY 


(Jaes  Se,  conj.,  as,  because:  Jjass  ^e  472, 
1012,  1151,  haes  be  1563. 

(Jjiet,  conj.  I.  that,  in  noun  clauses 
(subj.  and  obj.):  85,  207,  308,  319, 
403,  485,  610,  618,  928,  1329,  1617, 
>3et  26,  30,  71,  91,  159,  178,  273,  276, 
284,  319,  321,  378,  430,  434,  438,  459, 

499.  5".  527.  530.  534.  55°.  559.  563. 
574,  618,  661,  673,  681,  700,  757,  765, 
766,  844,  852,  894,  898,  922,  928,  933, 
962, 1073, 1080, 1 121, 1 137, 1 167, 1267, 
1285,  1289,  1344, 1416,  1420,  1437  (2), 
1485,  1505,  1517,  1559.  1564.  1606, 
1653,  1655,  1660,  1690,  Ap.  43,  64,  70, 
89,  108.  —  2.  that,  so  that,  in  result 
clauses:  ^ast  731,  >aet  37,  261,  303, 
603,  707,  737.  788, 916,  958, 1327, 1373, 
Ap.  56.  —  3.  that,  in  order  that,  in 
purpose  clauses  :  iSast  1333,  J'set  368, 
860,  1183,  1214,  1357,  Ap.  117. — 
4.  when,  where,  in  temporal  clauses  : 
)>3et  108,  115,  150,  185,  1211,  1523, 
1697.  —  5.  that,  with  ellipsis  of  prin- 
cipal sentence  :  hast  203.     See  oSSaet. 

?fa»tte,  conj.,  such  that:   546. 

Saet  Se,  conj.,  that:  fet  he  1602. 

Se,  indecl.  particle,  i.  who,  which, 
that:  815,  he  loi,  164,  263,  718,  799, 
828,  886,  890,  945,  1 130,  1318,  1440, 
i486,  1548,  1615.  —  2.  than:  1040. 
See  se,  (Saes,  Saet,  3eah  Se. 

Jfeah,  conj.,  though,  although  :  121 7, 
heah  476,  710,  975,  1243,  1628,  heh 
271.  507.  515.  630,  856,  955,  '5eh  900. 
See  swa  tJeah. 

Seah  ?fe,  conj.,  although:  heah  Se  53, 
564,  heh  he  1609. 

Searf,  f.  i.  need,  necessity:  ns.  hearf 
1 1 66,  1605. —  2.  advantage,  benefit: 
ds.  hearfe  1652. 

(Jearfende,  see  mete-,  winettearfende. 

(T»arl,  adj.,  severe,  excessive:  gpn. 
hearlra  1598. 

Searle,  adv.,  severely,  excessively  :  hearle 
1115. 

fJearlic,  adj.,  severe:  nsn.  hearlic  11 36. 


Seaw,  m.,  custotn,  habit:  ns.  heaw  25, 
177  ;  ds.  '(^eawum  462. 

Secoan,  Wl,  cover:  pret.  3  sg.  hehte 
966,  Ap.  22  ;  pret.  3  pi.  hehton  1525. 
See  beSeccan. 

Segn,  m.,  servatit,  retainer,  disciple  :  ns. 
hegn  384,  417,  hegen  528;  as.  hegn 
1391,  1678;  vs.  557;  np.  hegnas  43, 
237.  323.  344.  363.  376,  391.  402,  726, 
872,  1026,  Ap.  87;  gp.  hegna  696, 
Ap.  8;  dp.  hegnum  1329;  ap.  hegnas 
3,  245,  462.  See  diiru-,  ombeht-, 
niagii^egn. 

Segnian,  Ws,  serve :  pret.  3  pi.  hegno- 
don  884. 

Segu,  see  beor-,  foddor-,  AvilSegu. 

ffeh,  see  Seah.  ♦ 

(Tel,  see  Ava'g'Sel. 

(Tenean,  Wl,  resolve,  consider :  2  sg. 
hencest  212;  pret.  3  pi.  hohton  150, 

693- 
Senden,  conj.,  while,  as  longas  :  "Sendon 

1397,  hendon  171 3,  henden  1288,  hyn- 

den  1323. 
'Seod,  i.,  peo/>le,  natiott:  ns.  heod  1098, 

1112;    ds.   heode    185,   571;    as.   25, 

1 1 85;  gp.  heoda  107,  547,  i45i,'5eoda 

1622;    dp.  heodum   520,   1605,  1652. 

See  ell-,  ^verSeod. 
Seodan,  see  o^Seodan. 
ffeodbealo,  n.,  great  evil:  as.  heodbealo 

1 1 36. 
Seodcyning,  m.,  king  of  the  people :  gs. 

'Seodcyninges  Ap.  18. 
Seoden,  m.,  prince.  Lord:   ns.  heoden 

290.  323.  364.  415.  696,  773  ;  gs-  I'eod- 

nes  3,  94,  Ap.  8;    ds.  "Seodne  1007; 

as.  heoden   872,  900;    vs.   28S,  479; 

np.  heodnas  363. 
?feodeiiliold,  adj.,    loyal  to  the  prince, 

subfuissive  :   nsm.  heodenhold  3S4. 
-Seodig,  sec  ellcVeodig. 
'Seodoni,  m.,  service:  as.  heodSm  Ap. 

105. 
tfeodsceatJa,  m.,  enemy  of  the  people: 

ns.  1 115. 


GLOSSARY 


229 


TSeon,  see  geSeon. 

Oes,  pron.,  M/j:  nsm.  hes  420,  496  ;  nsf. 

'5eos  1437,  Hos  731,  142S;  nsn.  6"is 

717,  Hs   751,    1506,   %s  492;    gsm. 

Hsses  Ap.  108,  hysses  Ap.  89;  dsmn. 

"Syssum  1198,  Hssum  77,  550,  J>yssum 

112,  358;  dsf.  )>ysse  6S4,  973,  Hsse 

Ap.  112;  asm.  JSisne  1604,  }>ysne  Ap.  i  ; 

asf   J>as  III,   207,  914,  Ap.  98;   gp. 

Hssa  26S,  386;  dp.  >yssuni  88,   100, 

761,  1026;  apn.  i>as  Ap.  49,  83. 
tRpgan,  5.     I.  receive:  pret.  3  pi.  J)egon 

1 1 1 2.  —  2.  receive food^  eat :  pret.  3  pi. 

•^egon  25,  hegon  593. 
tfiii,  pron.,  thy,  thine:  nsm.  \>\\\  70,  194, 

541,  542,  604,  940,  952,    1023,   1317, 

1321, 1441  ;  gsm.  Hnes65, 1417  ;  gsn. 

1383;  dsm.  I'lnum  959,  1503;  asm. 

J>inne  183,  213,  479,  1209,  12 13,  1216, 

1316;  asf.  Hne  288,  548,  635,  1190, 

1384,  1424;  asn.  Kn  216,  954,  1295, 

1418;  isn.  J>me  284;  npm.  Kne  399; 

gp.  Jjinra  482;  dp.  ))Tnum  1285,  12S9, 

1292  ;  ap.  Hne  421. 
(Jing,  n.,   meeti7ig:    as.   }>mg   157,   930. 

See  geSing,  guSgeSingu. 
Singgeinearc,  n.,  appointed  titne :  gs. 

Hnggemearces  148. 
(^ingian,  see  wi?raingian. 
Singstede,  m.,  council-place:   ds.  Hng- 

stede  1098. 
ffingii,  see  giiSgeSingu. 
T^isa,  see  brinipisa. 
-(Softa,  see  geOofta. 
-Ooht,  see  geSoht. 
<!(olian,  W2,  endure  :    pres.  opt.  2  sg. 

Solie   955,   holige    1217;    inf.   J^olian 

1414.     See  getJolian. 
Sonne,  adv.,  t/ieti :  655,  Ap.  103,  bonne 

152.  347.  399.  1309-  Ap.  88. 
♦Jonne,  conj.     i.  'cc/ien:  Jjonne  4,  9,  142, 

252,  409,  412,  512,  891,  1500,  Ap.  92. 

—  2.   t/ian:    bonne   924,    1089,   1178, 

1428,  1484,  1 519,  Ap.  49. 
-?Fra»c,  see  ge(yra?e. 
-fJraeu,  see  holmSracu. 


3rag,  f.,  time:  ns.  brah  107  ;  gs.  iSrage 

1598;  as.  brage  790,  A  P.  30. 
iffragnia'liim,  zAw.,  from  titne  to  time: 

1230. 
Srea,  f.,  trouble,  affliction  :  ns.  brea  1 166 ; 

as.  107. 
Sreagan,  Wl,  cast  down,  scourge,  sub- 
due :  pret.  3  sg.  breade  452,  1687  ;  pp. 

npm.  gebreade  391. 
'd'reaned,   f.,    affliction,    suffering:    dp. 

breanedum  1264. 
Sreat,   n.,   host,   viultitude:     ns.    breat 

870,  1095,  1269;  as.  1608;  is.  breate 

1636;  gp.  breata  376. 
Sreatian,  W2,   scourge,  control :  3   sg. 

breata^"  520.    See  geSreatian. 
Sreodian,  W2,  hesitate,  fear  :  pret.  3  sg. 

breodode  A  p.  18. 
Sridda,  adj.,  third:  asm.  biiddan  793  ; 

ism.  1 39 1. 
tJriness,  f.,  the  Trinity  :  gs.  brinnesse 

16S5. 
Sring,  see  gearing. 
Sringan,  3,  crorud,  throng:  pret.   3  pi. 

brungon    126,    1203.     See  set-,    ge-, 

inge'Sriiigan. 
(Ji'Ist,  Sriste,  adj.,  bold:  nsm.  brist  1 139^, 

1264,  biiste  237. 
Sriste,  adv.,   boldly  :    bnste   1652,  Ap. 

50. 
Snstlice,  adv.,  boldly,  rashly:   1185. 
3ritig,  num., ////;■/)' :    157. 
(Jrolitheard,  adj.     i.  strong  to  endure, 

patioit:  nsm.  brohtheard  1264;  asm. 

brohtheardne  1391  ;  npm.  brohthearde 

402.  —  2.  grievous,  hard  to  endtire  : 

nsm.  brohtheard  11 39. 
^ro^vian,    W2,    suffer,    endure:    3    pi. 

)>rowia"5    281  ;    pret.    3    sg.    J>r6wode 

1 6 ID,   Ap.   71  ;  pret.   2  pi.  browodon 

431  ;  pret.  3  pi.  browedon  414,  107 1  ; 

inf.  browian  80,  615,  1468,  browigan 

1367,  Ap.  80. 
<Jry,  num.,  three:  nm.  bry  801  ;  nf.  l<reo 

1 85;    gf.  breora  930;    df.  brim   148; 

am.  bry  245,  1414. 


230 


GLOSSARY 


'Sryni,  n.  i,  glory,  majesty:  ns.  J^rym 
3,  887,  Ap.  8;  ds.  Kymme  1685;  as. 
J>rym  344,  723,  998.  —  2.  multitude, 
power,  strength  :  ns.  J>rym  1260,  1536, 
1572;  ds.  Kymme  Ap.  18;  as.  Kym 
957.  See  eyne-,  heofon-,  hilde-, 
^vuldo^5ryIn. 

Srymftest,  2lA.].,  strong,  glorious  :  nsm. 
Kymfaest  323,  vsm.  479. 

SrymfuU,  adj.,  illustrious:  npm.  J>rym- 
fulle  363. 

Srymlic,  adj.,  ,^/w-Z(?//j- :  apm.  Jrymlice 

245- 

tJrynilioe,  adv.,  gloriously  :   547. 

(Jryiiiina,  m.,  strong  man,  warrior  :  np. 
Jjrymman  1 139. 

tfrynisittende,  adj.,  dwelling  in  glory: 
gsm.  hrymsittendes  417,  528;  npm. 
Jrymsittende  884. 

?Fry(y,f.,  strength, power:  ip.  Jn-y'Sum  376, 
1 148. 

tfry'flbearn,  n.,  glorious  son  :  as.  )iry5- 
bearn  494. 

9ry9cyning,  m.,  king  of  glory  :  as.  )>ryS- 
cining  436. 

SrySfiill,  3.6.].,  glorioles, poiuerful :  dpm. 
^ry^'fullum  1329. 

?Jry3\veorc,  n.,  glorious  zoork :  as. 
i)iy5\veorc  773. 

3u,  pron.,  thou  :  ns.  jt,,  85,  98,  105,  etc. ; 
J>u  68,  283,  943,  1 187,  etc.;  for  gs.  j^"^ 
tfio;  ds.  Se  275,  386,  483,  618,  etc., 
J^e  81,  83,  97,  102,  etc.;  as.  ^e  112, 
292,  534,  633,  etc.;  \>e;  99,  100,  loi, 
108,  etc. ;  np.  ge  256,  295,  337,  344, 
345'  346,  348,  429(2),  430.  676,  744, 
746,  1 179,  1 183,  1 197,  1333,  1558, 
1609,  1612;  dp.  eow  297,  338,  346, 
458,  758,  851,  970,  1176,  1343,  1344, 
161 1;  ap.  eow  336,  347,  884,  eowic 
259,  882. 

Ourfan,  PP,  need:  2  pi.  'Surfan  337. 
See  beSiirfaii. 

Tturh,  prep.  w.  ace.  i.  through,  by,  be- 
cause of,  in  accordance  with  (condition 
and  agency)  :  'Surh  66,  315,  633,  Ap. 


34,  68,  80,  hurh  34,  79,  109,  187,  218, 
436,  525,  585,  597,  611,  631,  635,642, 
651,  670,  688,  699,  725,  771,  827,  912, 
941,  965,  971,  975,' 1000,  1092,  1294, 
1336,  1348,  1418,  1440,  1442,  1444, 
1475'  '476,  1520,  1530,  1532,  1552, 
1580,  1586,  1616,  1629,  1635,  1651, 
1692,  Ap.  26,  29,  39,  53,  56,  60,  67, 
]>urg  Ap.  13,  63,  'Surg  Ap.  72.  —  2. 
through,  out  of  (place)  :  Jiurh  739, 
1276,  1279. 

Surhdrlfaii,  l,  pierce  through :  pp. 
Jjurhdrifen  1397. 

iJus,  adv.,  thus:  1411,  Ap.  85,  )'us  62, 
173'  354'  539' 686,  818,  17 16. 

Sfisend,  num.,  thousand:  ap.   Susends 

_59i-        _• 
Susendmieluin,    adv.,    i>i    thousands: 

Jnisendmalum  872. 
Syder,  adv.,  thither :  j'yder  282. 
'5y  lies,  conj.,  lest,  that  not:  |'y  laes  77, 

1 147,  he  Ises  1047. 
<yyldig,  see  geSyldig. 
Syn,  1,  suppress:  3  sg.  '5y'5  520.     See 

geSyn. 
^yncan,  Wl,  seem  :  3  sg.  Hnce'5  609, 

I'ynceS    472;  pret.    3  sg.  Jnihte    740, 

1 135  ;  pret.  3  pi.  )nihton  440. 
(Jyndeii,  see  Senden. 
3yssa,  see  mere'Syssa. 

U 

U  =  rttne  p|  Ap.  ioi  ;  for  meaning,  see 
Azotes. 

uhta,  m.,  dawn:  ds.  uhtan  235,  138S. 

unbrtece,  adj.,  imperishable :  asm.  un- 
brScne  Ap.  86. 

uncu'd',  adj.,  tttiknown, strange :  asn.  Ap. 
93;  npn.  Ap.  112;  gp.  unciiSra  178. 

under,  prep.,  under,  beneath,  in :  w. 
dat.  2,  93,  98,  505,  512,  545,  837,  1009, 
1204,  1402,  1493;  w.  ace.  128,  208, 
455'  1305'  1457.  1595'  1600;  case  in- 
determinable 46,  95,  141,  144,  420, 
832,  940,  1005,  1013,  1038,  1065, 
1071,  1253. 


GLOSSARY 


231 


undjTne,  adj.,  matii/cst,  famous  :  nsf. 

Ap.  42  ;  asf.  1480. 
uneaOe,  adj.,  difficult:  nsn.  205. 
unforcuiiJ,  adj .,  noble,  illustrious :  nsm. 

1263;  vsm.  475. 
unfyrn,  adv.,  soon  :   1371. 
unheore,    adj.,    harmful,    murderotis : 

asm.  unheorne  34. 
unh\vileij,   adj.,    eternal:    asf.    1154; 

asn.  Ap.  20,  120. 
unhyWig,  adj.,  luretclied:   npm.   unhy- 
-    Sge  107S. 
unlSd,  adj.,  loretched,  -wicked:  np.  un- 

Ijede  744;  gp.  unliedra  30,  142. 
unlytel,   adj.,    not  little,  great:    nsm. 

1237;    nsf.    1270;    nsn.   Ap.    8;  asn. 

876;  apm.  unlytle  1493. 
unm^ete,  adj.,  very  great:  nsn.   1219; 

asn.  653,  1682. 
unnan,  PP,   w.  gen.,  grant:  inf.  146, 

298.     See  geunnan. 
unriht,  n.,  wrong:  ds.  unrihte  1559. 
unrini,  n.,  great  number:  as.  704. 
uns«lig,  adj.,  tmhappy,  ill  fated:  npm. 

unsSlige  561. 
unscyldig,    adj.,    guiltless,    innocent : 

nsm.  1 137. 
unsla\v,  adj.,  tiot  slo7i',  /lastening:  asm. 

unslawne  171 1. 
unsyfre,  adj.,  dirty:  asn.  13 10. 
untweonde,  adj.,  not  doubting,  ufi/iesi- 

tnting:  asn.  1242. 
untyddre,  adj.,  <rtf«r«,^(f<7i/j-:  nsm.  1252. 
unweaxen,  adj .,  7tot fully  grown,  young : 

npm.  unweaxne  1627. 
up,  adv.,  up,  above:  792,  upp  443,  979, 

1 125,  1236,  1303,  1318,  1625. 
upengel,  m.,  heavenly  angel:  gp.   up- 

engla  226. 
upgemynd,  n.,  thought  of  heaven  :  as. 

1064. 
iipheofon,  m.,  heaven  above :  as.  798. 
uplio,  adj.,  upper,  celestial :  dsn.  upllcan 

119. 
uppe,  adv.,  above,  on  high  :  749. 
upAveg,  m.,  ascent :  as.  830. 


ure,  see  user. 

user,  pron.,  our:   nsn.  ure  454;    asm. 

userne  340,  ^7,  860;   asf.  usse  A?. 

1 16;  gpn.  ussa  1319. 
lit,  adv.,  out,  forth  :   15,  968,  1221,  1272, 
_  1279,  1390,  1523,  1537,  1577. 
utan,  adv.,  outside,  from  without :    28, 

871. 
utan,  interj.,  let  us:   1356,  utu  Ap.  115. 
u3\veota,  m.,  wise  man,  sage :  ns.  1 105. 

w 

W  =  rune  f  Ap.  100;  for  meaning,  see 

A'otes. 
wac,  adj.,  rueak,  yielding:  nsm.  212. 
■wacan,  see  on^vaean. 
waed,  n.,  wave,  flood:   np.  waedu  533, 

wadu  1545  ;  gp.  wasda  439 ;  ap.  wa'Su 

1457- 
^Ated,  f.,  sail:  np.  wjedo  375. 
Avadan,  6,  traverse,  go :  2  pi.  wadaiS  677  ; 

inf.  1 27 1.     ^^^  ge-,  onwadan. 
■wag,  m.,  tuall:  ds.  wage  714,  732.     See 

saelwag. 
W£eg,  m.,  wave :   ns.   533 ;    gs.  wjeges 

632,  weges  601;    as.  weg   1532;    is. 

wSge   1594;    np.  wSgas   373,   1545; 

gp.  wega  932  ;    ap.  wSgas  456,  748, 

1 589,  wegas  1 98. 
TV^gan,  see  a^vSgan. 
wSgfaru,  f.,  sea-'way,  ocean  :  ds.  wSg- 

faere  923. 
waegflota,  m.,  ship :     ds.     wiegfiotan 

487. 
■w»g(Jel,  n.,  ship:  ds.  waegbele  171 1. 
Avtelan,  see  bew«lan. 
walca,  m.,  wave:  np.  wakan  1524. 
waldend,  see  wealdend. 
•«"a»lgifre,  adj.,  eager  for  carnage :  nsm. 

372 ;  nsf.  1271. 
WfelgrSdlg,  adj.,  greedy  for  slaughter  : 

npm.  waelgraedige  135. 
■wfelgrim,  adj.,  griez'ous,  cruel:    apn. 

1415. 
wfelni,  see  wylm. 
^aelreaf,  n.,  body  :  as.  A?.  95. 


232 


GLOSSARY 


waelreow,  adj.,  mitrderous:   nsm.  Ap. 

69;  npm.  wjelreowe  121 1. 
■W'aelwang,  va..,  field  of  battle:  ds.  wel- 

wange  1226. 
■\vael-\vulf,  m.,  zvarrior :  np.  waehvulfas 

149. 
■wana,  indecl.  adj.,  lacking^  ?nim(s,  less  : 

1040. 
■\vang,  m.,  pla/ji,  field:  ds.  wonge  22; 

as.  wang  839.     See  beadu-,  deatJ-, 

nieotud-,    neorxna-,    ssel-,    sige-, 

stede-,  ■wael^vang. 
■W'angstede,  m.,  plaee  :  ds.  988. 
wanhal,  adj.,  szck:  np.  wanhale  580. 
wann,   adj.,   dark:    nsm.    11 69;     npn. 

wonn  837.     See  bruiiAvann. 
■wansselig,  adj.,  iniblest:  npm.  wansa- 

lige  963. 
Aviepen,  n.,  iveapon  :  gs.  wSpnes  1 180  ; 

ap.    wffipen    1145;     gp.    wSpna    71; 

dp.    wspnum    1291  ;     ip.    1069,   Ap. 

69. 
wtepenhete,  m.,  armed  hostility  1  battle  : 

as.  Ap.  So. 
waer,  n.,  sea  :  is.  wsere  269,  4S7. 
wSr,  f.      I.   faith:     as.   wiere    213. — 

2.  protection:  as.  wiere  824;  is.  535, 

988.     See  freotJu-wjer. 
Avierfsest,    adj.,   faithful:    nsm.    416, 

1310;  asm.  wjerfasstne  1273. 
wserleas,  zd].,  faithless:  gp.  wSrleasra 

1069. 
wierloga,   m.,   traitor:    ns.   1297;    ds. 

■wierlogan  613;  np.  71,  108. 
\varo3,    m.,    shore :     ds.   waro'Se    263, 

waru'Se  236,  240 ;  gp.  waro'Sa  306. 
waroSfaroS,  m.,  surf:  gp.  waro'Sfaru'Sa 

197. 
-\varu,  j^^biirgwaru,  oeaster-,  eorS-, 

Sigelware. 
waruiSgewinn,  n.,  surf:  as.  439. 
Avaetan,  see  gewaetan. 
Avaeter,  n.,  ivater:  ns.  333;  gs.  waeteres 

22,  452,  1260,  1536;  ds.  waetere  587, 

waettre  953;  as.  waiter  201,  222,  253, 

1507;  np.  1553,  1572. 


AA'aeterbroga,  m.,  water-terror :  as.  wae- 

terbrogan  197,  456. 
AA'aeteregesa,  m.,  water-terror  :  ns.  435, 

waeteregsa  375. 
AA'seterflod,  xn.,  flood:  np.  wasterflodas 

503- 

A\'a(y,  i.,  going,  journey  :  ds.  waSe  593. 

AA'aSu,  see  Avaed. 

AvaSunia,  xa.., flood :  gs.  wa'Suman  1 280. 

AA'ea,  m.,  woe,  lat?ientation :  is.  wean 
675. 

-AAealc,  see  geAvealc. 

Aveald,  conj.,  with  hii,  however:   1355. 

-Aveald,  see  ge-,  aehtgcAveald. 

AA^ealda,  see  ealAAealda. 

AA-ealdan,  R,  w.  gen.,  rule:  3  sg. 
wealde'5  1603,  1685.    ^^^  geAvealdan. 

AA'ealdend,  m.,  ruler,  Lord:  ns.  225, 
248,  325,  604,  799,  waldend  388,  702, 
855;  gs.  wealdendes  576;  as.  wal- 
dend 213,   539,    1056;    vs.   193,   920, 

1451- 
Aveall,  m.,  wall:  ds.  wealle   726,  736, 

1492;  np.  weallas  843;  ap.  1553.    See 

burhAveall. 
Av^eallan,   R.     i.  floza,   well  out,  flow 

forth  :  3  pi.  wealla^  1405 ;  pret.  3  sg. 

weoll  1240,  1275,  1280, 1546;  ptc.  nsn. 

weallende    1574;    inf.    1503.  —  2.    be 

agitated,    excited:    pret.    3    sg.    weoll 

769;  ptc.  nsm.  weallende  1709.     See 

aAA'eallan. 
Aveallgeat,  n.,  7uall-gate :  dp.  weallgea- 

tum  1203. 
AA'eard,  m.,   ward,  guardian:    ns.   227, 

596,  601,  632,  987  ;  as.  52,  56;  vs.  82, 

1406.     See    burh-,    helm-,    herig-, 

lid-,  scipAA'eard. 
-Aveard,  see  and-,  InnaiiAAeard. 
AA'eardigan,  W2,  guard,  inhabit :   3  pi. 

weardiga'5  176;  inf.  599. 
-\\eatAQfin,n.,  sign  of  grief :  ns.  11 19. 
AA'eaxaii,  6,  groio,  increase :  pret.  3  sg. 

weox    568,    1536,    1677;    pret.    3    pi. 

weoxon  373,  1545. 
Aveaxen,  see  unAveaxen. 


GLOSSARY 


233 


webbian,  Wa,  u<eave :  pret.  3  sg.  web- 
bade  672. 

iveccoan,  Wl,  awaken :  inf.  850.  See 
iiweccan. 

Avoc'f>;an,  see  a^vecgan. 

^ved<l,  i\.,  fromise:  is.  wedde  163 1. 

weder,  n.  i.  sky:  gs.  wederes  837. — 
2.  air,  breeze:  np.  1256. 

Avederburg,  f.,  pleasant  city :  as. 
I697. 

•\vedercandel,  f.,  light  of  heaven,  sun  : 
■     ns.  372. 

weg,  m.,  way,  road:  as.  170,  191,  252, 
1 1 73,  1680,  Ap.  31  ;  np.  wegas  1234; 
gp.  wega  65.  See  bietS-,  feor-,  fold-, 
grund-,  holm-,  iipweg. 

■\vegan,  5,  bear,  endure,  experience: 
pret.  3  pi.  wegan  Ap.  87. 

wel,  adj.,  -well:  212,  well  8S5. 

wela,  m.,  riches,  prosperity :  gs.  welan 
1 1 59;  as.  302,  318;  ip.  welum  755. 
See  aht-,  ar-,  bold-,  ead-,  lifwela. 

^vellan,  see  a^vellan. 

welm,  see  wj'lm. 

Avel^vaiig,  see  AvselTtang. 

Avemau,  Wl.  i.  sound,  be  heard:  pret. 
3  sg.  wemde  740.  —  2.  proclaim,  an- 
nounce :  pret.  1  sg.  wemde  1480. 

Avemman,  see  geAveinmed. 

wen,  f.,  hope,  expectation :  ns.  1074 ; 
dp.  wenum  1087. 

-wena,  see  orAvena. 

Avenan,  Wl,  w.  gen.,  expect:  pret.  J  sg. 
wende  377  ;  pret.  3  pi.  wendan   1072, 

1597-    . 
•wendan,  Wl,  change,  turn:   inf.    587. 

See  onAAcndan. 
-wende,  see  leofAvende. 
Avenian,  Wl,  direct,  guide:  pret.  3  sg. 

wenede  1682. 
Aveorc,  n.      i.  work,  fabric:  as.  799. — 

2.  occupation:     is.   weorce     1365. — 

3.  pain,  affliction:  ns.  1 659;  gs. 
weorces  1277;  as.  weorc  Ap.  80. 
See  ellen-,  fruni-,  f^rn-,  go-,  guiJ-, 
i5ryi5-,  AAiiudorAAeorc. 


Aveonn,  m.,  worm  :  ns.  769 ;  dp.  weor- 
mum  A  p.  95. 

Aveorn,  see  AA^orn. 

AA'eorod,  n.,  host,  throng:  ns.  weorud 
761,  werod  1219;  gs.  weorodes  1039, 
1271,  1592;  ds.  weorode  1659;  as. 
weorod  1046,  1682;  is.  weorode  1706, 
weorude  1390;  np.  wei-od  1069;  gp. 
weoroda  870,  1206,  141 5,  weoruda 
62,  173,  3S8,  435,  727,  1282,  1663; 
dp.  weorodum  564,  736,  Ap.  55, 
weorudum  Ap.  61. 

AACorp,  see  ge-,  AA'intergeAA'eorp. 

AACorpan,  see  ymbAveorpan. 

Aveortfan,  3.     i.  be,  become:  2  sg.  wyr- 
■Sest  483 ;  3  sg.  weoi^cS  1383,  wyrSe'S 
219,   972;    pret.    2    sg.  wur'de    1408 
pret.  3   sg.  wear's  90,   92,  350,  369, 
467,   524,   566,   770,  910,  960,    1085 
1090,    1 1 06,    1 1 49,   1386,   1529,   1550, 
1569,  1595,  1702,  Ap.  42,  52,  64,  82 
pret.  3  pi.  wurdon  376,  447,  453,  1339 
1583;  opt.  pres.  2   sg.  weorSe   276 
opt.  pres.  3  sg.  -ft-yr^e  208  ;  opt.  pret 
3  sg.  wurde  156,   io66^   1228,   1423 
opt.  pret.  3  pi.  wurdan   1619;  imper, 
2  sg.  weor^  902;  inf.  weorfian    137 
211,  758,  890,  953,  weorhan  204,  948 
wyr^an     215,     437,    wyrj^an     182. — 
2.   befall,  happen  :  pret.  3  sg.  wear^ 
1343,  1526,  Ap.  78.     See  geAveor?fan. 

AA'eortJian,  W2,  honor:  pret.  2  sg. 
wyr^odest  551 ;  pret.  3  sg.  weor'Sode 
755,  weorSade  1268,  wyrSode  55, 
wyrSude  538 ;  pret.  3  pi.  weorSodon 
806,  weorJSadon  1055,  weorXedon 
1715  ;  inf.  Ap.  48.     See  geAAeorcHan. 

weorJfung,  see  dom-,  sinrAAeor'Siing. 

AAeota,  see  Avita. 

AAepan,  R.  i.  cry  out,  weep:  pret.  3 
sg.  weop  1400;  ptc.  nsm.  wepende 
59.  —  2.  beweep,  he  griez'ed  at :  imper. 
2  sg.  wep  1 43 1. 

Aver,  m.,  man :  ns.  168,  1395  ;  gs. 
weres  Ap.  27;  as.  wer  1171,  1648; 
np.  weras  963,  1536,   1637,  1666;  gp. 


234 


GLOSSARY 


wera  35,  135,  620,  650,  705,  730,  787, 
1 145,  1 1 55,  1200,  1507,  1554,  1597; 
dp.  werum  22,  153,  558,  Ap.  106;  ap. 
weras  428. 

^\'ergan,  see  a^'ergan. 

werian,  Wi,  ward  off,  defend:  pret. 
3  sg.  werede  743,  1053. 

"werig,  adj.  i.  weary,  wretched:  nsn 
1278;  npm.  werige  580,  593;  dpm 
weregum  59. — 2.  evil,  cursed:  gs 
weriges  11 69;  np.  werige  615;  dp 
werigum  86,  615.    .Sifi?  lid-,  saewerig, 

werigfertJ,  adj.,  sad  at  heart:  nsm 
1400. 

werigmod,  adj.,  tueary  in  spirit:  nsm 
1366. 

■wer3eod,  f.,  people,  nation :  gs.  wer- 
^eode  855  ;  ds.  werj^eode  137,  573 
ap.  werj'eoda  543,  Ap.  15. 

Tvesan,  anv.,  be,  exist:  i  sg.  eom  636. 
beo  72;  2  sg.  eart  505,  527,  1188 
1291,   1508;  3  sg.  is   102,    113,    120 

177,  2>^Z.  324.  393.  394.  4-0,  422,  424 
492,  496,  501,  526,  542,  544,  549,  682 
717,  719,  724,  751,  758,  906,  907,  940; 
951,  979,  1165,  1166,  1173,  1199, 1317 
1372,  1425,  1427,  1434,  1481,  1489 
1562,  1563,  1565,  1602,  1605,  161 1 
1664,  1717,  1718,  1722,  Ap.  14,  118 
(w.  neg.)  nis  107,  205,  12 10,  1432  ;  biS 
185,  275,  320,  637,  885,  889,  935,  1056, 
"53'  1384.  1567.  1693,  Ap.  113;  I  pi 
synd  323 ;  syndon  264 ;  bio5  408 
2  pi.  sint  348  ;  synd  744 ;  syndon  344 
676  ;  3  pi.  sint  1404,  1425  ;  synt  198 
391;  synd  1365;  sindon  201,  1369 
Ap.  112;  syndon  686,  689,  720,  973 
pret.  I  sg.  wass  64,  489,  949 ;  pret 
2  sg.  wjere  898;  pret.  3  sg.  wses  11 
19,  25,  29,  36,  40,  41,  57,  122,  147 
158,  161,  169,  230,  231,  232,  239,  248 
262,  385,  594,  665,  667,  684,  700,  854 
869,    874,    878,    887,    892,   967,   981 

lOIO,  IOI3,  IO18,  1097,  1105,  TII2 
II16,  III9,  II38,  II55,  I20I,  1223 
1225,  1238,  1242,  1245,  1250,  1251 


1253,  1274,  1302,  1307,  1322,  1382, 

1394.  139s.  1476,  1532,  1534.  1537. 
1542,  1547,  1554,  1571,  1573,  1579, 

1  581  (2),  1584,  1622,  1627,  1643,  1659, 

1689,  1708,  Ap.  25,  37,  41,  48,  57,  66, 
106  ;  (w.  neg.)  nss  21,  380,  662,  888, 
1 1 13,  1 162,  1471,  1522,  Ap.  33;  pret. 
3  pi.  wieron  7,  46,  250,  579,  791,  1016, 
1041,  1114,  1259,  1334,  1695,  Ap.  4; 
(w.  neg.)  naron  Ap.  75  ;  opt.  2  sg:  sie 
417;  opt.3sg.  70,  1439,  i45i,Ap.  107; 
opt.  3  pi.  slen'734;  pret.  opt.  3  sg. 
wSre  563,  765,  799,  1 178;  imp.  2  sg. 
beo  98,  214;  was  540,  914,  959;  imp. 

2  pi.  beo'5  1609. 

■weste,  adj.,  desolate:  asn.  11 59. 

Tvestenn,  n.,  desert:  ds.  westenne  699. 

■wex,  n.,  wax:  ds.  wexe  1145. 

wic,  in.,  habitation:  as.  131,  1310;  np. 
Ap.  112.     ^^^  eardwic. 

wicg,  n.,  horse:  dp.  wicgum  1095. 

wid,  adj.  I.  broad,  wide:  asm.  wldne 
283.-2.  w.  feorh,  eaXdor,  =  for- 
ever: dsn.  widan  106,  810,  938,  1452, 
1721  ;  asn.  1383. 

■wide,  adv.,  widely,  far  and  wide  :  333, 
576,  1 1 19,  1234,  1554,  1637,  Ap.  2,  6, 
15,42. 

"widfaeSme,  adj.,  broad-bosomed :  nsm. 
533  ;  asn.  240. 

■widferende,  adj.,  far-traveling:  np. 
279. 

w\d\vinA,-n..,  earth,  broad  earth:  as.  198. 

^vidlast,  m.,  far  journey  :  ap.  widlastas 
677. 

^vidrynig,  2.d]. ,  far-fo'wing :  asn.  1507. 

^^^f,   n.,    woman:    np.    1666;  gp.    wifa 

1039.  1597- 
\^^g,  m.,  idol :  as.  Ap.  48. 
Avig,    n.,    war,    battle :  gs.    wiges    839, 

1 183,  1226,  1355,  Ap.  74. 
wiga,  m.,  warrior:  as.  wigan  1711. 
\vigend,  m.,  warrior:  np.  1053,   1203; 

gp.    wigendra    506,    887,    896,    1450, 

1572,  1608,  1672,  wiggendra  1095  ;  ap. 

vvigend  S50,  1297. 


GLOSSARY 


235 


wiht,  fn.,  a7(i;-/i(:    is.  wihte  1522,  1661. 
.SVt-  eall-,  owilit. 

■\\  ilia,   m.,    w///,    desire :    ns.    70 ;    gs. 

willan   65,    106;  ds.    1401,    1641  ;  as. 

304,  356;  ip.  willum  {blissfully)  810. 
Avillaii,  anv.,  will.,  wis/i,  desire:   i   sg. 

wille  84,   347,  458,    474,    648,    1412; 

2  sg.  wilt  288  ;    1  pi.  vvillaS  292  ;  3  pi. 

178,  298;  pret.  I  sg.  vvolde  271,  478, 

483,    970 ;  pret.    2    sg.    woldest    203, 

woldes  308;  pret.  3  sg.    wolde    146, 
'894,    1109,    1130,    1655,    1658,    1660, 

1699,  ^^-  47  '  W^^-  ^  P^-  woldon  1424  ; 

pret.  3  pi.  129,  402,  803,  1072,  1 141, 

1392,    1460,    1538,    1639;   opt.  2   sg. 

wille  75,  342,  1286. 
■wUlgedryht,  i.,  faithful  band :  as.  914. 
Avillgeofa,  m.,  gracious  dispenser :  as. 

wilgeofan  62  ;  vs.  willgeofa  1282. 
Avilnian,  Wa,  w.  gen.,  desire  :  2  sg.  wil- 

nast    283;  pret.  3    sg.  wilnode  918; 

pret.  3  pi.  wilnedon  448;  inf.  11 28. 
wilsTS,  m.,  pleasani  journey,  as.  1046. 
AvilSegu,  f.,  desired  feast:   ds.  wil))ege 

153- 
win,  n.,  7i:'/«<' :  as.  587.      [Lat.  vinuni.'] 
AvTnbiirg,  f.,  city  of  festivity  :  as.  1637  ; 

ds.  winbyrig  1672. 
^viIlcl,  m.,  wind:  ns.  269,  503;  np.  win- 
das  373;  ap.  452,  456. 
wiiidan,  3,    witid,  gyrate:  pret.  3    sg. 

wand  372.     See  be-,  on^vindan. 
w'indig,  adj.,  windy :  npm.  windige  S43. 
"wine,    m.,  friend:  as.    1464;  vs.    307, 

1431  ;  np.  winas  198. 
A^incdryhten,  xa.,  friendly  lord:  as.  9 1 9. 
Avine'Soarfende,    adj.,    in    need  of  a 

friend:  nsm.  winehearfende  300. 
^'iiin,  see  ge-,  garge-,  guSge-,  hand- 

gcAvinn. 
-Avinna,  see  ge^^■inna. 
Aviiinan,  3,  endure,   suffer  :  pret.   2  sg. 

wunne  1380. 
w\\\riVQiM\,  w.,  7oine-/tall :  as.  1 1  59. 
winter,  m.,  winter,  i.e.  year:  dp.  win- 

trum  506. 


Avintorceald,   adj.,    wintry   cold:    asf. 

wintercealdan  1265. 
■\villt^'I•go^v<^rp,    n.,   wi?iter  storm :  ip. 

wiatergeworpum  1256. 
Avir,  m.,  wire,  bracelet:  gp.  wira  302. 
AVIS,    adj.,    wise:  nsm.    316,   470,    919, 

1497,  wisa  843;  asm.  552;  vsm.  wis 

624  ;  comp.  asm.  wTsran  474. 
■wisdom,  m.,  wisdom:  ns.  569,    1678; 

gs.  wisdomes  645 ;  as.  wisdom  650. 
Avisfaest,    adj.,    wise:    asm.   wisfoestne 

1648;  gp.  wisfaestra  1167. 
■wisian,  W2.    i.  trans,  w.  ace.  anddat., 

guide,  direct:  pret.  3  sg.  wisode  381, 

Ap.  9 ;  opt.  2  sg.  wisige  488  ;  inf.  1099. 

—  2.  intrans.,  lead  or  indicate  the  way : 
pret.  3  sg.  wisode  985. 

wislic,  adj.,  wise:  asn.  509. 

Avist,  i.,fqod:  ns^^  51  ;  ds.  wiste  153  ;  as. 

302,  312,   318,    593,    1074,  wist  388. 

See  ondwist. 
wAt,  see  edwitspraec,  ge-,  Inwit. 
■«'ita,  see  fyrn-wita,  u^Aveota. 
Avitan,  PP,   know:   i  sg.  wat   183,  199. 

433,  498,   814,   904,  941  ;   2   sg.   wast 

932,    waest    1 1 86,    12S2;  pret.    3   sg. 

wiste  261  ;  opt.  i   sg.  wite  603 ;  opt. 

3  sg.  546 ;  w.  neg.,  i  sg.  nat  Ap.  hi; 

2  pi.   nyton   745 ;    pret.  3  pi.  nyston 

1088. 
AAitan,  see  ge-,  o3\A'Ttan. 
\vitc,  n., punishment,  torture :  ng.  889; 

np.  witu  1365  ;  gp.  wita  1470,  1490, 

1618;  dp.  witum  1299;  ap.  witu  1052, 

1415,  161 1  ;  ip.  witum  580,  121 1,  1361, 

1631. 
witebend,  mf.,  torture-bonds :  ip.  wite- 

bendum  108,  1561. 
witian,  W2,  order,  appoint,  decree :  pp. 

witod  889,  weotod  951,  weotud  1366, 

asf.  weotude  1074. 
Avitig,  adj.,  wise:  nsm.  743. 
AA'itiga,  xa.., prophet:  np.  witigan  801. 
AA'iiS,  prep.  w.  dat.  and  ace.     i.  w.  dat., 

against:  425,   560,   1 2 10,  1 291,  1359. 

—  2.  postpositive,  w.  dat.,  in  reply  to : 


2^6 


GLOSSARY 


299.  —  3.  w.  dat.,/ro;«  (separation) : 
Ap.  37,83.  —  4.  w.  diSX.^frotn  (source) : 
275.  —  5.  w.  ace,  to,  towards:  213, 
389(?),  921,  1 188,  1387,  1495. 

M'itferfeohtend,  m.,  enemy,  as.  11 83. 
•w'i?Jerhyogende,.adj.,  hostile,  opposing: 

nsm.  1 1 72;  npm.  1072. 
wi<Jerhydig,  adj.,  hostile:  nsm.  675. 
ivitJermede,  adj.,  hostile:  nsm.  wiSer- 

meda  1 195. 
w^iSstaiidau,  6,  w.  dat.   oppose,  defeat: 

pret.  3  sg.  wi&tod  167. 
^^'i93ing■ian,    W2,    w.  dat.,   talk  with, 

bargain  with  :  pret.  3  sg.  wi'Shingode 

263,  306,  632. 
wlite,    m.,     appearance,     beauty :     ns. 

1 4  7 1 .     See  maeg^vlite. 
^vliteleas,  adj.,  ugly:  ns.  1169. 
-tvlitig',  adj., /<z/r,  beautiful:  nsm.  870; 

nsf.  732,  wlitige   (weak)   1437;  npm. 

wlitige  ^Gy 
•wlitige,  2id\'.,  fairly,  beautifully:   716, 

1721. 
v.litigian,  see  gcAvlitigian. 
■wloh,  f.,/;v>;^^:  ns.  1471. 
>volcen,  n.,  cloud,  sky :  dp.  wolcnum  93, 

837 ;  ip-  1046. 

Avoina,  m.,  tumult,  terror :  as.  woman 
1355.     See  diPgi-ed-,  hildewoina. 

■\voiig,  see  Avang. 

wop,  m.,  lamentation,  7veeping :  ns. 
1 155,  1554,  1666;  gs.  wopes  127S. 

■word,  n.,  word,  speech  :  ns.  569,  1678; 
gs.  wordes  261,  474,  1648;  as.  word 
416,  650,  732,  801,  S55,  896,  1 172, 
1299,  1358,  1361,  1381,  1400,  1418, 
1430,  1497,  1663,  Ap.  53  ;  is.  worde 
193,  210,  304,  418,  584,  716,  727,  743, 
778,  S50,  913,  1019,  1206,  1280,  1450; 
gp.  worda  509,  904,  923,  1439;  dp. 
wordum  88,  761,  1026,  1167,  1219, 
1512,  Ap.   106;   ip.  13,  55,  62,   173, 

300,  354,  428,  539,  596,  624,  630,  740, 
755,  806,  812,  919,  963,  1053,  1195, 
1200,  1268,  1464,  1480,  1 510,  1608. 
See  hosp-,  husc-,  leotJword. 


■wordo\\'ide,    m.,    speech :    dp.    word- 

cwidum  552,  1447. 
■wordhleoSor,  n.,  speech,  speaking:  ns. 

708  ;  gs.  wordhleoSres  93. 
■wordhord,  n.,  treasury  of  words :  as. 

316,  601. 
W'ordlatu,    f.,    delay    in    obeying:   ns. 

1522. 
■«-ordla?Ju,    f.,    speech,    eloquefice:    as. 

wordljELie  635. 
■wordloca,  m.,  treasury  of  words  :  as. 

wordlocan  470. 
worn,  m.,  multitude,  number:  as.  812, 

904,  weom  677  ;  gp.  weoma  1490. 
-Avorp,  see  winterge^orp. 
woruld,  f.    I.  world,  earth  :  ds.  worulde 

304,  356,  948,    Ap.   112;    as.  woruld 

576.  —  2.  mankind:  ds.  worulde  509. 

— ^3.    in    Avoruld    wovvX^a,  —  for- 
ever :  as.,  gp.  1 686. 
Avoruldsped,  f.,  worldly  prosperity  :  as. 

woruldspede  31 8. 
woruldAvunigende,  adj.,  dwelling  on 

earth  :  np.  A  P.  100. 
wo3,  f.,   sound,  voice,  song:   as.   wo'Se 

675- 
■wraec,    n.,   exile,    misery :   gs.    wrasces 

13S3;  as.  wrasc  1380. 
•wraecsiiff,  m.,  exile,  misery  :  ns.  8S9 ;  as. 

1358,  1431- 
wracu,  f.,  punishment:  as.  wraece  615. 
WTasen,  see  fetor-,  in^^itwrasen. 

wrtetlic,    adj.      i.    skillful,    beautiful: 

asf.wTEetllce  712.  —  2.  wondrotcs:  nsm. 

wrietlic  740 ;  nsf.  93';  ipn.  wraetlicum 

630,  1200. 
■wraJJ,  adj.,  angry:    nsm.    1297;   dsm. 

wra'Sum  613;  gp.  wra"5ra  1273,  1317. 
wrecan,   5.     i.    avenge:   inf.    11 80. — 

2.  utter,  send  f 07-th  :  pp.  wrecen  1548. 

See  beAvrecan. 
■«Te(5ian,    Wl,    support:    pret.    3    sg. 

wreSede  523. 
wridian,    Wa,  groic,  flourish  :    3    sg. 

wridaiS    635 ;     pret.    3    sg.   wridode 

767. 


GLOSSARY 


23; 


writan,  1,  liirite :  pret.  3  sg.  wrat  1510  ; 
inf.  13.     Sfc  a^vritan. 

^\'roht,  f.,  blame,  calumny:  as.  672. 

wrohtsmi'd,  m.,  evil-doer :  dp.  wroht- 
smi'Sum  86. 

^vu(;lubat,  m.,  loooden  ship  :  ds.  wudu- 
bate  905. 

Avuldor,  n.,  glory,  heavenly  glory, 
heaven:  ns.  171,  555,854,  1317,  1452, 
1463  ;  gs.  wuldres  55,  70,  88,  193,  210, 
354.  535'  539.  596,  708,  726,  758,  806, 
S70,  8S7,  913,  1026,  1056,  1268,  1380, 
1510,  1611,  1631,  1661,  1678,  1715, 
Ap.  27,  48,  61,  87,  wuldras  523;  ds. 
vvuldre  356,  948,  1682,  1721  ;  is.  543, 
669,  161 8;  vs.  wuldor  141 1,  wuldur 
899. 

wuldoroynlng,  m.,  king  of  glory :  gs. 
wuldorcyninges  418,  801,  1430,  1447; 
as.  wuldorcining  Ap.  74. 

^Vl^ldo^gesteald,  n.,  heavenly  habita- 
tion: gp.  wuldorgestealda  1686. 

wuldorgifu,  f.,  glorious  gift :  ip.  wul- 
dorgifum  938. 

wuldorspedig,  adj.,  glorious:  apm. 
wuldorspedige  428. 

■wuldortorht,  adj.,  gloriously  bright: 
nsn.  1457. 

■\vuldor3rym,  m.,  heavenly  glory  :  gs. 
wuldorKymmes  325,  702. 

WTilf,  see  ^\'ael\^'ulf. 

■\vund,  f.,  wound:  ns.  1473;  ^^P-  wun- 
dum  953,  1278. 

wund,  adj.,  ivounded,  crippled:  nsm. 
Ap.  61  ;  npm.  wunde  407. 

^vundo^,  n.,  wonder,  miracle:  ns.  736 
ds.  wundre  620 ;  as.  wundor  620,  730 
gp.  wundra  564,  569,  584,  699,  812 
dp.  wundrum  =  adv.  wondrous  1492, 
1497;  ap.  wundor  604,  712. 

■wiindorcraeft,  m.,  wotidrous  power: 
is.  wundorcraefte  13,  645,  Ap.  55. 

\vundorweore,  n.,  miracle :  gp.  wun- 
dons-orca  705. 

^vunian,  W2.  i.  occupy,  dioell  in:  pret. 
3  pi.  wunedon  131  ;  imper.  2  sg.  wuna 


1672;  inf.  1310,  1697.  —  2.  support, 
statid  by:  i  sg.  wunige  99,  12 18. — 
3.  remain,  stand,  abide:  3  pi.  wuniaS 
loi;  pret.  3  sg.  wunode  163,  1262; 
pret.  3  pi.  wunedon  868,  1158;  opt. 
pres.  3  sg.  wunige  945  ;  inf.  wunigean 
802,  Ap.  95.     See  geivunian. 

wunigende,  see  woruld\vuiiIgende. 

■\vuiin,  see  wynn. 

wurd,  see  wyrd. 

■wylm,  m.,  surge,  billow  :  as.  367,  863  ; 
dp.  waslmum  452.  See  flod-,  heaO'o-, 
streain\vylin. 

wynn,  f.  i.  Joy:  ns.  887,  11 13,  1162; 
ip.  wynnum  635,  winnum  1019. — 
2.  choice,  best  (w.  gen.  pi.) :  ns.  1223  ; 
as.  wunn  17 13. 

wyrcan,  Wl,  make,  fashion :  pret.  3  sg. 
worhte  523,  1479.     See  gewyrcan. 

wyrd,  f.  I.  fate:  ns.  613,  1561. — 
2.  event,  happening:  ns.  758,  wurd 
Ap.  42;  as.  wyrd  1480;  gp.  wyrda 
630,  1056.     See  forw^Td. 

\vyrht,  see  gewyrht. 

w^j^rhta,  m.,  Creator:  ns.  325,  702.  See 
gewyrhta. 

wyrresta,  see  yfel. 

wyrSian,  see  weorSian. 

AVjTtJmynd,  fn.,  honor :  ip.  wyr^myn- 
dum  905. 


Y  =  rujie  Its  Ap.  103  ;  for  meaning,  see 

iVotes. 
yfel,  n.,  evil:  ns.  695;  gs.  yfles  1382; 

gp.  yfela  131 2. 
yfel,  adj.,  bad,  evil:  sup.  asm.  wyrrestan 

86;  sup.  npm.  1592. 
ylde,  mpl.,  men  :  gp.  ylda  182,  1555. 
ylding,  f.,  delay  :  ns.  215. 
jTnb,  prep.  w.  ace.     i.   round,  about: 

872,  1233,  1247,  ymbe  841,871,  1577. 

—  2.  after,   after   ez'ery   (temporal) : 

157.  —  3 .  concerning :    il  1 7 . 
ymbscinan,  1,  shine  about:  pret.  3  sg. 

ymbscan  1017. 


238 


GLOSSARY 


yInb^veo^pan,  3,  surround:  pret.  3  pi. 

ymbwurpon  1553. 
yppan,  see  geyppan. 

yppe,  adj.,  manifest,  revealed:  nsn.  Ar. 

64. 
yrmSu,  f.,  distress,  a^iction:  as.  1384, 

yrmSo  1190,  erm'Su  11 62;  gp.  yrmj'a 

970;  dp.  yrm^um  163. 
yrre,  adj.,  angry:   asm.  yme  Ap.  68; 

npm.  eorre  47,  1076. 
yst,  f .,  tempest :  ns.  1 586. 
y3,  f.,  wave:   ns.  443;    as.  y15e   1591  ; 

gp.  y-5a  259,  352,  368,  466,  823,  863; 


dp.  y«um4Si,5i4,  1713;  ap.y5a5i9; 

ip.  ySum  1240,  1275,  ^S4^-     ^^^  aryiJ. 
yjfbord,  n.,  ship:  as.  298. 
ySfaru,  i.,  flood:  ds.  y-Sfare  900. 
ytffynde,  adj.,  easy  to  find:  nsn.  1547. 
yiSlad,  f.,  ocean :  ds.  pelade  499. 
^tflid,  n.,  ship :  ds.  ySlide  278  ;  as.  ySlid 

445- 
ywan,  Wi,  show:  pp.  ywed  972.     See 
eet-,  oSywan. 


.TE 


^TOKN  ^YoAN  DEPT. 

„HEWAU5  O""^'^^  ,^„p«l  below,  or 
Renewed  booksa -IT"^^^ 


D 


,S.&T.^"» 


Sf^eS-iMSTcu 


Uoiverswy 


O 


^' 


^il^^^^^^y 


i-jj  tj  j,i<illiilm 


ll!!tl 


1 1 
'ill    li 


ill  I 

.,,,J|  ii 


I  Hti 


iilHiPil 
1  i  1 1 1 1 


ill 


liJii; 


m 


!    ii 


I '  ii  1 

)  iiiiii 


i    {i 


i 


IN 


ii]'  :1V 


m 

ii!i: 


liilliliiiiliil-      1 


^^: 


m 


'•'-iiii'ii 


iiiiiij! 


Mm 


ill 


mmWi  .ill..'; 


\arm 


in 


